JP6967828B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

There are known gaming machines such as pachinko machines that allow a game ball to flow down to play a game and perform various effects according to the lottery result.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 10-024148

However, the same gaming machines as the conventional ones lacked in fun, and it was difficult to further improve the gaming interest.

The present invention has been made in view of such circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of further improving the gaming interest by performing a new aspect of production.

The present invention
The game area where the game medium is driven by the operation of the player,
A game panel in which the game area is provided on the front side, and
An effect display means having a display panel arranged behind the game panel and capable of displaying a predetermined display from a predetermined opening formed in the game panel.
A start port that is placed at a predetermined position in the game area and is capable of accepting a game medium, and a start port.
A lottery means for drawing a win according to the acceptance of the game medium to the starting port, and
A holding means for holding the lottery by the lottery means until a predetermined time, and
An out-of-game area hold display means that is provided outside the game area and displays a hold display that causes the player to recognize the lottery held by the hold means.
An effect control means for controlling the effect related to the lottery, and
In a gaming machine provided with a movable body arranged between the gaming panel and the effect display means and capable of operating so as to cover at least a part of the effect display means.
The effect control means is
A first hold display means that causes the player to recognize the lottery held by the hold means and displays a first hold display that can suggest the degree of expectation for the result of the lottery.
In addition to the first hold display, the second hold display means for displaying the second hold display for the player to recognize the lottery held by the hold means is provided.
Both the first hold display means and the second hold display means are provided in the game area.
The first hold display may be difficult to see due to the movement of the movable body, but the second hold display may not be difficult to see due to the movement of the movable body.
The second hold display is displayed in a size different from that of the first hold display in a place where the first hold display is not displayed, and the first hold display is displayed by the operation of the movable body. Even if it is difficult to see, the number of lottery held in the holding means can be notified to the player by the second holding display.
Further, the movable body can be moved from the standby position to the effect position.
The first hold display means is provided in the display area of a predetermined display device so as to overlap the movable body at the effect position in the game area, while the first hold display means is provided in the display area of the predetermined display device.
The second hold display means is provided at a predetermined position in front of the movable body, outside the display area of the display device in which the first hold display is displayed, in the game area.
The first hold display can be made difficult to see by the movable body when the movable body is in the standby position, and can be made difficult to be visually recognized by the movable body when the movable body is in the effect position. ,
The second hold display is not made difficult to see by the movable body when the movable body is in either the standby position or the effect position.
The standby position is a position below the first hold display means.
The movable body is made to be able to overlap with the first hold display by moving up from the standby position to the effect position, and a part of the movable body that hides the first hold display is in the standby position. From a certain time, a part of the movable body became visible,
When the movable body is moved to the effect position when the plurality of the first hold displays are displayed, the movable body is related to the specific first hold display among the plurality of the first hold displays. Can be displayed in different display modes before moving to the effect position and after the movable body moves from the effect position to the standby position, but a specific first hold among the plurality of first hold displays. The first hold display other than the display is characterized in that the movable body is displayed in the same display mode before moving to the effect position and after the movable body moves from the effect position to the standby position. do.

INDUSTRIAL APPLICABILITY According to the present invention, it is possible to further improve the entertainment interest.

It is a perspective view which shows the state which opened the main body frame with respect to the outer frame of the pachinko machine which concerns on embodiment, and opened the door frame with respect to the main body frame. It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a right side view of a pachinko machine. It is a top view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the rear of the outer frame, the main body frame, the game board, and the door frame which make up a pachinko machine. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame, the main body frame, the game board, and the door frame which make up a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of the outer frame. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame. It is a front view of the outer frame. It is a rear perspective view of the outer frame. It is a right side view of the outer frame. It is a perspective view for demonstrating the attachment / detachment structure of the upper shaft support metal fitting of a main body frame, and the upper support metal fitting of an outer frame. (A) is an exploded perspective view showing an attached state of a lock member provided on the back surface of the upper support metal fitting of the outer frame, and (B) is a perspective view of the figure (A) viewed from below. It is a back view of the upper support metal fitting part for demonstrating the relationship between a shaft support pin and a lock member. It is a back view of the upper support metal fitting part for demonstrating the operation of a lock member. It is a front view of a door frame. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is a perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is a perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is a perspective view seen from the right rear of the door frame. It is an exploded perspective view which looked at the door frame from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled a side speaker and a side speaker cover from a door frame, and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the side speaker and the side speaker cover from a door frame, and looked at later. (A) is a front perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit and looked at from the back. It is a perspective view which looked at the door frame base board cover and the wiring holding member in a door frame base unit from the rear. It is an enlarged perspective view which shows the state of the wiring which electrically connects a door frame and a main body frame. (A) is a front perspective view of the right side decoration unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the right side decoration unit in the door frame. It is an exploded perspective view of the right side decoration unit disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the right side decoration unit disassembled and viewed later. (A) is a front perspective view of the left side decoration unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the left side decoration unit in the door frame. It is an exploded perspective view of the left side decoration unit disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the left side decoration unit disassembled and viewed later. It is a front perspective view of the upper decorative unit in a door frame. It is a rear perspective view of the upper decorative unit in a door frame. It is an exploded perspective view of the upper decorative unit disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which looked at after disassembling the upper decoration unit. It is a front perspective view of the dish unit in a door frame. It is a rear perspective view of the dish unit in a door frame. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the dish unit and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view after disassembling the dish unit. It is a front perspective view of the operation unit in a door frame. It is a rear perspective view of the operation unit in a door frame. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the operation unit and looked at from the upper right front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the operation unit and looked at from the lower right front. It is sectional drawing of the operation unit. It is sectional drawing which shows the pressing operation part in the operation unit in a pressed state. It is an exploded perspective view after disassembling the handle device in a door frame. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the foul cover unit in the door frame and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the foul cover unit in a door frame and looked at later. It is a front view which shows the state which the front cover of a foul cover unit is removed. It is a front perspective view of the ball feed unit in a door frame. It is a rear perspective view of the ball feed unit in a door frame. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the ball feed unit and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which saw after removing the rear case of a ball feed unit. It is a front view which shows the arrangement of LED for light-emitting decoration in a door frame. It is a front view which shows the system of LED for light-emitting decoration in a door frame. It is a front view of the main body frame. It is a rear view of the main body frame. It is a front perspective view of the main body frame. It is a rear perspective view of the main body frame. It is a left side view of the main body frame. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the main body frame and looked at from the front. It is a perspective view seen after disassembling the main body frame. It is a front perspective view of the main body frame base in the main body frame. It is a rear perspective view of the main body frame base in the main body frame. It is a front perspective view of the hitting ball launching apparatus in the main body frame. It is a rear perspective view of the hitting ball launching device in the main body frame. It is a front perspective view of the prize ball unit in the main body frame. It is a rear perspective view of the prize ball unit in the main body frame. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the prize ball unit and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the prize ball unit and looked at later. It is an exploded perspective view which shows from the rear by disassembling the relationship between a prize ball tank and a tank rail unit in a prize ball unit. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the prize ball device in a prize ball unit and looked at later. It is a rear view which shows the relationship between the payout passage, the payout motor, and the payout rotating body in a prize ball device. It is sectional drawing which shows the circulation passage of a ball in a prize ball unit. It is a front perspective view of the ball outlet opening / closing unit in the main body frame. It is a rear perspective view of the ball outlet opening / closing unit in the main body frame. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the ball outlet opening / closing unit in a main body frame, and the foul cover unit in a door frame. It is a front perspective view of the board unit in the main body frame. It is a rear perspective view of the board unit in the main body frame. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the board unit and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view after disassembling the board unit. It is a perspective view explaining the operation of the standing wall part of the power supply board box in a board unit. (A) is a cross-sectional view of a terminal board box in a board unit, and (B) is an exploded perspective view of the terminal board box in the board unit as viewed from the front. (A) is a front view of a firing power supply board box, and (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA shown in (A). (A) is a front perspective view of the back cover in the main body frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the back cover in the main body frame. It is sectional drawing which shows the part of the fastening mechanism in the back cover enlarged. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the fastening mechanism in the back cover and looked at from the rear side. (A) is a left side view of the lock device in the main body frame, and (B) is a perspective view of the lock device in the main body frame as viewed from the front. (A) is a rear perspective view of the lock device, and (B) is a rear perspective view showing a sliding rod for a glass door and a sliding rod for a main body frame slidably provided inside the U-shaped substrate of the lock device. It is a figure, (C) is a front perspective view of (B). It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the lock device and looked at later. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operation of the sliding rod for a glass door and the sliding rod for a main body frame in a lock device. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operation of the fraud prevention member in a lock device. It is a front view which shows the game board attached to the main body frame with the door frame of a pachinko machine removed. It is a front view of a game board. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the game board and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the game board and looked at later. It is a front view which shows the function display unit in a game board enlarged in the state which it is attached to a pachinko machine. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of a game board using a game panel of an embodiment different from the example of FIG. 100, which is viewed from the front by disassembling the game board. FIG. 103 is an exploded perspective view of the game board as viewed from the rear. It is sectional drawing which cut the game panel in the game board of FIG. 103 in the vertical direction. It is a partial cross-sectional view which shows the crime prevention structure on the shaft support side of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view seen from the rear side with the game board housed in the main body frame. It is a detailed front view of the game board. It is a perspective view of the game board seen diagonally from the front right. It is a perspective view which looked at the game board diagonally from the front left. It is a perspective view which looked at the game board diagonally from the rear. It is a perspective view seen diagonally from the front by disassembling each of the main members constituting the game board. It is a perspective view seen diagonally from the rear by disassembling each of the main members constituting the game board. It is a perspective view which looked at the front unit in a game board from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the front unit in a game board from the rear. It is a perspective view which looked at the attacker unit from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the attacker unit from the rear. It is a perspective view which looked at the attacker unit from the rear lower part. It is a perspective view which looked at the side winning opening member diagonally from the front right. It is a perspective view which looked at the side winning opening member diagonally from the front left. It is a perspective view which looked at the side winning opening member from the rear. It is a front view of a center accessory. It is a perspective view which looked at the center character from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the center accessory from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the center accessory for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the center accessory for each main member and looked at later. It is a front view of the lower right movable guide unit in a center accessory. It is a perspective view of the lower right movable guide unit as seen from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the lower right movable guide unit disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which looked at after disassembling the lower right movable guide unit. FIG. 12 is a cross-sectional view showing the lower right movable guide unit in FIG. 127 cut along the line AA. It is a front view which shows the lower right movable guide unit together with the lower right movable decorative board. It is a perspective view of the upper frame movable decoration unit of a center accessory as seen from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the upper frame movable decoration unit from the rear. It is an exploded perspective view of the upper frame movable decoration unit disassembled into the upper frame movable decoration body and the upper frame movable decoration body drive mechanism, and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the upper frame movable decoration unit into the upper frame movable decoration body and the upper frame movable decoration body drive mechanism, and looked at later. It is an exploded perspective view of the upper frame movable decorative body drive mechanism disassembled and seen from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the upper frame movable decorative body drive mechanism disassembled and seen later. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movement of the upper frame movable decoration unit in a center accessory from the front. It is a perspective view which shows only the stage in a center accessory. It is a top view of the stage of FIG. 140. It is a front view of the stage of FIG. 140. FIG. 14 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA of the stage in FIG. 141. It is a perspective view which looked at the stage of FIG. 140 from the front upper side. It is a perspective view which looked at the back unit in a game board from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the back unit in a game board from the rear. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the liquid crystal display device and the motor drive board box from the back unit, and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which looked at the exploded view of FIG. 147 from the rear. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the back unit for each main component and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the back unit for each main component and looked at later. It is a perspective view which looked at the ball guidance unit in the back unit of a game board from the front. It is a perspective view which shows the back left movable production unit in the back unit of a game board. It is an exploded perspective view of the back left movable effect unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the back left movable effect unit disassembled for each main member and viewed later. It is a perspective view of the back-up movable production unit in the back unit of the game board as seen from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the movable production unit in the back and the middle from the rear. It is an exploded perspective view of the movable effect unit on the back and middle, which is disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the movable effect unit in the back and the middle for each main member and looked at later. It is a perspective view which looked at the back-up movable decorative body in the back-up middle movable production unit from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the movable decorative body unit in the back upper middle. It is an exploded perspective view of the movable decorative body unit seen from the front by disassembling the movable decorative body unit on the back. It is a front view which shows the movable decorative body on the back side with the decorative substrate on the back side. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movement of the movable production unit in the back-up middle. It is a perspective view which looked at the back upper side movable production unit in the back unit of a game board from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the back upper side movable production unit from the rear. It is an exploded perspective view of the movable edge unit on the back upper side as seen from the front by disassembling it. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movement of the back-up side movable production unit. (A) is a front view of the back-up middle movable effect unit and the back-up side movable effect unit, and in (b), the back-up middle movable decorative body and the back-up side movable decorative body are positioned at the appearance positions in (a). It is a front view which shows the state, and (c) is the bottom view of (b). It is a perspective view which looked at the back right movable production unit and the back right movable production unit of the back unit in a game board from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the back right movable production unit and the back right movable production unit from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the back right movable effect unit and the back right movable effect unit for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the back right movable effect unit and the back right movable effect unit for each main member and looked at later. It is a front view which shows the main composition of the back-bottom movable production unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movement of the back bottom movable production unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movement of the back right movable production unit of the back unit in a game board. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movement of the lower right movable guide unit 2560 in a game board. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movement of the upper frame movable decorative body unit in a game board. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movement of the back-up middle movable effect unit and the back-up side movable effect unit in a game board. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movement of the back bottom movable production unit in a game board. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movement of the back left movable effect unit, the back lower movable effect unit, and the back right movable effect unit in a game board. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movement of the back left movable effect unit, the back lower movable effect unit, and the back right movable effect unit following FIG. 180. It is a front view of a pachinko machine showing a state in which a movable decorative body appears on the back of the game board. It is a block diagram which shows the control composition of a pachinko machine schematicly. It is a block diagram which shows the power-source system of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the continuation of FIG. 184. It is a block diagram which shows the drive circuit of a firing solenoid. It is a circuit diagram which shows the shunt regulator circuit, the amplifier circuit, and the operational amplifier circuit group. It is a figure which shows the characteristic of a DC / DC converter. It is a timing chart of a predetermined point in the drive circuit of the firing solenoid of FIG. 186. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the main processing in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of power-off occurrence. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a timer interrupt process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special control process. It is a flowchart which shows the start opening winning process. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process during change. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the jackpot game start processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the small hit game start processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a jackpot game processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a small hit game processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the table structure in the random number storage means for a special symbol. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a sub-main process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the 16ms steady processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the decorative symbol variation start processing (step S1210). It is a block diagram which shows the functional structure about the 1st jackpot lottery in a main control board. It is a block diagram which shows the functional structure about the 2nd big hit lottery in a main control board. It is a block diagram which shows the functional structure about the advantageous gaming state which occurs according to the lottery result in the 1st big hit lottery and the 2nd big hit lottery. It is a block diagram which shows the functional structure about the ordinary lottery in a main control board. It is a block diagram which shows the functional structure about the effect on a peripheral control board. It is explanatory drawing which shows the positional relationship between the rotation detection piece of a driven gear and two rotation detection sensors accompanying the clockwise rotation of a dial operation part in a rotation operation unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the positional relationship between the rotation detection piece of a driven gear and two rotation detection sensors with the counterclockwise rotation of a dial operation part in a rotation operation unit. (A) is a list diagram showing ON / OFF of two rotation detection sensors accompanying the clockwise rotation of the dial operation unit in the rotation operation unit, and (B) is a list diagram showing the counterclockwise rotation of the dial operation unit. It is a list diagram which shows ON / OFF of two rotation detection sensors. (A) to (F) are explanatory views showing an example of a display screen of a liquid crystal display device (effect means, symbol display means) when the operation unit functions as an operation means. (A) to (E) are explanatory views showing an example of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device when the operation unit functions as an operation means. (A) to (F) are explanatory views which show the display screen of the liquid crystal display device at the time of deciding whether or not to substitute the selection operation by a dial operation part. It is a flowchart which shows the selection operation detection process by the effect control process. It is a flowchart which shows the modification 1 of the selection operation detection process in the effect control process. It is a flowchart which shows the modification 2 of the selection operation detection process in the effect control process. (A) to (D) are explanatory views showing an example of an operation unit functioning as a movable effect means and a display screen of a liquid crystal display device corresponding to the operation unit. (A) to (C) are explanatory views showing an example of an operation unit functioning as a movable effect means and a display screen of a liquid crystal display device corresponding thereto. (A) to (C) are explanatory views showing an example of an operation unit functioning as a movable effect means and a display screen of a liquid crystal display device corresponding thereto. (A) to (D) are explanatory views showing an example of an operation unit functioning as a movable effect means and a display screen of a liquid crystal display device corresponding thereto. It is a flowchart which shows the rotation advance notice control process in an effect control process. (A) to (D) are explanatory views showing an example of an operation unit functioning as a movable effect means and a display screen of a liquid crystal display device corresponding thereto. (A) to (D) are explanatory views showing an example of an operation unit functioning as a movable effect means and a display screen of a liquid crystal display device corresponding thereto. (A) to (C) are explanatory views showing an example of an operation unit functioning as an operation explanatory means and a display screen of a liquid crystal display device corresponding thereto. (A) to (C) are explanatory views showing an example of an operation unit functioning as an operation explanatory means and a display screen of a liquid crystal display device corresponding thereto. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movement of the movable decorative body under the back in a game board. It is a figure which shows the back bottom movable decorative body which made the notch in a game board. It is a figure which shows the hold number display in the display panel of the liquid crystal display device in 4th Embodiment, and the movement of the back lower movable decorative body. It is a continuation of FIG. 233. It is a figure which shows the hold number display in the display panel of the liquid crystal display device in 5th Example, and the movement of the back lower movable decorative body. It is a figure which shows the hold number display in the display panel of the liquid crystal display device in the 6th Example, and the movement of the back lower movable decorative body. It is a figure which shows the hold number display in the display panel of the liquid crystal display device in 7th Example, and the movement of the back lower movable decorative body. It is a figure which shows another example in the front view of a door frame. It is a figure which shows another example in the front view of the main body frame. It is a block diagram which showed the game board and the main body frame. It is a figure which shows the conventional example in the signal output from a payout control board to an external terminal board. It is a figure which shows the example in this Example in the signal output from a payout control board to an external terminal board. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of power-on of the main control side. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of power-on of the main control side. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of power-on of a payout control side. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of power-on of a payout control side.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the entire pachinko machine according to the embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 7.
FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing a state in which the main body frame is opened with respect to the outer frame of the pachinko machine according to the embodiment and the door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. FIG. 2 is a front view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 3 is a right side view of the pachinko machine. Further, FIG. 4 is a plan view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 5 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. Further, FIG. 6 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame, the main body frame, the game board, and the door frame constituting the pachinko machine, and FIG. 7 is an outer frame, the main body frame, and the game board constituting the pachinko machine. , It is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of the door frame.

In FIGS. 1 to 7, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment is pivotally supported by an outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall and the outer frame 2 so that the front side is opened. A game board 4 having a box-shaped main body frame 3, a game board 4 having a game area 1100 mounted and fixed to the main body frame 3 from the front side and a game ball as a game medium is driven, and a player on the front surface of the main body frame 3 and the game board 4. It is provided with a door frame 5 that is pivotally supported with respect to the main body frame 3 so as to be closed from the side. In the door frame 5 of the pachinko machine 1, a game window 101 formed so that the game area 1100 of the game board 4 can be seen from the player side, and a game ball arranged below the game window 101 are stored. It includes a plate-shaped upper plate 301 and a lower plate 302, and a handle device 500 operated by a player to drive a game ball stored in the upper plate 301 into the game area 1100 of the game board 5.

As shown in the figure, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the outer frame 2, the main body frame 3, and the door frame 5 are each formed in a vertically long rectangular shape extending in the vertical direction in the front view, and each in the left-right direction. The width of the main frame 3 and the door frame 5 are slightly shorter than the outer frame 2 in the vertical width. A decorative cover 23 is attached to the front surface of the outer frame 2 at a position below the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5, and the front surface of the outer frame 2 is completely closed by the door frame 5 and the decorative cover 23. It has become so. Further, the outer frame 2, the main body frame 3, and the door frame 5 are arranged so that their upper ends are substantially aligned with each other, and the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 can rotate at a position on the front side of the left end of the outer frame 2. It is supported, and the right end of the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 moves to the front side with respect to the outer frame 2 to open the door frame 2.

In the front view of the pachinko machine 1, a game area 1100 in which a game ball is driven through a game window 101 having a substantially circular shape is desired, and the pachinko machine 1 projects forward to the lower side of the game window 101. Two upper plates 301 and lower plates 302 are arranged one above the other. Further, a handle device 500 for the player to operate is arranged in the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 5, and the player holds the handle device 500 in a state where the game ball is stored in the upper plate 301. When the rotation operation is performed, the game ball in the upper plate 301 is driven into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 with the hitting strength corresponding to the rotation angle, and the game can be played.

Although the details will be described later, the game window 101 of the door frame 5 is closed by the transparent glass unit 590, and the player can visually recognize the inside of the game area 1100, but the player can see the inside of the game area 1100. It is not possible to touch the game ball, the obstacle nail, various winning openings, the accessory, etc. in the game area 1100 by inserting a hand or the like into the game area. Further, on the rear side of the main body frame 3, various control boards are provided, and a cover body 1250 that closes so as to cover the rear of the game board 4 is provided.

[1-1. Outer frame]
The outer frame 2 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 8 to 16. 8 is a front perspective view of the outer frame, FIG. 9 is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame, and FIG. 10 is a front view of the outer frame. 11 is a rear perspective view of the outer frame, and FIG. 12 is a right side view of the outer frame. Further, FIG. 13 is a perspective view for explaining a detachable structure between the upper shaft support metal fitting of the main body frame and the upper support metal fitting of the outer frame. 14 (A) is an exploded perspective view showing an attached state of the lock member provided on the back surface of the upper support metal fitting of the outer frame, and FIG. 14 (B) is a perspective view of FIG. 14 (A) viewed from below. .. FIG. 15 is a back view of the upper support metal fitting portion for explaining the relationship between the shaft support pin and the lock member. Further, FIG. 16 is a back view of the upper support metal fitting portion for explaining the operation of the lock member.

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has upper and lower upper frame plates 10 and lower frame plates 11 extending in the horizontal direction, and left and right sides extending in the vertical (upper and lower) direction. It is provided with a frame plate 12, 13 and four connecting members 14 for connecting the ends of the frame plates 10, 11, 12, 13 respectively, and each frame plate 10, 11, 12, 13 is provided with the connecting member 14. By connecting them together, they are assembled into a vertically long rectangular shape (square shape). The upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 in the outer frame 2 of this example are made of solid wood (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) having a predetermined thickness, and are vertically and vertically located substantially in the center of the left and right ends in the front-rear direction. Is provided with an engaging notch 15 that penetrates the surface and is recessed toward the center in the left-right direction. A mounting step portion 10a recessed from other general surfaces is formed on the upper surface and the front surface of the left end portion of the upper frame plate 10, and the upper support metal fitting 20 described later is mounted on the mounting step portion 10a. It has become like.

On the other hand, the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of a lightweight metal profile material (for example, an aluminum alloy) having a constant cross-sectional shape, the outer side surface is a substantially flat surface, and the inner side surface projects inward to the rear end portion. A protrusion 16 having a cavity penetrating in the vertical direction (extrusion direction) is provided, and the strength and rigidity are enhanced (see FIGS. 9 and 106). In addition, a plurality of grooves extending in the vertical direction are formed on the outer side surface and the inner side surface of the side frame plates 12 and 13, and when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island equipment of the game hall, the operator The pachinko machine 1 can be easily held by a finger hook, and the design of the appearance can be enhanced. For convenience, there is also a drawing in which a plurality of grooves formed on the side surfaces of the side frame plates 12 and 13 are omitted.

The connecting member 14 in the outer frame 2 of this example is formed by bending and plastically deforming a metal plate having a predetermined thickness by press molding or the like, and is fixed to the upper frame plate 10 or the lower frame plate 11 in the left-right direction. A plate-shaped horizontal piece 17 extending to, a plate-shaped vertical piece 18 extending vertically from the outer end of the horizontal piece 17 to one side in the vertical direction and fixed to the side frame plates 12, 13 and the opposite of the vertical piece 18. It has a plate-shaped engaging piece 19 that extends in the direction and can be inserted and engaged in the engaging notch 15 of the upper frame plate 10 or the lower frame plate 11. In this example, the connecting member 14 that connects the upper frame plate 10 and the left side frame plate 12 and the connecting member 14 that connects the upper frame plate 10 and the right side frame plate 13 are left-right asymmetrical, respectively. In addition to being formed in the shape of, the vertical piece 18 is formed separately in the front and rear. On the other hand, the connecting member 14 that connects the lower frame plate 11 and the left side frame plate 12 and the connecting member 14 that connects the lower frame plate 11 and the right side frame plate 13 are formed in symmetrical shapes. Has been done.

In the connecting member 14, the upper surface and the lower surface of the horizontal piece 17 are in contact with the lower surface and the upper surface of the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11, and the engaging piece 19 is an engaging notch of the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11. The upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame are screwed into the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 by penetrating the horizontal piece 17 and the engaging piece 19 and screwing a predetermined screw into the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 in a state of being inserted and engaged in the portion 15. It is fixed to the plate 11. Further, the connecting member 14 fixed to the upper frame plate 10 penetrates the side frame bodies 12 and 13 with a predetermined screw in a state where the vertical piece 18 is in contact with the upper end inner side surface of the side frame bodies 12 and 13. Is screwed into the vertical piece 18, so that the upper frame plate 10 and the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be connected to each other. The vertical piece 18 on the rear side of the connecting member 14 fixed to the upper frame plate 10 is fixed to the side frame plates 12 and 13 in a state of being inserted into the protruding portions 16 of the side frame plates 12 and 13. It has become like. Further, the connecting member 14 fixed to the lower frame plate 11 penetrates the side frame bodies 12 and 13 with a predetermined screw in a state where the vertical piece 18 is in contact with the lower end inner side surface of the side frame bodies 12 and 13. Is screwed into the vertical piece 18, so that the lower frame plate 11 and the side frame plates 12, 13 can be connected to each other, and the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 are connected by the four connecting members 14. , And the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be assembled into a frame shape.

The outer frame 2 of this example is arranged so as to face the upper support metal fitting 20 fixed to the upper surface of the left end of the upper frame plate 10 and the upper support metal fitting 20, and is fixed to a predetermined position inside the lower part of the left side frame plate 12. The lower support metal fitting 21 to be supported, the reinforcing metal fitting 22 arranged to support the lower surface of the lower support metal fitting 21 and fixed so as to connect the left and right side frame plates 12, 13 and fixed to the front surface of the reinforcing metal fitting 22. The decorative cover 23 and the like are provided. The upper support metal fitting 20 and the lower support metal fitting 21 are for pivotally supporting the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 so as to be openable and closable.

First, the upper support metal fitting 20 includes a plate-shaped fixing piece 20a fixed to the upper frame plate 10, a support projecting piece 20b protruding forward from the front end of the fixing piece 20a to the front end of the upper frame plate 10, and a support protrusion. A support hook hole 20c formed by being cut out so as to bend from the right end near the front end of the piece 20b toward the center of the tip, and a side frame on the left side that hangs downward from the left end of the fixing piece 20 and the support projecting piece 20b. A plate-shaped hanging fixing piece 20d (see FIG. 14A) that abuts on the outer side surface of the plate 12, and a hanging wall 20e that hangs along the outer edge of the supporting protruding piece 20b that is continuous with the hanging fixing piece 20d (see FIG. 14A). 14) and a stop hanging portion 20f (see FIG. 15) that is continuous with the hanging wall 20e and is inclined inward at the inlet end of the support hook hole 20c. The shaft support pin 633 (see FIG. 63) of the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 in the main body frame 3 described later is detachably engaged with the support hook hole 20c in the upper support metal fitting 20. Further, the upper support metal fitting 20 can connect the upper frame plate 10 and the left side frame plate 12 by the fixing piece 20a and the hanging fixing piece 20d.

In the upper support metal fitting 20, the strength of the support protrusion 20b is increased by the hanging wall 20e hanging from the outer edge of the support protrusion 20b, and the details will be described later, but the support protrusion 20b is viewed from the front. The lock member 27 arranged on the back surface of the above can be concealed so as not to be visible from the player side, and the appearance of the lock member 27 can be improved. Further, the support hook hole 20c formed in the support protrusion piece 20b is bent in a dogleg shape so as to be inclined from the side on the opposite side (right side) where the hanging wall 20e is not formed toward the center of the tip. In addition, the width dimension of the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c is set to be slightly larger than the diameter of the shaft support pin 633.

On the other hand, the lower support metal fitting 21 is a horizontal fixing piece 21a that is placed and fixed on the reinforcing metal fitting 22, and a vertical fixing piece that rises upward from the left end of the horizontal fixing piece 21a and is fixed to the inner side surface of the left side frame plate 12. 21b, a plate-shaped support projecting piece 21c projecting forward from the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 from the front end of the horizontal fixing piece 21a, and a pin-shaped projecting upward from the vicinity of the front end of the support projecting piece 21c. The support projection 21d and the like are provided. The main body frame shaft support formed on the main body frame shaft support metal fitting 644 (see FIG. 66 and the like) of the main body frame 3 described later is inserted into the support protrusion 21d of the lower support metal fitting 21. After inserting the support protrusion 21d of the support metal fitting 21 into the support hole of the main body frame shaft support metal fitting 644 in the main body frame 3, the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 of the main body frame 3 is locked to the support hook hole 20c. As a result, the main body frame 3 can be easily opened and closed.

Further, as shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 of this example has two closing plates 24 and 25 mounted and fixed inside the right side frame plate 13 so as to be separated from each other by a predetermined distance in the vertical direction. These closing plates 24 and 25 are formed in a substantially L shape in a plan view, and the closing plate 25 arranged on the lower side has a rectangular opening 25a penetrating in the front-rear direction (FIG. 9). The closing plates 24, 25 and the hook portion 1054, 1065 (see FIG. 93) of the lock device 1000 attached along the open side of the main body frame 3 when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. The hook portion 1054, 1065 and the closing plates 24, 25 are disengaged by inserting the key into the cylinder lock 1010 of the locking device 1000 and rotating it in one direction, which will be described in detail later. The main body frame 3 can be opened with respect to the outer frame 2.

Further, the outer frame 2 of this example further includes a guide plate 26 fixed to the upper surface of the right end of the reinforcing metal fitting 22. The guide plate 26 is for smoothly guiding the main body frame 3 when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, and is replaceably mounted and fixed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 14 and the like, the outer frame 2 of this example is further provided with a lock member 27 supported on the back surface of the support projecting piece 20b in the upper support metal fitting 20, and is attached to the support projecting piece 20b by the rivet 28. On the other hand, it is rotatably supported. The lock member 27 is made of synthetic resin and is shorter than the stopper portion 27a that protrudes forward from the position pivotally supported by the rivet 28 and the stopper portion 27a to the right from the position pivotally supported by the rivet 28. The protruding operating portion 27b, the elastic piece 27c protruding from the side opposite to the position pivotally supported by the rivet 28 with respect to the operating portion 27b, and the tip of the stopper portion 27a are formed so as to bulge forward. It is provided with an arc-shaped tip surface 27d. As shown in the figure, the lock member 27 is formed in a substantially L shape by the stopper portion 27a and the operation portion 27b. Further, the elastic portion 27c of the lock member 27 is formed to have a width narrower than that of the stopper portion 27a and the operation portion 27b, and is formed so as to extend forward as the distance from the stopper portion 27a increases to the left.

As shown in FIGS. 14B and 15, when the lock member 27 is supported by the support projecting piece 20b of the upper support metal fitting 20 (normal state), the tip contact portion of the elastic piece 27c is a hanging wall. It is in contact with the inner surface of the 20e, and the stopper portion 27a closes the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c, and the tip portion of the stopper portion 27a is the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c. The head space portion of the above is not closed, and a space is formed in the head space portion of the support hook hole 20c into which the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 of the main body frame 3 can be inserted. ..

In the support mechanism of the shaft support pin 633 using the upper support metal fitting 20 and the lock member 27 of this example, the shaft support pin 633 is inserted into the tip space portion of the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c to form the stopper portion 27a. A state in which the tip side faces the stop hanging portion 20f at the entrance end (in this state, there is a slight gap between the tip side side of the stopper portion 27a and the stop hanging lower portion 20f, and they are in contact with each other. In the normal shaft support state, the shaft support pin 633 located in the tip space portion of the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c formed by bending and the tip surface 27d of the stopper portion 27a, respectively. The centers are offset in the diagonal direction and face each other. Then, in this normal shaft support state, the shaft support pin 633 that supports the heavy main body frame 3 is in contact with the tip portion of the support hook hole 20c, so that the shaft support pin 633 is in contact with the tip portion. Since the load on the tip surface 27d of the stopper portion 27a is hardly applied, the load is not applied to the elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27. Since the tip of the stopper portion 27a is provided with an arcuate tip surface 27d, the lock member 27 rotates smoothly when the operation portion 27b is rotated to rotate the lock member 27. It has become. Further, in the figure, the arc center of the tip surface 27d is the center of the rivet 28 (the center of rotation of the lock member 27).

Therefore, when the acting force F is applied in the direction in which the shaft support pin 633 comes out along the inclination of the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c and comes into contact with the arcuate tip surface 27d, the acting force F is applied to the shaft support. The component force F1 (in the normal direction of the arc of the tip surface 27d) acting on the contact portion between the pin 633 and the arc-shaped tip surface 27d, and one side of the inclined hole portion of the shaft support pin 633 and the support hook hole 20c. When the component force F2 acting on the contact portion with the inner surface is divided, the direction of the component force F1 faces the center of the rivet 28 (the center of rotation of the lock member 27), so that the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27 The moment to rotate the tip portion in the direction away from the support protrusion piece 20b (clockwise in the figure) does not work, and the shaft support pin 633 is attached to the tip portion of the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27 and the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c. Holds the state of being sandwiched between the inner surface on one side. Therefore, even in a normal shaft support state or in a state where the acting force of the shaft support pin 633 is applied to the lock member 27, no load is constantly applied to the elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27, and the elasticity is integrally formed of the synthetic resin. It is possible to prevent plastic deformation due to creep of the piece 27c and prevent the shaft support pin 633 from falling out of the support hook hole 20c for a long period of time. Even if an unreasonable force is applied and the tip of the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27 is rotated in a direction away from the support protrusion piece 20b (clockwise in the figure), one side of the tip portion of the stopper portion 27a Does not rotate in a direction that abuts on the stop hanging portion 20f and further disengages, so that the lock member 27 does not protrude to the outside of the support projecting piece 20b.

Even if the shape of the tip surface 27d of the stopper portion 27a is not arcuate, the tip portion of the lock member 27 faces the outside of the support protrusion piece 20b at a position where a rotational moment does not occur due to the action of the above-mentioned component force F1. By locating the rotation center of the lock member 27 (the shaft fixed by the rivet 28) at the position where the rotational moment is generated, no load is applied to the elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27 at all times, and the lock member 27 is locked. The applicant applies that the lock member 27 does not protrude to the outside of the support projecting piece 20b because the one side of the tip of the stopper portion 27a only abuts on the stop hanging portion 20f even if the member 27 rotates. I'm checking.

The operation of the lock member 27 of this example will be specifically described with reference to FIG. As a premise that the main body frame 3 is pivotally supported on the outer frame 2, the lower support metal fitting is provided in the main body frame shaft support hole (not shown) formed in the main body frame shaft support metal fitting 644 (see FIG. 63) of the main body frame 3. It is necessary that the support projection 21d of 21 is inserted. Under such a premise, as shown in FIG. 16A, the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 of the main body frame 3 is brought into contact with the side surface of the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27 and pushed into the drawing. As shown in 16 (B), since the lock member 27 rotates counterclockwise while deforming the elastic piece 27c, the shaft support pin 633 can be inserted into the support hook hole 20c. Then, when the shaft support pin 633 reaches the head space portion of the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c, as shown in FIG. 16C, the shaft support pin 633 and the tip side surface of the stopper portion 27a do not come into contact with each other. Therefore, the lock member 27 is urged by the elastic force of the elastic piece 27c to rotate clockwise, and the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27 returns to the normal state again to close the inlet portion of the support hook hole 20c at the same time. The tip portion of the stopper portion 27a faces the shaft support pin 633 so that the shaft support pin 633 does not fall out of the support hook hole 20c.

Then, as shown in FIG. 16D, this state is maintained even when the main body frame 3 is completely closed or during the normal opening / closing operation of the main body frame 3. Next, in order to remove the shaft support pin 633 from the support hook hole 20c, as shown in FIG. 16E, a finger is inserted into the back surface of the support protrusion piece 20b and the operation portion 27b of the lock member 27 is turned counterclockwise. By rotating, the lock member 27 rotates against the elastic force of the elastic piece 27c, and the tip portion of the stopper portion 27a is in a state of being retracted from the support hook hole 20c, so that the shaft support pin 633 is supported by the support hook. It can be taken out from the hole 20c. After that, the main body frame 3 is lifted to disengage the main body frame shaft support hole formed in the main body frame shaft support metal fitting 644 from the support protrusion 21d of the lower support metal fitting 21, so that the main body frame 3 is attached to the outer frame 2. It can be removed from.

As described above, in the outer frame 2 of this example, the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 constituting the outer shell of the outer frame 2 are made of wood as in the conventional case, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of lightweight metal ( For example, since it is an extruded material (aluminum alloy), when installing the pachinko machine 1 in the island equipment lined up in the amusement park, it is necessary to perform the work of fixing it at a predetermined angle to the vertical surface of the island. However, since such work is performed by driving nails to the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 and the island, it is possible to easily drive the nails, and the pachinko machine 1 can be installed in the existing island equipment without any problem. It can be installed. Further, since the side frame plates 12 and 13 are extruded materials of lightweight metal (for example, aluminum alloy), it is possible to form a thinner wall thickness while maintaining strength as compared with the conventional wooden outer frame. The left-right width when viewed from the front of the peripheral wall portion 605 (see FIG. 63, etc.) of the main body frame 3 adjacent to the inside of the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be widened, and the game board 4 having a large size in the left-right direction can be widened. Can be mounted on the main body frame 3, and at the same time, the game area 1100 of the game board 4 can be formed large.

Further, the upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 constituting the outer shell of the outer frame 2 are connected by the connecting member 14, and the connecting member 14 is connected to the side frame plates 12 and 13. Since it is fastened in close contact with the inner surface and is fastened in a state where the connecting member 14, the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 are engaged with each other, the assembling strength of the outer frame 2 can be increased and it is sturdy. It can be used as a rectangular framework. Further, after connecting the upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 by the connecting member 14, when the upper support metal fitting 20 is attached to a predetermined position, as shown in FIG. 10, each Since there is no member protruding outward from the outer surface (outer peripheral surface) of the frame plates 10, 11, 12, and 13, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in an island facility in a game hall (not shown), an adjacent device (for example, for example). It can be installed in close contact with the adjacent ball lending machine).

[1-2. Overall configuration of door frame]
Next, the door frame 5 provided on the front side of the main body frame 3 so as to be openable and closable will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 to 25. 17 is a front view of the door frame, FIG. 18 is a rear view of the door frame, and FIG. 19 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the front right. Further, FIG. 20 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front left, and FIG. 21 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the rear right of the door frame. Further, FIG. 22 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front, and FIG. 23 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame viewed from the back surface. Further, FIG. 24 is an exploded perspective view of the side speaker and the side speaker cover disassembled from the door frame and viewed from the front, and FIG. 25 shows the side speaker and the side speaker cover disassembled from the door frame and viewed from the rear. It is an exploded perspective view.

As shown in the figure, the door frame 5 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has a door frame having a game window 101 having an outer shape formed into a vertically long rectangular shape and an inner peripheral shape having a slightly vertically long circular shape (elliptical shape). The base unit 100, the right side decoration unit 200 attached to the right outer periphery of the game window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, and the left side of the game window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 facing the right side decoration unit 200. The left side decoration unit 240 attached to the outer periphery, the upper decoration unit 280 attached to the upper outer circumference of the game window 101 in front of the door frame base unit 100, and the lower end lower side of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240. It includes a pair of side speaker covers 290 that are arranged and attached to the front surface of the door frame base unit 100.

Further, the door frame 5 penetrates the dish unit 300 attached to the lower part of the game window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, the operation unit 400 attached to the center of the upper part of the dish unit 300, and the dish unit 300. A handle device 500 attached to the lower right corner of the frame base unit 100 for driving a game ball, and a rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 arranged behind the dish unit 300 with the door frame base unit 100 in between. The foul cover unit 540 attached to the foul cover unit 540, the ball feed unit 580 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 on the right side of the foul cover unit 540, and the game window 101 attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 so as to close. It is equipped with a glass unit 590 and a glass unit.

[1-2A. Door frame base unit]
Subsequently, the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 26 to 30. FIG. 26A is a front perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame, and FIG. 26B is a rear perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame. Further, FIG. 27 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 28 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 29 is a perspective view of the door frame base board cover and the wiring holding member in the door frame base unit as viewed from the rear, and FIG. 30 is an enlarged view of the wiring for electrically connecting the door frame and the main body frame. It is a perspective view which shows.

As shown in the figure, the door frame base unit 100 of this example has a door having a game window 101 having an outer shape formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and a game window 101 penetrating in the front-rear direction and having an inner circumference formed in a vertically long substantially elliptical shape. The frame base body 110, the upper bracket 120 attached to the center of the upper part of the game window 101 on the front side of the door frame base body 110 to fix the upper decorative unit, and the lower left and right sides of the game window 101 on the front side of the door frame base body 110. A pair of side speakers 130 arranged on both outer sides, a speaker bracket 132 for fixing the side speakers 130 to the door frame base main body 110, and a front view of the front of the door frame base main body 110 attached to the lower right corner of the front view. It is provided with a handle bracket 140 for supporting the handle device 500.

The door frame base unit 100 has a side surface of the side speaker 130 and a front side of the wiring 136 (see FIG. 24) connected to the right side decoration unit 200 and the like on the outside of the side speaker 130 on the right side when viewed from the front. Further includes a cover member 134 attached to the front surface of the door frame base main body 110 (see FIGS. 22 and 24, etc.). The cover member 134 can guide the wiring 136 along the outer periphery of the speaker mounting portion 111, and holds the wiring 136 so that the wiring 136 does not get in the way when the side speaker 130 is attached or detached. Can be done.

Further, the door frame base unit 100 covers the lower portion of the game window 101 with the metal frame-shaped reinforcing unit 150 fixed to the rear side of the door frame base main body 110 and the rear surface of the door frame base main body 110. The security cover 180 to be attached, the glass unit locking member 190 rotatably attached to a predetermined position on the outer periphery of the game window 101 on the rear surface of the door frame base main body 110, and the left side (open side) from the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the rear. ), And the launch cover 191 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base body 110 along the lower end of the game window 101, and the rotation position of the handle device 500 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base body 110 under the launch cover 191. The handle device relay board 192 that relays the connection between the detection sensor 512 and the main control board 4100, the handle device relay board cover 193 that covers the rear side of the handle device relay board 192, and the launch cover 191 that sandwiches the center in the left-right direction. Door frame base board 194, which is located on the opposite side of the handle device relay board 192 (on the right side (shaft support side) from the center in the left-right direction in the rear view) and is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base body, and the door frame base board. A part of the door frame base board cover 195 that covers the rear side of 194 and the wiring cord 196 that is rotatably supported on the rear surface of the door frame base board cover 195 and connects the door frame 5 side and the main body frame 3 side. The wiring holding member 197 for holding the door is provided.

In the door frame base unit 100 of this example, the rigidity of the entire door frame base unit 100 is increased by fixing a reinforcing unit 150 obtained by assembling a metal sheet metal with rivets or the like to the rear side of a rectangular door frame base body 110 made of synthetic resin. In addition, it has enough strength to sufficiently support the decorative units 200, 240, 280, the dish unit 300, and the like.

The door frame base board 194 in the door frame base unit 100 is connected to the side speakers 130 and the upper speakers 222 and 262 of the left and right side decoration units 200 and 240, and is a peripheral control unit provided in the game board 4 described later. It is connected to the 4140 and includes an amplifier circuit that amplifies the acoustic signal sent from the peripheral control unit 4140 and outputs it to each speaker 130. In this example, the decorative units 200, 240, 280, the decorative boards 430, 432 provided in the dish unit 300 and the operation unit 400, the dial drive motors 414 and the sensors 432a, 432b provided in the operation unit 400, The wiring code 196 that connects the 432c, the handle device relay board 192, the ball rental unit 360 of the dish unit 300, the payout control board 4110, the peripheral control unit 4140, etc. is on the right side (axis) of the door frame base board 194 when viewed from the rear. After being aggregated and bundled at the position of the support side), the details will be described later, but it is held by the wiring holding member 197 and extends backward, and the main relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral relay terminal plate of the main body frame 3 are used. It is designed to be connected to 882 (see FIGS. 1 and 30).

As shown in FIGS. 27 and 28, the door frame base main body 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of this example is formed in a vertically long frame shape by synthetic resin, and penetrates in the front-rear direction and has a vertically long inner shape. The game window 101 having a substantially elliptical shape is formed so as to be offset upward as a whole. As shown in the figure, in the game window 101, the left and right side and the upper inner peripheral edge are formed in a continuous smooth curved line, while the lower inner peripheral edge is formed in a straight line extending to the left and right. ing. Further, on the inner peripheral edge of the lower side of the game window 101 in the door frame base main body 110, a notch portion of a square shape 101a through which the first ball outlet 544a of the foul cover unit 540 can be inserted on the shaft support side (left side in front view). Is formed. In the door frame base main body 110, the widths of the upper side and the left and right side sides formed by the game window 101 are the upper reinforcing sheet metal 151, the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152, and the open side reinforcing sheet metal 153 of the reinforcing unit 150 described later. The width is substantially the same as the width of the game window 101, and the game window 101 is formed as large as possible with respect to the size of the door frame base body in the front view. Therefore, a wider range of the game board 4 arranged on the rear side of the door frame 5 can be visually recognized from the player side, and a game area 1100 wider than that of the conventional pachinko machine can be easily formed. It has become like.

In addition to the game window 101, the door frame base main body 110 is arranged on both the left and right outer sides of the lower side of the game window 101, and mounts and fixes a speaker mounting portion 111 for mounting and fixing the side speaker 130 and a ball feed unit 580. The ball feed unit mounting recess 112 (see FIG. 28) and the game ball that penetrates in the front-rear direction at a predetermined position of the ball feed unit mounting recess 112 and is stored in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 to the ball feed unit 580. A ball feed opening 113 for supplying and a handle mounting for mounting the handle bracket 140, which is arranged in the lower right corner when viewed from the front and is inclined diagonally so that the right (open side) end of the front surface that bulges forward is retracted. A cylindrical portion 114, a wiring passage port 115 that penetrates in the front-rear direction at a predetermined position of the handle mounting portion 114 and allows wiring from the handle device 500 to pass through, and a cylindrical shape that extends forward shortly on the upper side of the handle mounting portion 114. It is provided with a lock hole 116, which is formed and into which a cylinder lock 1010 described later can be inserted.

Further, as shown in FIG. 28, the door frame base main body 110 has a relay board mounting portion 117 for mounting the handle device relay board 192 on the lower side in the ball feed unit mounting recess 112, and the door frame base main body when viewed from the rear. From the arrangement of the board mounting part 118 for mounting the door frame base board 194, which is arranged on the lower right side (shaft support side), and the rear side (open side) of the lower end of the game window 101, which is closer to the center than the speaker mounting part 111. The security cover mounting portion 119 for mounting the security cover 180 and the door frame base body 110 projecting rearward and mounting the security cover 180 are recessed to the front side substantially along the inner circumference of the game window 101 on the rear side, and the glass unit 590. The glass unit support step 110a to which the outer peripheral edge of the front surface can come into contact with the glass unit, and four locking members for rotatably supporting the glass unit locking member 190 projecting rearward from a predetermined position on the outer periphery of the game window 101. A portion 110b and the like are further provided.

Further, the rear side of the door frame base main body 110 is provided with a door frame projecting piece 110c that protrudes rearward by a predetermined amount from the lower side thereof, and the door frame projecting piece 110c is provided with an engaging groove 603 of the main body frame 3 described later. It is designed to be inserted inside. As a result, the door frame 5 can be positioned and locked with respect to the main body frame 3, and an illegal tool such as a piano wire can be inserted into the pachinko machine 1 through the gap between the door frame 5 and the lower side of the main body frame 3. Even so, the door frame projecting piece 110c engaged with the engaging groove 603 can prevent the tool from entering, and the security function of the pachinko machine 1 is enhanced. Further, the rear side of the door frame base main body 110 is provided with a positioning protrusion 110d that protrudes rearward from a position slightly lower right than the lock hole 116 when viewed from the rear and fits with the fitting groove 612 of the main body frame 3. By fitting the positioning protrusion 110d with the fitting groove 612, the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 are positioned at the correct positions.

Further, as shown in FIG. 27, the door frame base main body 110 is provided with a plurality of mounting bosses 110e projecting forward for fixing the decorative units 200, 240, 280, the dish unit 300, and the like on the front surface thereof. At the same time, a large number of mounting holes for mounting the upper bracket 120, the handle bracket 140, and the like are formed at appropriate positions. Further, the door frame base main body 110 has a mounting portion 110g (see FIG. 24) for mounting the speaker bracket 132 for mounting the side speaker 130, and a mounting hole 110h (FIG. 18, FIG. 24 and) for mounting the side speaker cover 290. (See FIG. 25 and the like) are formed at appropriate positions.

In the side speaker cover 290, as shown in FIG. 25, the glass unit 590 is arranged so as to penetrate the glass unit support step 110a into which the glass unit 590 is fitted from the rear side, one on each side, and the door frame base main body. With the glass unit 590 removed from the 110 (door frame 5), it can be attached and detached with a predetermined screw via the mounting hole 110h. Further, as shown in FIG. 18, the mounting hole 110h for mounting the side speaker cover 290 is covered on the rear side by fixing the security cover 180 to the door frame base main body 110. Therefore, in order to remove the side speaker cover 290, the security cover 180 and the glass unit 590 must first be removed from the door frame base main body 110. As a result, by making it take some time to remove the side speaker cover 290, it is possible to make the person who intends to commit fraudulent acts take time to remove the side speaker cover 290, and also to remove the relatively large glass unit 590. By doing so, the removal work can be made conspicuous, and the theft of the side speaker 130 and the fraudulent activity in the game area 1100 can be hesitated to enhance the deterrence (safety) against the fraudulent activity. It has become.

Further, in the door frame base main body 110, between the ball feed unit mounting recess 112 and the board mounting portion 118, the lower plate ball supply port 310 g in the plate unit base 310 of the plate unit 300 described later and the foul cover unit 540 are the first. A rectangular ball passage port 110f penetrating in the front-rear direction is provided at a position corresponding to the two-ball outlet 544b.

Next, the upper bracket 120 in the door frame base unit 100 is fixed to the center of the front upper part of the door frame base main body 110, and although detailed illustration is omitted, the left and right attached to the door frame base unit 100 are left and right. The upper gap formed between the side decoration units 200 and 240 is concealed, and the left and right ends are supported by the side decoration units 200 and 240, respectively. Further, a part of the tip of the upper bracket 120 is inserted into the upper decorative unit 280, and the upper decorative unit 280 can be supported from above when the door frame 5 is assembled. It has become like.

Further, although detailed illustration of the pair of side speakers 130 in the door frame base unit 100 is omitted, the intersection of the central axes thereof is a predetermined distance (for example, 0.2 m to 1) from the center of the game area 1100 to the front in front view. It is fixed diagonally so as to be at a position of .5 m), so that the sound reaches the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 most efficiently. Further, the side speaker 130 is designed to mainly output sound in the mid-high range, and is arranged at a position as far as possible in the left-right direction with respect to the pachinko machine 1, so that the left and right side speakers 130 can be used. By outputting different related sounds from the side speaker 130, it is possible to output a sound with a high stereo feeling.

The outer periphery of these side speakers 130 is sandwiched between a substantially annular speaker bracket 132 arranged on the front side and a speaker mounting portion 111 of the door frame base main body 110 arranged on the rear side, whereby the door frame It can be attached to the base body 110. The speaker bracket 132 can be attached to the attachment portion 110g of the door frame base main body 110 from the front side by a predetermined screw.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 27 to 29, the door frame base board cover 195 in the door frame base unit 100 is formed in a thin box shape with the front side open, and is formed on the rear surface on the rear side in the vertical direction. It is provided with a stepped portion 195a that is recessed forward at a position slightly lower than the center of the door. The wiring holding member 197 is rotatably attached to the step portion 195a of the door frame base board cover 195.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, the wiring holding member 197 in the door frame base unit 100 is formed in a plate shape extending in the lateral direction and has an I-shaped cross section. , It is made of a relatively hard synthetic resin. Further, as shown in the figure, the wiring holding member 197 is provided with a plurality of holding holes 197a (three in each of the upper and lower sides in this example) at predetermined intervals along the longitudinal direction at both upper and lower ends. In the wiring holding member 197, the end portion on the side where the door frame 5 is pivotally supported by the main body frame 3 in the state where the door frame 5 is assembled is vertically attached to the step portion 195a on the rear surface of the door frame base board cover 195. It is rotatably supported around the extended shaft, and although detailed illustration is omitted, the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 rotates toward the door frame base board cover 195 side, so that the wiring holding member 197 is rotatably supported. It can be accommodated in the step portion 195a of the door frame base board cover 195.

The wiring holding member 197 is bound to a predetermined binding hole 197a paired up and down with a wiring cord 196 for electrically connecting the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 along the rear surface side. The wiring cord 196 can be held by inserting the band 198 and tightening the wiring cord 196 together with the wiring holding member 197 by the binding band 198 (see FIGS. 1 and 30).

When the wiring holding member 197 of this example is rotated with respect to the main body frame 3 in the direction of closing the door frame 5, the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 extends from the free end side of the wiring cord 196 to the main body frame 3. It is pushed forward by the portion and rotates in a direction approaching the door frame base board cover 195 side. As a result, as the door frame 5 is closed, the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 approaches the door frame base board cover 195, and the wiring cord 196 extending from the free end of the wiring holding member 197 to the main body frame 3 side is free. The bend becomes large (sharp) near the edge. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the wiring cord 196 is folded in two in the lateral direction on the free end side of the wiring holding member 197.

On the other hand, when the closed door frame 5 is opened with respect to the main body frame 3, the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 are relatively far apart, so wiring is performed by the wiring cord 196 connected to the main body frame 3 side. The free end side of the holding member 197 is pulled backward, and the wiring holding member 197 rotates smoothly so that the free end side moves away from the door frame base board cover 195 (direction of the main body frame 3). As a result, the wiring cord 196 folded on the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 is expanded so as to extend straight, and the door frame 5 can be opened without being hindered by the wiring cord 196.

As described above, according to this example, the door frame base board cover 195 moves the end portion of the wiring holding member 197 on the same side as the side on which the door frame 5 is pivotally supported so that the free end side moves to the main body frame 3 side. The main body frame 3 is rotatably supported on the rear surface, and a part of the wiring cord 196 that electrically connects the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 is held so as not to move in the vertical direction. On the other hand, when opening and closing the door frame 5, the wiring cord 196 can be laterally folded and unfolded on the free end side of the wiring holding member 197, and the wiring cord 196 is caught when the door frame 5 is opened and closed. It is possible to prevent problems (disconnection of wiring cord 196, disconnection of connection connector, etc.) from occurring due to being pinched or pinched.

Further, according to this example, since the wiring holding member 197 is formed of a relatively hard and highly rigid synthetic resin, even if a force acts via the wiring cord 196 when opening and closing the door frame 5, the wiring holding member 197 may be formed. It is possible to prevent blurring in the vertical direction, and the wiring cord 196 can be reliably folded in the horizontal direction to prevent the occurrence of defects.

Further, as described above, when the door frame 5 is opened and closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the wiring holding member 197 makes it appear as if a bridge is built between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5, and the wiring 196 Since a part of the wiring is bridged by the wiring holding member 197, it is possible to prevent the wiring 196 from hanging down even if the door frame 5 is opened and closed. It is possible to prevent problems such as wiring and the inability to close the door frame 5, and the main control board 4100, peripheral control unit 4140, payout control board 4110, etc. as the main body side electrical equipment, and the door side. A problem occurred in the wiring 196 that connects each decorative board 214,216, 254, 256, 286, 320, 430, 432, speaker 130, 222, 262, ball rental unit 360, handle device 500, etc. as electrical equipment. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 capable of reducing the amount of wiring as much as possible.

Further, a part of the wiring 196 is held by the rotatable wiring holding member 197, and even if the wiring 196 is forcibly pulled when the door frame 5 is opened, the wiring holding member 197 rotates. Since the force can be released, it is possible to prevent the wiring 196 from being pulled, and it is possible to prevent the wiring 196 from being pulled and causing a problem such as disconnection or disconnection of the connector. can. Further, since a part of the wiring 196 is held by the wiring holding member 197 and the wiring 196 is only partially bent with the rotation of the wiring holding member 197, the conventional one (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-23675). ), The wiring 196 does not slide, and it is possible to prevent the wiring 196 from rubbing and causing problems such as electric leakage and disconnection.

Further, in the wiring holding member 197, the binding band 198 is inserted into the holding holes 197a which are arranged at predetermined intervals in the longitudinal direction, and the wiring 196 is held by the binding band 198. It is possible to prevent the held binding band 198 from moving (sliding) in the longitudinal direction of the wiring holding member 197 by the holding hole 197a, and reliably prevent the wiring 196 from falling off from the wiring holding member 197 together with the binding band 198. can do.

Further, even if the position where the wiring 196 extends from the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 is arranged at a position away from the side side supporting the door frame 5, as described above, the wiring 196 is provided by the wiring holding member 197. Since the wiring 196 can be satisfactorily prevented from hanging when the door frame 5 is opened and closed by guiding the door frame 5, the main body frame 3 having increased strength and rigidity on the side side of the door frame 5 supported by the shaft. The door frame 5 and the door frame 5 can be used, and the pachinko machine 1 having high crime prevention against fraudulent activities can be used.

Further, since the wiring holding member 197 is provided with ridges protruding from both ends in the direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction toward at least the side along which the wiring 196 is along, wiring is performed by the pair of ridges and the plate surface of the wiring holding member 197. The wiring 196 can be easily held along the wiring holding member 197 by surrounding the three sides of the 196. Further, since the wiring holding member 197 is provided with a protrusion, the bending rigidity of the plate-shaped wiring holding member 197 can be increased, and the wiring holding member 197 is prevented from bending when the door frame 5 is opened and closed. The door frame 5 can be opened and closed in good condition.

Further, the length from the base end to the tip of the wiring holding member 197 is set to substantially the same length as the distance from the axis of the door frame 5 to the axis of the base end, and the main body frame 3 in the wiring 196 is extended. The predetermined position is the position on the axial center side of the door frame 5 with respect to the tip of the wiring holding member 197 in a state where the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, and the axial center of the door frame 5 and the wiring holding member. Since a pantograph-like link is formed at the axis of 197, the tip of the wiring holding member 197, and the position where the wiring 196 extends in the main body frame 3, wiring when opening and closing the door frame 5 The movement of the holding member 197 and the wiring 196 can be smoothed, the opening and closing work can be facilitated, and the force applied to the wiring 196 and the like can be reduced to cause problems such as disconnection. Can be prevented. Further, a pantograph-shaped link is formed, and when the door frame 5 is closed, the portion extending from the tip of the wiring holding member 197 in the wiring 196 is folded back on the tip side along the wiring holding member 197. Therefore, when the door frame 5 is closed, the wiring 196 can be folded and compactly assembled, and the space related to the wiring holding member 197 and the wiring 196 can be reduced.

Further, the door frame base board cover 195 of the door frame 5 on which the wiring holding member 197 is pivotally supported is recessed so as to open toward the main body frame 3 side with the door frame 5 closed to the main body frame 3. A step portion 195a capable of accommodating the wiring holding member 197 is provided, and when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the wiring holding member 197 is provided on the door frame base board cover 195. Since it is housed in the portion 195a, the protrusion of the wiring holding member 197 from the door frame 5 side to the main body frame 3 side can be almost eliminated, the door frame 5 can be easily closed, and the wiring holding member 197 and the wiring holding member 197 can be easily closed. The wiring 196 can be compactly organized, and it is possible to prevent the wiring 196 from being caught by other members and prevent problems from occurring.

Further, the wiring 196 is held with respect to the main body frame 3 with the door frame 5 closed along the surface of the wiring holding member 197 facing the main body frame 3 side. When the door frame 5 is closed, the wiring holding member 197 can be brought as close as possible to the door frame 5 side (door frame base board cover 195 side). The protrusion of the holding member 197 can be reduced, the door frame 5 can be easily closed, and the space related to the wiring holding member 197 and the wiring 196 can be made as small as possible.

Further, since the wiring holding member 197 is provided on the door frame 5 side for moving (opening / closing), the wiring holding member 197 can be easily rotated by an inertial force or an impact force for opening / closing the door frame 5, as described above. It is possible to surely play the effect. Further, since the wiring holding member 197 is provided in the door frame 5 and it is not necessary to secure a space for providing the wiring holding member 197 in the main body frame 3, a space for relatively holding the game board 4 in the main body frame 3 is provided. It is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 capable of holding a game board 4 having a larger game area 1100 by increasing the size, and having a large game board 4 and strongly attracting the attention of the player. can.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 27 and 28, the handle bracket 140 in the door frame base unit 100 has a cylindrical tubular portion 141 extending in the front-rear direction and a shaft of the tubular portion 141 from the rear end of the tubular portion 141. On the other hand, an annular flange portion 142 extending outward in the perpendicular direction and a plurality of (three in this example) ridges protruding into the cylinder portion 141 and arranged at irregular intervals in the circumferential direction of the cylinder portion 141. 143 is provided with reinforcing ribs 144 that connect the outer peripheral surface of the cylinder portion 141 and the front surface of the flange portion 142 and are arranged in a plurality of directions in the circumferential direction of the cylinder portion 141. The handle bracket 140 is adapted to be attached to the handle mounting portion 114 by a predetermined screw in a state where the rear surface of the flange portion 142 is in contact with the front surface of the handle mounting portion 114 in the door frame base main body 110. Although not shown, the axis of the tubular portion 141 substantially coincides with the wiring passage port 115 in the state of being attached to the handle mounting portion 114.

The handle bracket 140 is provided with one ridge 143 on the upper side and two ridges 143 on the lower side in the tubular portion 141, and these ridges 143 are formed on the outer periphery of the cylindrical portion of the handle base 502 in the handle device 500. It is arranged and formed at a position corresponding to the three groove portions 502a. Then, the cylindrical portion of the handle device 500 can be inserted into the tubular portion 141 only when the three ridges 143 of the handle bracket 140 and the three groove portions 502a of the handle device 500 match. There is. Therefore, the handle base 502 of the handle device 500 inserted and supported by the handle bracket 140 is supported in a state in which it cannot rotate relative to the handle bracket 140.

By attaching the handle bracket 140 to the handle mounting portion 114 inclined at an angle, the handle bracket 140 is attached so that the axis of the tubular portion 141 extends toward the right side (open side) as it goes forward in front view. The axis of the handle device 500 supported by the handle bracket 140 in this state is also tilted at an angle.

Subsequently, the reinforcing unit 150 in the door frame base unit 100 includes an upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 attached along the back surface of the upper side of the door frame base main body 110 and a door frame base main body, mainly as shown in FIGS. 27 and 28. The shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 attached along the back surface of the shaft support side side portion 110, the open side reinforcing sheet metal 153 attached along the open side side portion back surface of the door frame base main body 110, and the door frame base main body 110. It is provided with a lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 attached along the lower back surface of the game window 101, and these are mutually fastened with screws, rivets, or the like to form a square shape.

As shown in FIG. 27, the reinforcing unit 150 has an upper shaft support portion 156 having a shaft pin 155 slidably provided on the upper surface thereof in the vertical direction at the upper and lower ends of the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152, and a lower surface thereof. It is integrally provided with a lower shaft branch 158 having a shaft pin 157 (see FIG. 18). Then, the upper and lower shaft pins 155 and 157 are pivotally supported by the upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 formed above and below the shaft support side of the main body frame 3, so that the door frame 5 is pivotally supported with respect to the main body frame 3. It is designed to be freely opened and closed.

Further, the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 of the reinforcing unit 150 has a predetermined width and is formed to have substantially the same length as the width dimension of the door frame base main body 110, and is formed on the lower long side edge of the long side edges thereof. A lower bent projectile 159 bent forward and an upper bent projectile 160 bent forward toward the right side (open side) of the upper long side edge in front view. , A vertically bent projectile 161 that is bent rearward and extended in the vertical direction at the central portion of the upper long side edge. The strength of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 is increased by the lower bent projectile piece 159, the upper bent projectile piece 160, and the like. Further, the vertically bent projecting piece 161 of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 is formed so as to engage and lock with the locking piece 592b formed at the lower end of the unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590, which will be described later. When the unit 590 is fixed to the back surface side of the door frame 5, the vertically bent projecting piece 161 locks the locking piece 592b of the unit frame 592 in the glass unit 590, so that the lower end of the glass unit 590 moves in the left-right direction. It is possible to regulate the movement to the rear. The lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 is formed with a notch portion 162 substantially corresponding to the notch portion 101a of the door frame base main body 110.

Further, the open side reinforcing sheet metal 153 of the reinforcing unit 150 includes an open side outer bending protrusion 163 bent rearward on both sides of the long side between the upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 and the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154. It is provided with an open side inner bent projectile 164, and as shown in the figure, the open side inner bent projectile 164 is formed so as to extend backward longer than the open side outer bent projectile 163. ing. Further, a hook cover 165 that comes into contact with the door frame hook portion 1041 of the lock device 1000, which will be described later, is provided in the lower rear portion of the open side reinforcing sheet metal 153. Further, the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is provided with a U-shaped shaft support side U-shaped protrusion 166 that extends rearward to the outer end of the long side thereof and is open to the outside of the shaft support side (FIG. FIG. See 106). Further, the upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 is provided with bent projecting pieces 167 bent rearward on both sides of the long side thereof.

Since the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 of the reinforcing unit 150 is mounted and supported only at two points above and below the upper shaft support portion 156 and the lower shaft support portion 158 with respect to the main body frame 3, it is mounted on the shaft support side. If an illegal tool such as a driver or a crowbar is inserted between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3, the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is deformed and the gap between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 becomes large and illegal. Although there is a risk that the action may be facilitated, the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 of this example is provided with the shaft support side U-shaped protrusion 166, so that the strength of the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is further increased. , The shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is difficult to bend. Further, in the shaft support side U-shaped protrusion 166 of the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152, the front end piece 952b of the side security plate 950 in the main body frame 3 described later is inserted into the U-shape (FIG. FIG. (Refer to 106), the insertion of the tool can be prevented, and only the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 can be prevented from bending, so that the crime prevention function of the pachinko machine 1 can be enhanced.

Next, the security cover 180 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 27 and 28. The security cover 180 has a security function of covering the lower back surface of the glass unit 590 to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the game board 4, and as shown in the figure, the left and right sides are made of transparent synthetic resin. It is formed in a flat plate shape so as to cover the lower portion of the glass unit 590 arranged between the reinforcing sheets 152 and 153 of the above, and the upper side portion thereof is formed in an arc shape substantially along the lower arc surface of the inner rail 1112 of the game board 4. It includes a formed contact recess 181 and a crime prevention rear projection piece 182 that projects rearward along the upper end of the contact recess 181. Further, the left and right ends of the security cover 180 are each provided with a security rear end projecting piece 183 that projects rearward along the shape of the end. It should be noted that the crime prevention rear end projecting piece 183 on the right side (shaft support side) in the rear view is in a form of extending backward longer than the crime prevention rear end projecting piece 183 on the opposite side (open side). On the other hand, on the front surface of the security cover 180, the security front projection piece 184 projecting along the downward shape of the unit frame 592 in the glass unit 590 with the security cover 180 attached, and the left and right outside the security front projection piece 184. A U-shaped mounting elastic piece 185 that projects forward is provided at the lower end of the.

In this security cover 180, the mounting elastic piece 185 on the right side (open side) is mounted on the security cover mounting portion 119 of the door frame base unit 100 when viewed from the front, and the mounting elastic piece 185 on the opposite side (shaft support side) is mounted on the dish. By attaching it to the security cover mounting portion 364 of the unit 300, it can be detachably attached to the back surface side of the door frame 5. In the state where the security cover 180 is attached to the door frame 5, although detailed illustration is omitted, the security front projection piece 184 is adapted to fit with the lower outer periphery of the unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590, and also. The rear surface of the lower end portion of the unit frame 592 comes into contact with the vertically bent projecting piece 161. Further, when the door frame 5 is closed, the crime prevention rear projection piece 182 projecting rearward is inserted into the lower side surface of the inner rail 1112 whose shaft support side half is fixed to the game board 4, and the open side half is front. It is in a state of being inserted into the rail security groove 1118 of the inner rail 1112 in the component member 1110. As a result, even if an unauthorized tool is to be intruded into the game area 1100 of the game board 4, the intrusion can be prevented by the crime prevention rear projection piece 182 inserted under the inner rail 1112. ..

The back surface of the security cover 180 can cover the lower front portion of the ball hitting guide passage formed by the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 with the door frame 5 closed. , It is possible to prevent the hit ball from colliding with the glass plate 594 that is sent or returned from the guide passage portion.

As a result, in this example, the security cover 180 covers the outer periphery of the lower rear side of the glass unit 590 (game window 101) in the door frame 5, so that the game window 101 and the glass unit 590 are displayed from the front side of the door frame 5. Even if you try to cheat inside the pachinko machine 1 (inside the game area 1100) by inserting a highly flexible tool between the windows, the security cover 180 can prevent the tool from entering, and cheating. It has become possible to make the pachinko machine 1 with higher safety against the above.

Subsequently, the four glass unit locking members 190 in the door frame base unit 100 are rotatably fitted to the locking member mounting portion 110b protruding rearward from the door frame base main body 110 with the fitting portion 190a. A locking piece 190b for engaging the locking projecting piece 451f of the glass unit 590 extending in a direction perpendicular to the axial direction of the fitting portion 190a is provided. In this glass unit locking member 190, a retaining screw is fixed to the tip of the locking member mounting portion 110b in a state where the locking member mounting portion 110b of the door frame base main body 110 penetrates the fitting portion 190a. By doing so, it is rotatably supported by the locking member mounting portion 110b.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the locking piece 190b of the glass unit locking member 190 has a ridge protruding rearward, and the ridge rotates when the glass unit 590 is attached or detached. It is a finger hook when operating. Of the four glass unit locking members 190, the locking piece 190b of the glass unit locking member 190 attached to the lower right when viewed from the rear does not have a ridge, and the rear surface is a flat surface. ing.

Further, the launch cover 191 in the door frame base unit 100 is fixed to the rear side of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 in the reinforcing unit 150. Further, the handle device relay board cover 193 and the door frame base board cover 195 are fixed at predetermined positions on the rear side of the door frame base 110, respectively. When the launch cover 191 and the handle device relay board cover 193 and the ball feed unit 580 are attached to the door frame unit base 100, their rear surfaces are substantially identical to each other. It is possible to cover the front surface of the hitting ball launching device 650 attached to the main body frame 3.

[1-2B. Right side decoration unit]
Subsequently, the right side decorative unit 200 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. 31 (A) is a front perspective view of the right side decorative unit in the door frame, and FIG. 31 (B) is a rear perspective view of the right side decoration unit in the door frame. Further, FIG. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the right side decorative unit disassembled and viewed from the front. Further, FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the right side decorative unit as viewed after being disassembled.

As shown in the figure, the right side decoration unit 200 of the door frame 5 in the present embodiment decorates the right half of the front outer circumference of the game window 101 except the lower part in front view, and the inside is the game window 101. It is formed in an arc shape along the outside, and the outside is formed in a straight line along the outer circumference of the door frame base unit 100. The right side decorative unit 200 is provided with respect to the side decorative frame 202 forming the skeleton of the right side decorative unit 200, the side upper decorative member 204 arranged along the upper side of the side decorative frame 202, and the side upper decorative member 204. The side upper decorative lens 206 that fits from the rear side, the side decorative frame 202, and the upper side of the side upper decorative member 204 are covered, and the side upper decorative member 204 is attached to the front side so as to sandwich the side upper decorative lens 206. The side upper cover 208, the side lens 210 that supports the lower part of the side upper cover 208 and is fitted and fixed to the side frame 202 from the rear side, and the side inner lens 212 that is fitted to the back side of the side lens 210. , Is equipped.

Further, the right side decoration unit 200 is arranged on the rear side of the side inner lens 212 from substantially the center to the upper side in the vertical direction, and a plurality of LEDs 214a (full color LED) and 214b (white LED) are mounted on the surface of the right side decoration unit 200. A substrate 214 and a decorative substrate 216 on the lower right side, which is arranged on the lower side from substantially the center of the side inner lens 212 in the vertical direction and has a plurality of LEDs 216a (full-color LED) and 216b (white LED) mounted on the surface. The right side upper decorative board cover 218 that covers the rear side of the right side upper decorative board 214 and is attached to the side inner lens 212 so as to sandwich the right side upper decorative board 214, and the right side that covers the rear side of the right side lower decorative board 216. It includes a side lens 210 and a right side lower decorative board cover 220 attached to the side decorative frame 202 so as to sandwich the lower decorative board 216.

Further, the right side decoration unit 200 supports the upper right speaker 222 arranged in the upper left portion in the front view of the side decoration frame 202 and the upper right side speaker 222 and is fitted to the rear upper portion of the side decoration frame 202. It is provided with a speaker bracket 224, an upper speaker cover 226 sandwiched between the upper speaker bracket 224 and the side decorative frame 202, and a side sublens 228 attached from the inside to a predetermined position on the side surface of the side upper cover 208. There is. On the rear side of the side sub-lens 228, the LED 214c of the decorative substrate 214 on the right side is arranged so as to be light-emitting and decorated by the LED 214c.

In the right side decorative unit 200, the side decorative frame 202, the side upper decorative member 204, the right side upper decorative board cover 218, and the right side lower decorative board cover 220 are formed of a translucent member, and the side decoration is formed. A plating layer of a predetermined color is formed on the surfaces of the frame 202 and the side upper decorative member 204. Further, the side upper decorative lens 206, the side upper cover 208, the side lens 210, the side inner lens 212, the upper speaker cover 226, the upper speaker bracket 224, and the side sub lens 228 of the right side decorative unit 200 are transparent members. The side upper decorative lens 206, the side lens 210, the side inner lens 212, the upper speaker bracket 224, the upper speaker cover 226, and the side sub lens 228 are substantially transparent. It is said that.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the back surface side of the side lens 210 and the upper speaker cover 226 formed substantially transparently, and the front surface side of the side inner lens 212 and the upper speaker bracket 224 are formed in a polyhedral shape. , Light can be diffusely refracted. Therefore, the LEDs 214a, 214b, 216a, 216b and the like mounted on the surface (front surface) of the right side upper decorative substrate 214 and the right side lower decorative substrate 216 arranged behind the side lens 210 and the side inner lens 212 are used for games. It cannot be clearly seen from the person's side. Further, the front surface of the right side upper decorative substrate 214 and the right side lower decorative substrate 216 is white, and the right side decorative unit 200 is efficiently emitted and decorated by the light of the mounted LEDs 214a, 214b, 216a, 216b and the like. In addition to being able to do this, the decorative substrates 214 and 216 are inconspicuous when the LEDs 214a, 214b, 216a and 216b are not lit. The upper right side decorative substrate 214 and the lower right decorative substrate 216 are connected to the peripheral control unit 4140, respectively, and the LEDs 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a are driven by the drive signal (light emission drive signal) from the peripheral control unit 4140. , 216b can be appropriately made to emit light to make the right side decoration unit 200 emit light.

As shown in the figure, the side decoration frame 202 in the right side decoration unit 200 of this example is formed in an arc shape substantially along the game window 101, specifically, along the outer periphery of the game window 101. The arc-shaped inner frame 202a and the upper part which is arranged at a position separated from the inner frame 202a and is linear along the outer periphery of the side surface of the door frame 5 (door frame base unit 100) from the lower end to the upper part. The outer frame 202b is formed in an arc shape so as to be curved toward the upper end edge of the inner frame 202a, the upper end frame 202c connecting the outer frame 202b and the upper end edges of the inner frame 202a, and the outer frame 202b and the inner frame. The lower end frame 202d that connects the lower end edges of the 202a and the inner frame 202a and the outer frame 202b that are arranged at a plurality of locations (four locations in this example) along the circumferential direction of the inner frame 202a and the outer frame 202b are connected. A partition frame 202f having a slit 202e having a predetermined width is provided.

The inner frame 202a of the side decorative frame 202 extends at substantially the same position with respect to the front-rear direction and with substantially the same width in the circumferential direction of the game window 101. On the other hand, in the outer frame 202b, the rear end of the linear portion extending along the side surface of the door frame 5 is formed linearly at substantially the same position as the rear end of the inner frame 202a, whereas the front end is up and down. It is formed in an arc shape so that both ends of the door protrude forward. Further, the curved arcuate portion above the linearly extending vertical portion of the outer frame 202b is formed in an arcuate shape curved in the front-rear direction so that the upper end edge side projects forward. Further, the partition wall frame 202f of the side decorative frame 202 has a shape curved in the front-rear direction so that the portion between the inner frame 202a and the outer frame 202b protrudes most forward. The partition frame 202f is arranged on radiation extending radially from the vicinity of the lower center of the game window 101 in a state where the door frame 5 is assembled (see FIG. 17 and the like).

As shown in the figure, the side decorative frame 202 has a form in which the space between the inner frame 202a and the outer frame 202b is divided into a plurality of parts in the circumferential direction (longitudinal direction) by a plurality of partition wall frames 202f. The opening is a light emitting decorative opening 202 g, and the peripheral lens portion 210 a of the side lens 210, which will be described later, is fitted from the rear side. Further, the radial lens portion 210b of the side lens 210 is fitted into the slit 202e of the partition wall frame 202f from the rear side. Further, the partition wall frame 202f can partition the slit 202e and the light emitting decorative opening 202g, so that the light emitting modes can be different from each other.

As shown in the figure, the side upper decorative member 204 of the right side decorative unit 200 extends in the left-right direction at a constant height along the arc-shaped upper portion of the outer frame 202b of the side decorative frame 202, and also has a rear surface. Is formed in a recessed state, and a plurality of openings 204a penetrating in the front-rear direction are formed on the front surface. The side upper decorative member 204 is provided with a Jomon-shaped relief on the upper side along the arranged openings 204a.

On the other hand, the side upper decorative lens 206 has a shape that can be fitted in the recessed rear surface of the side upper decorative member 204, and also passes from the rear side of the side upper decorative member 204 to the vicinity of the front end thereof through the opening 204a. It is provided with a plurality of light guide portions 206a capable of projecting. The tip of the light guide portion 206a is formed in a polyhedral shape, and by inserting and fitting it into the opening 204a of the side upper decorative member 204, it is possible to make the opening 204a look like a jewel is fitted. You can do it. Further, the light from the right side upper decorative substrate 214 arranged on the rear side by the light guide portion 206a of the side upper decorative lens 204 can be radiated forward (player side) from the opening 204a of the side upper decorative member 204. At the same time, the tip of the light guide portion 206a can be made to shine as a jewel.

The upper side surface and the right side surface (when viewed from the front) of the side upper cover 208 of the right side decorative unit 200 have a shape substantially along the outer circumference of the door frame 5 (door frame unit base 100), and the lower surface (lower end). Has a shape substantially in line with the side upper decorative member 204. The side upper cover 208 is formed with a mounting step portion 208a that is open downward and recessed rearward so that the side upper decorative member 204 can be accommodated in the lower front portion. A mounting boss, a mounting hole, or the like for mounting the side upper decorative member 204 or the like is formed on the end surface. Further, on the right side surface of the side upper cover 208, two notches 208b arranged vertically are formed, and the side sublens 228 attached internally via the notches 208b can be seen toward the surface side. It has become. By fitting the side sub-lens 228 into the notch 208b of the side upper cover 208, it is possible to emit light in a different manner only in this portion.

The side lens 210 of the right side decoration unit 200 has a shape substantially in line with the side decoration frame 202 and a shape in which the rear surface is recessed, and is inserted later into the light emitting decoration opening 202 g of the side decoration frame 202. It includes a peripheral lens portion 210a and a radiation lens portion 210b that is later inserted into the slit 202e of the side decorative frame 202. As shown in the figure, this side lens 210 does not have a peripheral lens portion 210a corresponding to a light emitting decorative opening 202g in contact with the upper end frame 202c of the side decorative frame 202, and the corresponding portions are opened forward and downward. It is said that the accommodation stage is 210c. The upper right speaker 222, the upper speaker bracket 224, and the like, which will be described later, are accommodated in the accommodating stage 210c. Further, the side lens 210 includes a mounting portion 210d that forms the upper surface of the accommodating step portion 210c and is fixed to the rear side of the mounting step portion 208a in the side upper cover 208.

The side lens 210 has a curved surface shape in which the front surfaces of the peripheral lens portion 210a and the radial lens portion 210b bulge forward so as to substantially follow the front end of the partition wall frame 202f of the side decorative frame 202. Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, the back surface (inner surface) side of the peripheral lens portion 210a is formed in a polyhedral shape by a plurality of surfaces facing different directions, and the plate thickness of the peripheral lens portion 210a is non-uniform. As a result, the light transmitted through the peripheral lens portion 210a is diffusely refracted. Further, the inner surface formed in the shape of a polyhedron makes it possible for the peripheral lens portion 210a to exhibit a brilliant and characteristic appearance.

The side inner lens 212 is inserted and fitted into the inside of the side lens 210 from the rear side, and corresponds to a portion of the side lens 210 in which the peripheral lens portion 210a and the radial lens portion 210b are formed, as shown in the figure. Corresponds to the main body portion 212a having a recessed rear surface and the radial lens portion 210b (slit 202e of the side decorative frame 202) that is continuous from the rear end of the main body portion 212a and protrudes forward from the main body portion 212a. It is provided with a plate-shaped light guide portion 212b arranged at the above-mentioned position. The main body portion 212a of the side inner lens 212 is formed so that the front surface thereof is reserved by a predetermined distance from the inner surface of the side lens 210. Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, one surface of the main body portion 212a of the side inner lens 212 is formed into a polyhedron shape by a plurality of surfaces facing different directions, similarly to the peripheral lens portion 210a of the side lens 210. It is formed, and the plate thickness of the main body portion 212a becomes non-uniform, so that the light transmitted through the main body portion 212a is diffusely refracted.

By combining this side inner lens 212 with the side lens 210, the light transmitted through the peripheral lens portion 210a and the main body portion 212a can be doubly refracted, and the shape of an object arranged on the opposite side can be changed. It is almost unrecognizable. In addition, due to diffused refraction and diffused reflection due to the polyhedral shape, the appearance of the side lens 210 (peripheral lens portion 210a) can be made to shine and the perspective can be made to look unclear and mysterious.

The upper right side decorative substrate 214 and the lower right decorative substrate 216 of the right side decorative unit 200 have a plurality of high-brightness color LEDs mounted on the surface thereof, and the light emitting decorative opening 202 g of the side decorative frame 202 (periphery of the side lens 210). The LEDs 214a and 216a arranged at positions corresponding to the lens portion 210a) have a relatively wide irradiation angle (for example, 60 ° to 180 °), and the slit 202e (side lens 210 of the side decorative frame 202) is used. As the LEDs 214b and 216b arranged at positions corresponding to the radiation lens portion 210b), those having a relatively narrow irradiation angle (for example, 15 ° to 60 °) are used. In this example, the LED 214c of the decorative substrate 214 on the right side, which emits and decorates the side sub-lens 228, is a red LED.

The upper right speaker 222 of the right side decorative unit 200 outputs sound in the mid-high range like the side speaker 130, and can be attached to a predetermined position in a predetermined direction by the upper speaker bracket 224. There is. The upper speaker bracket 224 that supports the upper right speaker 222 includes a cylindrical horn portion 224a that projects diagonally forward and downward at the center of the left and right sides of the pachinko machine 1 when viewed from the front. The upper right speaker 222 is fixed to the back side of the upper end of the horn portion 224a in the upper speaker bracket 224, so that the upper right speaker 222 cannot be seen from the player side by the horn portion 224a in front view. It has become.

The upper right speaker 222 of this example is emitted from the upper part of the pachinko machine 1 toward the lower player by the horn part 224a of the upper speaker bracket 224, and is caused by noise with respect to other pachinko machines. It has become difficult to do. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the upper speaker bracket 224 also has a plurality of front surfaces facing different directions like the peripheral lens portion 210a of the side lens 210 and the main body portion 212a of the side inner lens 212. The surface is formed in a polyhedral shape, and the plate thickness becomes non-uniform, so that the light transmitted through the upper speaker bracket 224 is diffusely refracted.

Further, the upper speaker cover 226 covering the front side of the upper speaker bracket 224 is fitted from the rear side of the side decorative frame 202 so as to close the light emitting decorative opening 202g in contact with the upper end frame 202c of the side decorative frame 202. The surface is formed in a curved surface shape that is continuous with the surface of the side lens 210. Further, a plurality of through holes 226a are formed on the surface of the upper speaker cover 226 so that the sound from the upper right speaker 222 can be sufficiently transmitted to the player side.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the upper speaker cover 226 also has a plurality of inner surface faces facing different directions like the peripheral lens portion 210a of the side lens 210 and the main body portion 212a of the side inner lens 212. The surface is formed in a polyhedron shape, and the plate thickness becomes non-uniform, so that the light transmitted through the upper speaker cover 226 is diffusely refracted. Therefore, in the upper speaker cover 226 and the upper speaker bracket 224, the diffused refraction of light makes it difficult for the player to see the through hole 226a formed in the upper right speaker 222 and the upper speaker cover 226. The appearance can be similar to that of the peripheral lens portion 210a of the side lens 210.

[1-2C. Left side decoration unit]
Subsequently, the left side decorative unit 240 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 34 to 36. FIG. 34 (A) is a front perspective view of the left side decorative unit in the door frame, and FIG. 34 (B) is a rear perspective view of the left side decorative unit in the door frame. Further, FIG. 35 is an exploded perspective view of the left side decorative unit disassembled and viewed from the front. Further, FIG. 36 is an exploded perspective view of the left side decorative unit as viewed after being disassembled.

As shown in the figure, the left side decoration unit 240 of the door frame 5 in the present embodiment decorates the left half of the front outer circumference of the game window 101 except for the lower part in the front view, and the inside is the game window 101. It is formed in an arc shape along the outer side, and is formed in a straight line along the outer circumference of the door frame base unit 100, and is formed substantially symmetrically with the right side decorative unit 200. The left side decoration unit 240 is provided with respect to the side decoration frame 242 forming the skeleton of the left side decoration unit 240, the side upper decoration member 244 arranged along the upper side of the side decoration frame 242, and the side upper decoration member 244. The side upper decorative lens 246 to be fitted from the rear side, the side decorative frame 242 and the upper side of the side upper decorative member 244 are covered, and the side upper decorative member 244 is attached to the front side so as to sandwich the side upper decorative lens 246. The side upper cover 248, the side lens 250 that supports the lower part of the side upper cover 248 and is fitted and fixed to the side frame 242 from the rear side, and the side inner lens 252 that is fitted to the back side of the side lens 250. , Is equipped.

Further, the left side decoration unit 240 is arranged on the rear side of the side inner lens 252 from substantially the center to the upper side in the vertical direction, and a plurality of LEDs 254a (full color LED) and 254b (white LED) are mounted on the surface of the left side decoration unit 240. A substrate 254 and a decorative substrate 256 on the lower left side, which is arranged on the lower side from substantially the center of the side inner lens 252 in the vertical direction and has a plurality of LEDs 256a (full-color LED) and 256b (white LED) mounted on the surface. The left side upper decorative board cover 258 that covers the rear side of the left side upper decorative board 254 and is attached to the side inner lens 252 so as to sandwich the left side upper decorative board 254, and the left side that covers the rear side of the left side lower decorative board 256. It includes a side lens 250 and a left side lower decorative board cover 260 attached to the side decorative frame 242 so as to sandwich the lower decorative board 256.

Further, the left side decorative unit 240 supports the upper left speaker 262 arranged in the upper right portion in the front view of the side decorative frame 242 and the upper left side speaker 262 and is fitted to the rear upper portion of the side decorative frame 242. It includes a speaker bracket 264 and an upper speaker cover 266 sandwiched between the upper speaker bracket 264 and the side decorative frame 242.

In the left side decorative unit 240, the side decorative frame 242, the side upper decorative member 244, the left side upper decorative board cover 258, and the left side lower decorative board cover 260 are formed of a translucent member, and the side decoration is formed. A plating layer of a predetermined color is formed on the surfaces of the frame 242 and the side upper decorative member 244. Further, the side upper decorative lens 246, the side upper cover 248, the side lens 250, the side inner lens 252, the upper speaker cover 266, and the upper speaker bracket 264 of the left side decorative unit 240 are formed of a translucent member. The side upper cover 248 is substantially entirely milky white, and the side upper decorative lens 246, the side lens 250, the side inner lens 252, the upper speaker bracket 264, and the upper speaker cover 266 are substantially transparent.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the back surface side of the side lens 250 and the upper speaker cover 266 formed substantially transparently, and the front surface side of the side inner lens 252 and the upper speaker bracket 264 are formed in a polyhedral shape. , Light can be diffusely refracted. Therefore, the LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b and the like mounted on the surface (front surface) of the left side upper decorative substrate 254 and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 arranged behind the side lens 250 and the side inner lens 252 are used for games. It cannot be clearly seen from the person's side. Further, the front surface of the left side upper decorative substrate 254 and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 is white, and the left side decorative unit 240 is efficiently emitted and decorated by the mounted LEDs such as 254a, 254b, 256a, and 256b. In addition to being able to do this, the decorative substrates 254 and 256 are inconspicuous when the LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a and 256b are not lit. The upper left side decorative substrate 254 and the lower left side decorative substrate 256 are connected to the peripheral control unit 4140, respectively, and the LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b are driven by the drive signal (light emission drive signal) from the peripheral control unit 4140. Can be appropriately emitted to emit light to decorate the left side decoration unit 240.

As shown in the figure, the side decoration frame 242 in the left side decoration unit 240 of this example is formed in an arc shape substantially along the game window 101, specifically, along the outer periphery of the game window 101. The arc-shaped inner frame 242a and the upper part which is arranged at a position separated from the inner frame 242a to the outside and is linearly formed along the outer periphery of the side surface of the door frame 5 (door frame base unit 100) from the lower end to the upper part. The outer frame 242b is formed in an arc shape so as to be curved toward the upper end edge of the inner frame 242a, the upper end frame 242c connecting the outer frame 242b and the upper end edges of the inner frame 242a, and the outer frame 242b and the inner frame. The lower end frame 242d that connects the lower end edges of the 242a and the inner frame 242a and the outer frame 242b that are arranged at a plurality of locations (four locations in this example) along the circumferential direction of the inner frame 242a and the outer frame 242b are connected. A partition frame 242f having a slit 242e having a predetermined width is provided.

The inner frame 242a of the side decorative frame 242 extends at substantially the same position in the front-rear direction and in the circumferential direction of the game window 101 with substantially the same width. On the other hand, in the outer frame 242b, the rear end of the linear portion extending along the side surface of the door frame 5 is formed linearly at substantially the same position as the rear end of the inner frame 242a, whereas the front end is up and down. It is formed in an arc shape so that both ends of the door protrude forward. Further, the curved arcuate portion above the linearly extending vertical portion of the outer frame 242b is formed in an arcuate shape curved in the front-rear direction so that the upper end edge side projects forward. Further, the partition wall frame 242f of the side decorative frame 242 has a shape curved in the front-rear direction so that the portion between the inner frame 242a and the outer frame 242b protrudes most forward. The partition frame 242f is arranged on radiation extending radially from the vicinity of the lower center of the game window 101 in a state where the door frame 5 is assembled (see FIG. 17 and the like).

As shown in the figure, the side decorative frame 242 has a form in which the space between the inner frame 242a and the outer frame 242b is divided into a plurality of parts in the circumferential direction (longitudinal direction) by a plurality of partition wall frames 242f. The opening is a light emitting decorative opening 242 g, and the peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250, which will be described later, is fitted from the rear side. Further, the radiation lens portion 250b of the side lens 250 is fitted into the slit 242e of the partition frame 242f from the rear side. Further, the partition wall frame 242f can partition the slit 242e and the light emitting decorative opening 242g, so that the light emitting modes can be different from each other.

As shown in the figure, the side upper decorative member 244 of the left side decorative unit 240 extends in the left-right direction at a constant height along the arc-shaped upper portion of the outer frame 242b of the side decorative frame 242, and also has a rear surface. Is formed in a recessed state, and a plurality of openings 244a penetrating in the front-rear direction are formed on the front surface. The side upper decorative member 244 is provided with a Jomon-shaped relief on the upper side along the arranged openings 244a.

On the other hand, the side upper decorative lens 246 has a shape that can be fitted in the recessed rear surface of the side upper decorative member 244, and also passes from the rear side of the side upper decorative member 244 to the vicinity of the front end thereof through the opening 244a. It is provided with a plurality of light guide portions 246a capable of projecting. The tip of the light guide portion 246a is formed in a polyhedral shape, and by inserting and fitting the light guide portion 246a into the opening portion 244a of the side upper decorative member 244, it is possible to make it appear as if a jewel is fitted in the opening portion 244a. You can do it. Further, the light from the left side upper decorative substrate 254 arranged on the rear side by the light guide portion 246a of the side upper decorative lens 244 can be radiated forward (player side) from the opening 244a of the side upper decorative member 244. At the same time, the tip of the light guide portion 246a can be made to shine as a jewel.

The upper side surface and the left side surface (when viewed from the front) of the side upper cover 248 of the left side decorative unit 240 have a shape substantially along the outer circumference of the door frame 5 (door frame unit base 100), and the lower surface (lower end). Is shaped to substantially follow the side upper decorative member 244. The side upper cover 248 has a mounting step portion 248a that is open downward and recessed rearward so that the side upper decorative member 244 can be accommodated in the lower front portion. A mounting boss, a mounting hole, or the like for mounting the side upper decorative member 244 or the like is formed on the end surface. Further, the side upper cover 248 is provided with a covering portion 248b on the outer side surface (left side surface in front view) that covers the upper shaft support portion 156 of the reinforcing unit 150 in the door frame base unit 100 from the front side.

The side lens 250 of the left side decoration unit 240 has a shape substantially in line with the side decoration frame 242 and a shape in which the rear surface is recessed, and is inserted later into the light emitting decoration opening 242 g of the side decoration frame 242. It includes a peripheral lens portion 250a and a radiation lens portion 250b that is later inserted into the slit 242e of the side decorative frame 242. As shown in the figure, this side lens 250 does not have a peripheral lens portion 250a corresponding to a light emitting decorative opening 242g in contact with the upper end frame 242c of the side decorative frame 242, and the corresponding portions are opened forward and downward. It is said that the accommodation stage is 250c. The upper left speaker 262, the upper speaker bracket 264, and the like, which will be described later, are accommodated in the accommodating stage portion 250c. Further, the side lens 250 includes a mounting portion 250d that forms the upper surface of the accommodating step portion 250c and is fixed to the rear side of the mounting step portion 248a in the side upper cover 248.

The side lens 250 has a curved surface shape in which the front surfaces of the peripheral lens portion 250a and the radial lens portion 250b bulge forward so as to substantially follow the front end of the partition wall frame 242f of the side decorative frame 242. Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, the back surface (inner surface) side of the peripheral lens portion 250a is formed in a polyhedral shape by a plurality of surfaces facing different directions, and the plate thickness of the peripheral lens portion 250a is non-uniform. As a result, the light transmitted through the peripheral lens portion 250a is diffusely refracted. Further, the inner surface formed in the shape of a polyhedron makes it possible for the peripheral lens portion 250a to exhibit a brilliant and characteristic appearance.

The side inner lens 252 is inserted and fitted inside the side lens 250 from the rear side, and corresponds to a portion of the side lens 250 in which the peripheral lens portion 250a and the radial lens portion 250b are formed, as shown in the figure. Corresponds to the main body portion 252a having a recessed rear surface and the radial lens portion 250b (slit 242e of the side decorative frame 242) that is continuous from the rear end of the main body portion 252a and protrudes forward from the main body portion 252a. It is provided with a plate-shaped light guide portion 252b, which is arranged at the above-mentioned position. The main body portion 252a of the side inner lens 252 is formed so that the front surface thereof is reserved by a predetermined distance from the inner surface of the side lens 250. Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, one surface of the main body portion 252a of the side inner lens 252 is formed into a polyhedron shape by a plurality of surfaces facing different directions, similarly to the peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250. It is formed, and the plate thickness of the main body portion 252a becomes non-uniform, so that the light transmitted through the main body portion 252a is diffusely refracted.

By combining this side inner lens 252 with the side lens 250, the light transmitted through the peripheral lens portion 250a and the main body portion 252a can be doubly refracted, and the shape of an object arranged on the opposite side can be changed. It is almost unrecognizable. In addition, due to diffused refraction and diffused reflection due to the polyhedral shape, the appearance of the side lens 250 (peripheral lens portion 250a) can be made to shine and the perspective can be made to look unclear and mysterious.

The left side upper decorative substrate 254 and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 of the left side decorative unit 240 have a plurality of high-brightness color LEDs mounted on the surface thereof, and the light emitting decorative opening 242 g of the side decorative frame 242 (periphery of the side lens 250). The LEDs 254a and 256a arranged at positions corresponding to the lens portion 250a) have a relatively wide irradiation angle (for example, 60 ° to 180 °), and the slit 242e of the side decorative frame 242 (of the side lens 250) is used. As the LEDs 254b and 256b arranged at positions corresponding to the radiation lens unit 250b), those having a relatively narrow irradiation angle (for example, 15 ° to 60 °) are used.

The upper left speaker 262 of the left side decoration unit 240 outputs sound in the mid-high range like the side speaker 130, and can be attached to a predetermined position in a predetermined direction by the upper speaker bracket 264. There is. The upper speaker bracket 264 that supports the upper left speaker 262 includes a cylindrical horn portion 264a that projects diagonally forward and downward at the center of the left and right sides of the pachinko machine 1 when viewed from the front. The upper left speaker 262 is fixed to the back side of the upper end of the horn portion 264a in the upper speaker bracket 264, so that the upper left speaker 262 cannot be seen from the player side by the horn portion 264a in front view. It has become.

The upper left speaker 262 of this example is emitted from the upper part of the pachinko machine 1 toward the lower player by the horn part 264a of the upper speaker bracket 264, and is caused by noise with respect to other pachinko machines. It has become difficult to do. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the upper speaker bracket 264 also has a plurality of front surfaces facing different directions like the peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 and the main body portion 252a of the side inner lens 252. The surface is formed in a polyhedral shape, and the plate thickness becomes non-uniform, so that the light transmitted through the upper speaker bracket 264 is diffusely refracted.

Further, the upper speaker cover 266 covering the front side of the upper speaker bracket 264 is fitted from the rear side of the side decorative frame 242 so as to close the light emitting decorative opening 242g in contact with the upper end frame 242c of the side decorative frame 242. The surface is formed in a curved surface shape that is continuous with the surface of the side lens 250. Further, a plurality of through holes 266a are formed on the surface of the upper speaker cover 266 so that the sound from the upper left speaker 262 can be sufficiently transmitted to the player side.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the upper speaker cover 266 also has a plurality of inner surface faces facing different directions like the peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 and the main body portion 252a of the side inner lens 252. The surface is formed in a polyhedron shape, and the plate thickness becomes non-uniform, so that the light transmitted through the upper speaker cover 266 is diffusely refracted. Therefore, in the upper speaker cover 266 and the upper speaker bracket 264, the diffused refraction of light makes it difficult for the player to see the through hole 266a formed in the upper left speaker 262 and the upper speaker cover 266. The appearance can be similar to that of the peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250.

[1-2D. Top decoration unit]
Subsequently, the upper decorative unit 280 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 37 to 40. FIG. 37 is a front perspective view of the upper decorative unit in the door frame, and FIG. 38 is a rear perspective view of the upper decorative unit in the door frame. Further, FIG. 39 is an exploded perspective view of the upper decorative unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 40 is an exploded perspective view of the upper decorative unit disassembled and viewed from the rear.

As shown in FIG. 17, the upper decorative unit 280 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment has the upper end edges on the center side of the right side decorative unit 200 and the left side decorative unit 240 at the upper center of the front surface of the door frame 5. It is attached between them and decorates between them. As shown in the figure, the upper decorative unit 280 has a substantially inverted isosceles triangular shape as a whole when viewed from the front, and penetrates both the left and right sides of the central opening 281a and the central opening 281a which largely penetrate the center. A front decorative member 281 having a pair of side openings 281b into which the tip of the upper bracket 120 of the door frame base unit 100 is inserted above the central opening 281a, and a rear side inside the central opening 281a of the front decorative member 281. The central lens 282 fitted from the rear lens 282, the inner lens 283 arranged at the rear end of the central lens 282, the pair of side lenses 284 fitted from the rear side into the side opening 281b of the front decorative member 281 and the outer shape of the front view. A main body member 285 having a shape similar to that of the front decorative member 281 and attached to the rear side of the front decorative member 281 so as to sandwich the central lens 282, the inner lens 283, and the pair of side lenses 284 with the front decorative member 281. The upper decorative substrate 286, which is arranged on the rear side of the main body member 285 and has a plurality of color LEDs 286a and 286b mounted on the front surface, and the outer shape of the front view are substantially the same as the main body portion so as to cover the upper decorative substrate 286 from the rear side. It is provided with a board cover 287 attached to the rear surface of the main body member 285.

Further, the upper decorative unit 280 extends rearward while being bent so as to be continuous from the lower end of the front decorative member 281. The upper portion of the front end is supported by the front decorative member 281 and the rear end is attached to the door frame base unit 100 and lowered. A lower surface decorative member 288 having a pair of lower opening 288a penetrating toward the lower surface, and a lower lens 289 fitted to the lower opening 288a of the lower surface decorative member 288 from above and fixed to the lower surface decorative member 288 and the substrate cover 287. , Is equipped. In this example, a plating layer having a metallic luster is formed on the surfaces of the front decorative member 281 and the lower surface decorative member 288. The LED 286a of the upper decorative substrate 286 is arranged at a position corresponding to the central lens 282, and the LED 286b is arranged at a position corresponding to the side lens 284 and the lower lens 289. The lens 284 and the lower lens 289 can be individually luminescently decorated. Further, in this example, the LED 286a is a full-color LED, and the LED 286b is a high-luminance white LED.

In the front decorative member 281 of the upper decorative unit 280 of this example, the inner peripheral shape of the central opening 281a is a side in which the central upper end extends to the left and right in front view, the central lower end is the apex, and each side is a loose arc shape. It is formed in a variable pentagonal shape extending to the center, and has three protrusions extending into the central opening 281a from the substantially center of the upper side on both sides of the upper side and the apex of the lower end. Further, the front decorative member 281 is formed with a plurality of streaks extending diagonally outward and upward on the outside of the upper side of the central opening 281a, and the front decorative member 281 is formed from the central opening 281a by this streak. The blade is formed in a shape as if it is extended, and the side opening 281b is formed along the streak carving.

The central lens 282 fitted in the central opening 281a of the front decorative member 281 has an outer shape substantially the same as that of the central opening 281a, has a shape bulging forward, and has a front surface thereof. Is formed into a polyhedron by a plurality of faces facing different directions. The central lens 282 of this example is formed of a transparent (colorless transparent, colored transparent) resin. By fitting the central lens 282 into the central opening 281a of the front decorative member 281, the central lens 282 looks like a jewel cut in a trilliant cut, and the front decorative member 281 looks like a jewel pedestal. ..

Further, the inner lens 283 arranged on the rear side of the central lens 282 is formed of a transparent resin so as to close the opening on the rear side of the central lens 282, and has a fine lens (or prism) on the surface. A plurality of them are formed so that the light from the upper decorative substrate 286 can be widely diffused toward the central lens 282. On the other hand, the side lens 284 fitted in the side opening 281b of the front decorative member 281 is formed of a transparent resin so that the front surface thereof is substantially continuous with the front surface of the front decorative member 281 in a state of being fitted in the side opening 281b. Has been done. Similar to the inner lens 282, a plurality of fine lenses (or prisms) are formed on the back surface side of the side lens 284, and the entire side lens 284 is substantially uniform due to the light emitted from the upper decorative substrate 286. It is designed to be able to emit light.

The inner lens 283 and the side lens 284 have a cloudy appearance due to a plurality of fine lenses formed on the surface thereof, so that the rear side cannot be clearly seen through the inner lens 283 and the side lens 284. It has become.

The main body member 285 of the upper decorative unit 280 extends in a cylindrical shape in the front-rear direction with an outer shape substantially following the shape of the central opening 281a of the front decorative member 281, and the front end opening is inclined diagonally downward and the rear end is closed. The central portion 285a, which is inclined diagonally upward, and the rear end, which is arranged and closed on both sides of the central portion 285a, are located at substantially the same position as the rear end of the central portion 285a, and the front end extends shorter than the central portion 285a. It is provided with a concave side portion 285b and a plurality of openings 285c formed at positions corresponding to the LEDs 286a and 286b that penetrate the rear end surfaces of the central portion 285a and the side portions 285b and are mounted on the upper decorative substrate 286. ing. When the upper decorative substrate 286 is arranged on the rear side of the main body member 285, the LED 286a of the upper decorative substrate 286 is inserted and arranged in the opening 285c so that the light from the LED 286a does not leak to the rear side. It has become. Further, the central portion 285a and the side portion 285b of the main body member 285 are recessed from the front side to the rear side so that the light from the corresponding LEDs 285a and 286b does not affect the sides.

Further, the lower surface decorative member 288 of the upper decorative unit 280 is formed so as to become thinner toward the rear, and the left and right side surface shapes thereof are the upper speaker covers 226 and 26 in the right side decorative unit 200 and the left side decorative unit 240. The shape is substantially the same as the shape of the end portions of the upper end frames 202c and 242c of the upper end frames 202c and 242c, and the ends of the upper end frames 202c and 242c of the upper speaker covers 226 and 266 are placed and fixed. ing. The lower lens 289 is sandwiched between the lower surface decorative member 288 and the upper speaker covers 226 and 266. Further, light from the right side upper decorative substrate 214 and the left side upper decorative substrate 254 is supplied to the lower lens 289 via the upper speaker brackets 224, 264 of the right side decorative unit 200 and the left side decorative unit 240. It is designed to emit light.

[1-2E. Side speaker cover]
Next, the pair of side speaker covers 290 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 22 to 25. The side speaker cover 290 covers and decorates the front surface of the side speaker 130 attached to the door frame base unit 100, and includes the lower ends of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240, and the dish unit 300. It is placed between.

The side speaker cover 290 supports the cover body 291 having a plurality of disc-shaped holes curved so as to cover the front surface of the side speaker 130 attached to the door frame base unit 100, and the outer periphery of the cover body 291 from the front side. A main body member 292 having an annular opening and being formed to be continuous with the lower ends of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240, and a lower plate of the plate unit 300 arranged under the main body member 292. It includes a lower member 293 formed so as to be continuous with the left and right rear ends of the cover 328. In this example, since the cover body 291 is formed of a predetermined punching metal, it is difficult to be deformed even if it is pushed or hit from the front side, and the side speaker 130 is possible. It can be protected as long as possible.

The side speaker cover 290 has a plating layer having a metallic luster formed on the surface of the main body member 292. Further, the lower member 293 is formed of a milky white translucent member similar to the lower plate cover 328 in the plate unit 300 described later.

The side speaker cover 290 of this example is designed to be mounted on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 independently of the right side decoration unit 200, the left side decoration unit 240, and the dish unit 300, and is the door frame base main body. It is fixed to the door frame base main body 100 by a predetermined screw inserted from the rear side of the door frame base main body 110 through a mounting hole 110h (see FIG. 18) formed at a predetermined position of the 110.

As a result, the side speaker cover 290 can be removed to the front side by removing the security cover 180 in the door frame 5 and then removing the screw attaching the side speaker cover 290 from the rear side of the door frame 5. By removing the speaker bracket 132 from the front side of the door frame 5, the side speaker 130 can be removed. Therefore, even if it becomes necessary to replace the side speaker 130 for some reason, the front surface of the side speaker 130 without removing the right side decoration unit 200, the left side decoration unit 240, the dish unit 300, etc. from the door frame 5. Only the side speaker cover 290 that covers the side speaker cover 290 can be easily removed, and the side speaker 130 can be easily replaced.

As described above, in this example, in order to replace the side speaker 130 attached between the right side decoration unit 200, the left side decoration unit 240 and the dish unit 300 on the front surface of the door frame base main body 110 in the door frame 5. First, since the main body member 292 arranged on the front side of the speaker in the side speaker cover 290 is detachably attached to the door frame base main body 110 from the rear side, the door closing the front surface of the main body frame 3 is closed. After opening the frame 5 to the front side and removing the attachment of the main body member 292 to the door frame base main body 110 from the rear side of the door frame 5, the main body member 292 and the cover body 291 are attached to the door frame base main body 110 (door frame 5). When the door frame 5 is moved to the front side and removed from the door frame 5, the side speaker 130 faces from the front side of the door frame 5. Since the side speaker 130 is sandwiched by the speaker bracket 132 attached to the door frame base main body 110 from the front side, the speaker from the front side of the door frame 5 to the door frame base main body 110 after the main body member 292 is removed. By removing the attachment of the bracket 132, releasing the pinching of the side speaker 130, and further moving the side speaker 130 to the front side, the left and right side decoration units 200 and 240 and the dish unit 300 can be moved to the door frame 5 (door frame base main body 110). ), The side speaker 130 can be removed from the door frame 5, and the side speaker 130 attached to the door frame 5 can be easily replaced.

Further, even if the side speaker 130 is damaged by a player or the like hitting the door frame 5 (side speaker cover 290) during the game, the side speaker 130 attached to the door frame 5 can be easily used as described above. Since it can be replaced, the interruption time of the game due to the replacement of the side speaker 130 can be shortened as much as possible, and the prolonged interruption causes the player to get irritated or lose interest, which reduces the interest. It can be suppressed from being stored.

Further, the side speaker 130 is sandwiched between the speaker bracket 132 and the door frame base main body 110, and the side speaker 130 can be mounted on the door frame 5 (without a mounting piece or a mounting hole for mounting on the side speaker 130). Since it can be attached to the door frame base body 110), it is not necessary to provide a mounting piece, a mounting hole, or the like on the side speaker 130, the cost for the side speaker 130 can be reduced, and the cost for the pachinko machine 1 increases. Can be suppressed.

Further, since the cover body 291 that covers the front surface of the side speaker 130 is formed of a metal plate (punching metal) having a plurality of through holes, even if a player or the like hits the cover body 291, the cover body 291 It is possible to reduce deformation and damage as much as possible, sufficiently protect the side speaker 130 to suppress the occurrence of defects, and improve the durability of the pachinko machine 1. ..

Further, since the side speaker cover 290 that covers the side speaker 130 is provided between the left and right side decoration units 200 and 240 and the dish unit 300, the side speaker 130 is located at a position relatively close to the player. However, as described above, the side speaker 130 can be easily replaced, and the interruption time of the game can be shortened as much as possible. It is possible to prevent the player's interest from deteriorating. Further, since the side speaker 130 is arranged as close as possible to the player, the sound output from the side speaker 130 can be heard more efficiently by the player, providing a powerful sound. At the same time, it is possible to entertain the sound production and suppress the decrease in the player's interest in the game.

Further, since the side speaker 130 is arranged between the left and right side decoration units 200 and 240 and the dish unit 300, the continuity of decoration by the side decoration units 200 and 240 can be maintained and the side decoration unit can be maintained. The pachinko machine 1 can be connected between the 200 and 240 and the plate unit 300 without a sense of discomfort, and the side speaker cover 290 can prevent the appearance from being deteriorated and attract the attention of the player. Further, since the surface shape of the main body member 292 in the side speaker cover 290 is formed so as to be continuous with the surface shapes of the side decoration units 200 and 240 and the dish unit 300, the side speaker cover 290 is used as the side decoration units 200 and 240. It is possible to make it look as if it is integrated with the door unit 300, and even if the side speaker 130 is provided on the front side separately from the side decoration units 200, 240, etc., it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable. The design of the front surface of the door frame 5 (pachinko machine 1) can be improved.

Further, when removing the main body member 292 of the side speaker cover 290 from the door frame 5, it is necessary to first remove the security cover 180 and the glass unit 590 attached to the rear side of the door frame 5, so that the main body member 292 must be removed. It takes a little time to remove the door, which makes it possible for those who are trying to commit fraudulent activities to take time to remove the glass unit, and also to make the removal work stand out by removing the relatively large glass unit 590. It is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 with high deterrence (safety) against fraudulent acts by hesitating theft and fraudulent acts.

[1-2F. Dish unit]
Subsequently, the dish unit 300 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 44. 41 is a front perspective view of the dish unit in the door frame, and FIG. 42 is a rear perspective view of the dish unit in the door frame. Further, FIG. 43 is an exploded perspective view of the dish unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 44 is an exploded perspective view of the dish unit disassembled and viewed from the rear.

The plate unit 300 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment includes an upper plate 301 and a lower plate 302 for storing the game balls paid out from the prize ball device 740 described later, and the game stored in the upper plate 301. The ball can be supplied to the hitting ball launching device 650, which will be described later, via the ball feeding unit 580. As shown in FIGS. 43 and 44, the dish unit 300 of this example includes a substantially plate-shaped dish unit base 310 extending in the left-right direction fixed to the lower front surface of the door frame base unit 100, and a dish unit base 310. When the upper and rear sides of the dish-shaped upper plate body 312, which is fixed to the center of the front surface and the upper and rear sides are opened and the left side (shaft support side) of the front view bulges forward greatly, and the upper outer circumference of the upper plate body 312 are covered, the front end is the front. The upper plate has an upper plate upper panel 314 formed in a curved shape so that the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward in the visual direction, and a plurality of openings 316a attached to the upper front end edge of the upper plate upper panel 314 and penetrating in the vertical direction. It has a plurality of light guide portions 318a arranged between the plate front decorative member 316, the upper plate front decorative member 316, and the upper plate upper panel 314 and fitted in the opening 316a of the upper plate front decorative member 316. The pair of left and right upper plate upper lenses 318 and the upper plate upper lens 318 are arranged on opposite sides of the upper plate upper panel 314, and are attached to the lower surface of the upper plate upper panel 314, and a plurality of color LEDs 320a, The upper plate right decorative board 320 and the upper plate left decorative board 322 arranged between the upper plate upper lens 318 and the upper plate upper panel 314 on which the upper plate right decorative board 320 and the upper plate left decorative board 322 are mounted. The upper plate upper inner lens 319 having a plurality of fine prisms that diffuse the light from the plate toward the upper plate upper lens 318 side is provided.

Further, in the plate unit 300, the plate unit 300 is fixed to the front surface of the plate unit base 310 on the lower side of the upper plate body 312, and the upper side and the rear side are opened. A dish-shaped lower plate body 324 formed so as to become lower toward the bottom, and a dish-shaped lower plate body 324 fixed to the upper part of the lower plate body 324 in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. A lower plate having a plate-shaped lower plate top plate 326 curved so as to become higher toward the center, an opening 328a along the front end of the lower plate top plate 326 and the lower plate main body 324, and a lower plate covering the outer periphery of the opening 328a. The cover 328, the plate side middle cover 330 arranged on both the left and right sides of the lower plate cover 328 and having an opening 330a penetrating in the front-rear direction, and the plate side middle cover fitted into the opening 330a of the plate side middle cover 330 from the rear side. It includes a lens 332 and a plate side outer cover 334 that is arranged on both the left and right outer sides of the plate side inner cover 330 and extends in the left-right direction to a position corresponding to the left and right ends of the door frame base unit 100. The dish side middle cover 330 arranged on the right side when viewed from the front has a lock hole 330b formed at the right end thereof so that the cylinder lock 1010 of the lock device 1000 described later faces. Further, a handle insertion hole 334a into which the handle device 500 is inserted is formed in the dish side outer cover 334 on the right side when viewed from the front.

Further, the plate unit 300 includes an upper plate ball removing mechanism 340 for pulling out a game ball attached to the plate unit base 310 and the upper plate main body 312 and stored in the upper plate 301 to the lower plate 302, and a lower plate main body 324. The lower plate ball pulling mechanism 350 attached to the lower surface and for pulling out the game ball stored in the lower plate 302 downward, and the lower plate unit base 310 attached to the upper left side of the plate unit base 310 and installed adjacent to the pachinko machine 1. It includes a ball lending unit 360 for operating a ball lending machine (also referred to as CR unit 6, see FIG. 186).

The plate unit 300 of this example constitutes an upper plate 301 capable of storing game balls by a part of the plate unit base 310, an upper plate main body 312, an upper plate upper panel 314, and the like. Further, the plate unit 300 constitutes a lower plate 302 capable of storing game balls by a part of the plate unit base 310, a lower plate main body 324, a lower plate top plate 326, a lower plate cover 328, and the like.

As shown in FIG. 43, the dish unit base 310 in the dish unit 300 is formed in a substantially plate shape extending in the left-right direction, and a decorative portion 310a having a predetermined shape is formed on the upper end edge extending to the left and right. It is prepared. A ball-renting unit mounting portion 310b for mounting the ball-renting unit 360 is formed at the left end of the decorative portion 310a so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction. The plate unit base 310 is arranged below the ball rental unit mounting portion 310b (near the upper left corner when viewed from the front), has a horizontally long rectangular shape and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and an upper plate ball supply port 310c and an upper plate ball supply. An upper plate ball discharge port 310d that penetrates in the front-rear direction and extends in the vertical direction to the lower side near the right end of the decorative portion 310a on the lower side of the mouth 310c (substantially in the middle of the plate unit base 310 in the height direction), and the upper plate. It is provided with a pair of lower plate support portions 310e arranged directly below the ball discharge port 310d and the upper plate ball supply port 310c and projecting forward and having the same upper surface. The upper plate ball discharge port 310d is continuously formed up to an intermediate position in the front-rear direction on the upper surface of the lower plate support portion 310e arranged directly below.

Further, the plate unit 300 is arranged between the pair of lower plate support portions 310e, and is fitted with the lower plate main body 324 and the rear end of the lower plate top plate 326 to form a horizontally long rectangular annular shape in the front view. It is provided with a groove 310f and a rectangular lower plate ball supply port 310g arranged in the lower part on the right side of the center of the portion surrounded by the lower plate support groove 310f and penetrating in the front-rear direction. Further, as shown in FIG. 44, the plate unit base 310 has a lower plate ball supply gutter 310h extending rearward in a cylindrical shape so as to be continuous with the lower plate ball supply port 310 g, and an open side of the lower plate ball supply gutter 310h. It is provided with a notch 310i formed on the side surface and having a size through which a game ball can pass.

The upper plate ball supply port 310c of the plate unit base 310 is a foul cover attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit via the notches 101a and 162 of the door frame base main body 110 and the reinforcing unit 150 in the door frame base unit 100. It communicates with the first ball outlet 544a of the unit 540. The front end of the upper plate ball supply port 310c is provided with an induction recess 310j that extends long to the right in the front view and is recessed rearward. The guide recess 310j is inclined so that the right end side in the front view is slightly lower in the left-right direction, and is inclined so that the front end side is lower in the front-rear direction. As a result, the height difference between the front end of the guide recess 310j and the bottom surface of the upper plate body 312 becomes higher toward the right end of the guide recess 310j, and the right end of the guide recess 310j is with the bottom surface of the upper plate body 312. The height difference is slightly higher than the outer diameter of the game ball.

Therefore, in this example, when the front side of the upper plate ball supply port 310c is closed by the game ball stored in the upper plate 301, the game ball discharged from the prize ball device 740 via the foul cover unit 540 is Since it becomes impossible to linearly exit into the upper plate 301 in front of the upper plate ball supply port 310c, the dispensed game ball abuts on the game ball with the front side of the upper plate ball supply port 310c closed and rolls. The direction changes, and it is guided to roll in the guide recess 310j to the right in the front view, and is discharged from the vicinity of the right end of the guide recess 310j to the upper side of the game ball stored in the upper plate 301. Become. As a result, the game balls can be automatically stored in the upper and lower two stages in the upper plate 301, so that the player does not pull the game balls by hand when the game balls block the front of the upper plate ball supply port 310c. However, it is possible to continue to supply (release) the paid-out game balls into the upper plate 301, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling annoyed by the storage of the game balls in the upper plate 301. It is possible to prevent the player from deteriorating the interest in the game by devoting himself to the operation of driving the game ball and the game by the driven game ball, and to increase the storage amount of the game ball in the upper plate 301. Can be done.

The upper plate ball discharge port 310d of the plate unit base 310 has an opening 344a of the upper plate ball removal base 344 in the upper plate ball removal mechanism 340 and a ball feed opening 113 of the door frame base main body 110 in the door frame base unit 100. It communicates with the entrance 581a of the ball feed unit 580 attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 via the door frame base unit 100. Further, in the lower plate ball supply port 310 g, the lower plate ball supply gutter 310h extending rearward from the rear side penetrates the ball passage port 110f of the door frame base main body 110 in the door frame base unit 100 and extends rearward. Above, the notch 310i of the lower plate ball supply gutter 310h is connected to the second ball outlet 544b of the foul cover unit 540 attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100, and the notch 310i of the lower plate ball supply gutter 310h is in the upper plate ball removal mechanism 340. It is connected to the ball removal flow path 344c of the precision ball removal base 344.

In this example, as shown in the figure, the front end of the lower plate ball supply port 310g is provided with an opening portion 310k that expands to the left in front view, and the lower plate ball supply port is provided by the expansion portion 310k. The front end of 310 g is in a state of spreading in the left-right direction. As a result, it is possible to prevent early ball clogging at the lower plate ball supply port 310 g due to the game balls in the lower plate 301 accumulated on the front side of the lower plate ball supply port 310 g, and more games can be played. The ball can be supplied into the lower plate 301.

The upper plate body 312 of the plate unit 300 is formed so that the left side (shaft support side) of the plate unit 300 bulges forward from the center and the bottom surface is generally lower on the left end side (open side) and the rear end side. There is. The bottom surface of the upper plate body 312 has a rear end on the shaft support side near the bottom of the upper plate ball supply port 310c in the plate unit base 310, and a rear end on the open side of the upper plate ball discharge port 310d in the plate unit base 310. The game balls are formed so as to be located near the intermediate positions in the vertical direction, and the game balls supplied from the upper plate ball supply port 310c to the upper plate main body 312 (upper plate 301) are guided to the upper plate ball discharge port 310d. It has become so.

A metal upper plate rail 312a that can come into contact with the game ball is attached to the upper plate main body 312 from the center in the left-right direction to the open side at the rear end of the bottom surface. Although not shown, the precision rail 312a is electrically grounded so that static electricity charged on the game ball can be removed.

The upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300 extends in a curved shape so that the center of the door frame 5 in the left-right direction protrudes forward from the upper end of the upper plate body 312, and is outside the open side of the upper plate body 312. A mounting hole 314a is formed so as to penetrate in the vertical direction and to which the upper plate ball removal button 341 of the upper plate ball removal mechanism 340 described later is attached. The upper plate upper panel 314 is formed in a stepped shape at the front end one step lower than the upper front end of the upper plate main body 312, and is upper in the center in the left-right direction with the decorative mounting portion 314b for attaching the upper plate front decorative member 316. It is provided with an operation unit mounting portion 314c, which is formed in a stepped shape lower than the decorative mounting portion 314b at a position on the front side of the dish body 312 and for mounting the operation unit 400 described later.

Although detailed description is omitted, the decorative mounting step portion 314b of the upper plate upper panel 314 is vertically positioned corresponding to the LEDs 320a and 322a of the upper plate right decorative substrate 320 and the upper plate left decorative substrate 322 mounted on the lower surface. An opening or a notch that penetrates in the direction is formed, and an opening or the like through which a wiring cord connecting the operation unit 400 and the peripheral control unit 4140 can pass is formed in the operation unit mounting portion 314c. ..

The upper front decorative member 316 has a shape extending in a left-right direction along the front end of the upper plate upper panel 314, and the light guide portion 318a of the upper plate upper lens 318 is formed through the plurality of openings 316a from the lower side. Is fitted, and by attaching to the decorative mounting portion 314b of the upper plate upper panel 314, the upper plate upper lens 318 can be sandwiched between the upper plate upper panel 314 and the upper plate upper panel 314. Further, on the lower side of the upper plate upper lens 318, an upper plate upper inner lens 319 having a plurality of fine lenses (prisms) on the surface is arranged, and the upper plate right decorative substrate 320 and the upper plate left decorative substrate 322 are arranged. The light from the plate can be sufficiently diffused to uniformly illuminate and decorate the entire upper plate upper lens 318. As shown in the figure, the inner peripheral shape of the opening 316a in the upper plate front decorative member 316 is formed in a pear shape, and the light guide portion 318a of the upper plate upper lens 318 fitted in the opening 316a is also the same. The shape is formed, and by fitting the light guide portion 318a, the opening 316a of the decorative member 316 on the front of the upper plate has an appearance as if a jewel like a pear-shaped cut is fitted. ..

The lower plate body 324 of the plate unit 300 has a bottom plate 324a formed so as to spread forward in a fan shape in a plan view and a rear end formed in a straight line in the left-right direction so that the substantially center of the upper surface is the lowest, and the center of the bottom plate 324a. It is provided with a lower plate ball punching hole 324b formed so as to penetrate in the vertical direction, and a side plate 324c rising upward from the front end and the side end excluding the rear end of the bottom plate 324a. The side plate 324c of the lower plate main body 324 is formed in a curved shape so that the upper end rising upward from the side end of the bottom plate 324a is the lowest on the front side and becomes higher toward the rear side, and the side of the bottom plate 324a. The upper end rising upward from the end is formed in a straight line, and the left and right ends of the lower plate top plate 326 are placed and connected to the straight portion of the upper end.

The lower plate main body 324 is configured such that the rear ends of the bottom plate 324a and the side plate 324c are inserted and supported in the lower plate support groove 310f formed on the front surface of the plate unit base 310. Further, the lower plate ball removing hole 324b of the lower plate main body 324 is closed by the opening / closing shutter 352 of the lower plate ball removing mechanism 350 arranged on the back surface side of the bottom plate 324a.

The lower plate cover 328 has an outer shape that bulges downward when viewed from the front, and each side is formed in an inverted triangular shape with an arc, and has an opening 328a that penetrates in the front-rear direction in the center. The inner shape of the opening 328a has a shape that matches the shape formed by the front ends of the lower plate main body 324 and the lower plate top plate 326, and forms the opening of the lower plate 302. Further, the lower plate cover 328 is formed of a milky white resin having translucency, and although not shown, color LEDs are arranged on the back side at predetermined intervals, and the entire lower plate cover 328 emits light. It can be decorated.

The plate side middle cover 330 is arranged on both the left and right outer sides of the lower plate cover 328 in front view, and is predetermined along the lower side side of the lower plate cover 328 from substantially the center in the left-right direction to the side surface of the door frame 5 in front view. The upper rear end extending to the side surface of the door frame 5 is attached to the front surface of the door frame base main body 110 in the door frame base unit 100. The dish side middle cover 330 is provided with an opening 330a penetrating in the front-rear direction, and the dish side middle cover lens 332 is fitted into the opening 330a from the rear side. Further, in the front view, the right side (open side) plate side middle cover 330 has a lock hole 330b that penetrates in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the cylinder lock 1010 of the lock device 1000 near its outer end (right end). Is formed, and when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the lock hole of the cylinder lock 1010 faces from the lock hole 330b.

The dish side middle cover 330 further includes a bottom plate portion 330c extending rearward from the lower part of the front end thereof, and the rear end of the bottom plate portion 330c is attached to the front surface of the door frame base main body 110 in the door frame base unit 100. It has become like. Further, a part of the lower side of the lower plate main body 324 is covered by the bottom plate portion 330c of the plate side middle cover 330.

The dish side outer cover 334 is arranged on both the left and right outer sides of the dish side middle cover 330 in front view, and the front view has a substantially triangular shape along the side and bottom sides of the door frame 5, and is open to the rear and upward. It is formed in the shape of a box. In this example, the dish side outer cover 334 on the right side (open side) is formed with a handle insertion hole 334a penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the handle bracket 140 in the door frame base unit 100. The dish side outer cover 334 is attached to the front surface of the door frame base main body 110 in the door frame base unit 100, and a part of the dish side outer cover 334 is attached to the dish unit base 310. Further, the lower side of the lower plate main body 324 except the central portion is covered by the plate side outer cover 334 and the plate side middle cover 330.

The upper plate ball removal mechanism 340 in the plate unit 300 is for operating the upper plate ball removal button 341 and the upper plate ball removal button 341 that are vertically attached to the mounting hole 314a of the upper plate upper panel 314. The operating piece 342 that moves up and down more than the vertical movement of the upper plate ball removal button 341 and is supported on the front side of the plate unit base 310, and the ball feed unit 580 that slides up and down by the vertical movement of the operating piece 342 and will be described later. The upper plate ball removal slider 343 and the upper plate ball removal slider 343, which are provided with a contact piece 343a in contact with the operating rod 583c of the ball removal member 583 and are arranged on the rear side of the plate unit base 310, can be slid vertically. It is provided with an upper plate ball removing base 344, which is supported and attached to the rear side of the plate unit base 310.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the upper plate ball removal mechanism 340 has an operating piece 342 that moves up and down together with the upper plate ball removal button 341 so that the upper plate ball removal button 341 is located at the upper moving end. It is urged upward by a coil spring. Further, the upper plate ball removal slider 343 is in a state of being urged upward by a coil spring provided between the upper plate ball removal slider 343 and the upper plate ball removal base 344.

The upper plate ball removal base 344 of the upper plate ball removal mechanism 340 closes the upper plate ball discharge port 310d of the plate unit base 310 and at the same time communicates with the upper plate ball discharge port 310d and opens forward 344a (FIG. (See 43) and the ball guidance flow path 344b (FIGS. 42 and FIG. (See 44) and, after extending downward from the lower side of the ball guide flow path 344b, extending substantially along the lower side of the plate ball removing base 344 toward the right end (shaft support side) in rear view. It is provided with a ball removal flow path 344c, which allows the game ball to be distributed.

In the upper plate ball removal base 344, the opening 344a communicates with the upper plate ball discharge port 310d, and the lower end of the ball guide flow path 344b communicating with the opening 344a is the ball of the door frame base main body 110 in the door frame base unit 100. The game ball stored in the upper plate 301 is communicated with the entrance 581a of the ball feed unit 580 attached to the rear side of the door frame base main body 110 via the feed opening 113, and the ball feed unit 580 is used. Can be supplied to.

Further, in the ball pulling flow path 344c of the upper plate ball pulling base 344, the upper end adjacent to the ball guiding flow path 344b communicates with the ball feeding port 581b of the ball feeding unit 580 via the ball feeding opening 113 of the door frame base main body 110. At the same time, the lower end extending to the shaft support side communicates with the notch 310i of the lower plate ball supply gutter 310h in the plate unit base 310, and the game ball discharged from the ball outlet 581b of the ball feed unit 580 is inserted. It can be guided to the lower plate 302. The lower part of the rear end of the ball removal flow path 344c is closed by the upper plate ball removal flow path cover 345.

When the upper plate ball removal mechanism 340 presses the upper plate ball removal button 341 downward against the urging force of the coil spring, the upper plate ball removal slider 343 slides downward and also the contact piece 343a protruding rearward. Move down. Then, in the operating rod 583c of the ball pulling member 583 in the ball feeding unit 580 that comes into contact with the upper surface of the contact piece 343a, the partition portion 583a of the ball pulling member 583 rotates in a predetermined direction as the contact piece 343a moves downward. It moves, and the partition between the entrance 581a and the ball outlet 581b partitioned by the partition portion 583a is released, and the entrance 581a and the ball outlet 581b are in communication with each other. As a result, the game ball stored in the upper plate 301 enters the entrance 581a of the ball feed unit 580 from the upper plate ball discharge port 310d through the opening 344a of the upper plate ball removal base 344 and the ball guide path 344b. After that, it is discharged from the ball ejection port 581b to the ball extraction flow path 344c of the upper plate ball extraction base 344, and from the lower plate ball supply port 310g to the lower plate 302 via the lower plate ball supply trough 310h of the plate unit base 310. It can be discharged.

Since the ball pulling member 583 of the ball feeding unit 580 is in contact with the upper surface of the contact piece 343a in the upper plate ball pulling slider 343 whose operating rod 583c is urged upward by the coil spring, the ball pulling member 583 Even if the game ball is vigorously supplied onto the partition portion 581a, the impact can be absorbed by the coil spring that urges the precision ball pulling slider 343 via the operating rod 583c, and the ball pulling member 583 and the like can be absorbed. It is possible to prevent the game ball from being damaged and to prevent the game ball from bouncing off at the partition portion 583a.

The lower plate ball removing mechanism 350 in the plate unit 300 is a lower plate ball removing base 351 arranged between the bottom plate portions 330 of the plate side middle cover 330 arranged on the left and right sides of the front view on the lower side of the lower plate main body 324. A plate-shaped open / close shutter 352 that is rotatably supported on the upper surface of the lower plate ball removal base 351 and can open / close the lower plate ball removal hole 324b of the lower plate main body 324, and the lower plate while rotating the open / close shutter 352. It is provided with a lower plate ball removal slider 353 that is slidably supported on the upper surface of the ball removal base 351 in the front-rear direction, and a lower plate ball removal button 354 that is attached to the front end of the lower plate ball removal slider 353.

The lower plate ball removing base 351 is provided with a base ball removing hole 351a penetrating in the vertical direction at a position facing the lower plate ball removing hole 324b of the lower plate main body 324. Further, the opening / closing shutter 352 has a closing portion 352a capable of closing the lower plate ball extraction hole 324b, and a shutter ball extraction hole arranged in front of the closing portion 352a and penetrating in the vertical direction substantially coincident with the lower plate ball extraction hole 324b. 352b and the lower plate ball extraction base 351 are urged by a coil spring so that the closing portion 352a is positioned to close the lower plate ball extraction hole 324b and the base ball extraction hole 351a.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the open / close shutter 352 is provided with a contact pin capable of contacting the lower plate ball removal slider 353, and the contact pin abuts on the lower plate ball removal slider 353. The closing portion 352a and the shutter ball removing hole 352b are rotated by the lower plate ball removing slider 353 so as to move backward, and the lower plate ball removing slider 353 is slid forward by the urging force of the coil spring. Can be done.

Further, as shown in the figure, the lower plate ball removal button 354 is arranged at a position sandwiched between the left and right plate side middle covers 330 on the lower side in the center in the left-right direction of the lower plate cover 328 in the plate unit 300. The surface shape is such that it is smoothly continuous with the surface shape of the lower plate cover 328 and the plate side middle cover 330.

Further, in the lower plate ball removing mechanism 350, the shutter ball removing hole 352b of the opening / closing shutter 352 substantially coincides with the lower plate ball removing hole 324b of the lower plate main body 324 and the base ball removing hole 351a of the lower plate ball removing base 351. Further, a holding mechanism 355 for holding the lower plate ball removing slider 353 in a predetermined position is provided for holding in the moving position.

The lower plate ball removing mechanism 350 is in a closed state in which the lower plate ball removing button 354 is moved to the front end in a state where the surface shape of the lower plate ball removing button 354 is continuous with the surface shape of the lower plate cover 328 or the like. There is a state in which the lower plate ball extraction hole 324b of the lower plate main body 324 is closed by the closing portion 352a of the opening / closing shutter 352. In this state, the game ball can be stored in the lower plate main body 324 (lower plate 302). When the lower plate ball removal button 354 in the closed state is pressed backward, the lower plate ball removal button 354 and the lower plate ball removal slider 353 slide backward, and the lower plate ball removal slider 353 slides backward to open and close. The shutter 352 rotates against the urging force of the coil spring so that the closed portion 352a and the shutter ball extraction hole 352b move rearward.

Then, as the opening / closing shutter 352 rotates backward, the shutter ball extraction hole 352b overlaps with the lower plate ball extraction hole 324b and the base ball extraction hole 351a, and eventually the shutter ball extraction hole 352b and the lower plate ball extraction hole It coincides with 324b, and the game ball stored in the lower plate 302 can be discharged to the lower side of the plate unit 300 through the lower plate ball extraction hole 324b. When the lower plate ball removal slider 353 moves rearward to a position where the shutter ball removal hole 352b and the lower plate ball removal hole 324b substantially coincide with each other, the lower plate ball removal slider 353 is held by the holding mechanism 355. By locking (holding) the slide of the lower plate ball removal slider 353, the lower plate ball removal button 354 remains in the open state retracted rearward, and the shutter ball removal hole 352b is the lower plate ball. It is held in a state of being aligned with the withdrawal hole 3324b, and the game ball stored in the lower plate 302 can be ejected downward even if the lower plate ball extraction button 354 is not held down.

On the other hand, when closing the lower plate ball removal hole 324b, when the retracted open lower plate ball removal button 354 is further pressed backward, the holding of the lower plate ball removal slide 353 by the holding mechanism 355 is released, and the lower plate is released. The ball pulling slide 353 can be slid, and the closing portion 352a is urged in the direction of closing the lower plate ball pulling hole 324b by the coil spring, and the closing portion 352a is urged by the urging force to close the lower plate. It will rotate in the direction of moving in the direction (forward) of the ball punching hole 324b. Then, as the opening / closing shutter 352 rotates forward, the lower plate ball removing slide 353 slides forward, the lower plate ball removing hole 324b is closed by the closing portion 352a, and the lower plate ball removing button 354 is lowered. It returns to the closed position substantially coincided with the front surface of the plate cover 328 and the like, and the game ball can be stored in the lower plate 302.

The holding mechanism 355 of the lower plate ball removing mechanism 350 uses a known technique having the above-mentioned function, and the detailed mechanism thereof will be omitted.

The ball lending unit 360 in the plate unit 300 includes a ball lending button 361 and a return button 362 that can be pressed backward, and also has a lending balance display unit 363 between the ball lending button 361 and the return button 362. When the ball lending unit 360 inserts cash or a prepaid card into the ball lending machine provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 and then presses the ball lending button 361, a predetermined number of game balls are thrown into the dish unit 300. You can lend (pay out) into the upper plate 301, and when you press the return button 362, the balance of cash and prepaid cards that you put in after subtracting the rest of the loaned amount will be returned. There is. In addition, the remaining loan balance display unit 363 displays the remaining number of cash and prepaid cards inserted into the ball lending machine.

The ball rental unit 360 is adapted to be attached from the rear side to the ball rental unit mounting portion 310b formed on the decorative portion 310a at the upper end of the dish unit base 310. Further, the ball rental unit 360 is provided with a security cover mounting portion 364 that projects rearward from the rear surface and mounts and locks the mounting elastic piece 185 on the shaft support side (left side in front view) of the security cover 180.

The plate unit 300 of this example is provided with an upper plate 301 and a lower plate 302, and can be a pachinko machine 1 having a feeling similar to that of a conventional pachinko machine equipped with two storage plates. The machine can be reminiscent of the machine, and even with the new pachinko machine 1 (new model pachinko machine), the feeling of anxiety given to the player can be reduced and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as a pachinko machine for playing. It has become.

[1-2G. Operation unit]
Next, the operation unit 400 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 45 to 50. 45 is a front perspective view of the operation unit in the door frame, and FIG. 46 is a rear perspective view of the operation unit in the door frame. Further, FIG. 47 is an exploded perspective view of the operating unit disassembled and viewed from the upper right front, and FIG. 48 is an exploded perspective view of the operating unit disassembled and viewed from the lower right front. Further, FIG. 49 is a cross-sectional view of the operation unit, and FIG. 50 is a cross-sectional view showing a pressed operation unit in the operation unit in a pressed state.

The operation unit 400 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment is arranged on the front surface of the upper plate 301 at substantially the center in the left-right direction of the front view, and the dial operation unit 401 that the player can rotate and operate, and the press that the player can press. The operation unit 405 is provided, and the player's operation can be received according to the game state, and the dial operation unit 401 can be moved. , It is intended to be able to participate in the production during the game.

The operation unit 400 is an annular dial operation unit 401, a cylindrical pressing operation unit 405 inserted in the ring of the dial operation unit 401, and an annular driven operation unit connected to the lower end of the dial operation unit 405. A gear 410, a disk-shaped drive gear 412 that meshes with the driven gear 410, a dial drive motor 414 in which the drive gear 412 is fixed to a rotating shaft, an annular gear rail 416a that rotatably supports the driven gear 410, and an annular gear rail 416a. An operation unit holding member 416 having a cylindrical button support cylinder 416b that slidably supports the pressing operation unit 405 in the vertical direction, and a pressing operation unit 405 arranged in the button support cylinder 416b of the operation unit holding member 416. A base member having an upward urging spring 418, an opening 420a through which the gear rail 416a of the operation unit holding member 416 and the button support cylinder 416b can pass, and the operation unit holding member 416 and the dial drive motor 414 fixed to the lower surface. The base is mounted so as to sandwich the base member 420 under the upper cover 422 and the upper cover 422 having an opening 422a that covers the upper surface of the base member 420 and allows the inner cylinder portion 401a of the dial operation portion 401 to pass through. It mainly includes a lower cover 424 that covers the lower surface of the member 420 and the dial drive motor 414.

Further, the operation unit 400 is fixed to the base member 420 so as to cover the upper side of the upper cover 422 and extends outward from both the left and right sides of the opening 426a through which the inner cylinder portion 401a of the dial operation portion 401 can pass and the opening 426a. A cover main body 426 having a fixing portion 426b for fixing to the operation unit mounting portion 314c in the dish unit 300, a surface cover 428 covering the upper surface of the cover main body 426, and an operation unit holding member 416 mounted on the upper surface of the base member 420. A dial decorative board 430 having an opening 430a through which the button support cylinder 416b and the inner cylinder portion 401a of the dial operation unit 401 can pass, and a plurality of color LEDs 430b mounted at positions corresponding to the ring of the dial operation unit 401 on the upper surface. A pair of rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b fixed to the lower side of the base member 420 to detect the rotation of the dial operation unit 401, a pressure detection sensor 432c to detect the operation of the pressing operation unit 405, and a pressing operation unit 405. It is provided with a button decorative substrate 432 having a color LED 432d mounted on the upper surface directly below.

The dial operation unit 401 in the operation unit 400 of this example is made of a translucent material, and has a cylindrical inner cylinder portion 401a extending in the vertical direction and an inner cylinder portion 401a from the upper end to the outside. An annular top plate 401b with a predetermined decoration on the extension surface, an outer cylinder 401c shorter than the inner cylinder 401a that extends downward from the outer peripheral end of the top plate 401b, and an outer cylinder. It mainly includes a flange portion 401d extending outward from the lower end of the portion 401c in a ring shape. The outer diameter of the flange portion 401d of the dial operation portion 401 is larger than the inner diameter of the opening 422a of the upper cover 422. Further, the dial operation unit 401 is provided with a connection locking portion (see FIG. 48) at the lower end of the inner cylinder portion 401a, and the connection locking claw 410b of the driven gear 410 is locked to the dial operation unit 401. The 401 and the driven gear 410 can be connected to each other.

Further, the dial operation unit 401 is further provided with a projecting portion 401f protruding toward the center from the inner wall of the inner cylinder portion 401a at a position lowered by a predetermined distance from the upper end. The protruding portion 401f of the dial operating portion 401 is formed in an annular shape along the inner circumference of the inner cylinder portion 401a. Although the details of the protruding portion 401f will be described later, the protruding portion 401f can come into contact with the stepped portion 407a of the button cap 407 in the pressing operation portion 405, and the stepped portion 407a of the button cap 407 protrudes from the dial operating portion 401. By abutting on the portion 401f, it is possible to prevent the button cap 407 (pressing operation portion 405) from further immersing in the inner cylinder portion 401e (see FIG. 50).

As shown in the figure, the protruding portion 401f of the dial operation unit 401 and the step portion 407a of the button cap 407 in the pressing operation unit 405 are lowered so that their contact surfaces become lower toward the center of the dial operation unit 401. It is an inclined surface, and the contact area when they come into contact with each other becomes large. As a result, the load from the pressing operation unit 405 can be more dispersed (released) to the dial operation unit 401 side, and the vibration from the dial operation unit 401 can be easily transmitted to the pressing operation unit 405 side. It has become.

Further, the pressing operation unit 405 in the operation unit 400 is formed in a cylindrical shape with the upper end closed, and has a bottomed cylindrical button body 406, a button cap 407 that closes the upper end of the button body 406, and a button cap. It is provided with a cap inner 408 that is arranged inside the 407 and is sandwiched between the upper end of the button body 406 and the button cap 407. The button body 406 of the pressing operation unit 405 has a truncated cone shape in which the lower surface of the bottom portion narrows downward, and the upper end of the coiled spring 418 is inserted into the lower surface of the truncated cone shape. In addition, a through hole 406a penetrating in the vertical direction is provided in the center of the lower end surface of the truncated cone shape, and light from the LED 432d of the button decorative substrate 432 is irradiated to the button cap 407 and the button inner 408 through the through hole 406a. It has become like.

Further, the button body 406 has a pair of locking claws 406b whose lower end extends downward from the lower part of the outer circumference and protrudes outward in the direction perpendicular to the axis, and the locking claws 406b are the operating portion holding member 416. By locking with the locking convex portion 416f (see FIGS. 49 and 50) formed in the button support cylinder 416b, the upward moving end is moved so that the button body 406 does not come off from the button support portion 416b. It can be regulated. Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, the button support cylinder 416b in the operation unit holding member 416 is provided with a contact portion for preventing the locking claw 406b of the button body 406 from moving in the circumferential direction. The button body 406 (pressing operation unit 405) is prevented from rotating in the button support cylinder 416b. A predetermined amount of gap is formed in the circumferential direction between the locking claw 406b of the button body 406 and the abutting portion in the button support cylinder 416b, and the gap allows the button body 406 to have a predetermined angle. It can rotate within the range.

Further, the button body 406 includes a press detection piece 406c that can be detected by the press detection sensor 432c of the button decorative substrate 432 that extends downward from a position different from that of the locking claw 406b. When the button body 406 (pressing operation unit 405) moves downward against the urging force of the spring 418, the pressing detection piece 406c is detected by the pressing detection sensor 432c.

Further, as shown in the figure, the button cap 407 of the pressing operation unit 405 has an outer diameter lower than the substantially center in the vertical direction and a smaller diameter than the upper side, and the step portion 407a is located between the upper side and the lower side. Is formed. The button cap 407 (pressing operation unit 405) has a diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the protruding portion 401f in the dial operation unit 401 on the lower side of the step portion 407a, and the dial operation unit is on the upper side of the step portion 407a. The diameter is smaller than the inner diameter of the inner cylinder portion 401a of the 401 and larger than the inner diameter of the protruding portion 401f. As a result, when the button cap 407 (pressing operation unit 405) is inserted into the inner cylinder portion 401a from the upper side of the dial operation unit 401, the step portion 407a of the button cap 407 comes into contact with the protruding portion 401f of the dial operation unit 401. , The button cap 407 (pressing operation unit 405) can no longer be immersed in the inner cylinder portion 401e (see FIG. 50).

Further, the button cap 407 and the cap inner 408 of the pressing operation unit 405 are formed of a material having a translucent ring. The characters "Push" are displayed on the upper surface of the cap inner 408, and the characters can be visually recognized from the outside through the button cap 407.

The driven gear 410 in the operation unit 400 is provided with a plurality of gear teeth that mesh with the drive gear 412 on the outer circumference of the annular shape. The inner diameter of the driven gear 410 is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the button support cylinder 416b in the operation unit holding member 416, and the annular slide that abuts on the lower surface of the operation unit holding member 416 with the gear rail 416a. It has a moving surface 410a. By inserting the sliding gear 410 into the button support cylinder 416b and bringing the sliding surface 410a into contact with the gear rail 416a, the sliding gear 410 can slide and rotate substantially concentrically with the button support cylinder 416b. You can do it.

Further, the driven gear 410 includes a pair of connection locking claws 410b that extend upward from the opposite positions of the upper ends and then project inward, and the connection locking claws 410b are used in the dial operation unit 401. By locking the inner cylinder portion 401a with the connection locking portion 401e, the driven gear 410 and the dial operation portion 401 are integrally rotatably connected.

Further, the driven gear 410 includes a plurality of rotation detection pieces 410c protruding downward from the lower end and arranged in a row at regular intervals in the circumferential direction. These rotation detection pieces 410c are detected by a pair of rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b attached to the button decorative substrate 432, and details will be described later, but the rotation detection pieces 410c and the rotation detection pieces 410c are connected to each other. With the slit 410d formed between them, the rotation direction of the driven gear 410, that is, the dial operation unit 401 can be detected by the detection patterns of the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b for the rotation detection piece 410c. In this example, the rotation detection piece 410c and the slit 410d have substantially the same length in the circumferential direction.

Further, as shown in the figure, the drive gear 412 in the operation unit 400 is a spur gear that meshes with the driven gear 410, and is fixed so as to be integrally rotatable with the rotating shaft of the dial drive motor 414. Further, the dial drive motor 414 is a known stepping motor capable of arbitrarily controlling the rotation direction, rotation speed, and rotation angle, and the dial drive motor 414 rotates and drives the drive gear 412 via the rotation shaft. The dial operation unit 401 can be rotated via the driven gear 410. Further, the dial operation unit 401 can be vibrated by repeatedly rotating the drive gear 412 (rotating shaft) in small increments by the dial drive motor 414. Further, by stopping the rotation of the dial drive motor 414 for a short time at each predetermined rotation angle based on the detection signals from the rotation detection sensors 432a and 342b, the rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401 is clicked. It is possible to give a feeling.

Further, the operation unit holding member 416 in the operation unit 400 has an annular gear rail 416a that rotatably supports the driven gear 410, and a button body 406 of the operation unit 405 that protrudes upward from the inside of the gear rail 416a in a tubular shape and presses inside. A button support cylinder 416b that slidably supports the button in the vertical direction, and a locking convex portion 416f that is formed on the inner peripheral surface of the button support cylinder 416b near the bottom and can be locked with the locking claw 406b of the button body 406. (See FIGS. 49 and 50) and a through hole 416c that penetrates the center of the bottom of the button support cylinder 416b and sends light from the LED 432d mounted on the button decorative substrate 432 into the button support cylinder 416b (pressing operation unit 405). The opening 416d that penetrates the bottom outside the button support cylinder 416b in the vertical direction and allows the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b attached to the button decorative substrate 432 to pass through, and the bottom in the button support cylinder 416b in the vertical direction. The opening 416e seen from above by the press detection sensor 432c attached to the button decorative substrate 432, and the pair of substrate holding claws 416f for locking and holding the button decorative substrate 432 extending downward from the lower surface. I have.

Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, the operation unit holding member 416 is arranged in the button support cylinder 416b, and forms a predetermined amount of gap in the circumferential direction with respect to the locking claw 406b of the button main body 406 and is locked. It is further provided with a plurality of contact portions capable of contacting the claw 406b. By this contact portion, the button main body 406 (pressing operation portion 405) can be rotated within a predetermined angle range and does not rotate around in the button support cylinder 416b. Further, although detailed description of the operation unit holding member 416 is omitted, a screw hole for fixing to the base member 420, a positioning boss for positioning with the base member 420 and the button decorative substrate 432, and the like are appropriately positioned. Be prepared for.

The operation unit holding member 416 slides the driven gear 410 (dial operation unit 401) around a predetermined rotation axis by inserting the driven gear 410 on the outer circumference of the button support cylinder 416b and mounting it on the gear rail 416a. It can be supported so that it can move and rotate. Further, by inserting the button body 406 of the pressing operation unit 405 into the button support cylinder 416b, the pressing operation unit 405 can be slidably supported in the vertical direction via the button body 406. .. A coil-shaped spring 418 is arranged between the bottom of the button support cylinder 416b and the bottom of the button body 406 in a truncated cone shape. The spring 418 causes the button body 406 (pressing operation unit). 405) is in a state of being urged upward.

The base member 420 in the operation unit 400 is made of a metal such as an aluminum alloy, so that the operation unit 400 is not easily damaged even if the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 is strongly hit. The base member 420 penetrates the lower recess 420b, which is recessed upward so that the outer periphery of the operation holding member 416 can be fitted, and the bottom portion (ceiling portion) of the lower recess 420b in the vertical direction, and the operation portion holding member 416. An opening 420a having an internal shape through which the gear rail 416a can pass, and an upper recess 420c arranged on the opposite side of the opening 420a from the lower recess 420b and recessed downward to accommodate at least the driven gear 410. I have. Further, as shown in FIG. 48, the base member 420 is opened downward to the outside of the lower recess 420b to mount the dial drive motor 414, and the motor mounting portion 420d and the lower recess 420b from the outside to the bottom. It is provided with a plurality of (four in this example) leg portions 420e protruding by a predetermined amount, and a positioning hole 420f that opens downward at the lower end of each leg portion 420e.

Further, the base member 420 has a plurality of cover fixing portions 420g for fixing the cover main body 426 arranged above the outer side of the upper recess 420c, and the cover fixing portion 420g is upward from different positions on the outside of the upper recess 420c. It is provided with a plurality of board mounting bosses 420h for mounting the dial decorative board 430. Further, although detailed description is omitted, the base member 420 is formed with positioning bosses, mounting holes, and the like for positioning each member at appropriate positions on the upper surface and the lower surface thereof.

The base member 420 has a predetermined screw after fitting and inserting the operation portion holding member 416 into the lower recess 420b so that the button support cylinder 416b and the gear rail 416a pass from the lower side with respect to the central opening 420a. Is screwed into the operation unit holding member 416 from the upper side through the ceiling portion of the lower recess 420b, so that the operation unit holding member 416 can be supported. Although detailed illustration of the base member 420 is omitted, when the operation unit holding member 416 is supported, the upper end of the gear rail 416a is slightly above the upper surface of the ceiling portion of the lower recess 420b, that is, the bottom surface of the upper recess 420c. The driven gear 410 mounted on the gear rail 416a can slide and rotate in the upper recess 420c without any problem.

Further, the leg portion 420e of the base member 420 has a positioning hole 420f formed at the lower end thereof so as to be fitted with a positioning protrusion 424a formed on the upper surface of the bottom portion of the lower cover 424 described later. The 420 and the lower cover 424 can be positioned at positions determined to each other. Further, the board mounting boss 420h of the base member 420 projects to a position above the driven gear 410 housed and arranged in the upper recess 420c, and the dial decorative board 430 mounted on the board mounting boss 420h is driven. It is designed so that it does not come into contact with the gear 410.

Further, the base member 420 comes into contact with the upper surface of the dial drive motor 414 on the surface by attaching the dial drive motor 414 to the motor mounting portion 420d, and the heat from the dial drive motor 414 is transferred to the base member 420 side. The heat of the dial drive motor 414 can be sufficiently transferred to the base member 420, and the heat of the dial drive motor 414 can be dissipated by the base member 420. As a result, overheating of the dial drive motor 414 can be suppressed, and it is possible to prevent a malfunction of the dial drive motor 414 or the like due to overheating.

The upper cover 422 of the operation unit 400 has a box shape with an open bottom, and has an inner diameter opening 422a through which the outer cylinder portion 401c of the dial operation portion 401 can pass through and the flange portion 401d cannot pass through. ing. The upper cover 422 has a long direction (left-right direction in the pachinko machine 1) connecting the axis of the pressing operation unit 405 (driven gear 410) and the axis of the dial drive motor 414 (drive gear 412) in a plan view. It is formed so as to extend, and is provided with engaging claws 422b protruding downward at both ends in the longitudinal direction thereof. By engaging the engaging claws 422b with the engaging portion 424b of the lower cover 424, the upper portion is formed. The cover 422 and the lower cover 424 can be assembled.

Further, the upper cover 422 has a claw-shaped locking piece 422c that extends downward from the outer circumference of one side (front side in the pachinko machine 1) in the short axis direction (front-back direction in the pachinko machine 1) and the lower end protrudes outward. I have. The locking piece 422c can be locked to the upper plate front decorative member 316 of the plate unit 300, and by locking the locking piece 422c to the upper plate front decorative member 316, the locking piece 422c can be locked to the upper plate front decorative member 316. It is possible to prevent the operation unit 400 from coming out of the operation unit mounting portion 314c upward.

The upper cover 422 has the dial operation unit 401 from below with respect to the opening 422a in a state where the operation unit holding member 416, the driven gear 410, the dial decorative substrate 430, the dial member 401, and the like are attached to the base member 420. By covering the upper part of the base member 420 so as to pass through, it is possible to prevent the dial operation unit 401 from coming out upward by the opening 422a.

On the other hand, the lower cover 424 of the operation unit 400 has a box shape with an open upper portion, and the outer peripheral shape is substantially the same as the outer peripheral shape of the upper cover 422. It is provided with a positioning protrusion 424a that can be fitted with the positioning hole 420f at the lower end of the 420d. The lower cover 424 is provided with an engaging portion 424b capable of engaging with the engaging claw 422b of the upper cover 422 at the upper portions of both ends in the long axis direction (left-right direction in the pachinko machine 1), and the engaging portion 424b is provided with the engaging portion 424b. By engaging the engaging claw 422b, the upper cover 422 can be attached to the lower cover 424.

As shown in the figure, the cover body 426 of the operation unit 400 has an opening 426a that penetrates vertically in the center and allows the dial operation portion 401 (excluding the flange portion 401d) to pass through, and extends outward from both the left and right sides of the opening 426a. It is provided with a fixing portion 426b fixed to the operation unit mounting portion 314c of the serving plate unit 300, and a fixing boss 426c fixed to the cover fixing portion 420g of the base member 420 extending downward from the lower surface of the outer periphery of the opening 426a. ..

The operation unit 400 of this example is attached to the dish unit 300 via the fixing portion 426b of the cover main body 426, and although detailed illustration is omitted, it is attached to the operation unit mounting portion 314c of the dish unit 300. In the state, the lower surface of the operation unit 400 (lower cover 424) is slightly above the upper surface of the operation unit mounting portion 314c (for example, 0.5 mm to 2.0 mm) so that the operation unit 400 can be mounted. When the cover body 426 is elastically deformed or hit, the cover body 426 can be elastically deformed to alleviate the impact.

In the operation unit 400, with the surface cover 428 removed, the fixing portion 426b of the cover main body 426 is attached to the operation unit mounting portion 314c of the dish unit 300 with a predetermined screw, and then the cover main body 426 is attached. The structure is such that the surface cover 428 is attached to the upper surface.

In the operation unit 400 of the present embodiment, the rotation detection piece 410c of the driven gear 410 that rotates together with the dial operation unit 401 has the length in the circumferential direction in the slit between the adjacent rotation detection pieces 410c and the circumference of the rotation detection piece 410c. The lengths in the directions are the same. Further, in the pair of rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b mounted on the button decorative substrate 432, the circumferential distance corresponding to the dial operation unit 401 is 2.5 times the length in the circumferential direction of the rotation detection piece 410. It is said that. As a result, although details will be described later, when the player rotates the dial operation unit 401, a time lag occurs in the detection / non-detection of the rotation detection piece 410c by the pair of rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b, and each rotation detection From the detection pattern of the rotation detection piece 410c by the sensors 432a and 432b, it is possible to detect in which direction the dial operation unit 401 is rotating.

Further, although the details of the operation unit 400 of this example will be described later, the dial operation unit 401 can be rotated in a clockwise direction or a counterclockwise direction by the driving force of the dial drive motor 414. .. Further, the operation unit 400 rotates the dial operation unit 401 step by step by the driving force of the dial drive motor 414 using the stepping motor, or when the player rotates the dial operation unit 401, the operation unit 400 rotates. It is possible to assist the rotation, prevent it from rotating intentionally, and give a click feeling to the rotation. Further, the operation unit 400 can vibrate the dial operation unit 401 by repeatedly rotating the dial drive motor 414 in the forward and reverse directions in small steps.

Further, in the operation unit 400 of this example, as shown in FIG. 50, when the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed downward, the step portion 407a of the button cap 407 comes into contact with the protruding portion 401f of the dial operation unit 401, and the button cap Since the 407 (pressing operation unit 405) can no longer be immersed in the inner cylinder portion 401e, the load applied to the pressing operation unit 405 is dialed via the step portion 407a and the projecting portion 401f. It can be dispersed to the operation unit 401 side, and the pressing operation unit 405 (operation unit 400) is not easily broken.

Further, in the operation unit 400 of this example, the dial drive motor 414 is moved in small steps in a state where the step portion 407a of the button cap 407 and the protruding portion 401f of the dial operation unit 401 are in contact with each other by pressing the pressing operation unit 405. By repeating rolling and reversing, the pressing operation unit 405 can be vibrated together with the dial operation unit 401, and the vibration of the pressing operation unit 405 can surprise the player and entertain the game and the production. It has become.

According to the operation unit 400 of this example, the dial operation unit 401 that can be rotated and operated by the player and the pressing operation unit 405 that can be pressed are supported by the metal base member 420, and the operation unit 400 is supported by the metal base member 420. Since the strength can be increased, it is possible to prevent the operation unit 400 from being damaged even if the player or the like strongly hits the operation units 401 and 405, and the operation units 401 and 405 can be freely used by the player. In addition to being able to operate, the operability of the operation units 401 and 405 can be improved, and the production using the operation units 401 and 405 can be enjoyed and the player's interest in the game can be suppressed from being lowered. can.

Further, the pressing operation unit 405 is arranged at the center of the annular dial operation unit 401, and when the pressing operation unit 405 is strongly hit, the dial operation unit 401 is also likely to be hit, and the operation unit The force of hitting 401 and 405 can be distributed to the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405, suppressing the concentration of the hitting impact and preventing the operation unit 400 and the dish unit 300 from being damaged. Therefore, it is possible to make the operation units 401 and 405 of the operation unit 400 able to withstand a bang, and the player can freely operate the operation units 401 and 405, and the operation unit 401 and 405 can be freely operated. The operability of the 405 can be improved, and the production using the operation units 401 and 405 can be enjoyed, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game.

Further, the base member 420 of the operation unit 400 and the like are housed in the recessed operation unit mounting portion 314c of the dish unit 300, and a predetermined amount of gap is formed between the lower end of the base member 420 and the bottom surface of the operation unit mounting portion 314c. As described above, when the cover body 426 attached to the base member 420 is fixed to the upper surface of the dish unit 300 and the operation units 401 and 405 of the operation unit 400 are hit to give an impact or a load is applied. Until the lower end of the operation unit 400 comes into contact with the bottom surface of the operation unit mounting portion 314c, the impact and load can be absorbed by the elastic deformation of the cover body 426, and the lower end of the operation unit 400 is with the bottom surface of the operation unit mounting portion 314c. After the contact, the bottom portion (dish unit 300) of the operation unit mounting portion 314c can receive an impact or a load, so that the impact or the like from the operation units 401 or 405 is dispersed to prevent the impact or the like from concentrating. It is possible to improve the impact resistance and load resistance of the operation unit 400 and the dish unit 300.

Further, the base member 420 is provided with a plurality of leg portions 420e protruding downward from positions supporting the operation portions 401 and 405, and the leg portions 420e of the base member 420 are the operation unit in the dish unit 300. Even if the base member 420 receives an impact from the operation units 401 and 405 in contact with the bottom surface of the mounting portion 314c, the leg portions 420e are not arranged directly under the impact, so that the operation units 401 and 405 of the base member 420 The portion that supports the plate bends due to the impact, and the base member 420 bends (elastically deforms), so that the impact from the operating units 401 and 405 can be absorbed to some extent, and the base member 420 applies to the dish unit 300. The impact can be reduced to prevent the dish unit 300 from being damaged.

Further, the dial operation unit 401 is held by the operation unit holding member 416 attached to the base member 420 from below so that a part of the dial operation unit 401 overlaps with the base member 420 in a plan view. When the operation unit 401 is struck from above, even if the operation unit holding member 416 holding the dial operation unit 401 deviates from the base member 420 and moves downward, the dial operation unit 401 abuts on the upper surface of the base member 420. The base member 420 can restrict the downward movement of the dial operation unit 401, and can satisfactorily prevent the dial operation unit 401 from falling.

Further, since the dial operation unit 401 having the pressing operation unit 405 arranged in the center is rotated by the dial drive motor 414 according to the gaming state, the dial operation unit 401 that rotates freely (rotational drive including vibration). As a result, the player can be surprised to pay attention to the effect of the operation units 401 and 405, and the player can be entertained. At the same time, the dial operation unit 401 is appropriately driven by the dial drive motor 414 to appropriately drive the dial operation unit. It is possible to make the production using the 401 (pressing operation unit 405) more diverse and less likely to get bored, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

Further, the dial operation unit 401 is rotated by the dial drive motor 414 via the driven gear 410 and the drive gear 412, and the position of the rotation shaft of the dial drive motor 414 is probably set to the dial operation unit 401 (driven gear). Since the position can be eccentric with respect to the position of the rotation shaft of 410), even if the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 is strongly hit, the impact is transmitted through the rotation shaft of the dial operation unit 401. It is possible to prevent the dial drive motor 414 from being directly engaged with the dial drive motor 414, and it is possible to prevent the dial drive motor 414 (operation unit 400) from being damaged.

Further, since the opening 420a of the base member 420 has a smaller diameter than the dial operation unit 401 and the dial operation unit 401 is supported by the gear rail 416a of the operation unit holding member 416 through the opening 420a, the dial operation unit 401 is supported. Even if the gear rail 416a (operation unit holding member 416) moves downward due to an impact or load from the 401, the dial operation unit 401 can abut on the upper surface of the opening 420a of the base member 420, and the dial operation unit 401 is the base member. It is possible to surely prevent it from being depressed more than 420. Further, since the dial operation unit 401 is supported by the annular gear rail 416a, the contact area between the dial operation unit 401 and the operation unit holding member 416 (gear rail 416a) can be increased, and the dial operation unit 401 can be increased. It is possible to prevent the operation unit holding member 416 from being damaged by dispersing the impact and the load from the operation unit.

Further, since the dial drive motor 414 for rotationally driving the dial operation unit 401 is attached to the metal base member 420, the dial operation unit 401 is frequently rotationally driven by the dial drive motor 414, or the dial drive motor 414 is used. Even if the amount of heat generated increases due to an excessive load on the dial drive motor 414 due to the player forcibly stopping the rotation of the dial operation unit 401 even though the dial operation unit 401 is rotationally driven by the above. The heat generated from the dial drive motor 414 can be satisfactorily dissipated and dissipated through the base member 420, and it is possible to prevent the dial drive means 414 from malfunctioning due to overheating, and the dial drive means 414. The pachinko machine 1 can withstand a high load, can fully embody the effect of the dial operation unit 401 using the dial drive means 414 as described above, and entertain the player. Can be.

Further, the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b for detecting the rotation of the dial operation unit 401 and the press detection sensor 432c for detecting the press of the press operation unit 405 are provided, and the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 are provided. Since it is possible to detect the rotation operation and the pressing operation of the above, it is possible to perform an effect according to the operation of the player based on the detection signal, which is more suitable for the player who operates the operation units 401 and 405. It is possible to provide a sensational effect, entertain the player, and suppress a decrease in the interest in the game. Further, the operation units 401 and 405 are provided with a dial decoration board 430 and a button decoration board 432 for light emission decoration, and the operation units 401 and 405 can be light emission decoration, so that the operation units 401 and 405 emit light. By doing so, the player's interest can be attracted to the operation units 401 and 405, and the player can easily operate the operation units 401 and 405.

Further, when the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is pressed, the step portion 407a of the pressing operation unit 405 and the protruding portion 401f of the dial operation unit 401 come into contact with each other, so that the player can press the pressing operation unit 405. When the dial drive motor 414 is pressed, the dial operation unit 401 is repeatedly rotated forward and reverse within a predetermined angle range to vibrate, thereby vibrating the dial operation unit 401 via the step portion 407a in contact with the protruding portion 401f of the dial operation unit 401. The pressing operation unit 405 can also be vibrated. Therefore, even if a vibrator or the like for vibrating the pressing operation unit 405 is not separately provided, the player can be given an operation feeling for the pressing operation 405, so that the effect using the operation unit 400 can be enjoyed. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game. In addition, since the pressing operation unit 405 vibrates when the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed, the pressing operation unit 405, which was thought not to move without permission, can greatly surprise the player, which is good. It is possible to make people think that there may be something, and it is possible to raise expectations for the game and suppress the decline in interest. Therefore, unlike the conventional operation unit, the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can move freely to attract the player's interest to the operation unit 400, and the player can participate in the production using the operation unit 400. In addition to making it easier, the operation unit 400 can be positively operated by the player, and the operation of the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is enjoyed, and the interest in the game is reduced. Can be suppressed.

Further, since the pressing operation unit 405 and the dial operation unit 401 are brought into contact with each other when the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed, the force from the pressing operation unit 405 can be transmitted to the dial operation unit 401 side. Even if the pressing operation unit 405 is struck, the load and impact applied to the pressing operation unit 405 can be distributed to the dial operation unit 401 side as well, and the load resistance and impact resistance to the pressing operation unit 405 can be distributed. Can be enhanced. Therefore, even if the pressing operation unit 405 is struck, it is possible to prevent the pressing operation unit 405 from being damaged, so that the game is prevented from being interrupted due to the damage of the pressing operation unit 405 (operation unit 400). It is possible to prevent the player's interest in the game from being lowered due to the interruption of the game.

Further, the pressing operation unit 405 is rotatably supported only within a predetermined angle range with respect to the circumference of the axis extending in the vertical direction, and when the player presses the pressing operation unit 405, the dial is driven. Even if the dial operation unit 401 is rotationally driven by the motor 414, it is possible to prevent the pressing operation unit 405 from trying to rotate together with the dial operation unit 401, so that the player can operate the dial in the operation unit 400. The roles of the unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can be reliably recognized, and the player can easily enjoy the effect using the operation unit 400, and the guide to the upper surface of the pressing operation unit 405. It is possible to make it easier for the player to read the character "PUSH" without turning or tilting it greatly, and to make the player surely recognize that the pressing operation unit 405 is to perform the pressing operation. be able to.

Further, the dial operation unit 401 is provided with a projecting portion 401f protruding from the inner circumference of the inner cylinder portion 401a toward the axial center, and the outer peripheral surface of the pressing operation unit 405 has a diameter smaller than a predetermined position in the vertical direction. Since the step portion 407a formed by the above is provided, the inner peripheral surface of the inner cylinder portion 401a of the dial operation portion 401 and the outer peripheral surface of the pressing operation portion 405 can be brought as close as possible to each other at the upper end of the operation unit 400. The gap between the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can be made as small as possible to improve the appearance, and the inside of the operation unit 400 can be obtained through the gap between the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405. It is possible to make it difficult for foreign matter such as dust and dirt to enter, and it is possible to prevent the occurrence of problems such as the dial operation unit 401 becoming difficult to rotate or the pressing operation unit 405 becoming difficult to press due to the intrusion of foreign matter. be able to.

Further, the contact portion between the pressing operation unit 405 and the dial operation unit 401 in the operation unit 400 is formed in an annular shape, and when the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed, the circumferential direction with respect to the dial operation unit 401 is formed. Since the contact can be made even at the position, even if the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed (pressing a position deviated to the outer periphery from the center of the pressing operation unit 405), it is surely brought into contact with the dial operation unit 401. The rotation drive from the dial drive motor 414 can be reliably transmitted to the pressing operation unit 405 via the dial operation unit 401. Further, since the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 come into contact with each other in an annular shape, the load from the pressing operation unit 405 can be widely distributed to the dial operation unit 401 side, and the load resistance to the pressing operation unit 405 can be improved. Impact resistance can be further improved.

Further, since the contact portion between the pressing operation unit 405 and the dial operation unit 401 in the operation unit 400 is inclined so as to be lowered toward the direction of the rotation axis of the dial operation unit 401, there is a case where the contact portion is not inclined. In comparison, the contact area can be relatively increased, and the driving force from the dial drive motor 414 can be easily transmitted to the pressing operation unit 405 side via the dial operation unit 401. Further, the load from the pressing operation unit 405 can be radially distributed in the outward direction in the direction perpendicular to the extending direction of the rotation axis, preventing the load from concentrating, and the resistance in the operation unit 400. The load resistance and impact resistance can be surely improved, the durability of the operation unit 400 can be improved, the occurrence of defects during the game can be reduced as much as possible, and the player's interest can be reduced. Can be suppressed.

Further, since the dial drive motor 414 of the operation unit 400 is a stepping motor capable of forward rotation and reverse rotation, the dial operation unit 401 is not only simply rotated, but can be easily stopped at a predetermined position, and forward rotation and reverse rotation can be performed. It can be easily vibrated by repetition, and the operation unit 400 (pachinko machine 1) that exerts the above-mentioned action and effect can be surely embodied.

Further, since the operation unit 400 is supported by the plate unit 300 provided with the upper plate 301 for storing the game balls, the strength and rigidity of the plate unit 300 is high in order to store a large number of game balls. Therefore, it is possible to sufficiently cope with a bang on the operation unit 400 (pressing operation unit 405), and it is possible to easily enjoy the production using the operation unit 400.

[1-2H. Handle device]
Next, the handle device 500 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 51. FIG. 51 is an exploded perspective view of the handle device in the door frame as viewed after being disassembled. As shown in the figure, the handle device 500 of the present embodiment is attached to a handle bracket 140 attached to the front surface of the door frame base main body 110 of the door frame base unit 100 through the handle insertion hole 334a of the dish side outer cover 334 of the dish unit 300. A fixed, cylindrical handle base 502 with a rounded front end bulging in the direction perpendicular to the axis, an annular rotary handle body rear 504 arranged on the front side of the handle base 502 so as to be rotatable relative to the handle base 502, and a rotary handle. Rotating handle that is fixed to the front of the rear 504 of the main body and can rotate integrally with the rear of the main body 504. It is provided with a front end cover 508 that rotatably supports the front 506 of the rotary handle body and the rear 504 of the rotary handle body in cooperation with each other.

Further, the handle device 500 is mounted and fixed so as to project from the front side to the rear side at the rotation center in front of the rotary handle body, and has a shaft member 510 having a non-circular bearing portion 510a at the rear end, and a bearing portion of the shaft member 510. The rotation position detection sensor 512, which has a detection shaft portion 512a that is fitted to the 510a and is rotatable and is non-rotatably fitted to the front surface of the handle base 502, and the rotation position detection sensor 512 are sandwiched between the handle base 502. A sensor support member 514 having a through hole 514a fixed to the front surface of the handle base 502 and through which the detection shaft 512a of the rotation position detection sensor 512 can pass, a touch sensor 516 attached to the rear surface of the sensor support member 514, and a touch sensor. The 516 is a launch stop switch 518 mounted at a different position on the rear surface of the sensor support member 514, a single-shot button 520 rotatably supported by the sensor support member 514 to operate the launch stop switch 518, and a shaft member 510. A handle return spring 522 that is arranged so as to cover the outer circumference and urges the rotary handle body front 506 and the rotary handle body rear 504 to return to the initial rotation position (rotation end in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front). It is equipped with.

As shown in the figure, the handle base 502 of the handle device 500 of this example has a shape in which the front end side is a hemispherical bulge that extends to the front side, and the rear end side is a cylindrical shape with the rear end open. Three groove portions 502a extending in the axial direction are formed on the outer periphery of the cylinder on the rear end side. The three grooves 502a of the handle base 502 are one on the upper side, two on the lower side, and unequally spaced with respect to the circumferential direction so as to correspond to the three ridges 143 in the tubular portion 141 of the handle bracket 140. Have been placed. The handle base 502 is supported in a non-rotatable state by being inserted into the tubular portion 141 of the handle bracket 140 so that the groove portion 502a fits with the ridge 143.

In the handle device 500, an arcuate slit 506a arranged concentrically with the rotation axis is formed in the front 506 of the rotary handle main body, and three mounting bosses 508a projecting rearward are formed in the front end cover 508. These mounting bosses 508a are fixed to the front surface of the handle base 502 through the slit 506a in front of the rotary handle body 506. As a result, the circumferential end of the slit 506a in the front 506 of the rotary handle body comes into contact with the mounting boss 508a of the front end cover 508, so that the rotation range of the rotary handle body 504 and 506 is restricted.

Further, in the handle device 500, a locking protrusion 506b projecting rearward is formed in the front 506 of the rotary handle main body, and one end side (front end side) of the coil-shaped handle return spring 522 is formed in the locking protrusion 506b. Is locked, and the other end side (rear end side) of the handle return spring 522 is locked to the sensor support member 514. The handle return spring 522 locks the rotary handle body 504. , 506 are urged to rotate counterclockwise in front view.

The handle device 500 of this example is adapted to be attached to the handle attachment portion 114 of the door frame base main body 110 via the handle bracket 140. Since the mounting surface of the handle mounting portion 114 of the door frame base main body 110 is inclined so as to face the outside (open side) in a plan view seen from above, the handle mounted via the handle bracket 140 The device 500 is also tilted outward in a plan view (in other words, its tip is tilted toward the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line orthogonal to the front vertical plane of the pachinko machine 1) and the door frame. It is designed to be mounted and fixed to 5. As a result, the player can easily grip the handle device 500, and the rotation operation can be easily performed without any discomfort in the rotation operation.

Further, in the handle device 500, the rotation position detection sensor 512 is a variable resistor, and when the rotation handle main body 504,506 (handle device 500) is rotated, the rotation position detection sensor 512 is detected via the shaft member 510. The shaft portion 512a will rotate. Then, the internal resistance of the rotation position detection sensor 512 changes according to the rotation angle of the detection shaft portion 512a, and the driving force of the launch solenoid 654 in the ball launching device 650 described later changes according to the internal resistance of the rotation position detection sensor 512. Then, the game ball is driven into the game area 1100 with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle device 500.

The outer peripheral surfaces of the rotary handle main body 504 and 506 and the front end cover 508 are plated with conductivity, and the touch sensor 516 detects the contact when the player comes into contact with the rotary handle main body 504 and 506 and the like. It has become like. Then, when the rotation handle main body 504, 506 rotates while the touch sensor 516 detects the contact of the player, the rotation drive of the firing solenoid 654 is controlled by the strength corresponding to the rotation, and the game ball. You can type in. That is, even if the player tries to drive the game ball by rotating the handle device 500 in some way without touching the handle device 500, the launch solenoid 654 is not driven and the game ball cannot be driven. It is possible to prevent the player from playing a game different from the original one and reduce the load (burden) on the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Further, when the player presses the single-shot button 520 while the handle device 500 is being rotated, the firing stop switch 518 detects the operation of the single-shot button 520, and the firing control unit 4120 stops the rotational drive of the firing solenoid 654. It has become like. As a result, it is possible to temporarily stop the firing of the game ball without returning the rotation operation of the handle device 500, and by releasing the pressing operation of the single-shot button 520, before operating the single-shot button 520. It is possible to launch a game ball with the driving strength.

The handle device 500 of this example electrically detects the rotation operation of the rotation handle main body 504 and 506 by the rotation position detection sensor 512, and then launch control is based on the detection of the rotation position from the rotation position detection sensor 512. Since the rotation drive strength of the firing solenoid 654 is controlled by the unit 4120, the handle device 500 provided in the door frame 5 and the ball launching device 650 provided in the main body frame 3 like a conventional pachinko machine. It is not necessary to provide a mechanical (for example, a joint unit) mechanism so that the door frame 5 is linked to each other when the door frame 5 is closed and the linkage is released when the door frame 5 is opened, which simplifies the configuration of the pachinko machine 1. In addition to being able to do so, it is possible to eliminate the occurrence of problems in the joint unit, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the player's interest due to the problem of driving the game ball.

[1-2I. Foul cover unit]
Next, the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 52 to 54. FIG. 52 is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit in the door frame disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 53 is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit in the door frame disassembled and viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 54 is a front view showing a state in which the front cover of the foul cover unit is removed.

The foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 is attached to the rear surface below the game window 101 in the door frame base unit 100, and is launched by a game ball paid out from the prize ball unit 700, which will be described later, or a hit ball launching device 650. Despite this, the game ball (foul ball) that has not reached the game area 1100 is guided to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300. The foul cover unit 540 of this example includes a cover base 542 whose front side is open and has a plurality of game ball flow paths inside, and a front cover 544 that closes the front end of the cover base 542.

As shown in FIG. 53, the cover base 542 of the foul cover unit 540 has a first ball inlet 542a arranged in the upper right corner in the rear view and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and a front end of the cover base 542 communicating with the first ball entrance. The first ball passage 542b that expands to the right side of the front view, and the second ball entrance 542c that is located outside the first ball entrance 542a (on the right side in the rear view) and is larger than the first ball entrance 542a. Inside the cover base 542 that communicates with the ball passage 542d, it is provided with a second ball entrance 542c that extends downward and is inclined so as to be lowered toward the lower right corner of the front view. The first ball inlet 542a and the second ball inlet 542c have the normal ball outlet 774 and the full tank outlet 77 of the full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 in a state where the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3. They are formed at positions facing each other. As shown in the figure, the height of the portion of the cover base 542 extending in the left-right direction along the lower end of the second ball passage 542d is about three times as high as the outer diameter of the game ball. , A storage space 546 that can accommodate a predetermined amount of game balls is formed.

Further, the cover base 542 can guide the game ball to the upper part near the downstream side of the second ball passage 542d by communicating with the foul ball entrance 542e, which is arranged in the upper center in the left-right direction and opens upward, and the foul ball entrance 542e. It is equipped with a foul ball passage 542f. Further, the cover base 542 is provided with an opening / closing actuating piece 542g for operating the opening / closing shutter 792 of the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 on the lower rear surface of the second ball inlet 542c. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the opening / closing actuating piece 542g abuts on the spherical contact portion 793d of the opening / closing crank 793 in the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 to rotate the opening / closing crank 793. The open / close shutter 792 can be opened.

The front cover 544 of the foul cover unit 540 is formed in a substantially plate shape that closes the front surface of the cover base 540, is arranged in the upper left corner of the front view, communicates with the first ball passage 542b of the cover base 540, and penetrates in the front-rear direction. The first ball outlet 544a is provided, and the second ball outlet 544b, which is arranged in the lower right corner of the front view and communicates with the downstream end of the second ball passage of the cover base 540 and penetrates in the front-rear direction. The first ball outlet 544a of the front cover 544 is connected to the upper dish ball supply port 310c of the dish unit 300 through the notch 101a of the door frame base unit 100. Further, the second ball outlet 544b is connected to the rear end of the lower plate ball supply gutter 310h in the plate unit 300 through the ball passage port 110f of the door frame base main body 110.

In the foul cover unit 540 of this example, the game ball supplied from the normal ball outlet 774 of the full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 to the first ball inlet 542a is passed through the first ball passage 542b to the first ball outlet. It can be supplied from 544a to the upper plate 101 via the upper plate ball supply port 310c of the plate unit 300. Further, the foul cover unit 540 allows the game ball supplied from the full tank outlet 767 of the full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 to the second ball inlet 542c to pass through the second ball passage 542d to the second ball exit. It is possible to supply from 544b to the lower plate 302 via the lower plate ball supply gutter 310h and the lower plate ball supply port 310 g of the plate unit 300.

Further, although the details of the foul cover unit 540 will be described later, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul ball entrance 542e is located at the lower part of the foul space 626 of the main body frame 3. When the game ball launched by the hit ball launching device 650 does not reach the inside of the game area 1100 but becomes a foul ball and falls in the foul space 626, it is received by the foul ball entrance 542e. Then, the foul cover unit 540 discharges (supplies) the game ball received at the foul ball inlet 542e from the second ball outlet 544b to the lower plate 302 of the dish unit 300 through the foul ball passage 542f and the second ball passage 542d. ) Can be done.

Further, the foul cover unit 540 of this example forms a side surface on the upstream side (left side in front view) of the accommodation space 546 in the second ball passage 542d, and is swingable by the game ball stored in the accommodation space 546. A swing member 548 pivotally supported by the swing member 548, a full tank detection sensor 550 that detects the swing of the swing member 548, and a spring that urges the swing member 548 in a direction in which the full tank detection sensor 550 is in a non-detection state. It is equipped with 552. As shown in FIG. 54, the lower end of the swing member 548 is rotatably supported with respect to the cover base 542, and the upper end of the swing member 548 rotates to the left side in the front view, and is substantially vertical. The left side wall of the accommodation space 546 is formed in such a state. Further, the swing member 548 is urged to a position where it is in a substantially vertical state by a spring 552. Further, the rocking member 548 is formed with a detection piece 548a projecting outward on the side surface opposite to the accommodation space 546 side, and the detection piece 548a is detected by the full tank detection sensor 550. ..

Further, the foul cover unit 540 includes a ground rail 554 arranged at the bottom of the accommodation space 546 in the second ball passage 542d, and a plate-shaped ground fitting 556 that covers the right end and the left end of the cover base 542 when viewed from the rear. , And can remove static electricity generated by rolling resistance due to the circulation of game balls.

In this example, the game ball paid out from the prize ball unit 700 is supplied from the normal ball outlet 774 of the full tank branch unit 770 to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 via the foul cover unit 540. Even if the upper plate 301 is full, if the game ball is further discharged from the prize ball unit 700, it stays in the first ball passage 542b of the foul cover unit 540, and further, the normal ball exit 774 in the full tank branch unit 770. When the upstream normal passage 773 is also full, the game balls are circulated to the full tank passage 775 side through the branch space 772 of the full tank branch unit 770 (see FIG. 79), and the full tank branch unit 770 It will be supplied from the full tank outlet 776 to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 via the second ball inlet 542c, the second ball passage 542d, and the second ball outlet 544b of the foul cover unit 540.

Then, when the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 was filled with the game balls, the game balls could not be discharged from the second ball outlet 544b of the foul cover unit 540, and the game balls stayed in the accommodation space 546 in the second ball passage 542d. The game ball will be stored. Further, as the game balls are discharged from the prize ball unit 700 and a large number of game balls are stored in the accommodation space 546, the storage pressure of the game balls acts on the swing member 548 to resist the urging force of the spring 552. The upper end of the swing member 548 will move to the left. When the detection piece 548a of the rocking member 548 is detected by the full tank detection sensor 550, the payout control board 4110 stops the payout of the game ball from the prize ball unit 700, and the dish unit is for the player. A notification is provided to urge the game balls in the 300 to be discharged to the outside.

When the game ball in the accommodation space 546 (lower plate 302) is discharged and the swing member 548 returns to a substantially vertical state by the urging force of the spring 552, the detection piece 548a is detected by the full tank detection sensor 550. It is not detected, and the payout of the game ball from the prize ball unit 700 is restarted.

[1-2J. Ball feed unit]
Subsequently, the ball feed unit 580 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 55 and 57. FIG. 55 is a front perspective view of the ball feed unit in the door frame. FIG. 56 is a rear perspective view of the ball feed unit in the door frame. Further, FIG. 57 is an exploded perspective view of the ball feed unit disassembled and viewed from the front. FIG. 58 is an exploded perspective view of the ball feed unit with the rear case removed and viewed from the rear. The ball feed unit 580 in the door frame 5 can supply the game balls supplied from the upper plate 301 in the plate unit 300 to the hitting ball launching device 650 one by one, and the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 can be supplied. The upper plate ball removal mechanism 340 can be removed to the lower plate 302 by operating the upper plate ball removal button 341.

In the ball feed unit 580, the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 are supplied through the upper plate ball discharge port 310d of the plate unit base 310 and the ball feed opening 113 of the door frame base main body 110 in the front-rear direction. A box-shaped front cover 581 having a penetrating entrance 581a and a ball outlet 581b that opens below the entrance 581a and having an open rear, and a box-shaped front cover 581 that closes the rear end of the front cover 581 and opens the front. A rear cover 582, a rear cover 582, and a front cover having a ball feeding port 582a for supplying a game ball that penetrates in the front-rear direction and enters from the entrance 581a of the front cover 581 to the ball launching device 650. With a ball pulling member 583 having a partition portion 583a rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between 581 and partitioning between the entrance 581a and the ball pulling port 581b on the rear side of the front cover 581. , The game balls on the partition portion 583a of the ball removing member 583 are fed one by one to the hit ball supply port 582a of the rear cover, and are rotatably supported around the axis extending in the vertical direction between the front cover 581 and the rear cover 582. The ball feed member 584 is provided with a ball feed member 584 and a ball feed solenoid 585 that rotates the ball feed member 584. In this example, as shown in the figure, the ball feed member 584 is arranged on the right side of the entrance 581a in front view, the ball feed member 583 is on the left side of the ball feed member 584, and the ball feed solenoid 585 is on the right side. Have been placed.

The front cover 581 of the ball feed unit 580 is provided with an arcuate slit 581c formed concentrically with respect to the rotation center of the ball extraction member 583 on the left side of the ball extraction port 581b when viewed from the front. From 581c, the operating rod 583c of the ball removing member 583, which will be described later, extends forward. Further, the front cover 581 extends upward from the upper edge of the entrance 581a, and when assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the rear end opening of the ball guide flow path 344b in the upper plate ball removing base 344. Is formed to close.

Further, the ball pulling member 583 has a partition portion 583a and a partition portion 583a whose upper surface is lowered toward the ball feeding member 584 by partitioning the space between the entrance 581a and the ball ejection port 581b below the entrance 581a. It extends downward from the end opposite to the ball feed member 584, and bends in a dogleg shape from the vicinity of the middle in the vertical direction toward the lower center of the ball ejection port 581b, and the lower end extends in the front-rear direction around the axis. A rotating rod portion 583b that is rotatably supported, a rod-shaped operating rod 583c that protrudes forward from the upper end of the rotating rod portion 583b, and a side surface of the rotating rod portion 583b below the operating rod 583c. It is provided with a weight portion 583d projecting from the partition portion 583a to the opposite side to the partition portion 583a. The actuating rod 583c of the ball removing member 583 is formed so as to project forward through an arcuate slit 581c formed in the front cover 581 (see FIG. 55), and the ball feed opening of the door frame base main body 110. It comes into contact with the upper end of the contact piece 343a of the upper plate ball removal slider 343 in the upper plate ball removal mechanism 340 of the plate unit 300 via 113.

Further, the ball feed member 584 has a fan-shaped cutoff portion 584a and a cutoff portion 584a centered on a rotation axis extending in the vertical direction toward the partition portion 583a of the entrance 581a and the ball removal member 583. It is provided with a ball holding portion 584b recessed in an arc shape from the rear end to the rotation axis core side, and a rod-shaped rod-shaped rod portion 584c extending downward from the rear end of the ball holding portion 584b. The blocking portion 584a and the ball holding portion 584b of the ball feeding member 54 are each formed within an angle range of about 90 ° about the center of rotation axis. Further, the ball holding portion 584b of the ball feeding member 584 has a size capable of holding one game ball. The ball feed member 584 rotates around the rotation shaft core by moving the rod portion 584c arranged at a position eccentric to the rotation shaft core in the left-right direction by driving the ball feed solenoid 585. ing.

In the ball feed member 584, the blocking portion 584a faces the direction of the partition portion 583a, and at the same time, the ball holding portion 584b faces the supply position in the direction in which the ball holding portion 584b communicates with the hit ball supply port 582a, and the ball holding portion 584b faces the partition portion 583a. It is designed to rotate between the holding position and the holding position. When the ball feed member 584 is in the supply position, the game ball held by the ball holding portion 584b is supplied to the hitting ball launching device 650 from the hitting ball supply port 582a, and the game enters the partition portion 583a from the entrance 581a. The ball is blocked from moving toward the ball holding portion 584b (ball hitting supply port 582a) by the blocking portion 584a, and stays on the partition portion 583a. On the other hand, when the ball feed member 584 rotates to the holding position, the ball holding portion 584b faces the direction of the partition portion 583a, and the end portion of the ball holding portion 584b on the rod portion 584c side closes the ball hitting supply port 582a. , Only one game ball on the partition portion 583a is held in the ball holding portion 584b.

Further, the ball feed unit 580 has a ball feed operating rod 586 whose tip swings in the vertical direction by driving (energization) of the ball feed solenoid 585 and a ball feed operating rod 586 which moves back and forth by the movement of the tip swinging in the vertical direction. It is provided with a ball feed crank 587 that rotates around an axis extending in a direction and rotates a ball feed member 584 around an axis extending in the vertical direction. The ball feed crank 587 has an engaging portion 587a extending in the left-right direction so as to be engageable with the vertically moving tip of the ball feed operating rod 586, and a side of the engaging portion 587a that engages with the ball feed operating rod 586. Is arranged on the opposite side and is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the front cover 581 and the rear cover 582. It is provided with a transmission portion 587c that engages with a rod-shaped rod-shaped rod portion 584c (see FIG. 57) that protrudes downward from a position eccentric with respect to the rotation center in the above. In this example, a flapper solenoid in which the ball feed solenoid 585 and the ball feed operating rod 586 are integrally formed is used.

In the ball feed unit 580 of this example, the ball feed operation rod 586 and the ball feed crank 587 transmit the movement of the ball feed operation rod 586 that swings by the drive of the ball feed solenoid 585 that moves up and down in the vertical direction to transmit the ball feed member. The 584 can be rotated. When the ball feed solenoid 585 is not driven (normal time), the tip of the ball feed operating rod 586 swinging away from the lower end of the ball feed solenoid 585 is positioned downward. In the state, the ball feed member 584 is located at the supply position. Further, when the ball feed solenoid 585 is driven, the ball feed operating rod 586 is attracted to the lower end of the ball feed solenoid 585 and the swinging tip is positioned upward so that the ball feed member 584 rotates to the holding position. It has become. That is, when the ball feed solenoid 585 is driven (ON state), the ball feed member 584 receives one game ball, and when the drive of the ball feed solenoid 585 is released (OFF state), the ball feed member 584 receives one. The game ball is sent (supplied) to the hit ball launching device 650 side. The drive of the ball feed solenoid 585 in the ball feed unit 580 is controlled by the launch control unit 4120 in synchronization with the drive control of the launch solenoid 654.

Further, the ball pulling member 583 rotatably supported by the ball feed unit 580 of this example is subjected to a moment such that it rotates in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front by the weight portion 583c. The rotation of the working rod 583c protruding forward is restricted by abutting with the upper end of the contact piece 343a of the upper plate ball removal slider 343 in the upper plate ball removal mechanism 340 of the plate unit 300. In the normal state, the partition portion 583a of the ball pulling member 583 partitions between the entrance 581a and the ball pulling port 581b so that the game ball does not enter the ball pulling port 581b side. Then, when the player presses the upper plate ball removal button 341 of the upper plate ball removal mechanism 340 in the plate unit 300 downward, the upper plate ball removal slider 343 slides downward together with the contact piece 343a to abut. As the piece 343a moves downward, the working rod 583c also moves relatively downward.

In this way, by moving the operating rod 583c downward together with the contact piece 343a of the upper plate ball removing mechanism 340, the ball removing member 583 rotates in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, and the entrance by the partition portion 583a. The partition between the 381a and the ball ejection port 381b is released, and the game ball that has entered from the entrance 381a is discharged from the ball ejection port 381b to the ball ejection flow path 344c of the upper plate ball extraction base 344 of the dish unit 300. , It is designed to be discharged (supplied) to the lower plate 302.

Since the contact piece 343a of the upper plate ball pulling slider 343 with which the operating rod 583c of the ball pulling member 583 abuts is urged upward by the coil spring, the game ball is vigorously supplied onto the partition portion 581a. However, the impact can be absorbed by the coil spring that urges the upper plate ball removing slider 343 via the operating rod 583c, and the ball removing member 583 and the like can be prevented from being damaged, and the game ball can be moved. The partition portion 583a can prevent it from bouncing back.

As described above, according to this example, after storing the game ball in the upper plate 301 and supplying the game ball to the ball feed unit 580, the player uses the handle device 500 provided on the front surface of the door frame 5. When operated, the game ball is sent to the hit ball launching device 650 by the drive of the ball feed solenoid 585 of the ball feed unit 580, and the game ball is driven into the game area 1100 by the ball feed launcher 650, so that the game window 101 of the door frame 5 The game will be played in the game area 1100 that can be visually recognized via the door frame base unit 100, and the player can be entertained. Etc.) and a ball feed unit 580 equipped with a discharge mechanism (ball pulling member 583), so that not only the ball feeding member 584 and the ball pulling member 583 but also the ball feeding member 584 and the ball launching device 650 are possible. The number of game balls remaining on the ball feed member 584 side can be reduced as much as possible when the game balls in the upper plate 301 are ejected by operating the upper plate ball removal button 341. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling lost and to prevent the player from losing interest.

Further, since the ball feed unit 580 provided with the ball pulling member 583 is arranged on the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100, it is possible to increase the capacity of the upper plate 301 in the plate unit 300, and it is possible to drive a game ball. It is possible to prevent the game ball in the upper plate 301 from disappearing at an early stage or the inside of the upper plate 301 from becoming full with the game ball at an early stage by the operation. It is possible to reduce the annoyance of the player and suppress the deterioration of the interest, and the plate unit 300 can be miniaturized while maintaining the capacity of the upper plate 301, so that the game can be relatively played. The area 1100 can be made large (wide) to be a pachinko machine 1 that strongly attracts the attention of the player.

Further, since the ball feeding unit 580 is provided with the ball feeding member 583, the ball feeding member can be compared with the ball feeding member 584 and the ball pulling member 583 separately by simply attaching the ball feeding unit 580. The 584 and the ball pulling member 583 can be attached, the labor involved in assembling can be simplified, the feed unit 580 can be easily replaced, and problems occur in the ball feeding member 584 and the ball pulling member 583. Even so, the problem can be easily solved by replacing the ball feed unit 580.

Further, since the ball feed unit 580 is arranged on the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5, the upper plate ball is compared with the one in which the ball feed unit 580 is provided on the main body frame 3 side. It is not necessary to configure the transmission mechanism (upper plate ball pulling mechanism 340) for transmitting the operation of the pulling button 341 to the ball pulling member 584 of the ball feed unit 580 so as to straddle the openable door frame 5 and the main body frame 3. The configuration of the transmission mechanism can be simplified. Further, since the ball feed unit 580 is provided on the door frame 5 side, the transmission mechanism (as compared with the case where the ball feed unit 580 is provided on the main body frame 3 side) is provided every time the door frame 5 is opened. By shutting off the precision ball removing mechanism 340), it is possible to avoid the possibility that the transmission mechanism will be consumed early and malfunction or be damaged, and the reliability of the operation of the transmission mechanism, the ball feed unit 580, etc. can be avoided. And durability can be increased.

Further, since the upper plate ball removal button 341 is pressed downward, the game ball can be ejected from the upper plate 301 to the lower plate 302 simply by pressing the upper plate ball removal button 341 downward, or the upper plate 301. It is possible to stop the ejection of the game ball from the plate, and the player can easily operate the ball removal operation in the upper plate 301 by the upper plate ball removal button 341.

Further, the partition portion 583a of the ball removing member 583 is moved by the movement of the upper plate ball removing slider 343 that slides in the vertical direction in response to the operation of the upper plate ball removing button 341. At the same time, since the partition portion 583a also moves in the vertical direction, it is possible to reduce the horizontal movement range of the upper plate ball removing slider 343 and the partition portion 583a as much as possible, and the upper plate ball removing mechanism 340 and the ball feed. The unit 580 can be miniaturized, and the pachinko machine 1 can reliably exert the above-mentioned effects.

Further, the upper plate ball removal slider 343 is urged upward, and when the upper plate ball removal slider 343 is in the raised position, the partition portion 583a of the ball removal member 583 communicates the entrance 581a and the hit ball supply port 582a. Therefore, even if the game ball vigorously contacts the partition portion 583a from the upper plate 301, the impact can be alleviated by the urging force acting on the upper plate ball removing slider 343, and the partition portion 583a (ball removing member) can be relaxed. The durability of 583) can be increased. Further, since the impact on the partition portion 583a can be alleviated by the urging force acting on the upper plate ball removing slider 343, even if the game ball collides with the partition portion 583a, it can be made difficult to repel, and the game ball can be repelled. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball feed unit 580 and the like from being damaged and causing problems.

Further, since the partition portion 583a is rotated, it is related to the movement of the partition portion 583a when the load of the game ball is applied to the partition portion 583a as compared with the case where the partition portion 583a is slid. Friction loss can be reduced, the operation of the countersunk ball removal button 341 can be lightened to improve operability, and the moving range of the partition portion 583a can be reduced in plane projection, as described above. It is possible to play the action effect of.

Further, since the partition portion 583a is rotated in the direction in which the entrance 581a and the ball ejection port 581b communicate with each other by its own weight, if a problem occurs in the partition portion 583a or the upper plate ball extraction mechanism 340, the partition portion 583a is rotated. Is rotated by its own weight, so that the entrance and the discharge port are in communication with each other, and the gaming medium in the storage dish is fed to the feeding mechanism (loading device) side even though the discharging operation unit is not operated. Since it will be discharged to the player side without being able to do so, it is possible to make the player aware that the pachinko machine 1 has a problem, and it is interesting to move it to the pachinko machine 1 without a problem. It can be suppressed from decreasing.

Further, since the partition portion 583a is rotated via the bent rotating rod portion 583b in the ball removing member 583, when the game ball collides with the partition portion 583a, the impact is bent and the rotating rod portion is bent. By dispersing by 583b or by absorbing by bending of the rotating rod portion 583b, it is possible to prevent the impact from being linearly transmitted to the rotating shaft, and the durability of the ball removing member 583 can be improved. Can be enhanced.

Further, since the ball outlet 581b is arranged directly under the entrance 581a communicating with the upper plate 301 side, the left and right of the game ball in the ball feed unit 580 when the game ball in the upper plate 301 is discharged. The movement in the direction can be minimized, the passage of the game ball in the ball feed unit 580 is improved, and the game ball can be discharged satisfactorily. Further, since the ball ejection port 581b is arranged directly below the entrance 581a, the ejection path of the game ball in the ball feeding unit 580 can be shortened as much as possible, and the ball feeding unit 580 can be used as an ejection mechanism. Even if the ball removing member 583 is provided, it is possible to prevent the ball feeding unit 580 from becoming unnecessarily large.

[1-2K. Glass unit]
Next, the glass unit 590 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 22 and 23. The glass unit 590 has an opening of substantially the same size as the game window 101, and is an annular and vertically long octagonal unit frame 592 molded from synthetic resin, and two pieces that close the front and rear ends of the opening of the unit frame 592, respectively. It comprises a transparent glass plate 594 (see FIG. 106). The unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590 is composed of four pieces 592a which are arranged apart from each other in the vertical direction at both left and right ends and extend outward in a plate shape, and a plate extending in the horizontal direction along the lower end and extending downward. It is provided with a locking piece 592b and the like.

The glass unit 590 engages the locking piece 592b at the lower end with the vertically bent projecting piece 161 of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 in the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame base unit 100 so as to engage from the rear upper side. Then, the outer peripheral edge of the unit frame 592 is fitted into the glass unit support step portion 110a of the door frame base main body 110, and the stop piece 592a of the unit frame 592 is locked by the glass unit locking member 190 to lock the door frame. It is designed to be detachably attached to the base unit 100 (see FIGS. 23, 28, etc.).

As described above, in the door frame 5 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 for storing the game balls are arranged vertically on the lower side of the vertically elongated elliptical game window 101, and the lower plate 302 is arranged vertically. On the right side of the front view of the lower plate 302, the game ball stored in the upper plate 301 is driven into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 arranged behind the transparent glass unit 590 that closes the game window 101. The handle device 500 is arranged. Further, in the door frame 5, the right side decoration unit 200, the left side decoration unit 2200, and the upper decoration unit 280 are arranged so as to surround the left, right, upper side of the game window 101, and surround the lower side of the game window 101. The dish unit 300 is arranged so as to be continuous with the lower ends of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 220 with the side speaker cover 290 in between, and the appearance of each unit 200, 220, 280, 300 is rounded. It has an appearance with continuous integration.

Further, the door frame 5 emits light from the LEDs mounted on the decorative plates 214, 216, 254, 256, 286, 286, 320, 322, etc. provided in the units 200, 220, 280, 300, and the game window 101. And, it is possible to illuminate and decorate the lower plate cover 328 with an arbitrary luminescent color so as to surround the opening 328a. Further, among the LEDs mounted on the decorative substrates 214, 216, 254, 256 provided in the right side decorative unit 200 and the left side decorative unit 220, on the rear side of the radial lens portions 210b, 250b of the side lenses 210, 250. By turning on and off the arranged LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256, it is possible to change the mode of the light emitting decoration surrounding the game window 101.

Specifically, the light emitting modes of the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a corresponding to the peripheral lens portions 210a, 250a in the side lenses 210, 250 and the light emitting modes of the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b corresponding to the radiating lens portions 210b, 250b. If the mode is the same light emission mode (the light emission color and the light emission pattern are the same), the light emission decoration can be substantially uniform as a whole, and if the light emission modes are different so as to emphasize the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a. If it is made, it can be made into a light emitting decoration that has a break in the circumferential direction, and if the light emitting modes are different so as to emphasize the radial lens portions 210b and 250b, they shine radially around the center of the game window 101. It can be a luminescent decoration, which can strongly attract the attention of the player.

Further, in the door frame 5, the base member 420 that supports the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 in the operation unit 400 is made of die-cast aluminum alloy, and the base member 420 is made of the dish unit 300 by the cover body 426. Since it is suspended from the operation unit mounting portion 314c, when the dial operation portion 401 or the pressing operation portion 405 is hit, the cover body 426 is elastically deformed so as to bend, and then the base member 420 is lowered. The contact with the upper surface of the operation unit mounting portion 314c via the cover 424 can alleviate the impact applied to the dial operation portion 401, the pressing operation portion 405, etc., and prevent the operation unit 400 from being damaged. You can do it.

Further, the operation unit 400 in the door frame 5 has the pressing operation unit 405 inserted into the annular dial operation unit 401, and even if a player or the like tries to hit the pressing operation unit 405 strongly, the dial operation unit 401 is also included. The dial operation unit 401 can disperse the impact of the impact, preventing the impact from concentrating and making it less likely to be damaged. Further, the gear rail 416a of the operation unit holding member 416 that rotatably supports the dial operation unit 401 is attached so as to slightly project from the lower surface to the opening 420a of the metal base member 420 to operate the dial. When the impact of hitting the part 401 is transmitted to the operation part holding member 416 (gear rail 416a) via the driven gear 410 and the operation part holding member 416 bends downward, the lower surface of the driven gear 410 is the outer periphery of the metal opening 420a. Since it comes into contact with the upper surface and the impact can be received by the base member 420, the load on the operation unit holding member 416 can be reduced and the gear rail 416a can be prevented from being crushed by the impact. , The durability of the operation unit 400 can be improved.

Further, since the operation unit 400 in the door frame 5 is attached to the dish unit 300 from above, even if the operation unit 400 is damaged, the operation unit 400 can be easily replaced and operated. It is possible to prevent the operating rate of the pachinko machine 1 from decreasing due to the replacement of the unit 400.

[1-2L. Luminous decoration in the door frame]
Subsequently, the light emitting decoration in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 59 and 60. FIG. 59 is a front view showing the arrangement of LEDs for light emitting decoration in the door frame. Further, FIG. 60 is a front view showing a system of LEDs for light emitting decoration in a door frame. In the door frame 5 of the present embodiment, the outer periphery of the game window 101 substantially corresponding to the game area 1100 of the game board 4 by the right side decoration unit 200, the left side decoration unit 240, the upper decoration unit 280, and the plate unit 300 is substantially annular. It is formed so as to surround it. Each of these units 200, 240, 280, 300 is provided with decorative substrates 214,216, 254, 256, 286, 320, 322 on which LEDs are mounted, and by appropriately emitting light from each LED, the game window 101 The outer circumference of the window can be decorated with light emission.

As described above, the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 of the door frame 5 are formed so as to surround most of the outer periphery excluding the lower side of the game window 101, and have a plurality of circumferences of the side lenses 210 and 250. The lens portions 210a and 250a are arranged along the outer periphery of the game window 101, and the radial lens portions 210b and 250b extend along a radial axis centered on the vicinity of the lower center in the left-right direction of the game window 101. It is arranged between the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a adjacent to each other. The peripheral lens portions 210a, 250a and the radiating lens portions 210b, 250b of the side lenses 210, 250 are outer peripherally formed by the side decorative frames 202, 242 that are translucent (in this example, have a plating layer on the surface). Is surrounded.

Side inner lenses 212 and 252 are arranged on the rear side of these side lenses 210 and 250, and the main body portions 212a and 252a of the side inner lenses 212 and 252 are arranged with respect to the rear surface of the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a. It is formed so as to be separated by a predetermined distance, and the plate-shaped light guide portions 212b and 252b are formed so as to extend to a position as close as possible to the rear surface of the radiation lens portions 210b and 250b. Has been done. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the main bodies 212a and 252a of the side inner lenses 212 and 252 are formed with a plurality of fine prisms on the surface thereof, and the decorative substrates 214,216 and 254 arranged on the rear side thereof. , 256 can be diffused.

The right side upper decorative substrate 214, the right side lower decorative substrate 216, the left side upper decorative substrate 254, and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 arranged on the rear side of the side inner lenses 212 and 252 have peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a. It includes LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a arranged at corresponding positions, and LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b arranged at positions corresponding to the radiation lens portions 210b, 250b. In this example, the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a corresponding to the peripheral lens portions 210a, 250a are full-color LEDs, and the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b corresponding to the radial lens portions 210b, 250b are white LEDs (upper decoration). The normal brightness is lower than that of the LED 286b of the upper decorative substrate 286 in the unit 280). Further, the two LEDs 214c arranged above and below corresponding to the side sub-lens 228 in the decorative substrate 214 on the right side are red LEDs.

In this example, the surfaces of the right side upper decorative substrate 214, the right side lower decorative substrate 216, the left side upper decorative substrate 254, and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 are white photoresist and white printing (for example, silk printing). ), White paint, etc. make it white. As a result, the reflectance of the decorative substrates 214, 216, 254, 256 can be increased, so that the light from the player side is reflected by the decorative substrates 214, 216, 254, 256 when the LEDs 210a, 210b, etc. are not lit. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the side lenses 210 and 250 from becoming too dark and unsightly, and by reflecting the light from the light emitting LEDs 210a, 210b and the like toward the player side by the substrate, the side lens 210 and 250 can be prevented from becoming too dark. The lenses 210 and 250 can be decorated with light emission brighter.

Next, as described above, the upper decorative unit 280 of the door frame 5 connects between the ends of the right side decorative unit 200 and the left side decorative unit 240 facing the center side in the left-right direction in the upper part of the door frame 5. It is formed so as to decorate the upper center of the game window 101. The upper decorative unit 280 has a large central lens 282 formed in a jewel shape in the center, side lenses 284 formed in a blade shape on both diagonally upper left and right sides of the central lens 282, and lower left and right sides of the central lens 282. It is equipped with an arranged lower lens 289. The central lens 282 of the upper decorative unit 280 is formed of a bluish transparent member, and the side lens 284 and the lower lens 289 are formed of a translucent white (milky white) member. .. As a result, the inner lens 283 arranged on the rear side of the central lens 282 can be visually recognized from the player side.

The inner lens 283 of the upper decorative unit 280 has a plurality of fine lenses (including prisms) formed on the surface thereof, and can diffusely reflect or refract light, so that the light can be diffusely reflected or refracted through the transparent center lens 282. Looking at the inner lens 283, the central lens 282 seems to have a deep taste, and the central lens 282 itself seems to be shining. Further, the upper decorative substrate 286 arranged on the rear side of the inner lens 283 cannot be seen from the player side.

On the upper decorative substrate 286 of the upper decorative unit 280, a plurality of (six in this example) LEDs 286a corresponding to the central lens 282 and arranged behind the inner lens 283, and after the side lens 284 and the lower lens 289. It is equipped with a plurality of LEDs 286b arranged on the side (in this example, two for the side lens 284 and one for the lower lens 289, which are arranged on the left and right sides). In this example, the LED 286a corresponding to the central lens 282 is a full-color LED, and the LED 286b corresponding to the side lens 284 and the lower lens 289 is a high-brightness white LED. Further, the front surface of the upper decorative substrate 286 is also white, so that the same action and effect as described above can be obtained.

Subsequently, in the plate unit 300, a plurality of jewel-shaped light guide portions 318a in the upper plate upper lens 318 along the front end of the upper plate 301 so as to connect the lower ends of the left and right side decoration units 200 and 240 to the upper plate. They are arranged in a row exposed through the opening 316a of the front decorative member 316, and when viewed from the front, as shown in the figure, the lower outer side of the game window 101 is provided by the upper plate front decorative member 316 and the upper plate upper lens 318. (Lower side) is designed to be decorated. Below the upper plate upper lens 318, an upper plate upper inner lens 319 having a protrusion corresponding to each light guide portion 318a is arranged. The upper plate upper lens 318 of the plate unit 300 is formed of a bluish transparent member, and the upper plate upper inner lens 319 is formed of a transparent member.

The upper plate upper inner lens 319 of the plate unit 300 has a plurality of fine prisms formed on the surface (upper surface) corresponding to the light guide portion 318a of the upper plate upper lens 318 to diffusely reflect or refract light. As with the central lens 282 of the upper decorative unit 280, the light guide portion 318a of the upper plate upper lens 318 is given a deep taste and a glittering shine to guide the light. The light part 318a looks like a jewel. Further, the upper plate upper inner lens 319 makes it impossible to see the upper plate right decorative substrate 320 and the upper plate left decorative substrate 322 arranged on the lower side through the light guide portion 318a from the player side.

On the upper surfaces of the upper plate right decorative substrate 320 and the upper plate left decorative substrate 322 in the plate unit 300, a plurality of (six in this example) are provided so as to correspond to the light guide portion 318a of the upper plate upper lens 318. The LEDs 320a and 322a are provided. In this example, the LEDs 320a and 322a of the upper plate right decorative substrate 320 and the upper plate left decorative substrate 322 are full-color LEDs. Further, the surfaces (upper surface) of the upper plate right decorative substrate 320 and the upper plate left decorative substrate 322 are also white, so that the same effects as described above can be obtained.

Next, the operation unit 400 attached to the dish unit 300 has a translucent annular dial operation unit 401 and a translucent columnar pressing operation unit arranged inside the dial operation unit 401. A dial decorative board 430 and a button decorative board 432 are respectively arranged under the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405. The dial decorative substrate 430 is provided with LEDs 430b arranged in a plurality (four in this example) in the circumferential direction so as to correspond to the dial operation unit 401. Further, the button decorative substrate 432 is provided with one LED 432d so as to correspond to the pressing operation unit 405. In this example, the LED 430b of the dial decorative substrate 430 is a high-brightness white LED, and the LED 432d of the button decorative substrate 432 is a full-color LED. Further, the surfaces (upper surface) of the dial decorative substrate 430 and the button decorative substrate 432 are also white, so that the same effects as described above can be obtained.

By the way, in the door frame 5 of this example, the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a of the side lenses 210 and 250 in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 covering the outer periphery above the lower side of the game window 101 correspond to each other. LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a are arranged outside the first annular group 102 (within the hatch in FIGS. 59 and 60) near the game window 101 and the second annular group 103 outside the first annular group 102. It is divided into (within the range of the crosshatch in FIGS. 59 and 60), and by appropriately emitting the LEDs of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103, substantially concentric circles surrounding the game window 101. It is possible to make multiple (two in this example) light emitting decoration. That is, when all the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a of the first annular group 102 are made to emit light, the range of the hatch near the game window 101 is illuminated and decorated in an annular shape, and the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a of the second annular group 103 are emitted. When all the light is emitted, the range of the cross hatch away from the game window 101 is illuminated and decorated in a ring shape.

Further, in the door frame 5, the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b corresponding to the radial lens portions 210b, 250b of the side lenses 210, 250 in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 are the first annular group 102 and the first ring group 102. It is a radial group 104 (within the shaded area in FIGS. 59 and 60) extending radially around the lower center in the left-right direction of the game window 101 (game area 1100) so as to divide the bicyclic group 103 in the circumferential direction. ing. By appropriately emitting light of the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256b of the radial group 104, the outside of the game window 101 can be radiated and decorated in a radial manner, and the ring is formed by the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103. It is possible to make the luminescent decoration so as to divide it in the circumferential direction. Further, the LED 214c corresponding to the side sub-lens 228 on the upper right side surface of the right side decoration unit 200 is an upper right side group 105, and by appropriately emitting light from the LED 214c, one of the upper right side surfaces of the door frame 5. The part (side sub-lens 228) can be decorated with light emission.

Further, in the door frame 5, the LED 286a corresponding to the central lens 282 in the upper decoration unit 280 that decorates the upper center of the game window 101 emits light and decorates the upper center of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103. It is said to be group 106. By appropriately emitting light from the LED 286a of the upper center group 106, the upper center of the game window 101 can be light-emitting and decorated, and also as a reference point for the ring-shaped light-emitting decoration by the first ring group 102 and the second ring group 103. It is possible to make a luminescent decoration like this. Further, the LED 286b corresponding to the side lens 284 and the lower lens 289 in the upper decoration unit 280 is an upper center side group 107 that emits and decorates both the left and right sides of the upper center group 106. By appropriately emitting light from the LED 286b of the upper center side group 107, the boundary between the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 and the upper central group 106 can be illuminated and decorated, or the upper side (including the upper portion) of the game window 101 can be illuminated. It can be decorated with light emission in a V shape.

Further, in the door frame 5, the LED 320a corresponding to the light guide portion 318a of the upper plate upper lens 318 fitted into the plurality of openings 316a of the upper plate front decorative member 316 in the plate unit 300 that decorates the lower side of the game window 101. , 322a are lower groups 108 that illuminate and decorate the outer periphery of the lower side of the game window 101 so as to connect the left and right lower ends of the first ring group 102 and the second ring group 103. By appropriately emitting light of the LEDs 320a and 322a of the lower group 108, the lower side of the game window 101 and the leading edge of the upper plate 301 can be light-emittingly decorated, and the LEDs 214a of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 can be illuminated. By interlocking with, 216a, 254a, and 256a, the entire outer periphery of the game window 101 can be luminescently decorated in a ring shape.

Further, in the door frame 5, the LEDs 430b and 432d corresponding to the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 arranged in the upper center of the dish unit 300 at the lower center of the game window 101 control the operation unit 400. It is said to be an operation unit group 109 for light emission decoration. By appropriately causing the LEDs 430b and 432d of the operation unit group 109 to emit light, the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can be decorated with light emission, and the operation timing and operation direction of the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can be set. It is possible to inform the player.

More specifically, the light emitting decoration in the door frame 5 in the present embodiment will be described in more detail. In this example, each LED 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, 286a provided in the door frame 5 The 286b, 320a, 322a, 430b, 432d are further subdivided according to the control system within the groups 102, 103, 104, 106, 107, 108, 109 to which each belongs. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 60, the 20 LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a belonging to the first annular group 102 are 102a to 102j for each peripheral lens portion 210a, 250a of the side lenses 210, 250. The 26 LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, and 256a belonging to the second annular group 103 are divided into 10 systems, and each of the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a of the side lenses 210 and 250 is divided into 10 systems of 103a to 103j. Has been done.

Further, the 20 LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b belonging to the radial group 104 are divided into eight systems 104a to 104h for each of the radial lens portions 210b, 250b of the side lenses 210, 250. Further, the two LEDs 214c belonging to the upper right side group 105 are divided into two systems, an upper 105a and a lower 105b. Further, the six LEDs 286a belonging to the upper central group 106 are divided into three systems of a lower portion 106a, an upper right portion 106b, and an upper left portion 106c. Further, the six LEDs 286b belonging to the upper center side group 107 are divided into two systems, a right side 107a and a left side 107b.

Further, the 12 LEDs 320a and 322a belonging to the lower group 108 are divided into four systems 108a to 108d, three from the right side in the front view. Further, in the five LEDs 430b and 432d belonging to the operation group 109, the four LEDs 430b corresponding to the dial operation unit 401 are arranged diagonally with the pressing operation unit 405 sandwiched between the left and right 109a and the front and rear 109b. The two systems, one LED 432c corresponding to the pressing operation unit 405, is divided into three systems. As described above, in the door frame 5 of this example, each LED 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, 286a, 286b, 320a, 322a, 430b, 432d is divided into 42 systems. ing.

By the way, in the door frame 5, as described above, the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a, 286a, 320a, 322a, 432d are full-color LEDs, and these LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a, 286a, 320a, 322a, The 28 systems 102a to 102j, 103a to 103j, 106a to 106c, 108a to 108d, and 109c to which the 432d belongs are further equipped with three independent systems of RGB in order to emit light in full color, and the actual light emission control is 3 It is doubled to 84 systems. Further, the LEDs 286b and 430b are considered to be high-luminance white LEDs, and the four systems 107a, 107b, 109a and 109b to which the LEDs 286b and 430b belong require a large amount of current to emit light with high brightness. Two systems are connected to each, and the actual light emission control is doubled to eight systems.

The LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256b are white LEDs having normal brightness and belong to eight systems 104a to 108h. Further, the LED 214c is a red LED and belongs to two systems 105a and 105b. Since the 10 systems 104a to 108h, 105a, 105b by these LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b, and 214c can be sufficiently controlled by each system, the same number of 10 systems is obtained even in the actual light emission control.

Therefore, the actual number of systems for light emission control in the door frame 5 is 102, and each LED 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, 286a, 286b, 320a, 322a, For each system to which 430b and 432d belong, lighting, blinking, etc. are controlled by dynamic lighting, and gradation (color and brightness) is controlled by PWM control (pulse width modulation control). .. This makes it possible to produce an expressive light emission.

As the light emitting effect in the door frame 5, for example, by sequentially emitting light from the first annular group 102 to the second annular group 103 (sequentially emitting light with the same color or a similar color), the light is spread outward around the game window 101. A light emitting effect, or conversely, a light emitting effect that converges from the outside toward the game window 101 by sequentially emitting light from the second annular group 103 to the first annular group 102 (sequential emission of the same color or similar colors). Alternatively, by simultaneously emitting light from the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103, it is possible to produce a light emission effect such that the entire outer periphery of the game window 101 is emitted to emit light widely.

Further, by cooperating with the LED provided on the front surface of the game board 4 or the front unit 2000 (detailed illustration is omitted), the LED of the game board 4 and the LED of the first annular group 102 near the game window 101 And, the LED of the second ring group 103 arranged outside the first ring group 102 makes it possible to perform a more expressive light emission effect, and it is possible to strongly attract the interest of the player. It is possible to entertain the player and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, in the first annular group 102, the second annular group 103, and the lower group 108, the light circulates around the outer periphery of the game window 101 by appropriately causing the systems 102a to 102j, 103a to 103j, 108a to 108d to emit light. Such as light emission effect, light moves toward the central lens 282 of the upper decorative unit 280 along the outer periphery of the game window 101, or light from the central lens 282 is along the outer periphery of the game window 101. It is possible to create a light emitting effect that makes it move. In this example, the first ring group 102 and the second ring group 103 are divided (divided into 10) into 10 systems 102a to 102j and 103a to 103j in the circumferential direction, but the present invention is not limited to this. If it is divided into about 8 systems (about 8 divisions), it is possible to satisfactorily perform a light emitting effect such that light circulates around the outer periphery of the game window 101.

Further, by emitting light only in the radial group 104, a light emitting effect is produced in which light is emitted radially around the game window 101, or the first annular group 102, the second annular group 103, and the lower group 108 are emitted at the same time as the radial group 104. By making the game window 101 emit light almost uniformly, the radial group 104 emits light (lights / blinks) during the light emission of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103. It is possible to create a light emitting effect that gives an accent to the light emitting decoration of. Further, by causing each system 104a to 104h of the radial group 104 to emit light individually, it is possible to produce a light emitting effect such that the radial lens portions 210b and 250b circulate.

Further, the light emission effect that the entire central lens 282 emits light by simultaneously emitting light from each system 106a to 106c of the upper center group 106, and the light rotates in the central lens 282 by sequentially emitting light from each system 106a to 106c. It is possible to produce various light emission. In addition, by emitting light from the upper center side group 105, the side lens 284 and the lower lens 289 are decorated with high brightness to give the player a chance or a specific gaming state (for example, a jackpot gaming state or a probabilistic gaming state). It is possible to perform a light emission effect that suggests a state, a time-saving game state, a probable change time-saving game state, etc.). The lower lens 289 is arranged so as to irradiate the player with light from overhead of the player, so that the light emission of the high-brightness LED 286b can be easily noticed by the player. ..

Further, by appropriately emitting light from each system 108a to 108d of the lower group 108, a light emitting effect for illuminating the leading edge of the upper plate 301 can be produced, or by causing light to be emitted in association with the operation group 109, the dial operation unit 401 can be emitted. Or a light emitting effect that encourages the operation of the pressing operation unit 405. Further, by appropriately emitting light of the systems 109a and 109b corresponding to the dial operation unit 401 in the operation group 109, it is possible to promote the operation of the dial operation unit 401 and to guide the rotation operation direction of the dial operation unit 401. can do. Further, by causing the system 109c corresponding to the pressing operation unit 405 in the operation group 109 to emit light, it is possible to produce a light emitting effect that encourages the operation of the pressing operation unit 405.

Since the system 109c of the first ring group 102, the second ring group 103, the upper center group 106, the lower group 108, and the operation group 109 are full-color LEDs, each group 102, 103, 106, 108, It is possible to produce light emission with different gradations such as emission color and brightness for each 109 and each system 102a-102j, 103a-103j, 106a-106c, 108a-108d, 109c, and it has a variety of expressions. It is possible to produce rich light emission.

As described above, in the door frame 5 of this example, in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240, the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a corresponding to the peripheral lens portions 210a, 250a are the first close to the game window 101. Since the annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 far from the game window 101 on the outside of the first annular group 102 can be divided into light emitting light, a plurality of outsides of the gaming window 101 (game area 1100) can be emitted. It is possible to decorate the pachinko machine with light emission in a substantially concentric circle, and by surrounding the outer circumference of the game window 101 with light, it is possible to perform a light emission effect that has not been seen in conventional pachinko machines, and the pachinko machine that attracts the attention of players strongly. It can be set to 1.

Further, one peripheral lens unit 210a and 250a is provided with two systems of LEDs arranged substantially concentrically, and even if the appearance looks like one, each of the two systems of LEDs emits light. Since the light emitting decoration can be made substantially concentrically, it is possible to make it difficult to imagine the aspect of the light emitting decoration from the appearance, and the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a (right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit) by the light emitting decoration. 240) The change can be made large, and the impact of the light emitting decoration can be increased to make the pachinko machine 1 that attracts the player's attention strongly.

Further, on the outside of the transparent game window 101 that closes the front surface of the game area 1100, the LEDs 214b, 216b radially arranged on the decorative boards 214, 216, 254, 256 of the left and right decorative units 200, 240 in the door frame 5. 254b, 256b and LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103, which are divided in the circumferential direction by the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b and arranged substantially concentrically, are provided. Therefore, by making the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 emit light according to the gaming state, it is possible to illuminate and decorate the outer periphery of the game window 101 in a plurality of annular rings. Therefore, it is possible to show the player a light-emitting decoration that has never been seen in a conventional pachinko machine, and the pachinko machine 1 can be strongly attracted by the player.

Further, the annular first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 composed of the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a of the decorative substrates 214, 216, 254, 256 in the door frame 5 are arranged substantially concentrically (FIG. 60). By emitting light in the order of the second ring group 103 and the first ring group 102 from the outside to the inside, the light emission effect is such that the light converges toward the game window 101, that is, the game area 1100. It is possible to direct the player's attention to the game area 1100, and at the same time, it is possible to make people think that there is something good in the game area 1100, and raise the expectation for the game. It is possible to prevent the decline in interest. Further, by emitting light in the order of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 from the inside to the outside, it is possible to perform a light emitting effect that spreads outward from the game window 101, that is, the game area 1100. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that something is good by the light emitting effect that spreads to the player, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's interest in the game.

Further, since the above-mentioned light emitting effect can be performed outside the game window 101 (game area 1100), not only the player playing the game with the pachinko machine 1 but also the pachinko machine 1 is installed. It is possible to show the above-mentioned light emission effect to the players in the game hall, attract the attention of other players, and make it easier to select the pachinko machine 1 as the pachinko machine to play. Can be done.

Further, the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b of the radial group 104 arranged radially so as to divide the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 extending in an annular direction are provided. By making these radial groups 104 emit light, the annular luminescent decoration by the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 can be separated in the circumferential direction, so that the luminescent decoration can be given an accent. The change in luminescent decoration can strongly attract the player's attention. Further, the radial groups 104 arranged radially make the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 circumferential so as to correspond to the peripheral lens portions 210a, 250a of the side lenses 210, 250. Since it is divided into the systems 102a to 102j and 103a to 103j, the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, and 256a corresponding to the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a are independently emitted for each system 102a to 102j and 103a to 103j, respectively. As a result, it is possible to perform a light emitting effect such that the light moves in the circumferential direction, and by providing a more diverse light emitting effect, it is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 that is hard to get tired of.

Further, the side lenses 210 and 250 are provided with peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a corresponding to the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a and 256a and radiation lens portions 210b and 250b corresponding to the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b and 256b. Compared with the case where the radial lens portions 210b and 250b are included in the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a to be integrated, the appearance of the side lenses 210 and 250 can be changed in a probable manner. Even when the side lenses 210 and 250 are not decorated with light emission, the design of the appearance of the side lenses 210 and 250 can be enhanced, and the pachinko machine 1 can be strongly attracted by the player. Even if the side lenses 210 and 250 are divided into the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a and the radial lens portions 210b and 250b, the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a and 256a arranged in an annular shape and the LEDs 214b and 216b arranged radially By causing the, 254b and 256b to emit light in the same light emitting mode, it is possible to make the illusion that the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a and the radiating lens portions 210b and 250b are integrated, and the outer periphery of the game window 101 is integrated. It is possible to illuminate and decorate the lens in a ring shape, and the above-mentioned effects can be sufficiently exerted.

Further, the LEDs 214a of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 are partitioned in the circumferential direction by the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b radially arranged on one peripheral lens portion 210a, 250a of the side lenses 210, 250. , 216a, 254a, 256a are made to correspond, and even if the appearance looks like one, the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a corresponding to the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 are made to emit light, respectively. As a result, it is possible to make the light emitting decoration substantially concentric, so that it is possible to make it difficult to imagine the mode of the light emitting decoration from the appearance, and it is possible to increase the change of the side lenses 210 and 250 due to the light emitting decoration. It is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 that attracts the attention of the player by increasing the impact of the decoration.

Further, the side inner lens 212, which diffuses the light from the decorative substrates 214,216, 254, 256 between the side lenses 210, 250 and the decorative substrates 214, 216, 254, 256 and irradiates the side lenses 210, 250, Since the side lenses 210 and 250 are provided with 252, it is possible to suppress unevenness in the light emitting decoration of the side lenses 210 and 250, and the appearance of the light emitting decoration can be improved. Since the side lenses 210 and 250 can be light-emitting and decorated in a planar manner even by using 254a and 256a, a light-emitting body that emits light linearly (for example, a cold cathode tube (fluorescent tube), a neon tube, an organic EL, etc.) By making each of the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, and 256a emit light individually as compared with the case of using the above, it is possible to change the light emission in the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 in the circumferential direction as well. It is possible to present a wider variety of light emission effects, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored and the player's interest from being lowered, and it is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 that strongly attracts the player's interest.

Further, since the light can be diffused by the side inner lenses 212 and 252, even if the transparency of the side lenses 210 and 250 is increased, the rear side of the side inner lenses 212 and 252 due to the diffuse refraction in the side inner lenses 212 and 252. The decorative boards 214,216, 254, 256 and the like arranged in the above can be made difficult to see, and the decorative boards 214, 216, 254, 256, etc. can be seen directly from the player side to prevent the appearance from being deteriorated. Can be done.

Further, since the light guide portions 212b and 252b of the side inner lenses 212 and 252 guide the light from the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b and 256b and irradiate the radiating lens portions 210b and 250b of the side lenses 210 and 250. The light from the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b can be reliably guided to the radiating lens portions 210b, 250b to be radiated and decorated, and the pachinko machine 1 having the above-mentioned effects can be surely embodied. Further, the light guide portions 212b and 252b of the side inner lenses 212 and 252 ensure that the radiation lens portions 210b and 250b of the side lenses 210 and 250 are secured even if the distance between the side lenses 210 and 250 and the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b and 256b is long. Is sufficient to illuminate the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a of the side lenses 210 and 250 widely with the side lenses 210 and 250 by the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103. The LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b arranged radially can be mounted on the same substrate as the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a in which the space is secured, and the configuration related to the pachinko machine 1 can be simplified.

Further, since the side decorative frames 202 and 242 surround the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a of the side lenses 210 and 250 and the outer periphery of the radiating lens portions 210b and 250b, the light from the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a is the radiating lens. It is possible to reduce as much as possible the influence of the light from the radiating lens portions 210b and 250b on the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a to the portions 210b and 250b, so that the light emitting decorations interfere with each other. It is possible to prevent and produce a good-looking light emission.

[1-3. Overall configuration of the main body frame]
Next, the main body frame 3 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 to 67. FIG. 61 is a front view of the main body frame, and FIG. 62 is a rear view of the main body frame. Further, FIG. 63 is a front perspective view of the main body frame, and FIG. 64 is a rear perspective view of the main body frame. Further, FIG. 66 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled and viewed from the front, FIG. 65 is a left side view of the main body frame, and FIG. 67 is a perspective view of the main body frame disassembled and viewed from the rear. It is a figure. The main body frame 3 of the present embodiment is pivotally supported on the left side of the front view with respect to the outer frame 2, and is supported in a door shape so as to open and close the front surface of the outer frame 2 on the rear side of the door frame 5. The front side can be opened and closed by the door frame 5. Further, the main body frame 3 can detachably hold the game board 4 from the front side at a position corresponding to the game window 101 of the door frame 5.

The main body frame 3 of this example has a main body frame base 600 having a rectangular game board holding port 601 for forming a skeleton of the main body frame 3 and penetrating in the front-rear direction to hold the game board 4, and a main body frame base. The upper shaft support bracket 630 and lower shaft support bracket 640 for axially supporting the door frame 5 as well as being attached to the upper end and the lower end of the left end of the front view of 600, respectively, and the main body frame base 600. A hitting ball launching device 650 for driving a game ball into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 attached to the lower front surface of the main body frame and paying out the game ball to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600. When the door frame 5 is opened with respect to the main body frame 3 attached to the front surface of the main body frame base 600 and the prize ball unit 700 for the purpose, the flow of the game ball from the prize ball unit 700 to the plate unit 300 of the door frame 5 is blocked. It is equipped with a ball outlet opening / closing unit 790.

Further, the main body frame 3 is attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and various control boards, power supply boards 851, etc. for controlling the door frame 5 excluding the game board 4 and the electrical parts provided in the main body frame 3 are used. The board unit 800 that is unitized as a unit, the back cover 900 that covers the rear opening of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame base 600, and the side security plate 950 that covers the left end of the main body frame base 600 in front view. A lock device 1000 attached to the right end of the main body frame base when viewed from the front and for opening and closing the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 and for opening and closing the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 is mainly provided.

[1-3A. Body frame base]
Next, the main body frame base 600 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 68 and 69. FIG. 68 is a front perspective view of the main body frame base in the main body frame. Further, FIG. 69 is a rear perspective view of the main body frame base in the main body frame. The main body frame base 600 in the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment is integrally molded with synthetic resin, and the outer shape of the front view is a vertically long rectangular shape along the outer shape of the door frame 5, and is substantially in the front-rear direction. It is formed to have a constant depth D (see FIG. 65). As a result, when the prize ball unit 700, the board unit 800, the back cover 900, the lock device 1000, etc. are attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600, the main body frame base 600 is turned face down. In addition, the rear surface of the main body frame base 600 is in a substantially flat state at the height of the depth D in the main body frame base 600, the prize ball unit 700 and the like can be easily placed, and the workability related to the assembly of the main body frame 3 can be easily placed. Can be improved.

As shown in the figure, the main body frame base 600 penetrates in a rectangular shape in the front-rear direction within a range of about 3/4 of the whole from the upper part to the lower part, and can fit and hold the outer periphery of the game board 4. 601 and the U-shaped front end frame portion 602 forming the outer periphery of the front end excluding the left side of the main body frame base 600 in front view, and the door frame base main body 110 in the door frame 5 which is recessed from the front surface to the rear of the front end frame portion 602. The door frame projecting piece 110c projecting rearward from the lower end of the door frame, the upper bent projecting piece 167 projecting rearward of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 in the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame 5, and the open side outside projecting rearward of the open side reinforcing sheet metal 153. It comprises an engaging groove 603 into which the bent projectile 163 is inserted and engaged.

Further, the main body frame base 600 extends from the lower side of the game board holding port 601 to the lower end of the main body frame base 600, and is recessed from the front end of the front end frame portion 602 to the rear side by a predetermined amount and spreads in a plate shape in the left-right direction. It includes a peripheral wall portion 605 that protrudes rearward inside the front end frame portion 601 and forms an inner peripheral wall of the game board holding port 601. The peripheral wall portion 605 connects the free ends (upper and lower left end portions of the upper and lower left ends of the U-shaped front end frame portion 602) to each other, and the outer shape of the main body frame base 600 becomes a frame shape. It has become like.

Further, the main body frame base 600 forms a lower side of the game board holding port 601 at the upper end of the lower rear wall portion 604, and has a game board mounting portion 606 on which the game board 4 is mounted and a game board mounting portion 606. A positioning protrusion 607 that protrudes upward from approximately the center in the left-right direction and engages with the out ball discharge groove 1156 of the game panel 1150 in the game board 4, and a game board of the game board 4 that is formed at a predetermined position on the inner wall on the right side of the front view of the peripheral wall portion 605. The game board locking portion 608 (see FIG. 61) to which the stopper 1120 is fastened, and the lower end of the peripheral wall portion 605 that hangs downward from the upper inner wall and has a plate-like shape that can contact the upper end of the game board 4 in the left-right direction. It is provided with a plurality of arranged upper end regulation ribs 609. By fitting the positioning protrusion 607 of the main body frame base 600 with the out ball discharge groove 1156 of the game board 4, it is possible to regulate the lower end of the game board 4 from moving in the left-right direction and the rear direction. ing. Further, the game board locking portion 608 can regulate the movement of the right side of the game board 4 in the front-rear direction by locking the game board stopper 1120 of the game board 4. There is. Although the details of the left side of the game board 4 in the front view will be described later, the movement in the front-rear direction is restricted by the positioning member 956 of the side security plate 950.

Further, the main body frame base 600 has a metal fitting mounting for mounting the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 and the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 on the rear surface of the free end portion (upper and lower left end portions in the front view) of the U-shaped front end frame portion 602. It includes a section 610 (see FIG. 69). As shown in FIG. 68, the metal fitting mounting portion 610 is reinforced by a plurality of ribs whose front side extends vertically and horizontally, and the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 and the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 are mounted with sufficient strength. Can be done. Further, the main body frame base 600 is formed in a substantially circular cylinder lock through hole 611 penetrating in the front-rear direction in the upper right end of the lower rear wall portion 604 in the front view, and a door frame 5 formed in the lower left of the front view of the cylinder lock through hole 611. The U-shaped fitting groove 612 that fits with the positioning protrusion 110d that protrudes rearward from the door frame base main body 110 and the launch solenoid 654 of the ball launching device 650 that is formed in the lower left of the front view of the fitting groove 612 are accommodated. It is provided with a solenoid accommodating recess 613.

As described above, the main body frame base 600 of this example is formed at a position where the lower rear wall portion 604 is recessed one step to the rear side from the front surface of the front end frame portion 602, and is formed on the right side of the front view of the lower rear wall portion 604. A hitting ball launching device 650 is attached to the front surface so that the launching solenoid 654 of the hitting ball launching device 650 is housed in the solenoid accommodating recess 613. In a state where the ball launching device 650 is attached to the front surface of the lower rear wall portion 604, as shown in FIGS. 63 and 98, the ball launching device 650 is on the left side in the front view from the upper end of the launch rail 660, in the left direction and A foul space 626 that extends downward is formed. In this example, assuming that the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul ball entrance 542e in the foul cover unit 540 is located at the lower part of the foul space 626, and the foul space 626 is lowered. The game ball is received by the foul ball inlet 542e of the foul cover unit 540 and discharged to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300.

Further, the main body frame base 600 is formed in a plurality of openings 614 that penetrate in a rectangular shape in the front-rear direction to the left of the center of the left and right of the lower rear wall portion 604 in the front view, and on the upper side of the openings 614 and on both the left and right sides in the front view. It is provided with a through hole 615 penetrating in the front-rear direction. The opening 614 of the main body frame base 600 is closed by the relay terminal board cover 692 (see FIG. 66 and the like) from the front side, and the lower rear wall portion 604 is passed through the opening 692a of the relay terminal board cover 692. The main relay terminal board 880 and the peripheral relay terminal board 882 of the board unit 800 mounted on the rear surface face the front side. Further, the plurality of through holes 615 are for transmitting the sound from the speaker box 820 of the substrate unit 800 to the front side of the main body frame base 600. The through holes 615 arranged on both the left and right sides of the opening 614 are ventilation type holes having an impact wall on the front side.

Further, the main body frame base 600 is a fixture support portion that rotatably supports the game board fixture 690 for fixing the game board 4 detachably near the upper end of the front surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 on the upper side of the opening 614. It is provided with 616 and a stopper 617 that projects forward from the lower right of the front view of the fixture support portion 616 and regulates the rotational position of the game board fixture 690.

Here, as shown in FIG. 61 and the like, the game board fixing tool 690 includes a fixing piece 690a extending in a fan shape around an axial center pivotally supported by the fixing tool support portion 616 of the main body frame base 600, and the fixing piece 690a. It is provided with an operation piece 690b that extends outward from one end side in the circumferential direction (the side that becomes the rear end when rotated in the clockwise direction in the front view). The game board fixture 690 is pivotally supported by the fixture support portion 616 of the main body frame base 600, and then the operation piece 690b is operated to rotate the game board fixture 690 in the clockwise direction in front view. The fixed piece 690a protrudes upward from the game board mounting portion 606 and is inserted into the fixing recess 1121 of the game board 4 mounted on the game board mounting portion 606. Can be prevented from moving forward. Further, in the game board fixture 690, the operation piece 690b comes into contact with the stopper 617, and by contacting the stopper 617, the rotation end in the counterclockwise direction in the front view is restricted. It has become.

Further, the main body frame base 600 is provided with a door frame opening switch 618 for detecting the opening of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 on the lower front surface of the cylinder lock through hole 611, with respect to the main body frame 3. When the door frame 5 is opened (opened), the pressure is released and the opening of the door frame 5 can be detected. Further, in the main body frame base 600, a main body frame opening switch 619 for detecting the opening of the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 is attached to the rear surface below the position where the door frame opening switch 618 is attached ( (See FIG. 69), when the main body frame 3 is opened (opened) with respect to the outer frame 2, the pressing is released and the opening of the main body frame 3 can be detected.

Further, the main body frame base 600 has three vertically elongated penetrations in the front-rear direction inside (shaft support side) of the engagement groove 603 on the right side (open side) side in the front view of the U-shaped front end frame portion 602. It is provided with a door hook hole 620 and two lock locking holes 621 that penetrate in the front-rear direction and are lined up in the left-right direction under the door hook hole 620 at the lower end. These three door hook holes 620 are formed in the vicinity of both upper and lower ends in the vertical direction and substantially in the center in the vertical direction, respectively. Locking protrusions 1004 provided at both upper and lower ends of the locking device 1000 are engaged and locked in the upper and central door hook holes 620 and the lock locking hole 621, and the front end frame portion 602. The lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame base 600 along the outer wall of the peripheral wall portion 605 on the rear side of the right side of the front view. When the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame base 600, the three door frame hook portions 1041 of the lock device 1000 project forward from the three door hook holes 620 and the cylinder lock of the lock device 1000. The 1010 is in a state of protruding forward from the cylinder lock through hole 611 (see FIG. 63).

Further, the main body frame base 600 gently and diagonally descends from the upper right end toward the center in the left-right direction on the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 in the rear view, and then the lower rear wall portion 604 in the substantially center in the left-right direction. It is provided with a main body frame base ball pulling passage 622 that hangs down from the middle in the vertical direction to a position slightly upward in the vertical direction and allows the game ball to be distributed. The rear side of the main body frame base ball pulling passage 622 is closed by the board unit base 810 in the board unit 800, and the details will be described later. It is now in circulation.

Further, a plurality of main body frame bases 600 are arranged at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction at the rear end of the left side of the peripheral wall portion 605 when viewed from the rear, and the back cover shaft support portion 623 that rotatably supports the shaft support pins 906 of the back cover 900. A mounting portion 624 for mounting the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 on the front surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 and diagonally upper left in the front view of the opening 614, and a locking device 1000 on the right side (open side) side surface of the peripheral wall portion 605 in the front view. It is provided with a lock mounting portion 625 for mounting and fixing.

Although detailed description will be omitted, in addition to the above, the main body frame base 600 is appropriately positioned with mounting bosses, mounting holes, etc. for mounting the ball launching device 650, the prize ball unit 700, the board unit 800, and the like. Is formed in.

[1-3B. Upper shaft support and lower shaft support]
Next, the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 and the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 66 and 67. The upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 in the main body frame 3 are attached to the metal fitting mounting portions 610 on the upper and lower rear surfaces of the left end of the main body frame base 600 by using predetermined screws, respectively, to the main body frame 3. The door frame 5 can be pivotally supported so as to be openable and closable, and the main body frame 3 can be pivotally supported with respect to the outer frame 2.

First, the upper shaft support bracket 630 has a plate-shaped mounting portion 631 that is attached to the upper bracket mounting portion 610 of the main body frame base 600 and extends in the vertical and horizontal directions, and a plate-shaped mounting portion 631 that extends forward from the upper end. The front extension portion 632, the shaft support pin 633 projecting upward from the vicinity of the front end of the front extension portion 632, and the shaft pin 155 of the door frame 5 arranged on the left side of the front view of the shaft support pin 633. The door frame shaft support hole 634 (see FIG. 63, etc.) through which the door frame is inserted is inserted, and the front extension portion 632 hangs downward from the left end portion of the front view and rotates to the open side of the door frame 5. It is equipped with a stopper 635 (see FIGS. 65 and 107) that regulates the edges. The upper shaft support metal fitting 630 is integrally formed by bending and molding a single metal plate with a mounting portion 631, a forward extending portion 632, and a stopper 635.

On the other hand, the lower shaft support bracket 640 is arranged below the door frame shaft support bracket 642 for pivotally supporting the door frame 5 and the door frame shaft support bracket 642, and supports the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2. It is provided with a main body frame shaft support metal fitting 644 for the purpose. The door frame shaft support bracket 642 in the lower shaft support bracket 640 has a plate-shaped mounting portion 642a that is attached to the lower bracket mounting portion 610 of the main body frame base 600 and extends in the vertical and horizontal directions, and the mounting portion 642a from the lower end to the front. A plate-shaped front extension portion 642b that extends, a door frame shaft support hole 642c that penetrates vertically near the front end of the front extension portion 642b and into which the shaft pin 157 of the door frame 5 is inserted, and a front extension portion. It is provided with a stopper 642d which is erected upward from the left end portion of the front view of the 642a and restricts the rotation end of the door frame 5 toward the open side. The door frame shaft support bracket 642 has a mounting portion 642a, a forward extending portion 642b, and a stopper 642d integrally formed by bending and molding a single metal plate.

Further, the main body frame shaft support metal fitting 644 in the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 is attached to the metal fitting mounting portion 610 on the lower side of the main body frame base 600 and extends in the vertical and horizontal directions from the plate-shaped mounting portion 644a and the lower end of the mounting portion 644a. It is provided with a front extending portion 644b extending forward and a main body frame shaft support hole (not shown) penetrating in the vertical direction near the front end of the front extending portion 644b. The main body frame shaft support bracket 644 also has a mounting portion 644a and a front extending portion 644b integrally formed by bending and molding a single metal plate.

In the lower shaft support bracket 640 of this example, the mounting portion 642a of the door frame shaft support bracket 642 and the mounting portion 644a of the main body frame shaft support bracket 644 are overlapped (contacted) in the front-rear direction, and the door frame is in contact with each other. The front extension portion 642b of the shaft support bracket 642 and the front extension portion 644b of the main body frame shaft support bracket 644 are attached to the lower bracket mounting portion 610 of the main body frame base 600 in a state where the front extension portion 644b is separated in the vertical direction by a predetermined distance. It has become like.

The upper shaft support metal fitting 630 and the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 are attached to the main body frame base 600, and the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 and the main body frame shaft support hole (not shown) of the lower shaft support metal fitting 640. Is positioned coaxially, and the main body frame shaft support hole of the main body frame shaft support metal fitting 644 in the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 is fitted and inserted into the support protrusion 21d of the lower support metal fitting 21 in the outer frame 2. As described above, the front extension portion 644b of the main body frame shaft support metal fitting 644 is placed on the support protrusion piece 21c of the lower support metal fitting 21, and the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 is attached to the outer frame 2. By inserting the upper support metal fitting 20 into the support hook hole 20c, the main body frame 3 can be pivotally supported with respect to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable.

Further, the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 and the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 are attached to the main body frame base 600, and the door frame shaft support hole 634 of the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 and the door frame shaft support of the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 are provided. The door is positioned coaxially with the metal fitting 642c, and the door is inserted so that the shaft pin 157 of the door frame 5 is inserted into the door frame shaft support hole 642c of the door frame shaft support metal fitting 642 in the lower shaft support metal fitting 640. After placing the lower shaft support portion 158 of the frame 5 on the front extension portion 642b of the door frame shaft support bracket 642, the shaft pin 155 of the door frame 5 is placed in the door frame shaft support hole 634 of the upper shaft support bracket 630. By inserting the door frame 5, the door frame 5 can be pivotally supported with respect to the main body frame 3. In this example, the shaft pin 155 on the upper side of the door frame 5 is slidable in the vertical direction, and when the shaft pin 155 is inserted into the door frame shaft support hole 634 of the upper shaft support bracket 630, the shaft pin 155 is inserted. Slide the door frame downward once so that the upper shaft support portion 156 of the door frame 5 and the front extension portion 632 of the upper shaft support bracket 630 overlap each other, and then slide the shaft pin 155 upward to open the door. It can be inserted into the frame shaft support hole 634.

[1-3C. Hit ball launcher]
Next, the hitting ball launching device 650 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. FIG. 70 is a front perspective view of the hitting ball launching device in the main body frame. Further, FIG. 71 is a rear perspective view of the hitting ball launching device in the main body frame. The hitting ball launching device 650 can hit the game ball supplied from the ball feeding unit 580 of the door frame 5 into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 with a strength corresponding to the rotation operation of the handle device 500. be.

In the hitting ball launching device 650 of the present embodiment, the launching base 652 of a metal plate attached to the front predetermined position of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600, and the rotation drive shaft 654a projecting forward on the lower rear surface of the launching base 652. The launching solenoid 654 attached so as to be mounted, the hammer 656 fixed integrally to the drive shaft 654a of the launching solenoid 654, the mallet 658 fixed to the tip of the hammer 656, and the movement trajectory of the mallet 658. The tip of the hammer 656 is between the launch rail 660 attached to the front of the launch base 652 and the launch rail 660 above the base end of the launch rail 660, which extends diagonally to the upper left of the front view with the predetermined position above as the base end. At the same time that the 658 is made passable, a ball stop piece 662 that forms a gap through which the game ball cannot pass and holds the game ball at the base end of the launch rail 660, and a ball stop piece 662 that holds the game ball at the base end of the launch rail 660. It is equipped with a stopper 664 that restricts the hammer 656 (hammer tip 658) from rotating toward the launch rail 660 side from the hitting position where the game ball can be hit.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the firing solenoid 654 in the hitting ball launching device 650 is configured such that the drive shaft 654a reciprocates with a strength (speed) according to the rotation operation angle of the handle device 500. Further, the hitting mallet 656 of the hitting ball launching device 650 has a fixed portion 656a fixed to the drive shaft 654a of the launching solenoid 654 and a tip extending from the fixed portion 656a in a gentle arc shape with respect to the axis of the drive shaft 654a. It is provided with a solenoid portion 656b that faces the normal direction and has a mallet tip 658 fixed to the tip, and a stopper portion 656c that extends to the opposite side of the rod portion 656b with the fixing portion 656a sandwiched between them and can come into contact with the stopper 664. ing. When the stopper portion 656c of the hitting mallet 656 comes into contact with the stopper 664, the mallet tip 658 at the tip rotates toward the launch rail 660 from the hitting position (rotating end in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front). It is becoming regulated.

Further, the launch rail 660 of the hitting ball launching device 650 has a loose arc shape with a lower portion recessed substantially along the lower end extension line of the outer rail 1111 of the game board 4 (see FIG. 98), and in the front-rear direction. On the other hand, the center is recessed in a V shape, and the game ball hit by the hitting mallet 656 can be smoothly guided to the game board 4 side along the launch rail 660. The launch rail 660 is formed by bending a metal plate.

Further, the hitting ball launching device 650 has a stopper cover 666 that covers the front surface of the stopper 664 that can regulate the rotation end of the hitting mallet 656 toward the hitting position side, and rotation at a position away from the hitting position of the hitting mallet 656. It is provided with a stopper 668 that regulates an end (a rotating end in a clockwise direction when viewed from the front). In the hitting ball launching device 650 of this example, the surface of the stoppers 664 and 668 is covered with rubber, so that the impact when the hitting mallet 656 comes into contact can be absorbed and the generation of noise due to the contact is suppressed. You can do it.

As shown in FIGS. 63 and 98, when the hit ball launcher 650 of this example is attached to the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600, the upper end of the launch rail 660 is substantially in the center in the left-right direction and is lower. It is located below the upper end of the rear wall portion 604, that is, below the game board mounting portion 606 (lower side of the game board holding port 601), and is outside the game board 4 held by the game board holding port 601. A foul space 626 that extends downward with a predetermined width in the left-right direction is formed between the rail 1111 and the lower end. Then, the hit ball launching device 650 of this example launches the game ball so as to jump over the foul space 626 on the left side of the front view from the launch rail 660, thereby driving the game ball into the game area 1100 of the game board 4. Can be done. As described above, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul ball inlet 542e of the foul cover unit 540 is located at the lower part of the foul space 626, and the game area 1100 The game ball, which has become a foul ball without being driven in, falls in the foul space 626, is received by the foul ball entrance 542e, and is discharged to the lower plate 302.

Further, in the ball launching device 650, the launching solenoid 654 is driven by the launching control unit 4120 with a driving strength corresponding to the rotation operation of the handle device 500, and the ball feeding solenoid 585 of the ball feeding unit 580. It is designed to be driven in synchronization with the drive of. Specifically, in the ball feed unit 580 that supplies the game ball to the hit ball launcher 650, when the ball feed solenoid 585 is driven (ON), the ball feed member 584 receives the game ball, and the ball feed solenoid 585 is driven from that state. When the ball feed member 584 is released (OFF), the game ball received by the ball feed member 584 is sent to the ball feed launcher 650 side, so that the launch solenoid 654 is driven substantially at the same time as the ball feed solenoid 585 of the ball feed unit 580. By turning (ON), the game ball can be smoothly supplied from the ball feed unit 580 to the rear end of the launch rail 660, and the game ball can be reliably launched by the rotation of the ball hammer 656. ing.

[1-3D. Prize ball unit]
Next, the prize ball unit 700 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 72 to 79. 72 is a front perspective view of the prize ball unit in the main body frame, and FIG. 73 is a rear perspective view of the prize ball unit in the main body frame. Further, FIG. 74 is an exploded perspective view of the prize ball unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 75 is an exploded perspective view of the prize ball unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 76 is an exploded perspective view showing the relationship between the prize ball tank and the tank rail unit in the prize ball unit from the rear. FIG. 77 is an exploded perspective view of the prize ball device in the prize ball unit as viewed after being disassembled. FIG. 78 is a rear view showing the relationship between the payout passage, the payout motor, and the payout rotating body in the prize ball device. Further, FIG. 79 is a cross-sectional view showing a ball circulation passage in the prize ball unit.

The prize ball unit 700 in the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment stores the game balls supplied from the island equipment side to the pachinko machine 1 in the island equipment in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and then gives a predetermined payout instruction. It is to be paid out to the upper plate 301 of the pachinko machine 1 based on the above. The prize ball unit 700 receives and stores the prize ball base 710 attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 600 and the game balls attached to the upper part of the rear surface of the prize ball base 710 and supplied from the island facility side. The tank rail unit 730, which is arranged under the prize ball tank 720 and stores the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720, is aligned and sent to the downstream side, and the game balls arranged by the tank rail unit 730 are paid out. The payout device 740 to be paid out based on the instruction and the game ball paid out by the payout device 740 can be guided to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit, and the game ball paid out when the upper plate 301 is full with the game ball. Is mainly provided with a full tank branch unit 770 capable of inducing branching to the lower plate 302 side.

Further, the prize ball unit 700 includes a prize ball passage lid 780 that closes the rear opening of the prize ball passage 715 formed in the prize ball base 710, and a ground fitting for grounding the tank rail unit 730 and the prize ball device 740. It includes a 782, an external terminal board 784 attached to the rear surface of the prize ball base 710, and an external terminal board cover 786 that covers the rear side of the external terminal board 784. The prize ball passage lid 780 in the prize ball unit 700 is for fastening and fixing the back cover engaging groove 780a for fixing the back cover 900 to the rear surface and the back cover 900 on the left side of the back cover engaging groove 780a when viewed from the rear. The back cover fastening hole 780b is formed (see FIGS. 73 and 75, etc.).

In this prize ball unit 700, the prize ball base 710 is formed in an inverted L shape along the upper side and the left side of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front, and the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail unit 730 are formed on the upper side. Along with the arrangement, a vertically long prize ball device 740 is arranged on the left side, and a full tank branch unit 770 is arranged under the prize ball device 740. Further, an external terminal board 784 and an external terminal board cover 786 are arranged directly above the prize ball device 740 and above the tank rail unit 730 so as to be adjacent to the prize ball tank 720.

Next, as shown in the figure, the prize ball base 710 in the prize ball unit 700 is formed in an inverted L shape in front view so as to substantially correspond to the upper side of the main body frame base 600 and the left side of the game board holding port 601 in front view. And is integrally molded with a transparent synthetic resin. The prize ball base 710 is arranged so that the peripheral wall portion 710a extending rearward along the outer outer circumference of the inverted L shape and the peripheral wall portion 710a extend inward from the rear end of the peripheral wall portion 710a with a predetermined width and substantially on the same plane. It is provided with a rear wall portion 710b. In this example, as shown in FIG. 75, the upper side of the peripheral wall portion 710a is formed so as to extend rearward from a position one step lower than the upper end of the prize ball base 710. The prize ball base 710 has a rear wall portion 710b located at a position deeper than the front end, and when attached to the main body frame base 600, a space capable of accommodating the game board 4 can be formed. ing.

Further, the prize ball base 710 is arranged next to the tank mounting portion 711 for mounting the prize ball tank 720 on the upper side of the peripheral wall portion 710a and the tank mounting portion 711 (on the right side when viewed from the rear), and the external terminal plate 784 and the external terminal plate. An external terminal plate mounting portion 712 for mounting the cover 786, a plurality of mounting locking portions 713 for mounting the tank rail unit 730 on the rear side of the lower end of the upper side of the rear wall portion 710b, and the rear side of the vertical side of the rear wall portion 710b. The prize ball device mounting portion 714 for mounting the prize ball device 740, the prize ball passage 715 that guides the game ball paid out from the prize ball device 740 adjacent to the prize ball device mounting portion 714, and the rear wall. A mounting locking portion 716 for mounting the full tank branch unit 770 is provided at the lower end of the portion 710b.

Further, the prize ball base 710 has a relief hole 717 for allowing the payout motor 744 and the like protruding forward from the prize ball device 740 to pass through the position of the prize ball device mounting portion 714 of the rear wall portion 710b in the front-rear direction, and the back. It is provided with a back cover engaging groove 718 for fixing the cover 900. Further, although detailed description is omitted, the prize ball base 710 is appropriately positioned with mounting holes, mounting bosses, etc. for mounting the prize ball tank 720, the prize ball device 740, etc., or mounting the prize ball base 600 on the main body frame base 600. Is formed in.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 76, the prize ball tank 720 in the prize ball unit 700 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with an open upper part, and a bottom wall portion having a horizontally long substantially rectangular shape in a plan view. 721, the outer peripheral wall portion 722 that rises upward from the outer periphery of the bottom wall portion 721, and only the right rear portion (rear portion on the open side) protrudes rearward from the bottom wall portion 710 in a rectangular shape in a plan view, and the outer peripheral wall portion. A plate-shaped discharge port 723 formed by a portion of the 722 that protrudes rearward from the bottom wall portion 721 at the rear right side and opens downward from the left side (shaft support side) of the discharge port 723 in a plan view to the left end of the prize ball tank 720. A prize ball tank formed in the vicinity of the base end of the shaft portion 725 and at both ends on the front side of the outer peripheral wall 722, a rod-shaped shaft portion 725 extending rearward from the lower left end of the eaves portion 724 in a plan view. It is provided with a mounting portion 726 for mounting the 720 to the prize ball tank mounting portion 711 in the prize ball base 710.

In the prize ball tank 720, the outer periphery of the bottom wall portion 721 is surrounded by the outer peripheral wall portion 722, and a predetermined amount of game balls can be stored on the bottom wall portion 721. Further, the prize ball tank 720 is inclined so that the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 721 is lowered toward the discharge port 723, so that the game ball on the bottom wall portion 721 rolls toward the discharge port 723. It has become.

Further, the prize ball tank 720 includes two ball leveling members 727 that are rotatably supported by the shaft portion 725. As shown in the figure, the ball leveling member 727 has one end side pivotally supported by the shaft portion 725 and holds a weight inside, so that the other end side hangs down due to its own weight. .. The ball leveling member 727 hangs down in the tank rail unit 730, which will be described later, and can smooth and align the game balls circulating in the tank rail unit 730. Further, the eaves 724 of the prize ball tank 720 is formed so as to cover substantially the upper half of the tank rail unit 730, so that it is possible to prevent the game balls from overflowing from the inside of the tank rail unit 730 and the tank. It is possible to prevent dust and the like from entering the rail unit 730.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 721 of the prize ball tank 720 is inclined so that the left side (the side far from the discharge port 723) becomes lower toward the right side in a plan view. The right side (the side closer to the discharge port 723) in a plan view is formed so as to be inclined toward the rear discharge port 723. As a result, the flow of the game ball can be made smooth, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball clogging in the prize ball tank 720, and from the discharge port 723 to the tank rail unit 730 side. The game ball can be discharged smoothly.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76, the tank rail unit 730 in the prize ball unit 700 includes a tank rail 731 that is arranged below the prize ball tank 720 and extends long in the left-right direction. The tank rail 731 has a gutter shape with an open upper part and a predetermined depth, and has a width (depth) that allows the game balls to be aligned in two rows in the front-rear direction. The bottom is tilted so that it is low. The tank rail 731 has a discharge port 731a (see FIG. 79) that opens downward at the left end (shaft support side) end, a partition wall 731b extending upward from the bottom at substantially the center in the front-rear direction, and a lower surface of the front end. It is provided with a plurality of locking projecting pieces 731c (see FIG. 74) that project downward and are locked from above to the mounting locking portion 713 of the prize ball base 710.

The end of the tank rail 731 on the right side (open side) of the front view is located directly below the discharge port 723 of the prize ball tank 720, and the game ball discharged from the discharge port 723 of the prize ball tank 720 is placed. After receiving it, it can be rolled to the left and delivered from the discharge port 731a to the prize ball device 740 side. Further, by locking the locking protrusion 731c of the tank rail 731 to the mounting locking portion 713 of the prize ball base 710, the tank rail 731, that is, the tank rail unit 730 can be mounted on the prize ball base 710. ing.

Further, the tank rail unit 730 is continuous with the alignment gear 732 rotatably supported on the upper portion of the discharge port 731a of the tank rail 731, the gear cover 733 covering the upper portion of the alignment gear 732, and the right end of the gear cover 733 when viewed from the front. A ball holding plate 734 that closes the upper part of the tank rail 731, and a ball stop piece that can advance and retreat into the tank rail 731 and can stop the game ball in the tank rail 731 from rolling toward the discharge port 731a. It includes a 735 and a ground plate 736 that is arranged in the tank rail 731 and is in contact with the game ball in the tank rail 731. As shown in the figure, two alignment gears 732 are provided side by side in the front-rear direction so as to correspond to the two flow paths of the game balls partitioned in two rows by the partition wall 731b of the tank rail 731. Further, the ball holding plate 734 includes a mounting portion 734a to which the ball stop piece 735 is mounted on the upper portion, and two slits 734b through which the ball stop piece 735 can be inserted through the ball stop piece 735 in the vertical direction.

In the tank rail unit 730, two ball leveling members 727 pivotally supported by the prize ball tank 720 are inserted from above on the upstream side (open side) of the ball holding plate 734. The game balls discharged from the discharge port 723 of the prize ball tank 720 into the tank rail 731 by the ball leveling member 727 can be smoothed in one step and arranged in two rows along the partition wall 731b. You can do it. Further, the ball holding plate 734 is for forcibly making the game ball which was not made one step by the ball leveling member 727 into one step, and the gap between the ball holding plate 734 and the bottom of the tank rail 731 becomes narrower toward the discharge port 731a side. It is attached to the tank rail 731 as described above.

As shown in the figure, the alignment gear 732 of the tank rail unit 730 has a plurality of teeth formed on the outer periphery thereof, and is pivotally supported so that the pitch of the teeth in the pair of alignment gears 732 is deviated by half a pitch. As a result, when the upper part of the game ball flowing down the tank rail 731 flows down to the discharge port 732 on the downstream side while meshing with the teeth of the alignment gear 732, the game balls arranged in two rows are alternately awarded one by one. It is designed to be sent to the device 740.

The bottom of the tank rail 731 is formed with a fine groove that penetrates up and down so that foreign matter such as dust that rolls together with the game ball in the tank rail 731 falls downward from the fine groove. It has become. Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, the ground plate 736 arranged on the inner wall of the tank rail 731 is grounded to the outside via the grounding connector of the power supply board 851 via the grounding metal fitting 782. The game ball comes into contact with the ground plate 736 in the tank rail 731, so that the charged static electricity can be removed.

Further, the tank rail unit 730 rotates the ball stop piece 735 rotatably attached to the mounting portion 734a of the ball holding plate 734, and passes the projecting piece 735a of the ball stop piece 735 through the slit 734a into the tank rail 730. By inserting it into the ball, the projecting piece 735a can close the two rows of flow paths in the tank rail 731, and the game ball can be stopped from being supplied to the prize ball device 740 side. There is.

Further, in the tank rail unit 730, the tank rail 731 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin so that the state of the game ball or the like in the tank rail 731 can be visually recognized from the outside.

Subsequently, the prize ball device 740 in the prize ball unit 700 discharges and supplies the game balls discharged and supplied from the discharge port 731a of the tank rail unit 730 to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 based on a predetermined payout instruction. It is a thing. As shown in FIGS. 77 to 79, the prize ball device 740 includes a unit base 741 extending in the vertical direction attached to the prize ball device mounting portion 714 of the prize ball base 710. As shown in the figure, the unit base 741 in the prize ball device 740 has a supply passage that opens at the upper end and extends to a position slightly lower than the center in the vertical direction with a width slightly wider than the outer shape of the game ball. The 741a, the distribution space 741b which communicates with the lower end of the supply passage 741a and has a space of a predetermined size, and the lower end of the rear view left side (open side) of the distribution space 741b are communicated with each other and bent in an abbreviated shape to form a rear view. It is provided with a prize ball passage 741c that opens on the left side surface, and a ball removal passage 741d that communicates with the lower end of the distribution space 741b on the right side (shaft support side) and extends downward and opens at the lower end. The supply passage 741a, the distribution space 741b, the prize ball passage 741c, and the ball ejection passage 741d of the unit base 741 are formed in a state of being open to the rear.

The prize ball device 740 of this example has a back cover 742 which is attached to the rear side of the unit base 741 and has a shorter vertical length than the unit base 741, and a plate-shaped motor support arranged under the back cover 742. The plate 743, the payout motor 744 which is arranged on the front side of the motor support plate 743 and is fixed to the unit base 741 so that the rotary shaft 744a protrudes rearward from the motor support plate 743, and the rotary shaft 744a of the payout motor 744 are integrated. The first gear 745, which is rotatably fixed and arranged behind the motor support plate 743, meshes with the second gear 746, which meshes with the first gear 745 and is pivotally supported by the unit base 741, and meshes with the second gear 746. The third gear 747 that is pivotally supported by the unit base 741, the payout rotating body 748 that rotates integrally with the third gear 747 and is arranged in the distribution space 741c of the unit base 741, and the payout rotating body 748 are the third gears. It is provided with a rotation detection board 749 which is fixed to be integrally rotatable on the opposite side of the 747 and has a plurality of (three in this example) detection slits 749a at equal intervals in the circumferential direction.

Further, the prize ball device 740 is a ball-out switch 750 attached to the unit base 741 to detect the presence or absence of a game ball in the supply passage 741a, and the number of game balls attached to the unit base 741 and circulating in the prize ball passage 741c. The counting sensor 751 for measuring the speed, the rotation angle sensor 752 for detecting the detection slit 749a of the rotation detection board 479 that rotates integrally with the payout rotating body 748, and the rotation angle sensor 752 are held and attached to the rear surface of the back cover 742. The sensor board 753, the payout motor 744, the ball out switch 750, the counting sensor 751, and the prize ball relay board 754 attached to the rear surface of the back cover 742 to relay the connection between the rotation angle sensor 752 and the payout control board 4110. I have.

Further, the prize ball device 740 has a board cover 755 that covers the prize ball relay board 754 from the rear side and is attached to the rear surface of the back cover 742, and the first gear 745, the second gear 746, and the third gear 747 (rotation detection board 747). ), And the gear cover 756 that covers the sensor board 753 from the rear side and is attached to the rear surface of the unit base 741 with the back cover 742 sandwiched between them, and the supply passage ground that can contact the game ball circulating in the supply passage 741a of the unit base 741. The payout motor 744 is fixed to the unit base 741 by sandwiching the metal fitting 757 and the motor support plate 743, and the screw 758 for grounding the payout motor 744 and the back cover 742 are detachably supported to the unit base 741. It is equipped with a detachable button 759.

In the prize ball device 740 of this example, the back cover 742 is attached to the rear side of the unit base 741, so that the supply passage 741a, the distribution space 741b, the prize ball passage 741c, and the ball ejection passage 741d are opened rear ends. Is to be closed. Further, the unit base 741 has a shape in which the position below the upper end of the supply passage 741a once bulges rearward, so that the momentum of the game ball discharged and dropped from the tank rail unit 730 can be relaxed. You can do it. Further, the unit base 741 is partially notched on one side surface (on the left side when viewed from the rear) below the position in which the supply passage 741a bulges backward, and is located outside the notched position of the supply passage 741a. The switch mounting portion 741e for mounting the ball break switch 750, the sensor mounting portion 741f for mounting the counting sensor 751 in the middle of the prize ball passage 741c, and the sensor mounting portion 741f below the prize ball passage 741a so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction. It is provided with a motor insertion hole 741 g, which is formed and can insert a payout motor 744.

By attaching the ball-cutting switch 750 to the switch mounting portion 741e of the unit base 741, the operating piece of the ball-cutting switch 741e forms a part of the side wall of the supply passage 741a and exists in the supply passage 741a. When the operating piece is pressed by the gaming ball, the presence or absence of the gaming ball in the supply passage 741a can be detected by the ball-out switch 741e. In the state where the game ball in the supply passage 741e is not detected by the ball out switch 741e (the ball out state), the payout motor 744 does not rotate, and the player or the hole indicates that the ball is out. It is designed to be notified to the side.

Further, the unit base 741 is between the bearing portion 741h for pivotally supporting the second gear 746 and the third gear 747 (delivery rotating body 748), the switch mounting portion 741e in the supply passage 741a, and the distribution space 741b. The ground fitting mounting portion 741i for mounting the supply passage ground fitting 757 and the button support hole 741j arranged on the upper part of the unit base 741 and supporting the attachment / detachment button 759 for attaching / detaching / supporting the back cover 742. I have. In this unit base 741, by attaching the supply passage ground fitting 757 to the ground fitting mounting portion 741i, the rear surface of the supply passage ground fitting 757 can come into contact with the game ball in the supply passage 741a. The front surface of the supply passage ground fitting 757 is in contact with the lower end rear surface of the U-shaped ground fitting 782, and the static electricity of the game ball circulating in the supply passage 741a is removed through the supply passage ground fitting 757. Can be done.

The back cover 742 of the prize ball device 740 has a vertically long plate shape as a whole and has a shape in which the upper end bulges rearward. At the top of the back cover 742, there is a button insertion hole 742a through which the detachable button 759 is inserted, a relay board mounting portion 742b for mounting the prize ball relay board 754 and the board cover 755 on the substantially central rear surface in the vertical direction, and a relay board mounting. It is provided with a sensor board mounting portion 742c arranged under the portion 742b for mounting the sensor board 753, and a through hole 742d through which the payout rotating body 748 can pass. The relay board mounting portion 742b of the back cover 742 is formed so as to be located behind the ground fitting mounting portion 741i of the unit base 741.

Further, the motor support plate 743 of the prize ball device 740 is an aluminum plate in this example, and is in contact with the metal motor housing of the payout motor 744 to generate heat generated by the payout motor 744. It is possible to easily dissipate heat.

Further, as shown in FIG. 78, the payout rotating body 748 of the prize ball device 740 is provided with three recesses 748a having a size capable of accommodating one game ball at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. By rotating the 748, the game balls supplied from the supply passage 741a are housed in the recess 748a one by one, and can be discharged to the prize ball passage 741c or the ball removal passage 741d side. Further, the three detection slits 749a of the rotation detection plate 479 that rotates integrally with the payout rotating body 748 are formed at positions corresponding to the recesses 748a of the payout rotating body 748, respectively, and the detection slits 749a are formed by the rotation angle sensor 752. By detecting, the rotation position of the payout rotating body 748 can be detected.

The prize ball device 740 of this example is a payout motor when a payout command from the main control board 4100, a lending command from the CR unit 6, or the like is input to the payout control board 4110, or the ball ejection switch 860b is operated. The 744 rotates so that a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out to the player side (upper plate 301) or discharged to the game hall side (rear side of the pachinko machine 1). When the rotary shaft 744a of the payout motor 744 is rotationally driven, the first gear 745 fixed to the rotary shaft 744a is rotated, and at the same time, the second gear 746 that meshes with the first gear 745 is rotated, and further, the second gear 746 is rotated. The third gear 747 that meshes with the gear 747 rotates. A payout rotating body 748 is fixed to the front side of the third gear 747, and a rotation detection board 794 is fixed to the rear side so as to be integrally rotatable. It is designed to rotate.

As shown in FIG. 78, in the prize ball device 740, the payout rotating body 748 is rotatably supported in the substantially center of the distribution space 741b. Then, when the payout rotating body 748 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the rear by the payout motor 744, the game ball in the supply passage 741a is paid out to the prize ball passage 741c side, and the payout rotation The game balls paid out to the prize ball passage 741c side by the rotation of the body 748 are counted one by one by the counting sensor 751 and then handed over to the prize ball passage 715 of the prize ball base 710. On the other hand, when the payout rotating body 748 is rotated in the rear view clockwise direction by the payout motor 744, the game ball in the supply passage 741a is paid out to the ball ejection passage 741d side, and the payout rotating body 748 is used. The game balls discharged to the ball pulling passage 741d side are the ball pulling passage 778 of the full tank distribution unit 770, which will be described later, the main body frame base ball pulling passage 622 of the main body frame base 600, and the board unit from the lower end of the ball pulling passage 741d. It can be discharged to the outside of the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 through the opening 812 of the board unit base 810 in 800 and the discharge passage 842 of the power supply board box holder 840.

The unit base 741 in the prize ball device 740 of this example is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and even when assembled on the main body frame 3, the prize is awarded from the front side of the main body frame 3 through the transparent prize ball base 710. The inside of the supply passage 741a, the distribution space 741b, the prize ball passage 741c, the ball removal passage 741d, etc. of the ball device 740 can be visually recognized, and defects such as ball clogging can be easily found. ..

Next, the full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 74, 75, and 79. The full tank distribution unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 is attached to the lower end of the prize ball base 710, and guides the game ball paid out to the prize ball passage 741c side of the prize ball unit 740 to the plate unit 300. At the same time, when the game ball is full in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300, the game ball can be distributed so as to be paid out to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300.

The full tank branch unit 770 is fixed to the lower end back surface of the prize ball base 710 at the upper part of the rear end and the locking portion 770a locked to the mounting locking part 716 of the prize ball base 710 at the substantially central upper part in the front-rear direction. It is provided with a fixing portion 770b. The full tank branch unit 770 is in a state of being suspended from the mounting locking portion 716 by locking the locking portion 770a to the mounting locking portion 716 of the prize ball base 710 from the rear side, and the prize ball base. By fixing the fixing portion 770b to the 710 with a predetermined screw, the full tank branch unit 770 can be attached and fixed to the lower end of the prize ball base 710.

Further, as shown in the figure, the full tank branch unit 770 is formed in a box shape in which the whole becomes lower from the rear end to the front end, and opens upward at substantially the center in the left-right direction at the upper part of the rear end. The prize ball receiving port 771 that receives the game ball that has flowed down the prize ball passage 715 of the prize ball base 710, and the branch space 772 that is arranged under the prize ball receiving port 771 and spreads in the left-right direction (see FIG. 79). And the normal passage 773 (see FIG. 79) that guides the game ball from directly below the prize ball receiving port 771 in the branch space 772 to the front side, and the game ball that has flowed through the normal passage 773 is discharged forward and in front of the front end. The normal ball outlet 774 opened at the right end of the view and the full tank passage 775 (see FIG. 79) that guides the game ball from a position away from directly below the prize ball receiving port 771 in the branch space 772 to the right side of the rear view toward the front side. ), And a full tank outlet 776 that discharges the game ball that has flowed through the full tank passage 775 forward and opens on the left side of the front view of the normal ball outlet 774.

Further, the full tank branch unit 770 has a ball ejection port 777 that opens upward to the left end of the front view of the upper part of the rear end and receives a game ball that has flowed down the ball ejection passage 741d of the prize ball device 740. The ball ejection passage 778 (see FIG. 79) that guides the game ball received by the ejection port 777 to the front side and the game ball that has circulated through the ball extraction passage 778 are discharged forward and the normal ball outlet 774 and the normal ball outlet 774 at the left end of the front view. It is provided with a ball ejection outlet 779 which is opened at a position behind the full tank outlet 776.

In the full tank branch unit 770 of this example, assuming that the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the normal ball outlet 774 and the full tank outlet 776 are the first of the foul cover units 540 in the door frame 5, respectively. The game ball is configured to face and communicate with the ball inlet 542a and the second ball inlet 542c, and the game ball released from the normal ball outlet 774 passes through the first ball inlet 542a of the foul cover unit 540 and is connected to the dish unit 300. The game ball supplied to the upper plate 301 and discharged from the full tank outlet 776 is supplied to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 through the second ball inlet 542c of the foul cover unit 540. Further, the ball ejection port 779 is formed so as to communicate with the upper end on the right side of the rear view of the main body frame base ball extraction passage 622 in the main body frame base 600, and the game ball released from the ball extraction outlet 779 is formed in the main body frame base 600. It is designed to be handed over to the main body frame base ball pulling passage 622.

In this full tank branch unit 770, the game ball paid out to the prize ball passage 741c side of the prize ball device 740 can be received at the prize ball receiving port 771 via the prize ball passage 715 of the prize ball base 710. In the normal state, the game ball that has entered the prize ball receiving port 771 hangs down the branch space 772 and flows down into the normal passage 773 arranged directly under the prize ball receiving port 771. Then, the game ball that has flowed down into the normal passage 773 enters the first ball inlet 542a of the foul cover unit 540 from the normal exit 774, passes through the first ball passage 542b, and is above the plate unit 300 from the first ball outlet 544a. It will be supplied to the dish 301.

By the way, when the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 is filled with the game balls and the game balls are further discharged from the prize ball unit 700 (prize ball device 740), the first ball exit of the foul cover unit 540. The game ball that cannot be discharged from the 544a to the upper plate 301 side stagnates in the first ball passage 542b of the foul cover unit 540, and eventually fills the upstream normal passage 773 through the normal ball outlet 774 in the full tank branch unit 770. become. In this state, the game ball that has entered the branch space 772 from the prize ball receiving port 771 cannot enter the normal passage 773, and starts to move laterally in the branch space 772 and moves laterally. The game ball enters the full tank passage 775, and is under the plate unit 300 from the full tank outlet 767 via the second ball entrance 542c, the second ball passage 542d, and the second ball exit 544b of the foul cover unit 540. It is designed to be supplied to the dish 302.

The full tank branch unit 770 of this example is entirely made of a transparent synthetic resin so that the inside can be visually recognized from the outside. As a result, foreign matter such as dust and dirt that has entered the full tank branch unit 770 and the occurrence of ball clogging can be easily found without disassembling the full tank branch unit 7700. ..

As described above, when the game ball is full in the upper plate 301, the full tank branch unit 770 of this example automatically uses the game ball paid out from the prize ball device 740 until the full tank is cleared. Since it can be supplied to the lower plate 302, the game ball is not supplied to the hitting ball launching device by operating the ball removal button on the upper plate when the upper plate is full like a conventional pachinko machine. It is possible to prevent the hitting of the game ball from being interrupted, eliminate the annoyance during the game, and suppress the decline in the interest in the game.

Further, as described above, when the upper plate 301 is full, the full tank branch unit 770 of this example branches directly under the prize ball device 740, that is, the passage of the game ball discharged at the rear of the pachinko machine 1. Since the game balls staying in the normal passage 773 of the full tank branch unit 770 are discharged to the upper plate 301, the game balls in the upper plate 301 and the game balls in the normal passage 773 are hit ball launching devices. The game ball can be directly driven by the 650, and the storage amount of the game ball in the upper plate 301 is substantially the sum of the capacity of the upper plate 301 and the capacity of the normal passage 773. That is, even if the capacity of the upper plate 301 is made smaller than the capacity of the upper plate in the conventional pachinko machine, the capacity of the normal passage 773 is added, so that the same amount of game balls as the conventional one is stored in the upper plate 301. Can be done. Therefore, by making the upper plate 301 smaller, the game window 101 in the door frame 5 can be made relatively larger (wider), and the pachinko machine 1 having a wider game area 1100 can be used for playing. The pachinko machine 1 has a high appeal to the player, and the wide gaming area 1100 makes it possible to entertain the player.

Further, since the two normal ball outlets 774 and the full tank outlet 776 of the full tank branch unit 770 are arranged side by side, the door frame 5 is provided with only one storage tray (first). Even if there is only one ball entrance 542a and second ball entrance 542c), the game ball can be sent to the door frame 5 side without changing the main body frame 3 side (full tank branch unit 770). Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can be made to correspond to the door frame 5 having a different number of storage plates without changing the flow path of the game ball (full tank branch unit 770) in the main body frame 3. It is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the lineup of the pachinko machine 1 provided with the door frames 5 having different numbers of storage plates.

Further, as described above, even if the number of storage plates provided in the door frame 5 is changed, the main body frame 3 can be dealt with without changing, so that the entire pachinko machine 1 related to the change of the door frame 5 can be dealt with. It is possible to reduce the cost of the pachinko machine 1 and provide various pachinko machines 1 at low cost.

Further, the game ball sent from the normal ball outlet 774 to the door frame 5 side through the normal passage 773 is preferentially driven into the game area 1100, and the door frame 5 provided with only one storage plate. Even if the ball is exchanged for, the game ball discharged from the prize ball device 740 can be immediately sent to the storage plate via the normal passage 773 and the normal ball outlet 774, so that the time lag from delivery to storage can be reduced. It is possible to prevent the player's interest from being lowered due to the shortage of game balls for driving, and it is possible to sufficiently cope with the door frames 5 having different numbers of storage plates. ..

Further, unless the upper plate 301 is full, the game balls paid out from the prize ball device 740 are sent to the upper plate 301, so that the frequency of transferring the game balls stored in the lower plate 302 to the upper plate 301 is reduced. This makes it possible to concentrate the player on the operation of driving the game ball and the like, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's interest in the game.

Further, the normal ball outlet 774 and the full tank outlet 776 of the full tank branch unit 770 are arranged side by side on the left and right sides, and even when the door frame 5 is provided with only one storage plate, the first ball is provided. Since the position of the lower end of the receiving port corresponding to the entrance 542a or the like can be set to the same height as the first ball entrance 542a or the like corresponding to the upper plate 301 of the door frame 5 provided with two storage plates, the storage plate can be used. It is possible to prevent the depth from becoming shallow, and it is possible to secure a sufficient storage amount of the game ball by deepening the storage plate, and the game can be played without causing the player to frequently worry about the storage amount. And it is possible to correspond to the door frame 5 equipped with different numbers of storage dishes without changing the main body frame 3 side, and the cost for changing the model of the pachinko machine 1 increases. Can be suppressed.

Further, the position where the full tank passage 775 in the full tank branch unit 770 branches from the normal passage 773 is branched at a position as close as possible to the prize ball device 740, and the upper plate 301 is full with a game ball. Therefore, even if the game ball cannot be discharged from the normal ball outlet 774, the amount of the game ball stored in the normal passage 773 between the normal ball outlet 774 and the branch position of the full tank passage 775 is increased as much as possible. It is possible to increase the amount of substantial game balls stored in the upper plate 301 as much as possible. In addition, when only one storage plate is provided in the door frame 5, even if the storage plate becomes full with the game ball and the game ball cannot be discharged from the normal ball outlet 773 or the full tank outlet 776. Since the position where the full tank passage 775 branches from the normal passage 773 is arranged as close as possible to the prize ball device 740, many game balls are placed not only in the normal passage 773 but also in the full tank passage 775. Can be stored, and the amount of substantially game balls stored in the storage dish can be increased as much as possible. Therefore, even if the number of storage plates provided on the door frame 5 side is different, the storage amount of the game balls in each door frame 5 is maximized without changing the main body frame 3 side (full tank branch unit 770). It is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 which can be increased to a limited number and can sufficiently cope with different door frames 5.

Further, the normal passage 773 and the full tank passage 775 in the full tank branch unit 770 are wide enough to allow the game balls to be distributed in a plurality of rows, and the amount of the game balls staying (reserved) in the full tank branch unit 770 is determined. Since the number can be increased, even if the number of storage plates provided in the door frame 5 is different, it is possible to avoid a decrease in the actual storage amount of the game balls in the full tank branch unit 770. The pachinko machine 1 can be made to correspond to the door frames 5 having different numbers of storage plates without changing the flow path of the game balls in the main body frame 3.

Further, since the full tank branch unit 770 is made of transparent resin, the inside of the normal passage 773 and the full tank passage 775 can be visually recognized from the outside, so that the game ball is clogged in the full tank branch unit 770 and a problem occurs. At that time, the location of the ball jam can be easily found from the outside of the full tank branch unit 770, the defect can be solved at an early stage, and the operating rate of the pachinko machine 1 can be increased.

[1-3E. Ball exit opening / closing unit]
Next, the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 80 to 82. FIG. 80 is a front perspective view of the ball outlet opening / closing unit in the main body frame. Further, FIG. 81 is a rear perspective view of the ball outlet opening / closing unit in the main body frame. Further, FIG. 82 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the ball outlet opening / closing unit in the main body frame and the foul cover unit in the door frame. The ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 in the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment is attached to a mounting portion 624 formed near the upper left end of the front view of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600, and is attached to the main body frame 3. When the door frame 5 is opened, the normal ball outlet 774 and the full tank outlet 776 at the front end of the full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 are closed, and the prize ball unit 700 is transferred to the plate unit 300 of the door frame 5. It is possible to block the flow of the game ball.

The ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 is attached to a mounting portion 624 formed near the upper left end of the front view of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600 so as not to protrude from the upper end of the lower rear wall portion 604. The plate-shaped open / close shutter 792 that is slidably held in the shutter base 791 in the vertical direction, the open / close crank 793 that slides the open / close shutter 792 in the vertical direction, and the open / close shutter 792 that rises via the open / close crank 793. It is equipped with an opening / closing spring 794 that urges the vehicle.

The shutter base 791 of the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 includes a pair of vertically extending slide grooves 791a for holding the opening / closing shutter 792 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction so as to project upward from the upper end of the shutter base 791. A rectangular opening 791b that penetrates in the front-rear direction between a pair of slide grooves 791a, and a crank that is arranged in front of the left end portion in front view and rotatably supports the opening / closing crank 793 around an axis extending in the front-rear direction. A support portion 791c and a spring locking portion 791d for locking one end (upper end) of the opening / closing spring 794 are provided. The crank support portion 791c of the shutter base 791 is arranged on the left side of the opening 791b in the front view, and the spring locking portion 791d is arranged in the vicinity of the upper portion on the left side from the center in the left-right direction in the front view.

Further, the opening / closing shutter 792 of the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 is a pair of sliding protrusions (not shown) that project from the front surface of the flat shutter body 792a and the shutter body 792a and slide in the slide groove 791a of the shutter base 791. ), And a horizontally long rectangular drive hole 792b arranged at a position facing the opening 791b of the shutter base 791 between the pair of sliding protrusions and penetrating in the front-rear direction.

Further, the opening / closing crank 793 of the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 has a shaft portion 793a rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction by the crank support portion 791c of the shutter base 791, and the outer periphery on the right side of the front view of the shaft portion 793a. A drive rod 793b whose tip extends outward from the tip to the vicinity of the center in the left-right direction of the opening 791b, and a drive rod 793b that protrudes rearward from the tip and is slidably inserted into the drive hole 792b of the opening / closing shutter 792. Drive pin 793c, contact portion 793d extending downward from the lower outer periphery of the shaft portion 793a and having a spherical tip, and the other end (lower end) of the opening / closing spring 794 formed on the upper surface of the drive rod 793b. ) Is provided with a spring locking portion 793e.

In the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 of this example, the shutter base 791 and the opening / closing shutter 792 are formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and even when the opening / closing shutter 792 is raised, the shutter base 791 is arranged on the rear side through the opening / closing shutter 792. The normal ball outlet 774, the full tank outlet 776, and the like in the full tank branch unit 770 can be visually recognized.

In the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 of this example, the opening / closing crank 793 rotates around an axis extending in the front-rear direction, so that the drive pin 793c of the opening / closing crank 793 rotates in the vertical direction in an arc shape, and at the same time, the drive pin 793c. The opening / closing shutter 792 slides in the vertical direction through the drive hole 792b into which the is inserted. In the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the contact portion 793d of the opening / closing crank 793 comes into contact with the opening / closing operation piece 542g of the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5. The contact portion 793d is rotated in the clockwise direction in the front view against the urging force of the opening / closing spring 794, and the drive pin 793c is rotated in the front view clockwise direction together with the contact portion 793d. By moving the shutter, the open / close shutter 792 is lowered to open the normal ball outlet 774 and the full tank outlet 776 at the front end of the full tank branch unit 770.

When the door frame 5 is opened with respect to the main body frame 3 from this state, the contact between the contact portion 793c of the opening / closing crank 793 and the opening / closing operating piece 542g of the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 is released, and the opening / closing crank 793 is released. Is rotated counterclockwise in the front view by the urging force of the opening / closing spring 794, and at the same time, the opening / closing shutter 792 rises to close the normal ball outlet 774 and the full tank outlet 767 at the front end of the full tank branch unit 770. You can do it.

In this way, according to the opening and closing of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3, the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 automatically switches the normal ball outlet 774 and the full tank outlet 767 at the front end of the full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700. Since it can be opened and closed, even if the door frame 5 is opened with the game ball remaining in the full tank branch unit 770, it is possible to prevent the game ball from spilling from the normal ball outlet 774 or the full tank outlet 767. You can do it.

[1-3F. Board unit]
Next, the substrate unit 800 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 83 to 89. FIG. 83 is a front perspective view of the substrate unit in the main body frame, and FIG. 84 is a rear perspective view of the substrate unit in the main body frame. Further, FIG. 85 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit as viewed from the front after being disassembled. Further, FIG. 86 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit as viewed after being disassembled. Further, FIG. 87 is a perspective view illustrating the operation of the vertical wall portion of the power supply board box in the board unit. FIG. 88 (A) is a cross-sectional view of the terminal board box in the board unit, and FIG. 88 (B) is an exploded perspective view of the terminal board box in the board unit as viewed from the front. Further, FIG. 89A is a front view of the firing power supply board box, and FIG. 89B is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA shown in FIG.

The board unit 800 in the main body frame 3 includes a board unit base 810 attached to the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600, a speaker box 820 attached to the left rear surface of the board unit base 810 in front view, and a board unit base. A power supply board box 830 mounted on the rear surface of the right end of the front view of the 810, a power supply board box holder 840 mounted on the rear surface of the board unit base 810 so as to surround the launch power board box 830 from the rear side, and a power supply board box holder 840. A power supply board box 850 mounted on the rear surface and having a rear end substantially flush with the rear end of the speaker box 820, and a payout control board box 860 mounted on the rear surfaces of the power supply board box 850 and the speaker box 820. The terminal board box 840 mounted on the rear surface of the speaker box 820 so as to cover the left end of the payout control board box 860, the main relay terminal board 880 mounted on the front surface of the board unit base 810, and the peripheral side relay. It is equipped with a terminal plate 882.

As shown in the figure, the substrate unit base 810 in the substrate unit 800 of this example has a shape that extends long in the left-right direction, and a substantially central portion in the left-right direction is lowered by one step and gently inclined upward toward both left and right ends. A wall-shaped shielding wall portion 811 protruding from the front to the front, an opening 812 arranged above the position one step lower in the center in the left-right direction and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and a lower side of the shielding wall portion 811. The board mounting portion 813 for mounting the main relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral relay terminal plate 882 formed on the front surface near the left end of the front view, and the board mounting portion 813 on the left side of the front view in a horizontally long rectangular shape in the front-rear direction. A tubular duct portion 814 that penetrates, a plurality of vertically elongated slit-shaped through holes 815 that penetrate in the front-rear direction at positions corresponding to the speaker 821 of the speaker box 820 fixed to the rear surface, and the left side of the rear view (right side of the front view). The rear surface of the upper portion is provided with a box accommodating portion 816 that is open rearward and upward and can accommodate the front side of the firing power supply board box 830.

The substrate unit base 810 is formed so that the shielding wall portion 811 is formed along the lower side of the main body frame base ball ejection passage 622 formed on the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 in the main body frame base 600. It is possible to prevent the game ball from falling downward from the base ball pulling passage 622, and it is possible to increase the strength of the substrate unit base 810. Further, the board base unit 810 sends the game ball flowing down the main body frame base ball pulling passage 622 to the power supply board box holder 840 arranged on the rear side of the board unit base 810 through the opening 812 penetrating in the front-rear direction. You can do it.

Further, in the board unit base 810, the board mounting portion 813 for mounting the main side relay terminal board 880 and the peripheral side relay terminal board 882 is arranged at a position corresponding to the rectangular opening opening 614 in the main body frame base 600. When the main relay terminal board 880 and the peripheral relay terminal board 882 are mounted on the board mounting portion 813, the main relay terminal board 880 and the peripheral relay terminal board 882 are on the front side from the opening 614 of the main body frame base 600. It is designed to face. Further, the substrate unit base 810 can satisfactorily transmit the sound from the speaker 821 of the speaker box 820 to the front side by the duct portion 814 and the plurality of through holes 815.

Further, the board unit base 810 is formed at a position corresponding to the front box accommodating portion 843 of the power supply board box holder 840 in which the box accommodating portion 816 is arranged on the rear side, and the box accommodating portion 816 and the front box accommodating portion 843 are formed. Therefore, it is possible to form an accommodating recess for accommodating the firing power supply board box 830.

The speaker box 820 in the board unit 800 literally includes a speaker 821 mounted facing forward. The speaker box 820 covers the rear side of the speaker 821 in a hermetically sealed manner, and at the same time, a horizontally long rectangular opening 822 is formed on the left side of the speaker 821 in front view. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the opening 822 communicates with the space behind the speaker 821 via a predetermined labyrinth-like passage to invert the phase of the sound behind the speaker 821 and move forward. It is a bass reflex type speaker box capable of emitting deeper bass to the diameter of the speaker 821. The duct portion 814 of the board unit base 810 is formed at a position corresponding to the opening port 822 of the speaker box 820, so that the sound radiated from the opening port 822 can be satisfactorily transmitted forward. ing.

The firing power board box 830 in the board unit 800 is formed in a box shape with an open rear portion, and includes a firing power board 831 attached so as to close the rear end opening. The firing power supply board box 830 is adapted to accommodate various electronic components attached to the firing power supply board 831, and heat from the electronic components and the like is passed through the slits 830a formed on the upper surface and the lower surface. Can be released to the outside.

The firing power supply board box 830 is detached from above into a storage recess formed by the box housing portion 816 of the board unit base 810 and the front box housing portion 844 of the power supply board box holder 840 described later. It is designed to be accommodated as much as possible. As a result, in the state where the main body frame 3 is assembled, if a problem occurs in the firing power supply board box 830, the firing power supply board box 830 can be easily attached / detached from the front side of the main body frame 3 to be replaced or repaired. It is possible (see FIG. 63).

Further, the firing power supply board box 830 will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 89, the firing power supply board 831 has a DC / DC converter 831a and an electrolytic capacitor SC0 for charging and discharging the power from the DC / DC converter 831a. The combined current, which is the sum of the current from the DC / DC converter 831a and the current due to the discharge from the electrolytic capacitor SC0, is driven by passing a current through the firing solenoid 654 of the ball launching device 650. The firing power supply board box 830 is formed with slits 830a as heat dissipation holes on the upper surface and the lower surface thereof in order to release the heat generated by the DC / DC converter 831a and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 mounted on the firing power supply board 831 to the outside. ing.

Further, since the electrolytic capacitor SC0 of the firing power supply board 831 is an electronic component that is more easily damaged by heat than the DC / DC converter 831a, the side surface of the firing power supply board box 830 in which the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is arranged is provided with a heat dissipation hole. A slit 830a is formed. Further, in the firing power supply board box 830, a partition wall 830b that divides the internal space into two spaces, a space for accommodating the DC / DC converter 831a and a space for accommodating the electrolytic capacitor SC0, is an upper inner wall. It is integrally formed from the bottom surface to the edge of the end opening so as to connect the bottom surface and the inner wall of the lower surface. As a result, when the firing power supply board 831 is attached to the end opening of the firing power supply board box 830 and the internal space of the firing power supply board box 830 is closed, the internal space of the firing power supply board box 830 accommodates the electrolytic capacitor SC0 by the partition wall 830b. Since two spaces are formed, the accommodation space 830c for accommodating the DC / DC converter 831a and the accommodation space 830d for accommodating the DC / DC converter 831a, the partition wall 830b has the accommodation space 830c for accommodating the electrolytic capacitor SC0. , The accommodation space 830d for accommodating the DC / DC converter 831a and the heat insulating wall for blocking the inflow and outflow of heat.

The heat in the accommodation space 830c in which the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is accommodated, that is, the heat generated by the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is slits as heat dissipation holes formed on the upper surface, the side surface, and the lower surface that communicate the accommodation space 830c and the outside air, respectively. By being discharged to the outside via the 830a, it is possible to prevent the released heat from entering the accommodation space 830d in which the DC / DC converter 831a is accommodated. Therefore, the heat generated by the electrolytic capacitor SC0 can be prevented from being transferred to the DC / DC converter 831a. Further, the heat in the accommodation space 830d in which the DC / DC converter 831a is accommodated, that is, the heat generated by the DC / DC converter 831a is the heat radiation holes formed on the upper surface and the lower surface that communicate the accommodation space 830d and the outside air, respectively. By being discharged to the outside through the slit 830a, the released heat can be prevented from entering the accommodation space 830c in which the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is accommodated. Therefore, the heat generated by the DC / DC converter 831a can be prevented from being transferred to the electrolytic capacitor SC0.

In the present embodiment, the DC / DC converter 831a and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 for creating the merged current to be passed through the firing solenoid 654 of the ball launching device 650 are not installed on the power supply board 851, but are launched separately from the power supply board 851. By being provided on the power supply board 831, the size of the firing power supply board 831 can be made smaller than the size of the power supply board 851. Therefore, the miniaturization of the firing power supply board 831 makes it easier to handle, facilitates the replacement work of the firing power supply board 831, and contributes to shortening the time spent for the replacement work. In this replacement work, the firing power supply board 831 can be replaced with the firing power supply board 831 still attached to the end opening of the firing power supply board box 830, that is, the firing power supply board box 830 as a whole.

Further, even if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is operated and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 reaches the end of its life, and the drive firing by the firing solenoid 654 suddenly becomes impossible to fire and the game has to be interrupted, the replacement work of the firing power supply board 831 is performed. By doing so easily, the interruption of the game can be resolved at an early stage. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the inability to fire due to the life of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 very easily, and it is possible to eliminate the interruption of the game due to the inability to fire at an early stage and restart the game, which reduces the interest of the player. Can be suppressed.

The electrolytic capacitor SC0 of the firing power supply board 831 deteriorates and reaches the end of its life due to repeated charging and discharging at a frequency of, for example, 100 times per minute each time drive firing is performed by the firing solenoid 654. On the other hand, although the power supply board 851 creates a DC power supply from the AC power supply of the island facility such as the game hall, it is not repeatedly charged and discharged at the same frequency as the electrolytic capacitor SC0 of the firing power supply board 831. Compared to the firing power supply board 831, its life is extremely long. In other words, the firing power supply board 831 reaches the end of its life due to deterioration due to the charging and discharging of the electrolytic capacitor SC0, whereas the power supply board 851 reaches the end of its life due to aging. The DC / DC converter 831a and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 for creating the merged current flowing through the firing solenoid 654 are not provided on the power supply board 851, but are provided on the firing power supply board 831 which is separate from the power supply board 851. Electronic components that accompany long-term changes can be concentrated on the power supply board 851. This makes it possible to prevent the electronic components having a long life from being replaced together with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 having a short life.

Further, since the launching power supply board 831 provided with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 that controls the hitting ball launching device 650 can be attached to and detached from the front side through the gaming board holding port 601 that holds the gaming board 4, the capacity is increased in order to change the hitting characteristics. Even if you try to change to a different electrolytic capacitor SC0, it is necessary to remove the game board 4 held in the game board holding port 601 in order to attach and detach the firing power supply board 831, and it is difficult to replace the firing power supply board 831. By making it difficult to commit fraud, it is possible to suppress fraud that intentionally changes the driving strength that is optimized by illegally modifying the launch power supply board 831. The pachinko machine 1 can be used to prevent a player who is frustrated from developing into fraud such as cheating.

In addition, since the firing power supply board 831 is removable and can be replaced, even if the electrolytic capacitor SC0 or the like of the firing power supply board 831 is fraudulent, the firing power supply board 831 is immediately replaced and the fraudulent is performed. It can be resolved, the interruption period of the game can be shortened as much as possible, and the feeling of irritation or disappointment due to the interruption of the game can be eliminated at an early stage. It is possible to prevent a person's interest in the game from diminishing.

Further, the firing power supply board 831 provided with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 in the firing control unit 4120 that controls the hitting ball launching device 650 is detachable from the front side through the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3 that holds the game board 4. When the game board 4 is replaced due to a model change, etc., the launch power supply board 831 (launch power supply board box 830) of the launch control unit 4120 can also be easily replaced, so it matches the concept of the new model to be replaced. By replacing it with a firing power supply board 831 equipped with an electrolytic capacitor SC0 that can realize driving characteristics and a DC / DC converter 831a, the driving characteristics of the ball launching device 650 that has been previously provided in the main body frame 3 can be replaced with a new game. It can be considered to match the board 4. Therefore, since the driving characteristics of the game ball can be easily matched to the concept of the game board 4, the game by the new model game board 4 can be fully enjoyed, and the player's interest is suppressed from being lowered. can do.

Further, since the launch power supply board 831 of the launch control unit 4120 can be attached and detached from the front side, it is not necessary to open the main body frame 3 for the island equipment such as the game hall when replacing the launch power supply board 831. It is possible to simplify the time and effort required for replacement, and it is possible to replace in a short time, and it is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall side. In addition, since the launch power supply board 831 (launch power supply board box 830) is removable and replaceable, the driving characteristics are changed as compared with the case where the entire launch control unit 4120 (payout control board 4110) is replaced. The cost can be reduced, and the burden on the hall side and the like can be reduced.

Furthermore, when changing the model, etc., only the game board 4 is replaced so that the door frame 5, the main body frame 3, etc. can be used as they are, so that the launch control unit 4120 can be used for a long period of time. When the electrolytic capacitor SC0 or the like of the firing power supply board 831 deteriorates, the firing power supply board box 830 can be easily replaced from the front side as described above. It is possible to eliminate the problem, shorten the interruption period of the game as much as possible, and eliminate the feeling of irritation or disappointment due to the interruption of the game at an early stage. It is possible to prevent the player's interest in the game from deteriorating.

Further, the firing power supply board 831 (launching power supply board box 830) is supported through the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3, and the firing power supply board 831 is held in the game board holding port 601 to be attached and detached. Since it is necessary to remove the gaming board 4, even if a tool for performing fraudulent activity is inserted through the gap between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3, the fraudulent tool reaches the firing power supply board 831 by the gaming board 4. It is possible to prevent the firing power supply board 831 from being cheated, and it is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 having a high defense against cheating.

Further, the firing power supply board box 830 is supported through the gaming board holding port 601. Probably, the position for supporting the firing power supply board box 830 is behind the front surface of the main body frame 3, so that the firing power supply is supported. It is possible to easily secure a space for supporting the board box 830, and it is possible to reliably embody the pachinko machine 1 that supports the firing power supply board box 830 and exhibits the above-mentioned effects.

Further, since the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is provided on the firing power supply board 831 and the firing power supply board 831 can be easily attached to and detached from the front side of the main body frame 3, power is supplied from the electrolytic capacitor SC0 to the firing solenoid 654. Even if the load applied to the electrolytic capacitor SC0 becomes large and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 tends to deteriorate, the electrolytic capacitor SC0 (fire power supply board 831) can be easily replaced, and the problem can be solved at an early stage to interrupt the game. The time can be shortened as much as possible, and the pachinko machine 1 can surely exhibit the above-mentioned action and effect.

Further, the power supply board box holder 840 in the board unit 800 is opened upward on the left front side from the center on the left and right in front view, and receives the game ball discharged downward from the out ball discharging portion 1161 of the game board 4. The discharge ball receiving portion 841, the discharge passage 842 that guides the game ball received by the discharge ball receiving portion 841 downward and discharges the ball, and the front side (right side in front view) of the discharge passage 842 and the discharge ball receiving portion 841. The front box accommodating portion 843 that is open forward and upward and can accommodate the rear side of the power supply board box 830, and the front end of the power supply board box 850 that is formed so that the entire rear surface of the power supply board box holder 840 is recessed toward the front side. It is provided with a rear box accommodating portion 844 capable of accommodating.

The power supply board box holder 840 is such that the open front end side of the discharge passage 842 is closed by the rear surface of the board unit base 810, and the opening 812 of the board unit base 810 is located at a position desired to the discharge passage 842. It is formed and flows through the main body frame base ball ejection passage 622 formed on the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600, passes through the opening 812 of the board base unit 810, and is the rear side of the board unit base 810. The game ball that has flowed down to the pachinko machine 1 and the game ball that has been discharged from the out ball discharge unit 1161 of the game board 4 and received by the discharge ball receiving unit 841 are passed through the discharge passage 842 to the rear lower side of the pachinko machine 1. It can be discharged to.

Further, the power supply board box holder 840 is formed at a position corresponding to the box accommodating portion 816 of the substrate unit base 810, and the box accommodating portion 816 and the front box accommodating portion 843 accommodate the firing power supply board box 830. It is possible to form a recess.

Further, the power supply board box 850 in the board unit 800 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with an open front, and includes a power supply board 851 attached so as to close the front end opening thereof. The power supply board box 850 accommodates various electronic components attached to the power supply board 851, and externally receives heat from the electronic components and the like through a plurality of slits 850a formed on the upper surface and the lower surface. It can be released to. As shown in FIG. 86, the power switch 852 attached to the power supply board 851 faces the rear surface of the power supply board box 850.

Further, the power supply board box 850 is a vertical wall in which the power supply terminal 853 (see FIGS. 84 and 86) attached to the lower side of the power supply switch 852 in the power supply board 851 projects rearward along the lower side of the opening facing the rear side. The wiring cord 854 can be inserted between the portion 850b, the protrusions 850c protruding rearward from both sides of the rear end of the standing wall portion 850b, and the outer periphery of the power supply board box 850 arranged on the front side and the lower side of the standing wall portion 850b. It is provided with a wiring guide portion 850d that forms a large gap. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the power supply terminal 853 mounted on the power supply board 851 has a locking claw that locks with the locking claw of the connector terminal 855, and the locking claw and the locking piece. By locking and, the connector terminal 855 does not come off from the power supply terminal 853.

As shown in FIG. 87, the power supply board box 850 has a vertical wall portion 850b slightly rearward from the rear end of the connector terminal 855 in a state where the connector terminal 855 of the wiring cord 854 is connected to the power supply terminal 853 of the power supply board 851. It is formed so as to protrude to. In the power supply board box 850 of this example, the wiring cord 854 is connected to the power supply terminal 853 of the power supply board 851 in a state where the wiring cord 854 wraps around from the front lower side of the power supply board box 850 to the rear side so as to be hooked on the rear end of the standing wall portion 850b. The terminal 855 is connected.

By the way, if the connector terminal from which the wiring cord extends is connected to the connection terminal attached to the board and the wiring cord is pulled toward the board, the connector terminal is connected by the tension applied from the wiring cord. Since it is pressed against the terminal side, there is a problem that it is difficult to remove the connector terminal from the connection terminal. However, according to the power supply board box 850 of this example, the tip side of the wiring cord 854 (the side opposite to the connector terminal 855 side connected to the power supply terminal 853) moves to the power supply board 851 side (front side with respect to the main body frame 3). Even if it is pulled, the wiring cord 854 is routed so as to wrap around (fold back) to the rear side of the connector terminal 855 by the vertical wall portion 850b protruding rearward from the connector terminal 855, so that the connector is routed from the wiring cord 854. It is possible to prevent the terminal 855 from being pressed against the power supply terminal 853, and the connector terminal 855 connected to the power supply terminal 853 can be easily removed.

Further, since the power supply board box 850 is provided with protrusions 850c protruding rearward on both sides of the rear end of the vertical wall portion 850b, even if the wiring cord 854 slides along the rear end of the vertical wall portion 850b, the rear end The protrusions 850c provided at both ends can prevent the wiring cord 854 from sliding further outward, and prevent the wiring cord 854 from coming off the standing wall portion 850b.

Further, by inserting the wiring cord 854 into the wiring guide portion 850d of the power supply board box 850, the wiring cord 854 folded back at the standing wall portion 850b can be moved toward the standing wall portion 850b, so that the wiring cord 854 can be moved from the standing wall portion 850b to the wiring cord 854. The wiring cord 854 can be folded back at the standing wall portion 850b, and then the wiring cord 854 can be immediately moved to the standing wall portion 850b side at the wiring guide portion 850d, so that a series of operations can be continuously performed. It can be done, and the work process related to assembly can be simplified.

The power supply board box 850 and the power supply board holder 840 are formed so that the dimensions in the front-rear direction when assembled with each other are substantially the same as the dimensions in the front-rear direction of the speaker box 820, and are formed on the board unit base 810. When attached, the rear surface of the power supply board box 850 and the rear surface of the speaker box 820 are substantially flush with each other.

Further, in this example, after connecting the connector terminal 855 to the power supply terminal 853 facing from the opening of the power supply board box 850 that covers the power supply board 851, the connector is connected by the vertical wall portion 850b protruding to the rear side from the rear end of the connector terminal 855. Since the wiring cord 854 extending from the rear end of the terminal 855 is folded back, the tension acting on the connector terminal 855 when the wiring cord 854 is pulled is applied to the power supply terminal whose connection is fixed by a locking claw or the like. It is possible to act in a direction that disconnects from the 853, it is possible to prevent the connector terminal 855 from being unable to be removed by the wiring cord 854, and the connector terminal 855 connected to the power supply terminal 853 of the power supply board 851 can be prevented. It is easy to remove the connector and maintenance such as replacement of the board can be easily performed.

Further, the wiring cord 854 is folded back by the vertical wall portion 850b of the power supply board box 850, and the bending condition of the wiring cord 854 can be loosened as compared with the case where the vertical wall portion 850b is not provided. It is possible to prevent an unreasonable force from acting on the 854 itself, and it is possible to prevent the wiring cord 854 from being disconnected due to the unreasonable force and causing a problem.

Further, the vertical wall portion 850b is provided in the vicinity of the opening of the power supply board box 850 facing the power supply terminal 853, and the vertical wall portion 850b is located adjacent to the power supply terminal 853, so that the vertical wall portion 850b is connected to the power supply terminal 853. It is possible to extend the wiring cord 854 extending from the connector terminal 855 to the rear side as straight as possible with respect to the connector terminal 855, and the joint between the connector terminal 855 and the wiring cord 854 is broken and impossible. It is possible to prevent an excessive force from acting, and it is possible to prevent a problem such as disconnection from occurring.

Further, since the power supply board box 850 that covers the power supply board 851 is provided with the vertical wall portion 850b, it is not necessary to provide the vertical wall portion 850b on the power supply board 851, and the assembly work of the power supply board 851 can be facilitated. .. Further, since the power supply board box 850 covers the power supply board 851, it is possible to prevent dust and dirt that cause problems from adhering to the power supply board 851, and it is mounted on the power supply board 851. It is possible to make it difficult to touch or replace electronic components (for example, resistors, capacitors, transistors, ICs, CPUs, memories, etc.), and to increase the defense against fraudulent activities. It has become.

Further, the direction in which the connector terminal 855 is connected to the power supply terminal 853 in the power supply board 851 is a direction substantially perpendicular to the board surface (front-back direction), and the connector terminal is connected to the power supply terminal 853 mounted on the power supply board 851. Since the force applied when connecting or disconnecting the 855 can be easily applied to the surface of the power supply board 851, it is possible to prevent the shearing force from acting on the lead portion of the power supply terminal 853, and the lead portion can be prevented. It is possible to prevent the power supply terminal 853 from being disconnected from the power supply board 851 and the power supply terminal 853 can be prevented from being broken to cause an energization failure, so that the pachinko machine 1 is less likely to cause a problem.

Further, since the connection between the connector terminal 855 and the power supply terminal 853 is fixed by the fixing means by the locking claw and the locking piece, the wiring cord 854 is folded back by the vertical wall portion 850b to connect the wiring cord 854. Even if a force acts on the connector terminal 855 in a direction that disconnects the power supply terminal 853, it is possible to prevent the connector terminal 855 and the power supply terminal 853 from being disconnected from each other. It is possible to reliably maintain the connection between the terminal 855 and the power supply terminal 853 and prevent problems such as poor contact and poor energization from occurring.

Further, since the wiring cord 854 in the standing wall portion 850b of the power supply board box 850 is provided with protrusions 850c protruding rearward at both ends of the rear end where the wiring cord 854 is folded back, the wiring cord 854 is folded back in the standing wall portion 850b. Even if it slides along the side, the protrusions 850c provided on both ends of the side can prevent the wiring cord 854 from sliding further outward, preventing the wiring cord 854 from coming off the standing wall portion 850b. It is possible to embody the pachinko machine 1 that can be prevented and surely achieves the above-mentioned action and effect.

Further, since the wiring guide portion 850d provided in the power supply board box 850 is used to bring the wiring cord 854 folded back at the standing wall portion 850b toward the standing wall portion 850b, it is difficult to remove the wiring cord 854 from the standing wall portion 850b. It is possible to ensure that the above-mentioned action and effect are exhibited, and after the wiring cord 854 is folded back at the standing wall portion 850b, the wiring cord 854 is immediately moved to the standing wall portion 850b side at the wiring guide portion 850d. It is possible to perform a series of operations continuously, simplify the work process related to assembly, and suppress an increase in cost.

Further, the payout control board box 860 in the board unit 800 has a horizontally long thin box-shaped box base 861 with an open rear and a thin box-shaped cover fitted into the box base 861 from the rear side and the front is open. It comprises an 862 and a payout control board 4110 (see FIG. 183) that is attached to the rear surface of the box base 861 and whose rear surface is covered by a cover 862. Further, the payout control board box 860 is provided with a plurality of separated cutting portions 863 formed on both the box base 861 and the cover 862 protruding outward from the left end of the rear view, and is provided at one location of the plurality of separated cutting portions 863. The box base 861 and the cover 862 are caulked and fixed. As a result, in order to separate the box base 861 and the cover 862, it cannot be separated unless the separation cutting portion 863 is cut, and when the payout control board box 860 is opened, the trace remains. .. Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the payout control board box 860 has been opened or closed illegally. In this example, the payout control board box 860 can be opened and closed only once for inspection and the like.

In the payout control board box 860, the error release switch 860a, the ball ejection switch 860b, the inspection output terminal 860c, etc. attached to the payout control board 4110 face rearward through the cover 862 (see FIG. 62). ). Further, in the payout control board box 860, terminals for various connections for connecting to the main control board 4100 and the like face rearward through the cover 862.

Further, the terminal board box 870 in the board unit 800 is attached to the rear surface of the speaker box 820, and has a board mounting portion 871a formed on the upper rear surface on the left side of the rear view and a board cover mounting portion 871b formed on the rear surface of the right end of the rear view. The board base 871 provided, the peripheral panel relay terminal board 872 mounted on the board mounting portion 871a of the board base 871 from the rear side and the peripheral panel relay terminal 872a mounted on the rear surface, and the board cover mounting portion 871b of the board base 871. A connection terminal plate cover 873, which is attached from the rear side and has an opening 873b extending in the vertical direction on the rear wall portion 873a, and a CR unit connection terminal 874a facing rearward from the opening 873a of the connection terminal plate cover 873 are attached to the rear surface. It includes a CR unit connection terminal plate 874 supported in the connection terminal plate cover 873, and a board box cover 875 that covers the rear side of the board base 871 together with the connection connection terminal board cover 873.

The peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 in the terminal board box 870 connects the pachinko machine 1 to the frequency display for displaying the operating status of the pachinko machine 1 provided on the island facility side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. The CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is for connecting the ball lending machine (also referred to as the CR unit 6) installed adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 and the pachinko machine 1. The board base 871 and the connection terminal cover 873 and the board box cover 875 of the terminal board box 870 are each made of a transparent synthetic resin, and the peripheral panel relay terminal board 872 and the CR unit connection terminal from the outside to the inside are formed. The board 874 and the like can be visually recognized. Further, on the rear surface of the board box cover 875, the content of the error code displayed on the frequency display, CR unit 6, etc. installed on the island equipment side when a problem such as ball clogging occurs in the pachinko machine 1 is displayed. The displayed status display sticker 876 is attached.

As shown in FIG. 88, the substrate base 871 in the terminal substrate box 870 has a substrate mounting portion 871a formed in a thin box shape having an open rear end. The board base 871 is formed on a fixing piece (not shown) formed on the inner upper portion of the board mounting portion 871a to fix the upper end of the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872, and is formed on the inner lower portion of the board mounting portion 871a to relay the peripheral panel. It is equipped with a locking claw 871c that locks the lower end of the terminal plate 872, and the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 can be detachably held from the rear side by the fixing piece and the locking claw 871c. ing.

Further, in the board base 871, the board cover mounting portion 871b is formed in a thin box shape open to the rear side, and the size of the inner circumference thereof is set so that the outer periphery of the connection terminal board cover 873 can be inserted. At the same time, the inner peripheral wall thereof is said to be an outer piece portion 871c extending in the front-rear direction. The board base 871 comes into contact with a pair of fixing holes 871d penetrating the outer piece portion 871c on the right side of the rear view in the left-right direction and the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 extending rearward from the bottom wall of the board cover mounting portion 871b. It is provided with two protrusions 871e extending in the vertical direction and a locking hole 871f arranged on the left outer side of the board cover mounting portion 871b in the rear view and penetrating in the front-rear direction. The protrusion 871e in the substrate base 871 has a state in which the amount of protrusion to the rear is slightly smaller than that of the outer piece portion 871c, and as shown in the figure, it is possible to reach both ends of the CR unit connection terminal board 874. It is arranged so that it is close to.

Further, the board base 871 is arranged vertically away from the rear surface on the right side of the rear view of the board cover mounting portion 871b, and has a pair of bearing portions 871 g for rotatably supporting the board box cover 875 and the left end of the rear view. It is provided with a square tubular locking portion 871h arranged on the rear surface in the vicinity of the portion and extending in the front-rear direction.

The connection terminal board cover 873 in the terminal board box 870 is an outer wall portion 873c that surrounds the outer periphery of the CR unit connection terminal board 872 and can be inserted into the board cover mounting portion 871b surrounded by the outer piece portion 871c of the board base 871. A rear wall portion 873a that closes the rear end of the outer wall portion 873c, a rectangular opening 873b that penetrates the rear wall portion 873a and extends in the vertical direction, and a rear wall portion substantially along the inner circumference of the opening 873b. The CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is held so that the inner wall portion 873d extending forward (on the board base 871 side) from 873a and the front end of the inner wall portion 873d abuts on the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, and the upper and lower outer wall portions are held. It is provided with a pair of claw-shaped substrate holding portions 873e formed in 873c.

Further, the connection terminal plate cover 873 is arranged at a position corresponding to a plurality of internal connection terminals 874b attached to the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, and has a plurality of openings 873f penetrating the rear wall portion 873a, and abbreviated in the vertical direction. A box-shaped protective portion 873 g that covers the rear side of the opening 873f arranged in the center and the left side of the rear view is open, and a substrate base 871 that extends outward (to the right) from the right end of the rear view of the outer wall portion 873c. A pair of fixing pieces 873h that can be inserted into the fixing hole 871d of the above, and an elastic claw-shaped engagement that is formed at the left end of the outer wall portion 873c and can be locked to the locking hole 871f of the substrate base 871. It is equipped with a claw piece 873i. Although not shown, an inner wall portion 873d extending forward is formed above and below the inner circumference of the central opening 873f provided with the protective portion 873g.

The connection terminal board cover 873 has a thin box shape with the front side open by the outer wall portion 873c and the rear wall portion 873a. Further, the connection terminal plate cover 873 can restrict the movement of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 to the rear by the front end of the inner wall portion 873d by inserting the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 into the inside from the opened front side. At the same time, the pair of board holding portions 873e can restrict the movement of the CR unit connection terminal board 874 forward, so that the CR unit connection terminal board 874 can be removably held. It has become. Further, the connection terminal board cover 873 has a substrate by inserting the fixing piece 873h into the fixing hole 871d of the substrate base 871 and then locking the locking claw piece 873i to the locking hole 871f of the substrate base 871. It can be detachably attached to the board cover attachment portion 871b of the base 871.

The CR unit connection terminal plate 874 in the terminal board box 870 is a CR unit connection terminal 874a for connecting the pachinko machine 1 and the CR unit 6 installed on the island equipment side of the game hall on the front surface side (rear surface side). In addition, a plurality of internal connection terminals 874b for connecting to the payout control board 4110, the ball rental unit 360, and the like are provided. In the CR unit connection terminal board 874 of this example, as shown in the figure, the CR unit connection terminal 874a is a D-sub connector having a locking function, and the internal connection terminal 874b is a square two-piece connector. There is.

Further, the board box cover 875 in the terminal board box 870 is formed in a thin box shape having a size that substantially covers the entire rear surface of the board base 871 and is entirely open to the front side, and is arranged on the right side surface of the rear view of the board base 871. A pair of shaft portions 875a rotatably supported by the bearing portion 871g, a through-hole 875b corresponding to the opening 873b in the connection terminal plate cover 873 and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and a through-hole 875b forward from both left and right ends. It is provided with an impact wall 875c extending to the surface and a locking piece 875d locked to the locking portion 871h of the substrate base 871.

The board box cover 875 can cover the rear surface of the board base 871 together with the connection terminal board cover 873 so as to be openable and closable by pivotally supporting the pair of shaft parts 875a to the bearing portion 871g of the board base 871. There is. Further, the board box cover 875 has a length such that the impact wall 875c on the side close to the shaft portion 875a (the side supported by the shaft) extends to the rear surface of the board base 871, and the impact wall on the side far from the shaft portion 875a. The length of 875c is set to extend to the rear surface of the connection terminal cover 873. That is, in the terminal board box 870 of this example, when the board box cover 875 is closed, the front ends of the respective impact walls 875c are substantially in contact with the rear surface of the board base 871 and the connection terminal board cover 873. It has become like.

In the terminal board box 870 of this example, since the CR unit connection terminal 874a of the CR unit connection terminal board 874 is a D-sub connector, as shown in FIG. 88, the CR unit is connected to the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal board 874. The main body of the connection terminal 874a is in a floating state, and the lead portion extending from the CR unit connection terminal 874a is exposed to the outside even on the rear surface side of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Further, the internal connection terminal 874b of the CR unit connection end plate 874 is a square two-piece connector, and is attached so as to be fitted and connected from the rear as shown in the figure.

As shown in FIG. 88, the terminal board box 870 of this example has the outer wall portion 873c of the connection terminal board cover 873 and the board base 871 in the direction along the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal board 874 in the assembled state. The protrusion 871e and the outer piece portion 871c of the above, and the outer wall portion 873c and the inner wall portion 873d of the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the shaft portion 875a of the board box cover 875 in the direction along the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Since the side impact wall 875c exists respectively, a barrier is constructed by multiple layers, and the cross-sectional shape of the boundary between the connection terminal board cover 873 and the board base 871 becomes a meandering crank shape. It has become. Therefore, for example, even if an unauthorized tool with excellent flexibility is inserted between the connection terminal board cover 873 and the board base 871 (boundary), the tool does not bend along the boundary and the CR unit connection terminal is used. Unauthorized tool intrusion from the direction along the surface of the plate 874 can be reliably prevented, and unauthorized activity against the CR unit connection terminal 874a provided in the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 can be reliably prevented. It has become.

Further, since the front end of the inner wall portion 873d of the connection terminal board cover 873 is in contact with the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, the terminal board box 870 is a CR unit mounted as a CR unit connection terminal 874a. Even if a D-sub connector in which a gap is formed with the connection terminal board 874 is used, the outer periphery of the lead portion exposed by the inner wall portion 873d can be covered, and fraudulent acts can be prevented. It has become like.

Further, the terminal board box 870 has a pair of shaft portions 875a on the shaft portion 875a side of the through port 875b facing the CR unit connection terminal 874a on the board box cover 875 rotatably supported on the rear surface of the board base 871. It is equipped with a striking wall 875c with a length that straddles between them, and the strength and rigidity of the board box cover 875 can be increased by the striking wall 875c. Even if an attempt is made to form a gap between the pair of shaft portions 875a, it is possible to prevent the board box cover 875 from being distorted and prevent the gap from being formed, making it difficult to perform fraudulent activity and providing deterrence. It can be expensive.

Further, in the terminal board box 870 of this example, the rear side of the internal connection terminal 874b near the center of the CR unit connection terminal board 874 is covered with the protection portion 873 g of the connection terminal board cover 873 and the board box cover 875. Therefore, with the connection terminal on the wiring cord side fitted and connected to the internal connection terminal 874b, which is a two-piece connector, insert a needle-shaped electrode through the gap between the connector body of the connection terminal and the wiring cord. Even so, the protective portion 873 g and the board box cover 875 can prevent the electrodes from being inserted, and can also prevent fraudulent acts on the internal connection terminal 874b.

As described above, according to this example, since the terminal board box 870 accommodating the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is mounted on the rear surface of the main body frame 3, the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 3 are mounted from the front side of the pachinko machine 1. Even if an illegal tool is inserted through a space or the like and the tip of the illegal tool is inserted into the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1, the terminal board box 870 protects the housed CR unit connection terminal plate 874. This makes it possible to reliably prevent fraudulent acts against the CR unit connection terminal board 874.

Further, in the state where the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is housed in the terminal board box 870, the outer wall portion 873c of the connection terminal board cover 873 and the board are in the direction along the front surface (back surface of the board) of the CR unit connection terminal board 874. The protrusion 871e and the outer piece portion and 871c of the base 871 are also connected to the outer wall portion 873c, the inner wall portion 873d, and the substrate of the connection terminal plate cover 873 in the direction along the rear surface (surface of the substrate) of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Since the impact wall 875c of the box cover 875 exists, a barrier is constructed by multiple layers, and the cross-sectional shape of the boundary between the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the board base 871 becomes a meandering crank shape. Even if you try to intrude an illegal tool with excellent flexibility between the connection terminal cover 873 and the board base 871 (boundary), the tool will not bend along the boundary and the CR unit connection terminal board It is possible to reliably prevent unauthorized tool intrusion from the direction along the surface of 874, and reliably prevent unauthorized activity against the CR unit connection terminal 874a and the internal connection terminal 874b provided in the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. It can be a pachinko machine 1 capable of capable.

Further, since the front end of the inner wall portion 873d of the connection terminal plate cover 873 is in contact with the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, each lead portion is exposed between the CR unit connection terminal 874a and the substrate. Even if the D-sub connector is used, the outer periphery of the lead portion exposed by the inner wall portion 873d can be covered, and fraudulent activity can be reliably prevented.

Further, one end of the terminal board box 870 is rotatably supported on the rear surface of the board base 871 to cover the rear surface of the connection terminal plate cover 873 so as to be openable and closable, and the opening 873b of the connection terminal plate cover 873. A board box cover 875 having a plate-shaped impact wall 875c extending forward from the side end of the shaft-supported side of the through hole 875b to the rear surface of the board base 871 is further provided. Even if a screwdriver or the like is inserted between the parts of the box cover 875 that are pivotally supported with respect to the board base 871 to form a gap and an illegal tool is inserted, the illegal tool is connected by the impact wall 875c. It is possible to prevent the plate cover 873 (CR unit connection terminal plate 874) from reaching the side, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts.

Further, in order to take out the CR unit connection terminal board 874 in the terminal board box 870, the board box cover 875 must be opened and then the connection terminal board cover 873 must be opened, which makes it difficult to take out the CR unit connection terminal board 874. It is possible to increase the deterrence against fraudulent activities. Further, since the strength and rigidity of the board box cover 875 can be increased by the impact wall 875c, even if a driver or the like is inserted between the board box cover 875 and the board base 871 to form a gap, the board box cover 875 is formed. It is possible to prevent the distortion from being formed and to prevent the formation of a gap, and it is possible to make it difficult to cheat and to have a high deterrent power.

Further, even if an attempt is made to insert a needle-shaped electrode through the gap between the connector body and the wiring cord at the terminal on the wiring cord side connected to the C internal connection terminal 874b of the CR unit connection terminal board 874, Since the rear side of the corresponding opening 873f, that is, the rear side of the opening of the gap along the wiring cord of the connector main body is covered with the protective portion 873 g and the board box cover 875, the outside of the terminal board box 870. It is not possible to insert a needle-shaped electrode from the (rear side) into the gap of the connector body, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts on the terminals of the connected wiring cord, and the security capability is high. Can be.

Further, since the outer wall portion 873c of the connection terminal plate cover 873 is provided with the substrate holding portion 873e for holding the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, and the outer wall portion 873c is extended to the front side of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Even if a driver or the like is inserted between the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the board base 871 to form a gap in order to perform fraudulent activity, the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 moves to the rear side together with the connection terminal plate cover 873. Therefore, the positional relationship between the front end of the outer wall portion 873c in the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 does not change, and the outer periphery of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is the outer wall portion 873c (connection terminal plate cover 873). The CR unit connection terminal plate 874 and the CR unit connection terminal 874a cannot be cheated on the CR unit connection terminal 874a on the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts aimed at such things.

Further, since the terminal board box 870 is made of transparent resin and the inside of the terminal board box 870 can be visually recognized from the outside, the inside of the terminal board box 870 can be visually recognized from the outside of the terminal board box 870 without disassembling the terminal board box 870. Is an illegal tool inserted in the CR unit connection terminal board 874 or peripheral panel relay terminal board 872 housed inside, or is the CR unit connection terminal board 874 etc. replaced with an illegal one? Alternatively, it is possible to easily check whether the electronic components (for example, ROM, IC, resistor, capacitor, etc.) mounted on the CR unit connection terminal board 874 or the like have been replaced with illegal ones. , It is possible to make it easier to detect fraudulent activities, and it is also easier to detect fraudulent activities. can.

Further, since the terminal board box 870 is attached to the back surface side of the main body frame 5 so that the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 or the like faces the rear side, the terminal board box 870 is attached to the outer frame 2 during maintenance or the like. When the main body frame 5 is rotated to the front side and the rear side of the main body frame 5 appears, the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 and the like housed in the terminal board box 870 are in a state of facing the worker side (player side), and the CR The unit connection terminal board 874 and the like and the terminal board box 870 can be easily inspected.

The main relay terminal board 880 and the peripheral relay terminal board 882 in the board unit 800 are the door frame together with the peripheral control unit 4140 provided in the game board 4 attached to the main body frame 3, the payout control board 4110 of the board unit 800, and the like. The purpose is to relay the connection with the handle device 500 provided in 5, each decorative board, the operation unit 400, and the like. The main relay terminal board 880 and the peripheral relay terminal board 882 are provided with a plurality of connection terminals for connecting to the main body frame 3 side and the door frame 5 side, and are formed on the front surface of the board unit base 810. By attaching to the attachment portion 813, these connection terminals face the front side from the front surface of the main body frame base 600.

As shown in FIGS. 61 and 63, the front side of the main relay terminal board 880 and the peripheral side relay terminal board 882 is covered with the relay terminal board cover 692 attached to the front surface of the main body frame base 600. At the same time, only the connection terminals for connecting to the door frame 5 side face the front side through the opening 692a of the relay terminal board cover 692, and the wiring cord 196 is connected to those connection terminals. (See FIGS. 1 and 30).

Further, the main relay terminal plate 880 has a ball lending button 361, a return button 362, a lending balance display unit 363, and a rotation position detection sensor of the handle device 500 of the ball lending unit 360 in the dish unit 300 arranged on the door frame 5 side. The purpose is to relay the connection between the full tank detection sensor 550 of the 512, the touch sensor 516, the launch stop switch 518, and the foul cover unit 540, and the payout control board 4110 arranged on the main body frame 3 side. Further, the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882 is attached to the decorative units 200, 240, 280 arranged on the door frame 5 side, the decorative boards 430, 432 provided in the dish unit 300 and the operation unit 400, and the operation unit 400. This is for relaying the connection between the dial drive motor 414 and the sensors 432a, 432b, 432c provided and the peripheral control unit 4140 of the game board 4 arranged on the main body frame 3 side.

[1-3G. Back cover]
Subsequently, the back cover 900 in the main body frame 3 will be described with reference to FIGS. 90 to 92. 90 (A) is a front perspective view of the back cover in the main body frame, and FIG. 90 (B) is a rear perspective view of the back cover in the main body frame. Further, FIG. 91 is an enlarged cross-sectional view showing a portion of the fastening mechanism in the back cover, and FIG. 92 is an exploded perspective view of the fastening mechanism in the back cover as viewed from the rear side by disassembling. The back cover 900 of this example is made of a transparent synthetic resin so that the inside of the main body frame 3 can be visually recognized from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1.

The back cover 900 in the main body frame 3 covers the rear side of the game board holding port 601 (the game board 4 attached to the main body frame 3) for holding the game board 4 in the main body frame 3 so as to be openable and closable. .. The back cover 900 is provided on a plate-shaped main body portion 902 that closes the rear opening of the game board holding port 601, a side portion 904 that extends forward from the right side of the main body portion 902 in front view, and a front end of the side portion 904. A plurality of shaft support pins 906 arranged side by side in the vertical direction and protruding downward to be pivotally supported by the back cover shaft support 623 of the main body frame base 600, and a prize ball formed on the upper and lower left sides of the main body 902 in front view, respectively. An engaging piece 908 that engages with the back cover engaging groove 718 of the base 710 and the back cover engaging groove 780a of the prize ball passage lid 780, and a back cover 900 in the vicinity of the lower engaging piece 908. It is provided with a fastening mechanism 920 for fastening to 3 so that it cannot be opened and closed.

As shown in FIGS. 91 and 92, the fastening mechanism 920 in the back cover 900 has a circular insertion hole penetrating in the front-rear direction on the left side in the rear view of the lower locking piece 908 in the main body portion 902 of the back cover 900. A vertically long rectangular locking port 922 that is arranged at a predetermined distance on the left side of the insertion hole 921 from the rear side and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a locking port that is elastically locked to the locking port 922 from the rear side. A plate-shaped guide member 923 having a piece 923a on one end side and a horizontally long elongated hole 923b corresponding to an insertion hole 921 on the other end side, and a plate-shaped guide member 923 inserted from the rear side into the elongated hole 923b of the guide member 923 to form a main body 902. A fastening member 924 having a male screw portion 924a screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b of the prize ball passage lid 780 via the insertion hole 921 and a guide member 923 are attached to the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 so as to sandwich the guide member 923. It includes a holding member 925 and. The guide member 923 in the fastening mechanism 920 is made of a soft synthetic resin and is easily bent.

Further, in the fastening mechanism 920, the locking piece 923a of the guide member 923 is locked to the locking port 922 of the main body portion 902 in a loosely fitted state, and the guide member 923 is within a predetermined range. It is possible to play with. Further, in the fastening mechanism 920, the fastening member 924 is supported by the guide member 923 through the elongated hole 923b by the disk-shaped holding member 925 attached to the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924, along the elongated hole 923b. It can slide in the left-right direction and does not fall out of the elongated hole 923b. When the locking piece 923a of the guide member 923 is locked to the locking port 922 of the main body 902 from the rear side, the fastening mechanism 920 is a fastening member 924 that protrudes to the front side through the elongated hole 923b of the guide member 923. The male screw portion 924a is in a state of being inserted into the insertion hole 921 of the main body portion 902.

The back cover 900 of this example can open and close the rear opening of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame 3 by pivotally supporting the shaft support pin 906 to the back cover shaft support portion 623 of the main body frame base 600. By engaging the engaging piece 908 with the back cover engaging grooves 718 and 780a of the main body frame base 600 and the prize ball passage lid 780, the engagement piece 908 can be brought into a closed state. When the back cover 900 is closed, the insertion hole 921 in the fastening mechanism 920 and the back cover fastening hole 780b of the prize ball passage lid 780 are in a substantially coincident state.

When the back cover 900 is closed, the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 inserted from the rear side to the front side into the insertion hole 921 is not naturally screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b, so that the back cover 900 is not screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b. Even when the cover 900 is closed, the tip of the male screw portion 924a is stopped at the rear end of the back cover fastening hole 780b, and the fastening member 924 protrudes rearward from the main body portion 902 of the back cover 900. By the way, in this example, since the fastening member 924 is supported in the elongated hole 923b of the locked guide member 923 of the main body portion 902 of the back cover 900, the fastening member 924 does not fall off from the back cover 900. The state of being located on the rear side of the main body 9002 is maintained.

Then, from this state, the tip of the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 is inserted into the back cover fastening hole 780b to rotate the fastening member 924, whereby the male screw portion 924a is screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b (screw). The back cover 900 can be fastened and fixed. In the fastening mechanism 920 of this example, when the fastening member 924 is screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b, even if the guide member 923 that supports the fastening member 924 is slanted with respect to the main body portion 902, the fastening member 924 is inserted. Since it is supported by the elongated hole 923b, the fastening member 924 (male threaded portion 924a) can be positioned straight with respect to the axis of the back cover fastening hole 780b, and the fastening member 924 can be satisfactorily placed in the back cover fastening hole 780b. It can be screwed in.

Further, in this example, since the back cover 900 is fastened and fixed to the main body frame 3 side by the fastening mechanism 920 at one place, it can be easily fastened or fastened only by operating the fastening member 924 at one place. It can be released, and the time and effort required to open and close the back cover 900 can be simplified and maintainability can be improved.

Further, the back cover 900 has a connection notch 910 cut out in a rectangular shape upward at the lower right end of the front view of the main body 902, and a confirmation opening that penetrates in a rectangular shape on the upper side of the front view of the connection notch 910. It is provided with a 912 and a confirmation notch 914 notched in a rectangular shape in the lower left corner of the front view of the main body 902.

As shown in FIG. 5, the back cover 900 is closed to the main body frame 3, and the RAM clear switch 4100c, the test terminal 4100f, etc. of the main control board box 1170 in the game board 4 are passed through the connection notch 910. Is designed to face the rear side. Further, in the back cover 900, the board management sticker 1178 (see FIG. 101) attached to the rear surface of the main control board box 1170 faces the rear side through the confirmation opening 912, and the back cover 900 is for confirmation. The sealing portion 1176 of the main control board box 1170 faces through the cutout portion 914. As a result, it is possible to check the operation, appearance, management status, and the like of the main control board box 1170 and the main control board 4100 without opening the back cover 900 with respect to the main body frame 3.

Further, the back cover 900 is formed with a plurality of slits 916 that are elongated and penetrated through the main body portion 902 and the side portions 904, and the heat generated in the game board 4 or the like through these slits 916 is transferred to the main body frame 3 (pachinko machine 1). It can be discharged to the outside of the rear side. As shown in the figure, a plurality of through holes 918, which are wide and long in the vertical direction and are arranged at predetermined intervals in the left-right direction, are provided at a position slightly to the left of the center when viewed from the front. These through holes 918 keep the back cover 900 closed with respect to the main body frame 3 and accommodate and hold the game board 4 in the main body frame 3 on the rear side of the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the game board 4. It is located behind the cooling fan for cooling the peripheral control unit 4140 and the liquid crystal control unit 4150 provided in the above, so that the heat from the peripheral control unit 4140 and the like can be satisfactorily exhausted. It has become. Incidentally, the width of the through hole 918 is set to be smaller than the outer diameter of the game ball, so that the game ball does not enter the pachinko machine 1 through the through hole 918.

As a result, in this example, the fastening member 924 for fastening the back cover 900 that closes the rear side of the game board 4 held by the main body frame 3 to the main body frame 3 is attached to the guide member 923 attached to the back cover 900. Since the game board 4 is held in a playable manner, when the back cover 900 is opened from the rear side of the main body frame 3 to perform maintenance or the like on the rear side of the game board 4 while the game board 4 is held in the main body frame 3. Even if the fastening member 924 that fastens and fixes the back cover 900 to the main body frame 3 is released and the fastening member 924 is separated from the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3, the fastening member 924 is the guide member 923. It is possible to prevent the fastening member 924 from being lost or left behind in the pachinko machine 1 by being held by the back cover 900 via the back cover 900, and the fastening member 924 is removed from the back cover 900. It can be a pachinko machine 1 capable of preventing it from falling off.

Further, as described above, since the fastening member 924 can be prevented from falling off from the opened back cover 900, it is not necessary to store the fastening member 924 that has been released from the fastening in a predetermined position at the time of maintenance or the like. , It can be held in the vicinity of the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900 via the guide member 923, and maintenance can be facilitated.

Further, since the elongated hole 923b of the guide member 923 extends at least to the side opposite to the locking port 922 side, even if the guide member 923 is in an inclined state with respect to the surface of the back cover 900. The male threaded portion 924a of the fastening member 923 can be positioned straight to the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3 through the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900, and the male threaded portion 924a can be securely positioned with respect to the back cover fastening hole 780b. Can be fastened to. Therefore, the back cover 900 can be properly fastened to the main body frame 3, and the crime prevention effect of the back cover 900 can be surely exhibited.

Further, since the holding member 925 that cooperates with the head of the fastening member 924 to hold the fastening member 924 freely with respect to the guide member 923 is attached to the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924, the fastening member 924 The guide member 923 is sandwiched between the head of the head and the holding member 925, and the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 can be reliably prevented from coming off from the elongated hole 923b of the guide member 923, and the holding member 925 can be reliably prevented. The fastening member 924 can be movably held by the guide member 923 by the gap between the two and the elongated hole 923b.

Further, an accommodating recess capable of accommodating the holding member is provided around the insertion hole 921 in the back cover 900, and the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 is passed through the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900 to cover the back cover 3 of the main body frame 3. When fastening to the fastening hole 780b, the holding member 925 sandwiching the guide member 923 with the head of the fastening member 924 can be accommodated in the accommodating recess, so that the back cover 900 and the guide member 923 are brought into close contact with each other. The protrusion from the back cover 900 can be reduced as much as possible, and the possibility that other members come into contact with the protruding portion of the guide member 923 or the fastening member 924 is reduced, and the occurrence of defects is reduced. You can do it and make it look good.

Further, since the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3 is used as a female threaded portion to be screw-coupled to the male threaded portion 924a of the fastening member 924, it can be fastened by simply pulling it as compared with the engagement by a simple locking claw. The back cover 900 can be made difficult to remove because the back cover 900 cannot be released, the crime prevention effect of the back cover 900 can be further enhanced, and the pachinko machine 1 having a high deterrent against fraudulent activities can be obtained.

Further, since the guide member 923 has flexibility and the guide member 923 can be bent, the degree of freedom of movement of the fastening member 924 with respect to the back cover 900 (insertion hole 921) can be further increased. It is easy to position the male threaded portion 924a of the fastening member 924 at a position straight with respect to the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3 and to move the male threaded portion 924 straight with respect to the back cover fastening hole 770b. The male screw portion 924a can be securely fastened to the back cover fastening hole 780b.

Further, the locking piece 923a of the guide member 923 is in contact with the locking port 923 along the inner wall extending in the direction perpendicular to the axis connecting the insertion hole 921 in the locking port 922 of the back cover 900. Since it is elastically locked to 922, the tip side (long hole 923b side) of the guide member 923 that is freely attached is a shaft that extends in a direction perpendicular to the axis connecting the insertion hole 921. It can be moved so as to rotate around the heart, and the locking piece 923a can be pivotally supported with respect to the locking port 922. Therefore, the fastening member 924 held in the elongated hole 923b on the tip end side of the guide member 923 can be rotated so as to open and close the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900, that is, the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3. Therefore, the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 can be easily inserted into the insertion hole 921 and the back cover fastening hole 780b, and the fastening work by the fastening member 924 can be facilitated.

Further, after further providing a plurality of back cover engaging grooves 718, 780a at positions different from the back cover engaging holes 780b in the main body frame 3, the back cover 900 is elastically engaged with the back cover engaging grooves 718, 780a, respectively. A plurality of engaging pieces 908 are further provided, and by engaging the engaging pieces 908 of the back cover 900 with the back cover engaging grooves 718 and 780a of the main body frame 3, the fastening by the fastening member 924 is achieved. Separately, since the back cover 900 can be fixed to the main body frame 3, the fastening work can be reduced as much as possible by using the fastening member 924 to fasten only one place, and the work such as assembly and maintenance can be performed. It can enhance the sex. Further, as described above, the back cover 900 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 by engaging the engaging piece 908 and the back cover engaging grooves 718 and 780a separately from the fastening member 924, so that the closing range is wide. Even with the back cover 900, the rear side (rear side of the game board 4) of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame 3 can be closed in a good state without increasing the number of fastening points by the fastening member 924.

Further, by pivotally supporting the shaft support pin 906 of the back cover 900 on the back cover shaft support portion 623 of the main body frame 3 (main body frame base 600), the back cover 900 can be rotatably supported with respect to the main body frame 3. Therefore, simply by rotating the back cover 900 in the closing direction to close the rear side of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame 3, the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900 and the back cover of the main body frame 3 are fastened. The hole 780b can be easily matched, and the fastening member 924 held by the back cover 900 through the insertion hole 921 can be easily fastened to the back cover fastening hole 780b. Further, since the back cover 900 is rotatably supported with respect to the main body frame 3, even when the fastening by the fastening member 924 is released and the back cover 900 is opened at the time of maintenance or the like, the back cover 900 is opened. The cover 900 can be left in a state of being pivotally supported by the main body frame 3, it is not necessary to remove the back cover 900 from the main body frame 3, and the time and effort required to open and close the back cover 900 can be simplified.

[1-3H. Side security board]
Next, the side security plate 950 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 66 and 67. As shown in the figure, the side security plate 950 in the main body frame 3 forms the left side surface of the main body frame 3 in the front view, and is attached to the main body frame base 600. The side security plate 950 includes a metal main body 952 that is extruded into a shallow U-shape in a plan view, and a mounting bracket 954 that is fixed vertically and vertically near the inner front end of the main body 952 and attached to the front surface of the main body frame base 600. , A positioning member 956 that is fixed to the inside of the main body 952 and engages with the positioning recess 1119 of the game board 4.

The main body 952 of the side security plate 950 extends in the vertical direction at substantially the same length as the height of the main body frame base 600, and has a substantially constant depth in the front-rear direction. The front end piece 952b extending in the direction, the middle piece 952c which is arranged so as to form a predetermined amount of gap on the rear side of the front end piece 952b and has a smaller protrusion amount than the front end piece 952b, and the front end from the rear end of the side plate piece 952a. It is provided with a rear end piece 952d extending longer than the front end piece 952b in the viewing right direction (see FIG. 106). The main body 952 is formed in a shallow U shape by a side plate piece 952a, a front end piece 952b, and a rear end piece 952d, and is formed between the middle piece 952c and the rear end piece 952d with a front component 1110 in the game board 4. The left side portion of the front view with the game panel 1150 is inserted (see FIG. 106).

In the side security plate 950 of this example, the mounting bracket 954 is attached to the front surface of the main body frame base 600, and the rear end piece 952d of the main body 952 is attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 600. In this side security plate 950, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the front end piece 952b of the main body 952 is the shaft support side of the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 in the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame 5. It is designed to be inserted into the U-shape of the character-shaped projecting piece 166, and prevents a tool for performing fraudulent acts from being inserted between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 on the left side of the front view. (See FIG. 106). Further, the main body 952 of the side security plate 950 is made of an extruded metal (for example, aluminum alloy), and the front end piece 952b, the middle piece 952c, and the middle piece 952c arranged in the direction perpendicular to the surface of the side plate piece 952a, and the side plate piece 952a. Since the rear end piece 952d is provided, the strength and rigidity of the side security plate 950 are increased, and the strength of the main body frame 3 as a whole can be increased so that the game board 4 and the door frame 5 can be well supported. It has become.

As described above, according to this example, assuming that the front surface of the main body frame 3 is closed by the door frame 5, the door frame 5 is located between the front end piece 952b and the middle piece 952c formed inside the front end of the security side plate 950. The rear piece of the shaft support side U-shaped protrusion 166 formed in a substantially U shape of the reinforcing unit 150 in the above is inserted (invaded), and the front end piece 952b is inserted into the shaft support side U shape. Since the door frame 5 is forcibly opened with respect to the main body frame 3, the U-shaped protrusion 166 on the shaft support side of the door frame 5 is attached to the front end piece 952b of the main body frame 3. It is possible to prevent the U-shaped projecting piece 166 on the shaft support side of the door frame 5 from moving in the direction away from the main body frame 3 in contact with the door frame 5, and prevent the closed door frame 5 from being scooped out. It is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 capable of preventing fraudulent acts such as opening the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3.

Further, since the security side plate 950 formed of metal in the main body frame 3 and the reinforcing unit 150 formed of metal in the door frame 5 are fitted to each other, between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5. The strength and rigidity of the machine are increased, the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 can be made less likely to be distorted by an unauthorized tool, and the crime prevention performance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved. Further, since the main body frame base 600 that supports the game board 4 is formed of synthetic resin, and the security side plate 950 on the side that supports the door frame 5 (shaft support side) is formed of metal. Compared with the case where the entire main body frame 3 is made of metal, the cost related to the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

Further, the door frame hook portion 1041 of the lock device 1000 that locks the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 is engaged with the hook cover 165 of the reinforcing unit 150 in the door frame 5 at one place between the upper and lower ends and the upper and lower ends. Since the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 on the lock device 1000 side (open side) are locked by three door frame hook portions 1041 so as to be stopped, the open side is illegal such as a bar. It is possible to satisfactorily prevent the space between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 from widening even if the door frame 5 is scooped out by a simple tool, and it is possible to prevent the door frame 5 from being forcibly scooped out.

Further, the rear end of the side piece 952a in the crime prevention side plate 950 is extended rearward from the front surface (game area 1100) of the game board 4, and the dimension of the side piece 952a in the front-rear direction becomes longer. Since the bending rigidity against the load applied in the front-rear direction becomes stronger, the strength and rigidity of the entire security side plate 950 can be further increased, and the security side plate 950 can be prevented from being forcibly bent and cheating. ..

Further, since the security side plate 950 of the main body frame 3 is formed by the metal extruded mold material, the security side plate 950 (main body 952) having a predetermined cross-sectional shape having the front end piece 952b and the middle piece 952c can be easily formed. It can be formed, and even if the security performance of the pachinko machine 1 is improved, it is possible to suppress an increase in cost, and at the same time, defects such as a decrease in strength that occurs during processing are found as compared with the case where a metal plate is bent. The number can be reduced as much as possible, and the security side plate 950 having high durability and strength can be obtained.

[1-3I. Locking device]
Subsequently, the lock device 1000 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 93 to 97. FIG. 93 (A) is a left side view of the lock device in the main body frame, and FIG. 93 (B) is a perspective view of the lock device in the main body frame as viewed from the front. Further, FIG. 94A is a rear perspective view of the locking device, and FIG. 94B is a sliding rod for a glass door and a sliding rod for a main body frame slidably provided inside the U-shaped substrate of the locking device. Is a rear perspective view showing, (C) is a front perspective view of (B). Further, FIG. 95 is an exploded perspective view of the locking device disassembled and viewed later, and FIG. 96 is an explanatory view showing the operation of the sliding rod for the glass door and the sliding rod for the main body frame in the locking device. FIG. 97 is an explanatory diagram showing the operation of the fraud prevention member in the locking device.

The lock device 1000 in the main body frame 3 is attached from the substantially upper end to the lower end of the main body frame 3 along the outer side surface of the peripheral wall portion 605 of the main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 3 on the open side, and is as shown in FIG. 68. In addition, a door hook hole 620 formed in the upper part of the front right side (open side) side of the front end frame portion 602 in the main body frame base 600, a lock locking hole 621 formed in the lower part, and a peripheral wall in the main body frame base 600. It is designed to be attached to a plurality of lock attachment portions 625 formed on the right side surface of the front view of the portion 605.

As shown in FIGS. 93 to 95, the lock device 1000 is for a U-shaped substrate 1001 as a lock substrate formed in a U-shaped cross section and a door frame slidably provided in the U-shaped substrate 1001. The sliding rod 1040, the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame slidably provided in the U-shaped base 1001, and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame are U-shaped so as not to be illegally slid. It includes fraud prevention members 1023 and 1032 attached to the lower part of the substrate 1001.

The U-shaped substrate 1001 in the locking device 1000 is formed by bending a predetermined metal plate so as to have a U-shaped cross section, and inside the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame. And are slidably arranged. The U-shaped substrate 1001 is extremely thin as compared with the conventional locking device in which the width dimension is integrated on the substrate molded into an L-shaped cross section. As a result, the left-right dimension of the lock device 1000 can be made as thin as possible, and the left-right dimension of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame 3 can be relatively increased, and the game area can be further increased. It is possible to provide a wide game board 4 of 1100.

The U-shaped substrate 1001 is attached so that the open side having a U-shaped cross section faces the back surface of the main body frame base 600, and when the locking device 1000 is attached to the main body frame 3, the U-shaped substrate 1001 is attached. The open side of the substrate 1001 is closed to the main body frame base 600. As a result, the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame arranged inside the U-shaped substrate 1001 are attached to the U-shaped substrate 1001 except for the hook portions 1041, 1054, 1065, respectively. It is completely covered and has a fraud prevention structure that makes it difficult to cheat on the lock device 1000 from the outside.

Further, the U-shaped substrate 1001 in the lock device 1000 has a rectangular shape through which the hook portions 1054, 1065 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame can penetrate above and below the closed side (front side) opposite to the open side (rear side). The hook penetration opening 1002, the screw fixing portion 1003 projecting outward in the upper and middle of the side surface 1001b (see FIG. 95) in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 of the main body frame base 600 on the front side, and the screw fixing portion. The upper end and the middle portion of the open side (front side) of the side surface 1001a (see FIG. 95) opposite to the side surface 1001b on which the 1003 is projected, and the lower end portions of the open side side surfaces 1001a and 1001b project forward. It is provided with a locking projection 1004 and the like.

The screw fixing portion 1003 and the locking protrusion 1004 of the U-shaped base 1001 are for attaching the locking device 1000 to the back surface of the main body frame base 600, and the locking protrusion 1004 is attached to the door hook hole 620 of the main body frame base 600. And when it is inserted into the lock locking hole 621 from the rear side and then moved upward, the screw fixing portion 1003 and the lock mounting portion 625 of the main body frame base 600 are aligned with each other. By screwing a screw (not shown) to the lock mounting portion 625, the lock device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the main body frame base 600 (main body frame 3).

The lock device 1000 is attached by screws not only to the upper and middle screw fixing portions 1003, but also to the screw fixing portion 1003 formed on the lock mounting piece 1008 described later and the upper vicinity of the cylinder lock through hole 611. The lock mounting portion 625 is fastened to the main body frame base 600 with a screw (not shown), and the lower part of the lock device 1000 can also be mounted.

Further, when the lock device 1000 is attached, the locking projections 1004 formed at the upper, middle and lower parts of the open side (front side) of the U-shaped substrate 1001 are provided with the hook hole 620 for the door and the lock locking hole in the upper part. The lock device 1000 is mounted on the main body frame base 600 with an extremely simple structure because the structure is such that the screw fixing portion 1003 of the U-shaped base 1001 is fixed to the lock mounting portion 625 with screws while being inserted into 621 for positioning and locking. It can be firmly fixed to (main body frame 3).

In other words, even when the lock device 1000 is integrated on the U-shaped substrate 1001 having an extremely thin width dimension, the lock device 1000 is firmly attached to the main body frame 3 by locking and fixing the front side and the rear side of the lock device 1000. It can be fixed to. In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, the locking projection 1004 constituting the locking structure (which may be a fixed structure) on the front side is projected onto the side surface 1001a which does not contact the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped substrate 1001. Since the screw fixing portion 1003 constituting the fixing structure on the rear side protrudes from the side surface 1001b close to the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped substrate 1001 toward the peripheral wall portion 605, the locking structure on the front side is the peripheral wall portion 605. The lock device 1000 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 so as not to cause rattling, as compared with the case where the side surface 1001b is closely formed.

Further, the U-shaped substrate 1001 is provided with insertion holes 1005 penetrating in the left-right direction at the upper, middle, and lower portions of both side surfaces 1001a and 1001b, and the U-shaped substrate 1001 is provided with a sliding rod 1040 for a door frame and a sliding rod 1040. By inserting the rivet 1006 into the insertion hole 1005 and crimping it with the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame stored, the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame are inside the U-shaped base 1001. Can be slidably attached in the vertical direction.

That is, as shown in FIG. 94 (C), the rivet 1006 penetrates through the upper end portion of the rivet slot 1042 formed at the upper, middle, and lower parts of the door frame sliding rod 1040, and FIG. 94. As shown in (B), the rivet 1006 penetrates through the lower end portion of the rivet slot 1055, 1061 formed one by one in the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame. The sliding rivet 1040 for the door frame can be moved upward, and the sliding rivet 1050 for the main body frame can be moved downward.

Further, the U-shaped substrate 1001 projects laterally from the front end of the fraud prevention notch 1007 formed on the closed side surface of the lower portion thereof and the side surface 1001b in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 of the main body frame base 600 on the open side. A lock mounting piece 1008 for mounting the cylinder lock 1010, an insertion vertical opening 1020, a spring locking piece 1021 and an escape horizontal hole 1022 are formed on the side surface 1001b in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605, respectively. The fraud prevention cutout portion 1007 of the U-shaped substrate 1001 will be described in detail later, but the stopper piece portion 1027 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 is adapted to advance and retreat. Further, the lock mounting piece 1008 of the U-shaped base 1001 is located on the side surface 1001b so as to be located below the lower end side of the game board holding port 601 in a state where the locking device 1000 is mounted on the back surface of the main body frame base 600. It is projected from the front end toward the side, and the lock insertion hole 1009 through which the cylinder lock 1010 penetrates and the mounting hole 1013 formed in the lock mounting board 1011 of the cylinder lock 1010 are mounted at two places above and below for mounting with the screw 1012. A mounting hole 1014 drilled in the above and a screw fixing portion 1003 drilled to mount the lower portion of the locking device 1000 on the back surface of the main body frame 3 are formed.

Further, the U-shaped substrate 1001 has an insertion vertical opening 1020 in which the first engaging project piece 1017 and the second engaging project piece 1018 of the engaging cam 1016 fixed to the cylinder lock 1010 enter when the cylinder lock 1010 rotates. A spring locking piece 1021 for locking the spring 1035 that urges the second fraud prevention member 1032 upward, and an escape side hole 1022 that forms an escape hole so as not to interfere with the movement of the connecting pin 1034. It is equipped with.

The cylinder lock 1010 in the lock device 1000 is attached to the lock attachment piece 1008 in the U-shaped substrate 1001. In this cylinder lock 1010, a lock mounting board 1011 for mounting to the lock mounting piece 1008 is fixed to the rear end of the cylindrical cylinder lock body, and a lock shaft 1015 of the cylinder lock body extends from the rear surface of the lock mounting board 1011. At the same time, the engaging cam 1016 is fixed to the rear end of the lock shaft 1015 by a screw 1019. The engaging cam 1016 is formed in a boomeran shape, and one end side thereof is a first engaging projecting piece 1017 that engages with the descending engaging hole 1062 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame when rotating. The end side is a second engaging protrusion 1018 that engages with the rising engaging hole 1045 of the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame when rotating.

In this cylinder lock 1010, the cylindrical cylinder lock main body portion is inserted into the lock insertion hole 1009 formed in the lock mounting piece 1008 from the rear side, and then the mounting holes 1013 formed in the upper and lower two places of the lock mounting board 1011. The cylinder lock 1010 can be fixed to the U-shaped base 1001 by screwing the screw 1012 into the mounting hole 1014 of the lock mounting piece 1008.

The fraud prevention member 1023, 1032 attached to the U-shaped base 1001 of the lock device 1000 does not rotate the cylinder lock 1010 with a formal key, but illegally uses a piano wire, a wire, or the like to illegally slide the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame. This is to prevent the lowering of the. As shown in FIG. 95, the fraud prevention members 1023 and 1032 have a structure in which the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 are connected by a connecting pin 1034. The first fraud prevention member 1023 has a vertically long plate shape and is swingably supported by the U-shaped substrate 1001 around the swing shaft hole 1025 at the upper end. Specifically, the first fraud prevention member 1023 is the most together with the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame arranged inside the U-shaped base 1001 through the swing shaft hole 1025. It is attached by a lower insertion hole 1005 and a rivet 1006.

Further, the first fraud prevention member 1023 is vertically elongated at a position overlapping the insertion vertical opening 1020 of the U-shaped base 1001 on its plate-shaped surface, and the second engagement projecting piece 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 can be inserted. It is provided with a protruding piece insertion hole 1026. The door frame sliding rod 1040 provided inside the U-shaped base 1001 by the second engaging project piece 1018 of the engaging cam 1016 penetrating the projecting piece insertion hole 1026 and the insertion vertical opening 1020. The ascending engaging hole 1045 and the second engaging projecting piece 1018 are engaged with each other. Further, the first fraud prevention member 1023 is inclined diagonally above the front diagonally upper side of the projecting piece insertion hole 1026 so as to be able to come into contact with the rear surface side of the first engaging projecting piece 1017 when the engaging cam 1016 is rotated. The inclined portion 1024 is provided, and the inclined portion 1024 comes into contact with the first engaging protrusion piece 1017 when the engaging cam 1016 is rotated, so that the first fraud prevention member 1023 is centered on the swing shaft hole 1025. It swings (in the clockwise direction in FIG. 97 (B)).

Further, the first fraud prevention member 1023 further includes a stopper piece portion 1027 protruding toward the U-shaped substrate 1001 side from the diagonally rearward and lower outer side of the projecting piece insertion hole 1026, and a position where the stopper piece portion 1027 protrudes. It is provided with a regulating projecting piece 1031 projecting downward, and a pin hole 1029 and a connecting hole 1030 penetrating in the left-right direction and arranged vertically on the front side of the regulating projecting piece 1031. The stopper piece portion 1027 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 is intruded into and engaged with the fraud prevention notch 1007 and the engagement notch 1066 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 when the main body frame sliding rod 1050 is locked. Therefore, the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame can be prevented from sliding illegally. Further, the regulation projecting piece 1031 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 comes into contact with the second fraud prevention member 1032 urged upward by the spring 1035, so that the second fraud prevention member 1032 moves upward (in the urging direction). It is possible to regulate the movement.

Further, in the pin hole 1029 of the first fraud prevention member 1023, the guide pin 1028 is inserted and fixed from the back surface side of the first fraud prevention member 1023, and the guide pin 1028 fixed to the pin hole 1029 is inserted and fixed. By engaging with the horizontally long opening formed at the lowermost end of the insertion vertical opening 1020 in the U-shaped base 1001, the first fraud prevention member 1023 is guided along the side surface 1001b of the U-shaped base 1001. Can be done. Further, the connecting hole 1030 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 is for rotatably connecting the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 by the connecting pin 1034.

On the other hand, the second fraud prevention member 1032 connected to the first fraud prevention member 1023 is formed of an inverted "" -shaped plate material, and has a connecting hole 1033 at one upper end thereof and a spring locking hole 1036 at the other end. And are bored respectively, and a contact portion 1037 is provided at the lower end portion. The second fraud prevention member 1032 can be rotatably connected to the first fraud prevention member 1023 by inserting the connecting pin 1034 after aligning the connecting hole 1033 with the connecting hole 1030 of the first fraud prevention member 1023. You can do it. Further, the second fraud prevention member 1032 engages the spring locking hole 1036 with the lower end (the other end) of the spring 1035 whose upper end (one end) is locked to the spring locking piece 1021 of the U-shaped substrate 1001. As a result, it is urged upward by the spring 1035. Further, in the second fraud prevention member 1032, the contact portion 1037 comes into contact with the closing plate 25 fixed to the inner lower portion of the outer frame 2 when the main body frame 3 is closed.

Next, the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame in the lock device 1000 is slidably supported inside the U-shaped substrate 1001 and is formed by a vertically long metal plate-shaped member. The door sliding rod 1040 is provided with a door frame hook portion 1041 projecting forward at three locations on the upper, middle, and lower sides of the vertical side thereof. The door frame hook portion 1041 of the door sliding rod 1040 protrudes forward from the open side of the U-shaped base 1001 with the door sliding rod 1040 housed in the U-shaped base 1001. When the lock device 1000 is fixed to the back surface of the main body frame base 600, the door frame 5 protrudes forward from the door hook hole 620 (see FIGS. 63 and 68) formed in the main body frame base 600. It can be locked to the hook cover 165 (see FIG. 18) formed on the back surface of the door. As shown in the figure, the door frame hook portion 1041 has a downward engaging claw shape, whereby the door frame sliding rod 1040 is raised to raise the door frame hook portion 1041 and the hook cover. The locked state with 165 can be released.

Further, the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame is formed in the center of the upper, middle and lower side surfaces of the vertically long rivet slot 1042 into which the rivet 1006 is inserted, and below the uppermost rivet slot 1042 and for the door frame. The lowermost end of the sliding rod 1040 is provided with a guide protrusion 1043 projecting in a direction perpendicular to the surface of the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame. In the rivet slot 1042 of the door sliding rod 1040, the rivet 1006 to be inserted into the insertion hole 1005 of the U-shaped base 1001 is inserted, and the rivet 1006 is inserted into the door frame sliding rod. It is formed vertically so as not to interfere with the ascending motion of 1040. In the normal state, the rivet 1006 penetrating the upper end of the rivet slot 1042 is in contact with the upper end. Further, in the door frame sliding rod 1040, the guide protrusion 1043 is inserted into the projecting piece moving holes 1056, 1064 formed in the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050. It is possible to guide the mutual sliding operation between the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame.

Further, the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame is formed with a spring hook portion 1046 that locks one end of the spring 1048 at the upper end portion. The other end of the spring 1048 locked to the spring hook portion 1046 is locked to the spring hook portion 1057 of the upper hook member 1051 in the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame, and is slid for the door frame by the spring 1048. The rod 1040 is urged downward and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame is urged to each other in the upward direction. Further, the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame includes a contact elastic piece 1047 formed in a convex shape in the middle in the vertical direction, and is punched out from one side surface of the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame by press molding. It is formed in a convex shape. The contact elastic piece 1047 abuts on the inner side surface of the U-shaped substrate 1001, and it is possible to prevent the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame from rattling inside the U-shaped substrate 1001. It has become like.

Further, the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame is provided with a vertically long play hole 1044 and a rising engagement hole 1045 on the side surface of the lower portion. The play hole 1044 is the tip of the first engaging projectile 1017 so as not to interfere with the rotational operation of the engaging cam 1016 when the first engaging projectile 1017 of the engaging cam 1016 is inserted and rotated. The part constitutes a movable space. Further, in the ascending engagement hole 1045, when the second engaging project piece 1018 of the engaging cam 1016 is inserted and rotated, the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame is raised by the rotational operation of the engaging cam 1016. Is for engaging with. The sliding rod 1040 for the door frame is provided with an escape notch 1049 which is notched larger in the vertical direction than the fraud prevention notch 1007 at the rear of the lower part of the vertical side. In this escape cutout portion 1049, the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame is in the way so that the stopper piece portion 1027 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 is surely engaged with the fraud prevention cutout portion 1007 and the engagement cutout portion 1066. The relevant part is cut out so that it does not become.

On the other hand, the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame includes an upper hook member 1051 made of a metal plate, a lower hook member 1052 made of a metal plate, and a connecting wire rod 1052 connecting the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052. It is equipped with. That is, the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame is not composed of one vertically elongated plate made of metal as in the conventional case, but the upper hook member 1051 having the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the lower hook member 1052 are made of metal. The plate material is formed by pressing, and the metal upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 are connected by a thin metal connecting wire rod 1053. As a result, the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame can be efficiently stored in the narrow space of the U-shaped substrate 1001.

The upper hook member 1051 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame has a hook portion 1054 formed at the upper end portion toward the rear and a rivet elongated hole 1055 penetrating the plate surface portion adjacent to the hook portion 1054 in the left-right direction. , A projecting piece moving hole 1056 penetrating to the lower side of the rivet slot 1055 in the left-right direction, a spring hook portion 1057 formed at the lower end of the vertical side in front of the projecting piece moving hole 1056, and a lower side of the spring hook portion 1057. It is provided with a connecting hole 1058 formed in the upper hook member 1051 and a contact portion 1059 formed on the upper side and the lower side of the upper hook member 1051. Further, the hook portion 1054 of the upper hook member 1051 penetrates the hook penetration opening 1002 above the U-shaped substrate 1001 and engages with the closing plate 24 provided on the inner upper portion of the outer frame 2 on the open side. The locking claws are formed upward.

Further, the rivet slot 1055 of the upper hook member 1051 is arranged at a position corresponding to the rivet slot 1042 formed in the upper part of the door frame sliding rod 1040, and is arranged in the rivet slot 1055. In the normal state in which the rivet 1006 penetrates, the rivet 1006 penetrates the lowermost end of the rivet slot 1055, and the upper hook member 1051 can move downward. The projecting piece moving hole 1056 of the upper hook member 1051 is adapted to insert the guide projecting piece 1043 above the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame, and the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod for the main body frame. It is possible to guide the mutual movement with the 1050.

Further, the other end of the spring 1048 is locked to the spring hook portion 1057 of the upper hook member 1051. Further, the connecting hole 1058 of the upper hook member 1051 is inserted by bending the upper end of the connecting wire rod 1053. Further, the contact portion 1059 of the upper hook member 1051 abuts on the inner side wall of the U-shaped base 1001 when it is housed in the U-shaped base 1001, and in the sliding operation of the upper hook member 1051. There is no rattling and it can slide smoothly.

On the other hand, the lower hook member 1052 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame is for the hook portion 1065 projecting rearward from the lower end portion and for the rivet penetrating in the left-right direction near the upper end of the plate surface portion of the lower hook member 1052. A slot 1061, a descending engagement hole 1062 located below the rivet slot 1061, a play hole 1063 extending downward from the lower rear side of the drop engagement hole 1062, and a play hole 1063 below. A projecting piece moving hole 1064 formed near the lower end, a connecting hole 1060 formed in the front end side of the upper end of the vertical side of the lower hook member 1052, and a engagement formed in the lower part of the rear vertical side of the lower hook member 1052. It includes a joint notch 1066 and a contact portion 1067 formed on the upper and lower sides of the lower hook member 1052.

The hook portion 1065 of the lower hook member 1052 penetrates the lower hook penetration opening 1002 of the U-shaped substrate 1001 and engages with the closing plate 25 formed in the lower portion of the outer frame 2 on the open side. The locking claws are formed upward. Further, the rivet slot 1061 of the lower hook member 1052 is formed at a position corresponding to the rivet slot 1042 formed in the lower part of the door frame sliding rod 1040, and the rivet slot 1061 is formed in the rivet slot 1061. In the normal state in which the 1006 is penetrated, the rivet 1006 is in a state of penetrating the lowermost end portion of the rivet slot 1061. As a result, the lower hook member 1052 can move downward.

Further, when the first engaging project piece 1017 of the engaging cam 1016 is inserted and rotated in the lower hook member 1052, the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame is lowered by the rotation operation. It is for engaging in such a way. Further, the play hole 1063 of the lower hook member 1052 is a second engaging protrusion 1018 so as not to interfere with the rotation operation when the second engaging protrusion 1018 of the engaging cam 1016 is inserted and rotated. The tip of the can form a movable space. Further, in the projecting piece moving hole 1064 of the lower hook member 1052, the guide projecting piece 1043 below the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame is inserted, and the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod for the main body frame are inserted. It is possible to guide the mutual movement with the moving rod 1050.

Further, in the connecting hole 1060 of the lower hook member 1052, the bent lower end of the connecting wire rod 1053 is inserted. Further, the contact portion 1067 of the lower hook member 1052 abuts on the inner side wall of the U-shaped base 1001 when it is housed in the U-shaped base 1001, and is lower than the U-shaped base 1001. When the hook member 1052 slides, it can be slid smoothly without rattling.

Next, the assembly of the lock device 1000 of the present embodiment will be described. In order to assemble this lock device 1000, the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame are connected by the connecting wire rod 1053, and the guide protrusion of the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame is in that state. The piece 1043 is inserted into the projecting piece moving holes 1056, 1064 of the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052, and the mutual rivet slot 1042 and the rivet slot 1055, 1061 are aligned and overlapped, and the pieces are overlapped. In the combined state, the hook portion 1054 of the upper hook member 1051 and the hook portion 1065 of the lower hook member 1052 are passed through the hook penetration opening 1002 of the U-shaped base 1001 while the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the slide for the main body frame. After inserting the moving rod 1050 into the U-shaped space of the U-shaped base 1001, the rivet 1006 is inserted through the insertion hole 1005.

When inserting the rivet 1006, the rivet 1006 is inserted so as to penetrate the rivet slot 1055, 1061 and 1042. When inserting the rivet 1006 at the lowermost end, it is necessary to insert the rivet 1006 into the swing shaft hole 1025 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 and simultaneously attach the first fraud prevention member 1023 to the U-shaped substrate 1001. Further, before attaching the first fraud prevention member 1023 to the U-shaped base 1001, the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 are connected by the connecting pin 1034, and the guide pin 1028 is connected to the pin hole. After fixing to 1029 with a screw (not shown), it is necessary to further insert the guide pin 1028 into the lowermost opening of the insertion vertical opening 1020.

Further, with the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame stored and fixed in the U-shaped base 1001 by the rivet 1006, the spring 1048 is hung between the spring hook portions 1046, 1057, and the door is opened. The frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are urged in opposite directions, and the spring 1035 is passed over the spring locking piece 1021 and the spring locking hole 1036 to prevent the second fraud. It is assumed that the member 1032 is in contact with the regulation protrusion 1031. After that, the cylindrical main body portion of the cylinder lock 1010 is inserted into the lock insertion hole 1009 of the lock mounting piece 1008, and the cylinder lock 1010 is fixed to the mounting hole 1014 with a screw 1012. At this time, the tip of the first engaging protrusion 1017 of the engaging cam 1016 is slightly inserted into the insertion vertical opening 1020 on the outside of the inclined portion 1024, and the second engaging protrusion of the engaging cam 1016 is inserted. The cylinder lock 1010 is attached to the lock mounting piece 1008 so that the tip portion of the piece 1018 is slightly inserted into the projecting piece insertion hole 1026 and the insertion vertical opening 1020 of the first fraud prevention member 1023.

In order to attach the assembled lock device 1000 to the back surface of the main body frame base 600 in this way, the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted into the door hook hole 620 formed in the main body frame base 600. While inserting, the locking protrusion 1004 protruding into a hook shape is inserted into the door hook hole 620 and the lock locking hole 621 of the main body frame base 600 and moved upward, and in that state, the screw fixing portion 1003 protruding in the horizontal direction is inserted. The lock device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the back surface of the main body frame base 600 by matching the lock mounting portion 625 and screwing a screw (not shown) into the matched hole. In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, the locking projection 1004 constituting the locking structure of the front portion is formed so as to project from the side surface 1001a which does not contact the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped substrate 1001, while the rear portion is fixed. Since the screw fixing portion 1003 constituting the structure is formed so as to project horizontally from the side surface 1001b in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped substrate 1001, the locking structure in the front portion is in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605. Compared with the case where the side surface 1001b is formed, the lock device 1000 can be fixed to the main body frame base 600 so as not to cause rattling.

Next, the operation of the lock device 1000 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 96 and 97. As shown in FIG. 96, when the main body frame base 600 (main body frame 3) is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 and the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. 96 (A). The closing plates 24 and 25 of the outer frame 2 and the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame are engaged with each other, and the hook portions 1041 for the door frame and the door frame 5 of the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame are engaged. The hook cover 165 is engaged with the hook cover 165. In that state, when a key (not shown) is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 and the first engaging project piece 1017 of the engaging cam 1016 rotates in the direction of entering the insertion vertical opening 1020, as shown in FIG. 96 (B). The tip of the first engaging protrusion 1017 engages with the descending engaging hole 1062 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame, pushes the lower hook member 1052 downward against the urging force of the spring 1048, and connects to the lower hook member 1052. The connecting wire rod 1053 and the upper hook member 1051 are also pushed down and lowered. As a result, the locked state between the closing plates 24 and 25 of the outer frame 2 and the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame is released, and the main body frame 3 is pulled to the front side to remove the main body frame 3. It can be opened to the frame 2.

When the main body frame 3 is closed, the hook portions 1054 and 1065 are in a raised state due to the urging force of the spring 1048 (the same raised position as shown in FIG. 96A), but the hook portion 1054. , 1065 Since the upper side is inclined downward toward the outside, by forcibly pressing the main body frame 3 against the outer frame 2, the upper side inclined portion of the hook portions 1054 and 1065 is formed on the closing plates 24 and 25. Since it comes into contact with the lower end, the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame descends downward, and the upward claws of the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the closing plates 24 and 25 are locked again and slide for the main body frame. The 杆 1050 rises and returns to the locked state.

On the other hand, when a key (not shown) is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 and the second engaging project piece 1018 of the engaging cam 1016 rotates in the direction of entering the insertion vertical opening 1020, as shown in FIG. 96 (C), the second engaging project piece 1018 is rotated. (Ii) The tip of the engaging protrusion 1018 engages with the rising engaging hole 1045 of the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame, and pushes up the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame upward against the urging force of the spring 1048. Therefore, the hook cover 165 of the door frame 5 and the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 are released from the locked state. Therefore, the door frame 5 is pulled toward the front side by pulling the door frame 5 toward the front side. It can be opened to the main body frame 3.

When the door frame 5 is closed, the door frame hook portion 1041 is lowered by the urging force of the spring 1048 (the same lowered position as shown in FIG. 96A), but the door frame is closed. Since the lower side of the hook portion 1041 is inclined upward toward the outside, by forcibly pressing the door frame 5 against the main body frame 3, the lower side inclined portion of the door frame hook portion 1041 is inclined to the hook cover 165. The sliding door 1040 for the door frame rises upward in contact with the upper end portion of the door frame, and the downward claw portion of the hook portion 1041 for the door frame and the hook cover 165 are locked again to slide the door frame. The door 1040 descends and returns to the locked state. The sliding rod 1040 for the door frame in the present embodiment is formed to have substantially the same length as the total length of the U-shaped base 1001, and the U-shaped base 1001 is substantially the same as the vertical side surface of the main body frame 3. The door frame hook portion 1041 which is attached over the entire length and is a locking portion with the door frame 5 is formed at three positions of the upper end portion, the center portion, and the lower end portion of the door frame sliding rod 1040. Therefore, it is possible to securely lock the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 in the entire length in the vertical direction, and forcibly open the space between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 and insert an illegal tool such as a piano wire between them. It is not possible to perform an act.

As described above, the lock device 1000 of the door frame 3 of the present embodiment unlocks the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 by rotating the key inserted in the cylinder lock 1010 in one direction, and in the other direction. By rotating, the lock of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 can be released. Further, the lock device 1000 of this example performs a fraudulent act such as hooking a piano wire or the like on the hook portions 1054, 1065 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame and lowering the hook portion 1054, 1065 without inserting the key into the cylinder lock 1010. Can not be done. The first structure for preventing such fraud is a lock mechanism composed of a first fraud prevention member 1023 and a second fraud prevention member 1032, and the second fraud prevention structure is a U-shaped substrate 1001. The structure is such that the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame are housed in the closed space.

First, the operation of the lock mechanism, which is the first fraud prevention structure, will be described with reference to FIG. 97. First, in a state where the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 3 are closed, as shown in FIG. 97 (A), the closing plate 25 of the outer frame 2 and the contact portion 1037 of the second fraud prevention member 1032 come into contact with each other. It is in a state of being. In this state, the first fraud prevention member 1023 rotates counterclockwise due to the urging force of the spring 1035, the stopper piece 1027 penetrates into the fraud prevention notch 1007, and the stopper piece 1027 is the fraud prevention notch. It is in a state of being engaged with the engagement notch 1066 formed in the lower hook member 1052 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame at the position corresponding to 1007. As a result, even if a piano wire or the like is hooked on the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame and an attempt is made to pull it down, the stopper piece portion 1027 and the engaging notch portion 1066 are engaged with each other. It is impossible to illegally pull it down (unlock), and it is not possible to perform an illegal act of opening the main body frame 3.

On the other hand, when the key is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 to normally unlock the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. 97 (B), the key is rotated to cause the first engagement protrusion of the engagement cam 1016. The piece 1017 is rotated so as to enter the insertion vertical opening 1020. When the first engagement protrusion 1017 is rotated, the inclined portion 1024 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the side surface of the first engagement protrusion 1017 come into contact with each other, so that the first fraud prevention member 1023 has a swing shaft hole. The rotation starts in the clockwise rotation direction shown around 1025, and the stopper piece portion 1027 also moves so as to retract from the fraud prevention notch portion 1007. As a result, the engagement between the stopper piece portion 1027 and the engagement notch portion 1066 is released. At this time, the second fraud prevention member 1032 is in a position where the spring 1035 is extended and the contact portion 1037 is retracted. In this state, when the engaging cam 1016 is further rotated to rotate the first engaging projectile piece 1017, the tip of the first engaging project piece 1017 engages with the descending engaging hole 1062 of the lower hook member 1052. Since the entire sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame is lowered, the locked state between the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the closing plates 24 and 25 of the outer frame 2 is released, and the main body frame 3 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2. You can do it.

When the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the second fraud prevention member 1032 is in contact with the regulation projecting piece 1031. Therefore, the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1023 are in contact with each other. The positional relationship with 1032 is substantially the same as the state shown in FIG. 97 (A). When the main body frame 3 is closed in this state, the closing plate 25 of the outer frame 2 and the contact portion 1037 of the second fraud prevention member 1032 come into contact with each other from the front, and finally the state shown in FIG. 97 (A) is obtained. As a result, the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 do not get in the way when the main body frame 3 is closed. Further, in the present embodiment, the main body prevents the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 from illegally performing only the lowering operation of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame. If the sliding rod 1050 for the frame is opened illegally, the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame can be easily opened manually after opening, and it is practically difficult to perform fraudulent acts of raising the sliding rod with a piano wire or the like. For this reason, it is devised so that unauthorized operation of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame cannot be performed.

Further, even with the lock mechanism which is the first fraud prevention structure described above, it is impossible to disable the function of the lock mechanism by swinging the first fraud prevention member 1023 with a piano wire or the like. No. Therefore, assuming that the lock function of the lock mechanism is disabled by an illegal act, in the present embodiment, in the state where the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame 3 (main body frame base 600), it is inside. The sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame provided in the above are completely covered by being housed in the closed space of the U-shaped substrate 1001 except for the hook portions 1041, 1054, 1065, respectively. Since it is in a state, even if a piano wire or the like is inserted to pull down the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame provided inside the closed space of the U-shaped base 1001, both side surfaces 1001a, 1001b of the U-shaped base 1001 This prevents fraudulent equipment from entering the closed space, making it impossible to easily commit fraudulent activities.

As described above, the lock device 1000 of the present embodiment has the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame inside the U-shaped base 1001 whose width dimension is extremely thin as compared with the lock device whose width dimension is concentrated on the conventional L-shaped base. The position where the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame is slidably provided and the cylinder lock 1010 for operating the lock device 1000 is attached to the U-shaped base 1001 is set to a position below the lower end side of the game board 4. Therefore, even if the size of the game board 4 in the left-right direction and the vertical direction is made extremely large and the space surrounded by the side walls 540 to 543 of the main body frame 3 is made large, the lock device 1000 is placed on the back side of the main body frame 3. Can be firmly attached.

Further, since the U-shaped open side of the U-shaped base 1001 is attached so as to face the back surface of the main body frame 3, the locking device 1000 is attached to the main body frame 3 (main body frame base 600) inside. The sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame arranged in the above are completely covered with the U-shaped substrate 1001 except for the hook portions 1041, 1050, and 1065, respectively. It is not possible to easily perform fraudulent acts such as pulling down the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame provided inside by inserting a piano wire or the like.

Further, when the lock device 1000 is attached, the locking protrusions 1004 formed at the upper, middle and lower parts of the open side (front portion) of the U-shaped substrate 1001 are inserted into the door hook hole 620 and the lock locking hole 621. It is extremely simple because it has a structure in which the screw fixing portions 1003 formed at the upper, middle and lower parts of the closed side (rear portion) of the U-shaped substrate 1001 are fixed to the lock mounting portion 625 with screws. The lock device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the main body frame 3 (main body frame base 600) with such a structure.

In the lock device 1000 of this example, the screw fixing portion 1003 formed on the lock mounting piece 1008 as a structure for screwing the lower portion of the U-shaped base 1001 and the vicinity of the upper portion of the cylinder lock through hole 611 of the main body frame 3 The structure is shown in which the formed lock mounting portion 625 is screwed into the structure. Instead, the screw 1012 for mounting the cylinder lock 1010 to the lock mounting piece 1008 is used, and the tip of the screw 1012 is locked. A lock mounting hole screwed through the piece 1008 may be formed above and below the cylinder lock through hole 611. Further, even if the lower portion of the U-shaped substrate 1001 is not screwed, the lock device 1000 can be attached to the main body frame 3 (main body frame) only by fixing the screw fixing portion 1003 and the lock attachment portion 625 at the rear portion of the lock device 1000. It can be sufficiently firmly fixed to the back surface of the base 600).

Further, in the lock device 1000 of this example, the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame are completely covered with the U-shaped substrate 1001 having the left and right side surfaces 1001a and 1001b. For example, the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame are slidably attached to the side surface 1001a on the opposite side not in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 with a rivet or the like, and the side surface 1001b in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 is omitted. An L-shaped substrate (lock substrate) is used, and a sliding rod for a door frame 1040 and a sliding rod for a main body frame are formed in a closed space formed by a side surface 1001a of the L-shaped substrate (lock substrate) and a first side wall 540. It may have a structure for accommodating the 1050, and can have the same effect as the lock device 1000 described above.

As described above, according to the main body frame 3 of this example, the transparent prize ball base 710 having the peripheral wall portion 710a extending rearward (in the front-rear direction) behind the main body frame base 600 and the upper side of the prize ball base 710. The prize ball tank 720 for storing the game balls supplied from the island facility side of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed and the game balls discharged from the prize ball tank 720 are aligned and the rear wall portion 710b of the prize ball base. The transparent tank rail unit 730 attached to the rear side and the game ball released from the tank rail unit 730 are paid out to the upper plate 301 of the door frame 5 based on a predetermined payout instruction, and the rear wall portion 710b of the prize ball base 710 is paid out. It has a partially transparent prize ball device 740 attached to the rear side and a side portion 904 extending to the rear end of the main body frame base 600, and the rear surface is substantially the same as the rear surface of the tank rail unit 730 and the prize ball device 740. Since it is provided with a transparent back cover 900 arranged in a plane shape, the rear side and the rear side of the game board 4 held in the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame base 600 through the prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, etc. The pachinko machine 1 is capable of visually recognizing the side surface and easily inspecting (visually inspecting) the rear side of the game board 4 without opening the back cover 900 that covers the rear side of the game board 4. be able to.

Further, since not only the rear side (rear surface) of the game board 4 but also the rear side surface of the game board 4 can be visually recognized through the transparent prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, etc., the game board holding port of the main body frame base 600 can be visually recognized. When the game board 4 is attached / detached to 601 from the front side, even if tools such as a screwdriver or pliers, a waste cloth for cleaning, dust, dust, etc. remain between the game board 4 and the back cover 900, they should be removed from the outside. It can be easily found from, and it is possible to prevent some trouble from occurring due to the residue.

Further, as described above, since the rear surface and the rear side surface of the game board 4 can be visually recognized from the outside, an illegal device, a tool, or the like for performing an illegal act is attached to the rear side or the side surface of the game board 4. Even if it is, it can be easily found, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts, and it is possible to easily find a fraudulent device or the like attached to the game board 4 from the outside. It is possible to hesitate to install an illegal device or the like, and it is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 having a high deterrent against fraudulent acts.

Further, since the rear side of the game board 4 is covered with the prize ball base 710 and the back cover 900, other members in the island facility where the game machine 4 is installed may come into contact with the game board 4 or the game board 4 may be covered. It is possible to prevent foreign matter such as dust and dirt from adhering to the rear side, and it is possible to maintain the game board 4 in a good state and suppress the occurrence of problems.

Further, the rear surface of the prize ball tank 720 is set to a position about twice as deep as the depth D of the main body frame base 600 with respect to the depth D of the main body frame base 600, that is, the depth D of the main body frame base 600. Is about half the depth of the main body frame 3, so that the rear side and the rear side surface of the game board 4 can be more easily seen through the prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, etc. be able to. Further, since the depth D of the main body frame base 600 is about half the depth of the main body frame 3, the height when the main body frame base 600 is turned down can be made as low as possible to form a flat shape. It is possible to facilitate the mounting work of attaching the prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, the tank rail unit 730, the prize ball device 740, etc. to the rear side of the main body frame base 600.

Further, the rear surface (main body portion 902) of the transparent back cover 900 is substantially flush with the rear surface of the prize ball tank 720, the tank rail unit 730, the prize ball device 740, etc. attached to the prize ball base 710. Therefore, the rear surface of the pachinko machine 1 can be made a substantially flat surface, and by eliminating the protrusions to the rear, it can be caught or contacted with other members in the island equipment to be installed. It can be prevented to prevent problems from occurring. Further, since the rear surface of the pachinko machine 1 is substantially flat, it is possible to use a cushioning material having a simple shape when transporting the pachinko machine 1, and it is possible to increase the accumulation efficiency (storage efficiency) of the pachinko machine. The cost related to the machine 1 can be reduced.

Further, the back cover 900 is provided with a plurality of slits 916 and through holes 918 so that the rear side and the rear side surface of the game board 4 can be directly visually recognized through the slits 916 and the like. The rear side of 4 and the like can be made easier to see, and the above-mentioned effects can be reliably achieved. Further, even if the rear side of the game board 4 held by the main body frame base 600 is covered with the back cover 900, the heat from the game board 4 can be released to the outside through the slit 916 or the like of the back cover 900. , It is possible to prevent the heat accumulated from the game board 4, and it is possible to prevent the heat from causing instability in the control of the game and the deformation of members such as synthetic resin. be able to. Further, since the slit 916 and the through hole 918 of the back cover 900 are of a size that the game ball cannot pass through, for example, even if the game ball spills on the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 in the island facility, it is passed through the slit 916 or the like. It is possible to prevent the game ball from invading the pachinko machine 1, and it is possible to prevent a problem from occurring due to the invasion of the game ball.

[1-4. Basic configuration of the game board]
Next, the basic configuration of the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 98 to 105. FIG. 98 is a front view showing a game board attached to the main body frame with the door frame of the pachinko machine removed. Further, FIG. 99 is a front view of the game board, FIG. 100 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 101 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled and viewed from the rear. It is a figure. Further, FIG. 102 is an enlarged front view showing a function display unit in a game board in a state of being attached to a pachinko machine. Further, FIG. 103 is an exploded perspective view of a game board using a game panel of an embodiment different from the example of FIG. 100 and the like, and is viewed from the front. FIG. 104 is a game in which FIG. 103 is viewed from the rear. It is an exploded perspective view of a board. Further, FIG. 105 is a cross-sectional view of the game panel in the game board of FIG. 103 cut in the vertical direction.

As shown in the figure, the game board 4 of the present embodiment has a front configuration in which the outer periphery of the game area 1100 in which the game ball is driven by the player operating the handle device 500 is divided and the outer shape is substantially rectangular in the front. A member 1110, a plate-shaped game panel 1150 arranged behind the front component 1110 and partitioning the rear end of the game area 1100, a board holder 1160 arranged at the lower rear side of the game panel 1150, and a board holder 1160. A predetermined main control board box 1170 that houses a main control board 4100 that is attached to the rear surface and controls a game content that is performed by driving a game ball into the game area 1100, and a predetermined control signal from the main control board 4100. It is equipped with a function display unit 1180 that can display the game status and is visually attached to the player side at a predetermined position of the front component 1110. The game board 4 includes a front unit 2000 mounted on the front surface of the game panel 1150 and a back unit 3000 mounted on the rear surface of the game panel 1150, although not shown in FIGS. 98 to 105 and the details will be described later. Further provided (see FIGS. 108 to 113 and the like).

The game board 4 of the present embodiment has a basic configuration formed by a front component 1110, a game panel 1150, a board holder 1160, a main control board box 1170, and a function display unit 1180, and is attached to the game panel 1150. The front unit 2000, the back unit 3000, and the main control board 4100 housed in the main control board box 1170 form a detailed configuration that characterizes the pachinko machine 1 (game board 4). Here, the basic configuration of the game board 4 will be described, and the detailed configuration will be described later.

[1-4A. Front component]
Subsequently, the front component 1110 in the game board 4 will be described. The front component 1110 in the game board 4 of this example has a substantially rectangular outer shape that can be inserted into the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3, and the inner shape penetrates in a substantially circular shape in the front-rear direction. The outer circumference of the game area 1100 is divided by the inner circumference of the inner shape. The front component 1111 has an outer rail 1111 extending in an arc shape from the lower end to the left from the center in the left-right direction in a front view along the circumferential direction in the clockwise direction, passing through the upper end in the center in the left-right direction in the front view, and extending to the upper right diagonally. The inner rail 1112, which is arranged inside the outer rail 1111 substantially along the outer rail 1111 and extends in an arc shape from the lower center in the left-right direction of the front view to the diagonally upper left side of the front view, and the inner rail 1112 so as to be smoothly continuous from the lower end of the inner rail 1112. The inner peripheral rail 1113 extending in an arc shape to a position below the end (upper end) of the outer rail 1111 along the circumferential direction counterclockwise when viewed from the front, and the end (upper end) and outer rail 1111 of the inner peripheral rail 1113. At the boundary between the abutment portion 1114 where the game ball that has been rolled along the outer rail 1111 and the end (upper end) of the inner rail 1111 can come into contact with the abutment portion 1114, and the boundary portion between the inner rail 1112 and the inner peripheral rail 1113, the game area 1100 From the upper end of the inner rail 1112 so as to close between the out port guide surface 1115 arranged at the lowermost end and lowered toward the rear and the outer rail 1111 rotatably supported by the upper end of the inner rail 1112. It is rotatable only between the closed position extending upward and the open position that rotates in the clockwise direction and opens between the outer rail 1111 and returns to the closed position side. It includes a backflow prevention member 1116, which is urged by a spring (not shown).

Assuming that the game board 4 is attached to the main body frame 3 of the front component 1110, as shown in FIG. 98 and the like, the lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 launches the ball of the main body frame 3. It is located on an extension of the launch rail 660 in the device 650. A space extending in the left-right direction and downward is formed between the lower end of the outer rail 1111 and the upper end of the launch rail 660, and the game ball launched along the launch rail 660 of the hit ball launcher 650 is formed. The space is jumped over, and the lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 is driven into the space between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112. The game ball driven between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 rolls upward along the outer rail 1111 according to the momentum, and the backflow prevention member 1116 pivotally supported at the upper end of the inner rail 1112. By rotating to the open position side against the urging force, it is possible to enter the game area 1100.

Further, when the game ball is strongly hit by the hit ball launching device 650, the game ball rolled along the outer rail 1111 in the game area 1100 abuts on the abutment portion 1114 provided at the end of the outer rail 1111. When the game ball comes into contact with the abutment portion 1114, the rolling direction of the game ball can be forcibly changed, and the game ball continuously rolls from the outer rail 1111 to the inner rail 1113. It is designed to prevent it from moving. Even if the game ball that has entered (dried) into the game area 1100 tries to return between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112, the backflow prevention member 1116 returns to the closed position by the urging force before that. As a result, the backflow prevention member 1116 prevents the backflow of the game ball.

Further, if the game ball driven into the game area 1100 is not accepted by the start ports 2101, 1022 or the winning ports 2103, 2104, 2201 of the table unit 2000 described later, it flows down to the lower end of the game area 1100. Then, it is guided to the out port 1151 of the game panel 1150 by the out port guide surface 1115 at the boundary between the inner rail 1112 and the inner peripheral rail 1113, and is discharged from the out port 1151 to the rear lower side of the game board 4. ing.

On the other hand, when the game ball launched from the hit ball launching device 650 cannot enter the game area 1100 beyond the backflow prevention member 1116 at the tip of the inner rail 1112, the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 are used. Rolling downward in the opposite direction, the foul space 626 formed between the upper end of the launch rail 660 and the lower end of the outer rail 1111 is formed from the lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112. It will fall, and will be received by the foul ball inlet 542e of the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 located at the lower part of the foul space 626, and will be discharged to the lower plate 302 in the dish unit 300.

A metal plate is attached to the surface of the outer rail 1111 of the front component 1110 to improve the wear resistance due to the rolling of the game ball, and the game ball rolls smoothly. ing. Further, the impact portion 1114 has an elastic body such as rubber or synthetic resin arranged on the surface thereof, and even if the game ball vigorously rolls along the outer rail 1111 and collides with the abutment portion 1114, the impact is alleviated. It is also possible to repel the game ball inward.

Further, the front component 1110 has a wall-shaped security protrusion 1117 protruding from the lower outer side of the outer rail 1111 toward the front, and a substantially center in the vertical direction from the lower side of the out port guide surface 1115 along the inner peripheral rail 1113. It is provided with a groove-shaped rail security groove 1118 that is recessed by a predetermined amount from the front end of the extension. The security protrusion 1117 in the front component 1110 overlaps with the security rear end projecting piece 183 of the security cover 180 in the door frame 5 in the vertical direction when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3. As a result, even if an illegal tool such as a piano wire is intruded from between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 on the shaft support side (left side when viewed from the front), the illegal tool can reach the inside of the game area 1100. Can not be done.

Further, in the front component 1110 of this example, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the security rear projection piece 182 of the security cover 180 in the door frame 5 is inserted into the rail security groove 1118. The crime prevention post-protrusion piece 182 is inserted between the inner rail 1112 and the outer rail 1111 so as to be substantially in contact with the outer surface (the side opposite to the game area 1100) of the inner rail 1112. Even in the inner rail 1112, the rail crime prevention groove 1118, and the crime prevention post-protrusion piece 182, an illegal tool such as a piano wire intruded from between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 reaches the game area 1100. Can be prevented.

Further, the front component 1110 is vertically separated from the left end of the front view and is vertically separated from the pair of positioning recesses 1119 which are recessed from the front to the rear and opened to the left end. A pair of game board stoppers 1120 arranged in a straight line, and a fixed recess 1121 arranged on the left side of the outer rail 1111 on the left side of the front view and opened downward, and the upper side is formed in an arc shape and recessed from the front side, and the front view. A notch 1122 for a ball passage, which is notched in a rectangular shape extending upward from the lower end in the left-right direction, is provided near the left end of the lower end. The positioning recess 1119 of the front component 1110 is fitted with the positioning member 956 attached to the inside of the side security plate 950 in the main body frame 3, so that the left end of the game board 4 inserted into the game board holding port 601 is viewed from the front. However, it is possible to regulate the movement in the front-back direction. Further, the game board stopper 1120 can be detachably locked to the game board locking portion 608 of the main body frame base 600 in the main body frame 3, and the game board stopper 1120 can be engaged with the game board. By locking to the locking portion 608, it is possible to restrict the right end of the game board 4 inserted into the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3 from moving in the front-rear direction. ..

Further, in the fixing recess 1121 of the front component 1110, with the game board 4 inserted into the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3, the game board fixing tool 690 axially supported on the front surface of the main body frame 3 is viewed from the front. When rotated in the clockwise direction, the fixing piece 690a of the game board fixture 690 is inserted, and the game board fixture 690 restricts the lower end of the game board 4 from moving forward. It has become like. Further, in the ball passage notch 1122 of the front component 1110, a similar ball passage notch 1152 is formed at the same position of the game panel 1150, and the game board 4 is used as the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3. In the state of being inserted into, the front end of the full tank branch unit 770 is inserted into the notch portion 1122, 1152 for the ball passage.

Further, the front component 1110 has a horizontally long through hole 1123 penetrating in the front-rear direction near the right end in the front view at the lower end portion, and a thickness in the front-rear direction from the center in the left-right direction to the left side in the front view on the lower side of the through hole 1123. It is provided with a fastening portion 1124 having a thin shape, and a certificate stamp attaching portion 1125 arranged on the left side of the through hole 1123 in the front view and for attaching a certificate stamp for confirmation of certification. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the fastening portion 1124 in the front component 1110 has a predetermined fastening band for the fastening hole formed in the conventional main body frame when the game board is attached to the conventional main body frame. By wrapping them around each other and fastening them together, it is possible to make it difficult to remove the game board 4, and it is possible to prevent unauthorized removal of the game board 4.

Further, in the front component 1110, the display unit 1181 of the function display unit 1180, which will be described later, is arranged on the outside of the rail security groove 1118 along the inner peripheral rail 1113 and at the lower right of the front view. Further, the front component 1110 includes a plurality of mounting bosses 1126 projecting rearward from the left and right ends of the lower portion of the rear surface, and a plurality of positioning projections 1127 projecting rearward from the rear surface of the inner rail 1112. The mounting boss 1126 penetrates the game panel 1150 and engages with the fixed boss 1162 of the board holder 1160, and a predetermined screw is screwed from the rear side of the board holder 1160 to the mounting boss 1126 through the fixed boss 1162. By wearing it, the game panel 1150 can be sandwiched between the front component 1110 and the board holder 1160. Further, the positioning protrusion 1127 is fitted into the inner rail fixing hole 1155 formed in the game panel 1150 so that the inner rail 1112 can be fixed at a predetermined position of the game panel 1150.

[1-4B. Game panel]
Subsequently, the game panel 1150 in the game board 4 will be described. The game panel 1150 of this example is formed of a wood board material such as veneer plywood having a predetermined thickness (for example, 18 mm to 21 mm), and has a substantially the same outer shape as the outer shape of the front component 1110. The game panel 1150 has an out port 1151 that penetrates in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the out-port guidance surface 1115 in the front component 1110 at the lower part in the substantially center in the left-right direction in the front view, and is horizontally elongated in the front-rear direction on the left side in the front view at the lower end. The ball passage notch 1152 having the same shape as the ball passage notch 1122 of the front component 1110 and the rear protrusion of the function display unit 1180 that penetrates the lower right corner of the front view in the front-rear direction. It includes an insertion hole 1153 into which 1182 is inserted.

Further, in the game panel 1150, a plurality of boss insertion holes 1154 penetrating in the front-rear direction at positions corresponding to the mounting boss 1126 of the front component member 1110 near the left and right ends of the lower portion, and a positioning protrusion 1127 of the front component member 1110 are inserted and fixed. A plurality of inner rail fixing holes 1155 and a groove-shaped out ball discharge groove 1156 having a predetermined amount of recessing from the rear surface to the front on the rear surface side of the out port 1151 and opening downward on the lower end side (see FIG. 101). And 1157, which is formed at a position corresponding to the game board stopper 1120 of the front component member 1110 and is cut out so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction from the right end of the front view. Further, the game panel 1150 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes for mounting and fixing to the rear surface of the front constituent member 1110 at appropriate positions.

The game panel 1150 in the game board 4 of this example can partition the rear end of the game area 1100 whose outer periphery is divided by the front component 1110, and although not shown, the game panel 1100 on the front surface and the game area 1100. Within the corresponding range, a plurality of obstacle nails are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement, and the table unit 2000 is attached. Further, a back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1150. Further, the game panel 1150 is formed so that the out port 1151 is located at the lowermost end of the game area 1100, and is formed at the lowermost end of the game area 1100 in the front component 1110 in the state of being assembled on the game board 4. The game ball guided backward by the out-port guide surface 1115 enters the out-port 1151 and is discharged to the rear side of the game board 4.

[1-4C. Board holder]
Next, the board holder 1160 in the game board 4 will be described. The substrate holder 1160 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with the upper side and the front side open. The substrate holder 1160 is formed with an out-ball discharge portion 1161 formed so as to penetrate in the vertical direction at the front end of the bottom wall portion at substantially the center in the left-right direction of the front view, and the upper surface of the bottom wall portion is an out-ball. The game balls are formed so as to be lowered toward the discharge portion 1161, and the game balls discharged from the out port 1151 of the game panel 1150, the front unit and the back unit, and supplied (discharged) to the upper surface of the bottom of the board holder 1160 are provided. It is designed to be discharged downward from the out ball discharging unit 1161. When the game board 4 is attached to the main body frame 3, the out-ball discharge unit 1161 is located directly above the discharge ball receiving part 841 of the board unit 800 in the main body frame 3. All the game balls discharged from the pachinko machine 1 are discharged to the rear lower side of the pachinko machine 1 through the discharge passage 842 of the board unit 800.

Further, the substrate holder 1160 includes a plurality of fixed bosses 1162 protruding forward from the front ends of the upper and lower ends of the side wall portion. The plurality of fixed bosses 1162 have their tips inserted into the boss insertion holes 1154 from the rear side of the game panel 11520 and are fitted to the rear ends of the mounting boss 1126 of the front component 1110 for mounting. In the state of being fitted with the boss 1126, the board holder 1160 is screwed to the mounting boss 1126 from the rear side of the board holder 1160 through the inside of the fixed boss 1162 to attach the board holder 1160 to the front component 1110. In addition to being able to be assembled, the game panel 1150 can be sandwiched between the front component 1110 and the board holder 1160.

Further, as shown in FIG. 101, the substrate holder 1160 has a fixing portion 1163 and a fixing portion 1163 in which the fixing piece 1174 of the main control board box 1170 can be fitted from the side to the left end portion of the rear surface of the rear wall portion when viewed from the rear surface. The elastic fixing piece 1175 of the main control board box 1170, which is arranged so as to face the 1163, is provided with a locking portion 1164 which can be locked from the rear. The fixing portion 1163 and the locking portion 1164 of the substrate holder 1160 allow the main control board box 1170 to be detachably supported on the rear surface of the substrate holder 1160.

[1-4D. Main control board box]
Subsequently, the main control board box 1170 in the game board 4 will be described. The main control board box 1170 has a thin horizontal box-shaped board base 1171 with an open rear side and a thin horizontal box-shaped board base 1171 that covers the rear surface of the board base 1171 and has an open front side, and is fitted into the inside of the board base 1171 from the rear side. It includes a matching board cover 1172 and a main control board 4100 in which electronic components, terminals, and the like are mounted on the rear side of the front end of the board cover 1171. Further, the main control board box 1170 extends outward from the rear view left end portion of the board base 1171 and extends outward from the fixing piece 1174 that fits with the fixing portion 1163 of the board holder 1160, and from the rear view right end portion of the board cover 1172. It is provided with an elastic fixing piece that protrudes rearward and is elastically locked to the locking portion 1164 of the substrate holder 1160.

Further, as shown in FIG. 101 and the like, the main control board box 1170 is arranged vertically at the right end of the rear view, sandwiching the elastic fixing piece 1175, and seals the opening and closing of the board base 1171 and the board cover 1172. A possible sealing portion 1176, a sealed seal (not shown) that is affixed across the substrate base 1171 and the substrate cover 1172 at the lower ends of the substrate base 1171 and the substrate cover 1172, and a transparent seal that covers the surface of the sealed seal. It includes a protective cover 1177 and a board management seal 1178 attached to the rear surface of the board cover 1172. The sealing portion 1176 of the main control board box 1170 has the same configuration as the separation and cutting portion 863 of the payout control board box 860 in the board unit 800, and is fixed by caulking in any one of the four sealing portions 1176. Has been done. In the main control board box 1170, in order to separate the board base 1171 and the board cover 1172, it is necessary to cut the sealing portion 1176 fixed by caulking so that a trace of opening and closing of the main control board box 1170 remains. It has become. As a result, it is possible to clearly visually determine from the outside whether or not the main control board box 1170 has been opened illegally.

Since four sealing portions 1176 of the main control board box 1170 are provided in this example, the main control board box 1170 can be opened and closed up to three times. Further, in the main control board box 1170 of this example, a sealing sticker is affixed straddling the board base 1171 and the board cover 1172, and the sealing seal is cut when the board base 1171 and the board cover 1172 are separated. It needs to be peeled off, and even with this sealed seal, traces of opening and closing remain. Therefore, the main control board box 1170 is illegally opened and closed, and the internal main control board 4100 is illegally modified or replaced with an illegal main control board (or a ROM that stores a game content program or the like). However, it can be visually confirmed from the outside, and it is possible to prevent such fraudulent acts from being carried out.

Further, in the main control board box 1170, an opening penetrating the board cover 1172 in the front-rear direction is formed at an appropriate position, and the RAM clear switch 4100c and the test terminal 4100f attached to the main control board 4100 through the opening, Various connection terminals and the like for connecting to the peripheral control board 4010, the payout control board 4110, and the like face to the rear side. By connecting a predetermined measuring device to the test terminal 4100f facing from the rear surface of the main control board box 1170, the main control board 4100 can be checked from the outside without opening the main control board box 1170. Even if the above-mentioned sealing portion 1176 and the sealing seal are cleverly crafted, the presence or absence of unauthorized modification of the main control board 4100 can be confirmed other than visually, and the pachinko machine 1 has high security performance. You can do it.

[1-4E. Function display unit]
Next, the function display unit 1180 in the game board 4 will be described. The function display unit 1180 is mounted and arranged at a predetermined position of the front constituent member 1110, and is a display unit 1181 that is visibly arranged from the player side on the front surface of the front constituent member 1110 and the front constituent member 1110. It is provided with a rear protruding portion 1182 that protrudes rearward from the rear surface.

As shown in an enlarged manner in FIG. 102, the display unit 1181 of the function display unit 1180 of this example is for displaying a game state changed by a game ball driven into the game area 1100 at the left end portion of the front view. A game status indicator 1183 composed of one LED and two LEDs arranged in the vertical direction on the right side of the game status indicator 1183. (1) The first special lottery result, which is arranged on the right side of the special symbol storage display 1184 and the first special symbol storage display 1184 and is drawn by accepting the game ball to the first starting port 2101, is displayed as the first special symbol. The first special symbol display 1185, which consists of one 7-segment LED, and the second special, which is placed diagonally above the right of the first special symbol display 1185 and is drawn by accepting the game ball to the second starting port 2102. The second special symbol display 1186, which consists of one 7-segment LED for displaying the lottery result as the second special symbol, and the second, which consists of two LEDs arranged vertically on the right side of the second special symbol display 1186. It is provided with a second special symbol storage display 1187 for displaying the number of reservations related to the acceptance of the game ball to the starting port 2102.

Further, the display unit 1181 of the function display unit 1180 is arranged side by side in an arc shape substantially along the inner peripheral rail 1113 from directly above the second special symbol display 1186, and holds the number of reservations related to the passage of the gate unit 2401 by the game ball. The normal symbol storage display 1188 consisting of four LEDs for display and the normal symbol lottery result drawn by the game ball placed under the normal symbol storage display and passing through the gate portion 2401 are displayed as normal symbols. The normal symbol display 1189, which consists of one LED, and the normal symbol storage display 1188 are arranged side by side on the upper right side, and when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is a "big hit", a big prize opening. It is provided with a round display 1190 composed of two LEDs for displaying the number of repetitions (number of rounds) of the opening / closing pattern of 2103.

The game status display 1183 in the function display unit 1180 of this example is a color LED capable of changing the emission color of red, green, and orange. Depending on the combination, various gaming states (for example, probability fluctuation state, time shortening state, probability variation time saving state, big hit game state, small hit game state, etc.) can be displayed.

Further, when the first special symbol storage display 1184 in the function display unit 1180 cannot display the first special symbol in a variable manner on the first special symbol display 1185, the game ball is received in the first starting port 2101. In this case, the number of holds (stored number) of the first special symbol whose start of variable display is held (stored) is displayed. The first special symbol storage display 1184 has a first special symbol storage lamp 1184a composed of a predetermined LED and a first special symbol storage lamp 1184b, and the first special symbol storage lamps 1184a and 1184b are lit. -The number of holds can be displayed by the blinking pattern. Specifically, for example, when the number of holdings is one, the first special symbol storage lamp 1184a is turned on and the first special symbol storage lamp 1184b is turned off, and when the number of holdings is two, the first special symbol storage lamps 1184a, 1184b are turned on. 1184a blinks and the first special symbol storage lamp 1184b lights up when the number of holdings is three, and the first special symbol storage lamps 1184a and 1184b both light when the number of holdings is four. It is designed to blink. In this example, up to four are reserved.

Further, when the second special symbol storage display 1187 in the function display unit 1180 cannot display the second special symbol in a variable manner on the second special symbol display 1186, the game ball is received in the second starting port 2102. In this case, the number of holds (stored number) of the second special symbol whose start of variable display is held (stored) is displayed. The second special symbol storage display 1187 has a second special symbol storage lamp 1187a composed of a predetermined LED and a second special symbol storage lamp 1187b, and the second special symbol storage lamps 1187a and 1187b are lit. -The number of holds can be displayed by the blinking pattern. Specifically, for example, when the number of holdings is one, the second special symbol storage lamp 1187a is turned on and the second special symbol storage lamp 1187b is turned off, and when the number of holdings is two, the second special symbol storage indicator lamp 1187a, When 1187b is lit together and the number of holdings is three, the second special symbol storage lamp 1187a blinks and the second special symbol storage lamp 1187b is lit, and when the number of holdings is four, the second special symbol storage lamps 1187a and 1187b are lit. Both are designed to blink. In this example, up to four are reserved.

Further, the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186 in the function display unit 1180 are drawn by the first special lottery by accepting the game balls to the first starting port 2101 and the second starting port 2102. The result and the second special lottery result are displayed, and the 7-segment LED is stopped after fluctuating for a predetermined time according to the special lottery result, and the first is based on the emission pattern (special symbol) of the stopped 7-segment LED. The result of the special lottery and the result of the second special lottery can be recognized by the player.

Further, the normal symbol display 1189 in the function display unit 1180 is a color LED capable of changing the emission color of red, green, and orange, and is a combination of the emission color and lighting / blinking. Therefore, it is possible to display the normal lottery result drawn by the game ball passing through the gate portion 2401. As with the special symbol, the display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 1189 is also stopped and displayed in a light emission pattern corresponding to the normal lottery result after the display is varied for a predetermined time.

Further, the normal symbol storage display 1188 in the function display unit 1180 suspends the start of the variable display when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2401 when the normal symbol cannot be variablely displayed in the normal symbol display 1189. It displays the number of held (stored) ordinary symbols (stored). This ordinary symbol storage display 1188 includes four ordinary symbol storage lamps 1188a to 1188d arranged side by side from the bottom, each of which is a predetermined LED, and the ordinary symbol storage lamps 1188a are arranged from the bottom according to the number of holdings. By sequentially turning on ~ 1188d, the number of reserved symbols can be displayed. In this example, up to four variable displays of ordinary symbols are reserved (memorized).

Further, the round display 1190 in the function display unit 1180 includes a two-round display lamp 1190a and a 15-round display lamp 1190b composed of predetermined LEDs, and each lamp is lit to make a round in a "big hit" game. The number can be displayed.

As shown in FIG. 102, the function display unit 1180 of this example can be visually recognized from the player side through the game window 101 of the door frame 5 in a state where the game board 4 is attached to the pachinko machine 1. There is. In addition, the game status display 1183, the first special symbol storage display 1184, the first special symbol display 1185, the second special symbol display 1186, the second special symbol storage display 1187, and the normal symbol storage of the function display unit 1180. The display 1188, the normal symbol display 1189, and the round display 1190 are mounted on the front surface of the functional display board 1191 (see FIG. 183). Further, a connection terminal for connecting the function display board 1191 and the main control board 4100 is attached to the rear end of the rear protrusion 1182 of the function display unit 1180.

In this example, since the function display unit 1180 is provided in the front component 1110 of the game board 4, the function is compared with the case where the front unit 2000 and the back unit 300 attached to the game panel 1150 are provided. The display unit 1180 can be diverted as the basic configuration of the game board 4, the configuration related to the pachinko machine 1 can be simplified to prevent the cost from increasing, and the model of the pachinko machine 1 (table unit 2000 or Even if the detailed configuration of the game board 4, which is embodied by the back unit 3000 and can characterize the model of the pachinko machine 1, is different, the position of the display unit 1181 of the function display unit 1180 does not change, so that the player or the game The position of the display unit 1181 can be recognized by the clerk in the hall without any confusion.

[1-4F. Second Embodiment of the game panel]
Subsequently, a game panel 1200 having a form different from that of the game panel 1150 in the game board 4 described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 103 to 105. The front component 1110, the substrate holder 1160, and the main control board box 1170 in FIGS. 103 to 105 have the same configuration as described above, and detailed description thereof will be omitted here. The game panel 1200 of the present embodiment is thinner than the above-mentioned game panel 1150 and has a plate shape capable of partitioning the rear end of the game area 1100 whose outer periphery is partitioned by the front component 1110. Also includes a panel plate 1210 having a small outer shape, and a frame-shaped panel holder 1220 that holds the panel plate 1210 detachably from the front side and is attached to the rear surface of the front component 1110.

The game panel 1200 panel plate 1210 has a polygonal shape whose outer shape is slightly larger than that of the game area 1100, and is made of synthetic resin plates such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, and methacrylic resin, and glass and metal. It is formed of an inorganic plate. The thickness of this panel plate 1210 is thinner than that of the panel holder 1220 (game panel 1150), and it is the minimum necessary that can be sufficiently held even if an obstacle nail (not shown) is planted on the front surface or the front unit 2000 is attached. It is said to have a thickness (8 to 10 mm). In this example, the panel plate 1210 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin plate.

The panel plate 1210 has a plurality of fitting holes 1211 arranged in the vicinity of the outer periphery and composed of round holes penetrating in the front-rear direction, and elongated holes 1212 arranged in the vicinity of the outer periphery of the lower left portion and penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending in the vertical direction. It is equipped with. These fitting holes 1211 and elongated holes 1212 are arranged outside the game area 1100 and are positioned with the panel holder 1220. Further, the panel plate 1210 is provided with stepped engaging step portions 1213 having a recessed front side at both ends of the upper side and both ends of the lower side thereof. The engaging step portion 1213 is notched to approximately half the thickness of the panel plate 1210, and is arranged outside the game area 1100 like the fitting hole 1211 and the elongated hole 1212. This is for engaging and fixing the panel plate 1210 to the panel holder 1220.

Further, the panel plate 1210 is provided with a plurality of inner rail fixing holes 1214 at predetermined positions. By fitting and fixing the positioning protrusion 1127 protruding from the rear side of the inner rail 1112 to the inner rail fixing hole 1214, the inner rail 1112 can be fixed at a predetermined position.

On the other hand, the panel holder 1220 in the game panel 1200 has a size including the panel plate 1210 and has a substantially square outer shape, and has a thickness substantially the same as the thickness of the above-mentioned game panel 1150 made of a wooden board (in this example, about the same thickness). It is made of a synthetic resin (for example, a thermoplastic synthetic resin) having a size of 20 mm). The panel holder 1220 has a holding step portion 1221 that holds the panel plate 1210 detachably and is recessed from the front side to the rear side, and the inside of the holding step portion 1221 is approximately the same size as the game area 1100 and is front and rear. It mainly has a through port 1222 that penetrates in the direction.

The depth from the front surface of the holding step portion 1221 of the panel holder 1220 is substantially the same as the thickness of the panel plate 1210, and the front surface of the panel plate 1210 held in the holding step portion 1221 is the front surface of the panel holder 1220. It is designed to be almost on the same side as. Further, the holding step portion 1221 has a size such that a predetermined amount of clearance is formed on the front inner peripheral surface thereof with respect to the outer peripheral surface of the panel plate 1210. Due to this clearance, even if the panel plate 1210 expands and contracts relatively due to changes in temperature and aging, the expansion and contraction can be absorbed. An elastic member such as rubber may be packed in the clearance.

Further, the panel holder 1220 is arranged at a position corresponding to the fitting hole 1211 and the elongated hole 1212 formed in the panel plate 1210 held by the holding step portion 1221, and is arranged from the front surface of the holding step portion 1221 toward the front. It is provided with a plurality of protruding pins 1223 that extend and can be fitted and inserted into the fitting holes 1211 and the elongated holes 1212 of the panel plate 1210. By fitting and inserting these protruding pins 1223 into the fitting holes 1211 and the elongated holes 1212 of the panel plate 1210, the panel holder 1220 and the panel plate 1210 can be positioned with each other.

Further, the panel holder 1220 is provided with an engaging claw 1224 and an engaging piece 1225 that engage with the engaging step portion 1213 at a position corresponding to the engaging step portion 1213 of the panel plate 1210. More specifically, the engaging claw 1224 is arranged on the upper holding step portion 1221 of the panel holder 1220, corresponds to the upper engaging step portion 1213 in the panel plate 1210, and is forward from the front surface of the holding step portion 1221. It protrudes toward it and is elastically engaged with the engaging step portion 1213. The engaging claw 1224 is sized so that its tip does not protrude from the front surface of the panel holder 1220. On the other hand, the engaging piece 1225 is arranged in the lower holding step portion 1221 of the panel holder 1220, corresponds to the lower engaging step portion 1213 in the panel plate 1210, and is connected to the front surface of the holding step portion 1221. In a state where the engaging step portion 1213 of the plate 1210 is formed with a predetermined gap having a size that can be inserted, the plate holder 1220 is configured to extend by a predetermined amount toward the upper side (center side) along the front surface of the panel holder 1220. By engaging the engaging step portion 1213 of the panel plate 1210 with the engaging claw 1224 and the engaging piece 1225, the panel plate 1210 is detachably held with respect to the panel holder 1220.

Further, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a boss insertion hole 1226 that penetrates in the front-rear direction through which the mounting boss 1126 provided in the front component member 1110 can be inserted, and the mounting boss of the front component member 1110 is provided in the boss insertion hole 1226. By inserting the 1126, the panel holder 1220 and the front component 1110 are positioned with each other.

As shown in FIG. 104, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a mounting support portion 1227 on the rear surface side, which is recessed by a predetermined amount on the front side so as to leave a lower side and an outer peripheral edge slightly below the center in the vertical direction. ing. Due to this mounting support portion 1227, the rear surface of the panel holder 1220 is recessed in a state where the outer peripheral portion on the rear surface side protrudes rearward above the predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height, and the recessed amount (the recessed amount). The depth) is set to a depth (in this example, about 2.5 mm) capable of accommodating the flange-shaped fixing portion 3001a (see FIG. 112) of the back box 3001 in the back unit 3000 mounted and fixed to the mounting support portion 1227. It is preferably between 1 and 3 mm). By mounting and fixing a predetermined member to the mounting support portion 1227, it is possible to prevent the fixing portion 3001a from protruding to the rear side of the panel holder 1220, and the panel holder 1220, that is, the game board 4 can be mounted on the main body frame 3. It can be securely installed and installed in the game board holding port 601 of the (pachinko machine 1).

Further, as shown in the figure, a plurality of mounting holes 1228 arranged in the mounting support portion 1227 on the rear surface side and above the accommodating recess 630h and capable of screwing a predetermined screw are arranged in the panel holder 1220 in a predetermined arrangement. ing. Further, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a plurality of positioning holes 1229 arranged so as to correspond to the mounting holes 1228. The positioning hole 1229 is a positioning protrusion formed on a member to be mounted and fixed using the mounting hole 1228 (for example, a positioning protrusion protruding forward from the flange-shaped fixing portion 3001a on the front surface of the back box 3001 (not shown). Is omitted)) is inserted. In this example, the positioning hole 1229 is a stop hole having a substantially rectangular shape (square hole shape) in the rear view.

It should be noted that, with respect to the mounting hole 1228, a mounting hole having an inner diameter of a large diameter and a small diameter are mixed, and the mounting hole has an appropriate diameter according to the size and weight of a predetermined member to be mounted and fixed. 1228 may be used.

Further, the panel holder 1220 is formed with a plurality of lightening portions 1230 that open to the rear surface side at least in a predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height, so that the weight of the panel holder 1220 is reduced by the lightening portions 1230. It has become. As shown in FIG. 103, these lightening portions 1230 are not formed in a predetermined range from the lower end of the front end of the panel holder 1220 to a predetermined height on the front side of the accommodating recess 630h, and are within the range. Then, since the front surface of the panel holder 1220 is a substantially flat surface, the rear surface of the front component 1110 arranged on the front surface thereof is a substantially flat surface, and the game ball launched from the ball striking device 650. However, it is designed to be guided smoothly. Further, in this panel holder 1220, as shown in the figure, the lightening portion 1230 is formed so that the mounting holes 1228 and the like are formed in a boss shape, and at the same time, they are supported and the strength of the panel holder 1220 is maintained. In order to do so, a box-shaped rib is formed.

The panel holder 1220 is formed with a positioning unit 1231 corresponding to a positioning means such as an obstacle nail planting device (not shown) and an assembly jig, and holds the game panel 1150 in the obstacle nail planting device. It is possible to set it in the state that it is. Further, at the lower part of the panel holder 1220, there is an out port 1232 that penetrates in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the out-port guide surface 1115 of the front component 1110, and a horizontally long one that penetrates in the front-rear direction to the left side of the lower end when viewed from the front. A ball passage notch 1223 having the same shape as the ball passage notch 1122 of the front component 1110 and a rear protrusion 1182 of the function display unit 1180 that penetrates in the front-rear direction are inserted into the lower right corner of the front view. It is provided with an insertion hole 1234 and.

Further, the panel holder 1220 has a front configuration including a groove-shaped out ball discharge groove 1235 (see FIG. 104) in which a predetermined amount is recessed from the rear surface to the front on the rear surface side of the out port 1232 and the lower end side is opened downward. It is provided with a notch 1236 formed at a position corresponding to the game board stopper 1120 of the member 1110 and notched so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction from the right end of the front view. Further, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes for mounting and fixing to the rear surface of the front constituent member 1110 at appropriate positions.

When the game board 4 is inserted and held in the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3, the out ball discharge groove 1235 in the panel holder 1220 is inserted into the main body frame 3 (the upper surface of the game board mounting portion 606 in the main body frame base 600). It is designed to fit with the provided positioning protrusion 607, and when the out ball discharge groove 1235 fits with the positioning protrusion 607, the game board 4 moves relative to the main body frame 3 in the left-right direction. It is becoming regulated.

In the game panel 1200 of the present embodiment, the panel plate 1210 is fitted and inserted into the holding step portion 1221 of the panel holder 1220 from the front, and the engaging claw 1224, the engaging piece 1225, and the engaging step portion 1213 are engaged with each other. By combining them, the panel plate 1210 can be held by the panel holder 1220, and the front side of the panel plate 1210 and the panel holder 1220 are substantially flush with each other. It is possible to set the panel plate 1210 in the conventional obstacle nail planting device while holding it in the panel holder 1220 without modifying the installation device, and it is possible to suppress the increase in the cost for planting the obstacle nail. You can do it.

Further, in the game panel 1200 of this example, although not shown, a plurality of obstacle nails are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement within a range corresponding to the game area 1100 on the front surface of the panel plate 1210. At the same time, the table unit 2000 can be attached. Further, the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1220. As a result, in the thin panel plate 1210, only the front unit is supported, so that it is possible to prevent the panel plate 1210 from being distorted by the load of the front unit.

Further, since the gaming panel 1200 has a split structure consisting of a panel plate 1210 and a panel holder 1220, even if the panel plate 1210 is used as a transparent plate, it is possible to suppress an increase in the weight of the entire gaming panel 1200, and the transparent panel. The pachinko machine 1 in which the rear side of the game area 1100 can be seen by the player through the plate 1210 can be embodied, and the pachinko machine 1 can be strongly attracted by the player.

Further, since the game panel 1200 is divided into the panel plate 1210 and the panel holder 1220, the panel plate 1210 whose position of the obstacle nail, the winning opening, etc. changes depending on the model of the pachinko machine 1 is used as a replacement part. The panel holder 1220 can be used as a common part, and the pachinko machine 1 equipped with the game board 4 compatible with various models can be obtained by simply replacing the panel plate 1210.

Further, since the panel holder 1220 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes 1228 in a predetermined arrangement in advance, mounting and fixing positions of various predetermined members such as the back unit 3000 to be mounted and fixed on the rear surface side of the panel holder 1220 depending on the model. By designing the fixing parts of various members to correspond to the positions of the mounting holes 1228, the panel holder 1220 can be used as a common part of the pachinko machine 1 regardless of the model, even if the positions are different. It has become.

[1-5. Security structure of pachinko machines]
Subsequently, the crime prevention structure of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 106 and 107. FIG. 106 is a partial cross-sectional view showing a crime prevention structure on the shaft support side of a pachinko machine. Further, FIG. 107 is a perspective view seen from the rear side in a state where the game board is housed.

First, as shown in FIG. 106, the security structure on the shaft support side of the pachinko machine 1 of this example is the side surface of the shaft support side (left side in front view) of the main body frame base 600 formed of the synthetic resin in the main body frame 3. It is composed of a metal security side plate 950 attached to the door frame 5 and a metal reinforcing unit 150 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 formed of synthetic resin in the door frame 5.

As described above, the security side plate 950 of the main body frame 3 is formed of an extruded mold material made of metal (for example, an aluminum alloy), and the vertical dimension is substantially the same as the vertical dimension of the main body frame base 600. In addition, the dimension in the front-rear direction is larger than the dimension in the front-rear direction in which the front component 1110 and the game panel 1150 in the game board 4 are combined. The side surface security plate 950 has a plate-shaped side surface piece 952a extending in the vertical direction and extending in the front-rear direction to form the side surface of the main body frame 3, and a front end extending inward (open side) substantially at right angles from the front end of the side surface piece 952a. A middle piece 952c extending from the side piece 952a along the front end piece 952b so as to form a predetermined amount of gap on the rear side of the piece 952b and the front end piece 952b, and extending inward in a substantially perpendicular direction from the rear end of the side piece 952a. It is provided with a rear end piece 952d. As a result, the front end of the security side plate 950 has a substantially U-shaped cross section that is opened inward (open side) by the front end piece 952b and the middle piece 952c.

Further, the side security plate 950 (main body 952) has the strength and rigidity of the side security plate 950 due to the front end piece 952b, the middle piece 952c, and the rear end piece 952d arranged in the direction perpendicular to the surface of the side plate piece 952a. It has been increased so that the strength of the main body frame 3 as a whole can be increased so that the game board 4 and the door frame 5 can be well supported.

On the other hand, as described above, the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame 5 is formed by forming a plurality of long metal plates into a frame shape so as to surround the outer periphery of the game window 101 in the door frame 5 by spot welding, rivets, or the like. The outer side of the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 on the shaft support side is provided with a shaft support side U-shaped protrusion 166 having a substantially U-shaped cross section opened to the outside (shaft support side). In the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 of the reinforcing unit 150, the strength of the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is further increased by the shaft support side U-shaped projecting piece 166, and the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is difficult to bend. ..

By the way, in this example, since the door frame 5 is attached and supported only at two points above and below the upper shaft branch portion 156 and the lower shaft branch portion 158 with respect to the main body frame 3, the door frame 5 on the shaft support side is supported. When an illegal tool such as a screwdriver or a crowbar is inserted between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 3, the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is deformed and the gap between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 becomes large, and the gap is increased through the gap. There is a risk of cheating. On the other hand, in the security structure of this example, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, between the front end piece 952b and the middle piece 952c formed inside the front end of the security side plate 950. The rear piece of the shaft support side U-shaped protrusion 166 formed in a substantially U shape of the reinforcing unit 150 in the door frame 5 is inserted (invaded), and the front end piece 952a is supported by the shaft. It is in a state of being sandwiched between the side U-shaped protrusions 166. As a result, even if the door frame 5 is forcibly opened with respect to the main body frame 3, the shaft support side U-shaped projecting piece 166 of the door frame 5 comes into contact with the rear surface side of the front end piece 952b of the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 Since it is possible to prevent the U-shaped projecting piece 166 on the shaft support side from moving away from the main body frame 3, it is possible to prevent the closed door frame 5 from being scooped out, and the main body frame can be prevented from being opened. It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts such as opening the door frame 5 against the third.

Further, since the security side plate 950 formed of metal in the main body frame 3 and the reinforcing unit 150 formed of metal in the door frame 5 are fitted to each other, between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5. The strength and rigidity of the door frame 3 are increased, the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 can be made less likely to be distorted by an illegal tool, and the crime prevention performance can be improved.

Further, since the rear end of the side piece 952a in the security side plate 950 extends rearward from the game panel 1150 in the game board 4, the main body frame base 600 on the rear side of the rear end of the side piece 952a is assumed. Even if is destroyed, an illegal tool such as a piano wire cannot be penetrated into the game area 1100 on the front surface of the game board 4 (game panel 1150) from the rear end of the side piece 952a, and the illegal act is performed. Can be reliably prevented. As shown in FIG. 106, since the side frame plate 12 of the outer frame 2 is in contact with the side frame plate 12 so as to cover the outside of the crime prevention side plate 950, the pachinko machine 1 has a robust side surface, and the pachinko machine 1 has a robust side surface. It is possible to fully counter the vandalism of. Further, in general, in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, the side surface of the pachinko machine 1 is inserted and fixed in the frame of the island equipment for installing the pachinko machine 1, so that the player side. From the (front side), it is almost impossible for an unauthorized tool to enter the rear side of the rear end of the side piece 952c, and the security performance of the pachinko machine 1 is further enhanced.

Subsequently, as a security structure from the rear side in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, as shown in FIG. 107, the prize ball base 710, the tank rail 731, and the prize ball device 740 in the main body frame 3 accommodating the game board 4 Since the unit base 741, the full tank branch unit 770, and the back cover 900 are made of transparent synthetic resin, the rear side and the side surface side of the game board 4 housed in the main body frame 3 can be used as the game board 4. It can be visually recognized from the rear side of the main body frame 3 without removing it from the main body frame 3 or opening the back cover 900. As a result, even if an illegal device is attached to the rear side of the game board 4, it can be easily found and it is possible to prevent the illegal act from being performed. In addition, since it is possible to easily find an illegal device or the like attached to the game board 4 from the outside, it is possible to hesitate to attach the illegal device, and it is possible to enhance the deterrence against fraudulent acts. ing.

Further, since the rear side and the side surface side of the game board 4 can be visually recognized from the rear side of the main body frame 3 through the transparent prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, etc., the main body frame can be used for maintenance and model change. When the game board 4 is attached / detached to / from 3, even if tools such as a screwdriver or pliers, a waste cloth for cleaning, dust, dust, etc. remain between the main body frame 3 and the game board 4, they are removed from the outside. It can be easily found from the above, it is possible to prevent some trouble from occurring due to them, and it is possible to improve the maintainability of the pachinko machine 1.

[2. Detailed configuration of the game board]
Subsequently, the detailed configuration of the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 108 to 113. FIG. 108 is a front view of the game board, FIG. 109 is a perspective view of the game board viewed from diagonally right front, and FIG. 110 is a perspective view of the game board viewed from diagonally left front. FIG. 111 is a perspective view of the game board as viewed diagonally from the rear. Further, FIG. 112 is a perspective view of each of the main members constituting the game board disassembled and viewed diagonally from the front, and FIG. 113 is a perspective view of each of the main members constituting the game board disassembled and viewed diagonally from the rear. It is a figure.

The game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has an outer rail 1111 and an inner rail 1112, and a game ball (also simply referred to as a “ball”) as a game medium is generated by a player operating the handle device 500. From the game window 101 of the door frame 5 to the player side when the front component 1110 having a frame shape forming the outer periphery of the game area 1100 to be driven is attached to the pachinko machine 1 at the lower right corner of the front view of the front component 1110. A function display unit 1180 arranged at a position where it can be visually recognized, and a plurality of functional display units 1180 attached to the rear side of the front component 1110 so as to close the game area 1100 and penetrating in a predetermined shape at a position corresponding to the game area 1100 in the front-rear direction. It comprises a plate-shaped gaming panel 1150 having an opening 1158 (see FIG. 112) and partitioning the rear end of the gaming area 1100.

Further, the game board 4 has a front unit 2000 attached to the opening 1158 of the game panel 1150 from the front side, a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1150, and a back unit 3000 from the player side to the rear side. On the rear surface of the liquid crystal display device 1900 which is visually attached and can display a predetermined effect image, the substrate holder 1160 which is attached to the lower rear surface of the game panel 1150 so as to cover the lower portion of the back unit from the rear side, and the rear surface of the substrate holder 1160. It includes a main control board box 1170 to be mounted.

The front unit 2000 in the game board 4 of this example is arranged along the outer periphery of the game area 1100 on the left side of the attacker unit 2100 and the attacker unit 2100 arranged on the upper side of the out port 1151 at the lower part in the game area 1100. The side winning opening member 2200, the side guiding member 2300 arranged along the outer periphery of the game area 1100 on the upper side of the side winning opening member 2200, and slightly above the center of the game area 1100 on the upper side of the side guiding member 2300. It includes a gate member 2400 arranged on the left side and a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 arranged in a substantially central portion of the game area 1100.

Further, the back unit 3000 in the game board 4 is a box-shaped back box 3001 whose front side is open, and a ball guidance unit 3100 which is attached near the front surface in the back box 3001 and guides the game ball from the front unit 2000 downward. The back left movable production unit 3200 mounted on the left side of the back box 3001 near the front, the back upper middle movable production unit 3300 mounted on the upper side of the back box 3001 in the center of the left and right, and the back upper middle movable production unit. The back upper side movable effect unit 3400 attached to both the left and right sides of the unit 3300, the back lower movable effect unit 3100 and the back left movable effect unit 3200, and the back lower movable effect unit attached to the lower side between the rear wall 3001b of the back box 3001. It includes a 3500 and a back right movable effect unit 3600 attached between the back lower movable effect unit 3500 and the rear wall 3001b of the back box 3001.

The back box 3001 in the back unit 3000 has a substantially rectangular opening 3001c penetrating the rear wall 3001b in the front-rear direction so that the display screen faces forward (player side) from the opening 3001c. The liquid crystal display device 1900 is detachably attached to the rear side of the rear wall 3001b of the back box 3001.

Further, on the rear side of the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the game board 4, a peripheral control board box 1910 containing a peripheral control board 4010 including a peripheral control unit 4140 and a liquid crystal control unit 4150 is provided, which will be described in detail later. ..

[2-1. Overall configuration of table unit]
Next, the table unit 2000 of the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 114 and 115. FIG. 114 is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board as viewed from the front, and FIG. 115 is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board as viewed from the rear.

The front unit 2000 in the game board 4 is arranged above the out port 1151 at the lower center in the left-right direction in the game area 1100 and is supported on the front surface of the game panel 1150, and the game area on the left side of the attacker unit 2100. The side winning opening member 2200 arranged along the outer periphery of the 1100 and supported on the front surface of the game panel 1150, and the side winning opening member 2200 arranged on the upper side of the side winning opening member 2200 and extending along the outer periphery of the game area 1100 to near the center in the vertical direction. The side guide member 2300, the gate member 2400 located on the upper side of the side guide member 2300 and slightly upward from the center in the vertical direction in the game area 1100 and supported on the front surface of the game panel 1150, and the substantially central portion of the game area 1100. It is provided with a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 arranged in the game panel 1150 and supported by the game panel 1150.

In the attacker unit 2100 of the table unit 2000, the game ball passes through the first starting port 2101 in which the game ball is always acceptable and the gate portion 2401 in the gate member 2400 arranged below the first starting port 2101. By doing so, the game balls can be accepted according to the result of the normal lottery, and the second starting port 2102 and the first starting port 2101 and the second starting port 2102 located below the second starting port 2102. It is equipped with a large winning opening 2103, which enables the acceptance of game balls according to the result of the special lottery drawn by the acceptance of the game balls.

Further, the side winning opening member 2200 of the front unit 2000 is provided with a general winning opening 2201 in which a game ball is always acceptable. In this example, the side winning opening member 2200 is provided with four general winning opening 2201. Further, the gate member 2400 of the table unit 2000 is provided with a gate portion 2401 through which a game ball can pass.

Further, the center accessory 2500 of the front unit 2000 includes a flange portion 2502 that abuts on the front surface of the game panel 1150, and a peripheral wall portion 2503 that prevents the game ball that has flowed down in the game area 1100 from entering the frame. , The warp inlet 2504 that opens at a predetermined position on the peripheral wall portion 2503, the warp outlet 2505 that discharges the game ball that has entered the warp inlet 2504 into the frame, and the game ball released from the warp outlet 2505 are rolled in the left-right direction. After that, a stage 2510 is provided, which is discharged into the game area 1100 and recirculated.

Further, the center accessory 2500 of the table unit 2000 includes a center decorative member 2520 that decorates substantially the entire center accessory 2500, a frame-shaped base member 2530 that supports the rear side of the center decorative member 2520, and a base member 2530. The right frame rear decorative member 2540 attached to the rear side of the right frame, the warp passage member 2550 attached to the left frame rear side of the base member 2530, and the lower right movable guide unit 2560 attached to the lower right front side of the base member 2530. The upper frame movable decorative unit 2580 attached to the rear side of the upper frame of the base member 2530, and the stage back decorative member 2600 attached to the rear side of the lower frame of the base member 2530 are provided. Although the details will be described later, the stage back decorative member 2600 of the center accessory 2500 can display the number of reserved game balls to the first starting port 2101 and the second starting port 2102, respectively. It has become.

[2-2. Attacker unit]
Next, the attacker unit 2100 of the table unit 2000 in the game board 4 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 116 to 118. FIG. 116 is a perspective view of the attacker unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 117 is a perspective view of the attacker unit as viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 118 is a perspective view of the attacker unit as viewed from the rear bottom.

The attacker unit 2100 of the game board 4 in the table unit 2000 of this example is inserted from the front side into the opening 1158 formed at the lower center in the left-right direction of the game panel 1150, and then is inserted into the front surface of the game panel 1150. It is fixed. The attacker unit 2100 has a plurality of entrances (winning openings) in which a game ball driven into the game area 1100 can be received, and specifically, the attacker unit 2100 is arranged substantially in the center in the left-right direction. Than the first starting port 2101, the second starting port 2102 located below the first starting port 2101, and the first starting port 2101 and the second starting port 2102 located below the second starting port 2102. It is equipped with a rectangular large winning opening 2103 that greatly extends in the left-right direction.

The upper side of the first starting port 2101 of the attacker unit 2100 is open so that a game ball can always be accepted (winning). On the other hand, as shown in the figure, the second starting port 2102 arranged below the first starting port 2101 is a pair of blade-shaped movable pieces 2105 arranged substantially upright on both the left and right sides of the second starting port 2102. The space between the first starting port 2101 and the first starting port 2101 is closed, and in the state shown in the figure, the game ball cannot be received by the second starting port 2102. The pair of movable pieces 2105 that close the second starting port 2102 are rotatably supported on the lower end side, and the upper end side is rotated in a direction away from each other to expand the second starting port. The game ball is ready to be accepted by 2102. That is, the second starting port 2102 is a variable winning opening due to the pair of movable pieces 2105.

Further, the large winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 can be opened and closed by a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing member 2106 that can close the opening. The lower side of the opening / closing member 2106 is rotatably supported by the shaft, and in a substantially vertical state, the large winning opening 2103 can be closed to make the game ball unacceptable, and the upper side moves to the front side. When it is rotated to, the large winning opening 2103 is opened so that the game ball can be accepted. That is, the large winning opening 2103 is a variable winning opening due to the opening / closing member 2106.

The width of the attacker unit 2100 in the left-right direction of the first starting port 2101 is slightly larger than the outer shape of the game ball, and the size (width) is such that the game balls can be received one by one. Further, the width of the second starting port 2102 of the attacker unit 2100 in the left-right direction when the upper ends of the pair of movable pieces 2105 are rotated in a direction in which they are separated from each other and expanded is three times the outer shape of the game ball. It is said to be up to 5 times wider. Further, the large winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 has a width in the left-right direction when the opening / closing member 2106 is opened, which is 5 to 8 times the width of the outer shape of the game ball. As a result, in a state where the winning openings 2101, 1022, and 2103 can be accepted, the lower winning openings are more likely to accept the game ball.

More specifically, the attacker unit 2100 of this example is attached to the front surface of the game panel 1150, has a first starting port 2101 and a large winning opening 2103 in the center in the left-right direction, a second starting opening 2102, and a general winning opening. A plate-shaped base plate 2110 capable of forming 2104 and a pair of movable pieces 2105 attached to the lower front surface of the base plate 2110 and rotatably supporting a pair of movable pieces 2105 and forming a second starting port 2102. A central receiving member 2111 whose upper and rear sides are open, and an opening / closing member 2106 which is attached to the rear side of the base plate 2110 and opens and closes the large winning opening 2103 are rotatably supported, and a pair of movable pieces 2105 and It includes an attacker drive unit 2120 that rotationally drives the opening / closing member 2106.

The base plate 2110 of the attacker unit 2100 is formed in a plate shape extending in the left-right direction, and has a shallow relief-like decoration on the surface. The base plate 2110 has an opening 2110a penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the second starting port 2102. Further, the base plate 2110 is provided with a gutter portion 2110b capable of guiding a game ball extending rearward from the first starting port 2101.

The central receiving member 2110 attached to the front surface of the base plate 2110 in the attacker unit 2000 has a relief-shaped logo on the front surface according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the central receiving member 2110 includes a pair of shaft portions extending rearward from the rear surface of the front plate at intervals wider than the left and right widths of the openings 2110a in the base plate 2110. The movable piece 2105 can be rotatably supported by these shaft portions.

Further, the attacker drive unit 2120 in the attacker unit 2100 supports the start port solenoid 2121 for opening and closing the pair of movable pieces 2105 that open and close the second start port 2102, and the rear side of the base plate 2110 that supports the start port solenoid 2121. The start port drive mechanism base 2123 attached to, the attacker solenoid 2124 for opening and closing the opening / closing member 2106 that closes the winning opening 2103, and the attacker solenoid 2124 are supported and the opening / closing member 2106 is rotatably supported. The attacker drive mechanism base 2126 attached to the rear side of the base plate 2110 under the start port drive mechanism base 2123 and the game ball supported at a predetermined position of the attacker drive mechanism base 2126 and received in the second start port 2102. The second start port sensor 2127 to detect, the count sensor 2128 to detect the game ball supported at a position different from the second start port sensor 2127 and received in the big prize opening 2103, and the attacker drive mechanism base 2126 are supported on the upper surface. It includes a start port solenoid 2121, an attacker solenoid 2124, a second start port sensor 2127, and an attacker unit relay board 2130 for relaying the connection between the count sensor 2128 and the main control board 4100.

Although not shown, the starting port solenoid 2121 has a plunger that can be advanced and retreated by energization and is urged in the protruding direction by a coil spring, and the second starting port 2102 is located below the first starting port 2101. At the rear position of, the plunger is supported by the start port drive mechanism base 2123 so as to project forward. In the attacker unit 2100 of this example, when the start port solenoid 2121 is energized, the plunger of the start port solenoid 2121 retracts against the urging force of the coil spring, and a pair of movable pieces are interposed via a transmission member engaged with the tip of the plunger. The upper ends of the 2105s rotate in directions separated from each other, and the second starting port 2102 is in an open state.

Further, the starting port drive mechanism base 2123 is formed in a box shape so that the starting port solenoid 2121 can be accommodated and supported from the front side, and is received by the first starting port 2101 on the upper surface and is received by the base plate 2110. The first guide portion 2123a that guides the game ball that has flowed through the portion 2110b to the right in front view, and the game ball that is formed below the portion that supports the start port solenoid 2121 and is received by the second start port 2102. It is equipped with a second guide portion (detailed illustration is omitted) that floats downward.

Although not shown, the attacker solenoid 2124 in the attacker drive unit 2120 has a plunger that can be moved forward and backward by energization and is urged in the protruding direction by a coil spring, like the start port solenoid 2121. In the attacker unit 2100 of this example, when the attacker solenoid 2124 is energized, the plunger of the attacker solenoid 2124 is immersed, and the upper end of the opening / closing member 2106 moves relatively forward via the transmission member engaged with the tip of the plunger. The large winning opening 2103 is opened.

In the attacker unit 2100 of this example, the first starting port 2101 and the general winning opening 2104 are in a state where the game ball can be constantly received. On the other hand, in the second starting port 2102, a pair of movable starting port solenoids 2121 are driven by energization according to a normal lottery result in which a game ball is drawn by passing through the gate portion 2401 in the gate member 2400 described later. The piece 2105 is expanded so that it can be accepted. Further, in the large winning opening 2103, the special lottery result is determined according to the special lottery result (for example, the special lottery result is "big hit") when the game ball is received (starting prize) in the first starting opening 2101 or the second starting opening 2102. ”), The attacker solenoid 2124 is energized and driven so that the opening / closing member 2106 opens / closes in a predetermined pattern and can be accepted.

Further, although not shown, the attacker unit 2100 is provided with a first large winning opening decorative board supported by the lower part of the attacker drive mechanism base 2126 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface, and the inside of the large winning opening 2103 is provided. It can be decorated with light emission.

Further, in the attacker unit 2100, the game ball received in the first starting port 2101 is sent to the right ball discharge passage 3106b of the right ball guiding member 3106 in the ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, which will be described later. ing. Further, the game ball received by the second starting port 2102 is discharged downward after being detected by the second starting port sensor 2127 supported by the attacker drive mechanism base 2126. Further, the game ball received in the large winning opening 2103 is discharged downward after being detected by the count sensor 2128.

In the attacker unit 2100 of the present embodiment, the attacker solenoid 2124 is arranged so that the advance / retreat direction of the plunger 2124a is in the left-right direction, and the attacker solenoid 2124 is arranged at a position as close as possible to the opening / closing member 2106. Therefore, the dimensions of the attacker unit 2100 in the front-rear direction can be shortened by 5 to 30% as compared with the conventional product, and the rear space of the attacker unit 2100 can be secured more widely. ..

[2-3. Side winning opening member]
Subsequently, the side winning opening member 2200 of the table unit 2000 in the game board 4 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 119 to 121. FIG. 119 is a perspective view of the side winning opening member viewed diagonally from the front right, and FIG. 120 is a perspective view of the side winning opening member viewed diagonally from the front left. Further, FIG. 121 is a perspective view of the side winning opening member as viewed from the rear.

The side winning opening member 2200 in the game board 4 is located at the lower part on the left side from the center in the left-right direction of the game panel 1150, and is on the front side with respect to the opening 1158 formed on the left side of the opening 1158 into which the attacker unit 2100 is inserted and fixed. It is inserted from the front and fixed to the front surface of the game panel 1150, and is formed along the inner circumference of the game area 1100. The side winning opening member 2200 includes four general winning openings 2201 that open diagonally upward and are capable of always accepting a game ball, and the four general winning openings 2201 face each other back to each other. It is arranged like this.

Further, more specifically, the side winning opening member 2200 of this example has a ball passing hole 2210a attached to the front surface of the game panel 1150 and formed at a position corresponding to each general winning opening 2201, and has a translucent property on the front surface. A plate-shaped main body base 2210 having a relief-like decoration and two receiving / receiving members 2211 attached to the front side of the ball passage hole 2210a in the main body base 2210 and formed with a pair of general winning openings 2201 facing back. A plate-shaped front decoration 2212 that connects the front ends of the two receiving / receiving members 2211 and forms a gap through which a game ball can pass between the front ends of the main body base 2210 and the rear side of the main body base 2210. A transparent lens member 2213, a side winning opening decorative substrate 2214 arranged behind the lens member 2213 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a substrate covering the rear side of the side winning opening decorative substrate 2214. It is equipped with a cover 2215.

The main body base 2210 in the side winning opening member 2200 further includes a gutter portion 2210b that extends rearward from each ball passing opening 2210a and guides a game ball that has passed through the ball passing opening 2210a to the rear side. Further, the receiving / receiving member 2210 is provided with a short shelf portion 2211a having a lower right side on the upper side of the pair of general winning openings 2201 arranged in the back direction, while having a predetermined decoration on the front surface. The game ball that has fallen on 2211a can be guided to the right. Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, the lens member 2213 is provided with a plurality of prism-shaped lenses, so that the light from the LED of the side winning opening decorative substrate 2214 can be diffused in multiple directions brilliantly. ing.

The side winning opening member 2200 can make the main body base 2210 (side winning opening member 2200) emit light by emitting light from the LED of the side winning opening decorative substrate 2214.

[2-4. Side guide member]
Subsequently, the side guide member 2300 of the table unit 2000 in the game board 4 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 114 and 115. The side guiding member 2300 in the game board 4 is formed above the opening 1158 in which the side winning opening member 2200 is inserted and fixed at a position on the left side of the center in the left-right direction and below the center in the vertical direction in the game panel 1150. It is inserted from the front side with respect to the opening 1158 and then fixed to the front surface of the game panel 1150.

The side guide member 2300 of this example has a shelf portion 2301a that is attached to the front surface of the game panel 1150 and protrudes forward at a position lower than the center in the vertical direction and has a lower right end, and has a relief shape having translucency. A substantially plate-shaped main body 2301 having the decoration of the above, a lens member 2302 arranged on the rear side of the main body 2301 and having translucency, and a plurality of LEDs arranged on the rear side of the lens member 2302 and mounted on the front surface. It includes a side-guided decorative substrate 2304 and a substrate cover 2305 that covers the rear side of the side-guided decorative substrate 2304.

The side guiding member 2300 can guide the game ball flowing down along the left end of the game area 1100 to the right by the shelf portion 2301a. Further, although not shown, the lens member 2302 is provided with a plurality of prism-shaped lenses so that the light from the LED of the side guide decorative substrate 2303 can be diffused in multiple directions brilliantly. .. The side guide member 2300 can make the main body portion 2301 emit light by emitting light from the LED of the side guide decorative substrate 2304.

[2-5. Gate member]
Next, the gate member 2400 of the table unit 2000 in the game board 4 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 114 and 115. The gate member 2400 in the game board 4 is inserted from the front side into the opening 1158 formed in the game panel 1150 on the left side of the center in the left-right direction and slightly above the center in the vertical direction, and then the game panel. It is fixed to the front surface of the 1150. The gate member 2200 has a gate portion 2401 having a width through which only one game ball can pass, and the gate sensor 2402 arranged in the gate portion 2401 detects the game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2401. You can do it.

The gate member 2400 of this example is formed to have a shorter length in the front-rear direction as compared with the conventional gate member, and the portion rearward from the front surface of the game panel 1150 is the thickness of the game panel 1150. It is designed to fit inside. That is, only the wiring cord connected to the gate sensor 2402 extends from the rear surface of the game panel 1150.

[2-6. Center role]
Subsequently, the center accessory 2500 of the table unit 2000 in the game board 4 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 122 to 126. 122 is a front view of the center accessory, FIG. 123 is a perspective view of the center accessory as viewed from the front, and FIG. 124 is a perspective view of the center accessory as viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 125 is an exploded perspective view of the center accessory disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 126 is an exploded perspective view of the center accessory disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. be.

The center accessory 2500 of this example is inserted from the front side into an opening 1158 formed so as to penetrate substantially the center of the plate-shaped game panel 1150, and is fixed to the front surface of the game panel 1150. As shown in the figure, it is provided with a large window portion 2501 having a frame shape occupying most of the game area 1100 and penetrating in the front-rear direction. The window portion 2501 in the center accessory 2500 is set to be about 0.35 times the height of the game area 1100 (game panel 1150).

In this center accessory 2500, the shape of the outer circumference of the upper frame is inclined linearly at a steep angle from approximately the center to the left side in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and then decreases by a predetermined amount, and then gradually decreases toward the left side. It has a plurality of inclined step shapes. On the other hand, the outer peripheral shape on the right side of the upper frame of the center accessory 2500 is a curved shape (arc shape) substantially along the inner circumference of the game area 1100.

Further, in the center accessory 2500, the outer peripheral shape of the left frame is formed in a substantially straight line hanging downward, and the outer peripheral shape of the right frame is continuous with the curved upper part and below the left frame. It has an arc shape substantially along the inner circumference of the extended game area 1100. Further, the center accessory 2500 is formed in a gently curved shape so that the shape of the lower frame is the lowest from the lower end of the left frame to the center in the left-right direction, and from the position of about 3/4 of the whole from the left end. It has a shape that hangs down in an arc shape toward the lower end of the right frame.

As described above, the outer circumference on the right side of the upper frame and the outer circumference on the right side of the center accessory 2500 have a shape substantially along the inner circumference of the game area 1100, and when attached to the game panel 1150, the center accessory 2500 has a shape. A gap slightly larger than the outer shape of the game ball is formed on the outer circumference on the right side of the center accessory 2500. Further, in the center accessory 2500, the left side of the upper frame, the left frame, and the lower frame are shaped as described above, and when attached to the game panel 1150, the game area is on the outer periphery of the left side of the center accessory 2500. A region having a predetermined width is formed from the inner circumference of the 1100.

The center accessory 2500 includes a plate-shaped flange portion 2502 that abuts on the front surface of the game panel 1150, and a game ball that bulges forward from the flange portion 2502 and flows down in the game area 1100 with a substantially center in the left-right direction as a boundary. The peripheral wall portion 2503 that guides the game ball to the left and right and prevents the game ball from entering the frame, and the center accessory 2500 open to the outer peripheral surface on the left side of the peripheral wall portion 2503 located on the front side of the game panel 1150 to open the game area 1100. The warp inlet 2504 (see FIG. 110) that allows the flowing game ball to enter, the warp outlet 2505 that discharges the game ball that has entered the warp inlet 2504 into the frame, and the game ball released from the warp outlet 2505. It is provided with a stage 2510 arranged under the lower inner edge of the window portion 2501 after being rolled in the left-right direction and then discharged into the game area 1100 on the upper side of the attacker unit 2100 and recirculated.

The stage 2510 in the center accessory 2500 will be described in detail later, but the first stage 2511 to which the game ball released from the warp outlet 2505 is supplied and the first stage 2511 arranged directly under the first stage 2511. It is provided with a second stage 2512, which is supplied from the game ball and is capable of releasing the game ball into the game area 1100. The first stage 2511 has a curved shape so that both ends in the left-right direction are higher as a whole, and is formed in a wavy shape so that the substantially center of the game area 1100 in the left-right direction is slightly higher. Further, the second stage 2512 is formed in a curved surface shape so that the substantially center of the game area 1100 in the left-right direction is lowered.

The stage 2510 of the center accessory 2500 entered the chance entrance 2513 and the chance entrance 2513, which opened forward toward the rear side of the game area 1100 in the first stage 2511 in the left-right direction and allowed the game ball to enter. It is equipped with a chance exit 2514, which is arranged just below the chance entrance 2513 under the second stage 2512 where the game ball is released and opens toward the front. The game ball that has entered the chance entrance 2513 chance entrance 2513 is discharged from the chance exit 2514 into the game area 1100. Further, as shown in FIG. 108 and the like, the chance exit 2514 is arranged directly above the first starting port 2101 in the attacker unit 2100, and the game ball released from the chance exit 2514 has a high probability of being the first. It is designed to be accepted (winning) to the starting port 2101.

More specifically, the center accessory 2500 of this example has a peripheral wall portion 2503, a warp entrance 2504, and a chance exit 2514, and a center decorative member 2520 formed three-dimensionally by decorating substantially the entire center accessory 2500. A frame-shaped base member 2530 that supports the rear side of the center decoration member 2520 and has a flange portion 2502, a first stage 2511, and a second stage 2512, and a right frame rear decoration supported on the rear side of the right frame of the base member 2530. A member 2540, a warp passage member 2550 supported on the rear side of the left frame of the base member 2530 and having a warp outlet 2505, and a semicircular lower right movable guide unit 2560 supported on the lower right front side of the base member 2530. It includes a horizontally long movable upper frame movable decorative unit 2580 supported on the rear side of the upper frame of the base member 2530, and a stage back decorative member 2600 supported on the rear side of the lower frame of the base member 2530 and having a chance entrance 2513. ..

Further, the center accessory 2500 includes a plurality of decorative substrates for light-emitting decoration of the center decorative member 2520, the stage 2510, and the like. Specifically, the center accessory 2500 includes an arc-shaped lower right side decorative substrate 2611 supported on the front side of the base member 2530 along the right side surface of the lower right movable guide unit 2560 on the rear side of the center decorative member 2520. , A center lower left decorative substrate 2612 supported on the lower left front side of the base member 2530 on the rear side of the center decorative member 2520.

Further, the center accessory 2500 is supported on the lower right rear side of the base member 2530 above the lower right movable guide unit 2560 and is formed in a substantially L shape along the frame, and the right side middle decorative substrate 2613 and the right. The decorative substrate 2614 on the right side, which is formed in an arc shape so as to be continuous on the upper side of the decorative substrate 2613 in the side and is supported on the rear side of the base member 2530, and the decorative substrate 2614 on the right side, which is supported on the rear side of the left frame of the base member 2530 and extends in the vertical direction. It is provided with a center left decorative substrate 2615 and an upper decorative substrate 2616 that is supported above the upper frame movable decorative unit 2580 on the rear side of the upper frame of the base member 2530 and extends in the left-right direction. Further, the center accessory 2500 further includes a stage right decorative substrate 2617 and a stage left decorative substrate 2618 that are supported under the stage 2510 on the rear side of the lower frame of the base member 2530.

[2-6A. Center decoration member]
Next, the center decorative member 2520 in the center accessory 2500 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 125 and 126. The center decorative member 2520 in the center accessory 2500 is formed in a frame shape by a plurality of decorative members so that a part of the window portion 2501 can be formed, and is right in the lower right of the front view. It is possible to form a substantially semicircular lower right window portion 2521 on which the lower movable guide unit 2560 can face. Each of the decorative members constituting the center decorative member 2520 of this example is formed into a linear shape with a swirling wave as a motif, and has a metallic luster of a predetermined color (here, gold) on the surface of the relief member 2520a and the relief member 2520a. It is provided with a lens member 2520b which is arranged on the rear side and has translucency. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the lens member 2520b has a streamlined pattern having irregularities on its surface, and has a colorless transparent portion and a colored transparent portion (here, a blue transparent portion) along the streamlined pattern. ) And are arranged as appropriate, and the flow of water is expressed.

Further, the center decoration member 2520 is arranged in the upper part of the center of the front view, which is located above the upper frame movable decoration unit 2580, in addition to the peripheral wall portion 2503, the warp entrance 2504, and the chance exit 2514, and imitates an arch-shaped skylight. The central upper decorative portion 2522, the central upper decorative substrate 2523 mounted on the rear side of the central upper decorative portion 2522 and the LED mounted on the front surface, and the lower center of the front view, which is the lower position of the stage 2510, are arranged. It is equipped with a plate-shaped lower center decorative portion 2524, which has decorations with arabesque and wave motifs and has a chance exit 2514 penetrating in the front-rear direction. The central upper decorative portion 2522 is entirely formed of a milky white member, and is given a predetermined decoration by a plating layer having a metallic luster (here, gold) on the surface. Further, the central lower decorative portion 2524 is entirely covered with a plating layer having a metallic luster (here, gold) so that the rear side cannot be seen.

Further, the center decorative member 2520 is provided with a horizontally long rectangular concave portion 2525 having an open lower portion on the lower side of the central upper decorative portion 2522, and the details will be described later, but the upper frame movable decorative unit is provided in the concave portion 2525. The upper frame movable decoration body 2581 of the 2580 is arranged, and the rear end of the recess 2525 is closed by the front surface of the upper frame movable decoration body drive mechanism 2582 of the upper frame movable decoration unit 2580.

Further, the center decorative member 2520 can extend from the rear end of the portion of the peripheral wall portion 2503 along the lower right window portion 2521 to the outside on the opposite side of the lower right window portion 2521 and come into contact with the front surface of the game panel 1150. It is provided with a flange portion 2526 and a plate-shaped extension piece 2527 extending outward from the front end side of the peripheral wall portion 2503 so as to oppose the flange portion 2526. A plurality of protrusions 2526a extending radially around the center of the game area 1100 are formed at positions of the flange portion 2526 facing the extension piece 2527 (see FIG. 123). Further, although not shown, radial protrusions are formed on the surface of the extension piece 2527 facing the flange portion 2526 at positions alternating with the protrusions 2526a. As a result, the game ball that has flowed down along the peripheral wall portion 2503 comes into contact with the protrusion 2526a or the like, so that the speed of the game ball can be reduced, and the game ball that has flowed down along the inner circumference on the right side of the game area 1100 can be reduced. It is possible to vigorously hit the attacker unit 2100, the side winning opening member 2200, the out opening 1151, and the like to prevent them from being damaged.

In the center accessory 2500 of this example, the central upper decorative substrate 2523 is located behind the central upper decorative portion 2522 in the center decorative member 2520, and the LED mounted on the front surface of the central upper decorative substrate 2523 is provided. By emitting light, the central upper decorative portion 2522 can be appropriately illuminated and decorated. Further, in the center accessory 2500, on the rear side of the lens member 2520b in the center decorative member 2520, the right side lower decorative substrate 2611, the center left lower decorative substrate 2612, the right side middle decorative substrate 2613, the right side upper decorative substrate 2614, and the center left The decorative substrate 2615 and the upper decorative substrate 2616 are located, and the center decorative member 2520 can be light-emitting and decorated by appropriately emitting the LED mounted on each decorative substrate.

[2-6B. Base member of center accessory]
Next, the base member 2530 in the center accessory 2500 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 125 and 126. The base member 2530 of the center accessory 2500 has a frame-shaped base main body 2531 attached to the front surface of the game panel 1150 and a first stage member 2532 attached to the lower edge inside the frame of the base main body 2531 and having a first stage 2511. A second stage member 2533 attached to the base body 2531 under the first stage member 2532 and having a second stage 2512, and a plate attached to a predetermined position on the outer periphery of the base body 2531 and decorated on the front surface. It is provided with a decorative member 2534 and the like.

The base body 2531 in the base member 2531 has a ball passage hole 2531a that penetrates in the front-rear direction through which a game ball that has entered the warp entrance 2504 can pass, and a game that has entered the chance entrance 2513 and is guided downward by the stage back decorative member 2600. It is provided with a ball guide passage 2531b for guiding the ball to the chance exit 2514, and a concave mounting portion 2531c for accommodating and fixing the lower right movable guide unit 2560.

The base body 2531 is entirely formed of a substantially colorless and transparent member, and a right side middle decorative substrate 2613, a right side upper decorative substrate 2614, a center left decorative substrate 2615, and an upper decorative substrate 2616 are arranged on the rear side. A plurality of prism-shaped lens portions are formed on the rear surface of the lens to diffuse the light from the LEDs of each decorative substrate and to make it difficult to see the rear side through the transparent lens member 2520b of the center decorative member 2520. ..

The first stage member 2532 and the second stage member 2533 in the base member 2530 are each formed of a transparent member. Further, the decorative member 2534 in the base member 2530 is formed of an opaque member, and when attached to the front surface of the base body 2531, a flange where a portion extending from the outer periphery of the base body 2531 comes into contact with the front surface of the game panel 1150. It is designed to be part 2502.

[2-6C. Decorative member after right frame]
Next, the right frame rear decorative member 2540 in the center accessory 2500 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 125 and 126. The left side surface side of the right frame rear decorative member 2540 of the center accessory 2500 forms the left inner edge of the window portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500, and is arranged toward the center side (left side) of the window portion 2501. A linear relief member 2541 having a metallic luster (here, gold), a lens member 2542 arranged on the right side of the relief member 2541 and having translucency, and a lens member arranged on the right side of the lens member 2542. The right frame rear decorative board 2543 on which a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light to the 2542 side are mounted, and the relief member 2541, the lens member 2542, and the right frame rear decorative board 2543 are arranged on the right side of the right frame rear decorative board 2543. It is provided with a curved mounting base 2544, which is supported and mounted on the rear side of the base member 2530.

The relief member 2541 of the right frame rear decorative member 2540 is provided with a plurality of heart-shaped openings in the vertical direction, although detailed illustration is omitted. Further, the lens member 2542 of the right frame rear decorative member 2540 is entirely composed of a transparent member, and the portion corresponding to the heart-shaped opening in the relief member 2541 is formed in a frosted glass shape, and the others. Is formed by a colorless transparent portion and a colored transparent portion, and a plurality of prism-shaped lens portions are formed on the back side (the side opposite to the relief member 2541). The right frame rear decoration member 2540 can be entirely luminescent and decorated by appropriately causing the LED mounted on the right frame rear decoration substrate 2543 to emit light.

[2-6D. Warp passage member]
Next, the warp passage member 2550 in the center accessory 2500 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 125 and 126. The warp passage member 2550 of the center accessory 2500 enters the warp entrance 2504 and guides the game ball that has passed through the ball passage hole 2531a of the base body 2531 in the base member 2530 downward, and the passage body 2551 whose rear side is opened. It is provided with a plate-shaped passage cover 2552 that closes the rear side of the passage body 2551 and is attached to the rear side of the base member 2530. The passage body 2551 of the warp passage member 2550 is formed of a transparent member whose colorless and transparent part is colored transparent (here, blue), so that the guiding game ball can be visually recognized from the outside. .. Further, an opening 2551a facing the rear side of the ball passage hole 2531a of the base body 2531 in the base member 2530 is formed at the upper end of the passage body 2551, and a warp outlet 2505 is formed at the lower end. The passage cover 2552 is formed of a colorless and transparent member.

[2-6E. Lower right movable guidance unit]
Next, the lower right movable guide unit 2560 in the center accessory 2500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 127 to 132. FIG. 127 is a front view of the lower right movable guide unit in the center accessory, and FIG. 128 is a perspective view of the lower right movable guide unit as viewed from the front. Further, FIG. 129 is an exploded perspective view of the lower right movable guide unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 130 is an exploded perspective view of the lower right movable guide unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 131 is a cross-sectional view showing the lower right movable guide unit in FIG. 127 cut along the line AA. Further, FIG. 132 is a front view showing the lower right movable guide unit together with the lower right movable decorative substrate.

The lower right movable guide unit 2560 of this example has a front view that imitates a messenger equipped on a ship, and is viewed from the front centering on a shaft portion 2561a and a shaft portion 2561a extending rearward. A frame-shaped movable frame 2561 having a fan-shaped outer shape and having a guide window 2561b penetrating in the front-rear direction, and a substantially semicircular shape arranged behind the movable frame 2561 and centered on the shaft portion 2561a of the movable frame 2561. A guide board 2562, which is formed and has substantially the same size as the guide window 2561b of the movable frame 2561 and is provided in a plurality of rows in the circumferential direction, and supports the rear side of the guide board 2562 at a position corresponding to each guide part 2562a. A base member 2563 having a plurality of partition windows 2563a penetrating in the front-rear direction, and a movable frame attached to the rear side of the base member 2563 and having a movable frame 2561 shaft portion 2561a attached to a rotating shaft to rotate and drive the movable frame 2561. It is equipped with a drive motor 2564.

The movable frame 2561 of the lower right movable guide unit 2560 is arranged outside the guide window 2561b in the radial direction and has an arcuate outer window 2561c penetrating in the front-rear direction, and is arranged between the outer window 2561c and the guide window 2561b to have an outer shape. It further has a hexagonal and translucent lens portion 2561d. In the lower right movable guide unit 2560, a plating layer having a metallic luster (here, silver) is formed on the entire surface of the frame-shaped portion. Further, the lens portion 2561d in the movable frame 2561 is formed in a convex curved surface shape on the front surface side and a plurality of prism shapes on the rear surface side.

The guide plate 2562 of the lower right movable guide unit 2566 is made of a milky white member having translucency as a whole, and extends rearward as the radial outer side of the plurality of guide portions 2562a goes outward. It is formed in a conical shape. On the front surface of the guide board 2562, a plurality of (here, four) guide portions 2562a having the same shape as the guide window 2561b of the movable frame 2561 and having the same size are arranged in a row in the circumferential direction, and "SLOW" from the lower side. The characters "HALF", "FULL", and "SOS" are displayed in a blank state (with a black border). Further, the guide board 2562 has a hexagonal translucent portion 2562b that is smaller than the lens portion 2561d of the movable frame 2561 and penetrates in the front-rear direction at substantially the center of the outer edge extending in the circumferential direction away from the axis of each guide portion 2562a. Have.

In the base member 2563 of the lower right movable guide unit 2563, the peripheral wall of each partition window 2563a corresponding to the guide portion 2562a of the guide board 2562 is formed in a plate shape extending rearward as shown in FIG. 129 and the like. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the LED 2565a corresponding to the predetermined guide portion 2562a in the lower right movable decorative substrate 2565 from irradiating another guide portion 2562a or the like to cause light emission decoration (light emission guidance). ..

Further, the lower right movable guide unit 2560 is arranged behind the base member 2563, and has an LED 2565a corresponding to each guide portion 2562a in the guide board 2562, an LED 2565b corresponding to each translucent portion 2562b, and a guide portion 2562a. Further, an LED 2565c arranged on the outer side in the radial direction and a fan-shaped lower right movable decorative substrate 2565 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface are further provided (see FIG. 132 and the like). The lower right movable decorative substrate 2565 can independently emit and decorate each guide portion 2562a, the translucent portion 2562b, etc. of the guide board 2562 by appropriately emitting light of each LED 2565a, 2565b, 2565c. ing. Further, in this example, the LED 2565b arranged behind the translucent portion 2562b corresponding to the guide portion 2562a of "SOS" is regarded as an ultra-bright LED, and can emit a flash. ..

Further, the lower right movable guide unit 2560 is arranged between the guide board 2562 and the base member 2563 at a position radially outside the guide portion 2562a in the guide board 2562, and the light from the LED 2565b of the lower right movable decorative substrate 2565 is arranged. 2566 is provided with a plurality of lens members 2566 having a light guide portion 2566a whose front end is inserted into the translucent portion 2562b of the guide plate 2562.

Further, the lower right movable guide unit 2560 has a detection member 2567 having a detection piece 2567a fixed to the rear end of the shaft portion 2561a in the movable frame 2561 and extending in a direction perpendicular to the axis, and a predetermined position of the base member 2563. It is equipped with a movable frame position detection sensor 2568 that is attached to and detects the detection piece 2567a of the detection member 2567. By detecting the detection piece 2567a by the movable frame position detection sensor 2568, it is possible to detect that the movable frame 2561 is located at the lowermost "SLOW" guide portion 2562a.

In the figure, reference numeral 2569 is an arc-shaped decorative member arranged on the outer periphery of the guide plate 2562 and attached to the front surface of the base member 2563, and a plating layer having a metallic luster (here, silver) is formed on the surface thereof. Has been done.

In the lower right movable guide unit 2560 of this example, the movable frame 2561 can be rotated within a predetermined angle range by the movable frame drive motor 2564, and the guide window 2561b of the movable frame 2561 is the guide board 2562. The movable frame 2561 rotates and stops so as to coincide with each guide portion 2562a on which the characters "SLOW", "HALF", "FULL", and "SOS" are written in front view. Further, when the lower right movable guide unit 2566 rotates the movable frame 2561 to match the guide window 2561b with the guide portion 2562a of the guide board 2562, the lens portion 2561d of the movable frame 2561 transmits light of the guide board 2562. It is designed to coincide with the portion 2562b.

The lower right movable guide unit 2560 has LED2565a of the lower right movable decorative board 2565 corresponding to the guide portion 2562a on which predetermined characters are written according to the gaming state (for example, the special lottery result drawn by the start winning prize). In addition to causing light emission, the movable frame 2561 can be rotated to the position of the light emitting guide portion 2562a to give a notice effect such as the arrival of a chance to the player.

Further, in the lower right movable guide unit 2560, when the guide portion 2562a is made to emit light, the LED 2565b arranged behind the translucent portion 2562b corresponding to the guide portion 2562a is made to emit light. The light from the LED 2565b is guided forward by the light guide portion 2566a of the lens member 2566, is irradiated forward through the corresponding translucent portion 2562b of the guide plate 2562, and is further directed to the front side of the translucent portion 2562b. The lens portion 2561d of the movable frame 2561 located is widely diffused to the front side (player side) (see FIG. 131). As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to notice the light emission of the LED 2562a (light emission of the lens portion 2561d in the movable frame 2561), and the player's line of sight can be directed to the lower right movable effect guide arranged at the right end of the game area 1100. Since it can be directed to the member 2560, the guidance by the guide window 2561b of the movable frame 2561 and the light emission of the guide portion 2562a can be recognized, and the player's expectation for the game can be raised.

As described above, in the lower right movable guide unit 2560 of this example, when the game ball driven into the game area 1100 is received by the first starting port 2101 and the second starting port 2102, the special lottery result is drawn. Any guide portion 2562a of the guide board 2562 in the lower right movable guide unit 256 of the center accessory 2500 arranged in the lower right corner in the game area 1100 according to the lottery special lottery result is the lower right movable decorative board 2565. At the same time as the light is emitted by the corresponding LED 2562a, the frame-shaped movable frame 2561 moves to the guide portion 2562a which is guided by the movable frame drive motor 2564, and the corresponding LED 2565b of the lower right movable decorative substrate 2565 emits light and the movable frame 2561. Since the lens portion 2561d of the above is shining, it is possible to make it easier for the player to notice the light emission guidance of the guide portion 2562a, and it is possible to pay attention to the guidance effect by the lower right movable guide unit 2560. Therefore, it is possible to reduce as much as possible from overlooking the guidance effect by the lower right movable guide unit 2560 and to avoid feeling lost, and at the same time, it is possible to reliably provide the guide portion 2562a that has been guided by light emission. The notation of the guide unit 2562a can be visually recognized, and the player's expectation for the game can be increased and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed.

Further, since the guide board 2562 having a plurality of guide portions 2562a with different guide notations is provided, the player can be made to recognize in advance what kind of guide portion 2562a is provided. Before the arbitrary guide portion 2562a is light-emittingly guided by the lower right movable decorative substrate 2565 and the movable frame 2561 according to the result of the special lottery by the start winning prize, the player is given a guide notation of the desired content. It is possible to get excited by whether or not the guide portion 2562a is guided by light emission, and it is possible to raise the expectation of the player and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, since the plurality of guide portions 2562a in the guide portion 2562 have the same section, that is, the same outer shape (here, fan shape), one movable frame 2561 can correspond to each guide portion 2562a, and a plurality of guide portions 2562a can be provided. It is not necessary to use a movable frame or a deformable movable frame, and it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost related to the movable frame 2561 (pachinko machine 1).

In addition, since it is equipped with a liquid crystal display device 1900 capable of displaying a production image, a guidance effect for guiding the contents of the special lottery result by the start winning can be performed by the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the lower right movable guidance unit 2560. Alternatively, it can be performed by both, and the variation of the production can be increased to make it harder to get bored, and the player can be entertained, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest in the game.

Further, since the guide board 2562 having the plurality of guide portions 2562a is arranged in the lower right corner in the game area 1100, the lower right movable guide unit 2560 interferes with the game ball driven into the game area 1100. Can be avoided as much as possible, and the pachinko machine 1 can be used to ensure that the movement of the game ball is enjoyed within the game area 1100.

Further, the movable frame 2561 can be moved (rotated) on the front side of the guide board 2562, and it is probable that a certain gap is formed between the guide board 2562 and the movable frame 2561. Therefore, a predetermined distance is provided between the LED 2565b of the lower right movable decorative substrate 2565 and the lens portion 2561d of the movable frame 2561, and the light from the LED 2565b can be diffused more widely by the lens portion 2561d. It is possible to easily notice the brilliance of the lens portion 2561d regardless of the relative position between the lens portion and the lower right movable guide unit 2560.

Further, since the plurality of guide portions 2562a are arranged in an arc shape, the movable frame 2561 may be rotated about the axis of the arc, and the movable frame drive motor as a drive mechanism for rotating the movable frame 2561. The rotation of 2564 can be directly used, the configuration related to the drive mechanism can be simplified as much as possible, the drive mechanism can be miniaturized, and the guide plate 2562 and the like can be made relatively large. Therefore, the guide portion 2562a, the movable frame 2561, and the like can be enlarged to make it easier to see, and the pachinko machine 1 capable of reliably producing the above-mentioned effects can be obtained. Further, since the plurality of guide portions 2562a are arranged in an arc shape and the guide boards 2562 can be compactly organized, it is possible to easily secure a space for arranging the lower right movable guide unit 2560 in the game area 1100. It is possible to reliably embody the pachinko machine 1 equipped with the lower right movable guide unit 2560.

Further, since the movable frame 2561 is formed in a frame shape surrounding the outer circumference of the guide portion 2562a of the guide board 2562, the outer circumference of the guide portion 2562a whose light emission is guided by the lower right movable decorative substrate 2565 is formed by the frame-shaped movable frame 2561. By enclosing it, the guidance notation given to the guide unit 2562a that guides the light emission can be emphasized and conspicuous, making it easier to notice the guidance effect by the lower right movable guide unit 2566, and ensuring the above-mentioned action and effect. It can be played.

Further, since the movable frame 2561 is formed into a frame shape and surrounds the outer periphery of the guide portion 2562a of the guide board 2562 to point to an arbitrary guide portion 2562a that has been light-guided, the guide required for arranging the movable frame 2561 is provided. The space outside the portion 2562a can be made as small as possible, and the size of the lower right movable guide unit 256 can be suppressed from becoming large, so that the space can be easily arranged in the game area 1100. Further, it is possible to suppress an increase in the space outside the guide portion 2562a, and the ratio of each guide portion 2562a to the entire lower right movable guide unit 2563 can be relatively increased, so that the guide portion 2562a is easy to see. It is possible to make it easier for the guide unit 2562a to notice the guide effect, and it is possible to entertain the guide effect to the player, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in the interest of the player in the game. It can be a pachinko machine 1.

[2-6F. Upper frame movable decoration unit]
Next, the upper frame movable decoration unit 2580 in the center accessory 2500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 133 to 139. FIG. 133 is a perspective view of the upper frame movable decoration unit of the center accessory as viewed from the front, and FIG. 134 is a perspective view of the upper frame movable decoration unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 135 is an exploded perspective view of the upper frame movable decoration unit disassembled into an upper frame movable decoration body and an upper frame movable decoration body drive mechanism, and FIG. 136 is an exploded perspective view of the upper frame movable decoration unit as an upper frame movable decoration. It is an exploded perspective view which was disassembled into the body and the upper frame movable decorative body drive mechanism, and was seen later. Further, FIG. 137 is an exploded perspective view of the upper frame movable decorative body driving mechanism disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 138 is an exploded perspective view of the upper frame movable decorative body driving mechanism disassembled and viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 139 is an explanatory view showing the movement of the upper frame movable decorative unit in the center accessory from the front.

The upper frame movable decoration unit 2580 of the center accessory 2500 of this example is supported from the rear side on the rear side of the upper frame of the base member 2530 in the center accessory 2500, and the lower end is above the window portion 2501 in the center accessory 2500. It is designed to form part of the inner edge. The upper frame movable decoration unit 2580 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has an upper frame movable decoration body 2851 having a predetermined logo in line with the concept of the pachinko machine 1, and an upper frame movable decoration body 2581 in the vertical direction. It is equipped with an upper frame movable decorative body drive mechanism 2582 that slides and moves.

In the upper frame movable decorative body 2581 of the upper frame movable decorative unit 2580, a predetermined logo having a translucent property (detailed illustration is omitted) is formed in a relief shape, and the logo portion has a translucent logo. The member 2581a, the decorative member 2581b arranged behind the logo member 2581a and decorating the outer periphery of the logo member 2581a and having a metallic luster on the surface, the movable decorative body base 2581c supporting the rear side of the decorative member 2581b, and the movable decorative body. It includes an upper frame movable decorative substrate 2581d attached to the rear side of the base 2581c and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a substrate cover 2581e covering the rear side of the upper frame movable decorative substrate 2581d.

Further, the upper frame movable decorative body 2581 projects rearward from the vicinity of the left and right ends on the rear side of the substrate cover 2581e, and is supported by the support piece 2584b of the slider 2584 in the upper frame movable decorative body drive mechanism 2582, and each support. The portion 2581f is provided with 2581 g of extension pieces extending backward in a curved shape from the lower side to the lower side (see FIG. 136). The extension piece 2581 g of the substrate cover 2581e is the lower side of the slits 2583a, 2595a, 2596a and the slider 2584 of the front base 2583, the front decorative member 2595, and the lower decorative member 2596 in the upper frame movable decorative body drive mechanism 2582 described later. Is to cover.

Although not shown, the upper frame movable decorative body 2581 includes a sheet-shaped lens member arranged between the logo member 2581a and the decorative member 2581b and having a plurality of fine prisms on the surface thereof. The light from the LED of the frame movable decorative substrate 2581d can be diffused to uniformly illuminate and decorate the logo portion of the logo member 2581a.

Further, in the upper frame movable decorative body 2581 of this example, the movable decorative body base 2581c and the substrate cover 2581e are each formed of colored transparent (blue in this case) member, and the logo member 2581a is surrounded by the blue sea. It is possible to remind us of the image of being surrounded, and by making the LED of the upper frame movable decorative board 2581d emit light, the area around the logo glows blue. Although not shown, in the logo member 2581a, the outer periphery of the logo portion is surrounded by a plurality of polyhedral protrusions, and a plating layer having a metallic luster is formed on the surface of the portion excluding the logo portion. There is.

Further, the upper frame movable decorative body 2581 has a shape in which the outer shape of the decorative member 2581b substantially matches the inner shape of the recess 2525 in the center decorative member 2520, and the decoration applied to the decorative member 2581b is the center decorative member 2520. The decoration is continuous (similar) with the decoration made in the vicinity of the recess 2525 in.

On the other hand, the upper frame movable decorative body drive mechanism 2582 in the upper frame movable decorative unit 2580 is arranged vertically at a predetermined distance on the rear side of the plate-shaped front base 2583 extending in the left-right direction and the front base 2583. A pair of sliders 2584 that are slidably supported in the direction and have a rack gear 2584a on the rear surface, a pair of pinion gears 2585 that mesh with each rack gear 2584a in the pair of sliders 2584, and left and right coaxially with each pinion gear 2585. A pair of first transmission gears 2586 arranged on the center side in the direction, a first connection shaft 2587 that integrally rotatably connects the first transmission gear 2586 and an adjacent pinion gear 2585, and each first transmission gear 2586. A pair of second transmission gears 2588 arranged on the front side of the first transmission gear 2586, a long second connecting shaft 2589 that integrally rotatably connects the pair of second transmission gears 2588, and left and right. It covers the pinion gear 2585, the first transmission gear 2586, and the second transmission gear 2588, which are arranged apart from each other in the direction, and supports the pair of sliders 2584 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction in cooperation with the front base 2583. It is provided with a right rear base 2590 and a left rear base 2591, and an upper frame movable drive motor 2592 attached to the right rear base 2590 to rotationally drive the pinion gear 2585 on the right side of the front view.

Further, the upper frame movable decorative body drive mechanism 2582 is attached to the right rear base 2590 and the left rear base 2591, respectively, and supports the first connecting shaft 2587 and the second connecting shaft 2589 in a state of being separated by a predetermined distance in the front-rear direction. The presser foot 2593, the position detection sensor 2594 attached to the predetermined position of the right rear base 2590 to detect the movement position of the slider, and the upper frame movable decorative body drive mechanism 2582 substantially cover the front side of the front base 2583 and have a relief shape on the front surface. A colorless transparent plate-shaped front decorative member 2595 on which decoration is formed, and a transparent lower decorative member 2596 that is continuous with the lower end of the front decorative member 2595 and extends rearward to cover the lower surface of the upper frame movable decorative body mechanism 2582. And have.

The front base 2583 of the upper frame movable decorative body drive mechanism 2582 has a slit at a portion that slidably supports the sliders 2584 at both left and right ends, and the lower end is opened and penetrates in the front-rear direction and extends in the vertical direction. 2583a are formed respectively. The front base 2583 is entirely formed of a colorless and transparent member, and a predetermined relief-like decoration is formed on the front surface thereof.

Further, the slider 2584 of the upper frame movable decorative body drive mechanism 2582 has a rack gear 2584a extending in the vertical direction on the rear surface, a support piece 2584b protruding forward from the lower part of the front surface to support the upper frame movable decorative body 2581, and a front surface. A detection piece 2584c provided on the upper part of the slider 2584 on the right side of the view and detected by the outward extension position detection sensor 2594 is provided. In this slider 2584, the support portion 2581f of the upper frame movable decorative body 2581 is attached to the tip of the support piece 2584b. The slider 2584 is formed of an opaque (here, black) member.

Further, the front decorative body 2595 of the upper frame movable decorative body driving mechanism 2582 is provided with a slit 2595a that penetrates in the front-rear direction and is open downward at a position corresponding to the slit 2583a of the front base 2583. Further, the rear decorative member 2596 is provided with a slit 2596a that penetrates in the vertical direction and has an open front at a position corresponding to the slit 2595a of the front decorative member 2595. As a result, the support piece 2584b of the slider 2584 supported by the front base 2583 or the like protrudes forward through the slits 2583a, 2595a, 2596a of the front base 2583, the front decorative member 2595, and the lower decorative member 2596, and the slider 2594. The lower end of the lower decorative member 2596 can be projected downward through the slit 2596a of the lower decorative member 2596.

Further, in the front decorative member 2595 of the upper frame movable decorative body drive mechanism 2582, the front surface of the decoration in the center in the left-right direction is formed in a frosted glass shape, and the rear surface of other parts has a minute prism-like lens portion. A plurality of them are formed, and their diffuse refraction makes it difficult to see the rear side. Further, in the lower decorative member 2596, colorless and transparent parts and colored transparent parts (here, blue) are alternately formed in the left-right direction to imitate the flow of water, and a prism-like minute minute prism-like part is formed on the rear surface. A plurality of lens portions are formed so that the rear side is difficult to see. As shown in the figure, the lower decorative member 2596 has a form in which a portion corresponding to the right rear base 2590 and the left rear base 2591 greatly extends rearward, and the right rear base 2590 and the left rear base are formed from the player side. The underside of 2591 can be hidden.

Further, when the upper frame movable decorative body drive mechanism 2582 is attached to the upper part of the center accessory 2500, the front decorative member 2595 can close the rear end of the recess 2525 penetrating in the front-rear direction in the center decorative member 2520. The upper frame movable decorative body 2581 is arranged in the space surrounded by the recess 2525 and the front decorative member 2595 (see FIG. 139 and the like).

Subsequently, the movement of the upper frame movable decorative body drive mechanism 2582 will be described. In the upper frame movable decorative body mechanism 2582, when the pinion gear 2585 on the right side in the front view is rotationally driven by the upper frame movable drive motor 2592, the slider 2584 on the right side is driven by the rack gear 2584a of the slider 2584 on the right side meshed with the pinion gear 2585. Will slide up and down.

On the other hand, the rotation of the upper frame movable drive motor 2592 rotates the right side first transmission gear 2586 by the right first connecting shaft 2587 that rotates integrally with the right side pinion gear 2585 at the same time as the rotation drive of the right side pinion gear 2585. The second transmission gear 2588 on the right side meshed with the first transmission gear 2586 on the right side rotates in the opposite direction to the first transmission gear 2586 on the right side (pinion gear 2585 on the right side). .. By rotating the second transmission gear 2588 on the right side, the second transmission gear 2588 on the left side connected by the second connecting shaft 2589 also rotates integrally in the same direction and meshes with the second transmission gear 2588 on the left side. The first transmission gear 2586 on the left side rotates in the opposite direction to the second transmission gear 2588 on the left side, that is, in the same direction as the pinion gear 2585 on the right side. Then, by rotating the first transmission gear 2586 on the left side, the pinion gear 2585 on the left side, which is integrally rotatable by the first connecting shaft 2587 on the left side, rotates, and the slider 2584 on the left side meshed with the pinion gear 2585. The rack gear 2584a causes the left slider 2584 to slide in the same vertical direction as the right slider 2584.

As a result, the upper frame movable decorative body drive mechanism 2582 can simultaneously slide a pair of sliders 2584 separated from each other in the same direction when the upper frame movable drive motor 2592 is rotationally driven. By supporting the upper frame movable decoration body 2581 on the support piece 2584b of the left and right sliders 2584, the horizontally long upper frame movable decoration body 2581 can be slid (elevated) straight and smoothly in the vertical direction.

Further, since the upper frame movable decorative body drive mechanism 2582 slides the pair of sliders 2584 separated to the left and right in the vertical direction by one upper frame movable drive motor 2592, each slider 2584 is driven independently. Compared to the case where it is slid by a motor, the left and right sliders 2584 can be slid at the same time, and the upper frame movable decoration body 2581 can be slid straight through the support piece 2584b of the slider 2584. It has become.

Further, the upper frame movable decorative body drive mechanism 2582 has a long second connecting shaft 2589 extending in the left-right direction for integrally rotating the left and right pinion gears 2585, the first transmission gear 2586 and the second. Since the transmission gear 2588 is arranged in front of the rotation axis of the pinion gear 2585, the rear end between the right rear base 2590 and the left rear base 2591 separated to the left and right is positioned as forward as possible. It is possible to secure an empty space, and it is possible to satisfactorily arrange other members (here, the back upper middle movable production unit 3300 of the back unit 3000) on the rear side of the upper frame movable decoration unit 2580. ing.

As shown in FIG. 139 (a), in the upper frame movable decorative unit 2580, in a normal state (normal position), the upper frame movable decorative body 2581 is formed in the upper part of the frame of the center decorative member 2520 in the center accessory 2500. It is in a state of being housed in the recess 2525. In this normal state, as shown in the figure, there is almost no gap between the outer shape of the upper frame movable decoration body 2581 and the inner shape of the recess 2525, and the decorative member 2581b of the upper frame movable decoration body 2581 is in a state where there is almost no gap. The decoration is similar to the decoration around the recess 2525 in the center decorative member 2520, and the decoration is continuous. For the player, the upper frame movable decorative body 2581 and the center decorative member 2520 are integrated decorative members. It is possible to make an illusion.

Further, in the upper frame movable decoration unit 2580, when the upper frame movable drive motor 2592 is rotationally driven according to the gaming state (for example, the special lottery result drawn by the start winning prize), the upper frame movable decoration body 2581 is raised normally. From the state, it slides down to the appearance state (special position) (see FIG. 139 (b) and the like) in which a part of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is located in front of the liquid crystal display device 1900. This makes it possible to attract the player's attention to the upper movable decorative body 2581. As shown in the figure, when the upper frame movable decorative body 2581 is lowered, the front base 2583 of the upper frame movable decorative body drive mechanism 2582 arranged on the rear side, the front decorative member 2595, and the like appear, and the appearance is good. It is possible to prevent it from getting worse.

Therefore, the upper frame movable decoration unit 2580 in the center accessory 2500 of this example can be slid straight up and down by the upper frame movable decoration body driving mechanism 2582, so that the outer shape of the upper frame movable decoration body 2581 The gap between the center decorative member 2520 and the recess 2525 in the center accessory 2500 in which the upper frame movable decorative body 2581 is housed can be made as small as possible. As a result, the player can be made to think that the upper frame movable decorative body 2581 and the center decorative member 2520 of the center accessory 2500 are an integral decorative member, so that the upper frame movable decorative body 2581 can be used. When the upper frame movable decoration body 2581, which was thought to be immobile when moved (descended), moves, the player can be greatly surprised, and the player's attention can be strongly attracted, and an opportunity has arrived. It is possible to raise the expectation for the game by making people aware of it, and it is possible to suppress the decline in the interest.

Further, since the upper frame movable decoration unit 2580 is decorated so that the decoration of the decorative member 2581b in the upper frame movable decorative body 2581 is continuous with the decoration of the relief member 2520a in the adjacent center decorative member 2520, the upper frame is movable. When the decorative body 2581 is raised and housed in the recess 2525 of the center decorative member 2520, it is possible to make the illusion that the upper frame movable decorative body 2581 is a decorative member integrated with the center decorative member 2520. It is possible to produce the same action and effect as.

As described above, in this example, the upper frame movable decorative body of the center accessory 2500 arranged at a normal position on the front side of the liquid crystal display device 1900 arranged substantially in the center of the game area 1100 and outside the front surface of the front view. The same decoration is formed on the 2581 and the center decoration member 2520 of the center accessory 2500 that is in contact with a part of the outer periphery of the upper frame movable decoration body 2581, and a part is on the player side behind the upper frame movable decoration body 2581. Since the movable decoration body 3330 on the back side and the movable decoration body 3410 on the back side of the back unit 3000 are arranged so as to be seen from the inside, the player's interest can be seen in the production image of the liquid crystal display device 1900 and in the back side. By attracting to the movable decorative body 3330 or the like, the interest in the upper frame movable decorative body 2581 can be relatively lowered, and the player looks at the upper frame movable decorative body 2581 and the center decorative member 2520 indiscriminately without gazing at them. As a result, it is possible to make the illusion that the upper frame movable decorative body 2581 and the center decorative member 2520 on which the same decoration is formed are an integral member, and make it think that the upper frame movable decorative body 2581 is immovable. Then, according to the special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball driven into the game area 1100 into the first start port 2101 and the second start port 2102, the upper frame is moved by the upper frame movable decorative body drive mechanism 2582. Since the movable decorative body 2581 is separated from the center decorative member 2520 from the normal position that can be seen integrally with the center decorative member 2520 and lowered to a special position located inside the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 1900, the player moves. By moving the upper frame movable decoration body 2581, which was thought to be absent, it is possible to give a strong impact to the movement of the upper frame movable decoration body 2581, and it is possible to entertain the movement of the upper frame movable decoration body 2581. At the same time, when the player receives a strong impact, it is possible to strongly think that there may be something good by moving the upper frame movable decoration body 2581, raising expectations for the game and reducing the player's interest. Can be suppressed.

Further, the upper frame movable decorative body 2581 is moved linearly between the normal position and the special position, and compared with the case where the upper frame movable decorative body 2581 is moved in an arc, between the upper frame movable decorative body 2581 and the center decorative member 2520. Since the gap between the two can be narrowed as much as possible, it is possible to enhance the sense of unity between the upper frame movable decorative body 2581 and the center decorative member 2520 and make it easier for the player to have the illusion that the upper frame movable decorative body 2520 is an integral member. , The pachinko machine 1 capable of surely exhibiting the above-mentioned action and effect can be realized.

Furthermore, by seeing a part of the back upper middle movable decoration 3330 and the back upper side movable decoration 3410 on the rear side of the upper frame movable decoration 2581, it makes me wonder what it is, and the back upper middle movable decoration 3330 etc. It is possible to increase interest, and by seeing a part of the movable decoration body 3330 etc. on the back side, it is possible to instantly recognize that the movable decoration body 3330 etc. on the back side is movable so that the whole can be seen. Therefore, it is possible to make the player expect when the back-up middle movable decoration 3330, the back-up side movable decoration 3410, etc. will move, and the player's interest in the back-up middle movable decoration 3330, etc. The player is relatively less interested in the upper frame movable decoration body 2581 arranged on the front side of the back upper middle movable decoration body 3330, etc., which can be strongly attracted, and the upper frame movable decoration body 2581. Is an illusion that it is an integral part of the center decorative member 2582 and does not move, so that the gap when the upper frame movable decorative body 2581 moves can be increased, and the player can be entertained for the game. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

Further, when the upper frame movable decoration body 2581 is moved from the normal position to the special position after moving the back upper middle movable decoration body 3330, the back upper side movable decoration body 3410, etc., it is not in the player's eyes. Since the frame movable decoration body 2581 moves, it is possible to give a stronger impact to the player, and it is possible to pay attention to the upper frame movable decoration body 2581 and enjoy the movement of the upper frame movable decoration body 2581. It is possible to make the player think that a chance has arrived by moving the upper frame movable decorative body 2581, and it is possible to raise the player's expectation and suppress the decline in the interest in the game.

Further, the liquid crystal display device 1900 is arranged behind the upper frame movable decorative body 2581, and when the upper frame movable decorative body 2581 moves from the normal position to the special position, the liquid crystal display device 1900 is displayed in front of the liquid crystal display device 1900. Since a part of the effect image will be blocked by the upper frame movable decoration body 2581, the upper frame movable decoration body 2581 is for players who were not interested in the upper frame movable decoration body 2581 because they thought that it would not move. The movement (descending) of the player can be noticed, the player can be surprised, and the movable upper frame decorative body 2581 can be focused on to enjoy the movement, and the player's interest in the game is reduced. Can be suppressed.

Further, a transparent lens member 2520b having transparency is provided at least in a portion of the center decorative member 2582 in contact with the upper frame movable decorative body 2581, and a gap is provided between the upper frame movable decorative body 2581 and the center decorative member 2520. Even if there is, the transparent lens member 2520b makes it difficult to recognize the gap, so that the upper frame movable decorative body 2581 and the center decorative member 2520 on which the same decoration is formed for the player are integrated members. It is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 capable of making it easy to make an illusion that the above-mentioned action and effect can be surely exhibited.

Further, the decorative member 2581b having a metallic luster is provided at least in the portion of the upper frame movable decorative body 2581 in contact with the center decorative member 2520, and the light reflected by the decorative member 2581b enters the player's field of view to reflect the light. Since the area around the undecorated decorative member 2581b looks dark and it is difficult to see between the upper frame movable decorative body 2581 and the center decorative member 2520, the space between the upper frame movable decorative member 2581 and the center decorative member 2520 can be difficult to see. It is possible to make it difficult to recognize the gap, and it is possible to make it easy to make the illusion that the upper frame movable decorative body 2581 and the center decorative member 2520 on which the same decoration is formed are an integral member, and the above-mentioned action. The effect can be surely played, and the player can be entertained and the interest in the game can be suppressed from being lowered.

Further, since the front decorative member 2595 of the upper frame movable decorative body drive mechanism 2582 having transparency is arranged on the rear side of the upper frame movable decorative body 2581 in the normal position, the front decorative member 2595 is arranged from the rear side via the front decorative member 2595. By allowing light to enter the upper frame movable decorative body 2581, the space (gap) between the upper frame movable decorative body 2581 and the center decorative member 2520 can be brightened, and the upper frame movable decorative body 2581 and the center decorative member 2520 can be brightened. It is possible to make it difficult to understand the boundary between lights and make them feel as if they are connected. Therefore, it is possible to give the player the illusion that the upper frame movable decorative body 2581 and the center decorative member 2520 on which the same decoration is formed are an integral member, and therefore the upper frame movable decoration that was thought to be immovable. It is possible to entertain the player by increasing the gap when the body 2581 moves, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's interest in the game.

Further, since the front decorative member 2595 is provided on the rear side of the upper frame movable decorative body 2581 in the normal position, when the upper frame movable decorative body 2581 moves to the special position on the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 1900, the front decorative member 2595 is moved. It will be visible from the player side, and it is possible to prevent the appearance of the game area 1100 from being deteriorated due to the decoration of the front decorative member 2595.

[2-6G. stage]
Subsequently, the stage 2510 in the center accessory 2500 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 140 to 144. FIG. 140 is a perspective view showing only the stage in the center accessory. 141 is a plan view of the stage of FIG. 140, and FIG. 142 is a front view of the stage of FIG. 140. Further, FIG. 143 is a sectional view taken along the line AA of the stage in FIG. 141. Further, FIG. 144 is a perspective view of the stage of FIG. 140 as viewed from the front upper side.

As shown in the figure, the stage 2510 of the center accessory 2500 of this example has a first stage member 2532 having a first stage 2511 extending greatly in the left-right direction on the upper surface, and a second stage 2512 arranged directly under the first stage 2512. It includes a second stage member 2513 having a stage 2512, and a stage back decorative member 2600 arranged behind the first stage 2511 and the second stage 2512. The stage back decorative member 2600 is provided with a transparent protective cover 2601 that covers the upper side of the first stage 2511 and closes the rear end side, and the game ball supplied to the stage 2510 is behind the stage 2510. It is possible to prevent it from falling off (see FIG. 123 and the like).

The first stage 2511 has a curved shape so that both ends in the left-right direction are raised as a whole, and a flat W-shaped wavy shape in which the substantially center of the game area 1100 in the left-right direction is slightly raised. It is formed. The first stage 2511 is formed at a position higher at the front end wall 2511a that prevents the game ball from falling forward at the front end and at a position higher in the center (approximately center in the left-right direction of the game area 1100), and becomes lower toward the rear. The chance guide portion 2511b that spreads in the left-right direction, the drop hole 2511c that penetrates downward at the front end of the lowest position on both sides of the center, and the drop hole 2511c that is formed on the outside in the left-right direction of each drop hole 2511c and becomes lower as it goes forward. It is provided with a drop guiding portion 2511d that extends in the left-right direction so as to relate to the drop hole 2511c. A chance entrance 2513 that opens forward is arranged on the rear side of the chance guidance portion 2511b at the substantially center in the left-right direction in the first stage 2511.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the first stage 2511 is formed so that the rear end side is lower than the front end side from the left and right ends to the drop hole 2511c, and from the drop hole 2511c to the central chance guide portion 2511b. At the position of the chance guiding portion 2511b, the inclination in the front-rear direction gradually changes so that the front end side is lower than the rear end side.

Further, as shown in FIG. 141, the first stage 2511 has a form in which the front end wall 2511a between the drop holes 2511c is curved in the front-rear direction so that the left and right ends are located near the center of the drop hole 2511c in the front-rear direction. On the side of each drop hole 2511c facing each other (center side in the left-right direction), a step portion 2511e having a narrow width in the front-rear direction of the first stage 2511 is formed. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the rear end portion of the first stage 2511 is partitioned by a protective cover 2601. Further, the width (depth) in the front-rear direction in the first stage 2511 is within the range of 1.2 times to 2.0 times the outer diameter of the game ball.

In this first stage 2511, the game ball supplied from the warp outlet 2505 to the first stage 2511 is prevented from suddenly falling into the drop hole 2511c on the left side, and the game is rolled between the drop holes 2511c. The ball does not easily fall into the drop hole 2511c when there is a momentum of rolling, and the staying time of the game ball on the first stage 2511 can be lengthened. Further, the drop hole 2511c is a hole having a diameter slightly larger than the outer shape of the game ball, and the game ball falls into the drop hole 2511c to reduce the momentum in the front-back and left-right directions related to the game ball as much as possible. It can be dropped to the second stage 2512 side in the state of being made to fall. Further, when the game ball is guided backward by the chance guiding unit 2511b arranged in the center of the first stage 2511, it enters the chance entrance 2513.

On the other hand, the second stage 2512 is formed in a curved surface shape so that the center (substantially the center in the left-right direction of the game area 1100) is low, and is formed at the front end of a range of about 1/3 on both sides in the left-right direction and is upward. A leading edge portion 2512a that protrudes toward the center and is inclined so as to be smoothly lowered toward the rear, a groove-shaped central guiding portion 2512b that is arranged in the center in the left-right direction and decreases toward the front, and both left and right sides of the central guiding portion 2512b. The side guide portion 2512c, which is arranged between the left and right leading edge portions 2512a and becomes lower toward the front and expands in the left-right direction, and a plate-like shape that rises upward from the rear end to the vicinity of the lower surface of the first stage 2512. It is provided with a rear wall portion 2512d. The width (depth) in the front-rear direction in the second stage 2512 is within the range of 1.2 times to 2.0 times the outer diameter of the game ball.

Further, in the second stage 2512, the central guide portion 2512b is positioned directly above the first starting port 2101 in the attacker unit 2100. Further, the width between the left and right leading edge portions 2512a is substantially the same as the width in the left-right direction when the pair of movable pieces 2105 that open and close the second starting port 2102 in the attacker unit 2100 is expanded. ..

The second stage 2512 can roll the game ball supplied from the first stage 2511 through the drop hole 2511d in the left-right direction, and the rear wall portion 2512d prevents the game ball from falling backward. It can be prevented. Further, the second stage 2512 can discharge the supplied game ball forward from either of the two side guide portions 2512c and return it into the game area 1100 with a high probability, and has a low probability of returning to the center. It can be discharged forward from the central guide portion 2512b. Further, the second stage 2512 can pass over the leading edge portion 2512a and be discharged forward from the leading edge portion 2512a depending on the momentum of the rolling game ball.

Further, the stage back decorative member 2600 in the stage 2510 has a transparent protective cover 2601 that covers the entire upper surface of the first stage 2512 and closes the rear end of the first stage 2511, and after the first stage 2511 and the second stage 2512. A substantially semicircular back decoration member 2602 that is arranged on the side and bulges above the first stage 2511, and a hold display board that is placed behind the back decoration member 2602 and has multiple LEDs mounted on the front surface. 2603 and (see FIGS. 125, 126, etc.).

The back decoration member 2602 of the stage back decoration member 2600 has a passage portion 2602a in the substantially center in the left-right direction, which is open on the front side and extends in the vertical direction so that a game ball can be distributed. The upper front surface is the chance entrance 2513, and the lower front surface faces the rear end opening of the ball guide passage 2531b in the base member 2530. As a result, the game ball that has entered the chance entrance 2513 is guided downward by the passage portion 2602a behind the first stage 2511 and the second stage 2512, and then the base is arranged from the lower part of the passage portion 2602a to the front. It is designed to be discharged forward from the chance exit 2514 through the ball guide passage 2531b of the member 2530.

The front surface between the upper part and the lower part of the passage portion 2602a is closed by the rear wall portion 2512d of the second stage 2512 (see FIG. 142 and the like), and the game ball can be played only from the upper part and the lower part. You can go in and out.

Further, the back decoration member 2602 has a relief-like decoration having a metallic luster on the surface thereof, so that the outside of the decoration penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a plurality of the back decoration members substantially along the arc-shaped outer shape. (Eight in this example) translucent portions 2602b are formed. Specifically, the plurality of translucent portions 2602b in the back decoration member 2602 are arranged on each of the left and right sides with the center in the left-right direction interposed therebetween.

The LED2603a of the hold display board 2603 is mounted and arranged on the rear side of each translucent portion 2602b in the back decoration member 2602, and depending on the number of lights of the LED2603a, the LED2603a is connected to the first start port 2101 and the second start port 2102. It is possible to display the number of holdings related to the acceptance of game balls. Specifically, the four placed on the left side of the chance entrance 2513 display the number of reservations related to the first starting port 2101, and the four placed on the right side of the chance entrance 2513 are the second. The number of holds related to the start port 2102 is displayed, and even if the back lower movable decorative body 3510 of the back lower movable effect unit 3500 rises and covers the front side of the liquid crystal display device 1900, it is held for the player. It is possible to guide the number.

In the stage 2510 of this example, the game ball that has entered the warp entrance 2504 opened on the outer periphery of the peripheral wall portion 2503 of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 1100 is the first stage from the warp outlet 2505 in the frame of the center accessory 2500. When supplied to the left end of 2511, it rolls to the right along the shape of the first stage 2511 which is lowered toward the drop hole 2511c on the left side of the center. Then, the game ball passes through the rear side of the drop hole 2511c on the left side, crosses the substantially center in the left-right direction which is smoothly raised by the momentum, and rolls toward the drop hole 2511c side on the right side, and further. , Rolls up the right end side of the first stage 2511 formed so as to pass the rear side of the right drop hole 2511c and rise smoothly, and the rolling speed is attenuated to the right end of the first stage 2511. The movement to the right stops before reaching. After that, the game ball starts rolling to the left so as to fold back along the shape of the first stage 2511 whose left side is lower on the right side than the falling hole 2511c on the right side, and each of the falling holes 2511c is similarly described above. On the left side of the drop hole 2511c on the left side, the ball rolls so as to go up the left end side of the first stage 2511, which is higher on the left side. It will come and go in the left-right direction.

In this first stage 2511, the width in the front-rear direction is narrowed between the pair of drop holes 2511c due to the presence of the step portion 2511e, so that the game ball located in the pair of drop holes 2511c moves to any of the drop holes 2511c. Even if it rolls, it can pass through the drop hole 2511c and roll to the left and right ends without falling into the drop hole 2511c. Further, when the game ball located outside the pair of drop holes 2511c in the first stage 2511 in the left-right direction is rolled toward the drop hole 2511c along the front end wall 2511a in contact with the drop hole 2511c, it is placed on the rolling path. Since the drop hole 2511c is located, it is easy to fall into the drop hole 2511c, and the drop hole 2511c is supplied to the second stage 2512 directly below the drop hole 2511c. On the other hand, when the game ball located outside the pair of drop holes 2511c in the left-right direction rolls toward the drop hole 2511c along the protective cover 2601 at the rear end of the first stage 2511, it does not fall into the drop hole 2511c. It will roll over the rear side of the drop hole 2511c to the center side, and the rolling in the left-right direction will continue.

In addition, the game ball on the first stage 2511 enters the chance entrance 2513 arranged near the substantially top, which is smoothly slightly raised at the center of the first stage 2511 in the left-right direction (the center of the pair of drop holes 2511c). Then, it is discharged into the game area 1100 from the chance exit 2514 opened directly above the first starting port 2101 on the lower side of the second stage 2512, and is accepted into the first starting port 2101 with an extremely high probability. It has become like.

On the other hand, the game ball supplied to the second stage 2512 through the drop hole 2511c of the first stage 2511 is delivered from the first stage 2511 in a state where the momentum in the horizontal direction is as small as possible. It will roll in the left-right direction along the shape of the second stage 2512, which is gently curved so that the substantially center in the left-right direction is the lowest without falling from the second stage 2512, and will roll in the left-right direction on the second stage 2512. After rolling, it is discharged into the game area 1100 from either the central guiding portion 2512b arranged substantially in the center or the side guiding portion 2512c next to the central guiding portion 2512b. Then, when the game ball is released from the central guide portion 2512b of the second stage 2512 into the game area 1100, it is likely to be received by the first starting port 2101.

In this way, according to the stage 2510 of this example, the player can be excited depending on whether or not the game ball supplied to the first stage 2511 enters the chance entrance 2513, and the game ball enters the chance entrance 2513. Even if this is not done, the player is excited again depending on whether or not the ball is supplied to the second stage 2512 directly below through the drop hole 2511c and is discharged into the game area 1100 from the central guide portion 2512b of the second stage 2512. Therefore, it is possible to set the stage 2510 so that the player can surely enjoy the movement of the game ball, and it is possible to entertain the movement of the game ball and suppress the decrease in the interest in the game. It has become like.

Further, in the stage 2510 of this example, the depth (width) of the first stage 2511 and the second stage 2512 in the front-rear direction is substantially the same as the thickness of the game panel 1150, and the stage 2510 is directly under the first stage 2511. Since the second stage 2512 is arranged, the depth in the front-rear direction of the entire stage 2510 can be made as small as possible compared to the stage of the conventional pachinko machine, and the game panel 1150 protrudes from the rear surface. The amount can be reduced as much as possible. Therefore, the space behind the game panel 1150 can be made relatively large, and the under-back movable effect unit 3500 and the under-back right movable effect unit 3600 of the back unit 3000, which will be described later, should be arranged in good condition. Can be done.

Further, the stage 2510 supplies the game ball to the second stage 2512 through the drop hole 2511c of the first stage 2511, and the drop hole 2511c arranges the movement of the game ball rolled on the first stage 2511. Since it is possible to supply the second stage 2512 with the motion components in the front-back and left-right directions reduced as much as possible, the movement of the game ball supplied to the second stage 2512 should be made as uniform as possible. It is possible to stabilize the release probability from the central guide portion 2512b and the side guide portion 2512c that discharge the game ball forward, and to make the movement of the game ball rolling on the second stage 2512 intended. You can do it.

Further, as described above, since the game ball is delivered to the second stage 2512 by reducing the momentum in the horizontal direction as much as possible by passing through the drop hole 2511c, the game ball is delivered to the second stage 2512. It is possible to stabilize the probability that the game ball is released from the central guide portion 2512b and the side guide portion 2512c by rolling it in the left-right direction as the designer intended, and it is possible to surely produce the intended rolling effect of the game ball. It can be shown to the player, and the movement of the game ball rolling on the stage 2510 can be enjoyed and the player's interest in the game can be suppressed from being lowered.

Further, as described above, since it is possible to suppress the game ball delivered to the second stage 2512 from moving significantly in the front-rear direction and make it difficult to fall from the second stage 2512, the front-back direction of the second stage 2512. The width of the second stage 2512 (second stage member 2533) can be reduced in the front-rear direction, and the width of the first stage 2511 can be adjusted to the outer diameter of the game ball. On the other hand, since it is within the range of 1.2 times to 2.0 times, the dimensions of the first stage member 2532 and the second stage member 2533 in the front-rear direction can be made relatively small, and the first stage member 2532 and the first stage member 2532 and A space of a predetermined size can be secured on the rear side of the second stage member 2533, and the backside movable production unit 3500 is arranged in the secured space to make the pachinko machine 1 capable of more entertaining the player. You can do it.

Further, a plate wall-shaped front end wall 2511a and a protective cover 2601 are provided at both ends in the front-rear direction of the first stage 2511, and the game ball supplied on the first stage 2511 falls off from both ends in the front-rear direction of the first stage 2511. Since it can be prevented from being dropped, the game ball can be reliably rolled in the left-right direction on the first stage 2511, and can be dropped from the drop hole 2511c or entered into the chance entrance 2513. It is possible to surely exert the above-mentioned action and effect.

Further, in the first stage member 2532 (first stage 2511), a step portion 2511e is formed so as to be in contact with a pair of drop holes 2511c separated in the left-right direction and narrowed substantially in the center side in the left-right direction, and then the front end wall. The portion connecting the pair of step portions 2511e in 2511a is curved in the front-rear direction so that the width in the front-rear direction at substantially the center in the left-right direction of the first stage 2511 is wider than the width in the step portion 2511e. Since the width of the game ball that has rolled between the pair of drop holes 2511c in the first stage 2511 is narrowed in the front-rear direction due to the presence of the step portion 2511e, the game ball rolls to the drop hole 2511c side from this position. Even if it moves, it can pass through the drop hole 2511c and roll to the end side without falling into the drop hole 2511c, and the game ball can be moved back and forth in the left-right direction on the first stage 2511. On the other hand, the game ball located outside the pair of drop holes 2511c in the first stage 2511 tends to fall into the drop hole 2511c when it rolls toward the drop hole 2511c along the front end wall 2511a in contact with the drop hole 2511c. Therefore, the game ball can be supplied to the second stage 2512 directly below through the drop hole 2511c. When the game ball located outside the pair of drop holes 2511c in the first stage 2511 rolls to the drop hole 2511c side along the protective cover 2601 on the side opposite to the side in contact with the drop hole 2511c, the ball falls. Without falling into the hole 2511c, the ball rolls over the drop hole 2511c to the center side, and the rolling in the left-right direction can be continued. Therefore, the game ball can be reliably rolled in the left-right direction on the first stage 2511, and the movement of the game ball can be enjoyed and the player's interest in the game can be suppressed from being lowered. ing.

Further, if the game ball located outside the pair of drop holes 2511c in the first stage 2511 rolls along the front end wall 2511a in contact with the drop hole 2511c, there is a high possibility that the game ball will fall into the drop hole 2511c, which is the opposite. When the game ball rolls along the protective cover 2601 on the side, the game ball continues to roll. Therefore, when the game ball rolls and is positioned outside the drop hole 2511c, the game ball is on the side in contact with the drop hole 2511c. It is possible to raise the player's expectation depending on whether or not the player rolls to the drop hole 2511c side along the front end wall 2511a, so that the player can be entertained and the interest in the game can be suppressed from being lowered. It has become.

Further, since the leading edge portion 2512a projecting upward is provided at the front end of the second stage 2512 excluding the central guide portion 2512b and the side guide portion 2512c, the game ball supplied from the first stage 2511 to the second stage 2512. Can be discharged from the guiding portions 2512b and 2512c into the game area 1100 with an extremely high probability, and the game ball is rolled along the shape of the second stage 2512 and then discharged from the guiding portions 2512b and 2512c. This makes it possible to reliably show and entertain the player with the rolling effect of the game ball intended by the designer.

[2-7. Overall configuration of the back unit]
Subsequently, the back unit 3000 of the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 145 to 150. FIG. 145 is a perspective view of the back unit of the game board as viewed from the front, and FIG. 146 is a perspective view of the back unit of the game board as viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 147 is an exploded perspective view of the liquid crystal display device and the motor drive board box disassembled from the back unit and viewed from the front, and FIG. 148 is an exploded perspective view of the exploded view of FIG. 147 as viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 149 is an exploded perspective view of the back unit disassembled for each main component and viewed from the front, and FIG. 150 is an exploded perspective view of the back unit disassembled for each main component and viewed from the rear. be.

The back unit 300 of this example is a back box 3001 which is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1150 and has an open front side, and an opening 3001c is formed on the rear wall 3001b so that the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 faces. A ball guidance unit 3100 attached near the front surface in the box 3001 and guiding the game ball received in the first starting port 2101 in the front unit 2000 and the general winning opening 2201 to a predetermined position below, and an opening in the back box 3001. The back left movable production unit 3200, which is mounted near the front of the back box 3001 on the left side of the 3001c and can move according to the game state, and the back left movable effect unit 3200, which is mounted on the upper side of the opening 3001c in the back box 3001 and is mounted substantially in the center in the left-right direction in the game state. The back-up middle movable effect unit 3300 that can move according to the situation, the back-up side movable effect unit 3400 that is attached to both the left and right sides of the back-up middle movable effect unit 3300 and can move according to the game state, the ball guidance unit 3100 and the back left. The back bottom movable production unit 3500, which is arranged below the upper part of the opening 3001c between the movable production unit 3200 and the rear wall 3001b of the back box 3001 and moves according to the game state, and the back of the back bottom movable production unit 3500. It is provided with a back right movable effect unit 3600 which is arranged near the right end of the opening 3001c between the lower movable decorative body 3510 and the rear wall 3001b of the back box 3001 and is movable according to the gaming state.

Further, the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the rear wall 3001b of the back box 3001 in the lower left corner when viewed from the rear, and has a panel relay board 3012 that relays the connection between the main control board 4100 and the count sensor 2128 of the front unit 2000. , The lamp drive board box 3014 that houses the lamp drive board 4160 that is mounted on the right side of the panel relay board 3012 and controls the LEDs mounted on the decorative boards of the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000, and the back of the opening 3001c. It is equipped with a motor drive board box 3016, which is attached to the left side of the view and houses a motor drive board 4165 that controls each drive motor of the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000.

Further, the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the rear wall 3001b of the back box 3001 in the upper left corner when viewed from the rear, and the lamp drive board 4160, the motor drive board 4165, and the back upper side relay board 3249 of the back upper side movable production unit 3400. The upper right relay board 3018 that relays the connection with, the lamp drive board 4160 and the motor drive board 4165 attached to the upper right corner in the rear view, and the back left decorative board 3214, the back left drive motor 3224, and the back left movable production unit 3200. Attached to the upper left relay board 3020 that relays the connection with the left position detection sensor 3227, the back bottom left drive motor 3651 of the back bottom movable effect unit 3500, the elevating position detection sensor 3567, etc., and approximately in the center of the left and right direction above the opening 3001c. The rear surface of the back box 3001 is provided with a lock member 3022 for holding the liquid crystal display device 1900 in a detachable manner.

Further, the back unit 3000 is provided with a back lower relay board 3024 attached to the front surface (inside the back box 3001) of the rear surface 3001b of the back box 3001 below the opening 3001c. The under-back relay board 3024 relays the connection between the lamp drive board 4160 and the under-back decorative board 3514 of the under-back movable effect unit 3500, which will be described later. Further, the back unit 3000 is attached to the upper decorative body 3026 which is attached to the center of the upper part of the opening 3001c in the back box 3001 and formed of a transparent member, and is attached to the right side of the opening 3001c in the back box 3001. It is provided with an upper right decorative body 3028 that covers the upper front surface of the lower right drive mechanism 3530 of the movable effect unit 3500 and decorates the rear side of the back right movable effect unit 3600. A ventilation hole 3028a formed of a plurality of arcuate slits penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed in a portion of the upper right decorative body 3028 located on the front side of the lower right drive motor 3541 of the lower back right drive mechanism 3530.

Further, the back unit 3000 includes a horizontally long decorative substrate 3030 in the stage, which is attached to the upper front surface of the unit main body 3110 in the ball guidance unit 3100 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. By emitting the LED of the decorative substrate 3030 in the stage, the substantially center (second stage 2512) of the stage 2510 of the center accessory 2500 can be illuminated and decorated.

The back box 3001 in the back unit 3000 is located at appropriate positions in front of and behind the rear wall 3001b, a ball guidance unit 3100, a back left movable effect unit 3200, a back upper middle movable effect unit 3300, a back upper side movable effect unit 3400, and a back lower side. Movable effect unit 3500, back right movable effect unit 3600, panel relay board 3012, lamp drive board box 3014, motor drive board box 3016, upper right relay board 3018, upper left relay board 3020, mounting holes for mounting lock member 3022, etc. And a mounting boss.

Further, the back box 3001 is provided with a flange-shaped fixing portion 3001a extending outward from the front end, and is fixed to the rear side of the game panel 1150 via the fixing portion 3001a. Further, as shown in FIG. 148 and the like, the back box 3001 is mounted so that the entire outer periphery of the opening 3001c including the opening 3001c on the rear surface side of the rear wall 3001b is shallowly recessed toward the front side and the liquid crystal display device 1900 can be inserted. It includes a stepped portion 3001d and a downwardly recessed mounting recess 3001e into which a pair of fixing pieces 1902 formed at the bottom of the mounting stepped portion 3001d and extending downward from the lower surface of the liquid crystal display device 1900 are inserted.

[2-8. Ball guidance unit]
Subsequently, the ball guidance unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 151. FIG. 151 is a perspective view of the ball guidance unit in the back unit of the game board as viewed from the front. The ball guidance unit 3100 of this example is arranged near the front surface in the back box 3001 of the back unit 3000, and is arranged below the opening 3001c, and the back box 3001 is arranged from a position to the right of the center in the left-right direction in the front view. It is said that it extends to the vicinity of the left end of. In the state where the game board 4 is assembled, the ball guidance unit 3100 is located behind the attacker unit 2100 and the side winning opening member 2200 in the front unit 2000, and the front end is substantially in contact with the rear surface of the game panel 1150. ing.

The ball guidance unit 3100 includes a unit main body 3110 that forms the entire unit, is formed on the right front surface of the unit main body 3110, is received by the first starting port 2101 of the attacker unit 2100, and is guided backward by the gutter 2110b. The right taxiway 3111 that receives the game ball and guides it downward, and the right side of the pair of general taxiways 2201 arranged on the right side of the front view of the side winning opening member 2200 arranged substantially in front of the center in the left-right direction of the unit body 3110. The middle first taxiway 3112, which receives the game ball received by the general winning opening 2201 and guided backward by the hi section 2210b of the main body base 2210 and guides it downward, and the downstream side merges with the middle first taxiway 3112. In the middle of receiving the game ball received by the general winning opening 2201 on the left side of the pair of general winning openings 2201 arranged on the right side of the front view of the side winning opening member 2200 and guided backward by the hi section 2210b, and guiding downward. It is equipped with two taxiways 3113.

Further, the unit main body 3110 is received by the gutter portion 2210b on the right side of the pair of general winning openings 2201 arranged on the left front surface of the unit main body 3110 and arranged on the left side of the front view of the side winning opening member 2200. A pair of general prizes arranged on the left side of the front view of the side prize opening member 2200, where the left first taxiway 3114 that receives the game ball guided backward and guides it downward and the downstream side merges with the left first taxiway 3114. It is provided with a left second taxiway 3115 that receives a game ball that is received by the general winning opening 2201 on the left side of the opening 2201 and is guided backward by the gutter portion 2210b and is guided downward.

The game balls guided downward by the right taxiway 3111, the middle first taxiway 3112, the middle second taxiway 3113, the left first taxiway 3114, and the left second taxiway 3115 are the bottom wall of the substrate holder 1160. It is discharged onto the portion, and is discharged from the out ball discharging portion 1161 of the substrate holder 1160 to the lower side of the game board 4.

The ball guidance unit 3100 includes a first start port sensor 3102 that is received by the first start port 2101 and detects a game ball that is received and circulates in the right taxiway 3111. Further, the ball guidance unit 3100 is attached to a plurality of (here, four) general winning opening sensors 3104 that detect game balls received in each general winning opening 2201 and to the upper part of the unit main body 3110 substantially in the center in the left-right direction. The magnetic detection sensor 3106 is provided. The magnetic detection sensor 3106 can detect the magnetism acting in the vicinity of the attacker unit 2100, and can detect fraudulent activity using a magnet.

Further, each of the plurality of general winning opening sensors 3104 is located on the downstream side of the position where the middle first taxiway 3112 and the middle second taxiway 3113 meet each other, and the middle first taxiway 3112 and the middle second taxiway 3113. Inside the middle second taxiway 3113 on the upstream side where And the left second taxiway 3115 are arranged in the left second taxiway 3115 on the upstream side of the confluence of each other. As a result, in the pair of general winning openings 2201 in the side winning opening member 2200, the game ball received by the general winning opening 2201 on the right side is detected by only one general winning opening sensor 3104, and is received by the general winning opening 2201 on the left side. The game ball is detected by two general winning opening sensors 3104, and it is possible to know which general winning opening 2201 the game ball has been accepted into.

Reference numeral 3120 is a left taxiway cover that covers the front end on the downstream side of the portion where the left first taxiway 3114 and the left second taxiway 3115 merge with each other. Further, the unit main body 3110 and the left taxiway cover 3120 are formed of transparent members.

[2-9. Back left movable production unit]
Next, the back left movable effect unit 3200 in the back unit 3000 will be described with reference to FIGS. 152 to 154. FIG. 152 is a perspective view showing a back left movable effect unit in the back unit of the game board. Further, FIG. 153 is an exploded perspective view of the back / left movable effect unit disassembled into each of the main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 154 shows the back / left movable effect unit disassembled into each of the main members and viewed from the rear. It is an exploded perspective view.

The back left movable production unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 of this example is attached to the position on the left side of the opening 3001c in the back box 3001, and has a back left movable decoration body 3210 imitating an iceberg and a back left movable decoration. A back left drive mechanism 3220 that moves the body 3210 in the left-right direction according to a gaming state (for example, a special lottery result drawn by a start winning prize) and an opening in the back box 3001 that is arranged behind the back left drive mechanism 3220. It is provided with a back left decorative member 3230 that decorates the left side of the 3001c.

As shown in the figure, the back-left movable decorative body 3210 in the back-left movable effect unit 3200 is a plate-shaped and translucent front decorative member 3211 in which the front right side in the left-right direction is formed in a three-dimensional shape imitating an ice mountain. And, a light-transmitting diffusing sheet 3212 arranged on the rear side of the front decorative member 3211 and having a plurality of fine prisms, and a translucent sheet having a plurality of minute irregular prisms arranged on the rear side of the diffusing sheet 3212. A lens member 3213 having a property, a vertically long back left decorative substrate 3214 arranged behind the lens member 3213 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a front decorative member supporting the rear side of the back left decorative substrate 3214. It includes a transparent plate-shaped decorative body base 3215 that sandwiches a diffusion sheet 3212 and a lens member 3213 in cooperation with 3211.

Although not shown, the front decorative member 3211 in the back left movable decorative body 3210 has an iceberg-shaped front surface formed in a frosted glass shape, and the white paint becomes thinner toward the left. It has been applied so that it looks like an iceberg. Further, in the back left movable decorative body 3210, a plurality of (here, three) slits 3212a penetrating in the front-rear direction are formed in the diffusion sheet 3212, and correspond to the diffusion seed 3212 of the lens member 3213. A streak-shaped slit 3213a penetrating in the front-rear direction is also formed at the position. In the back left movable decorative body 3210 of this example, when the LED of the back right decorative substrate 3214 is made to emit light by the diffusion sea and the slits 3212a and 3213a of the lens member 3213, the front decorative member 3211 has the slits 3212a and 3213a on the surface. The part along it emits bright light, making it look like it has cracks.

On the other hand, the back left drive mechanism 3220 of the back left movable effect unit 3200 is formed on the upper side of the mounting boss 3221a and the mounting boss 3221a which project forward and the front end is attached to the upper rear surface of the decorative body base 3215 in the back left movable decorative body 3210. The slider 3221 having a rack gear 3221b extending in the left-right direction and the mounting boss 3221a of the slider 3221 are inserted from the rear side and slidably supported and have a guide hole 3222a extending in the left-right direction to cover the front side of the slider 3221. The plate-shaped mechanism cover 3222, the pinion gear 3223 that meshes with the rack gear 3221b of the slider 3221 slidably supported in the left-right direction by the mechanism cover 3222, and the pinion gear 3223 are rotationally driven and attached to the front surface of the mechanism cover 3222. A plate-shaped mechanism base 3225 that supports the rear side of the mechanism cover 3222 so as to sandwich the back left drive motor 3224, the slider 3221 and the pinion gear 3223, and is attached to the front surface of the back left decorative member 3230 substantially in the center in the vertical direction. A rail member 3226 attached to the lower end of the front surface of the mechanism base 3225 to guide the lower end of the decorative body base 3215 in the left-right direction, and a back left position detection sensor 3227 attached to a predetermined position of the mechanism base 3225 to detect the slide position of the slider 3221. , Is equipped.

As shown in the figure, the slider 3221 of the back left drive mechanism 3220 is provided with a pair of mounting bosses 3221a separated from each other in the left-right direction, and is provided with a detection piece 3221c extending downward at the lower end. By detecting the detection piece 3221c of the slider 3221 with the back left position detection sensor 3227, the slide position of the slider 3221, that is, the back left movable decorative body 3210 can be detected. In this example, when the back left movable decorative body 3210 is located on the leftmost side, the detection piece 3221c is detected by the back left position detection sensor 3227.

Further, as shown in the figure, the back left decorative member 3230 of the back left movable effect unit 3200 has a form extending long in the vertical direction, and the back lower left drive mechanism 3550 on the left side of the back lower movable effect unit 3500 described later. It is possible to cover the front surface of the. The back left decorative member 3230 is provided with a three-dimensionally shaped decorative portion 3231 above the portion where the back left drive mechanism 3220 is attached, and a plurality of circles penetrating in the front-rear direction on the left side of the decorative portion 3231. A ventilation hole 3232 formed of an arc-shaped slit is formed. The lower back left drive motor 3651 of the lower back left drive mechanism 3550 in the lower back movable effect unit 3500 is located on the rear side of the ventilation hole 3232. The back left decorative member 3230 is formed of a colorless and transparent member.

In the back left movable effect unit 3200 of this example, in the normal state, the back left movable decorative body 3210 is located on the leftmost side, and in this state, the back left movable decorative body 3210 serves as a center in front view. It is located on the left outer side of the window portion 2501 of the object 2500, and is almost invisible from the player side (see FIG. 108 and the like). From this normal state, when the pinion gear 3223 is rotationally driven in a predetermined direction (counterclockwise in front view) by the back left drive motor 3224, the slider 3221 is moved to the right by the rack gear 3221b meshed with the pinion gear 3223. It moves, and the back left movable decorative body 3210 attached to the tip of the attachment boss 3211a of the slider 3221 also moves to the right.

Then, when the back left movable decoration unit 3210 of the back left movable decoration unit 3200 slides to the right by the drive of the back left drive motor 3224, it moves from the left inner edge of the window portion 2501 in the center accessory 2500 to the inside of the window portion 2501. It appears, becomes visible to the player, and moves to the right to a predetermined position (maximum appearance position) (see FIG. 180 (b)).

At this time, a part of the effect image (here, the left end) displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is blocked by the back left movable decoration 3210 that appears, so that the back left movable decoration 3210 is used for the player. It is possible to notice the appearance of the back left movable decoration body 3210, to entertain the movable production of the back left movable decoration body 3210, and to raise expectations for the arrival of the chance suggested by the movement of the back left movable decoration body 3210. It has become.

Further, since the back left movable effect unit 3200 includes a back left decorative board 3214 that slides together with the back left movable decorative body 3210 (front decorative member 3211), for example, the LED of the back left decorative board 3214 in the normal position. When the light is emitted, the outside of the left inner edge of the window portion 2501 in the center accessory 2500 can be light-emitting decorated via the front decorative member 3211 or the like, and the player's line of sight can be directed to the left inner edge side of the window portion 2501. At the same time, it is possible to make the player recognize the start of the movement of the back left movable decoration body 3210, to raise the expectation for the back left movable decoration body 3210, and to suppress the decrease in the interest in the game. It has become.

[2-10. Movable production unit on the back]
Subsequently, the back-up middle movable effect unit 3300 in the back unit 3000 will be described with reference to FIGS. 155 to 163. FIG. 155 is a perspective view of the back upper and middle movable effect unit in the back unit of the game board as viewed from the front, and FIG. 156 is a perspective view of the back and upper and middle movable effect unit as viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 157 is an exploded perspective view of the back-up and middle movable effect unit disassembled into each of the main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 158 shows the back-up and middle movable effect unit disassembled into each of the main members and later. It is an exploded perspective view as seen. Further, FIG. 159 is a perspective view of the back-up-middle movable decorative body unit in the back-up-middle movable effect unit, and FIG. 160 is a perspective view of the back-up-middle movable decorative body unit as seen from the rear. Further, FIG. 161 is an exploded perspective view of the back-up middle movable decorative unit unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 162 is a front view showing the back-up middle movable decorative body together with the back-up middle decorative substrate. Further, FIG. 163 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of the movable effect unit on the back side.

The back-up and middle-movable effect unit 3300 of this example is attached to the upper side of the opening 3001c in the back box 3001 and substantially in the center in the left-right direction, and is a back-up and middle-movable decorative body whose outer shape imitates a heart-shaped jewel. It is provided with a back-up middle movable decoration unit 3301 having a 3330 and an elevating drive mechanism 3310 for raising and lowering the back-up middle movable decoration unit 3301. Further, the back-up middle movable decoration unit 3301 is provided with a rotation drive mechanism 3340 for rotating the back-up middle movable decoration 3330 around an axis extending in the vertical direction, in addition to the back-up middle movable decoration 3330.

First, as shown in FIGS. 157 and 158, the elevating drive mechanism 3310 in the back-up / middle movable effect unit 3300 has a box-shaped elevating base 3311 mounted in the back box 3001c and open at the front and bottom, and elevating / lowering. A pair of columnar elevating rails 3312 that are arranged on both the left and right sides on the front surface of the base 3311 and that guide the movable decorative unit 3301 on the back in the vertical direction and extend in the vertical direction, and hold both the upper and lower ends of the elevating rail 3312. It also includes a rail holder 3313 attached to the front surface of the elevating base 3311.

Further, the elevating drive mechanism 3310 has a shaft member 3314 that protrudes forward from the rear wall in the elevating base 3311 and is rotatably supported, and is attached to the front end of the shaft member 3314 and has a predetermined diameter and an outer diameter on the rear surface. A disk-shaped rotating member 3315 having a gear portion 3315a having a smaller diameter, and the rotating member 3315 projecting forward from the front side of the peripheral end and extending in the left-right direction of the movable decorative body unit 3301 (rotation drive mechanism 3340) on the back side. A cylindrical elevating pin 3316 that can be inserted into the elevating groove 3349, a drive gear 3317 that meshes with the gear portion 3315a of the rotating member 3315, and a drive gear 3317 fixed to the tip of the rotating shaft to be rear of the elevating base 3311. It is further equipped with a back-up middle lift drive motor 3318 mounted on the side.

Further, the elevating drive mechanism 3310 is a pair in which the upper end is attached to the elevating base 3311 and the lower end is attached to the rotation drive mechanism 3340 of the back-up middle movable decoration unit 3301 to urge the back-up middle movable decoration unit 3301 in the ascending direction. The coil spring 3319, the elevating position detection sensor 3320 that detects the elevating position of the movable decorative unit 3301 on the back side, and the lamp drive board 4160 and the motor drive board 4165, which are attached to the rear side of the elevating base 3311, and the back side. It includes an upper-middle elevating drive motor 3318, a back-up middle rotation drive motor 3347, and a back-up middle relay board 3321 that relays a connection with the back-up middle decorative board 3334.

The elevating drive mechanism 3310 includes a plate-shaped detection piece 3315b extending rearward from the rear side of the disk-shaped peripheral end to the rotating member 3315, and the detection piece 3315b is detected by the elevating position detection sensor 3320. Therefore, it is possible to detect the rotational position of the rotating member 3315, that is, the elevating position of the movable decorative body unit 3301 that moves up and down by the rotation of the rotating member 3315.

Further, in the elevating drive mechanism 3310, when the pair of coil springs 3319 are arranged at positions as close as possible to the elevating rail 3312, and when an urging force is applied to the movable decorative body unit 3301 on the back surface. The movable decorative body unit 3301 on the back surface is less likely to rattle, and the load on the lift drive motor 3318 on the back surface can be reduced by the urging force.

As shown in FIGS. 159 to 161 and the like, the back-up and middle-movable decorative body unit 3301 of the back-up and middle-movable effect unit 3300 has a back-up and middle-movable decorative body 3330 that imitates a heart-shaped jewel and a back-up and middle-movable decoration. The body 3330 is rotated around an axis extending in the vertical direction, and is provided with a rotation drive mechanism 3340 which is arranged on the upper side of the movable decorative body 3330 on the back surface and is moved up and down by the elevating drive mechanism 3310. As shown in the figure, the front surface and the rear surface of the back surface medium movable decorative body 3330 of the back surface medium movable decorative body unit 3301 have substantially the same shape. The back-up middle movable decorative body 3330 is a pair of surface members 3331 formed in a heart-shaped jewel shape by colored transparent (here, azure) members and arranged back to back from each other, and each surface member 3331. It is provided with a frame member 3332, which is decorated on the outside and has a metallic luster (here, silver) and is arranged in a back-to-back state in contact with each other in a frame shape.

Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, the back-up middle movable decorative body 3330 is a heart-shaped lens arranged between a pair of surface members 3331 and arranged behind each surface member 3331 and having different sizes. It includes a transparent lens member having a plurality of concentrically formed portions, and a back-up middle decorative substrate 3334 (see FIG. 162) arranged between the lens members and having a plurality of LEDs 3334a mounted on both sides. .. Further, the back-up middle movable decorative body 3330 is provided with a connecting portion 3335 for connecting to the rotation drive mechanism 3340 at the upper portion (see FIG. 161).

The heart-shaped surface member 3331 of the back-up middle decorative body 3330 is made of a transparent and deep blue member, and the LED 3334a of the back-up middle decorative substrate 3334 emits light to make a blue diamond (blue diamond) shine as if it were shining. It looks like a Western heart). Further, the height of the movable decorative body 3330 in the upper and lower sides is set to be about ½ of the height of the window portion 2501 in the center accessory 2500, and the height of the movable decorative body 3330 descends into the window portion 2501 and appears. At that time, it is becoming more noticeable from the player side. Further, the back-up middle movable decorative body 3330 has substantially the same size as the central lens 282 formed in the shape of a jewel of the upper decorative unit 280 in the door frame 5, and has the same decoration as the central lens 282 for the player. It is possible to make the illusion that it is a body.

On the other hand, the rotary drive mechanism 3340 of the movable decorative body unit 3301 on the back side has a pair of elevating support holes 3341a and a pair of elevating support holes 3341a extending in the vertical direction through which the elevating rail 3312 of the elevating drive mechanism 3310 is inserted. A rotary base 3341 having a plate-shaped vertical wall portion 3341b arranged and extending in the vertical direction, and a plate-shaped bottom wall portion 3341c extending rearward from the lower end of the vertical wall portion 3341b, and an elevating support hole 3341a of the rotary base 3341. A bush 3342 (see FIG. 159, etc.) that is inserted at both ends and supports the elevating rail 3312 to the axis of the elevating support hole 3341a, and a rotation base 3341 that prevents each bush 3342 from coming off from both ends of the elevating support hole 3341a. It is provided with a retaining member 3343 attached to the vertical wall portion 3341b.

Further, the rotation drive mechanism 3340 of the movable decorative body unit 3301 on the back side has a lower base 3344 attached to the lower side of the bottom wall portion 3341c of the rotation base 3341 and having a rotation support hole 3344a penetrating in the vertical direction, and a lower base. A joint member 3345 having a connecting piece 3345a rotatably inserted and supported from above with respect to the rotation support hole 3344a of the 3344 and connected to the connecting portion 3335 of the movable decorative body 3330 on the back side at the lower end, and the upper end of the joint member 3345. A transmission unit 3346 having a joint portion 3346a connected to and rotatably supported and mounted on the upper surface of the lower base 3344, and a back-up middle rotary drive that is mounted on the upper portion of the transmission unit 3346 and drives the joint portion 3346a to rotate. A motor 3347, a rotating section relay board 3348 mounted on the upper surface of the lower base 3344 and relaying a connection between the back-up middle decorative board 3334 and the back-up middle rotation drive motor 3347 and the back-up middle relay board 3321 are provided. There is.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 158 and 160, the rotation drive mechanism 3340 has a long hole-shaped elevating / lowering extending in the left-right direction and opening rearward on the rear surface in a state where the rotation base 3341 and the lower base 3344 are assembled. A groove 3349 is formed, and an elevating pin 3316 protruding from a rotating member 3315 in the elevating drive mechanism 3310 is slidably inserted into the elevating groove 3349 in the left-right direction.

Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, in the transmission unit 3346 of the rotation drive mechanism 3340, a plurality of transmission gears for transmitting rotation from the back-up middle rotation drive motor 3347 and a rotation position for detecting the rotation position are provided. It is equipped with a detection sensor, and is capable of rotating the back-up middle movable decoration body 3330 and stopping the rotation of the back-up middle movable decoration body 3330 at a predetermined position. Further, the transmission unit 3346 has a plurality of electrical connection portions having different polarities in the joint portion 3346a and connected to the back-up middle movable decorative body 3330 and the back-up middle decorative substrate 3334 via the joint member 3345, and the joint portion 3346a. It is equipped with an electrical connection mechanism for electrically connecting the wiring from the rotating portion relay board 3348 to each electrical connecting portion that rotates together with the rotating portion. The decorative substrate 3334 and the rotating portion relay substrate 3348 can be securely connected so that the movable decorative body 3330 can be light-emittingly decorated.

As shown in FIG. 163 (a), in the back-up middle movable effect unit 3300, in the normal state (normal position), the back-up middle movable decorative body 3330 (back-up middle movable decorative unit 3301) rises. In this state, the lower end of the upper frame movable decoration unit 2581 in the ascending position of the upper frame movable decoration unit 2580 in the center accessory 2500 can be slightly visually recognized from the player side from the lower side to the lower end. It is in a state (see FIG. 108 and the like). As a result, the lower part of the back-up middle movable decoration 3330 can be visually recognized from the player side even in the normal position, so that the player can be made aware of the existence of the back-up middle movable decoration 3330, and the back-up middle movable decoration 3330 can be noticed. It is possible to recognize that the decorative body 3330 is movable, and it is possible to raise the expectation for the movable decorative body 3330 on the back and to suppress the decline in interest.

In the back-up middle movable effect unit 3300, in a normal state, the elevating pin 3316 which is attached to the rotating member 3315 in the elevating drive mechanism 3310 and revolves is slightly to the left of the rotating shaft of the rotating member 3315 in the front view. It is located at the upper part, and the elevating pin 3316 is in contact with the left end of the elevating groove 3349 in the movable decorative unit 3301 on the back side. As a result, even if a force for moving the elevating pin 3316 downward is applied by the load of the movable decorative body unit 3301 on the back side, the elevating pin 3316 is in contact with the left end of the elevating groove 3349 and further to the left. Since it is in a state where it cannot move relatively to, the elevating pin 3316 cannot revolve, and it is possible to prevent the movable decorative unit 3301 from moving downward while being able to prevent the movable decoration unit 3301 from moving downward. In the normal position, no load is applied to the back-up middle lift drive motor 3318.

When the drive gear 3317 is rotated in a predetermined direction (here, in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front) by driving the back-up middle lift drive motor 3318 from this normal state, the gear portion 3315a meshed with the drive gear 3317a. This causes the rotating member 3315 to rotate in the clockwise direction, and the rotation of the rotating member 3315 causes the elevating pin 3316 to revolve in the clockwise direction. When the elevating pin 3316 revolves in the clockwise direction, the elevating pin 3316 slides to the right in the elevating groove 3349 and is slightly above the axis of the rotating member 3315. When it revolves to the right beyond the axis, it descends, and following the vertical movement of the elevating pin 3316, the movable decorative body unit 3301 on the back side also slightly ascends and then descends.

When the back-up middle movable decoration unit 3301 descends, both ends resist the urging force of the pair of coil springs 3319 attached to the elevating base 3311 and the rotation base 3341 of the back-up middle movable decoration unit 3301. The movable decorative unit 3301 is lowered in the middle of the back.

When the elevating pin 3316 is located directly below the axis of the rotating member 3315, the driving of the back-up middle elevating drive motor 3318 is stopped, and the back-up middle movable decorative unit 3301 is in the most lowered state (appearance position). (See FIG. 163 (b)). In the state of this appearance position, the movable decoration body 3330 on the back side is positioned below the movable decoration body 2581 in the ascending position in the upper frame movable decoration body unit 2580 in the center accessory 2500 in the front view. The whole is visible from the player side (see FIG. 178).

Further, in the back-up middle movable effect unit 3300 of this example, when the back-up middle movable decorative body 3330 is lowered to the state of the appearance position, the back-up middle rotation drive motor 3347 of the rotation drive mechanism 3340 drives the back-up middle. The movable decorative body 3330 can be rotated around the axis extending in the vertical direction through the center thereof.

As a result, a movable decorative body 3330 on the back that imitates a heart-shaped jewel appears so as to block the effect image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 from the upper side of the window portion 2501 in the center accessory 2500 into the window portion 2501. Therefore, by making the movable decorative body 3330 appear on the back, it is possible to strongly attract the interest of the player. Further, since the movable decoration body 3330 on the back side can be rotated around the axis extending in the vertical direction and the light emission decoration can be performed by the decoration substrate 3334 on the back side, the movable decoration body 3330 on the back side can be made like a mirror ball. It can be shown and can attract the attention of the player.

On the other hand, when lowering and raising the back-up middle movable decorative unit 3301 located at the appearance position, the back-up middle elevating drive motor 3318 is rotationally driven in the opposite direction to view the rotating member 3315, that is, the elevating pin 3316 from the front. By revolving in the counterclockwise direction, the elevating pin 3316 slides to the left in the elevating groove 3349, and the movable decorative unit 3301 on the back side rises. At this time, a urging force acts on the back-up middle movable decorative unit 3301 in the ascending direction by the pair of coil springs 3319, so that the load on the back-up middle lift drive motor 3318 can be reduced. It has become. Then, when the elevating pin 3316 that revolves in the counterclockwise direction passes directly above the axis of the rotating member 3315 and reaches a position slightly to the left, the driving of the back-up middle elevating drive motor 3318 is stopped and the back-up middle elevating drive motor 3318 is movable. The decorative unit 3301 can be returned to the raised normal position.

[2-11. Back side movable production unit]
Next, with respect to the back upper side movable decoration unit 3400 in the back unit 3000, reference to FIGS. 164 to 167. FIG. 164 is a perspective view of the back upper side movable effect unit in the back unit of the game board as viewed from the front, and FIG. 165 is a perspective view of the back upper side movable effect unit as viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 166 is an exploded perspective view of the back upper side movable edging unit disassembled and viewed from the front. Further, FIG. 167 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of the back-up side movable effect unit.

The back upper side movable effect unit 3400 of this example is attached to the left and right sides of the back upper middle movable effect unit 3300 above the opening 3001c in the back box 3001, and is omitted with the back upper middle movable effect unit 3300 sandwiched between them. It includes a right unit 3400R and a left unit 3400L formed on the target. Further, the back-up side movable effect unit 3400 is arranged behind the back-up side movable decoration body 3410 having a chandelier-like decoration and the back-up side movable decoration body 3410, and has the back-up side movable decoration body 3410 as a predetermined axis. It is equipped with a back-up side drive mechanism 3420 that rotates around.

The back-up side movable decorative body 3410 of the back-up side movable effect unit 3400 is formed in a frame shape by a plurality of smoothly curved linear portions, and a plurality of shaft portions 3411a protruding in the direction are formed and the surface is made of metal. A front member 3411 having a luster (here, silver), a plurality of swing members 3412 axially supported by the shaft portion 3411a of the front member 3411 and formed in a drip shape by a transparent member, and a swing member 3412. A decorative base 3413 having an irregular opening 3413a that is arranged on the rear side and supports the front member 3411 and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a plurality of LEDs 3414a arranged on the rear side of the decorative base 3413 and mounted on the front surface. It is provided with a back-up side decorative substrate 3414. Reference numeral 3417 is a pressing member attached to the rear end of the shaft portion 3411a of the front surface member 3411 to prevent the swing member 3412 from coming off from the shaft portion 3411a. The pressing member 3417 is provided with a protrusion-shaped regulating portion 3417a that regulates the swing range of the swing member 3412 (see FIG. 167 (c)).

The decorative body base 3413 of the back-up side movable decorative body 3410 includes a rotary bearing portion 3413b formed on the lower end side of the side surfaces facing each other in FIG. 166, and a guide bearing portion 3413c formed on the upper end side. It is made of colorless and transparent members. A rotary shaft 3415 and a guide shaft 3416 extending rearward are attached to the rotary bearing portion 3413b and the guide bearing portion 3413c of the decorative body base 3413, respectively. Further, the front surface of the back upper side decorative substrate 3414 is white so as to be inconspicuous.

On the other hand, the back-up side drive mechanism 3420 of the back-up side movable effect unit 3400 is centered on a shaft hole 3421a and a shaft hole 3421a which are arranged behind the back-up side movable decoration body 3410 and through which the rotation shaft 3415 can be inserted. A shallow box-shaped drive base 3421 having a guide groove 3421b that extends in an arc shape with a predetermined radius and penetrates in the front-rear direction and allows the guide shaft 3416 to be inserted, and the rear side of the drive base 3421 is closed. The drive cover 3422, the fan-shaped base gear 3423 arranged between the drive cover 3422 and the drive base 3421 and fixed to the rear end of the rotating shaft 3415, the first transmission gear 3424 that meshes with the base gear 3423, and the first transmission gear 3424. A transmission gear 3425 having a small diameter first gear portion 3425a that meshes with the transmission gear 3424 and a second gear portion 3425b that is integrally formed on the rear side of the first gear portion 3425a and has a diameter larger than that of the first gear portion 3425a. The back where the second transmission gear 3426 that meshes with the second gear portion 3425b of the transmission gear 3425, the drive gear 3427 that meshes with the second transmission gear 3426, and the drive gear 3427 are fixed to the rotary shaft and attached to the rear surface of the drive cover 3422. The upper side drive motor 3428, the back upper side drive motor 3428, the back upper side decorative board 3414, the back upper side relay board 3249 that relays the connection between the lamp drive board 4160 and the motor drive board 4165, and the rear side of the drive base 3421. A bush 3430 inserted into the rear end of the guide shaft 3416 and slidable in the guide groove 3421b of the drive base 3421, and a rotation position detection sensor 3431 that detects the rotation position of the back upper side movable decorative body 3410. , Is equipped.

The drive base 3421 of the back-up side drive mechanism 3420 is formed of a colorless and transparent member, and the guide groove 3421b extends in an arc shape in an angle range of about 90 degrees from directly above the shaft hole 3421a. Further, both ends of the guide groove 3421b in the drive base 3421 are stopper portions 3421c that come into contact with the guide shaft 3416 (bush 3430) of the back upper side movable decorative body 3410. Further, the base gear 3423 is formed of a translucent (black in this case) member, and the gear teeth are formed in an angle range of about 135 degrees, and the detection is extended outward in the radial direction. It has a piece 3423a. By detecting the detection piece 3423a of the base gear 3423 with the rotation position detection sensor 3431, the rotation position of the back upper side movable decoration body 3410 can be detected.

In the back-up side movable effect unit 3400 of this example, in the normal state (normal position), as shown in FIG. 167 (a), the left and right back-up side movable decorative bodies 3410 are directly above the rotation shaft 3415. The guide shaft 3416 is positioned, and a part of the back upper side movable decorative body 3410 slightly protrudes downward from the lower end of the drive base 3421. In this normal state, the lower end of the back upper side movable decoration body 3410 is located slightly above the window portion 2501 in the center accessory 2500 in front view, and the back upper side movable decoration body 3410 is on the player side. It is almost invisible from the window (see FIG. 108 and the like).

In the back-up side movable decorative unit 3400, when the drive gear 3427 is rotationally driven in a predetermined direction by each back-up side drive motor 3428 from a normal state, the rotation from the drive gear 3427 is the second transmission gear 3426 and the transmission gear 3425. , And the first transmission gear 3424 is transmitted to the base gear 3423, and the base gear 3423 rotates in a predetermined direction (clockwise direction for the right unit 3400R and counterclockwise direction for the left unit 3400L). The left and right back upper side movable decorative bodies 3410 also rotate in predetermined directions via the rotating shaft 3415 that rotates integrally with the base gear 3423.

Further, in the back-up side movable decorative body unit 3400, when the back-up side movable decorative body 3410 is rotated by the drive of the back-up side drive motor 3428, the guide shaft 3416 attached to the guide bearing portion 3413c of the decorative body base 3413. The rear end bush 3430 moves downward along the guide groove 3421b of the drive base 3421.

The back upper side movable decorative body 3410 descends from the upper inner edge of the center accessory 2500 into the window portion 2501 as it rotates, and is gradually visible from the player side. Then, when the bush 3430 that moves in the guide groove 3421b with the rotation of the back upper side movable decorative body 3410 comes into contact with the stopper portion 3421c at the lower end of the guide groove 3421c, the movement of the bush 3430 is forcibly stopped. The rotation of the back-up side movable decorative body 3410 is stopped, and the drive of the back-up side drive motor 3428 is stopped (see FIG. 167 (b)). In this state (state of appearance position), substantially the entire back upper side movable decorative body 3410 is located in the window portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 in front view (see FIG. 178).

By emitting the LED 3414a of the back upper side decorative substrate 3414 in a state where the back upper side movable decorative body 3410 rotates and appears in the window portion 2501, the back upper side movable decorative body 3410 can be light-emitting decorated. , It has become possible to strongly attract the attention of the player.

Further, the back-up side movable effect unit 3400 of this example was supported by the guide shaft 3416 as described above when the back-up side movable decorative body 3410 was rotated so as to be visible from the player side. Since the bush 3430 abuts on the stopper portion 3421c at the lower end of the guide groove 3421b and the rotation is suddenly stopped, a large inertial force acts on the back upper side movable decorative body 3410, and a plurality of axially supported by the inertial force. The swing member 3412 swings in the left-right direction. Then, when the LED 3414a of the back upper side decorative substrate 3414 is made to emit light while the rocking member 3412 is shaking, the swing member 3412 moves back and forth in front of the LED 3414a, and the light from the LED 3414a is shaken. It can be turned up or the refraction direction through the swing member 3412 can be changed in various directions, and the back upper side movable decorative body 3410 is made to glitter to enhance the decorativeness.

On the other hand, in order to return the back upper side movable decorative body 3410 from the state where it is located in the window portion 2501 in the center accessory 2500 to the initial normal state, the back upper side drive motors 3428 are rotationally driven in opposite directions. As a result, the left and right back upper side movable decorative bodies 3410 can be rotated in opposite directions, respectively, and the detection piece 3423a of the base gear 3423 fixed to the rear end of each rotation shaft 3415 is a rotation detection sensor. When the back upper side drive motor 3428 is driven until detected by 3431, the bush 3430 supported at the rear end of each rotation shaft 3416 is located at the upper end of the guide groove 3421b, and the back upper side movable decoration body 3410 is a window. It is possible to return to the normal state located above the portion 2501.

As described above, in this example, when the drive gear 3427 is rotationally driven by the back upper side drive motor 3428 of the back upper side drive mechanism 3420 according to the special lottery result drawn by the start winning prize, the rotation of the drive gear 3427 becomes the second. (2) The transmission gear 3426, the transmission gear 3425, the first transmission gear 3424, and the base gear 3423 are transmitted to the rotation shaft 3415 of the back upper side movable decoration body 3410, and the back upper side movable decoration body 3410 rotates and moves. Will be done. Then, when the guide shaft 3416 of the rotating back-up side movable decoration body 3410 comes into contact with the stopper portion 3421c of the back-up side drive mechanism 3420, the back-up side movable decoration body 3410 suddenly stops and becomes a swing member 3412. A strong inertial force can be applied to it. Therefore, the plurality of swinging members 3412 pivotally supported by the shaft portion 3411a of the front member 3411 in the back-up side movable decoration body 3410 greatly swing, and the appearance of the entire back-up side movable decoration body 3410 is each swing member 3412. It will change each time depending on the movement and the position of movement, and the decoration of the back upper side movable decoration body 3410 can be changed, and the various decorations make it possible to make the back upper side movable decoration body 3410 which is hard to get tired of. , The swing of the swing member 3412 can be made conspicuous, and the decoration and movement by the back upper side movable decorative body 3410 can be enjoyed and the player's interest in the game can be suppressed from being lowered.

Further, since the swing member 3412 has a polyhedral shape, when the swing member 3412 changes its direction due to the movement of the back upper side movable decorative body 3410 or the swing of the swing member 3412, the swing member 3412 The appearance will also change, and this will also change the appearance of the back-up side movable decoration body 3410, making it difficult to get tired of the decoration of the back-up side movable decoration body 3410 and reducing the interest of the player. It can be suppressed, and the player can enjoy the change of the decoration of the back upper side movable decorative body 3410.

Further, since the back-up side movable decoration body 3410 is moved by the back-up side drive mechanism 3420 according to the special lottery result by the start winning, the back-up side movable decoration body 3410 moves to the player. On the other hand, it can make you think that there is something good, you can raise the expectation for the special lottery result and suppress the decrease in interest, and the back upper side movable decoration body 3410 moves. By doing so, the player can be made to pay attention to the back-up side movable decoration body 3410, and the movement and the change of the decoration of the back-up side movable decoration body 3410 can be enjoyed and the hobby can be suppressed from being lowered.

Further, since the swing member 3412 is pivotally supported by the front member 3411, the swing member 3412 is caused by gravity as compared with the case where the swing member 3412 is swung linearly in the left-right direction, for example. Since it is easy to return to the state before swinging (normal state), it is possible to sharpen the change in the decoration of the back upper side movable decorative body 3410 between the normal state and the swinging state. The impact of the appearance when the moving member 3412 is swung can be enhanced, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the back upper side movable decorative body 3410, which reduces the player's interest. Can be suppressed. Further, since the swing member 3412 is pivotally supported, the swing member 3412 can continue to swing even after the movement of the back upper side movable decorative body 3412 is stopped, which is of interest to the player. For a long time, it can be attracted to the back upper side movable decorative body 3410 to enjoy the change of decoration and the movement of the swinging member 3412, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored and losing the interest in the game.

Further, the back upper side movable decorative body 3410 is provided with a back upper side decorative substrate 3414 having a plurality of LEDs 3414a arranged so as to hang on the swing member 3412 in a front view, and emits light of the LED 3414a according to a gaming state. When the swinging member 3412 is swung by moving the back upper side movable decorative body 3410 at the same time, the translucent polyhedral swinging member 3412 swings on the front side of the LED 3414a, so that the light from the LED 3414a Is blocked by the rocking member 3412 or refracted in various directions by the rocking member 3412, so that the back upper side movable decorative body 3410 can be shimmered and attracts the attention of the player. It is possible to make a luminous decoration that can be done, and at the same time, it is possible to make the back upper side movable decoration body 3410 shine and make it look beautiful, so I strongly expect that there is something good for the player. It is possible to raise the expectation of the player and suppress the decline in the interest in the game.

Further, since the back upper side movable decorative body 3410 can be light-emitting and decorated by emitting light from the LED 3414a of the back upper side decorative substrate 3414, the back upper side movable decorative body 3410 can be moved or the swing member 3412 can be swung. In addition to the effect, the light emitting effect by the LED 3414a can be presented to the player, and the pachinko machine 1 can be enjoyed with various effects and is hard to get tired of. Further, since the light emission of the LED 3414a and the swing of the swing member 3412 can make the back upper side movable decoration body 3410 glitter, it is possible to make the light emission decoration of the back upper side movable decoration body 3410 stand out even from a distance. Therefore, the appealing power to the player can be enhanced, the pachinko machine can be differentiated from other pachinko machines, and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as the pachinko machine to be played.

Further, since the regulation portion 3417a for restricting the swing range of the swing member 3412 is provided, the swing members 3412 may come into contact with each other or the swing member 3412 may come into contact with other members. It can be avoided, it is possible to prevent the rocking member 3412 and the like from being damaged by contact, and it is possible to prevent the game from being interrupted due to the damage of the rocking member 3412 and the like, and the game is interrupted. It is possible to prevent the player from being irritated and degrading the interest.

Further, since the stopper portion 3421c that regulates the rotating end of the back upper side movable decorative body 3410 is provided, it is possible to prevent the back upper side movable decorative body 3410 from coming into contact with other members. It is possible to prevent the game from being damaged and causing the game to be interrupted, and it is possible to prevent the game from being interrupted and the player's interest being reduced.

Further, since the guide shaft 3416 of the back upper side movable decoration body 3410 is guided by the guide groove 3421b of the drive base 3421, the back upper side movable decoration body 3410 is supported by the rotation shaft 3415 and the guide shaft 3416. It is possible to make the back upper side movable decorative body 3410 into a larger back upper side movable decorative body 3410 that can be smoothly rotated and moved even if the back upper side movable decorative body 3410 is enlarged and attracts the player's attention strongly. can. Further, the guide groove 3421b guides the guide shaft 3416 of the back upper side movable decorative body 3410, and the guide shaft 3416 can be reliably guided to the stopper portion 3421c, so that the guide shaft 3416 can be reliably guided to the stopper portion 3421c. A strong inertial force can be applied to the rocking member 3412 by abutting the rocking member 3412, and the rocking member 3412 can be greatly swung to stand out to the player.

Further, the rotary drive from the back-up side drive motor 3428 is rotated by the back-up side movable decoration body 3410 via the drive gear 3427, the second transmission gear 3426, the transmission gear 3425, the first transmission gear 3424, and the base gear 3423. Since it is transmitted to the drive shaft 3415, the position of the back upper side drive motor 3428 can be arranged as far as possible from the rotation shaft 3415, and the back upper side drive motor 3428 can be placed from the player side. By arranging it in an inconspicuous position, it is possible to prevent the decorativeness of the movable decorative body 3410 on the back upper side from being impaired. Further, a drive gear 3427, a base gear 3423, etc. are arranged between the drive base 3421 and the drive cover 3422 to which the back upper side drive motor 3428 is attached, and the drive gear 3427, the base gear 3423, etc. are probably driven. Since the base 3421 and the drive cover 3422 are covered with each other, it is possible to prevent dust or the like from adhering to the drive gear 3427 or the like from the outside, and the dust or the like bites into the gear teeth and the drive gear 3427 or the like is engaged. It is possible to prevent it from turning or becoming difficult to turn, and it is possible to reliably transmit the rotational drive from the back upper side drive motor 3428 to rotate and move the back upper side movable decoration body 3410.

[2-12. Relationship between the back-up middle movable production unit and the back-up side movable production unit]
Next, the relationship between the back-up middle movable effect unit 3300 and the back-up side movable effect unit 3400 in the back unit 3000 will be described with reference to FIG. 168. FIG. 168 (a) is a front view of the back-up middle movable effect unit and the back-up side movable effect unit, and FIG. It is a front view which shows the positioned state, and (c) is the bottom view of (b).

In the back unit 3000 of this example, the back upper middle movable effect unit 3300 and the back upper side movable effect unit 3400 have the back upper side movable effect unit 3400 arranged on the left and right sides of the back upper middle movable effect unit 3300, and are viewed from the front. Then, the back-up middle movable effect unit 3300 and the back-up side movable effect unit 3400 can be seen as an integrated effect unit. Assuming that the back-up middle movable decoration body 3330 and the left and right back-up side movable decoration bodies 3410 are positioned at the appearance positions, respectively, as shown in FIG. 168 (b), the back-up middle movable decoration body is viewed from the front. The movable decorative body 3410 on the back upper side is located on both the left and right sides of the body 3330, so that the decorative member has a sense of unity.

Further, in the back-up middle movable effect unit 3300 and the back-up side movable effect unit 3400, as shown in FIG. 168 (c), the back-up side movable decorative body 3410 is arranged behind the back-up middle movable decorative body 3330. They are arranged at different positions in the front-back direction from each other. As a result, the left and right back upper side movable decorative bodies 3410 can be brought as close as possible to the back upper middle movable decorative body 3330 in front view, and the sense of unity between the movable decorative bodies 3330 and 3410 can be enhanced. At the same time, when the movable decoration body 3330 on the back side is rotated around an axis extending in the vertical direction, the movable decoration bodies 3330 and 3410 can be made difficult to contact each other, and the movable decoration body 3330 on the back side can be reliably rotated. It is designed to be able to be made to.

Further, as described above, since the back upper side movable decorative body 3410 is arranged behind the back upper middle movable decorative body 3330, the LED of the back upper side decorative substrate 3414 in the back upper side movable decorative body 3410 is used. When the light is emitted, it becomes possible to illuminate the side surface of the movable decorative body 3330 on the back surface with a part of the light, and the movable decorative body 3330 on the back surface is reflected by the frame member 3332 having a metallic luster and glittering. It is possible to make it shine, and it is possible to enhance the decorative effect of the light emitting decoration.

As described above, in the back-up middle movable effect unit 3300 and the back-up side movable effect unit 3400 of this example, the game ball driven into the game area 1100 is received by the first start port 2101 and the second start port 2102. According to the result of the special lottery drawn in, the movable decoration body 3330 on the back side descends from the position invisible to the player side to the position visible by the elevating drive mechanism 3310 of the movable effect unit 3300 on the back side. After that, the back-up side movable decoration body 3330 that makes it possible to see a pair of back-up side movable decoration bodies 3410 from a position that cannot be seen from the player side by the back-up side drive mechanism 3420 of the back-up side movable production unit 3400. Move to a position as close as possible to both sides, and make the player located in front of the game area 1100 have the illusion that the back-up middle movable decoration 3330 and the back-up side movable decoration 3410 are united. Furthermore, since the rotation drive mechanism 3340 can perform a series of movable effects such that the movable decorative body 3330 on the back side rotates, it is possible for a player who is accustomed to a conventional pachinko machine to simply combine. Therefore, it is possible to give a strong impact, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the back-up middle movable decoration body 3330 and the back-up side movable decoration body 3410, and the movable production by the movable decoration bodies 3330 and 3410 can be enjoyed. However, it is possible to suppress the decline in the interest in the game.

Further, the back upper side movable decoration body 3410 is arranged behind the back upper middle movable decoration body 3330, and the back upper side movable decoration body 3410 is as close as possible to the back upper middle movable decoration body 3330. Even if the back-up middle movable decoration body 3330 is rotated at the moved position, it is possible to prevent the back-up middle movable decoration body 3330 and the back-up side movable decoration body 3410 from coming into contact with each other. It is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 capable of satisfactorily rotating the body 3330 and reliably performing the above-mentioned movable effect.

Further, the position where the back-up side movable decoration body 3410 is as close as possible to the back-up side movable decoration body 3330 that appears in a position that can be seen from the player side from a position that cannot be seen from the player side. After moving to and making it look like it is united, it is possible to rotate the back-up middle movable decoration body 3330 and the back-up middle movable decoration body 3330 and the back-up side movable decoration body 3410 in that state. Since the movable effect can be performed in multiple stages, the player's interest can be continued even after the back-up middle movable decorative body 3330 and the back-up side movable decorative body 3410 are combined. It can be attracted and can be made into a movable effect that is hard to get tired of, and it is possible to entertain the movable decorative bodies 3330 and 3410 that seem to be united and suppress the decrease in the interest in the game.

Further, the back-up side movable decoration body 3410 is approached from both sides of the rotation axis of the back-up middle movable decoration body 3330, and the back-up middle movable decoration body 3330 is likely to be in the left-right direction of the game area 1100. Since it will be placed approximately in the center, the back-up middle movable decoration 3330 should be sufficiently conspicuous before the back-up side movable decoration 3410 is moved in the direction approaching the back-up middle movable decoration 3330. It is possible to make it easier for the player to pay attention to the movable decorative body 3330 on the back side, and the movable decorative body 3330 on the back upper side is moved in the approaching direction to give the illusion that they are united. , 3410 Since the appearance of the whole can be greatly changed, the impact after coalescence can be enhanced to strongly attract the attention of the player, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the player's interest.

Further, the back-up side movable decoration body 3410 is brought closer to the back-up middle movable decoration body 3330 from a direction substantially perpendicular to the rotation axis of the back-up middle movable decoration body 3330, and the back-up middle movable decoration body 3330 is rotated. Since the back upper side movable decoration body 3410 can be brought as close as possible to the front-rear direction of the body 3330, when the back upper side movable decoration body 3410 is moved to a position close to the back upper middle movable decoration body 3330. , It is possible to give the player who is located in front of the game area 1100 the illusion that the back upper middle movable decoration body 3330 and the back upper side movable decoration body 3410 are more integrally united, and the back upper middle movable decoration body. It is possible to entertain the movable effect by the body 3330 and the back upper side movable decorative body 3410 and suppress the deterioration of the player's interest.

Further, since the back upper side movable decoration body 3410 is arranged behind the back upper middle movable decoration body 3330, the player pays attention to the back upper middle movable decoration body 3330, and the back upper side movable decoration body 3330. Even if the body 3410 is moved to a position close to the back-up middle movable decoration body 3330, it is possible to prevent the body 3410 from being unconsciously focused on the back-up side movable decoration body 3410, and then the back-up middle movable decoration body 3410 can be prevented from being unconsciously focused. Even if the body 3330 rotates, the need to move the focus again to the movable decorative body 3330 on the back surface can be reduced as much as possible. Therefore, since the frequent focus movement can be reduced, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of eyeball fatigue at an early stage, and it is possible to prevent the player's interest in the game from being lowered due to the eyeball fatigue. ..

Further, since the back upper side movable decoration body 3410 is arranged behind the back upper middle movable decoration body 3330, the back upper side movable decoration body 3410 is moved to a position close to the back upper middle movable decoration body 3330. However, it is possible to continue to make the back-up middle movable decoration 3330 stand out and keep it in the spotlight, and it is possible to surely show the rotation effect of the back-up middle movable decoration 3330 that follows, and the back-up middle movable decoration 3330 can be surely shown. It is possible to entertain the movable production by 3330 and the like and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, since the back upper side movable decorative body 3410 is provided with the back upper side decorative substrate 3414, the back upper side movable decorative body 3410 can be light-emitting decorated by appropriately emitting light from the LED 3414a of the back upper side decorative substrate 3414. The back upper side movable decoration body 3410 can be made to stand out, and the back upper side movable decoration body 3410 is arranged behind the back upper middle movable decoration body 3330, so that the back upper side decorative substrate 3414 can be used. The light from the LED 3414a can illuminate the back-up middle movable decoration 3330 from both sides, and the back-up middle movable decoration 3330 can be brightly illuminated to make the back-up middle movable decoration 3330 stand out. Therefore, since the light from the back-up side decorative substrate 3414 can illuminate both the back-up middle movable decoration body 3330 and the back-up side movable decoration body 3410, the player is interested in the back-up middle movable decoration body 3330 and the like. Can be strongly attracted, and it is possible to entertain the movable production and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, since the frame member 3332 having a metallic luster is provided on a part of the surface of the movable decorative body 3330 on the back surface, the light from the LED 3414a of the back surface side decorative substrate 3414 and other light sources in the game area 1100. The light from the pachinko machine 1, the light from the light source arranged outside the pachinko machine 1, etc. can be reflected to the player side by the frame member 3332, and the movable decorative body 3330 on the back side can be made to shine and shine. The back-up middle movable decorative body 3330 can attract the attention of the player, and the back-up middle movable decorative body 3330 or the like can be enjoyed and the interest in the game can be suppressed from being lowered. Further, since the frame member 3332 having a metallic luster is provided on the back-up middle movable decoration body 3330, by rotating the back-up middle movable decoration body 3330, the frame member 3332 faces in various directions, and the frame The member 3332 can reflect light in various directions to amplify the glittering feeling, and the movable decorative body 3330 on the back can be made to stand out and attract the attention of the player, and can be moved on the back. It is possible to entertain the glittering light emitting decoration by the decorative body 3330 and suppress the deterioration of the player's interest.

Further, since the LED 3334a of the back-up middle decoration substrate 3334 can be made to emit light to make the back-up middle movable decoration 3330 emit light from the inside, the back-up middle movable decoration 3330 can be made more conspicuous, and the game can be played. It is possible to attract the interest of the person to the movable decoration body 3330 in the back and middle, and to surely entertain the light emitting decoration (light emitting effect) and the movable production of the movable decoration body 3330 in the back and middle, and the interest of the player in the game is reduced. Can be suppressed. Further, since the back-up middle decorative substrate 3334 can emit and decorate the back-up middle movable decoration body 3330, the light from the LED 3334a of the back-up middle decorative substrate 3334 can be emitted by rotating the back-up middle movable decoration body 3330. It is possible to irradiate in various directions and illuminate the back upper side movable decoration body 3410 etc., and the back upper middle movable decoration body 3330 and the back upper side movable decoration body 3410 etc. can be shined beautifully. It is possible to entertain the light emitting effect of the movable decorative body 3330 and the like on the back and to suppress the decrease in the player's interest in the game.

[2-13. Movable production unit under the back]
Next, the under-back movable effect unit 3500 in the back unit 3000 will be described with reference to FIGS. 169 to 174. FIG. 169 is a perspective view of the back-bottom movable effect unit and the back-right movable effect unit of the back unit in the game board, and FIG. 170 is a rear view of the back-bottom movable effect unit and the back-right movable effect unit. It is a perspective view. Further, FIG. 171 is an exploded perspective view of the back lower movable effect unit and the back right movable effect unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 172 shows the back lower movable effect unit and the back right movable effect unit. It is an exploded perspective view which was disassembled for each main member and was seen afterwards. Further, FIG. 173 is a front view showing the main configuration of the lower back movable effect unit. Further, FIG. 174 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of the lower back movable effect unit.

The lower back movable production unit 3500 of this example supports the flat lower back movable decorative body 3510 that imitates the bow of a luxury cruise ship and the right end of the lower back movable decorative body 3510 so as to be able to move up and down. The lower back right drive mechanism 3530 mounted on the right side of the opening 3001c in the 3001 and the lower back left drive mounted on the left side of the opening 3001c in the back box 3001 to support the left end of the lower back movable decorative body 3510 so as to be able to move up and down. It is equipped with a mechanism 3550. The under-back movable effect unit 3500 can raise and lower the left and right of the under-back movable decoration 3510 separately by the left and right drive mechanisms 3530 and 3550, and the under-back movable decoration 3510 can be raised and lowered straight and tilted. You can do it.

The under-back movable decorative body 3510 of the under-back movable effect unit 3500 imitates the bow of a large luxury cruise ship, and the bow is offset to the left with respect to the center in the left-right direction. This makes it look like a luxury liner seen from a position slightly to the right (to the port side) of the position seen from the front, and the back right movable production unit 3600, which will be described later. The movable decorative body 3610 on the back right of the ship can be seen as a bridge of a luxury liner without any discomfort. Further, the width in the left-right direction of the lower back movable decorative body 3510 is formed to be larger than the width in the left-right direction of the window portion 2501 in the center accessory 2500, and the height in the vertical direction is the height of the window portion 2501. It is said to be about 3/4 of the height, and can give the player the impression that it is considerably larger than the movable body provided in the conventional pachinko machine.

The lower back movable decorative body 3510 of the lower back movable effect unit 3500 is a plate-shaped decorative body base 3511 which is formed of a colorless transparent member and whose left and right ends are supported by the lower back right drive mechanism 3530 and the lower back left drive mechanism 3550, respectively. The opaque front decorative member 3512, which is attached to the front side of the decorative base 3511 and imitates the bow of a luxury liner as a whole, and the opaque front decorative member 3512 that extends rearward from the vicinity of the upper end and imitates the deck. It is provided with an upper decorative member 3513.

The decorative body base 3511 of the lower back movable decorative body 3510 has a circular upper right support hole 3511a and an upper right support hole 3511a formed in the upper right end and into which the upper support shaft 3545 of the right slider 3544 of the lower back right drive mechanism 3530 is inserted. A long hole-shaped lower right support hole 3511b arranged on the lower side of the 3511a and extending in the left-right direction into which the lower support shaft 3546 of the right slider 3544 is inserted, and a left slider 3564 of the back lower left drive mechanism 3550 formed on the upper left end. An elongated upper left support hole 3511c extending in the left-right direction into which the upper support shaft 3565 is inserted, and a left-right support shaft 3566 arranged below the upper left support hole 3511c and extending in the left-right direction into which the left slider 3564 is inserted. It is provided with a long hole-shaped lower left support hole 3511d.

Further, as shown in the figure, the front decorative member 3512 of the lower back movable decorative body 3510 imitates the bow of a luxury passenger ship, and imitates a water hull extending in the vertical direction at a position to the left of the center in the left-right direction. The decoration, the three-dimensional decoration that imitates the Ikari on both sides of the decoration that imitates the water boat, and the fence-shaped decoration that extends in the left-right direction at the upper end are formed, and the decoration that imitates the Ikari. Each has a first opening 3512a penetrating in the front-rear direction in the shape of a ship name on the upper side, and a plurality of second openings 3512b penetrating in the front-rear direction imitating a circular window formed on the hull. The first opening 3512a and the second opening 3512b of the front decorative member 3512 are each closed by the decorative base 3511.

Further, the upper decorative member 3513 of the lower back movable decorative body 3510 is constant from the lower side to the rear of the decoration imitating the upper fence of the front decorative member 3512 at the position on the left side leaving about 1/3 from the right end in the left-right direction. It extends at the depth of.

Further, as shown in FIG. 172, the lower back movable decorative body 3510 is attached to the rear side of the decorative body base 3511 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the lower back decorative substrate 3514 and the upper back decorative substrate 3514. It further comprises a colorless and transparent substrate cover 3515 that covers the rear side corresponding to the lower side of the decorative member 3513.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the lower back decorative substrate 3514 of the lower back movable decorative body 3510 has a portion located on the front side of the back right movable effect unit 3600 and a first opening on the right side of the front view of the front decorative member 3512. The part corresponding to the 3512a and the part corresponding to the first opening 3512a on the left side of the front view are divided into three parts in the left-right direction, and each part is independently luminescent and decorated. Can be done.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 170 and 172, the substrate cover 3515 of the lower back movable decorative body 3510 is formed with a recess 3515a which is recessed forward and is open downward on the rear surface, and the back is formed in the recess 3515a. A flexible flat cable (not shown) connecting the lower decorative board 3514 and the lower back relay board 3024 is accommodated.

The lower back right drive mechanism 3530 in the lower back movable effect unit 3500 is formed of a metal plate and extends vertically in the vertical direction. The long first rail 3532 extending in the direction, the second rail 3533 arranged on the left side of the first rail 3532, extending vertically in a columnar shape, and the lower end side shorter than the first rail 3532, and the first An upper rail support member 3534 that supports the upper ends of the rail 3532 and the second rail 3533 and is attached to the upper front surface of the drive mechanism base 3531, and a drive mechanism base 3531 that supports the lower ends of the first rail 3532 and the second rail 3533, respectively. It includes a lower rail support member 3535 attached to the lower front surface.

Further, as shown in FIG. 173, the lower back right drive mechanism 3530 is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction on the upper side of the second rail 3533 and is supported on the rear side of the toothed pulley 3536a and the toothed pulley 3536a. A drive pulley 3536 having an integrally rotatable gear portion 3536b, a driven pulley 3537 rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction under the second rail 3533, and a toothed pulley of the drive pulley 3536. It further comprises a toothed belt 3538 that is wound around the 3536a and the driven pulley 3537. In this example, as shown in the figure, the toothed belt 3538 surrounds the second rail 3533.

Further, the lower back right drive mechanism 3530 meshes with the gear portion 3536b of the drive pulley 3536 and is arranged on the upper side of the drive pulley 3536 (see FIG. 173), and the front side of the drive gear 3539 and the drive pulley 3536. The cover member 3540 (see FIG. 171 and the like) attached to the front surface of the cover rail support member 3534, and the underside where the drive gear 3539 is fixed to the tip of the rotating shaft attached to the front surface of the cover member 3540 and extending rearward. It is further equipped with a right drive motor 3541.

Further, the lower back right drive mechanism 3530 has a pulley support member 3542 that rotatably supports the driven pulley 3537 and is slidably supported in the vertical direction by the first rail 3532, and an upper end is attached to the lower end of the pulley support member 3542. At the same time, the lower end is attached to the lower end of the drive mechanism base 3531 to provide an urging member 3543 that urges the pulley support member 3542 downward.

Further, the lower back right drive mechanism 3530 is slidably supported in the vertical direction by the first rail 3532 and the second rail 3533, and is attached to the toothed belt 3538 between the first rail 3532 and the second rail 3533. The right slider 3544, the upper support shaft 3545 protruding forward from the upper front surface of the right slider 3544, the lower support shaft 3546 arranged below the upper support shaft 3545 and protruding forward from the lower front surface of the right slider 3544, and the right. It further includes a plurality of elevating position detection sensors 3547 that detect the elevating position of the slider 3544 and are attached to the drive mechanism base 3531.

The drive mechanism base 3531 of the lower right drive mechanism 3530 is formed by bending the outer circumference of a metal plate having a predetermined thickness into a shallow box shape, and has a rectangular through hole 3531a extending in the vertical direction. There is. Further, the first rail 3532 and the second rail 3533 are both made of metal rods having the same diameter. Further, the right slider 3544 includes a plate-shaped detection piece 3544a extending in a direction toward the rear surface. The detection piece 3544a of the right slider 3544 enters into the through hole 3531a of the drive mechanism base 3531 in the assembled state, and is detected by the elevating position detection sensor 3547 attached to the rear side of the drive mechanism base 3531. It is designed to be able to be done.

The upper support shaft 3545 and the lower support shaft 3546 protruding forward from the right slider 3544 in the lower back right drive mechanism 3530 are respectively provided in the upper right support hole 3511a and the lower right support hole 3511b of the decorative body base 3511 in the lower back movable decoration body 3510. After being inserted, the bush 3548 can be attached to the front end. As a result, the lower back movable decorative body 3510 can be rotated around the upper support shaft 3545 of the right slider 3544 within a range that can be moved in the elongated lower right support hole 3511b into which the lower support shaft 3546 is inserted. You can support it.

The back lower right drive mechanism 3530 urges the pulley support member 3542 that rotatably supports the driven pulley 3537 arranged on the lower side by the urging member 3543 made of a coil spring, so that the driven pulley is urged downward. The 3537 can be urged in a direction away from the drive pulley 3536, and tension can be applied to the toothed belt 3538 wound around the toothed pulley 3536a of the drive pulley 3536 and the driven pulley 3537. It is possible to prevent the drive pulley 3536 from idling with respect to the toothed belt 3538.

When the lower right drive mechanism 3530 drives the lower right drive motor 3541 to rotate the drive gear 3539 in a clockwise direction, for example, the drive gear 3539 is driven by the gear portion 3536b of the drive pulley 3536 meshed with the drive gear 3539. The pulley 3536 rotates counterclockwise, and the toothed belt 3538 wound around the toothed pulley 3536a of the drive pulley 3536 and the driven pulley 3537 orbits counterclockwise around the second rail 3533. The left portion of the second rail 3533 in the toothed belt 3538 moves in the ascending direction. Then, the left side of the second rail 3533, that is, the right slider 3544 fixed to the toothed belt 3538 between the second rail 3533 and the first rail 3532 is guided to the first rail 3532 and the second rail 3533. It can be moved upward together with the toothed belt 3538.

On the other hand, the lower back left drive mechanism 3550 in the lower back movable effect unit 3500 is formed of a metal plate and extends vertically in the vertical direction to form a rectangular drive mechanism base 3551 and a columnar shape arranged near the right end on the front side of the drive mechanism base 3551. The long first rail 3552 extending in the vertical direction and the second rail 3553 arranged on the left side of the first rail 3552 and extending in the vertical direction with a columnar shape and the lower end side shorter than the first rail 3552. The upper rail support member 3554 that supports the upper ends of the first rail 3552 and the second rail 3553 and is attached to the upper front surface of the drive mechanism base 3551, and the drive mechanism base that supports the lower ends of the first rail 3552 and the second rail 3553, respectively. It includes a lower rail support member 3555 attached to the lower front surface of the 3551.

Further, as shown in FIG. 173, the lower back left drive mechanism 3550 is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction on the upper side of the second rail 3553 and is supported on the rear side of the toothed pulley 3556a and the toothed pulley 3556a. A drive pulley 3556 having an integrally rotatable gear portion 3556b, a driven pulley 3557 rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction under the second rail 3353, and a toothed pulley of the drive pulley 3556. It further comprises a toothed belt 3558 that is wound around the 3556a and the driven pulley 3557. In this example, as shown in the figure, the toothed belt 3558 surrounds the second rail 3553.

Further, the lower back left drive mechanism 3550 meshes with the gear portion 3556b of the drive pulley 3556 and disengages the drive gear 3559 (see FIG. 173) arranged above the drive pulley 3556, and the front side of the drive gear 3559 and the drive pulley 3556. The cover member 3560 (see FIG. 171 and the like) attached to the front surface of the cover rail support member 3554, and the underside where the drive gear 3559 is fixed to the tip of the rotating shaft attached to the front surface of the cover member 3560 and extending rearward. It is further equipped with a left drive motor 3651.

Further, the lower back left drive mechanism 3550 has a pulley support member 3562 that rotatably supports the driven pulley 3557 and is slidably supported in the vertical direction by the first rail 3552, and an upper end is attached to the lower end of the pulley support member 3562. At the same time, the lower end is attached to the lower end of the drive mechanism base 3551 to provide an urging member 3563 that urges the pulley support member 3562 downward.

Further, the lower back left drive mechanism 3550 is slidably supported in the vertical direction by the first rail 3552 and the second rail 3552, and is attached to the toothed belt 3558 between the first rail 3552 and the second rail 3555. The left slider 3564, the upper support shaft 3565 protruding forward from the upper front surface of the left slider 3564, the lower support shaft 3566 arranged below the upper support shaft 3565 and protruding forward from the lower front surface of the left slider 3564, and the left. It further includes a plurality of elevating position detection sensors 3567 that detect the elevating position of the slider 3564 and are attached to the drive mechanism base 3551.

The drive mechanism base 3551 of the back lower left drive mechanism 3550 is formed in a shallow box shape by bending the outer periphery of a metal plate having a predetermined thickness. Further, the first rail 3552 and the second rail 3553 are both made of metal rods having the same diameter. Further, the left slider 3564 includes a plate-shaped detection piece 3564a extending to the left. The detection piece 3564a of the left slider 3564 is detected by the elevating position detection sensor 3567 attached to the front surface of the left end of the drive mechanism base 3551 in the assembled state.

The upper support shaft 3565 and the lower support shaft 3566 protruding forward from the left slider 3564 in the lower back left drive mechanism 3550 are inserted into the upper left support hole 3511c and the lower left support hole 3511d of the decorative body base 3511 in the lower back movable decoration body 3510, respectively. After that, the bush 3568 can be attached to the front end. As a result, the left end of the lower back movable decorative body 3510 can be movably supported in the left-right direction within the range of the elongated upper left support hole 3511c and the lower left support hole 3511d.

The back lower left drive mechanism 3550 urges the pulley support member 3562 that rotatably supports the driven pulley 3557 arranged on the lower side by the urging member 3563 made of a coil spring, so that the driven pulley is urged downward. The 3557 can be urged away from the drive pulley 3556, and tension can be applied to the toothed belt 3558 wound around the toothed pulley 3556a of the drive pulley 3556 and the driven pulley 3557. It is possible to prevent the drive pulley 3556 from idling with respect to the toothed belt 3558.

The lower back left drive mechanism 3550 drives the lower right drive motor 3651 to rotate the drive gear 3559, for example, in the clockwise direction in the front view, and is driven by the gear portion 3556b of the drive pulley 3556 meshed with the drive gear 3559. The pulley 3556 rotates counterclockwise, and the toothed belt 3558 wound around the toothed pulley 3556a of the drive pulley 3556 and the driven pulley 3557 orbits counterclockwise around the second rail 3553. The left portion of the second rail 3553 in the toothed belt 3558 will move in the ascending direction. Then, the left slider 3564 fixed to the toothed belt 3558 between the second rail 3553 and the first rail 3552, that is, the left side of the second rail 3553, is guided to the first rail 3552 and the second rail 3553. It can be moved upward together with the toothed belt 3558.

In the back unit 3000 of this example, the back bottom movable effect unit 3500 is located in the retracted position where the back bottom movable decorative body 3510 is most lowered in a normal state, and in this state, as shown in FIG. 108 and the like. The upper end of the lower back movable decoration 3510 is located slightly above the lower inner edge of the window frame 2501 in the front view center accessory 2500, and the fence-like shape formed on the upper end of the lower back movable decoration 3510. Only the decoration is visible to the player.

When the drive motors 3541 and 3651 of the left and right drive mechanisms 3530 and 3550 are rotated in the same direction at the same speed from the normal state, the under-back movable effect unit 3500 supports the left and right ends of the under-back movable decorative body 3510, respectively. The left and right sliders 3544 and 3564 can be raised at the same speed at the same time, and the lower back movable decorative body 3510 can be raised while maintaining a substantially horizontal position. , 3564a can be raised to the position (maximum appearance position) detected by the elevating position detection sensors 3547 and 3567 arranged on the uppermost side (see FIG. 174 (a)).

In the state where the lower back movable decorative body 3510 is in the most raised position, as shown in FIG. 179, it covers about 3/4 of the height direction from the lower side (lower inner edge) of the window portion 2501 in the center accessory 2500. With the advent of huge movable ornaments, it has become possible to give a strong impact to the player, and at the same time, it has become possible to strongly attract the attention of the player.

Further, the lower back movable effect unit 3500 can drive the left and right drive mechanisms 3530 and 3550 independently, and at the right end of the lower back movable decorative body 3510, the upper right support hole 3511a supports the upper part of the right slider 3544. It is rotatably supported around the axis of the shaft 3545, and at the left end, it is movably supported by the upper and lower support holes 3511c and 3511d with respect to the upper and lower support shafts 3565 and 3566 of the left slider 3564. Therefore, by making the elevating positions of the sliders 3544 and 3564 in the left and right drive mechanisms 3530 and 3550 different, the back-up movable decorative body 3510 can be tilted from a substantially horizontal state (FIG. 174 (b). ).

As a result, the under-back movable decoration 3510 can be made to move in various ways. For example, the under-back movable decoration 3510 that imitates a luxury cruise ship can be made to move as if it were shaking at sea. On the other hand, it is possible to enjoy the movable effect by the movable decorative body 3510 under the back. In addition, since it is equipped with a large and three-dimensional movable decorative body under the back 3510 that can cover most of the window portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500, it is more suitable for the player than the flat effect image by the liquid crystal display device 1900. It can give a strong impact and can be expected to have the effect of enhancing the interest of the player.

By the way, for example, when the drive pulleys 3536 and 3556 are arranged on the lower side, the driven pulleys 3537 and 3557 are arranged on the upper side and are urged upward by the urging members 3543 and 3563. In this state, when the load of the lower back movable decorative body 3510 acts via the sliders 3544 and 3564, a downward force acts on the driven pulleys 3537 and 3557 via the toothed belts 3538 and 3558, and the downward force acts on the driven pulleys 3537 and 3557. Due to the acting force (load of the under-back movable decoration 3510), the sliders 3544 and 3564 move downward together with the driven pulleys 3537 and 3557 against the urging force of the urging members 3543 and 3563, and the under-back movable decoration 3510 moves. There is a problem of falling. However, in the lower back movable effect unit 3500 of this example, in the left and right drive mechanisms 3530 and 3550, the drive pulleys 3536 and 3556 for driving the toothed belts 3538 and 3558 are arranged above the sliders 3544 and 3564. Therefore, between the sliders 3544, 3564 in the toothed belts 3538, 3558 and the drive pulleys 3536, 3556 (toothed pulleys 3536a, 3556a), the load of the lower back movable decorative body 3510 is interposed via the sliders 3544, 3564. , That is, the force acts in the direction in which the toothed belts 3538 and 3558 extend, and the sliders 3544 and 3564 are dropped by the drive pulleys 3536 and 3556 stopped by the braking of the drive motors 3541 and 3651. It can be prevented, and the lower back movable decorative body 3510 can be raised and lowered to a desired position.

Further, on the left end side of the lower back movable decorative body 3510, the lower back movable effect unit 3500 moves in the left-right direction with respect to the left slider 3564 of the lower back left drive mechanism 3550 by the horizontally long support holes 3511c and 3511d. Since it is supported in a possible state, even if the left and right sides of the lower back movable decorative body 3510 are moved up and down by separate drive mechanisms 3530 and 3550, the drive error between the drive mechanisms 3530 and 3550 is caused by the support holes 3511c, 3511d and the like. It can be absorbed and the movable under-back decorative body 3510 can be smoothly moved up and down.

Further, in the left and right drive mechanisms 3530 and 3550, the lower back movable effect unit 3500 of this example has the first rail 3532 in the toothed belts 3538 and 3558 arranged so as to orbit around the second rails 3533 and 3555. Since it is attached and fixed to the sliders 3544 and 3564 at the positions between the 3552 and the second rails 3533 and 3553, when the sliders 3554 and 3556 are moved up and down by the toothed belts 3538 and 3558, the first rail is used. The sliders 3554, 3556 can be slid (elevated) so that the force is applied substantially evenly to the 3532, 3552 and the second rail 3533, 3553, and the sliders 3554, 3556 (movable decorative body under the back 3510) can be smoothly moved. It can be raised and lowered.

As described above, in this example, the game panel 1150 in which the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 having the window portion 2501 from the front side is attached to the opening 1158, and the window portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 on the rear side of the game panel 1150. A large under-back movable decorative body 3510 that is larger than the width in the left-right direction of the liquid crystal display device 1900 and can cover more than half is placed between the liquid crystal display device 1900 that is visible from the player side through the back. A pair of lower back right drive mechanism 3530 and lower back left drive mechanism 3550 that slides (elevates) both left and right ends of the lower movable decorative body 3510 in the vertical direction are provided, and these drive mechanisms 3530 and 3550 are used as a lower right drive motor. The drive pulleys 3536 and 3556, which are rotationally driven by the 3541 and the lower left drive motor 3651, are arranged on the upper side, and the driven pulleys 3537 and 3557 paired with the drive pulleys 3536 and 3556 are arranged on the lower side. The toothed belts 3538 and 3558 are wound around the 3556 and the driven pulleys 3537 and 3557, and the driven pulleys 3537 and 3557 are urged downward by the urging members 3543 and 3563. Even if the load of the movable decorative body 3510 acts on the toothed belts 3538 and 3558, the force (the load of the movable under-back movable decorative body 3510) acts in the same direction as the urging force of the urging members 3543 and 3563. It is possible to prevent the tension applied to the toothed belts 3538 and 3558 from being canceled or weakened to prevent slippage between the drive pulleys 3536 and 3556 and the toothed belts 3538 and 3558. The lower back movable decorative body 3510 can be reliably moved up and down.

Further, in the sliders 3544 and 3564 of the left and right drive mechanisms 3530 and 3550, the right side of the lower back movable decorative body 3510 is rotatably supported and the left side is movably supported in the left-right direction. Even if the movement timing of the sliders 3544 and 3564 is deviated, the right side of the back bottom movable decorative body 3510 rotates and the left side escapes to the left and right, so that the misalignment of the sliders 3544 and 3564 can be absorbed and the back bottom is movable. It is possible to prevent the movement of the decorative body 3510 from becoming jerky or stuck, and it is possible to reliably raise and lower the movable under-back decorative body 3510. Further, as described above, since the left and right sliders 3544 and 3564 can absorb the deviation of movement, the drive mechanisms 3530 and 3550 which can synchronize the left and right sliders 3544 and 3564 with each other and slide them with high accuracy. The drive mechanisms 3530 and 3550 can be made inexpensive with relatively low slide accuracy, and the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed from increasing.

Further, as described above, even if the elevating positions of the left and right sliders 3544, 3564 are displaced, the lower back movable decorative body 3510 can be elevated without any problem, so that the elevating positions of the left and right sliders 3544, 3564 are intentionally displaced. By doing so, the under-back movable decoration 3510 can be tilted, and the variation of the movement of the under-back movable decoration 3510 can be increased to make it harder to get bored. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

Further, since the left and right ends of the lower back movable decorative body 3510 are supported and raised and lowered by the drive mechanisms 3530 and 3550 having different drive motors 3541 and 3651, the heavy and large lower back movable decorative body 3510. However, it can be sufficiently raised and lowered, and it can be used as a pachinko machine 1 equipped with a large under-back movable decorative body 3510, and at the same time, the large under-back movable decorative body 3510 can be raised and lowered (movable effect) for the player. It can give a strong impact, attract the player's attention strongly, and suppress the decrease in the player's interest.

Further, the lower back movable decoration body 3510 is moved up and down by the drive mechanisms 3530 and 3550 provided with the toothed belts 3538 and 3558 wound around the drive pulleys 3536 and 3556 and the driven pulleys 3537 and 3557 which are separated in the vertical direction. Therefore, the lower back movable decoration body 3510 can be moved between the drive pulleys 3536, 3556 and the driven pulleys 3537, 3557, and the lower back movable decoration body 3510 can be moved with respect to the space related to the drive mechanism 3530, 3550. Since the range can be made as large as possible and the drive mechanisms 3530 and 3550 can be arranged vertically on both the left and right sides of the liquid crystal display device 1900, the lower back movable decoration body 3510 can be placed on the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 1900. It can be raised and lowered greatly, and the effect image of the liquid crystal display device 1900 can be blocked by the movable decorative body 3510 under the back, which can strongly attract the interest of the player.

Further, the drive motors 3541 and 3651 of the left and right drive mechanisms 3530 and 3550 that support and raise and lower the large under-back movable decorative body 3510 are arranged above the first rails 3532 and 3552 and the second rails 3533 and 3553, respectively. Therefore, it is probable that the lower back movable decorative body 3510 and the like are located below the drive motors 3541 and 3651, and the heat from the drive motors 3541 and 3651 is relative to the lower back movable decorative body 3510 and the like. It is possible to reduce the influence as much as possible, and it is possible to prevent the back lower movable decorative body 3510 and the like from being deformed by heat and causing a problem. Further, even if a large amount of heat is generated from the drive motors 3541 and 3651, it is possible to reduce the occurrence of defects due to the heat, so that it is possible to drive the drive motors 3541 and 3651 so that the load becomes high. The movable decorative body 3510 can be made to move violently to present a movable effect having a higher impact to the player, and the player can be entertained and the interest in the game can be suppressed from being lowered.

Further, since the lower back movable decorative body 3510, which is larger than the width in the left-right direction of the liquid crystal display device 1900, is arranged on the front side of the liquid crystal display device 1900, the lower back movable by the drive mechanisms 3530 and 3550 on the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 1900. By moving the decorative body 3510 to hide a part of the effect image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, the atmosphere in the game area 1100 can be greatly changed, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted. At the same time, it is possible to present a more diverse effect by collaborating the movable effect by the movable under-back decorative body 3510 and the image effect by the liquid crystal display device 1900, which entertains the player and reduces the interest in the game. Can be suppressed.

Further, a part of the toothed belts 3538 and 3558 is passed between the first rails 3532 and 3552 and the second rails 3533 and 3555 of the drive mechanisms 3530 and 3550 arranged on both the left and right outer sides of the liquid crystal display device 1900. In addition, since the sliders 3544 and 3564 are fixed to the toothed belts 3538 and 3558 between the first rails 3532 and 3552 and the second rails 3533 and 3555, the toothed belts 3538 and 3558 are used. The forces applied to the first rails 3532, 3552 and the second rails 3533, 3552 from the sliders 3544, 3564 can be distributed substantially evenly, and the sliders 3544, 3564 when the sliders 3544, 3564 are pulled by the toothed belts 3538, 3558. Can be prevented from tilting. That is, when the sliders 3544, 3564 are tilted, the sliding resistance between the sliders 3544, 3564 and the first rails 3532, 3552 and the second rails 3533, 3553 increases, and the sliders 3544, 3564 and the first rail 3532, It is possible to prevent the 3552 and the second rails 3533 and 3553 from being worn out at an early stage and causing problems, and the sliders 3544 and 3564 (movable decorative body under the back 3510) from becoming stuck. The 3564 can be slid in good condition to reliably raise and lower the lower back movable decorative body 3510.

Further, since the driven pulleys 3537 and 3557 of the drive mechanisms 3530 and 3550 are supported by the second rails 3533 and 3555 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction, the driven pulleys 3537 and 3557 can be slid straight in the vertical direction. By changing the front-back and left-right positions of the driven pulleys 3537 and 3557, the toothed belts 3538 and 3558 sway along with the driven pulleys 3537 and 3557, and the toothed belts from the driven pulleys 3537 and 3557 and the drive pulleys 3536 and 3556. It is possible to prevent the 3538 and 3558 from coming off, and the movable under-back decorative body 3510 can be reliably moved up and down without causing any trouble. Further, since the driven pulleys 3536 and 3556 are supported by the second rails 3533 and 3553 so as to be slidable, the drive mechanism 3530 and 3550 are configured as compared with the case where the driven rotating body is slid by other members. Can be simplified, and it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost related to the pachinko machine 1.

Further, since the drive pulleys 3536, 3556 and the toothed belts 3538, 3558 of the drive mechanisms 3530, 3550 have teeth that can be meshed with each other, the teeth mesh with each other to form the drive pulleys 3536, 3556. It is possible to prevent slippage from occurring between the toothed belts 3538 and 3558, and the rotation of the drive pulleys 3536 and 3556 is surely transmitted to the toothed belts 3538 and 3558 to allow the under-back movable decoration body 3510. It can be raised and lowered reliably. Further, as described above, the drive pulleys 3536 and 3556 are arranged above the first rails 3532 and 3552 and the second rails 3533 and 3553, and the drive pulleys are arranged even when the rotation of the drive pulleys 3536 and 3556 is stopped. When the teeth of the 3536, 3556 and the toothed belts 3538, 3558 mesh with each other, the toothed belts 3538, 3558 are loaded by the load of the lower back movable decorative body 3510 applied to the toothed belts 3538, 3558 via the sliders 3544, 3564. And the drive pulleys 3536 and 3556 can be prevented from slipping and the lower back movable decoration 3510 from falling, so that the lower back movable decoration 3510 can be stopped at a desired position, and the back can be stopped. It is possible to perform various movable effects by the lower movable decorative body 3510, and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress a decrease in the interest in the game.

In addition, both ends of the first rail 3532, 3552 and the second rail 3533, 3553 are supported by the metal drive mechanism bases 3531, 3551, and the first rail 3532, 3552 and the second rail 3533, 3553 are firmly supported. Since it is possible to prevent the first rails 3532, 3552 and the second rails 3533, 3553 from rattling or shaking as much as possible, the back bottom movable decorative body 3510 can be used without unnecessary shaking. It can be raised and lowered smoothly, and the movable under-back decorative body 3510 can be moved comfortably to entertain the player, and the movable under-back decorative body 3510 can be surely made to move as intended. It is possible to suppress the deterioration of the player's interest by exerting a desired effect of the movable effect.

Further, since the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 is provided, the drive mechanisms 3530 and 3550 arranged on both the left and right outer sides of the liquid crystal display device 1900 can be made difficult to see from the player side by the center accessory 2500. By making the drive mechanisms 3530 and 3550 visible, it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 1 from becoming unattractive and easily shunned by the player, and by making the drive mechanisms 3530 and 3550 difficult to see, the pachinko machine 1 can be seen. The appearance can be improved, and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as the pachinko machine for the player to play. Further, since the lower back movable decorative body 3510 and the like are arranged between the center accessory 2500 and the liquid crystal display device 1900, the center accessory can be moved by moving the lower back movable decorative body 3510 by the drive mechanisms 3530 and 3550. The movable under-back decorative body 3510 can be moved within the window portion 2501 of 2500, and the movable under-back decorative body 3510 can be infested through the window portion 2501 to diversify the movable effects and entertain the player. At the same time, it is possible to give a strong impact to the player by infesting (appearing) the movable decorative body 3510 under the back, which is larger than the width of the liquid crystal display device 1900, and it is possible to strongly attract the interest of the player. It can be a pachinko machine 1.

Further, the left and right drive mechanisms 3530 and 3550 are supported in the box-shaped back box 3001, and the positions of the respective drive mechanisms 3530 and 3550 can be accurately positioned by the back box 3001. Preventing the movement of the lower back movable decoration 3510 from becoming jerky or the back lower movable decoration 3510 from becoming stuck due to the misalignment of the left and right drive mechanisms 3530 and 3550 that move the lower back movable decoration 3510. It is possible to obtain a pachinko machine 1 capable of reliably moving the lower back movable decorative body 3510 to reliably exert the above-mentioned action and effect.

[2-14. Back right movable production unit]
Subsequently, the back right movable effect unit 3600 in the back unit 3000 will be described with reference to FIGS. 169 to 172 and 175. FIG. 175 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of the back right movable effect unit of the back unit in the game board.

The back right movable effect unit 3600 of this example is in the back box 3001, behind the back lower movable decoration body 3510 in the back lower movable effect unit 3600, and on the left side of the back lower right drive mechanism 3530, the lower right end of the opening 3001c. It is installed in the vicinity. The back-right movable production unit 3600 includes a back-right movable decoration body 3610 that three-dimensionally imitates a bridge of a luxury cruise ship, and a back-right drive mechanism 3620 that raises and lowers the back-right movable decoration body.

The back-right movable decoration body 3610 in this back-right movable production unit 3600 imitates a bridge of a luxury cruise ship by arranging a decoration imitating a chimney on the upper side of a multi-layer (here, three layers) decoration imitating a guest room. The relief-shaped front decorative member 3611, the back right decorative board 3612 (see FIG. 175) arranged behind the front decorative member 3611 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, the back right decorative board 3612, and the front decoration. A decorative body base 3613 that supports the rear side of the member 3611, a slide member 3614 that is attached to the lower end of the decorative body base 3613 and extends downward and has a rack gear 3614a on the side surface, and a rear side to the rear of the decorative body base 3613. It comprises a plurality of support pins 3615, which extend to.

Further, the front decorative member 3611 of the back right movable decorative body 3610 is fitted with a lens member having a translucent property as well as a window penetrating in the front-rear direction in a decoration imitating a guest room, and the back right decorative substrate 3612. By making the LED emit light, it is possible to make it emit light and decorate it through the lens member. Further, the slide member 3614 of the back right movable decorative body 3610 further includes a plate-shaped detection piece 3614b extending rearward to the upper part of the rear surface.

On the other hand, in the back right drive mechanism 3620 of the back right movable effect unit 3600, the drive mechanism base 3621 that slidably supports the back right movable decoration body 3610 in the vertical direction and the rotation axis are on the front side of the drive mechanism base 3621. The back right drive motor 3622 mounted on the rear side of the drive mechanism base 3621 so as to project, is fixed to the rotation shaft of the back right drive motor 3622, and meshes with the rack gear 3614a of the slide member 3614 in the back right movable decorative body 3610. The drive gear 3623 (see FIG. 175), the front cover 3624 that covers the front side of the drive gear 3623 and is attached to the lower front surface of the drive mechanism base 3621, and the detection piece 3614b of the slide member 3614 that is attached to the predetermined position of the drive mechanism base 3621. It is equipped with an elevating position detection sensor 3625 that detects the elevating position of the back right movable decorative body 3610 by detecting the above.

The drive mechanism base 3621 in the back right drive mechanism 3620 is inserted with a support pin 3615 protruding from the rear side of the decoration base 3611 in the back right movable decoration body 3610, and has a guide hole 3621a that penetrates in the front-rear direction and extends in the vertical direction. By inserting the support pin 3615 into the guide hole 3621a, the back right movable decorative body 36210 can be guided in the vertical direction. Further, the drive mechanism base 3621 is formed of a transparent member so as to be inconspicuous from the player side.

As shown in FIG. 175, the back-right movable effect unit 3600 of this example is a back-right movable decorative body that meshes with the drive gear 3623 when the drive gear 3623 is rotationally driven by the back-right drive motor 3622 of the back-right drive mechanism 3620. The rack gear 3614a of the slide member 3164 in the 3610 slides in the vertical direction so that the back right movable decoration body 3610 can be raised and lowered.

In the normal state, the back right movable effect unit 3600 is located at the normal position where the back right movable decorative body 3610 is most lowered, and the detection piece 3614b of the slide member 3614 is detected by the elevating position detection sensor 3625. It has become. In this normal position, the back right movable decorative body 3610 is decorated to imitate the uppermost guest room and chimney of the front decorative member 3611 in the lower right corner of the window portion 2501 in the center accessory 2500, as shown in FIG. 108 and the like. Only the player can see it. Further, in the back right movable production unit 3600, when the back right movable decorative body 3610 is raised most, even the decoration imitating the lowermost guest room can be seen from the player side (FIG. 181 (d)). See).

[2-15. Liquid crystal display device]
The liquid crystal display device 1900 in the game board 4 of this example is detachably attached to the rear surface of the back box 3001 in the back unit 3000 so that a predetermined effect image can be displayed according to the game state. It has become. As shown in FIG. 148 and the like, the liquid crystal display device 1900 includes a fixed piece 1902 protruding outward from both upper and lower sides, and can be attached to the back box 3001 via the fixed piece 1902.

Further, as shown in FIG. 146 and the like, the liquid crystal display device 1900 is from the peripheral control board box 1910 accommodating the peripheral control unit 4140, the liquid crystal control unit 4150 (see FIG. 183), and the like, and from the lower part of the peripheral control board box 1910. It is equipped with a volume 1912 that extends rearward. By rotating the volume 1912 in an appropriate direction, the volume output from the speakers 130, 222, 262 provided in the door frame 5, the speaker 821 provided in the main body frame 3, and the like can be adjusted. It has become. The liquid crystal display device 1900 of this example uses a plurality of LEDs as a backlight.

[2-16. Movable production on the game board]
Next, the movable effect of the game board 4 of the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 176 to 182. FIG. 176 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of the lower right movable guide unit 2560 in the game board. FIG. 177 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of the upper frame movable decorative body unit in the game board. FIG. 178 is an explanatory diagram showing the movements of the back-up middle movable effect unit and the back-up side movable effect unit in the game board. FIG. 179 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of the lower back movable effect unit in the game board. Further, FIG. 180 is an explanatory diagram showing the movements of the back left movable effect unit, the back right movable effect unit, and the back right movable effect unit in the game board, and FIG. 181 is a back left movable effect unit and the back lower movable effect unit following FIG. 180. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movement of the production unit and the back right movable production unit. Further, FIG. 182 is a front view of the pachinko machine showing a state in which a movable decorative body on the back of the game board is made to appear.

In the game board 4 of this example, as shown in FIG. 108 and the like, in a normal state, the movable frame 2561 of the lower right movable guide unit 2560 arranged at the lower right of the center accessory 2500 has the “SLOW” on the guide board 2562. The upper frame movable decoration unit 2580 of the upper frame movable decoration unit 2580 arranged in the upper center of the center accessory 2500 is located at the position corresponding to the guide portion 2562a on which the characters "" are written. Above the upper inner edge, the upper end is in contact with the lower end of the semicircular central upper decorative portion 2522.

Further, in a normal state, the back left movable decoration unit 3210 of the back left movable effect unit 3200 and the back upper side movable decoration unit 3410 of the back upper side movable effect unit 3400 in the back unit 3000 are the center accessory 2500 in the front view. It is located on the outside of the window portion 2501 so that it cannot be seen from the player side. Further, in the back upper middle movable effect unit 3300 in the back unit 3000, the lower end of the back upper middle movable decorative body 3330 is the upper inner edge of the window portion 2501 in the center accessory 2500 (the upper frame movable decorative body 2581 in the upper frame movable decorative unit 2580). The upper end of the lower back movable decorative body 3510 of the lower back movable effect unit 3500 is located slightly above the lower inner edge of the window portion 2501. It is in a state, and only a part of each can be slightly seen from the player side. Further, the back right movable decorative body 3610 of the back right movable effect unit 3600 of the back unit 3000 is located on the lower right side of the window portion 2501 in the center accessory 2500, and the approximately upper half of the whole is located above the lower inner edge of the window portion 2501. The upper half can be seen from the player side.

In the game board 4 of this example, the lower right movable guide unit 256 of the center accessory 2500 imitates a messenger of a ship (luxury passenger ship), and the back right movable production unit 3600 of the back unit 3000 is used. It imitates the bridge of a luxury cruise ship, and makes it possible for the player to recognize at first glance that it is a game board 4 (pachinko machine 1) with the concept of a ship (luxury liner).

Further, as shown in the figure, the upper frame movable decorative body 2581 of the center accessory 2500 appears to be integrated with the center decorative member 2520 in a normal state, and it is an illusion that the upper frame movable decorative body is immovable to the player. It is designed to be able to be made to. Further, since the lower end of the upper middle movable decorative body 3330 of the back unit 3000 is slightly visible from the lower end of the upper frame movable decorative body 2581 of the center accessory 2500, the upper frame movable decorative body is visible to the player. It is possible to recognize that the back-up middle movable decoration 3330 arranged on the rear side of 2581 is movable, and to attract the player's attention to the back-up middle movable decoration 3330 on the rear side. It has become. Therefore, by attracting the player to the upper middle movable decorative body 3330 on the back side, the player's interest in the upper frame movable decorative body 2581 on the front side can be lowered, so that the upper frame movable decorative body 2581 can be lowered without carefully looking at the upper frame movable decorative body 2581. It is possible to make it difficult to notice that the upper frame movable decorative body 2581 is movable, which also makes it possible to give the illusion that it is integrated with the center decorative member 2520.

As shown in FIG. 176, the game board 4 of this example is arranged behind the guide portion 2562a on which the characters "FULL" are written on the guide board 2562 of the lower right movable guide unit 256 of the center accessory 2500, for example. The LED 2565a of the lower right movable decorative substrate 2565 is made to emit light in a predetermined color to illuminate the characters "FULL", and the frame-shaped movable frame 2561 is placed from the position of "SLOW" to the guide windows 2561b and "FULL". After rotating the guide portion 2562a of the character so that it coincides with the front view, the LED 2565b of the lower right movable decorative substrate 2565 arranged behind the translucent portion 2562b at the position of "FULL" is further emitted. It is possible to irradiate the player side with light from the lens portion 2561d of the movable frame 2561.

More specifically, the light from the LED 2565b of the lower right movable decorative substrate 2565 arranged behind the translucent portion 2562b corresponding to the position of the "FULL" is transmitted through the light guide portion 2566a of the lens member 2566 to the guide board 2562. The back surface of the lens portion 2561d of the movable frame 2561 is irradiated from the translucent portion 2562b of the above, and is further diffused widely from the front surface (front surface) to the front (player side) of the lens portion 2561d (see FIG. 131). ). As a result, even if the game area 1100 is arranged at a position away from the center, the light from the lens unit 2561d directs the player's line of sight to the lens unit 2561d side, that is, the lower right movable guide unit 2560 side. The light emission of the guide unit 2562a can be noticed, and the characters written on the light emission guide unit 2562a can raise the expectation for the game.

Further, as shown in FIG. 177, in the game board 4 of this example, the LED of the upper movable decorative substrate 2581d in the upper frame movable decoration unit 2580 of the center accessory 2500 is made to emit light to illuminate and decorate the upper movable decorative body 2581. By driving the upper frame movable drive motor 2592 of the upper frame movable decorative body drive mechanism 2582, the upper frame movable decorative body 2581 can be lowered and positioned at the upper part of the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 1900. As a result, the upper frame movable decorative body 2581, which seems to be integrated with the center decorative member 2520, is movable, so that the player's unexpected part can be moved to give a strong impact, which is a chance. It is possible to convince the arrival and suppress the decline in the interest in the game.

Further, in the game board 4 of this example, as shown in FIG. 178, for example, the back-up middle movable decorative body 3330 is raised by the drive of the back-up middle-elevation drive motor 3318 in the back-up middle movable production unit 3300 of the back unit 3000. After lowering from the normal position to the appearance position where the whole is located in the window part 2501 of the center accessory 2500, the back upper side drive motor of the right unit 3400R and the left unit 3400L in the back upper side movable production unit 3400. By driving 3428, each back-up side movable decoration body 3410 is rotated to appear in the upper part of the window portion 2501 so as to surround the left and right sides of the back-up middle movable decoration body 3330, and the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900. It is possible to cover substantially the upper half (inside the window portion 2501). Further, when the back-up middle movable decoration body 3330 and the back-up side movable decoration body 3410 appear in the window portion 2501, the LEDs of the back-up middle decoration substrate 3334 and the back-up side decorative substrate 3414 provided respectively. It is possible to make each of them emit light and decorate them.

As a result, the upper half of the window portion 2501 in the center accessory 2500 is covered by the back-up middle movable decoration body 3330 and the back-up side movable decoration body 3410, and they emit light. The impression of the inside can be greatly changed, the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and at the same time, the expectation for the change in the playing state can be raised. Further, in the back upper side decorative body 3410, since the swing member 3412 moves back and forth in front of the LED due to the inertial force due to its appearance, it is possible to make it glitter and enhance the decorativeness, which is entertaining to the player. It is possible to suppress the decrease.

Further, in this example, the back-up middle movable effect unit 3300 is driven by the back-up middle rotation drive motor 3347 in a state where the back-up middle movable decorative body 3330 appears in the window portion 2501. The movable decorative body 3330 can be rotated around an axis extending in the vertical direction. As a result, the movable decorative body 3330 on the back side looks like a mirror ball, and can attract the player's attention even more strongly.

In the movable effect (light emission effect) by the back-up middle movable effect unit 3300 and the back-up side movable effect unit 3400, it is possible to perform a plurality of patterns of movable effect by appropriately combining the respective movable timings, which makes it difficult to get bored. As well as being able to entertain the player.

Further, as shown in FIG. 179, the game board 4 of this example serves as a center by driving the drive motors 3541 and 3651 of the left and right drive mechanisms 3530 and 3550 in the back lower movable production unit 3500 of the back unit 3000, respectively. The lower back movable decorative body 3510 located below the lower inner edge of the window portion 2501 in the object 2500 can be raised so as to cover substantially the entire inside of the window portion 2501.

As a result, a large under-back movable decorative body 3510 that imitates the bow of a luxury cruise ship will appear, which can give the player a strong impact that has never been seen with conventional pachinko machines. It is possible to raise expectations for the game by making people think that there may be something good.

Further, in this example, the game ball driven into the game area 1100 by the operation of the player is located below the window portion 2501 of the frame-shaped center accessory 3500 arranged substantially in the center of the game area 1100. When it is accepted into the first starting port 2101 or the second starting port 2102 of the arranged attacker unit 2100, it is below the window portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 in front view according to the special lottery result related to the starting winning prize. One large under-back movable ornament 3510 placed in the retracted position slides from the lower inner edge to the appearance position at a height of about 3/4 of the height of the window portion 2501, so that one large back The lower movable decorative body 3510 rises and appears so as to cover the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 1900, which makes it possible to give a strong impact to the player, which has never been seen in conventional pachinko machines. It is possible to strongly attract the player's interest to the movable decorative body 3510, entertain the player, and suppress the decline in the interest in the game.

Further, since one large under-back movable decorative body 3510 covers the inside of the window portion 2501 (front surface of the liquid crystal display device 1900) of the center accessory 2500 in front view, a plurality of them like a conventional pachinko machine. Compared with the case where the movable bodies are appropriately combined and covered, it is possible to avoid being restricted by the shape of the movable body due to the combination conditions, and the shape of the lower back movable decorative body 3510 can be freely related. The degree of freedom can be increased, and the movable under-back decorative body 3510 can be made highly decorative, and the movable under-back decorative body 3510 can be made conspicuous, which can strongly attract the attention of the player.

In addition, the appearance of one large under-back movable decorative body 3510 that covers the window portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500, that is, the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 1900, can greatly change the appearance impression of the pachinko machine 1 as a whole. It can make the player think that there is something good, raise the expectation for the game, suppress the decline in interest, and make the pachinko machine 1 stand out even from a distance. The pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as the pachinko machine to be played.

Further, since the height of the window portion 2501 in the center accessory 2500 is 0.35 times the height of the game panel 1150, the lower back movable decoration is below the lower inner edge of the window portion 2501. A pachinko machine equipped with one of the above-mentioned large under-back movable decorative bodies 3510, which can surely secure a space for positioning the body 3510 in the retracted position, and at the same time, can make the window portion 2501 as large as possible. 1 can be surely embodied. Further, since the window portion 2501, that is, the liquid crystal display device 1900 can be arranged substantially in the center of the game area 1100 after securing a space for retracting the lower back movable decorative body 3510 under the window portion 2501, it serves as a center. The layout of the object 2500, the liquid crystal display device 1900, etc. can be arranged in a manner similar to that of a conventional pachinko machine, and it is possible to prevent the conventional pachinko machine from giving a sense of discomfort to a familiar player. This makes it easier to select the pachinko machine 1 as the pachinko machine for playing.

Further, the lower back movable decorative body 3510 is used as a front decorative member 3512 having a decoration imitating the bow of a luxury cruise ship and partially transparent, and a lens member arranged behind the front decorative member. The decorative body base 3511, the lower back decorative substrate 3514 having a plurality of LEDs (light emitting parts) capable of irradiating the front side on the rear side of the decorative body base 3511, and the substrate cover covering the rear side of the lower back decorative substrate 3514. It is composed of 3515 and 3515, and when the LED of the underside decorative substrate 3514 is made to emit light according to the game state, the underback movable decorative body 3510 can be made to emit light and be decorated, so that it has moved from the retracted position to the appearance position side. Occasionally, by making the lower back movable decorative body 3510 emit light, the lower back movable decorative body 3510 can be made to stand out, and the player's attention can be strongly attracted. It is possible to draw the player's attention to the body 3510, to entertain the movable effect of the back lower movable decorative body 3510, and to suppress the deterioration of the player's interest.

Further, since the decorative body base 3511 as a lens member is provided, the light from the LED can be widely diffused even if the under-back movable decorative body 3510 is thinned, and the under-back movable decorative body 3510 is evenly luminescent. It can be made to entertain the player. Further, since the under-back movable decorative body 3510 can be thinned by the decorative body base 3511 as a lens member that diffuses light, the under-back movable decorative body 3510 is arranged between the game panel 1150 and the liquid crystal display device 1900. It is possible to reliably embody the pachinko machine 1 provided with the under-back movable decorative body 3510 which can be facilitated and exert the above-mentioned effects, and it is possible to suppress the increase in the depth of the entire pachinko machine 1. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can be installed without any problem on the existing island equipment such as the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Further, since the substrate cover 3515 is provided on the rear side of the lower back decorative substrate 3514, the light from the lower back decorative substrate 3514 leaks to the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the rear side, and the effect image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is displayed. It is possible to prevent it from becoming unsightly, and even if the lower back movable decorative body 3510 comes into contact with the liquid crystal display device 1900, it is possible to prevent the lower back decorative substrate 3514 equipped with an LED from hitting the liquid crystal display device 1900. This makes it possible to prevent the liquid crystal display device 1900 from being damaged and causing problems.

Further, the left and right drive mechanisms 3530 and 3550 in the lower back movable effect unit 3500 are arranged outside the window portion 2501 (liquid crystal display device 1900) in the center accessory 2500 in front view, and the player serves as the center. Since it is possible to reduce as much as possible the drive mechanisms 3530 and 3550 from being seen through the window portion 2501 of the object 2500, the appearance of the drive mechanisms 3530 and 3550 in the game area 1100 becomes worse and the game is played. Depending on the person, it is possible to prevent the player from being disappointed and deteriorating the interest, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in the interest of the player, and at the same time, it is possible to improve the appearance in the game area 1100. The decorative effect of the lower movable decorative body 3510 or the like can be surely exhibited. Further, since the left and right drive mechanisms 3530 and 3550 are arranged outside the window portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500, it is possible to prevent the drive mechanisms 3530 and 3550 from interfering with the display of the effect image by the liquid crystal display device 1900. This makes it easier to see the effect image of the liquid crystal display device 1900, and the effect of the effect image can be surely exhibited.

Further, the position where the lower back movable decorative body 3510 is most raised is in the range of 1/2 to 4/5 with respect to the height of the window portion 2501 from the lower inner edge of the window portion 2501 at the upper end of the lower back movable decorative body 3510. Since the height is about 3/4 of the inside, the height of the movable under-back decorative body 3510 is at least within the range of 1/2 to 4/5 of the height of the window portion 2501 and is viewed from the front. It is possible to easily secure a space for locating the lower back movable decorative body 3510 in the retracted position below the lower inner edge of the window portion 2501, and to surely embody the pachinko machine 1 having the above-mentioned action and effect. In addition, since it is not necessary to secure a space for the upper end of the lower back movable decoration 3510 above the upper inner edge of the window portion 2051 in the front view, at least the upper part of the window portion 2501 has a sufficiently large back surface. It is possible to arrange the middle movable decorative body 3330, the back upper side movable decorative body 3410, etc., and even when the back lower movable decorative body 3510 is in the retracted position, the movable decorative bodies 3330, 3410, etc. make it possible to arrange the entire game area 1100. It is possible to suppress the deterioration of the decorativeness, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the player's interest.

Further, as described above, since the height of the lower back movable decorative body 3510 is about 3/4 of the height of the window portion 2501, it is possible to lower the lower inner edge of the window portion 2501 with respect to the game area 1100. It is possible to prevent the window portion 2501 (liquid crystal display device 1900) from becoming high, and it is possible to make the inside of the window portion 2501 and the liquid crystal display device 1900 easier to see and suppress the decrease in the interest of the player.

Further, as described above, the lower back movable decorative body 3510 is regarded as one large movable body, and the appearance of the lower back movable decorative body 3510 can give a strong impact to the player, so that the lower back movable decorative body 3510 can be moved. Even if the upper end of the decorative body 3510 does not reach the upper inner edge of the window portion 2501, it is possible to give the player the illusion that the entire window portion 2501 (front surface of the liquid crystal display device 1900) is covered. It is possible to expect the same effect as when it is covered, and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress the decrease in the interest in the game.

Further, a box-shaped back box 3001 is provided on the rear side of the game panel 1150, and a liquid crystal display device 1900 is detachably supported on the rear side of the rear wall 3001b of the back box 3001. Since the lower movable decorative body 3510 and the left and right drive mechanisms 3530 and 3550 are supported, the lower movable decorative body 3510 and the drive mechanism 3530 can be placed between the game panel 1150 and the liquid crystal display device 1900 by the back box 3001. It is possible to secure a space for arranging the 3550 and the like, and it is possible to surely embody the pachinko machine 1 having the above-mentioned action and effect. ) And the liquid crystal display device 1900 can be positioned relative to each other. It is possible to prevent the positional relationship with the display device 1900 (effect image) from being misaligned and making it look unattractive, and the effect by the movable under-back decorative body 3510 etc. is surely enjoyed and the player's interest is reduced. Can be suppressed.

Further, the lower back movable decorative body 3510, the drive mechanism 3530, 3550, etc. are supported in the box-shaped back box 3001, and the pachinko machine 1 is provided with respect to the lower back movable decorative body 3510, the drive mechanism 3530, 3550, etc. Since it is possible to prevent dust and dirt from entering from the outside of the machine, the movable under-back decorative body 3510 may become dirty and unattractive due to dust, etc., or the movable under-back decorative body 3510 may move due to the drive mechanism 35303550. It is possible to prevent problems from occurring due to deterioration, and it is possible to surely entertain the player with the decorative effect and movable effect by the movable under-back decorative body 3510 and the like, and suppress the deterioration of the interest. can.

Further, since the first stage 2511 and the second stage 2512 provided in the center accessory 2500 are arranged in the direction perpendicular to each other, the dimension (depth) in the front-rear direction of the entire stage 2510 can be made as small as possible. It is possible to reduce the amount of protrusion of the game panel 1150 from the rear surface of the center accessory 2500 inserted from the front side into the opening 1158 of the game panel 1150 as much as possible. Therefore, the amount of protrusion of the stage 2510 of the center accessory 2500 that protrudes into the space between the game panel 1150 on which the lower back movable decorative body 3510 and the like are arranged and the liquid crystal display device 1900 can be reduced as much as possible. The space for the movable under-back decorative body 3510 and the like can be relatively widened, and a large-sized movable under-back decorative body 3510 having the above-mentioned effects can be provided, and the stage 2510 is large without being disturbed. It is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 equipped with a movable body that can surely raise the movable decorative body 3510 under the back of the machine and attract the attention of the player.

Further, a first start port 2101 or the like capable of receiving the game ball is provided on the downstream side of the stage 2510 in the game area 1100, and the first start is made when the game ball is returned from the stage 2510 to the game area 1100. Since there is a high possibility that the game will be accepted into the mouth 2101 or the like, it will be possible for the player to perform a game ball driving operation aimed at the warp entrance 2504, and the driving operation will become monotonous and it will be easy to get bored. In addition to being able to prevent the player from losing interest in the game, the game ball rolling on the stage 2510 is released and returned from the stage 2510 to the first starting port 2101 and the like. It is possible to excite the player depending on whether or not the game is accepted, and at the same time, the movement of the game ball can be enjoyed, and at the same time, the expectation can be raised, and the decrease in the interest in the game can be suppressed.

In addition, an attacker unit 2100 having a starting port 2101, 1022, a general winning opening 2201, etc., a side winning opening member 2200, etc. are arranged in the game area 1100 below the window portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500, and also general. Since the game ball received into the winning opening 2201 or the like is guided downward along the rear surface of the game panel 1150 by the ball guidance unit 3100, the ball guidance unit 3100 arranged behind the game panel 1150 wins the prize. The game balls received in the mouths 2101, 2201 can be discharged so as not to be seen from the player side, and the game balls are discharged along the rear surface of the game panel 1150, which is related to the discharge of the game balls. Since the amount of protrusion from the rear surface of the game panel 1150 to the rear can be reduced as much as possible, the space between the game panel 1150 and the liquid crystal display device 1900 can be relatively widened, and the back bottom movable decoration can be made. It is possible to reliably embody the pachinko machine 1 provided with the under-back movable decorative body 3510 that facilitates securing a space for arranging the body 3510 and exerts the above-mentioned action and effect.

Further, when the game ball driven into the game area 1100 by the operation of the player is received by the start ports 2101, 1022, the lower back movable decorative body located in the retracted position according to the special lottery result drawn by the acceptance. Since the 3510 rises and slides into the window 2501 (front of the liquid crystal display device 1900), the appearance of the large under-back movable decorative body 3510 makes the player think that there is something good for the player. It is possible to raise expectations for the game and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 180 and 181 in the game board 4 of this example, the back left movable effect unit 3200, the back lower movable effect unit 3500, and the back right movable effect unit 3600 in the back unit 3000 are related to each other. It can be moved. Specifically, for example, first, the drive motors 3541 and 3651 of the left and right drive mechanisms 3530 and 3550 in the back bottom movable effect unit 3500 are driven to slightly raise the back bottom movable decoration body 3510 from the most lowered retracted position. At the same time, the back right drive motor 3622 of the back right drive mechanism 3620 in the back right movable effect unit 3600 is driven to raise the back right movable decoration body 3610 to the ascending position (see FIG. 180 (a)). At this time, the left and right drive mechanisms 3530 and 3550 so that the lower back movable decorative body 3510 slightly repeats vertical movement and slightly repeats rolling (rotation around the axis extending in the front-rear direction). It is desirable to appropriately drive each of the drive motors 3541 and 3651 of the above, which makes it possible for the player to make the luxury liner imitated by the movable under-back decorative body 3510 appear as if it is traveling on the ocean. The player's attention can be sufficiently attracted to the movable decorative body 3510 (movable effect).

In this state, the back left movable decorative body 3210 is driven by the back left drive motor 3224 of the back left drive mechanism 3220 in the back left movable effect unit 3200, and the window portion 2501 is moved from the outside of the left inner edge of the window portion 2501 in the center accessory 2500. Appear in (see FIG. 180 (b)). As a result, the back left movable decoration 3210 that imitates the iceberg appears on the front left side of the back bottom movable decoration 3510 that imitates the luxury liner, so that the luxury liner collides with the iceberg. It makes you think that it is not, and you can make the player feel uncomfortable and enjoy the movable production.

Subsequently, with the back left movable decoration body 3210 appearing in the window portion 3501, the drive motors 3541 and 3651 of the left and right drive mechanisms 3530 and 3550 in the back bottom movable production unit 3500 are driven to drive the back bottom movable decoration. The body 3510 is gradually raised higher, and the back right drive motor 3622 of the back right drive mechanism 3620 in the back right movable decoration unit 3600 is driven to gradually lower the back right movable decoration body 3610 (FIG. 181 (c)). reference). This makes it possible for the player to have the illusion that the luxury liner as the back-left movable decoration 3510 is gradually approaching and approaching the iceberg as the back-left movable decoration 3210. It is possible to increase the feeling of harassment against the collision with.

Then, when the lower back movable decorative body 3210 reaches the highest raised position, the lower back movable decorative body 3210 is largely rolled by driving the left and right drive motors 3541 and 3651, and the LED of the lower back decorative substrate 3514 is blinked. As a result, it is possible to make the player appear as if the luxury liner (back left movable decoration body 3510) collided with the iceberg (back left movable decoration body 3210).

When the lower back movable decorative body 3510 is moved up and down or rolled, the back right movable decorative body 3610 is moved up and down according to the movement of the lower back movable decorative body 3510. Specifically, for example, when the lower back movable decorative body 3510 is raised, the back right movable decorative body 3610 is lowered, and when the lower back movable decorative body 3510 is lowered, the back right movable decorative body 3610 is raised. As a result, the movement of the lower back movable decorative body 3510 and the back right movable decorative body 3610 arranged at different positions in the front-rear direction causes the luxury liner represented by the lower back movable decorative body 3510 and the back right movable decorative body 3610. It is possible to make the illusion that it undulates back and forth (repeating pitching), and it is possible to make the movable decorations 3510 and 3610 look like a real ship and make the movable production more enjoyable. There is.

After that, the lower back movable decorative body 3210 is moved from the inside of the window portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 to the left so as to be located outside the left inner edge, and then the lower back movable decorative body 3510 is lowered in an inclined state. At the same time, the back right movable decoration body 3610 is lowered (see FIG. 181 (d)). This makes it possible for the player to have the illusion that the luxury liner (movable decoration under the back 3510) that collided with the iceberg (movable decoration under the back left 3210) is sinking.

In this way, by performing the movable effect using the back left movable effect unit 3200, the back right movable effect unit 3500, and the back right movable effect unit 3600, a series of movable effects having a story can be performed. , It is possible to perform a three-dimensional effect different from the effect image (effect movie) by the liquid crystal display device 1900, and it is possible to entertain the player and enhance the interest in the game. Further, instead of the reach effect image displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 for the special lottery result, the back left movable effect unit 3200, the back lower movable effect unit 3500, and the back right movable effect unit 3600 were used. It is also possible to have a movable effect.

In the movable effect using the back left movable effect unit 3200, the back right movable effect unit 3500, and the back right movable effect unit 3600, the movable timings and movable patterns of the respective movable decorative bodies 3210, 3510, 3610 are appropriately combined. By doing so, it is possible to perform a wider variety of movable effects, and it is possible to make it harder to get bored.

As described above, in this example, the back left movable decoration body 3210, the back right movable decoration body 3510, and the back right movable decoration body 3610 having different shapes are arranged at different positions in the front-rear direction, and the back bottom movable decoration body is arranged. The body 3510 and the back right movable decoration body 3610 can be moved in the vertical direction so as to hang on the lower inner edge of the window portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500, and then the back lower movable decoration body 3510 moves below the lower inner edge. Since it is possible, for example, the rear right movable decorative body 3610 located above the front lower back movable decorative body 3510 is relatively downward with respect to the front lower back movable decorative body 3510. When it is moved, the visible range of the rear right movable decorative body 3610 gradually narrows, so that the movable decorative bodies 3510 and 3610 arranged in the front-rear direction extend in the left-right direction to the player. It is possible to make the illusion that the front side is rotating in the upward direction with respect to the axis, or to make the illusion that the lower back movable decorative body 3500 is approaching. Further, when the rear right movable decorative body 3610 located above the front lower back movable decorative body 3510 is moved upward relative to the front lower back movable decorative body 3510. Since the visible range of the rear right movable decorative body 3610 gradually widens, the front side of the movable decorative bodies 3510 and 3610 arranged in the front-rear direction descends with respect to the axis extending in the left-right direction. It is possible to make the illusion that the movable decorative body 3610 on the rear right side is approaching, or to make the illusion that the decorative body is rotating in the direction of movement. Therefore, when the game balls driven into the game area 1100 are received in the first starting port 2101 and the second starting port 2102, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out, and the special lottery result drawn by the acceptance is used. Correspondingly, when each movable decorative body 3210, 3510, 3610 is appropriately moved by each drive mechanism 3220, 3530, 3550, 3620, the player responds to the shape and movement of each movable decorative body 3210, 3510, 3610. It is possible to experience a three-dimensional illusion phenomenon, to enjoy a movable production with a sense of perspective and a three-dimensional effect, and to produce an impression that is completely different from the production by the production image. Interest can be strongly attracted to the movable decorative bodies 3210, 3510, 3610, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game.

Further, as described above, since the three movable decorative bodies 3210, 3510, 3610 arranged at different positions in the front-rear direction can perform a movable effect with a sense of perspective, etc., the liquid crystal display device 1900 can be used for a two-dimensional effect. Compared to the production image, even if the position of the player changes, it is possible to suppress the loss of depth (three-dimensional effect) as much as possible, and the movable decorative bodies 3210, 3510, 3610 can be displayed from any position. You can enjoy the movable production by. Further, three movable decorative bodies 3210, 3510, 3610 are moved in the window portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500, and the atmosphere in the window portion 2501 is greatly increased by the movement of each movable decorative body 3210, 3510, 3610. Since it can be changed, it is possible to recognize that it is different from other pachinko machines at first glance, it is possible to differentiate it from other pachinko machines, and it is possible to strongly attract the interest of players. This makes it easier to select the pachinko machine 1 as the pachinko machine to play.

Further, since the two lower back movable decorative bodies 3510 and the back right movable decorative body 3610 are moved in the vertical direction, even if the position of the player's eyes moves, they are arranged at different positions in the front-back direction. It is possible to prevent the movable decorations 3510 and 3610 from being overlapped in the left-right direction (positional relationship in the left-right direction) differently from when viewed from the front, and the movable decorations 3210, 3510, The movable effect of the 3610 can be made to appear as intended as much as possible, and the movable effect can entertain the player and suppress the decrease in the interest in the game.

Further, since the movable under-back decorative body 3510 that moves in the vertical direction can be made to appear in or out of the window portion 2501 from the lower side, the movable decorative bodies 3210, 3510, 3610 can be made only in the window portion 2501. Compared to the case of moving, the movable decorations 3210, 3510, 3610 can make the movable effects more versatile, making it harder to get bored, and the arrival of various opportunities depending on the variation of movement. Etc. can be suggested, and the player can be entertained and the interest in the game can be suppressed from being lowered.

Further, the back left movable decorative body 3210 is hung on the left inner edge of the window portion 2501, and the back lower movable decorative body 3510 and the back right movable decorative body 3610 are hung on the lower inner edge of the window portion 2501, respectively, from the player side. Since each movable decorative body 3210, 3510, 3610 can be made relatively easy to see, it is possible to surely show the player the movable effect by the three movable decorative bodies 3210, 3510, 3610 and to exert the intended effect. It is possible to entertain the player and suppress the decline in the interest in the game.

Further, the drive mechanisms 3220, 3530, 3550, 3620 for moving and driving each movable decorative body 3210, 3510, 3610 are arranged outside the window portion 2501 in front view, and the drive mechanism 3220, from the player side. Since the 3530, 3550, and 3620 can be made difficult to see, it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 1 as a whole from being unsightly by seeing the drive mechanisms 3220, 3530, 3550, and 3620, and to improve the appearance of the game. This pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as the pachinko machine to be used. Further, depending on the player, the drive mechanisms 3220, 3530, 3550, 3620 that move and drive the movable decorative bodies 3210, 3510, 3610 can be seen, so that the characters and items represented by the movable decorative bodies 3210, 3510, 3610 (here, here). , Icebergs, bows of luxury liners, bridges of luxury liners), etc. As described above, since it is difficult for the player to see the drive mechanism 3220, 3530, 3550, 3620, it is possible to reduce the difficulty of emotional transfer to the movable decorative body 3210, 3510, 3610 as much as possible. It is possible to entertain the movable effect by the movable decorative bodies 3210, 3510, 3610 and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, since the liquid crystal display device 1900 capable of displaying a predetermined effect image is provided on the rear side of the movable decorative body 3210, 3510, 3610 and the drive mechanism 3220, 3530, 3550, 3620, the liquid crystal display device 1900 is movable. By displaying the effect image combined with the movable effect by the decorative bodies 3210, 3510, 3610, the movable effect can be further enhanced, the power of the movable effect can be increased, or the illusion of the real thing can be made. It is possible to entertain the person and suppress the decline in the interest in the game. In addition, as with conventional pachinko machines, the player can be entertained by the effect of the effect image, so a wide variety of effects can be achieved by the effect of the effect image and the effect of the movable decorative bodies 3210, 3510, 3610. It can be presented to a person, can entertain the player, can be made hard to get bored, and can suppress the decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

By the way, the game board 4 of this example prepares for the door frame 5 before the back-up middle movable decorative body 3300 in the back-up middle movable effect unit 3300 is lowered into the window portion 2501 in the center accessory 2500 to appear. The LEDs mounted on the decorative boards 214, 216, 254, 256, 286, 320, 322, 430, and 432 can be appropriately made to emit light, and not only the game board 4 but also the door frame 5 can be made to emit light as appropriate. It is possible to perform the production using it.

Specifically, for example, the LED of the dial decorative board 430 and the button decorative board 432 in the operation unit 400 arranged in the center of the upper surface of the dish unit 300 is made to emit light, and the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 are made to emit light to the player. When the dial operation unit 401 and the like are operated, the LEDs of the upper plate right decorative board 320 and the upper plate left decorative board 322 of the plate unit 300 arranged on both sides of the operation unit 400 are turned on by the pachinko machine. Light is emitted from the center side of 1 toward the left and right outside. Further, the LEDs of the decorative substrates 214, 216, 254, and 256 provided on the left and right side decorative units 200 and 240 are made to emit light so that the light moves from the bottom to the top. As a result, the light emitted from the operation unit 400 flows from the left and right sides along the outer circumference of the game window 101 toward the central lens 282 of the upper decoration unit 280 arranged at the upper part, and this light flow. The player's line of sight can be moved from the operation unit 400 (lower part of the game area 1100) to the central lens 282 (upper part of the game area 1100) of the upper decorative unit 280.

Then, the LED of the upper decorative substrate 286 arranged behind the central lens 282 in the upper decorative unit 280 of the door frame 5 is made to emit light, and the central lens 282 formed in the shape of a jewel is made to shine to attract the interest of the player. Direct it strongly toward the center lens 282. After that, the LEDs of the decorative boards 214,216, 254, 256, 286, 320, 322, 430, and 432 in the door frame 5 are turned off, and the movable decorative body 3330 on the back of the back unit 3000 of the game board 4 is lowered. The LED 3334a of the decorative substrate 3334 on the back side is made to shine while being positioned inside the window portion 2501 in the center accessory 2500 to make the movable decoration body 3330 on the back side shine.

As a result, the line of sight of the player can be moved from the central lens 282 arranged above the game area 1100 to the back-up middle movable decoration body 3330 located substantially in the center of the game area 1100 (FIG. 182). reference). Therefore, it is possible to raise the expectation for the game by moving the line of sight of the player from the operation unit 400 to the movable decorative body 3330 on the back side, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest. ..

Further, as shown in FIG. 182, the central lens 282 of the upper decorative unit 280 in the door frame 5 and the back upper middle movable decorative body 3330 of the back upper middle movable effect unit 3300 in the game board 4 have substantially the same size. Due to the similar shape, the player can be surprised by the illusion that the jewel-shaped central lens 282 provided on the upper part has descended into the game area 1100. At the same time, it is possible to entertain a series of productions.

As described above, in this example, the game ball driven into the game area 1100 by the player operating the handle device 500 (506 in front of the rotating handle body) arranged in the lower right corner of the door frame 5 is the first starting port 2101. And when it is accepted into the second starting port 2102, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out and a special lottery result that may cause an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous is drawn, and the lottery special lottery result is drawn. The upper decoration unit 280, the right side decoration unit 200, the left side decoration unit 240, and the dish unit 300 arranged on the outer periphery of the game window 101 in the door frame 5 emit light and decorate, and the center of the upper decoration unit 280. The movable decorative body 3330 on the back side of the movable effect unit 3300 on the back side of the game board 4 similar to the lens 282 descends from the retracted position to the appearance position on the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 1900, and at the same time, emits light and decorates the player side. Since it can be seen from, the player can be made to think that the central lens 282 of the upper decorative unit 280 arranged on the upper part of the door frame 5 has moved into the game area 1100 and appeared. Along with being able to give a strong impact to the player, the light emitting decoration (light emitting effect) by the units 200, 240, 280, 300 of the door frame 5 and the movable decorative body on the back of the game board 4 are given to the player. It is possible to enjoy a production with a sense of unity due to the appearance of the 3330 (movable production), and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

Further, the movable decorative body 3330 on the back of the game board 4 and the central lens 282 of the door frame 4 have similar shapes to each other, and even if the design of the entire game board 4 and the design of the door frame 5 are different, the center By making the back-up middle movable decorative body 3330 similar to the lens 282 appear, it is possible to make the player think that the game board 4 and the door frame 5 are designed with the same concept, so that the door frame can be made to appear. It is possible to enhance the sense of unity between the 5 and the game board 4, and the effect of the light emission decoration and movement of each unit 200, 240, 280, 300, 3300 is fully exhibited, and the player's interest is reduced. The pachinko machine 1 can be used.

Further, when the movable decoration body 3330 on the back side is moved to the appearance position, the movable decoration body 3330 on the back side can be made to stand out by making the movable decoration body 3330 on the back side stand out. It is possible to pay attention to the movable decorative body 3330 on the back and to enjoy the production using the movable decorative body 3330 on the back, and to remind the player of a feeling that very good things will happen. , It is possible to raise the expectation for the game and suppress the decrease in the interest of the player. Further, the movable decorative body 3330 on the back surface and the central lens 282 of the upper decorative unit 280 are light-emitting decorated with the same color, and after the central lens 282 of the door frame 5 is light-emitting decorated, the game board 4 When the movable decoration body 3330 on the back and inside is made to appear and be decorated by light emission, not only the shape but also the color is similar. It is possible to make a strong illusion that there is, and it is possible to obtain a pachinko machine 1 that surely exhibits the above-mentioned action and effect.

Further, the operation unit 400 is provided in the lower part of the outer periphery of the game window 101 in the substantially center in the left-right direction, and the dial operation unit 401 of the operation unit 400 is provided according to the start winning prize for the first start port 2101 and the second start port 2102. When the player operates the operation units 401 and 405 after urging the player to operate the operation units 401 and 405 by illuminating and decorating the pressing operation unit 405 and the like, the units 200, 240 and 280 of the door frame 5 are operated. , 300 can be light-lit and decorated, and the movable decorative body 3330 on the back of the game board 4 can be lowered to the appearance position to be light-lit and decorated. By the operation of, it is possible to make the illusion that the movable decorative body 3330 on the back side has appeared, and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress the decrease in the interest in the game.

Further, since the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 that can be operated by the player according to the start winning prize are provided, the player is allowed to operate the operation units 401 and 405 at the time of a predetermined effect, and the operation is performed. By changing the effect according to the operation of the operation units 401 and 405, it is possible to enhance the sense of unity with the effect and make it easier for the player to participate in the effect, and enjoy the effect using the operation units 401 and 405. It is possible to prevent the pachinko machine from deteriorating its interest and to make it a pachinko machine 1 that is hard to get tired of.

Further, as described above, the light emitting decoration of each unit 200, 240, 280, 300 of the door frame 5, the operation of the operation unit 400, the light emitting decoration and movement, and the back side of the game board 4 are the back side of the movable effect unit 3300. By appropriately combining the movement of the medium movable decorative body 3330 and the light emitting decoration, it is possible to present various patterns to the player, and it is difficult to get bored and the player's interest is suppressed. be able to.

Further, when the movable decorative body 3330 on the back surface of the game board 4 descends to the appearance position in response to the acceptance of the game ball into the first starting port 2101, the second starting port 2102, etc., the movable decorative body 3330 on the back surface becomes a liquid crystal display. Since it is located in front of the display device 1900, the effect image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is blocked by the back-up middle movable decoration body 3330, so that the player notices the appearance of the back-up middle movable decoration body 3330. It can be easily made, and the appearance of the movable decorative body 3330 on the back side following the light emitting decoration of each unit 200, 240, 280, 300, 400 of the door frame 5 is surely enjoyed, and the interest in the game is reduced. Can be suppressed.

Further, according to the acceptance of the game ball into the first starting port 2101 and the second starting port 2102 (starting prize), the units 200, 240, 280, 300, 400 of the door frame 5 and the back side of the game board 4 Since the effect is performed using the medium movable decorative body 3330, etc., the player who wants to see the effect can be made to drive the game ball aiming at the start ports 2101, 1022, which is the original game ball of the pachinko machine. It is possible to entertain the driving operation and suppress the decline in the interest in the game.

In addition, when the game ball starts and wins a prize, a special lottery result that may cause an advantageous game state in which the player is advantageous is drawn, so that each unit 200, 240, 280, 300, 400 of the door frame 5 and It is possible to create a production that suggests the result of the special lottery by appropriately combining the light emitting decoration, raising and lowering, and moving of the movable decorative body 3330 on the back of the game board 4, and expect a good special lottery result. It is possible to make the player pay attention to the integrated production by the door frame 5 and the game board 4, and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress the decrease in the interest in the game.

[3. Various boards]
Subsequently, a control board that performs various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 183. FIG. 183 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration of a pachinko machine. As shown in the figure, the control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 is composed of a group of the main board 4000 and a group of peripheral control boards 4010, and various controls are shared by these two groups. The group of the main board 4000 includes a main control board 4100 for controlling the game operation (progress of the game) and a payout control board 4110 for controlling the payout of the game ball and the like. Further, the group of the peripheral control board 4010 is the peripheral control unit 4140 that controls various effects during the game based on the command from the main control board 4100, and the liquid crystal display device 1900 based on the command from the peripheral control unit 4140. It includes a liquid crystal control unit 4150 that controls the display of the effect image.

[3-1. Main control board]
As shown in FIG. 183, the main control board 4100 that controls the progress of the game is a main control MPU 4100a that is a microprocessor having a built-in ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like. The main control I / O port 4100b as an input / output device (I / O device), the main control input circuit 4100f to which detection signals from various detection switches are input, and the main control solenoid for driving various solenoids. It includes a drive circuit 4100g and a RAM clear switch 4100c for completely erasing the information stored in the RAM 4100e (hereinafter, also referred to as "main control built-in RAM 4100e") built in the main control MPU 4100a. .. In addition to the built-in ROM 4100d (hereinafter, also referred to as "main control built-in ROM 4100d") and the main control built-in RAM 4100e, the main control MPU 4100a has a watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system) and for preventing fraud. Functions etc. are also built-in.

The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 has a first start port sensor 3102 that detects a game ball received by the first start port 2101 and a second start port sensor that detects a game ball received by the second start port 2102. Detection signals from 2127 and some general winning opening sensors 3104 are input via the main control I / O port 4100b, respectively, or attached to the gate sensor 2402, general winning opening sensor 3104, count sensor 2128 and back unit 3000. The detection signal from the magnetic detection sensor 3106 is input via the panel relay board 3012 attached to the game board 4 and the main control I / O port 4100b.

The main control MPU 4100a outputs a control signal from the main control I / O port 4100b to the main control solenoid drive circuit 4100g based on these detection signals, whereby the start port solenoid 2121 and the attacker solenoid are output via the panel relay board 3012. A drive signal is output to 2124, and the first special symbol display 1185, second via the main control I / O port 4100b, the panel relay board 3012, the hold display board 2603 of the center accessory 2500, and the function display board 1191. Drive signals to the special symbol display 1186, the first special symbol storage display 1184, the second special symbol storage display 1187, the normal symbol display 1189, the normal symbol storage display 1188, the game status display 1183, and the round display 1190. Is output.

In this embodiment, the first start port sensor 3102, the second start port sensor 2127, the gate sensor 2402, and the count sensor 2128 use a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch. A contact type ON / OFF operation type mechanical switch is used for the general winning opening sensor 3104. This is because the game ball frequently enters the first starting port 2101 and the second starting port 2102 and frequently passes through the gate portion 2401, so that the first starting port sensor 3102, the second starting port sensor 2127, and the second starting port sensor 2127 are used. The detection of the game ball by the gate sensor 2402 also frequently occurs. Therefore, a proximity switch having a long life is used for the first start port sensor 3102, the second start port sensor 2127, and the gate sensor 2402. Further, when a big hit game state that is advantageous to the player occurs, the big winning opening 2103 is opened and the game ball frequently enters, so that the count sensor 2128 also frequently detects the game ball. Therefore, the count sensor 2128 also uses a proximity switch having a long life. On the other hand, in the general winning opening 2201 where the game ball does not enter frequently, the detection by the general winning opening sensor 3104 does not occur frequently. Therefore, the general winning opening sensor 3104 uses a mechanical switch having a shorter life than the proximity switch.

Further, the main control MPU 4100a transmits various information (game information) related to the game and various commands related to payout to the payout control board 4110, and receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 4110. Or something. Further, the main control MPU 4100a transmits various commands related to the control of the game effect and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control unit 4140 of the peripheral control board 4010 described later via the main control I / O port 4100b. (The boards of the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control unit 4140 are electrically connected by a harness (not shown). The main control MPU 4100a will be described in detail later, but when it receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 4110, it formats these various commands and transmits them to the peripheral control unit 4140.

Although detailed description will be described later, various voltages are supplied to the main control board 4100 from the power supply board 851. The power supply board 851 that supplies various voltages to the main control board 4100 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter, simply referred to as "capacitor") as a backup power source for supplying power to the main control board 4100 for a predetermined time even when the power is cut off. It is described.) BC0 (see FIG. 184) is provided. The capacitor BC0 allows the main control MPU 4100a to store various information in the main control built-in RAM 4100e in the power off processing even when the power is cut off. When the RAM clear switch 4100c of the main control board 4100 is operated when the power is turned on, the various stored information is completely erased (cleared) from the main control built-in RAM 4100e. The operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch 4100c is also output to the payout control board 4110.

Further, b is provided on the main control board 4100. This power failure monitoring circuit monitors a decrease in various voltages supplied from the power supply board 851, and when those voltages are equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is output as a power failure warning. This power failure warning signal is input to the main control MPU 4100a via the main control I / O port 4100b, and is also transmitted to the payout control board 4110 and the like via a harness (not shown).

[3-2. Payout control board]
As shown in FIG. 183, the payout control board 4110 that controls the payout of the game ball, the payout control unit 4111 that performs various controls related to the payout, the launch control by the launch solenoid 654, and the ball feed by the ball feed solenoid 585. The launch control unit 4120 that controls, the error LED display 4130 that displays the status of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the error release switch 860a for canceling the error displayed on the error LED display 4130, and the prize ball tank. It includes a 720, a tank rail 731, and a ball removal switch 860b for discharging the game ball in the prize ball device 740 to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and starting the ball removal operation.

[3-2A. Payout control unit]
As shown in FIG. 183, the payout control unit 4111 that performs various controls related to payout on the payout control board 4110 is a microprocessor having a built-in ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like. The payout control MPU4111a, the payout control I / O port 4111b as an I / O device, and the external watchdog timer 4111c for monitoring whether or not the payout control MPU4111a is operating normally (hereinafter, "external WDT4111c"). The payout motor drive circuit 4111d for outputting the drive signal to the payout motor 744 of the prize ball device 740, and the payout control input circuit 4111e to which the detection signals from various detection switches related to the payout are input. , Is equipped. In addition to the built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as "payout control built-in ROM") and RAM (hereinafter referred to as "payout control built-in RAM"), the payout control MPU4111a is used to prevent fraud. It also has built-in functions.

The payout control MPU4111a of the payout control unit 4111 receives various information (game information) related to the game from the main control board 4100 and various commands related to the payout serially via the payout control I / O port 4111b, or the main control board. The operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch 4100c from the 4100 is input via the payout control I / O port 4111b, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 550 is input, and the ball out switch 750 is input. , The detection signal from the counting sensor 751 and the rotation angle sensor 752 is input via the prize ball relay board 754.

A ball-out switch 750 that detects the presence or absence of a game ball in the supply passage 741a formed in the base unit 741 of the prize ball device 740, and a game ball flowing down in the prize ball passage 741c formed in the base unit 741 are detected. The detection signal from the counting sensor 751 is first input to the payout control input circuit 4111e via the prize ball relay board 754 of the prize ball device 740, and is input to the payout control MPU4111a via the payout control I / O port 4111b. .. The detection signal from the rotation angle sensor 752 for detecting the detection slit 749a formed in the rotation detection board 749 of the prize ball device 740 first passes through the sensor board 753 of the prize ball device 740 and the prize ball relay board 754. It is input to the payout control input circuit 4111e and is input to the payout control MPU4111a via the payout control I / O port 4111b.

Further, the detection signals from the door frame opening switch 618 for detecting the opening of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 and the main body frame opening switch 619 for detecting the opening of the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 are first output control input circuits. It is input to 4111e and is input to the payout control MPU4111a via the payout control I / O port 4111b.

Further, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 550 that detects whether or not the game ball in which the accommodation space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 is stored is full is first the handle device relay board 192 and the main relay terminal. It is input to the payout control input circuit 4111e via the plate 880, and is input to the payout control MPU4111a via the payout control I / O port 4111b.

The payout control MPU4111a outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 744 to the payout motor 744 via the payout control I / O 4120b and the prize ball relay board 754, and displays the status of the pachinko gaming machine 1 with an error LED. A signal for displaying on the device 4130 is output to the error LED display 4130 via the payout control I / O port 4111b, and a command for indicating the status of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is issued to the payout control I / O port 4111b. It is serially transmitted to the main control board 4100 via the payout control board 4100, or the number of actually paid out game balls is output to the external terminal board 784 via the payout control I / O port 4111b. The external terminal board 784 is electrically connected to a hall computer installed in the amusement park (hall). This hall computer monitors the game of the player by grasping the number of balls of the game ball paid out by the pachinko game machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko game machine 1.

The error LED display 4130 is a segment display, and displays alphanumeric characters, figures, and the like to display the status of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED display 4130 include the following. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it is notified that it is "normal", and when the number "0" is displayed, it means that it is "connection abnormality" (specifically, with the main control board 4100). Notifies that there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the payout control board 4110 and the board, and when the number "1" is displayed, it means that the ball is out (specifically, the ball is out). Based on the detection signal from the switch 750, it is notified that there is no game ball in the supply passage 741a formed in the base unit 741 of the prize ball device 740), and when the number "2" is displayed, "ball is seen". (Specifically, the payout rotating body 748 at the entrance of the distribution space 741b communicating with the supply passage 741a formed in the base unit 741 of the prize ball device 740 based on the detection signal from the rotation angle sensor 752. And the game ball are engaged near the entrance to notify that the payout rotating body 748 is difficult to rotate), and when the number "3" is displayed, it means that it is a "counting switch error" (specifically). Notifies that the counting sensor 751 has a problem based on the detection signal from the counting sensor 751), and when the numerical value "5" is displayed, it means that it is a "retry error" (specifically, Notifies that the number of retries of the payout operation has reached the preset upper limit), and when the number "6" is displayed, it means that the tank is "full" (specifically, from the full tank detection sensor 550). Based on the detection signal of, the accommodation space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 is full with the stored game ball), and when the number "7" is displayed, it means that "CR is not connected" (CR is not connected). Notifies that the electrical connection is disconnected in any of the payout control boards 4110 to the CR unit 6), and when the number "9" is displayed, it means that the product is in stock (specifically). Has reached a predetermined number of game balls that have not been paid out yet).

The ball lending request signal for the game ball from the ball lending switch 365a and the return request signal for the prepaid card from the return switch 365b first pass through the frequency display board 365, the main relay terminal board 880, and the CR unit connection terminal board 874. Is input to the CR unit 6. The CR unit 6 serially transmits a signal specifying the number of balls of the game ball to be rented according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 4110 via the CR unit connection terminal board 874, and this signal is used for the payout control I / O. It is received at port 4111b and input to the payout control MPU4111a. Further, the CR unit 6 updates the remaining amount of the inserted prepaid card according to the number of rented game balls, and displays a signal for displaying the remaining amount on the remaining degree display 365c, which is a CR unit connection terminal. It is output to the board 874, the main relay terminal board 880, and the frequency display board 365, and this signal is input to the remaining frequency display 365c.

[3-2B. Launch control unit]
As shown in FIG. 183, the launch control unit 4120 that performs launch control by the launch solenoid 654 and ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 585 is a launch control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches related to launch are input. 4120a, an oscillation circuit 4120b that outputs a clock signal at regular time intervals, a firing timing control circuit 4120c that outputs a firing reference pulse for launching a game ball toward the game region 1100 based on this clock signal, and this firing. It includes a firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d that outputs a drive signal to the firing solenoid 654 based on the reference pulse, and a ball feeding solenoid drive circuit 4120e that outputs a driving signal to the ball feeding solenoid 585 based on the firing reference pulse. The firing timing control circuit 4120c generates a firing reference pulse so that 100 game balls are launched toward the game region 1100 per minute based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit 4120b, and outputs the firing reference pulse to the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d. At the same time, a ball feed reference pulse obtained by multiplying the emission reference pulse by a predetermined number is generated and output to the ball feed solenoid drive circuit 4120e.

From the touch sensor 516 that detects whether or not the palm or finger is touching the front 506 of the rotary handle body, and the launch stop switch 518 that detects whether or not the launch of the game ball is forcibly stopped by the player's will. The detection signal is first input to the firing control input circuit 4120a via the handle device relay board 192 and the main relay terminal board 880, and is input to the firing timing control circuit 4120c. Further, when the CR unit 6 and the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 are electrically connected, they are input to the firing control input circuit 4120a as a CR connection signal and input to the firing timing control circuit 4120c. The signal from the rotation position detection sensor 512 that electrically adjusts the strength of launching the game ball toward the game area 1100 according to the rotation position of the rotation handle main body front 506 is first the handle device relay board 192 and the main relay terminal. It is input to the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d via the plate 880.

Based on the signal from the rotation position detection sensor 512, the launch solenoid drive circuit 4120d launches a drive current for launching the game ball toward the game area 1100 with a launch strength commensurate with the rotation position of the rotation handle main body front 506. When the reference pulse is input, it is output to the firing solenoid 654. On the other hand, the ball feed solenoid drive circuit 4120e applies a constant current to the ball feed solenoid 585 via the main relay terminal plate 880 and the handle device relay board 192 when the ball feed reference pulse is input. By outputting, the ball feeding member 584 of the ball feeding unit 580 receives one game ball stored in the upper dish 301 of the dish unit 300, and the constant current is triggered by the completion of the input of the ball feeding reference pulse. By stopping the output of the ball feeding member 584, the game ball received by the ball feeding member 584 is sent to the hitting ball launching device 650 side. In this way, the drive current output from the launch solenoid drive circuit 4120d to the launch solenoid 654 is variably controlled, whereas the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit 4120e to the ball feed solenoid 585 is constant. It is controlled.

The power supply board 851 that supplies various voltages to the payout control board 4110 includes a capacitor BC1 (see FIG. 184) as a backup power source for supplying power to the payout control board 4110 for a predetermined time even when the power supply is cut off. .. With this capacitor BC1, the payout control MPU4111a can store various information in the payout control built-in RAM in the power cutoff process even when the power supply is cut off. When the RAM clear switch 4100c of the main control board 4100 is operated when the power is turned on, the various stored information is completely erased (cleared) from the payout control built-in RAM.

[3-3. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 183, the peripheral control board 4010 includes a peripheral control unit 4140 that performs effect control based on a command from the main control board 4100, and a liquid crystal display device 1900 based on control data from the peripheral control unit 4140. It includes a liquid crystal control unit 4150 that controls drawing.

[3-3A. Peripheral control unit]
As shown in FIG. 183, the peripheral control unit 4140 that controls the effect on the peripheral control board 4010 performs a peripheral control MPU 4140a as a microprocessor, a peripheral control ROM 4140b that stores various processing programs and various commands, and a high-quality sound performance. It includes a sound source IC 4140c to be performed, and a sound ROM 4140d in which sound information such as music and sound effects referred to by the sound source IC 4140c is stored.

The peripheral control MPU4140a has a plurality of parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, etc. built-in, and when various commands are received from the main control board 4100, each decorative board of the game board 4 is based on these various commands. The game board side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, blinking signal, or gradation lighting signal to the provided color LED or the like is transmitted from the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board to the lamp drive board 4170, or the game board. The game board side motor drive data for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid for operating various movable bodies provided in 4 is transmitted from the serial I / O port for the motor drive board to the motor drive board 4165. Door side motor drive data for transmitting to and outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a dial drive motor 414 provided on the door frame 5, and a color provided on each decorative substrate of the door frame 5. Door-side light emission data for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to LEDs, etc., and door-side motor-driven light emission data composed of frame decoration drive amplifier board serial I / O port to peripheral panel Serial I / O for the liquid crystal control unit to send control data (display command) indicating a screen to be transmitted to the door frame base board 194 or displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 via the relay terminal plate 872 and the peripheral relay terminal board 882. In addition to transmitting data from the port to the liquid crystal control unit 4150, a control signal (sound command) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM 4140d is output to the sound source IC 4140c.

Detection signals from various in-situ detection sensors for detecting the in-situ of various movable bodies provided on the game board 4 are input to the peripheral control MPU4140a via the motor drive board 4165. The detection signals from the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b for detecting the rotation of the dial operation unit 401 of the operation unit 400 provided on the door frame 5 and the press detection sensor 432c for detecting the operation of the press operation unit 405 are the door frame base substrate. It is input to the peripheral control MPU4140a via 194, the peripheral relay terminal plate 882, and the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872.

Further, in the peripheral control MPU 4140a, a signal (operation signal) indicating that the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is operating normally is input from the liquid crystal control unit 4150, and the operation of the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is monitored based on this operation signal. doing.

The sound source IC 4140c extracts sound information from the sound ROM 4140d based on the control data (sound command) from the peripheral control MPU4140a, and is provided on the main body frame 3 via the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 and the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882. It controls the flow of music and sound effects according to various effects from the speaker 821, and is provided on the door frame 5 via the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872, the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882, and the door frame base board 194. Control is performed so that music, sound effects, and the like according to various effects are played from the speakers 130, 222, 262 and the speaker 821 provided in the main body frame 3. The volume can be adjusted by rotating the volume 1912 mounted on the peripheral control board 4010 and protruding rearward from the peripheral control board box 1910.

In addition to the watchdog timer built into the peripheral control MPU4140a (hereinafter referred to as "WDT with built-in peripheral control"), the peripheral control unit 4140 has an external watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as "external peripheral control") (not shown). It is also described as "WDT"), and the peripheral control MPU4140a diagnoses whether or not its own system is out of control by using the peripheral control built-in WDT and the peripheral control external WDT in combination.

The display command output from the peripheral control MPU 4140a to the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is performed by the serial input / output port, and in the present embodiment, the bit rate (the size of data that can be transmitted per unit time) is 19.2 km (k). ) BPS (bits per second, hereinafter referred to as "bps") is set. On the other hand, a plurality of serial inputs different from the initial data, the door frame side lighting blinking command, the game board side lighting blinking command, the movable body drive command, and the display command output from the peripheral control MPU 4140a to the lamp drive board 4160 and the motor drive board 4165. It is performed by the output port, and in this embodiment, 250 kbps is set as the bit rate.

The lamp drive board 4160 sends a lighting signal or a blinking signal based on the received door frame side lighting / blinking command to each decorative board 214, 216, 254 provided on the door frame 5 via the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882. Each decorative board 2214, 2303 provided in the game board 4 outputs a lighting signal or a blinking signal based on the LED of 256, 286, 320, 322, 430, 432, etc., or received the lighting / blinking command on the game board side. It outputs to the LEDs of 2523, 2543, 2565, 2581d, 2611, 261, 2613, 2614, 2615, 2616, 2617, 2618, 3214, 3334, 3414, 3514, 3612. Further, the motor drive board 4165 is provided on the dial drive motor 414 provided on the door frame 5 and the game board 4 via the peripheral relay terminal plate 882 to send a drive signal based on the received drive command of the movable body. It also outputs to each drive motor 2564, 2592, 3224, 3318, 3347, 3428, 3541, 3651, 3622.

Further, in the peripheral control MPU 4140a, a signal (operation signal) indicating that the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is operating normally is input from the liquid crystal control unit 4150, or in the operation unit 400 provided in the dish unit 300 in the door frame 5. Detection signals from the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b that detect the rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401 and the press detection sensor 432c that detects the operation of the press operation unit 405 in the operation unit 400 are driven by the peripheral relay terminal board 882 and the lamp. It may be input via the board 4160.

The sound source IC 4140c extracts sound information from the sound ROM 4140d based on the sound command output from the peripheral control MPU 4140a, and the side speaker 130 and the upper speaker 222 of the door frame 5 via the lamp drive board 4160 and the peripheral relay terminal plate 882. , 262, or from the speaker 821 of the main body frame 3 via the lamp drive board 4160, control is performed so that music, sound effects, etc. according to various effects are played. In this example, as described above, the side speakers arranged on the left and right sides of the lower side of the game window 101, the upper speakers 222 and 262 arranged on the upper side of the game window 101, and the lower part of the main body frame 3 are provided. By sending an acoustic signal as sound information (for example, a 2ch stereo signal, a 4ch stereo signal, a 2.1ch surround signal to which a lower speaker 391 described later is added, a 4.1ch surround signal, etc.) is sent to the bass speaker 821. , It has become possible to present more realistic sound effects (sound effects) than before.

[3-4. LCD control unit]
Next, as shown in FIG. 183, the liquid crystal control unit 4150 that controls the drawing of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the peripheral control board 4010 stores the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a as a microprocessor, various processing programs, various commands, and various data. The liquid crystal control ROM 4150b, the VDP (abbreviation of Video Display Processor) 4150c for displaying and controlling the above-mentioned liquid crystal display device 1900, the character ROM 4150d for storing various data of the screen displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, and the character ROM 4150d. It includes a character RAM 4150e to which various stored data are transferred and copied.

This liquid crystal control MPU4150a has a built-in parallel I / O port, serial I / O port, etc., and controls the VDP4160c based on the control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 4140 to draw the liquid crystal display device 1900. It is in control. If the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a is operating normally, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a outputs an operation signal to that effect to the peripheral control unit 4140. Further, the liquid crystal control MPU4150a receives an execution signal described later from the VDP4150c, and performs interrupt processing when the output of the execution signal is stopped every 16 ms.

The liquid crystal control ROM 4150b includes various programs for generating a screen to be drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900, control data (display command) from the peripheral control board 4010, schedule data corresponding to the schedule data, and control data (display command) thereof. Multiple corresponding non-residential area transfer schedule data, etc. are stored. The schedule data is configured by arranging screen data that defines the screen configuration in chronological order, and defines the order of the screens to be drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900. The non-resident area transfer schedule data is configured by arranging the non-resident area transfer data that defines the order of various data stored in the character ROM 4150d to the non-resident area of the character RAM 4150e in chronological order. As the non-resident area transfer data, the order in which the screen data drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900 according to the progress of the schedule data is transferred in advance from the character ROM 4150d to the non-resident area of the character RAM 4150e is defined.

The liquid crystal control MPU4150a extracts the screen data at the head of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control board 4010 from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b and outputs the screen data to the VDP4150c, and then outputs the screen data following the screen data at the head. It is extracted from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b and output to the VDP 4150c. As described above, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a extracts the screen data arranged in time series in the schedule data one by one from the head screen data from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b and outputs the screen data to the VDP 4150c.

When the screen data output from the liquid crystal control MPU4150a is input, the VDP4150c extracts sprite data from the character RAM 4150e based on the input screen data and generates drawing data to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900. The generated drawing data is output to the liquid crystal display device 1900. Further, when the VDP4150c does not accept the screen data from the liquid crystal control MPU4150a, the VDP4150c outputs an executing signal to that effect to the liquid crystal control MPU4150a. The VDP4150c employs a line buffer method. This "line buffer method" means that the drawing data for one line that draws the left-right direction of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is held in the line buffer, and the drawing data for one line held in the line buffer is stored in the liquid crystal display device 1900. This is the output method.

An extremely large amount of sprite data is stored in the character ROM 4150d, and its capacity is large. When the capacity of the character ROM 4150d becomes large, that is, when the number of sprites drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900 increases, the access speed of the character ROM 4150d cannot be ignored, which affects the speed of drawing on the liquid crystal display device 1900. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the sprite data stored in the character ROM 4150d is transferred and copied to the character RAM 4150e having a high access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from the character RAM 4150e. The sprite data is basic data that is data before the sprite is expanded into a bitmap format, and is stored in the character ROM 4150d in a compressed state.

Here, the "sprite" will be described. The "sprite" is an image displayed as a unit on the liquid crystal display device 1900. For example, when displaying various people on the liquid crystal display device 1900, the data for drawing each person is called a "sprite". As a result, when displaying a plurality of people on the liquid crystal display device 1900, a plurality of sprites are used. In addition to people, houses, mountains, roads, etc. that make up the background are also sprites, and the entire background can be a single sprite. These sprites are drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900 by setting the positions arranged on the screen and the vertical relationship when the sprites overlap each other (hereinafter, referred to as "the order of superimposing the sprites").

The sprite is configured by laminating a plurality of rectangular areas of 64 pixels in each of the vertical and horizontal directions. The data for drawing this rectangular area is called a "character". In the case of a small sprite, it can be expressed using one character, and in the case of a relatively large sprite such as a person, it can be expressed using a total of 6 characters arranged in, for example, 2 horizontal × 3 vertical. be able to. In the case of a larger sprite such as a background, it can be expressed by using a larger number of characters. In this way, the number and arrangement of characters can be arbitrarily specified for each sprite.

The liquid crystal display device 1900 repeats a main scan for setting a display state for each pixel in one direction along a pixel and a main scan in a direction intersecting the one direction, sequentially from left to right when viewed from the front. It is driven by a sub-scan to be performed. When the drawing data for one line output from the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is input to the liquid crystal display device 1900, the main scan is for one line sequentially from left to right when viewed from the front of the liquid crystal display device 1900. Output to each pixel. Then, when the output for one line is completed, the liquid crystal display device 1900 shifts to the line directly below as a sub-scan, and similarly, when the drawing data for the next line is input, based on the drawing data for the next line. As the main scan, data is sequentially output to pixels for one line from left to right when viewed from the front of the liquid crystal display device 1900.

[3-5. Power system]
Next, the electric power supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described. First, the power supply board 851 will be described, and then the power supply supplied to each control board and the like will be described. FIG. 184 is a block diagram showing a power supply system of a pachinko gaming machine, and FIG. 185 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 184. Although not shown, the grounds of various boards and the grounds of various terminal boards are electrically connected to the grounds of the power supply board 851.

[3-5A. Power supply board]
The power supply board 851 is electrically connected to the power cord, and the plug of the power cord is plugged into the power outlet of the island equipment. When the power switch 852 is operated, the electric power supplied from the island equipment is supplied to the power supply board 851, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be turned on.

As shown in FIG. 184, the power supply board 851 has a full-wave rectifier circuit 851a, a power factor improvement circuit 851b, a smoothing circuit 851c, a + 5.2V creation circuit 851d, a + 5.25V creation circuit 851e, a + 12V creation circuit 851f, and a + 24V creation. It is equipped with a circuit 851g. The full-wave rectifier circuit 851a full-wave rectifies AC 24 volts (AC24V) supplied from the island equipment and supplies it to the power factor improving circuit 851b. The power factor improving circuit 851b improves the power factor of the full-wave rectified electric power to create a direct current +37V (DC +37V, hereinafter referred to as “+37V”) and supplies it to the smoothing circuit 851c. This smoothing circuit 851c removes the input + 37V ripple and smoothes + 37V to +5.2V creation circuit 851d, +5.25V creation circuit 851e, + 12V creation circuit 851f, + 24V creation circuit 851g, payout control board. It is supplied to 4110 and the peripheral panel relay terminal board 872, respectively. The + 5.2V creation circuit 851d creates a direct current +5.2V (DC +5.2V, hereinafter referred to as “+5.2V”) from + 37V supplied from the smoothing circuit 851c.

The +5.25V creation circuit 851e creates DC +5.25V (DC +5.25V, hereinafter referred to as “+5.25V”) from + 37V supplied from the smoothing circuit 851c. The + 12V creation circuit 851f creates DC + 12V (DC + 12V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 12V”) from + 37V supplied from the smoothing circuit 851c. The + 24V creation circuit 851g creates DC + 24V (DC + 24V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 24V”) from + 37V supplied from the smoothing circuit 851c. The voltage created by the + 5.2V creation circuit 851d, the + 12V creation circuit 851f, and the + 24V creation circuit 851g is supplied to the payout control board 4110, and is supplied by the + 5.25V creation circuit 851e, the + 12V creation circuit 851f, and the + 24V creation circuit 851g. The generated voltage is supplied to the peripheral panel relay terminal board 872. The AC24V supplied from the island equipment is supplied to the CR unit connection terminal board 874 via the power supply board 851 in addition to the full-wave rectifier circuit 851a.

Further, the power supply board 851 includes capacitors BC0 and BC1. The capacitor BC0 is a backup power source for the RAM (main control built-in RAM 4100e) built in the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100, and the capacitor BC1 is built in the payout control MPU 4111a of the payout control unit 4111 in the payout control board 4110. It is a backup power supply for RAM (RAM with built-in payout control).

As will be described later, the + 5.2V created by the + 5.2V creation circuit 851d is supplied to the payout control board 4110 and also to the main control board 4100 via the payout control board 4110. The + 5.2V supplied to the payout control board 4110 is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU4111a and is also applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM via the diode PD0. The +5.2V supplied to the main control board 4100 is applied to the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 4100a and is also applied to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM 4100e via the diode MD0.

The negative terminal of the capacitor BC1 of the power supply board 851 (hereinafter referred to as "-terminal of the capacitor BC1") is grounded to the ground, while the positive terminal thereof (hereinafter referred to as "+ terminal of the capacitor BC1"). ) Is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control board 4110, and is also electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode PD0 of the payout control board 4110. That is, the power from the + 5.2V creation circuit 851d flows toward the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU4111a, and at the same time, the power supply terminal of the RAM with built-in payout control, which is forward by the diode PD0, and the + terminal of the capacitor BC1. The current is flowing toward.

In this way, the capacitor BC1 is +5. 2V is applied so that it can be charged. As a result, when the power from the + 5.2V creation circuit 851d is no longer supplied to the payout control board 4110, the electric charge charged in the capacitor BC1 is supplied to the payout control board 4110 as the payout VBB. Therefore, although the current is obstructed by the diode PD0 and does not flow to the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU4111a and the payout control MPU4111a does not operate, the stored contents are retained by applying the payout VBB to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM. It is supposed to be done.

The negative terminal of the capacitor BC0 of the power supply board 851 (hereinafter referred to as "-terminal of the capacitor BC0") is grounded to the ground, while the positive terminal thereof (hereinafter referred to as "+ terminal of the capacitor BC0"). ) Is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM 4100e of the main control board 4100 via the payout control board 4110, and is also electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode MD0 of the main control board 4100. That is, the power from the + 5.2V creation circuit 851d flows toward the power supply terminal of the main control MPU4100a, and at the same time, the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM4100e, which is in the forward direction by the diode MD0, and the + terminal of the capacitor BC0. The current is flowing toward. In this way, in the capacitor BC0, the + 5.2V created by the + 5.2V creation circuit 851d returns from the payout control board 4110, the main control board 4100, and the payout control board 4110 again to the power supply board 851. Depending on the connection method, +5.2V is applied so that charging can be performed. As a result, when the power from the + 5.2V creation circuit 851d is no longer supplied to the main control board 4100, the charge charged in the capacitor BC0 is supplied to the main control board 4100 as the main VBB. Therefore, although the main control MPU4100a does not operate because the current is obstructed by the diode MD0 at the power supply terminal of the main control MPU4100a, the stored contents are retained by applying the main VBB to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM4100e. It is supposed to be done.

[3-5B. Voltage supplied to each control board, etc.]
Next, the outline of the voltage supplied to each control board and the like will be described, and then the voltage supplied mainly to the payout control board 4110, the main control board 4100, and the emission power supply board 831 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 184, the three types of voltages of + 5.2V, + 12V, and + 24V created by the power supply board 851 are supplied to the payout control board 4110 and the main control board via the payout control board 4110. It is also supplied to the 4100. Further, four types of voltages of +5.25V, + 12V, + 24V, and + 37V created by the power supply board 851 are supplied to the peripheral panel relay terminal board 872, and the peripheral control board is supplied via the peripheral panel relay terminal board 872. While being supplied to the 4010, three types of voltages, +5.25V, + 12V, and + 24V, among the four types of voltages, are supplied to the peripheral relay terminal board 882. As shown in FIG. 185 (a), the four types of voltages of +5.25V, +12V, +24V, and + 37V supplied to the peripheral control board 4010 are +5.25V, + 12V, and +12V among the four types of voltages. Three types of voltages of + 24V are supplied to the lamp drive circuit 4160a of the lamp drive board 4160, and various signals such as lighting signals, blinking signals and gradation lighting signals are output from the lamp drive circuit 4160a to various decorative boards of the game board 4. The four types of voltages are supplied to the drive source drive circuit 4165a of the motor drive board 4165, and a drive signal is output from the drive source drive circuit 4165a to an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid of the game board 4. Further, of the four types of voltages, two types of voltages, + 24V and + 37V, are supplied to the liquid crystal display device 1900.

The liquid crystal display device 1900 includes a liquid crystal module 1900a whose drawing is controlled and a backlight power supply which is a power source for the backlight of the liquid crystal module 1900a. + 24V is supplied to the liquid crystal module 1900a and + 37V is a backlight. It is supplied to the power supply. On the other hand, three types of voltages, +5.25V, + 12V, and + 24V, which are supplied to the peripheral relay terminal board 882, are supplied to the door frame base substrate 194 as shown in FIG. 185 (b). Of the three types of voltages, + 12V is supplied to the + 9V creation circuit 194a to create DC + 9V (DC + 9V, hereinafter referred to as "+ 9V"). The door frame base substrate 194 supplies four types of voltages, including + 9V created by the + 9V creation circuit 194a, to various decorative substrates of the door frame 5 in addition to the three types of voltages.

[3-5C. Voltage supplied to the payout control board]
As shown in FIG. 184, the payout control board 4110 includes a payout control filter circuit 4110a and a power failure monitoring circuit 4110b in addition to the payout control MPU4111a and the like. The payout control filter circuit 4110a is supplied with +5.2V from the power supply board 851, and noise is removed from this +5.2V. This +5.2V is supplied to the capacitor BC1 of the power supply board 851 via the diode PD0, and is also supplied to, for example, the payout control MPU4111a of the payout control unit 4111. The power failure monitoring circuit 4110b is supplied with + 12V and + 24V from the power supply board 851, and monitors signs of a power failure or momentary power failure of these + 12V and + 24V. When the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b detects a sign of a power failure or momentary power failure of + 12V and + 24V, it outputs a power failure warning signal to the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 as a power failure warning. This power failure warning signal is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4010 via the main control board 4100, and as shown in FIGS. 185 (a) and 185 (b), the liquid crystal display device 1900 is transmitted via the peripheral control board 4010. While being transmitted to the backlight power supply 1900b of the above, it is also transmitted to the peripheral panel relay terminal board 872, the peripheral side relay terminal board 882, and the door frame base board 194, and is transmitted to the door frame base board 194, and various decorative boards of the door frame 5. And so on.

In addition to being supplied to the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b, + 12V and + 24V are also supplied to, for example, the payout control input circuit 4111e of the payout control unit 4111, and + 24V is, for example, the payout of the payout control unit 4111. It is also supplied to the motor drive circuit 4111d and the like. Further, the +37 from the power supply board 851 is supplied to the firing power supply board 831 as it is via the payout control board 4110 without being used in the payout control board 4110. The firing power supply board 831 creates a predetermined voltage described later from the supplied + 37V and supplies it to the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d of the firing control unit 4120.

[3-5D. Voltage supplied to the main control board]
As shown in FIG. 184, the main control board 4100 includes a main control filter circuit 4100h in addition to the main control MPU 4100a and the like. The main control filter circuit 4100h is supplied with +5.2V from the payout control board 4110, and noise is removed from this +5.2V. This +5.2V is supplied to the capacitor BC0 of the power supply board 851 via the diode MD0, and is also supplied to, for example, the main control MPU4100a. The + 12V from the payout control board 4110 is supplied to, for example, the main control input circuit 4100f, and the + 24V from the payout control board 4110 is supplied to, for example, the main control solenoid drive circuit 4100g.

[3-5E. Voltage supplied to the firing power supply board]
As shown in FIG. 184, the firing power supply board 831 includes a DC / DC converter 831a and an electrolytic capacitor SC0 (capacitance: 4700 microfarads (μF) in this embodiment). The DC / DC converter 831a steps down + 37V from the payout control board 4110 to create a direct current +35V (DC + 35V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 35V”), and drives the firing solenoid of the firing control unit 4120 on the payout control board 4110. It is supplied to the circuit 4120d.

The negative terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 (hereinafter referred to as "-terminal of electrolytic capacitor SC0") is grounded to the ground, while its positive terminal (hereinafter referred to as "+ terminal of electrolytic capacitor SC0"). Is electrically connected to the + 35V output terminal of the DC / DC converter 831a. That is, the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is charged by applying + 35V output from the DC / DC converter 831a. In the present embodiment, the combined current obtained by merging the current from the DC / DC converter 831a and the current due to the discharge of the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor SC0 flows through the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d of the payout control board 4110. It has become. The detailed explanation will be described later.

[3-6. How to drive the firing solenoid]
Next, a method of driving the firing solenoid 654 will be described. First, the drive system of the firing solenoid 654 will be described, and then the input / output current, output voltage, signal logic, waveform, etc. at a predetermined point of the drive circuit will be described. FIG. 186 is a block diagram showing a drive circuit of a firing solenoid, FIG. 187 is a circuit diagram showing a shunt regulator circuit, an amplifier circuit, and an operational amplifier circuit group, and FIG. 188 is a diagram showing the characteristics of a DC / DC converter. 189 is a timing chart of predetermined points in the drive circuit of the firing solenoid of FIG. 186.

[3-6A. Launch solenoid drive system]
As shown in FIG. 186, the drive system of the firing solenoid 654 mainly includes a firing control input circuit 4120a, an oscillation circuit 4120b, a firing timing circuit 4120c, a firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d, and a sphere of the firing control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110. It is composed of a feed solenoid drive circuit 4120e, a DC / DC converter 831a of a firing power supply board 831, an electrolytic capacitor SC0, a power factor improving circuit 851b of the power supply board 851, and a smoothing circuit 851c.

In the launch control input circuit 4120a, when the CR unit 6 is electrically connected to the payout control board 4110 via the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, the CR unit 6 receives power (AC24V) from the pachinko gaming machine 1. A signal indicating the presence is input and output as a CR connection signal to the firing timing circuit 4120c, and a detection signal from the touch sensor 516 that detects whether or not the palm or finger is touching the front 506 of the rotating handle body is input. When a detection signal is input from the launch stop switch 518, which is output as a touch detection signal to the launch timing circuit 4120c and detects whether or not the launch of the gaming ball is forcibly stopped by the player's will, the launch is performed. It is output to the firing timing circuit 4120c as a stop detection signal.

The firing timing circuit 4120c permits or prohibits the launch of the game ball by the firing solenoid 654 based on the CR connection signal, the touch detection signal, and the firing stop detection signal from the firing control input circuit 4120a. Specifically, in the launch timing circuit 4120c, the CR connection signal is not input because the CR unit 6 is not electrically connected to the payout control board 4110 via the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. The second case, the case, the touch detection signal tells the 506 in front of the rotating handle that the palm or finger is not touching, and the launch stop detection signal tells that the launch of the game ball is forcibly stopped. Of the third case, the launch of the game ball by the launch solenoid 654 is prohibited when any one of them is applicable, while the launch of the game ball by the launch solenoid 654 is permitted when all of the cases are not applicable.

A clock signal from the oscillation circuit 4120b is input to the launch timing circuit 4120c, and when the launch of the game ball by the launch solenoid 654 is permitted, 100 game balls per minute are in the game area based on this clock signal. A firing reference pulse is generated so as to be launched toward 1100 and output to the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d, and a ball feeding reference pulse obtained by multiplying the firing reference pulse by a predetermined number (5 times in this embodiment) is generated. Output to the feed solenoid drive circuit 4120e. The firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d drives the firing solenoid 654 of the ball launching device 650 by a combined current obtained by merging the current from the DC / DC converter 831a and the current due to the discharge of the electrolytic capacitor SC0. On the other hand, the ball feed solenoid drive circuit 4120e drives the ball feed solenoid 585 by + 24V from the power supply board 851.

The firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d is mainly composed of a shunt regulator circuit 4121a, an amplifier circuit 4121b, a voltage comparison circuit 4121c, and a switching circuit 4121d. The shunt regulator circuit 4121a is supplied with +5.2V created by the + 5.2V creation circuit 851d of the power supply board 851, and is stabilized DC + 2.5V (DC + 2.5V, hereinafter, ". It is described as "+ 2.5V") and supplied to the amplifier circuit 4121b.

As shown in FIG. 187 (a), the shunt regulator circuit 4121a mainly includes the shunt type stabilized power supply circuit PIC0. The shunt type stabilized power supply circuit PIC0 has reduced temperature drift due to the ambient temperature, and can create and supply a stabilized power supply that is maintained at a constant voltage with respect to the load. The REF terminal, which is the reference voltage input terminal of the shunt-type regulated power supply circuit PIC0, and the K terminal, which is the cathode terminal, are electrically connected to +5.2V via the resistor PR2, and are connected to the REF terminal by this resistor PR2. The input current is limited. The K terminal outputs + 2.5V to the amplifier circuit 4121b. This + 2.5V is smoothed by removing ripples (AC components folded by the voltage) by the capacitor PC0 grounded to the ground (the capacitor PC0 also plays a role as a low-pass filter). The A terminal, which is the anode terminal of the shunt-type regulated power supply circuit PIC0, is grounded to ground (GND).

Returning to FIG. 186, the amplifier circuit 4121b doubles the +2.5 from the shunt regulator circuit 4121a to create a direct current +5.0V (DC +5.0V, hereinafter referred to as “+5.0V”). It is supplied to the rotation position detection sensor 512 in the handle device 500 via the main relay terminal plate 880 and the handle device relay board 192.

As shown in FIG. 187 (a), the amplifier circuit 4121b mainly comprises the operational amplifier PIC1. The operational amplifier PIC1 is configured as a non-inverting amplifier circuit, and + 2.5V from the shunt type stabilized power supply circuit PIC0 of the shunt regulator circuit 4121a is applied to the non-inverting input terminal (+ terminal) of the operational amplifier PIC1, and the operational amplifier PIC1 The other end of the resistance PR4, one end of which is electrically connected to the other end of the resistance PR3 grounded to the ground, and the other end of the resistance PR4 whose one end is electrically connected to the output terminal of the operational amplifier PIC1. Is electrically connected to. The resistance values of the resistors PR3 and PR4 are set so that the amplification factor (flat loop gain) of the operational amplifier PIC1 is doubled. The output terminal of the operational amplifier PIC1 is + 5.0V, which is obtained by doubling the + 2.5V applied to the non-inverting input terminal (+ terminal) of the operational amplifier PIC1, as described above, the main relay terminal plate 880, and the handle. It is supplied to the rotation position detection sensor 512 in the handle device 500 via the device relay board 192. This + 5.0V is smoothed by removing ripples (AC components folded by the voltage) by the capacitor PC2 grounded to the ground (the capacitor PC2 also plays a role as a low-pass filter). The + 24V input to the power supply terminal of the operational amplifier PIC1 is smoothed by removing ripples by the capacitor PC1 grounded to the ground.

Returning to FIG. 186, the rotation position detection sensor 512 is a three-terminal variable resistor, one fixed terminal at both ends is supplied with + 5.0 V from the above-mentioned amplifier circuit 4121b, and the other fixed terminals at both ends are handles. It is electrically connected to the resistor PR0 of the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d in the payout control board 4110 via the device relay board 192 and the main relay terminal board 880. The other end of the resistor PR0 is grounded to the ground. From the variable terminal, which is a terminal different from the fixed terminals at both ends of the rotation position detection sensor 512, the divided voltage of the voltage applied to both ends can be taken out according to the variable resistance value. The voltage taken out from the variable terminal of the rotation position detection sensor 512 is passed through the handle device relay board 192 and the main relay terminal board 880, and the resistors PR5 and PR6 described later in the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d of the payout control board 4110 (FIG. (See 187 (b)), the voltage divided by the divided resistor PR6 is applied to the voltage comparison circuit 4121c as the emission intensity target voltage.

As described above, the voltage taken out from the variable terminal of the rotation position detection sensor 512 of the handle device 500 is passed through the handle device relay board 192 and the main relay terminal plate 880, as shown in FIG. 187 (b). Ripple (the AC component folded by the voltage) is removed and smoothed by the grounded capacitor PC3 (the capacitor PC3 also serves as a low-pass filter), and the firing solenoid of the payout control board 4110. It is applied to a group of operational amplifier circuits configured as a voltage follower of the drive circuit 4120d. As shown in FIG. 187 (b), this operational amplifier circuit group mainly includes an operational amplifier PIC2 in the first stage and an operational amplifier PIC3 in the latter stage. The voltage from the handle device 500 is a voltage on the order of bolts and is applied to the non-inverting input terminal (+ terminal) of the operational amplifier PIC2 in the first stage. The inverting input terminal (− terminal) of the first-stage operational amplifier PIC2 is electrically connected to the output terminal of the first-stage operational amplifier PIC2. The output terminal of the operational amplifier PIC2 in the first stage doubling the voltage applied to the non-inverting input terminal (+ terminal) of the operational amplifier PIC2, that is, outputs the voltage as it is in the bolt order. Although the first-stage operational amplifier PIC2 simply outputs the input voltage, which is a voltage on the order of bolts, it outputs the first-stage input side circuit for applying the voltage from the handle device 500 and the voltage to the subsequent-stage operational amplifier PIC3. The circuit is separated from the first stage output side circuit for this purpose. As a result, the voltage can be transmitted as a signal from the first stage input side circuit to the first stage output side circuit, and the influence of the first stage output side circuit can be eliminated from the first stage input side circuit. The + 24V input to the power supply terminal of the operational amplifier PIC2 is smoothed by removing ripples by the capacitor PC4 grounded to the ground.

The output terminal of the operational amplifier PIC2 in the first stage is electrically connected to one end of the resistor PR5 in addition to its own inverting input terminal (-terminal), and the other end of the resistor PR5 is the non-inverting input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier PIC3 in the subsequent stage. It is electrically connected to the + terminal). The non-inverting input terminal (+ terminal) of the operational amplifier PIC3 in the subsequent stage is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR6 whose one end is grounded to the ground in addition to the other end of the resistor PR5. As a result, the voltage from the output end of the first-stage operational amplifier PIC2 is a voltage on the order of bolts because the input voltage, which is the voltage on the order of bolts, is simply output as it is, and is divided by the resistors PR5 and PR6. The voltage that is compressed and the voltage divided by the divided resistor PR6 is applied to the non-inverting input terminal (+ terminal) of the operational amplifier PIC3 in the subsequent stage as a voltage on the order of millivolts. The inverting input terminal (− terminal) of the operational amplifier PIC3 in the subsequent stage is electrically connected to the output terminal of the operational amplifier PIC3 in the subsequent stage. The output terminal of the operational amplifier PIC3 in the subsequent stage doubles the voltage applied to the non-inverting input terminal (+ terminal) of the operational amplifier PIC2, that is, the voltage on the order of millivolts is output to the voltage comparison circuit 4121c as the emission intensity target voltage. do. The operational amplifier PIC3 in the subsequent stage simply outputs the input voltage, which is the voltage handled by the millivolt-order resistors PR6 divided by the resistors PR5 and PR6, but is the millivolt-order resistor divided by the resistors PR5 and PR6. The circuit separation between the post-stage input side circuit for applying the voltage handled by the PR6 and the post-stage output side circuit for outputting the voltage to the voltage comparison circuit 4121c is realized. As a result, the voltage can be transmitted as a signal from the rear-stage input side circuit to the rear-stage output side circuit, and the influence of the rear-stage output side circuit can be eliminated from the rear-stage input side circuit. The + 24V input to the power supply terminal of the operational amplifier PIC3 is smoothed by removing ripples by the capacitor PC5 grounded to the ground.

Returning to FIG. 186, the current flowing through the firing solenoid 654 of the ball launching device 650 flows through the resistor PR1 whose one end is grounded to the ground, and the voltage on the order of millivolts taken over by this resistor PR1 is used as the firing control voltage in the voltage comparison circuit. It is applied to 4121c. A firing intensity target voltage, which is a voltage on the order of millivolts described above, is also applied to the voltage comparison circuit 4121c. As described above, the launch control voltage and the launch intensity target voltage compared by the voltage comparison circuit 4121c are the resistance from the voltage on the order of bolts to the voltage on the order of millivolts in the payout control board 4110 (launch solenoid drive circuit 4120d) as described above. The voltage is stepped down according to the voltage that PR1 and PR6 are in charge of. That is, since it is applied via the wiring pattern formed on the payout control board 4110, this wiring pattern is not easily affected by noise, and the voltage comparison circuit 4121c has a voltage on the order of millivolts, and the emission control voltage and the emission intensity target voltage. On the other hand, between the board device of the payout control board 4110 and the ball launching device 650, and between the board device of the payout control board 4110 and the handle device 500, the electric voltage is provided via wiring. Since it is connected to, the wiring is easily affected by noise, and the influence of noise between the board devices is suppressed by setting the voltage to the order of bolts.

The voltage comparison circuit 4121c is an inverting circuit that compares the magnitude of the emission control voltage and the emission intensity target voltage, and outputs the comparison result to the switching circuit 4121d. The comparison result by the voltage comparison circuit 4121c has a logical output of HI or LOW, and when the emission control voltage is larger than the emission intensity target voltage, it becomes LOW (hereinafter referred to as “L”), while the emission control voltage. Is HI (hereinafter referred to as "H") when is smaller than the emission intensity target voltage. As described above, since the output logic is H or L depending on the comparison result by the voltage comparison circuit 4121c, the output signal is input to the switching circuit 4121d as an ON / OFF signal.

The switching circuit 4121d receives the current from the DC / DC converter 831a provided in the firing power supply board 831 according to the ON / OFF signal from the voltage comparison circuit 4121c each time the firing reference pulse from the firing timing circuit 4120c is input. The combined current obtained by combining the current generated by the discharge of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 and the combined current is passed through the firing solenoid 654 of the hitting ball launching device 650. Specifically, when the ON signal from the voltage comparison circuit 4121c is input, the switching circuit 4121d combines the current from the DC / DC converter 831a and the current due to the discharge of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 into a combined current. While flowing through the firing solenoid 654, when an OFF signal from the voltage comparison circuit 4121c is input, the current flowing through the firing solenoid 654 is cut off. That is, in the switching circuit 4121d, the ON signal from the voltage comparison circuit 4121c is input, and the combined current in which the current from the DC / DC converter 831a and the current due to the discharge of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 are combined is sent to the firing solenoid 654. When the voltage divided by the resistor PR1 becomes larger than the firing intensity target voltage as the firing control voltage when the current flowing through the firing solenoid 654 is flowing, the output logic of the voltage comparison circuit 4121c becomes L and is OFF. The signal is output to the switching circuit 4121d, and the switching circuit 4121d cuts off the constant current flowing through the firing solenoid 654. Due to this interruption, the current does not flow to the firing solenoid 654, so that the firing control voltage becomes smaller than the firing intensity target voltage, the output logic of the voltage comparison circuit 4121c becomes H again, the ON signal is output to the switching circuit 4121d, and the switching circuit. As described above, the 4121d causes a merged current in which the current from the DC / DC converter 831a and the current due to the discharge of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 are merged to flow through the firing solenoid 654. In this way, the switching circuit 4121d uses the ON / OFF signal from the voltage comparison circuit 4121c to generate the combined current in which the current from the DC / DC converter 831a and the current due to the discharge of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 are combined to generate the firing solenoid 654. The switching circuit 4121d self-excitedly oscillates the ON / OFF signal from the voltage comparison circuit 4121c to flow the current to the firing solenoid in order to allow the current to flow to the voltage or cut off the constant current. That is, the switching circuit 4121d functions as a "self-oscillation constant current circuit", and brings the emission control voltage closer to the emission intensity target voltage. As a result, the rotary handle main body front 506 is rotated and the firing solenoid 654 can be driven with a firing strength commensurate with the rotational position of the rotary handle main body front 506 to launch the game ball toward the game area 1100.

When the player touches the rotary handle main body front 506 and is in the original rotation position where the rotary handle main body front 506 is not rotated, the voltage taken out from the variable terminal of the rotation position detection sensor 512 is applied to the resistor PR0. The voltage is applied to the operational amplifier circuit group configured as the voltage follower described above, and is applied to the voltage comparison circuit 4121c as the emission intensity target voltage. In this case, when the ON signal from the voltage comparison circuit 4121c is output to the switching circuit 4121d, the switching circuit 4121d merges the current from the DC / DC converter 831a and the current due to the discharge of the electrolytic capacitor SC0. The combined current is passed through the firing solenoid 654. The current output from the DC / DC converter 831a is the minimum output current. The firing intensity of the firing solenoid 654 at this time is at least one that jumps over the firing rail 660. That is, when the voltage applied to the resistor PR0 is the emission intensity target voltage, the current corresponding to the voltage (the minimum output current output from the DC / DC converter 831a and the current due to the discharge of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 are merged. When the combined current) flows through the firing solenoid 654, the game ball launched by the firing solenoid 654 reaches the gaming area 1100 along the outer rail 1111 of the game board 4, even if it can jump over the firing rail 660. Therefore, it will be collected by the foul cover unit 540 as a foul ball. In other words, when the voltage applied to the resistor PR0 is applied to the operational amplifier circuit group configured as the voltage follower and applied to the voltage comparison circuit 4121c as the emission intensity target voltage, the current flowing through the emission solenoid 654 is the minimum current. However, even if this minimum current flows through the firing solenoid 654, all the launched game balls are recovered as foul balls. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball feed solenoid 585 from overlapping with the game ball sent to the launch rail 660, thereby preventing the launch solenoid 654 from launching the overlapping game ball toward the game area 1100. At the same time, it is possible to prevent an applied load to the firing solenoid 654, and it is also possible to prevent a failure.

In the present embodiment, by adopting the shunt type stabilized power supply circuit PIC0 for the shunt regulator circuit 4121a, the emission intensity target voltage applied to the voltage comparison circuit 4121c is + 2.5V, which is a constant voltage from the shunt regulator circuit 4121a. The + 5.0V amplified by the amplifier circuit 4121b is divided by the rotation position detection sensor 512 of the handle device 500, so that the divided voltage also rotates at the same rotation position of the rotation handle main body front 506. When it is held in the position, it is held at a constant voltage without fluctuation. As a result, the switching circuit 4121d causes the launch control voltage to approach the launch intensity target voltage by passing a merged current through the launch solenoid 654 of the ball launching device 650, and rotates when the launch control voltage becomes the same as the launch intensity target voltage. When the rotation position of the front of the handle body 506 is held at the same rotation position, the merged current flowing through the firing solenoid 654 does not fluctuate and a constant current flows, so that the firing solenoid 654 moves the game ball to the game area 1100. The firing intensity to launch toward is the same. Therefore, it is possible to prevent "flying unevenness" of the game ball due to the drive firing of the firing solenoid 654.

Further, in the island facility where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed, a gaming ball circulation system is constructed in which the gaming balls discharged from the plurality of pachinko gaming machines are polished and supplied to the pachinko gaming machines again. For this reason, the temperature inside the island facility is extremely high due to the heat generated by polishing the game balls, the heat generated by the collision and friction between the game balls, and the heat generated by the power supply board of the pachinko gaming machine and various electric decorations. In this embodiment, as described above, by adopting the shunt type stabilized power supply circuit PIC0 for the shunt regulator circuit 4121a, + 2.5V is stabilized even in an environment where heat is trapped in the pachinko equipment. It can be output. As a result, the voltage taken out from the variable terminal of the rotation position detection sensor 512, that is, the "fluctuation" of the firing intensity target voltage can be suppressed by suppressing the fluctuation of + 2.5V due to the temperature, and thus this "fluctuation". The voltage comparison circuit 4121c can output a control signal to the switching circuit 4121d without including the voltage of the minute. That is, when the rotation position of the rotation handle main body front 506 is the same rotation position, "unevenness" can be suppressed in the firing intensity of launching the game ball toward the game area 1100, so that "flying unevenness" of the game ball can be suppressed. be able to.

[3-6B. DC / DC converter input / output current and output voltage]
Next, the input / output current and the output voltage of the DC / DC converter 831a will be described with reference to FIG. 188 with respect to the input current at the TA point and the output current and the output voltage at the TB point shown in FIG. 186. The TA point is a point for referring to the input current Iin of the DC / DC converter 831a, and the TB point is a point for referring to the output current Iout and the output voltage Vout of the DC / DC converter 831a. The output voltage Vout is a potential difference from the ground.

First, as shown in FIG. 188 (a), the relationship between the output voltage Vout at the TB point and the output current Iout is such that the output current Iout increases as the output voltage Vout decreases from + 35V. Specifically, in the section A where the output voltage Vout is from + 35V to + 30V, the output current Iout is constant at about 360mA, and in the section B where the output voltage Vout is from + 30V to + 20V, the output decreases as the output voltage Vout decreases. In the section C where the current Iout increases from 360 mA to 400 mA by about 40 mA and the output voltage Vout increases from + 20 V to + 10 V, the output current Iout increases by about 260 mA from 400 mA to 660 mA and the output voltage Vout increases by about 260 mA as the output voltage Vout decreases. In the section D from to + 5V, the output current Iout increases by about 350mA from 660mA to 1010mA as the output voltage Vout decreases. In the vicinity of + 5V to zero V, the output current Iout is approximately 1010 mA.

As shown in FIG. 188 (b), the relationship between the input current Iin at the TA point and the output current Iout at the TB point is that as the output voltage Vout decreases from + 35V, the input current Iin decreases and the output current Iout increases. It is a relationship. Specifically, in the section A where the output voltage Vout is from + 35V to + 30V, the output current Iout is constant at about 360mA, while the input current Iin is reduced by about 80mA from 400mA to 320mA. In this section A, when the current corresponding to the rotation position of the rotation handle main body 506 flows through the firing solenoid 654 and the input current Iin is larger than the output current Iout, the game ball launched toward the game area 1100 is still a game. While the firing intensity is difficult to reach the region 1100, the game is played when the current corresponding to the rotation position of 506 in front of the rotating handle body flows through the firing solenoid 654 and the input current Iin becomes smaller than the output current Iout. The firing intensity of the game ball launched toward the area 1100 reaches the game area 1100. In the section B where the output voltage Vout is from + 30V to + 20V, the output current Iout increases by about 40mA from 360mA to 400mA, while the input current Iin decreases by about 60mA from 320mA to 260mA, which is compared with the output current Iout. The input current Iin is completely reduced. In the section C where the output voltage Vout is from + 20V to + 10V, the output current Iout increases by about 260mA from 400mA to 660mA, while the input current Iin decreases by about 50mA from 260mA to 210mA, which is the same as in section B. , The input current Iin is completely smaller than the output current Iout. In the section D where the output voltage Vout is from + 10V to + 5V, the output current Iout increases by about 350mA from 660mA to 1010mA, while the input current Iin decreases by about 35mA from 210mA to 175mA, and the section B and the section Similar to C, the input current Iin is completely smaller than the output current Iout.

When the value of the output current Iout of the DC / DC converter 831a is 360 mA, the combined current obtained by merging this 360 mA and the current due to the discharge of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is the minimum current, that is, the player is in front of the rotating handle main body. The value of the output current Iout of the DC / DC converter 831a is 1010 mA, whereas the current flows through the firing solenoid 654 when the 506 is touched and the original rotation position is not rotating in front of the rotating handle body 506. At one point, the combined current, which is the sum of this 1010 mA and the current generated by the discharge of the electrolytic capacitor SC0, is the maximum current, that is, the player touches the rotary handle main body front 506 and rotates the rotary handle main body front 506 clockwise. Then, it is the current flowing through the firing solenoid 654 when it is in the limit rotation position. As described above, the output current Iout of the DC / DC converter 831a has a minimum output current value of 360 mA and a maximum output current value of 1010 mA. When the value of the output current Iout of the DC / DC converter 831a exceeds 1000 mA, the firing intensity of the firing solenoid 654 is such that the gaming ball that has already jumped out into the gaming region 1100 along the outer rail 1111 collides with the impact portion 1114. Then, it rolls downstream along the inner peripheral rail 1113, and is strong enough to be collected at the out port 1151 without entering various winning openings. Therefore, the range in which the value of the output current Iout of the DC / DC converter 831a when the player rotates the rotation handle main body 506 clockwise to play the game is larger than 360 mA and smaller than 1000 mA. (360 mA <output current Iout value <1000 mA), which is a current on the order of milliamperes.

[3-6C. Relationship between the input / output current and output voltage of the DC / DC converter and the emission reference pulse from the emission timing circuit] Next, at the constant rotation position of 506 in front of the rotation handle body, the DC / DC at the TB point shown in FIG. 186. The output current Iout and output voltage Vout of the converter 831a and the emission reference pulse T0 from the emission timing circuit 4120c will be described with reference to FIG. 189. As described above, the TB point is a point for referring to the output current Iout and the output voltage Vout (potential difference from the ground) of the DC / DC converter 831a, and the TC point is the emission reference pulse from the emission timing circuit 4120c. This is a point for referring to T0.

As described above, the firing reference pulse T0 from the firing timing circuit 4120c allows 100 game balls per minute, that is, 100 game balls per 60,000 ms toward the game area 1100 when the launching of the game balls by the firing solenoid 654 is permitted. Since it is set to be launched, the pulse width is 30 ms and the period T is 600 ms, as shown in FIG. 189 (a).

Here, the DC / DC in the case where the player touches the rotary handle main body front 506 and rotates the rotary handle main body front 506 to reach the limit rotation position and the non-rotating original rotation position. The waveform of the output voltage Vout of the converter 831a will be described.

When the firing reference pulse T0 from the firing timing circuit 4120c is input to the switching circuit 4121d of the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d when the rotation handle main body front 506 is in the limit rotation position, it is shown in FIGS. 189 (b) and 189 (c). As described above, the combined current obtained by merging the current from the DC / DC converter 831a and the current due to the discharge of the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor SC0 becomes the above-mentioned maximum current and begins to flow in the firing solenoid 654 (timing t0). ). When this maximum current is flowing through the firing solenoid 654, the voltage of the DC / DC converter 831a (voltage of the electrolytic capacitor SC0) drops to + 5V according to the characteristics of the DC / DC converter 831a shown in FIG. 189, and the DC / DC converter The value of the output current Iout of 831a is 1010 mA, which is the maximum output current described above. Then, when the input of the emission reference pulse T0 is stopped 30 ms after the input, the discharge proceeds until the output voltage of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 reaches the vicinity of zero V (timing t1). By cutting off the maximum current to the firing solenoid 654, the output voltage Vout of the DC / DC converter 831a gradually recovers to + 35V. Along with this, charging of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is started according to the characteristics of the DC / DC converter 831a. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 188, the output current Iout of the DC / DC converter 831a has a characteristic that the output voltage Vout is small, while the output current Iout is large. Immediately after the maximum current is cut off, the output voltage Vout of the DC / DC converter 831a, that is, the output voltage of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is near zero V, and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is the output current Iout of the DC / DC converter 831a. Charging is started by a certain current of 1010 mA, and when the output voltage Vout of the DC / DC converter 831a recovers to near + 35 V, charging is continued by a current of 360 mA, and then charging is completed. This charging is already completed by the time the next emission reference pulse T0 is input (timing t2). That is, charging is completed within a period of 570 ms from the input of the current emission reference pulse T0 to the input of the next emission reference pulse T0 30 ms later.

On the other hand, when the firing reference pulse T0 from the firing timing circuit 4120c is input to the switching circuit 4121d of the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d when the rotation handle main body front 506 is in the original rotation position, FIG. 189 (b), As shown in (d), the combined current obtained by merging the current from the DC / DC converter 831a and the current due to the discharge of the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor SC0 becomes the above-mentioned minimum current and becomes the emission solenoid 654. It starts to flow (timing t0). When this minimum current is flowing through the firing solenoid 654, the voltage of the DC / DC converter 831a (voltage of the electrolytic capacitor SC0) drops slightly according to the characteristics of the DC / DC converter 831a shown in FIG. 189, but is shown in FIG. 188. It belongs to the section A, and the value of the output current Iout of the DC / DC converter 831a is 360 mA, which is the above-mentioned minimum output current. Then, when the input of the emission reference pulse T0 is stopped 30 ms after the input, the discharge of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is slightly advanced (timing t1). By cutting off the minimum current to the firing solenoid 654, the output voltage Vout of the DC / DC converter 831a gradually recovers to + 35V. Along with this, charging of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is started according to the characteristics of the DC / DC converter 831a. Specifically, as described above, the output current Iout of the DC / DC converter 831a has a characteristic that the output voltage Vout is small, but the output current Iout is large. Immediately after the minimum current is cut off, the output voltage Vout of the DC / DC converter 831a, that is, the output voltage of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 drops slightly, but belongs to the section A, and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is the output of the DC / DC converter 831a. Charging is started by a current of 360 mA, which is the current Iout, and then charging is completed. This charging is already completed by the time the next emission reference pulse T0 is input (timing t2). That is, charging is completed within a period of 570 ms from the input of the current emission reference pulse T0 to the input of the next emission reference pulse T0 30 ms later.

In this way, even if the maximum current and the minimum current flow through the firing solenoid 654, due to the characteristics of the DC / DC converter 831a, the charge that the electrolytic capacitor SC0 discharges within the discharge time of 30 ms when the current launch reference pulse T0 is input. Can be completed within the remaining charging time of 570 ms until the next emission reference pulse T0 is input.

Here, consider a case where the DC / DC converter 831a independently passes a current to the firing solenoid 654 in a state where the electrolytic capacitor SC0 does not exist within the period until the firing reference pulse T0 is input and 30 ms elapses. In this control method, the current flowing through the firing solenoid 654 by the DC / DC converter 831a alone is about 2A to 3.5A, so that this current is supplied from the power supply board 851. When driving the firing solenoid 654, a large current larger than 2A to 3.5A flows instantaneously. Then, every time the emission reference pulse T0 of 30 ms is generated in the cycle T of 600 ms, the load on the power supply board also increases in each cycle T. That is, since the power supply board supplies a predetermined current to electronic parts, lighting used for decoration, etc. in addition to the momentary large current flowing when the firing solenoid 654 is driven, the total electric power of these is reduced. If the upper limit of the power supply is exceeded, the power supply will be cut off for safety.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the DC / DC converter 831a independently drives the firing solenoid 654 in the absence of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 in a period of 30 ms, which is the pulse width after the firing reference pulse T0 is input. The ampere-order current supplied from the + 37V DC power supply of the power supply board 851 to the DC / DC converter 831a is extended to a period of 600 ms until the emission reference pulse T0 is input and the next emission reference pulse T0 is input. , The "first current" on the order of milliamps supplied to the DC / DC converter 831a from the + 37V DC power supply of the power supply board 851 when the firing solenoid 654 is driven by the combined current of the DC / DC converter 831a and the electrolytic capacitor SC0. And, when the electrolytic capacitor SC0 charges the power from the DC / DC converter 831a, it is distributed to the "second current" of the milliamper order supplied from the DC power supply of + 37V of the power supply board 851 to the DC / DC converter 831a. can do. As a result, after the emission reference pulse T0 is input in the absence of the electrolytic capacitor SC0, the ampere order is supplied from the + 37V DC power supply of the power supply board 851 to the DC / DC converter 831a during the period of 30 ms, which is the pulse width. The current is transferred from the + 37V DC power supply of the power supply board 851 to the DC / DC converter 831a in the period of 600ms from the input of the emission reference pulse T0 to the input of the next emission reference pulse T0 in the presence of the electrolytic capacitor SC0. It can be averaged by the "first current" and "second current" of the milliampere order supplied. Therefore, the load for supplying a momentary large current by driving the firing solenoid 654 can be eliminated from the power supply board 851. In addition, it is possible to eliminate the time spent designing the operating conditions of the safety device when the power supply board 851 is overloaded.

[3-6D. Relationship between launch reference pulse from launch timing circuit and ball feed reference pulse]
Next, the firing reference pulse T0 from the firing timing circuit 4120c and the ball feeding reference pulse T1 will be described with reference to FIG. 189. As described above, the TC point is a point for referring to the firing reference pulse T0 from the firing timing circuit 4120c, and the TD point shown in FIG. 186 refers to the ball feeding reference pulse T1 from the firing timing circuit 4120c. It is a point to do.

The ball feed reference pulse T1 is set to 150 ms (= T0 (30 ms) × 5), which is five times the 30 ms of the launch reference pulse T0. When the firing reference pulse T0 is input to the switching circuit 4121d of the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d, the ball feeding reference pulse T1 is driven by the ball feeding solenoid of the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d as shown in FIGS. 189 (a) and 189 (e). It is input to the circuit 4120e (timing t0, when 150 ms has elapsed, the input is stopped (timing t3). Thereby, the ball feed solenoid 585 is driven and the ball feed control is performed by the ball feed solenoid 585. As a result, the set of the game ball to be launched next can be completed until the next launch reference pulse T0 is input, and each time the launch reference pulse T0 is input, the game ball is moved to the game area 1100. Can be launched continuously toward.

As described above, in this example, after the game ball is driven by the firing solenoid 654, the power to be driven is supplied from the electrolytic capacitor SC0 to the firing solenoid 654, and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is provided on the firing power supply board 831. Therefore, by replacing the firing power supply board 831 equipped with electrolytic capacitors SC0 having different capacities, the current (maximum current) supplied to the firing solenoid 654 can be changed, and the driving characteristics of the ball launching device 650 can be enjoyed. The characteristics can be changed according to the board 4.

Further, since the electric power is supplied from the electrolytic capacitor SC0 to the firing solenoid 654, the electric power from the power supply board 851 is stored and fired by the electrolytic capacitor SC0 between the time when the game ball is fired and the time when the game ball is fired next time. By supplying the solenoid 654, it is possible to avoid momentarily consuming a large current directly from the power supply board 851, and the LED of the light emitting decorative board, the motor for driving the effect, the solenoid, etc. emit light and move. It is possible to prevent instability and uneven flight of the game ball.

Further, the power supply board 851 creates and supplies a DC power supply (+ 5.2V, + 5.25V, + 12V, + 24V, and + 37V) from the AC power supply (AC24V) of the island equipment, and the ball launching device 650 has a handle. The rotary handle main body front 506 of the device 500 is rotated and driven to drive the launch solenoid 654 with a firing intensity commensurate with the rotational position of the rotary handle main body front 506 to launch the game ball toward the game area 1100.

Further, the emission intensity target voltage applied to the voltage comparison circuit 4121c is + 2.5V, which is a constant voltage from the shunt regulator circuit 4121a, amplified by the amplifier circuit 4121b, and + 5.0V is the rotation position detection sensor 512 of the handle device 500. When the rotation position of the rotary handle main body front 506 is held at the same rotation position, the divided voltage is also held at a constant voltage without fluctuation. Become. As a result, the switching circuit 4121d causes the launch control voltage to approach the launch intensity target voltage by passing a merged current through the launch solenoid 654 of the ball launching device 650, and rotates when the launch control voltage becomes the same as the launch intensity target voltage. When the rotation position of the front of the handle body 506 is held at the same rotation position, the merged current flowing through the firing solenoid 654 does not fluctuate and a constant current flows, so that the firing solenoid 654 moves the game ball to the game area 1100. The firing intensity to launch toward is the same. Therefore, it is possible to prevent "flying unevenness" of the game ball due to the drive firing of the firing solenoid 654.

[3-7. Control processing on the main control board]
Next, an example of the control process executed by the main control board 4100 (particularly the main control MPU4100a) will be described with reference to FIGS. 190 to 202. FIG. 190 is a flowchart showing an example of the main process in the main control board. FIG. 191 is a flowchart showing an example of processing when a power failure occurs. FIG. 192 is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing. FIG. 193 is a flowchart showing an example of the special control process. FIG. 194 is a flowchart showing a starting opening winning process. FIG. 195 is a flowchart showing a fluctuation start process. FIG. 196 is a flowchart showing an example of the fluctuation pattern setting process. FIG. 197 is a flowchart showing an example of processing during fluctuation.

Further, FIG. 198 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot game start process. FIG. 199 is a flowchart showing an example of the small hit game start process. FIG. 200 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot game process. FIG. 201 is a flowchart showing an example of the small hit game process. The timer interrupt process is executed at a predetermined timing (every 4 ms in this embodiment) by the main control MPU 4100a mounted on the main control board 4100. FIG. 202 is an explanatory diagram showing a table configuration in the random number storage means for a special symbol.

In the main process, as shown in FIG. 190, when the supply of electric power to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the main control MPU4100a executes the power-on process (step S1). In this power-on processing, it is determined whether the backup data stored in the RAM 4100e is normal (whether it is the set value at the time of power failure), and if it is normal, the backup data stored in the RAM 4100e is followed. Execute the process to return to the state at the time of power failure (process at the time of power recovery), and if the backup data is abnormal, clear the RAM 4100e and set the device around the CPU (normal initial setting, interrupt timing setting, etc.). conduct.

If the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is stopped during the game, the current game state is stored in the RAM 4100e as backup data. If the RAM clear switch 4100c instructing the clearing of the backup data stored in the RAM 4100e is turned on in the power-on processing, the RAM 4100e is cleared and the normal initial setting is performed. If the backup data is not saved in the RAM 4100e of the main control board 4100 in the power-on processing, the RAM 4100e is cleared and the normal initial setting is performed.

Further, in the power-on processing, a process of setting a power-on command indicating that the main control board 4100 has been started to the peripheral control unit 4140 when the normal initial setting is executed is also executed. The power-on command notifies the peripheral control unit 4140 that the main control board 4100 has started. Even when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is stopped (when the power is turned off) when the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed is closed, the backup data is stored in the RAM 4100e and the power to the pachinko machine 1 is again stored. When the supply is started, the power-on processing is executed. The details will be described below.

[Processing when the power is turned on on the main control side]
When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the main control board 4100a of the main control board 4100 (hereinafter, simply referred to as the main control MPU 4100a) performs the main control side power-on processing as shown in FIGS. 243 and 244. .. When the main control side power-on processing is started, the main control MPU4100a sets the stack pointer (step S10). The stack pointer indicates, for example, the address stacked on the stack for temporarily storing the contents of the storage element (register) in use, or temporarily returns the return address of this routine when the subroutine is terminated and returned to this routine. It indicates the address stacked on the stack for storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked. In step S10, the initial address is set in the stack pointer, and the contents of the register, the return address, and the like are pushed onto the stack from this initial address. Then, the stack pointer returns to the initial address by reading in order from the last stacked stack to the first stacked stack.

Following step S10, wait timer processing 1 is performed (step S12), and it is determined whether or not a power failure warning signal is input (step S14). The voltage does not rise immediately from the time the power is turned on until the specified voltage is reached. On the other hand, when a power failure or a momentary power failure (a phenomenon in which the power supply is suddenly stopped) occurs, the voltage drops, and when the voltage becomes smaller than the power failure warning voltage, the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b of the payout control board 4110 sends a power failure warning signal as a power failure notice. Is output and input to the main control MPU4100a. Similarly, when the voltage becomes smaller than the power failure warning voltage between the time when the power is turned on and the voltage rises to the predetermined voltage, the power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b of the payout control board 4110.

Therefore, the wait timer process 1 in step S12 is a process for waiting until the voltage becomes larger than the power failure warning voltage and stabilizes after the power is turned on. In the present embodiment, the waiting time (wait timer) is 200 milliseconds (waiting timer). ms) is set. The determination in step S14 is performed based on the power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b of the payout control board 4110. After the power is turned on, when the voltage becomes larger than the power failure warning voltage and becomes stable, the power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b becomes no output, and the main control MPU 4100a proceeds to step S16.

Proceeding to step S16, the main control MPU4100a determines whether or not the RAM clear switch 105 shown in FIG. 11 is operated (step S16). This determination is made based on whether or not the RAM clear switch 105 of the main control board 4100 is operated and the operation signal (detection signal) thereof is input to the main control MPU 4100a. When the detection signal is input, it is determined that the RAM clear switch 105 is operated, while when the detection signal is not input, it is determined that the RAM clear switch 105 is not operated.

When it is determined in step S16 that the RAM clear switch 105 is being operated, the value 1 is set in the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S18), and the process proceeds to step S20, while the RAM clear switch 105 is set in step S16. When it is determined that the operation has not been performed, the value 0 is set in the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S19), and the process proceeds to step S20.

Proceeding to step S20, it is determined whether or not the combination of the main control MPU 4100a and the payout control MPU 4111a is appropriate (described later). The frame maker identification information output from the payout control board is stored in the frame maker identification information storage unit 4112 of the main control MPU 4100a, and it is authenticated whether or not appropriate frame maker identification information is output. If the authentication is properly performed, the process proceeds to step S30, while if it is determined that the authentication is not proper, an abnormality notification is performed.

When the main control MPU4100a shifts to step S30, the wait timer process 2 is performed (step S30). In this wait timer process 2, the system waits until the system that controls the drawing of the liquid crystal display device (not shown) by the liquid crystal control unit of the peripheral control board 130 starts (boots). In this embodiment, 2 seconds (s) is set as the time until booting (boot timer).

Following step S30, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 0 (step S32). As described above, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the game information is erased and a value of 0 when the game information is not erased. When it is determined in step S32 that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 0, that is, when the game information is not erased, the checksum is calculated (step S34). This checksum regards the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM as a numerical value and calculates the total.

Following step S34, whether or not the calculated checksum value (sum value) matches the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main control side power cutoff process (power cutoff) described later. (Step S36). If they match, it is determined whether or not the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1 (step S38). The backup flag BK-FLG stores and holds backup information such as game information, checksum value (sum value), and backup flag BK-FLG value in the main control built-in RAM in the main control side power cutoff process described later. It is a flag indicating whether or not, and is set to a value 1 when the main control side power off processing is normally completed, and a value 0 when the main control side power off processing is not normally completed.

When the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1 in step S30, that is, when the main control side power cutoff process is normally completed, the work area of the main control built-in RAM is set as the time of power recovery (step S40). For this setting, in addition to setting the value 0 to the backup flag BK-FLG, the power recovery information is read from the ROM built in the main control MPU4100a (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in ROM"), and this power recovery is performed. The time information is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. In addition, "recovery" means that the power is turned on from the state where the power is cut off, the state where the power is restored after the power failure or momentary power failure, and the state where high frequency is irradiated is detected and reset. The state of returning after that is also included.

Following step S40, a power-on command creation process is performed (step S42). In this power-on command creation process, game information is read from backup information and various commands corresponding to the game information are stored in a predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S32 that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not a value 0 (value 1), that is, when the game information is erased, or in step S36, the checksum values (sum values) match. When it is not set, or when it is determined in step S38 that the backup flag BK-FLG is not a value 1 (value is 0), that is, when the main control side power cutoff process is not normally completed, the main control built-in RAM Clear all areas (step S44). Specifically, the value 0 is written to the main control built-in RAM (note that a predetermined value may be read from the main control built-in ROM as an initial value and set).

Following step S44, the work area of the main control built-in RAM is set as an initial setting (step S46). This setting reads the initial information from the main control built-in ROM and sets this initial information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S46, RAM clear notification and test command creation processing are performed (step S48). In this RAM clear notification and test command creation process, a power-on command classified into power-on for clearing the main control built-in RAM and notifying that the initial setting has been performed is created, and various peripheral control boards 130 are used. Create test commands classified as test-related for performing inspection, and store them as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S42 or step S48, interrupt initial setting is performed (step S50). This setting sets the interrupt cycle when the main control side timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 4 ms.

Following step S50, interrupt enable setting is performed. (Step S52). With this setting, the main control side timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed every 4 ms, that is, the interrupt cycle set in step S50. The process of steps S10 to S52 is referred to as "main control side power-on process".

Following step S52, the value A is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S54). The watchdog timer is set to clear by setting the value A, the value B, and the value C in order in the watchdog timer clear register WCL.

Following step S54, it is determined whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S56). As described above, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off, a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, if the voltage falls below the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is issued as a power failure warning of the payout control board 4110. It is input from. The determination in step S56 is performed based on this power failure warning signal.

When there is no input of the power failure warning signal in step S56, the non-winning random number update process is performed (step S58). In this non-winning random number update process, for example, a reach determination random number, a variable display pattern random number, a big hit symbol initial value determination random number, a small hit symbol initial value determination random number, and the like are updated. In this way, in the non-winning random number update process, random numbers that are not related to the winning determination (big hit determination) are updated. The random number for determining the normal symbol hit, the random number for determining the initial value for determining the normal symbol hit, the random number for the normal symbol variation display pattern, and the like are also updated by this non-winning random number update process.

Following step S58, the process returns to step S54 again, the value A is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL, it is determined in step S56 whether or not there is a power failure warning signal input, and this power failure warning signal must be input. For example, the non-winning random number update process is performed in step S58, and steps S54 to S58 are repeated. The processing of steps S54 to S58 is referred to as "main control side main loop processing".

When the power-on processing described above is completed, the main control MPU4100a starts a loop processing for repeatedly executing each processing for the game. At the start of this loop processing, the main control MPU4100a first determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been detected (step S2). In this embodiment, the power supply voltage used in the pachinko machine 1 is generated by the power supply board 851. That is, since the plurality of types of devices mounted on the pachinko machine 1 operate at different power supply voltages, the power supply voltage supplied to the pachinko machine 1 from an external power source is converted into a predetermined power supply voltage by the power supply board 851. It supplies each device. When a power failure occurs and the power supply voltage supplied from the external power supply to the power supply board 851 becomes equal to or lower than a predetermined power supply voltage, a power failure notice indicating that the power supply voltage supply from the power supply board 851 to the main control board 4100 is stopped is stopped. A signal is transmitted. Then, when the power failure warning signal is detected by the main control MPU 4100a mounted on the main control board 4100 in step S2, the power failure occurrence processing is executed (step S4).

In this power failure processing, when the power supply voltage (24V in this embodiment) supplied to the power supply board 851 after a power failure is restored (hereinafter referred to as power recovery), the operation of the gaming machine is performed before the power failure. This is a process of storing the state at the time of power failure in the RAM 4100e as backup data in order to start from the state. The details of the process will be described later, but in this embodiment, as shown in the figure, the process when a power failure occurs is not an interrupt process, but a branch process executed immediately after the start of the loop depending on whether or not a power failure warning signal is detected. It is incorporated in the main process (main control process).

By the way, when the power failure warning signal is not detected in step S2, that is, when the power from the external power source is normally supplied, the random number update process 2 for updating various random numbers used in the game is performed (step). S3). The random numbers updated in the random number update process 2 will be described later.

Next, the power failure occurrence processing is a processing executed when a power failure warning signal is detected in the main processing, as shown in FIG. 191. The main control MPU4100a first sets the interrupt prohibition setting so that the interrupt process is not executed (step S4a). Then, the checksum of the RAM 4100e is calculated and stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 4100e (step S4b). This checksum is used to check whether or not the contents of the RAM 4100e before the power failure are retained at the time of power recovery.

Subsequently, the main control MPU4100a sets a default value indicating that the power failure occurrence processing has been performed in the backup flag provided in the predetermined area of the RAM4100e (step S4c). After completing the above processing, the main control MPU4100a prohibits access to the RAM4100e (step S4d), enters an infinite loop, and prepares to stop the power supply. In this process, if the power supply voltage becomes unstable due to a very short power outage or the like (hereinafter referred to as "infinite power failure"), and the process when a power failure occurs is actually started, it is actually Since the power supply voltage is not stopped, there is a possibility that the above process cannot recover from the infinite loop. In order to avoid such an adverse effect, the main control MPU4100a of this embodiment is provided with a watchdog timer, and is configured to be reset if the watchdog timer is not updated for a predetermined time. The watchdog timer is periodically updated while the processing is normally performed, but the processing is started when a power failure occurs and the update is not performed. As a result, even if the process when the power is cut off occurs due to the momentary power failure and the infinite loop is entered, the reset is applied after a predetermined period of time elapses, and the main control MPU4100a is started in the same process as when the power is turned on.

Next, in the timer interrupt process, the timer interrupt process is executed every 4 ms by the main control MPU 4100a mounted on the main control board 4100 during the execution of the main process. As shown in FIG. 192, the timer interrupt process is mainly executed. The control MPU4100a executes the process from step S11 to step S18 after executing the register save process (step S10). In the switch input process of step S11, a process of monitoring the detection signal of the above-mentioned switch (gate switch, start port sensor, count sensor, general winning switch, etc.) is executed. In the random number update process 1 of step S12, a process of updating various random numbers used in the game is executed. In this embodiment, the random number updated by the random number update process 1 and the random number updated by the above-mentioned random number update process 2 are different. The random number will be described later, but the random number updated in the random number update process 2 may also be updated in the random number update process 1. In the payout operation process of step S13, a payout command for instructing the payout of the game ball is set on the payout control board 4110 based on the signal detected in the switch input process (step S11).

Further, in the normal control process of step S14, the normal symbol is changed based on the progress state of the game, and the normal electric accessory (that is, the movable piece 2105 that opens and closes the second starting port 2102 by the starting port solenoid 2121) is controlled. Then, a process of changing the open / closed state of the second starting port 2102 is executed. In the special control process of step S15, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variablely displayed on the special symbol display 1185 and 1186 based on the progress state of the game, and the special electric accessory (that is, the attacker solenoid 2124 wins a big prize. It controls the opening / closing member 2106) that opens / closes the opening 2103, and executes a process of changing the opening / closing state of the large winning opening 2103.

In the subsequent output data setting process of step S16, a process of outputting a state signal indicating a game state to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, a management computer, etc.) and a drive signal being output to a special figure start storage display (not shown). Perform processing, etc. In the command transmission process in step S17, a process of transmitting an effect command to the peripheral control unit 4140 is executed. Further, in the command transmission process, a process of transmitting the power-on command set in the power-on process (step S1) to the peripheral control unit 4140 when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started is also performed. When the process of step S17 is executed from step S11, the register return process (step S18) is executed and the process ends.

Here, various random numbers updated by the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 in the above-mentioned random number update process 1 (step S12) and random number update process 2 (step S3) will be described. In this embodiment, as various random numbers used in the game, a random number for big hit determination used for determining whether or not to generate a big hit game state (including "small hit" described later) (big hit determination), a big hit determination A random number for a jackpot symbol used for determining whether or not to generate a jackpot gaming state (probability variation determination) when it is determined to generate a jackpot gaming state, and a special symbol when it is determined to generate a jackpot gaming state in the jackpot determination. A random number for a jackpot symbol used to determine a stop symbol, and a reach determination used to determine whether or not to make a loss with a reach mode when it is determined in the jackpot determination that a jackpot gaming state is not generated. Random numbers, fluctuation display pattern random numbers (random numbers for fluctuation time) used to determine the fluctuation display pattern (variation time) of the special symbol displayed on the special symbol display 1185, 1186, open and close the second start port 2102. There is a random number for normal hit determination used for determining whether or not to control the movable piece 2105 in the open state (normal lottery hit determination).

In this example, a lottery is also performed to determine whether or not to generate a small hit game state using a random number for determining a big hit. In addition, it is also determined whether or not the probability fluctuation jackpot (the probability that a specific profit is given is set higher than the normal time) is set by using the random number for the jackpot symbol. The variation display pattern of the special symbol may be determined by using the reach determination random number, and the variation display pattern of the decorative symbol whose display is controlled by the liquid crystal display device 1900 may be determined.

Of these random numbers, in the random number update process 1, the big hit determination random number related to the occurrence of the big hit game state, the big hit symbol random number, and the normal symbol hit determination random number related to whether or not the movable piece 2105 is controlled to the open state. Update. That is, the random numbers used for the generation of the big hit game state and the determination as to whether or not the movable piece 2105 is controlled to the open state are updated every 4 ms as a predetermined timing. By doing so, the probability of each random number in a predetermined period (probability of determining that a big hit game state is generated, probability of determining that the movable piece 2105 is controlled to the open state) can be made constant, and the game can be played. It is possible to prevent a person from being in a disadvantageous state. On the other hand, in the random number update process 2, the big hit game state is generated, the reach determination random number not related to the normal lottery, the variable display pattern random number, and the like are updated.

[Processing when the power is turned on on the payout control side]
On the other hand, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the payout control MPU4111a of the payout control board 4110 performs a payout control side power-on time process as shown in FIGS. When the payout control side power-on processing is started, the payout control MPU4111a sets the interrupt mode (step S500). This interrupt mode sets the priority of the interrupt of the payout control MPU4111a. In the present embodiment, the payout control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is set to the highest priority, and when an interrupt of the payout control unit timer interrupt process occurs, the process is preferentially performed.

Following step S500, input / output settings (I / O input / output settings) are performed (step S502). In this I / O input / output setting, the input / output setting of the I / O port of the payout control MPU4111a is performed.

Following step S502, the output of the power failure clear signal to the power failure monitoring circuit 117 is started (step S504). The power failure monitoring circuit 117 includes a voltage comparison circuit and a D-type flip-flop IC. The voltage comparison circuit outputs the comparison result by comparing the voltage between + 24V and the reference voltage and comparing the voltage between + 12V and the reference voltage. This comparison result becomes HI when no power failure or momentary power failure occurs and is input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the D type flip-flop, while when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs, the comparison result is input. The logic becomes LOW and is input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the D type flip-flop. In step S504, the output of the power failure clear signal is started to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal of the D type flip-flop. The power failure clear signal is input to the clear terminal with its logic set to LOW via the payout control I / O port 112 of the payout control unit 118. As a result, the payout control MPU4111a can release the latch state of the D type flip-flop, and inverts the logic input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D type flip-flop until the latch state is set. The output can be made from the 1Q terminal, which is an output terminal, and the signal from the 1Q terminal can be monitored.

Following step S504, wait timer processing 1 is performed (step S506), and it is determined whether or not a power failure warning signal is input (step S508). The voltage does not rise immediately from the time the power is turned on until the specified voltage is reached. On the other hand, when a power failure or a momentary power failure (a phenomenon in which the power supply is suddenly stopped) occurs, the voltage drops, and when the voltage becomes smaller than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 117 as a power failure warning. Similarly, when the voltage becomes smaller than the power failure warning voltage between the time when the power is turned on and the voltage rises to a predetermined voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 117. Therefore, the wait timer process 1 in step S506 is a process for waiting until the voltage becomes larger than the power failure warning voltage and stabilizes after the power is turned on. In the present embodiment, the waiting time (wait timer) is 200 milliseconds (waiting timer). ms) is set. In the determination of step S508, it is determined whether or not the power failure warning signal is input. This determination is performed based on the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the above-mentioned D type flip-flop, as the power failure warning signal.

Following step S508, the output of the power failure clear signal to the CLR terminal, which is the clear terminal of the D type flip-flop, is stopped (step S510). By stopping the output of this power failure clear signal, the logic becomes HI via the payout control I / O port 112 and is input to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal. As a result, the payout control MPU4111a can set the D type flip-flop to the latch state. The D-type flip-flop outputs a power failure warning signal from the 1Q terminal, which is an output terminal, when the state in which the logic is LOW and is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal, is latched.

Following step S510, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear switch 105 is operated (step S512). This determination is made based on whether or not the RAM clear switch 105 of the main control board 100 is operated and the operation signal (detection signal) thereof is input to the payout control MPU4111a. When the detection signal is input, it is determined that the RAM clear switch 105 is operated, while when the detection signal is not input, it is determined that the RAM clear switch 105 is not operated.

When it is determined in step S512 that the RAM clear switch 105 is operated, the value 1 is set in the payout RAM clear flag (step S514), and the process proceeds to step S518, while the RAM clear switch 105 is operated in step S512. If it is determined that the value is not set, the value 0 is set in the payout RAM clear (step S516), and the process proceeds to step S518.

This payout RAM clear flag is stored in the RAM built in the payout control MPU4111a (hereinafter, referred to as “payout control built-in RAM”), for example, various flags and various information storage areas. It is a flag indicating whether or not to delete the payout, and is set to a value 1 when the payout is deleted and a value 0 when the payout is not deleted. The payout RAM clear flag set in step S514 and step S516 is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the payout control MPU4111a.

Following step S514 or step S516, a setting is made to allow access to the payout control built-in RAM (step S518). With this setting, the payout control built-in RAM can be accessed, and for example, payout can be written (stored) or read out.

Following step S518, the stack pointer is set (step S520). The stack pointer indicates, for example, the address stacked on the stack for temporarily storing the contents of the storage element (register) in use, or temporarily returns the return address of this routine when the subroutine is terminated and returned to this routine. It indicates the address stacked on the stack for storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked. In step S520, the initial address is set in the stack pointer, and the contents of the register, the return address, and the like are pushed onto the stack from this initial address. Then, the stack pointer returns to the initial address by reading in order from the last stacked stack to the first stacked stack.

Proceeding to step S521, it is determined whether or not the combination of the payout control MPU4111a and the main control MPU4100a is appropriate (described later). The game board maker identification information output from the main control board 4100 is stored in the game board maker identification information storage unit 4101 of the payout control MPU4111a, and it is authenticated whether or not appropriate game board maker identification information is output. If the authentication is properly performed, the process proceeds to step S526, while if it is determined that the authentication is not proper, an abnormality notification is performed.

In step S526, it is determined whether or not the payout RAM clear flag has a value of 0 (step S526). As described above, the payout RAM clear flag is set to a value of 1 when the payout is erased and a value of 0 when the payout is not erased.

When the payout RAM clear flag has a value of 0 in step S526, that is, when the payout is not erased, the checksum is calculated (step S528). This checksum considers the payout stored in the payout control built-in RAM as a numerical value and calculates the total.

Following step S528, it is determined whether or not the calculated checksum value matches the checksum value stored in the payout control unit power cutoff process (when the power is turned off), which will be described later (step S530). .. If they match, it is determined whether or not the payout backup flag has a value of 1 (step S532). This payout backup flag is a flag indicating whether or not the payout backup information such as the payout and checksum values is stored and held in the payout control built-in RAM in the payout control unit power cutoff process described later, and the payout control unit power off. The value is set to 1 when the time processing is normally completed, and the value is set to 0 when the payout control unit power off processing is not normally completed.

When the payout backup flag has a value of 1 in step S532, that is, when the payout control unit power cutoff process is normally completed, the work area of the payout control built-in RAM is set as the time of power recovery (step S534). In this setting, in addition to setting the value 0 to the payout backup flag, the power recovery information is read from the ROM built in the payout control MPU4111a (hereinafter, referred to as “payout control built-in ROM”), and the power is restored. Set the information in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM. As a result, information used for various processes is set based on the above-mentioned payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, such as various flags and various information stored in the various information storage areas. The term "recovery" includes not only the state in which the power is turned on from the state in which the power is cut off, but also the state in which the power is restored after the power failure or momentary power failure.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S526 that the payout RAM clear flag is not a value 0 (value 1), or when the checksum values do not match in step S530, or when the payout backup flag is not a value 1 in step S532. When it is determined (value is 0), that is, when the payout control unit power cutoff process is not normally completed, the entire area of the payout control built-in RAM is cleared (step S536). As a result, the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is cleared.

Following step S536, the work area of the payout control built-in RAM is set as an initial setting (step S538). This setting reads the initial information from the payout control built-in ROM and sets this initial information in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM.

Following step S534 or step S538, interrupt initial setting is performed (step S540). This setting sets the interrupt cycle when the payout control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 1.75 ms.

Following step S540, interrupt enable setting is performed (step S542). With this setting, the payout control unit timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed every 1.75 ms, that is, the interrupt cycle set in step S540.

Next, in the special control process, the main control MPU4100a executes the process from step S20 to step S90 as shown in FIG. 193. In the start port winning process in step S20, it is determined whether or not a game ball has won a prize in the first starting port 2101 or the second starting port 2102, and when a winning ball is won, a process of updating the hold state of the lottery is executed. In the fluctuation start processing of step S30, the number of stored items (number of holds) in each jackpot lottery is confirmed, and if the number of holds (total number of stored numbers) is not 0, the corresponding change display of the special symbol is started. Make settings. Specifically, it is determined whether or not to generate a big hit game state (profit-giving state) (winning determination means), and when a big hit game state is generated, it is determined whether or not to make a probabilistic big hit. .. In the variation pattern setting process in step S40, settings related to variation display of each special symbol and each decorative symbol are made. Specifically, after determining the variation display pattern of each special symbol and starting the variation display of the special symbol on the variation time set corresponding to the variation display pattern (special symbol display 1185, 1186). (Time until stop) is set in the timer.

In the variable processing in step S50, the timer for which the variable time is set is monitored in the variable display pattern setting process (step S40), and the first special symbol display 1185 or the second special symbol display is displayed based on the timer timed out. A process is performed to stop the variable display of the special symbol in the device 1186 (corresponding to the special symbol display 1185, 1186). At this time, if it is determined in the fluctuation start process (step S30) that one of the big hit lottery is in the big hit game state, the process selection flag is updated to "3", and the small hit game state is set in the same lottery. If it is determined to be, the process selection flag is updated to "4", and if it is not determined to be in the big hit or small hit game state, the process selection flag is updated to "0".

In the big hit game start process (profit-giving state control means) in step S60, a setting for starting the big hit game state is made. Specifically, as will be described later, the number of times the opening / closing member 2106 is opened, the opening time, and the like are set according to the type of jackpot. Further, in the small hit game start process in step S70, a setting for starting the small hit game state is made. Specifically, as will be described later, the number of times the opening / closing member 2106 is opened in a small hit, the opening time, and the like are set. In the big hit game process of step S80, the big winning opening 2103 is opened, and when a predetermined number of game balls win the big winning opening 2103, or when a predetermined period has elapsed, the opening / closing member 2106 is closed. Perform processing. Further, if the number of rounds in the big hit game state has not reached the predetermined number of times, the process for opening the opening / closing member 2106 is performed again, and when the number of rounds in the big hit game state reaches the predetermined number of times, the process selection flag is performed. Is updated to "5". Further, after the number of rounds reaches a predetermined number of times, a process of generating a probability fluctuation state and a time-saving game state is executed (special game state control means).

In the small hit game process of step S90, in order to open the large winning opening 2103 and to close the opening / closing member 2106 when a predetermined number of game balls win the large winning opening 2103 or when a predetermined period has elapsed. Is processed. Although the details will be described later, the opening of the big winning opening 2103 in the small hit game processing is set so that the profit to the player is extremely low as compared with the big hit game processing (step S80). Next, specific processing in steps S20 to S90 will be described.

Next, in the starting port winning process, as shown in FIG. 194, first, it is determined whether or not the detection signal is output from the second starting port sensor 2127, and the detection signal is output from the second starting port sensor 2127. In that case, it is determined that the game ball has won a prize in the second start port 2102 (YES in step S201), and if the detection signal from the second start port sensor 2127 is not output, the game ball is in the second start port 2102. Is not won (NO in step S201). When it is determined in step S201 that the game ball has won a prize in the second starting port 2102, various random numbers for the second big hit lottery (random numbers for big hit determination, random numbers for big hit symbols, etc.) are acquired and provided in the RAM 4100e. It is determined whether or not the value of the second pending number counter is less than 4, which is the upper limit value (step S202). Then, if the second hold count counter is less than 4 in step S202, the second start hold storage process (step S203) and the hold history update process (step S204) are executed. If the value of the second hold count counter is 4 in step S202, the second start hold storage process and the hold history update process are not executed.

On the other hand, when the detection signal is not output from the second start port sensor 2127 in step S201 (NO in step S201), or when the value of the second hold count counter is 4 (NO in step S202). Determines whether or not a game ball has won a prize in the first starting port 2101 (step S205). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the detection signal is output from the first start port sensor 3102. When it is determined in step S205 that the game ball has won a prize in the first starting port 2101 (YES), various random numbers for the first big hit lottery are acquired, and the value of the first hold number counter provided in the RAM 4100e is the upper limit. It is determined whether or not the value is less than 4 (step S206). Then, if the first hold count counter is less than 4 in step S206, the first start hold storage process (step S207) and the hold history update process (step S208) are executed. If the value of the first hold count counter is 4 in step S206, the first start hold storage process and the hold history update process are not executed.

Subsequently, in the fluctuation start processing, as shown in FIG. 195, first, it is determined whether or not the processing flag is "0", and if it is "0" (YES in step S301), steps S302 and subsequent steps are performed. The process is executed, and if it is not "0" (NO in step S301), the variation start process is terminated. In step S302, it is determined whether or not the values (first start storage number and second start storage number) of the two hold count counters corresponding to the special symbol indicators 2390a and 2390b are both "0". Since the sum of the values in the two hold count counters indicates the number of random number values stored in the storage area of the start storage (special symbol random number storage means 4515, 2940 (see FIG. 202)), in step S302. If the values of any of the hold count counters are both "0" (YES), it is determined that the start conditions for the first big hit lottery and the second big hit lottery are not satisfied, and the process proceeds to step S317.

On the other hand, if the value of any of the hold count counters is not "0" in step S302 (NO), the start storage transfer process is executed (steps S303 to S311). As shown in FIG. 202 (a), the first special symbol random number storage means 4515 is provided with four storage areas (storage area [1] 4515a to storage area [4] 4515d), and the first start is performed. It is associated with each value of the number of memories ("1" to "4"). Further, as shown in FIG. 202 (b), the second special symbol random number storage means 4532 is also provided with four storage areas (storage area [1] 4532a to storage area [4] 4532d). (2) It is associated with each value of the start storage number ("1" to "4"). Each storage area 4515a to 4515d, 4532a to 4532d has a big hit determination random number storage area 4580 in which a random number for big hit determination is stored, and a big hit symbol random number storage area 4581 in which a random number for a big hit symbol is stored. ..

Then, in the start storage transfer process, first, whether or not the value of the hold number counter corresponding to the second special symbol display 1186 (second start storage number) is "0", that is, the random number storage for the second special symbol It is determined whether or not a random number is stored in the storage area [1] 4532a of the means 4532 (step S303), and if the random number is stored (NO), the nth storage area (n is a natural number of 2 or more). Processing to shift various random numbers stored in (storage area [2] 4532b to storage area [4] 4532d) to the n-1st storage area (storage area [1] 4532a to storage area [3] 4532c), respectively. (Step S304) and the process of acquiring a random number related to the second special symbol stored in the storage area [1] 4532a (step S305) are executed. In addition, the special symbol fluctuation flag is set to "1" (step S306), and the process of subtracting "1" from the hold number counter corresponding to the second special symbol (step S307) is executed.

On the other hand, when the random number is not stored in the storage area [1] 4532a of the second special symbol random number storage means 4532, that is, when the value of the hold number counter corresponding to the second special symbol display 1186 is "0". (YES in step S303) is stored in each storage area (storage area [2] 4515b to storage area [4] 4515d) of the nth (n is a natural number of 2 or more) of the first special symbol random number storage means 4515. The various random numbers to be generated are shifted to the n-1st storage area (storage area [1] 4515a to storage area [3] 4515c), respectively (step S308), and stored in the storage area [1] 4515a. The process of acquiring a random number related to the first special symbol (step S309) is executed. In addition, a process (step S311) of subtracting "1" from the hold number counter corresponding to the first special symbol is executed.

In other words, regarding the first special symbol, when holding it, the value of the hold number counter (first start storage number) is increased by "1" and the extracted random number is used as in the case of the second special symbol. It is stored in the storage area corresponding to the value of the first special symbol, but only when the second start memory is "0" when the variation of the first special symbol is started, that is, the first special symbol is used. Only when one process is waiting and the second process by the second special symbol is not waiting, each random number is read from the first storage area "1" 4515a of the first special symbol random number storage means 4515. ing. Then, this control makes it possible to give priority to the second process over the first process.

After that, it is determined whether or not the probability fluctuation function is operating, that is, whether or not it is in the probability fluctuation state with high probability (step S312), and if it is not in the probability fluctuation state (NO in step S312), when the probability fluctuation is not activated. Select the jackpot determination table, that is, the table in which the probability of becoming a jackpot is set low, while in the case of the probability fluctuation state (YES in step S312), the table at the time of the probability fluctuation operation, that is, the probability of becoming a jackpot is Select a table with a high setting. In this example, the probability of becoming a big hit is set to 6/499 when the probability fluctuation is not activated (that is, normal time), and the probability of becoming a big hit is 60 when the probability fluctuation is activated (that is, when the probability is high). It is set to / 499.

After any table is selected in step S313 or step S314, the random number related to any special symbol acquired in step S305 or step S309 based on the table is a random number corresponding to a big hit (big hit value). ) (Step S315). Then, if it is a big hit value (YES in step S315), the big hit flag is set to "ON" (step S316), and the process proceeds to step S317. On the other hand, if the acquired random number is not a big hit value (NO in step S315), it is determined whether or not the random number is a random number corresponding to a small hit (small hit value) (step S318). Then, if it is a small hit value (YES in step S318), the small hit flag is set to "ON" (step S319), and the process proceeds to step S317. If it is not a small hit value (NO in step S318), the process proceeds to step S317 without going through step S319. In step S317, the processing flag is updated to "1", and the fluctuation start processing is terminated. The ON / OFF state (set state, reset state) of the big hit flag and the small hit flag is stored in the RAM 4100e. Further, the OFF state (reset state) of the big hit flag and the small hit flag means that the value of "0" is set, and the ON state (set state) of the big hit flag and the small hit flag is the value of "1". Is to be set.

Next, in the fluctuation pattern setting process, as shown in FIG. 196, it is determined whether or not the process flag is "1", and if it is set to "1" by step S317 (YES in step S401). The processing after step S402 is executed, and if it is not "1" (NO in step S401), the fluctuation pattern setting processing is terminated. In step S402, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is "ON", and if it is "ON" in step S316 (YES in step S402), a probability fluctuation jackpot or a probability fluctuation jackpot or based on the acquired random number. It is determined which of the normal jackpots is the jackpot (step S403). Then, in the case of a probability fluctuation big hit (YES in step S403), it is determined whether or not it is a special hit (step S404). As will be described in detail later, any probability fluctuation jackpot is set to a probability fluctuation state in which the probability that a specific profit is given in the subsequent lottery is set higher than the normal time, and any special symbol display 1185 or The time-saving gaming state in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol that fluctuates in 1186 is shortened (relatively shorter than the normal time) and the ease of winning the second starting port 2102 is increased more than usual. Although it is common to "generate", the degree of profit given to the player is set to be significantly different between the probability fluctuation jackpot which is a special hit and the general probability fluctuation jackpot which is not a special hit.

That is, in a general probability fluctuation jackpot, the opening time of the opening / closing member 2106 that opens and closes the jackpot 2103 is set to a time that allows a plurality of (for example, 10) game balls to win a prize with a margin. At the same time, the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member 2106 is controlled to be performed a number of times (for example, 7 times) that gives a large benefit. On the other hand, in the probability fluctuation jackpot, which is a special hit, the opening time per opening / closing member 2106 is set to such a time that several (for example, one or two) game balls can barely win a prize. , The opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member 2106 is controlled to be performed twice, for example.

In step S404, when it is determined that it is not a special hit, that is, when it is determined that it is a general probability fluctuation jackpot (NO), the probability variation jackpot variation display pattern table is selected (step S405), while the special If it is determined to be a hit (YES in step S404), the probability variation special hit time variation display pattern table is selected (step S406). If it is determined in step S403 that it is not a probability fluctuation jackpot, that is, if it is determined to be a normal jackpot (YES), the normal jackpot variation display pattern table is selected (step S407).

On the other hand, in step S402, when it is determined that the big hit flag is not "ON" (NO), it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is "ON" (step S408), and it is set to "ON" by step S319. If it is (YES in step S408), the small hit time variation display pattern table is selected (step S409). If the small hit flag is not "ON" (NO in step S408), it is determined whether or not the acquired reach determination random number is a random number (reach value) corresponding to the reach (step S410). ), If it is a reach value (YES in step S410), select the loss reach variation display pattern table (step 411), and if it is not a reach value (NO in step S410), the loss time variation display. Select a pattern table (step S412).

As described above, when the variation display pattern table is selected in any step, the variation display pattern is based on the variation display pattern table and the variation display pattern random number acquired in either step S305 or step S309. Is determined (step S413). Next, a selection value is set as an effect command for designating the variation display pattern determined in step S413 (step S414), and a timer provided in the RAM 4100e of the main control board 4100 to set the variation time according to the variation display pattern (this implementation). In the form of, the validity period timer) is set (step S415). In step S415, the fluctuation time set in the fluctuation display pattern determined in step S413 is set in the valid period timer.

The variation display pattern command set in step S414 is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 in the command transmission output process. Further, when the variation display pattern command is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 by command transmission output processing, a drive signal is output to the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186, and the variation display of the special symbol is started. Let me. After that, the processing flag is updated to "2" (step S416), and the fluctuation pattern setting processing is terminated.

Subsequently, in the variable processing, as shown in FIG. 197, first, it is determined whether or not the processing flag is "2" (step S501), and if it is "2" by step S416 (step S501). YES), the processing after step S502 is executed, and if it is not "2" (NO in step S501), the changing processing is terminated. In step S502, the first special symbol display 1185 or the second special symbol display 1186 determines whether or not the first special symbol or the second special symbol is changing, and if it is changing, the first special symbol is used. It is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the symbol or the second special symbol has timed up (step S503). Then, when the fluctuation time is timed up, that is, when the fluctuation time ends (YES in step S503), the fluctuation is stopped (step S504).

If none of the special symbols have changed (NO in step S502), or if the fluctuation time has not ended (NO in step S503), the special symbols are changing without stopping. End the process.

After stopping the fluctuation of the special symbol by step S504, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is "ON" (step S505), and if the jackpot flag is "ON", the processing flag is updated to "3". (Step S506). On the other hand, if the big hit flag is not "ON" (NO in step S505), it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is "ON" (step S507), and if it is "ON", the processing flag is set to "4". (Step S508), and if it is not "ON", the processing flag is updated to "0" (step S509). In this way, after updating the processing flag in any one of step S506, step S508, or step S509, the variable processing is terminated.

Next, in the jackpot game start process, as shown in FIG. 198, first, it is determined whether or not the process flag is "3", and if it is "3" by step S506 (YES in step S601). ), The processing after step S602 is executed, and if it is not "3" (NO in step S601), the big hit game start processing is terminated. In step S602, it is determined whether or not the probability fluctuation function is operating, that is, whether or not it is in the probability fluctuation state, and if it is in the probability fluctuation state (YES), the operation of the probability fluctuation function is temporarily stopped and the process proceeds to step S604. do. If it is not in the probability fluctuation state, that is, in the normal low probability state (NO in step S602), the process proceeds to step S604 without executing the process of step S603. In step S604, it is determined whether or not the time saving function is in operation, that is, whether or not it is in the time saving gaming state, and if it is in the time saving gaming state (YES), the operation of the time saving function is stopped (step S605), and the step. Move to S606. On the other hand, if it is not in the time-saving gaming state (NO in step S604), the process proceeds to step S606 without executing the process of step S605.

In step S606, it is determined whether the type of big hit is a general big hit or a special hit, and if it is a general big hit (NO in step S606), the opening / closing member 2106 opens the big winning opening 2103. The conditions, that is, the number of times of opening for big hits, the opening time for each time, and the number of winning limits to the big winning opening 2103 are set (step S607). On the other hand, when the big hit is a special hit (YES in step S606), the number of times the special hit is opened in the big winning opening 2103, the number of winning limits, and the opening time per one time are set (step S608). After that, the processing flag is updated to "5" (step S609), and the jackpot game start processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the small hit game start process, as shown in FIG. 199, first, it is determined whether or not the process flag is "4", and if it is "4" in step S508 (YES in step S701). ), The processing of step S702 and step S703 is executed, and if the processing flag is not "4" (NO in step S701), the small hit game start processing is completed without executing the processing of step S702 and step S703. do. In step S702, the opening conditions of the large winning opening 2103 in the case of a small hit, that is, the number of times the large winning opening 2103 is opened for the small hit by the opening / closing member 2106, and the opening time per one time are set. The number of open shots, the limited number of winnings, and the open time in a small hit are set to be the same as the conditions (step S608) set in the case of a special hit. That is, it is set so that the special hit and the small hit cannot be visually distinguished. After that, the processing flag is updated to "6" (step S703), and the small hit game start processing is terminated.

Next, in the jackpot game processing, as shown in FIG. 200, first, it is determined whether or not the processing flag is "5", and if it is "5" by step S609 (YES in step S801). , The processing after step S802 is executed, and if it is not "5" (NO in step S801), the big hit game processing is terminated. In step S802, it is determined whether or not the large winning opening 2103 is open, and if it is open (YES), the opening time (elapsed time after opening) of the large winning opening 2103 is a predetermined time set in advance. (Step S803), and if it has passed (YES in step S803), the opening / closing member 2106 is operated to close the large winning opening 2103 (step S805).

Even if the set opening time has not elapsed (NO in step S803), the number of game balls that won a prize in the large winning opening 2103 after the large winning opening 2103 was opened was set in step S607. When the limit number (for example, 10 pieces) is exceeded (YES in step S804), the process proceeds to step S805 and the large winning opening 2103 is closed. Further, when the opening time of the large winning opening 2103 has not reached the set time (NO in step S803) and the number of winning balls has not reached the limit number (NO in step S804), End the jackpot game process.

On the other hand, if the big winning opening 2103 is not open in step S802 (NO), the number of times the big winning opening 2103 is opened by the opening / closing member 2106 is set by the number of opening for big hits set in step S607 or in step S608. It is determined whether or not the number of times the special hit opening has been reached has been reached (step S806). If it has not arrived (NO in step S806), the opening / closing member 2106 is controlled to open the big winning opening 2103 (step S807), and the big hit game process is completed. This makes it possible to make a large number of game balls win in the large winning opening 2103.

When the number of times the big winning opening 2103 is opened reaches the set number of times in step S806 (YES), that is, when the big hit game state ends, the processes of steps S808 to S813 are executed, and the subsequent lottery is performed. Set the game status for the game. Specifically, first, the jackpot flag is set to "OFF" (step S808), and it is determined whether or not the jackpot this time is a winning to activate the probability fluctuation function (step S809). That is, it is determined whether it is a probability fluctuation big hit including a special hit or a normal big hit. When the probability fluctuation jackpot is won (YES in step S809), the operation of the probability fluctuation function is started and the probability fluctuation state is set to a high probability (step S810). That is, the probability that the big hit will be won in the subsequent lottery is set higher than the normal time, and the time saving function is activated until the number of changes of the first special symbol or the second special symbol by the lottery reaches a predetermined number (specified number of times). ..

If the big hit is a special hit (YES in step S811), it is determined whether or not the hit is during the operation of the probability fluctuation function or the time saving function (step S814). Then, when it is not a special hit, that is, when it is a general probability fluctuation big hit (NO in step S810), or when the probability fluctuation function or the time saving function is already activated and the special hit is won, the special hit is won. The operation of the time saving function is started (step S812), and then the processing flag is updated to "0" (step S813). That is, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol or the second special symbol that fluctuates in the first special symbol display 1185 or the second special symbol display 1186 is shortened, and the opening operation of the movable piece 2105 leads to the second starting port 2102. Make it easier than usual to win a prize. On the other hand, when the probability fluctuation function and the time saving function are not in operation, that is, when neither the probability fluctuation state nor the time saving game state is generated and the special hit is won (NO in step S814), the time saving function is performed. The process proceeds to step S813 without operating.

On the other hand, in the case where the probability fluctuation function is not activated in step S809, that is, in the case of a normal big hit (NO), the operation of the time saving function is started and the specified number of operations in the time saving function is set (step S815). ), Then, the process proceeds to step S813. That is, the time saving function is activated until the number of changes of the first special symbol or the second special symbol by lottery reaches a predetermined number of times (specified number of times).

Next, in the small hit game processing, as shown in FIG. 201, first, it is determined whether or not the processing flag is "6", and if it is "6" in step S703 (YES in step S901). ), The processing after step S902 is executed, and if it is not "6" (NO in step S901), the small hit game processing is terminated. In step S902, it is determined whether or not the number of winnings of the game ball for the large winning opening 2103 has reached the preset maximum winning number (step S902), and if it has not reached the maximum winning number yet (NO). ), It is determined whether or not the large winning opening 2103 is open (step S903). When it is determined in step S903 that the large winning opening 2103 is being opened (YES), the opening time (elapsed time after opening) of the large winning opening 2103 reaches a preset predetermined time. It is determined whether or not it has been done (step S904), and if it has passed (YES in step S904), the opening / closing member 2106 is operated to close the large winning opening 2103 (step S905). After that, it is determined whether or not the number of times the large winning opening 2103 is opened has reached a predetermined number of times (for example, twice) (step S906), and if that number is reached (YES), the processing flag is set to ". It is updated to "0" (step S907), and the small hit game process is terminated.

If the opening time of the large winning opening 2103 has not reached the predetermined time in step S904 (NO), or if the number of opening times has not reached the predetermined number in step S906 (NO), the process of step S907 is executed. The small hit game process is completed without doing anything. Further, in step S903, if the large winning opening 2103 is not open (NO), the large winning opening 2103 is opened so that the game ball can be won (step S908). Further, in step S902, when the number of winnings of the game ball for the large winning opening 2103 reaches the preset maximum winning number (YES), it is determined whether or not the large winning opening 2103 is open (step). S909), if it is open (YES), the large winning opening 2103 is closed (step S910), and the process proceeds to step S907. On the other hand, if the large winning opening 2103 is not open (NO in step S909), the process proceeds to step S907 without executing the process of step S910. In step S907, the processing flag is updated to "0".

[3-8. Control processing in the peripheral control unit]
Next, the processing executed by the peripheral control MPU 4140a mounted on the peripheral control unit 4140 will be described with reference to FIGS. 203 to 207. FIG. 203 is a flowchart showing an example of sub-main processing, and FIG. 204 is a flowchart showing an example of 16 ms steady processing. FIG. 205 is a flowchart showing an example of the command analysis process (step S1100). FIG. 206 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control process (step S1200). FIG. 207 is a flowchart showing an example of the decorative symbol variation start processing (step S1210).

In the sub-main process, as shown in FIG. 203, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the peripheral control MPU4140a performs the initial setting process (step S1001). In this initial setting process, a process of clearing the peripheral control RAM 4140e mounted on the peripheral control unit 4140 is performed. Note that interrupts are prohibited during this initial setting process, and interrupts are permitted after the initial setting process. When the initial setting process (step S1001) is completed, the loop process for monitoring whether or not the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set is started (step S1002).

In this example, the peripheral control MPU4140a generates an interrupt every 2 ms and executes a 2 ms steady state process. In the 2ms steady processing, the processing of counting up the 16ms progress monitoring counter (adding 1 to the 16ms progress monitoring counter) is executed, and when the value of the 16ms progress monitoring counter becomes 8, that is, when 16 ms has elapsed, the 16 ms progress flag is executed. Along with setting T, a process of resetting (setting to 0) the 16 ms progress monitoring counter is executed. As described above, the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set (set) to "1" every 16 ms in the 2 ms steady processing, and is normally set (reset) to "0". When the 16 ms elapsed flag is set in step S1002 (16 ms elapsed flag T is "1"), after resetting the 16 ms elapsed flag (step S1003), 16 ms steady processing is performed (step S1004).

In this 16 ms steady processing, each decorative board 214,216, 254, 256, 286, 320, 322 provided in the liquid crystal display device 1900, the door frame 5 and the game board 4 based on the effect command received from the main control board 4100. , 430, 432, 3014 and the like, and the process of controlling the door frame 5 and the speaker 130, 222, 262, 821 of the main body frame 3 and the like are executed. When the 16 ms steady processing is completed, the process returns to step S1002 again, and the above-mentioned steps S1003 to S1004 are repeated every time the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set, that is, every 16 ms. On the other hand, when the 16 ms elapsed flag T is not set in step S1002 (16 ms elapsed flag T is “0”), loop processing is performed until the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set.

Next, in the 16 ms steady-state process, the sub-peripheral control MPU4140a executes the process of steps S1100 to S1600 as shown in FIG. 204. In the command analysis process of step S1100, the effect command received from the main control board 4100 is analyzed. In the effect control process of step S1200, the control process related to the liquid crystal display device 1900 is executed based on the variable display pattern command. Specifically, the notice effect is set, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is determined, and the like.

Further, in the sound control process of step S1300, the control process related to the speakers 130, 222, 262, 821 for generating the sound effect (for example, BGM) that promotes the effect of the effect is executed. In the light emission decoration control process of step S1400, the control process related to the light emission decoration by the decorative boards 214,216, 254, 256, 286, 320, 322, 430, 432, 3014 provided in the door frame 5 and the game board 4 is performed. Run. In the information output process of step S1500, an effect command is transmitted to the lamp drive board 4160. In the random number update process of step S1600, a process of updating the random numbers used for various settings in the effect control process (step S1200) is executed.

The process of steps S1100 to S1600 in the 16 ms steady-state process is completed within 16 ms. Even if it takes 16 ms or more from the start of the 16 ms steady-state process to the end of the 16 ms steady-state process, the 16 ms steady-state process is immediately performed from the beginning (in step S1100 described later) 16 ms after the start of the 16 ms steady-state process. Do not execute (from command analysis processing). That is, when 16 ms elapses during the execution of the 16 ms steady process, only the 16 ms elapse flag is set, and when it is determined in step S1002 that the 16 ms elapse flag is set after the end of the 16 ms steady process, the 16 ms steady process is performed. Start.

Further, in this example, the random number update process (step S1600) is executed in the 16 ms steady process to update various random numbers, but the timing (timing) for updating various random numbers is limited to this. is not it. For example, various random numbers may be updated in either or both of the loop processing and the 16ms steady processing in the sub-main processing.

Next, as shown in FIG. 205, the command analysis process first determines whether or not an effect command has been received from the main control board 4100 (step S1101). In this embodiment, when an effect command is received from the main control board 4100, other processing such as 16ms steady processing is interrupted to generate a command reception interrupt processing, and the received command is used for peripheral control of the peripheral control unit 4140. It is stored in the receive command storage area in the RAM 4140e. The reception command storage area is provided with a plurality of areas corresponding to the order in which the effect commands are received, and in the command reception interrupt process, the areas are stored in each area in the order in which the effect commands are received. In step S1101, the contents of the received command storage area are confirmed, and if the effect command is stored, the effect command whose reception order is earlier in the receive command storage area is read (step S1102).

Then, it is determined whether the read effect command is a variable display pattern command (step S1103), and if the read effect command is a variable display pattern command (YES in step S1103), the variable display pattern reception flag is set and the variable display pattern reception flag is set. , It is stored in the variation display pattern storage area in the peripheral control RAM 4140e mounted on the peripheral control unit 4140 (step S1104).

On the other hand, if the read effect command is not a variable display pattern command (NO in step S1103), it is determined whether the read effect command is a probabilistic jackpot command (step S1105), and the read effect command is a probabilistic jackpot command. If (YES in step S1105), the probability variation jackpot flag is set (step S1106). If the read effect command is not a probabilistic jackpot command (NO in step S1105), the flag corresponding to the received effect command is set (step S1107).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 206, the effect control process performs any of steps S121 to S1230 with reference to the value of the process selection flag indicating the progress state of the game.

In the decorative symbol variation start process (step S1210) executed when the process selection flag is “0”, a setting is made to start the decorative symbol variation display if the variation display pattern command is received. Specifically, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is determined according to the variable display pattern command and the probabilistic jackpot command, and the advance notice effect and the like are set.

In the decorative symbol variation processing (step S1220) executed when the processing selection flag is "1", when a variation stop command is received, a display command is transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit 4150 to stop the variation display of the decorative symbol. conduct.

In the big hit display process (step S1230) executed when the process selection flag is "2", the liquid crystal display device 1900 is displayed to indicate the start of the big hit game state or the big hit in response to the big hit start command transmitted from the main control board 4100. Control is performed to display the game state (for example, round display, etc.).

Next, as shown in FIG. 207, the decorative symbol variation start process first determines whether or not the variation display pattern reception flag is set (step S1221). The variation display pattern reception flag is a flag set in step S1104 of the command analysis process (step S1100) described above, and indicates that the variation display pattern command has been received from the main control board 4100. If the variable display pattern reception flag is not set in step S1221 (NO), it is determined that the variable display pattern command has not been received, and the process ends.

On the other hand, if the variation display pattern reception flag is set (YES in step S1221), the variation display pattern reception flag is reset (step S1222), and the variation display pattern based on the received variation display pattern command generates a big hit. It is determined whether it is a variable display pattern (whether it is a hit pattern) (step S1223a).

If the variation display pattern is not a hit pattern (NO in step S1223a), the stop symbol of the lost symbol is determined (step S1224). If the variation display pattern is a hit pattern (YES in step S1223a), it is determined whether the probability variation jackpot flag is set (step S1223b), and if the probability variation jackpot flag is set (YES), the probability variation jackpot symbol is set. The stop symbol of the non-probability change jackpot symbol is determined (step S1225), and if the probability variation jackpot flag is not set (NO in step S1223b), the stop symbol of the non-probability variation jackpot symbol is determined (step S1226). Further, the probability variation jackpot flag is reset when the jackpot gaming state is started in the jackpot display process (step S1230). The time when the probability variation jackpot flag is reset is not limited to this, and is reset, for example, when the variation display of the decorative symbol is stopped in the decorative symbol variation process (step S1220), specifically, when the variation stop command is received. This may be done, or the jackpot game state may be reset when the jackpot game state is terminated in the jackpot display process (step S1230).

In this embodiment, the first decorative symbol corresponding to the first special symbol 1: 1 and the second decorative symbol corresponding to the second special symbol 1: 1 and the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are used. A common decorative symbol string (hereinafter referred to as "common decorative symbol string") corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol is displayed in association with both of the above. The first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are composed of combinations of figures such as circles, crosses, and sankaku, and are combinations that are probable variable jackpot symbols, combinations that are non-probable variable jackpots (normal jackpots), and combinations that are small hits. , And combinations that are lost are preset. That is, if the variable display pattern is a hit pattern, one of a plurality of combinations set as the probable variable jackpot symbol of the first decorative symbol or a plurality of combinations set as the non-probable variable jackpot symbol is stopped. Determined as a design.

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU4140a is stored in the variable display pattern and the advance notice type storage area after executing the advance notice selection process for determining whether or not to execute the advance notice effect based on the advance notice determination random number (step S1227). A display command corresponding to the advance notice pattern and the stop symbol of the common decorative symbol sequence determined in steps S1225, S1226, and S1227 is set (step S1228). Then, the process selection flag is updated to "1" and the process ends (step S1229). The display command set in step S1228 is transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit 4150 in the information output process (step S1500), and the liquid crystal display is displayed based on the reception of the display command by the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a of the liquid crystal control unit 4150. The device 1900 starts executing the variable display of the decorative pattern.

Further, when the notice pattern stored in the notice type storage area is read in step S1228, the contents of the notice type storage area are cleared after reading the notice pattern. As a result, it is possible to prevent the advance notice effect based on the notice pattern determined when the change display of the previous decorative symbol is mistakenly started in the next change display of the decorative symbol.

[4-1. Functional configuration for games on the main control board]
Subsequently, a functional configuration related to a game such as a special symbol controlled by the main control board will be described with reference to FIGS. 208 to 211. FIG. 208 is a block diagram showing a functional configuration regarding the first jackpot lottery on the main control board. FIG. 209 is a block diagram showing a functional configuration regarding the second big hit lottery on the main control board. FIG. 210 is a block diagram showing a functional configuration regarding an advantageous gaming state generated according to the lottery results in the first big hit lottery and the second big hit lottery. FIG. 211 is a block diagram showing a functional configuration regarding a normal lottery on the main control board.

As shown in FIG. 208, the main control board 4100 has a first hit determination table 4501, a first hit symbol table 4502, a first hit time variation time setting table 4503, and a first hit time variation time setting table 4503 as a configuration related to the first big hit lottery. The table 4504 for setting the fluctuation time at the time of the first loss is stored in advance, and based on these tables 4501 to 4504, the winning / failing of the lottery in the first big hit lottery, the stop symbol in the first special symbol display 1185, and the fluctuation time. Is determined. The first hit determination table 4501 shows the relationship between the big hit determination random value and the hit / miss of the big hit or the small hit, and the winning ratio is different between the normal time and the high probability time. Further, the first hit symbol table 4502 shows the relationship between the big hit symbol random value and the stopped symbol in the first special symbol display 1185, and the jackpot symbol random values are divided into a plurality of groups, respectively. The range is associated with the lighting state of the two LEDs (first special symbol).

Further, the first hit time fluctuation time setting table 4503 is used when the result of winning or failing in the first big hit lottery is a big hit or a small hit, and the first variable time random number and the first special symbol display 1185 are extracted. The table 4504 for setting the fluctuation time at the time of the first loss is used and extracted when the result of the success or failure in the first big hit lottery is a loss. It shows the relationship between the random number for the fluctuation time and the fluctuation time of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display 1185. The process of selecting one of the normal table and the high probability table based on the gaming state is performed by the first lottery probability selection means 4505. Further, although not shown, the first hit design table 4502 is provided with a table for probability fluctuation big hit, a table for special hit, a table for normal big hit, and a table for small hit, respectively. A table corresponding to the type of winning determined by the first winning / failing determination means 4506, which will be described later, is selected.

Further, when the first start port sensor 3102 detects that the first start port 2101 has won a prize on the main control board 4100, the first hit determination is to extract a random number for big hit determination from a random counter (random number generation means). Random number extraction means 4507 and first hit symbol random number extraction means 4508 for extracting big hit symbol random numbers are provided. Further, a first random number extraction means for variable time 4509 is provided, which extracts random numbers for variable time based on random numbers for determination and random numbers for big hit symbols. Further, when the big hit determination random number is extracted by the first hit determination random number extraction means 4507, the first hit determination means 4506 for determining the success or failure of the jackpot using the first hit determination table 4501 and the first hit symbol. When the random number for the big hit symbol is extracted by the random number extraction means 4508, the first stop symbol determination means 4510 for determining the stop symbol in the first special symbol display 1185 is provided by using the first hit symbol table 4502. There is.

Further, when the random number for the variable time is extracted by the first random number extracting means 4509 for the variable time and the big hit is determined by the first hit / miss determining means 4506, the table 4503 for setting the variable time at the first hit is used. When the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is determined, while the random number for the fluctuation time is extracted and the first hit / fail determination means 4506 determines that the time is lost, the table 4504 for setting the fluctuation time at the time of the first loss is determined. The first fluctuation time determining means 4511 for determining the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is provided.

Further, on the main control board 4100, the first special symbol display 1185 starts to change the first special symbol, and after the variation time determined by the first fluctuation time determining means 4511 elapses, the first stop symbol is determined. The special symbol fluctuation control means 4512 that stops the fluctuation at the stop symbol determined by the means 4510, the hit / fail command regarding the presence / absence of the jackpot determined by the first hit / fail determination means 4506 before the start of the fluctuation of the first special symbol, and the first. A command transmission means 4513 for transmitting a control command including a variation display command corresponding to a variation mode (time) of a special symbol is provided.

Further, when the first start port sensor 3102 detects that the first start port sensor 3102 wins the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the main control board 4100 has a fixed number of balls (4 times). ) Is used as the upper limit, and the first reserved digestion means 4514 is provided, which counts and stores the first start storage number and repeatedly displays the variation of the first special symbol for the number of start memory. In other words, the first reserved digestion means 4514 is provided to wait for the execution of the first process based on the detection of the game ball by the first start port sensor 3102. Explaining the first reserved digestion means 4514 in more detail, the first reserved digestive means 4514 is provided with the first reserved digestive means 4514a and the first digestive control means 4514b, and the first reserved digestive means 4514a is the first. If the first start port sensor 3102 detects a prize in the first start port 2101 during the change of one special symbol or the second special symbol, the first start memory number must reach the upper limit value "4". For example, the value of the first start storage number is increased by "1", the first big hit determination random number and the first big hit symbol random number are extracted, and each of the extracted random numbers is used as the first special symbol random number storage means 4515 ( It is stored in the uppermost storage area in (see FIG. 212).

On the other hand, in the first digestion control means 4514b, when the fluctuation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped and the fluctuation of the new first special symbol becomes possible, the starting memory number for the first special symbol is ". If it is not "0", the first jackpot determination random number and the first jackpot symbol random number are read from the storage area corresponding to the start storage number [1], the value of the first start storage number is reduced by "1", and Each random value stored in each storage area n is shifted to the storage area of n-1.

Further, as shown in FIG. 209, the main control board 4100 has a second hit determination table 4521, a second hit symbol table 4522, and a second hit time variation time setting table 4523 as configurations related to the second big hit lottery. , And the table 4524 for setting the fluctuation time at the time of the second loss is stored in advance, and based on these tables 4521 to 4524, the winning / failing of the lottery in the second big hit lottery, the stop symbol in the second special symbol display 1186, and the stop symbol in the second special symbol display 1186, and The fluctuation time is determined. Since the configuration of each table is the same as the configuration of each table in the first big hit lottery, detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

Further, the main control board 4100 has a second hit determination random number extraction means 4525 that extracts a big hit determination random number related to the second big hit lottery when the second start port sensor 2127 detects a winning prize in the second start port 2102. And the second hit symbol random number extraction means 4526 that extracts the big hit symbol random number related to the second big hit lottery, and the second variable time random number extraction that extracts the variable time random number based on the judgment random number and the big hit symbol random number. Means 4527 are provided. Further, when the big hit determination random number is extracted by the second hit determination random number extraction means 4525, the second hit determination means 4528 for determining the success or failure of the jackpot using the second hit determination table 4521, and the second hit symbol. When the random number for the big hit symbol is extracted by the random number extraction means 4526, the second stop symbol determination means 4529 for determining the stop symbol in the second special symbol display 1186 is provided by using the second hit symbol table 4522. There is.

Further, when the random number for the variable time is extracted by the second random number extracting means 4527 for the variable time and the big hit is determined by the second hit / miss determination means 4528, the table 4523 for setting the variable time during the second hit is used. When the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is determined, while the random number for the fluctuation time is extracted and the second hit / fail determination means 4528 determines that the time is lost, the table 4524 for setting the fluctuation time at the time of the second loss is determined. A second variation time determining means 4530 is provided to determine the variation time of the second special symbol using the above. The second winning / failing determination means 4528 includes the winning limiting means 4528a, and the "special jackpot", which is a jackpot that does not give a specific profit to the player, is restricted so as not to occur.

Further, the special symbol fluctuation control means 4512 starts the fluctuation of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 1186, and after the lapse of the fluctuation time determined by the second fluctuation time determining means 4530, the second stop symbol. The variable stop is performed at the stop symbol determined by the determination means 4529. Further, when the second starting port sensor 2127 detects that the second starting port 2102 has won a prize during the fluctuation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the main control board 4100 has a fixed number of balls (4 times). ) Is used as the upper limit, and the second start storage number is counted and stored, and the second reserved digestion means 4531 for repeatedly displaying the variation of the second special symbol for the number of start memories is provided. In other words, a second reserved digestion means 4531 is provided that waits for the execution of the second process based on the detection of the game ball by the second start port sensor 2127.

Explaining the second reserved digestion means 4531 in more detail, the second reserved digestive means 4531 is provided with the second reserved digestive means 4531a and the second reserved digestive control means 4531b, and the second reserved digestive means 4531a is provided with the second reserved digestive means 4531a. When the second starting port sensor 2127 detects a prize in the second starting port 2102 during the fluctuation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the second starting storage number has reached the upper limit value "4". If not, the value of the second start storage number is increased by "1", the random number for the second big hit determination and the random number for the second big hit symbol are extracted, and each of the extracted random numbers is used as the random number storage means 4532 for the second special symbol. It is stored in the uppermost storage area in (see FIG. 212). On the other hand, in the second digestion control means 4531b, when the fluctuation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped and the fluctuation of the new second special symbol becomes possible, the starting memory number for the second special symbol is ". If it is not "0", the second big hit determination random number and the second big hit symbol random number are read from the storage area corresponding to the start storage number [1], the value of the second big hit symbol is reduced by "1", and the value is reduced. Each random value stored in each storage area n is shifted to the storage area of n-1.

Further, as shown in FIG. 210, the main control board 4100 is provided with five advantageous games that give the player an advantageous gaming state based on the lottery results by the first hit / fail determination means 4506 or the second hit / fail determination means 4528. It is equipped with state control means. Here, the advantageous gaming state includes opening the opening / closing member 2106 to enable the winning of the game ball to the large winning opening 2103, and the specific profit giving means 4540 or the predetermined profit giving means 4541. The opening / closing member 2106 is open-controlled by the attacker solenoid 2124 of the attacker unit 2100 by any one of the above.

More specifically, the predetermined profit-giving means 4541 sets the opening time of the opening / closing member 2106 to be a first predetermined time such that several (for example, 1 to 2) game balls can barely win a prize. By performing the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member 2106 at least once (twice in this example), a predetermined benefit is given to the player. As a result, a predetermined number of game balls can be won in the large winning opening 2103, but since the number of winning balls is extremely small, the profit received by the player is relatively small. On the other hand, the specific profit-giving means 4540 sets the opening time of the opening / closing member 2106 to a second predetermined time such that a plurality of (for example, 10) game balls can win a prize with a margin, and the opening / closing member. By performing the opening / closing operation of 2106 more times (7 times in this example) than the number of opening / closing operations when a predetermined profit is given, a specific profit is given to the player. As a result, a large number of game balls can be made to win in the large winning opening 2103, and the player can obtain a great profit.

Then, the main control board 4100 is provided with the first advantageous gaming state control means 4542 and the second advantageous gaming state control means 4543 as means for giving a specific profit by the specific profit giving means 4540, and the predetermined profit giving means 4541. As means for imparting a predetermined benefit, a third advantageous gaming state control means 4544, a fourth advantageous gaming state control means 4545, and a fifth advantageous gaming state control means 4546 are provided.

The first advantageous gaming state generated by the first advantageous gaming state control means 4542 is a so-called "probability fluctuation jackpot", and when the lottery result of the first hit / fail determination means 4506 or the second hit / fail determination means 4528 is the first result. appear. When this happens, the specific profit giving means 4540 gives a specific profit, and the high probability state setting means 4547 sets the probability that the specific profit is given in the subsequent lottery higher than usual. That is, it is in a probability fluctuation state with a high probability. In this example, in the jackpot determination table at the time of high probability, 60 jackpot determination values that are determined to generate the jackpot gaming state are set out of the 499 jackpot determination random numbers from 0 to 498. , The jackpot probability, which is the probability of a jackpot, is 60/499. On the other hand, in the normal jackpot determination table, 6 jackpot determination values are set out of 499 jackpot determination random numbers from 0 to 498, and the jackpot probability is 6/499.

Further, in the first advantageous gaming state, the change time of the first special symbol or the second special symbol which is changed by the first special symbol display 1185 or the second special symbol display 1186 is set by the first temporary short state setting means 4548. In addition to shortening the frequency, the frequency at which the movable piece 2105 of the second starting port 2102 is opened and closed (that is, the probability of winning in a normal lottery) is increased until the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol or the second special symbol reaches a predetermined number. By doing so, the ease of winning a prize in the second starting port 2102 is increased as compared with the normal time. In other words, it is in a time-saving game state.

The second advantageous gaming state generated by the second advantageous gaming state control means 4543 is a so-called "normal big hit", and occurs when the lottery result of the first hit / fail determination means 4506 or the second hit / fail determination means 4528 is the second result. do. In this case, the point that the specific profit is given by the specific profit giving means 4540 is the same as in the first advantageous gaming state, but in this case, the probability that the specific profit is given in the subsequent lottery. Remains low probability. That is, the probability fluctuation state does not occur, and the probability at the normal time is maintained. Even in this second advantageous gaming state, the time is shortened by the first temporary shortening state setting means 4548 until the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol or the second special symbol reaches a predetermined number after the specific benefit is given. By entering the game state, shortening the fluctuation time of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and increasing the frequency of opening and closing the movable piece 2105 (that is, the probability of winning in the ordinary lottery), the ball holding of the game ball is held. Suppress.

The third advantageous gaming state generated by the third advantageous gaming state control means 4544 is a so-called "special jackpot", and occurs when the lottery result of the first winning / failing determination means 4506 is the third result. In this case, first, a predetermined profit (a profit having a lower advantage than a specific profit) is given to the player by the predetermined profit giving means 4541. Then, for the subsequent lottery, the probability that a specific profit will be given is increased. That is, it is set to the probability fluctuation state as in the first advantageous gaming state. However, the time-saving gaming state is generated only when the gaming state before the advantageous gaming state is generated satisfies a predetermined condition. That is, when the third advantageous gaming state occurs when the game is not in the probability fluctuation state and is not in the time-saving gaming state, the probability fluctuation state is set without generating the time-saving gaming state. On the other hand, when the third advantageous gaming state occurs when the gaming state is the probability fluctuation state or the time-saving gaming state, the second time-saving state setting means 4549 is activated to generate the time-saving gaming state. There is.

The fourth advantageous gaming state generated by the fourth advantageous gaming state control means 4545 occurs when the lottery result of the first winning / failing determination means 4506 is the fourth result. In this case, the player is given a predetermined profit by the predetermined profit giving means 4541 as in the third advantageous gaming state. However, no new probability fluctuation state is generated for the subsequent lottery. It should be noted that the time-saving gaming state is determined whether or not it is added based on the gaming state.

The fifth advantageous gaming state generated by the fifth advantageous gaming state control means 4546 occurs when the lottery result of the first winning / failing determination means 4506 is the fifth result. In this case, giving a predetermined profit to the player by the predetermined profit giving means 4541 and giving a predetermined profit by the high probability state setting means 4547 is the same as the third advantageous gaming state, but this In the advantageous gaming state, when the third advantageous gaming state occurs when the time-saving gaming state is not generated, the probability fluctuation state is set without generating the time-saving gaming state. On the other hand, when the third advantageous gaming state occurs when the gaming state is the reduced working hours gaming state, the second reduced working hours state setting means 4549 is activated to generate the reduced working hours gaming state.

In this example, the winning ratios in each jackpot are distributed differently between the case of the first winning / failing determination means 4506 and the second winning / failing determining means 4528. Specifically, in the lottery result of the first winning / failing determination means 4506, the first big hit generated by the first advantageous gaming state control means 4542, that is, the probability variation state and the probability variation in which a certain number of time-saving gaming states are given. The jackpot is set to 22% of the total jackpot, and the second jackpot generated by the second advantageous gaming state control means 4543, that is, the normal jackpot to which a fixed number of time-saving gaming states are given without the probability fluctuation state being given. It is set to 45%.

Further, the third jackpot generated by the third advantageous gaming state control means 4544, that is, the special jackpot to which the probability fluctuation state and the conditional time-saving gaming state are given is set to 11%, and the fourth advantageous gaming state control means 4545. The fourth jackpot generated by the fifth jackpot, that is, the special jackpot to which the conditional time-saving gaming state is given without the probability fluctuation state being given, is set to 11%, and the fifth jackpot generated by the fifth advantageous gaming state control means 4546. That is, the probability fluctuation state and the special jackpot to which the conditional time-saving game state is given are set to 11%.

On the other hand, in the lottery result of the second winning / failing determination means 4528, the first jackpot generated by the first advantageous gaming state control means 4542 is set to 44% of the total jackpot, and the first jackpot generated by the second advantageous gaming state control means 4543 is set. The two big hits are set to 56%. The second hit / fail determination means 4528 is set so that the special jackpot, that is, the third jackpot, the fourth jackpot, and the fifth jackpot does not occur. Therefore, it is possible to surely prevent the probability fluctuation state from ending without giving a specific profit, and it is possible to prevent the game motivation from being significantly reduced due to sudden demotion.

In addition, the ratio of the first jackpot or the second jackpot that gives a specific profit from the first jackpot to the fifth jackpot is higher in the second hit / fail determination means 4528, so that it is mainly performed at normal times. In the jackpot lottery by the first hit / fail determination means 4506, it is possible to limit the occurrence of jackpots to which a specific benefit is given, while opening the opening / closing member 2106 in the attacker unit 2100 relatively frequently. On the other hand, in the big hit lottery by the second hit / miss determination means 4528, which is substantially effective in the short-time game state, there is a high possibility that a specific profit will be given, so that it is a normal big hit that does not have a probability fluctuation state. However, it is possible to suppress a decrease in motivation to play.

By the way, as shown in FIG. 211, the main control board 4100 has, as shown in FIG. A normal hit determination table 4552 and a normal hit / fail determination means 4553 are provided. The normal hit determination random number extraction means 4551 extracts a normal hit determination random number from a random counter (random number generation means) when the gate sensor 2402 detects that the game ball has passed through the gate portion 2401. Further, the ordinary hit determination table 4552 is divided into a table at the time of high probability and a table at the time of normal, and in the ordinary hit determination table at the time of high probability, 251 random numbers for ordinary hit determination from 0 to 250 are used. Of these, 250 determination values for normal hits are set, and the probability of normal hits is 250/251.

On the other hand, in the normal hit judgment table at the normal time, 0 judgment values to be normal hits are set out of 251 normal hit judgment random numbers from 0 to 250, and the probability of normal hits is 0/251. ing. Further, in the normal winning lottery at the time of high probability, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to 13.56 seconds, the opening time of the movable piece 2105 by the starting port solenoid 2121 is 1180 ms, the number of times of opening is 3 times, and the interval between openings is set. It is set to 512 ms. On the other hand, in the normal hit lottery at the normal time, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to 13.6 seconds on average, the opening time of the movable piece 2105 is set to 180 ms, and the number of times of opening is set to 1.

Further, when the normal hit determination random number extraction means 4551 extracts the normal hit determination random number, the normal hit / fail determination means 4553 together with the extracted random number and the normal hit determination value stored in the normal hit determination table 4552. Are compared, and if they match, it is determined to be a normal hit. At this time, the game state determining means 4554 determines whether or not the game state is a specific game state, that is, a time-saving game state, and if it is a time-saving game state, a table at a high probability is selected, and the time-saving game If it is not in the normal state, the normal table is selected. Therefore, even in the case of the first big hit generated by the first advantageous gaming state control means 4542, when the time-saving gaming state of a certain number of times is completed, the table at the time of high probability can be switched to the table at the normal time. ing.

Further, on the main control board 4100, when the winning / failing of the normal lottery is determined by the normal winning / failing determination means 4553, the normal symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the normal symbol display 1189, and the variable time (about 14 seconds or about 1 second). After the lapse of time, a normal symbol fluctuation control means 4555 for displaying the result of success or failure is provided. Further, when the normal hit is confirmed as a result of the determination by the normal hit / fail determination means 4553, the movable piece 2105 is opened after the fluctuation of the normal symbol is stopped, and the opening control means 4556 that makes it easy for the game ball to win the second starting port 2102. Is provided.

[4-1A. Game content by main board]
Next, the game content of the main board 4000 including the main control board 4100, the payout control board 4110, and the like will be described. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the player rotates the handle device 500 arranged at the lower right of the door frame 5, and the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 are generated by the game panel 1150. It is driven into the upper part of the game area 1100 arranged in front of the player, and the game by the game ball is started. The game ball driven into the upper part of the game area 1100 flows down in the game area 1100 on the upper left side or the right side of the center accessory 2500 depending on the driving strength.

The hitting strength of the game ball is determined by the ball launching device 650 by the launch control unit 4120 based on the detection signal from the rotation position detection sensor 512 after the rotation amount of the handle device 500 is detected by the rotation position detection sensor 512. The driving strength of the firing solenoid 654 in the above is controlled, and the more it is rotated in the clockwise direction, the stronger it can be driven. Further, in the game area 1100, a plurality of obstacle nails are planted in front of the game panel 1150 in a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions, and the game ball comes into contact with the obstacle nails so that the game ball flows down. While the speed is suppressed, various movements are given to the game ball so that the movements can be enjoyed.

When the game ball driven into the upper part of the center accessory 2500 flows down the left side from the substantially center in the left-right direction and reaches the upper shelf portion 2301 of the center accessory 2500, the upper shelf portion 2301 moves to the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500. Is induced. Then, when the game ball flowing down the left side of the center accessory 2500 enters the gate portion 2401 arranged on the left side of the center accessory 2500 and is detected by the gate sensor 2402, it is used for normal hit determination as a normal lottery result. Random numbers are extracted. Then, based on the normal hit determination random number, the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 1189 in the function display unit 1180 is variablely displayed (the normal symbol display 1189 composed of one LED emits light alternately in red, green, and orange). ), And the normal symbol extracted after a predetermined time (for example, between 2 seconds and 30 seconds) and based on the normal hit judgment random number (normal lottery result) is stopped and displayed (normal symbol display 1189 is either red or green). It emits light. The variation display of the ordinary symbol is performed based on the ordinary symbol variation pattern selected from the ordinary hit determination table 4552 (ordinary symbol variation pattern selection table).

Specifically, if the lottered ordinary random number is a "normal hit" random number, it will be stopped and displayed with a normal symbol that suggests a hit (ordinary symbol display 1189 emits green light), and the lottered ordinary random number will be a "normal loss" random number. In the case of, the normal symbol suggesting a loss is displayed as a stop (the normal symbol display 1189 emits red light). Then, when the normal symbol suggesting a hit is stopped and displayed, the pair of movable pieces 2105 that close the second starting port 2102 expands for a predetermined opening time (for example, between 0.3 seconds and 3 seconds). A game ball can be awarded to the second starting port 2102 by repeating a predetermined number of times (for example, 1 to 3 times).

The fluctuation time of the normal symbol and the expansion time of the movable piece 2105 at the second starting port 2102 are changed according to the first hit judgment random number and the second hit judgment random number (special lottery result). As a result of the special lottery, when "time saving hit (including normal time saving hit, high probability time saving hit, etc.)" is extracted, it is normal to change the fluctuation time and expansion time to a short time. The hit determination table 4552 can be replaced from the normal table to the high probability table.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, on the upper side of the center accessory 2500, an area where the game ball can flow down is provided from the center to the left side in the left-right direction, but the area from the center to the right side is along the outer circumference of the game area 1100. An arcuate area extending downward is provided, and when the game ball enters this area, it is sent to the lower side of the center accessory 2500 without having a chance to enter the gate portion 2401 or the warp entrance 2504. As the chances decrease, the movement of the game ball becomes less enjoyable. Therefore, the player will play the game by appropriately adjusting the rotation amount of the handle device 500 so that the game ball flows down the region from the center to the left side in the left-right direction on the upper side of the center accessory 2500, and the game ball is played in the dark clouds. It is possible to suppress the game operation such as hitting hard, to entertain the game by operating the original handle device 500 of the pachinko machine 1, and to prevent the hobby from deteriorating.

By the way, in this example, when the passage of the game ball is detected by the gate sensor 2402 while the normal symbol is variablely displayed on the normal symbol display 1189, the normal symbol during the fluctuation is stopped and the normal symbol is generated and extracted first. Until the result of the random number is confirmed, the random number for normal hit determination (including the normal symbol fluctuation pattern) extracted based on the detection signal from the gate sensor 2402 is temporarily stored and its display is suspended. The number of stored random numbers for normal hit determination (also referred to as the number of holdings) is displayed on the normal symbol storage display 1188. This ordinary symbol storage display 1188 is composed of four LEDs, and the number of each LED that lights up suggests the number of storages. In this example, up to four LEDs are stored and the number of holdings is displayed. It has become like. When the number of pending numbers exceeds four, the normal hit determination random number extracted based on the detection signal of the gate sensor 2402 is discarded.

Further, the game ball driven into the game area 1100 and flowing down the left side of the center accessory 2500 is played under the center accessory 2500 by the shelf portion 2301a of the side guide member 2300 and the shelf portion 2211a of the side winning opening member 2200. It is designed to be moved toward the center of the area 1100. Then, when the game ball wins a prize in the general winning opening 2201 arranged below the center accessory 2500 and is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3104, the payout control board 4110 is used in the main control board 4100 based on the detection signal. A predetermined payout command is transmitted to the player, and the payout control board 4110 controls the payout motor 744 of the prize ball device 740 in response to the payout command, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are generated in the upper plate 301. It is supposed to be paid out to.

If the game ball driven into the game area 1100 does not win any of the general winning opening 2201, the first starting opening 2101, the second starting opening 2102, and the large winning opening 2103, the game area 1100 It is provided at the lower end of the center in the left-right direction and is discharged downward from the rear side of the game board 4 from the out port 1151. Further, regardless of whether the game ball wins in any of the general winning opening 2201, the first starting opening 2101, the second starting opening 2102, and the large winning opening 2103, the winning game ball is returned to the game area 1100. It is designed to be discharged to the lower rear side of the game board 4 without any problem.

On the other hand, when the game ball flowing down the left side of the center accessory 2500 enters the warp entrance 2504 opening on the left side surface of the center accessory 2500, it is supplied to the upper first stage 2511 in the stage 2510 of the center accessory 2500. It has become so. Then, the game ball supplied onto the first stage 2511 rolls in the left-right direction on the first stage 2511, falls from the drop hole 2511c, and is supplied onto the second stage 2512. Also in this second stage 2512, the game ball rolls in the left-right direction and is discharged into the game area 1100 above the attacker unit 2100. When the game ball supplied to the stage 2510 enters the chance entrance 2513 on the rear side of the center in the first stage 2511, it is inside the game area 1100 from the chance exit 2514 arranged directly above the first start port 2101 in the attacker unit 2100. The game ball is released to the first starting port 2101 with a high probability. Then, when the game balls are received by the first start port 2101 and detected by the first start port sensor 3102, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are transmitted from the prize ball device 740 via the main control board 4100 or the like. However, it is designed to be paid out to the upper plate 301.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the first starting port 2101, the second starting port 2102, and the large winning opening 2103 are arranged side by side in the vertical direction, so that the game ball released from the stage 2510 can be generated. It is accepted to the first starting port 2101 and the like with a high probability, and when the second starting port 2102 and the big winning opening 2103 are acceptable, if the game ball is released from the stage 2510 or the chance exit 2514, it is accepted. Since there is a high possibility, not only the first starting port 2101 but also the second starting port 2102 and the big winning opening 2103 can be given a sense of expectation regarding the acceptance of game balls and can be enhanced. There is.

By the way, when the game ball enters the gate portion 2401 and is detected by the gate sensor 2402 and a "normal hit" is drawn as a result of the normal lottery, as described above, a pair of movable pieces that close the second starting port 2102. When the 2105 is expanded for a predetermined time and a prize can be won, and when the game ball is received by the second start port 2102 and detected by the second start port sensor 2127, the main control board 4100 or the like is used. A predetermined number (for example, four) of game balls are paid out from the prize ball device 740 to the upper plate 301.

Further, in the main control board 4100, when a game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 2101 and the second starting port 2102 and is detected by the first starting port sensor 3102 and the second starting port sensor 2127, the first starting is performed. At the mouth 2101, a predetermined first hit determination random number is extracted, and at the second starting port 2102, a predetermined second hit determination random number is extracted. Then, after the variation display of the special symbol displayed on the corresponding first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186 of the function display unit 1180 is started based on the extracted random number for hit determination, The special symbol corresponding to the extracted random number for hit determination is stopped and displayed as a special lottery result. When the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode suggesting "big hit" in the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186, the opening / closing member 2106 of the attacker unit 2100 opens / closes in a predetermined pattern. A special advantageous game state (for example, a big hit game) is generated, and a game ball is won in the big prize opening 2103 during that time, so that more game balls can be acquired. When one game ball wins a prize in the large winning opening 2103, a predetermined number (for example, 13) of game balls are paid out from the prize ball device 740 to the upper plate 301.

In these first starting port 2101 and second starting port 2102, the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display are also displayed in the same manner as the fluctuation display of the normal symbol due to the entry of the game ball into the gate portion 2401. When the special symbol is variablely displayed in 1186, or when the special symbol cannot be variablely displayed, such as during a big hit game as a special advantageous gaming state, the game ball wins a prize in the starting ports 2101, 1022 and the first starting port sensor 3102. When detected by the second start port sensor 2127, the first is extracted based on the detection signals from the first start port sensor 3102 and the second start port sensor 2127 until the variation display of the special symbol becomes possible. The one-hit judgment random number and the second hit judgment random number are stored and the display is held, and the number of the stored hit judgment random numbers held can be set to the first special symbol storage display 1184 or the first. (Ii) It is designed to be displayed on the special symbol storage display 1187. The first special symbol storage display 1184 and the second special symbol storage display 1187 are each composed of two LEDs, and the number of stored lights is suggested by the combination of the light emitting states of the LEDs that are turned off, turned on, and blinking. In this example, up to four of each are memorized and displayed. If the number of pending numbers exceeds four, the extracted random numbers for hit determination are discarded.

Further, in the main control board 4100, the first hit determination random number and the second hit determination random number, which are extracted based on the detection of the first start port sensor 3102 and the second start port sensor 2127, are previously stored. By collating with a predetermined predetermined hit determination table 4501,4521 (also referred to as a special symbol variation pattern table), the hit determination random number is any of "miss", "small hit", and "big hit". At the same time, it is also determined whether the "big hit" is "2R big hit" or "15R big hit". Further, the hit determination tables 4501,4521 also determine "probability variation time reduction hit", "probability variation hit", "time reduction hit", "probability variation time reduction hit" and the like.

Then, the first hit determination random number and the second hit determination random number extracted (lottery) triggered by the start winning of the game ball to the first start port 2101 and the second start port 2102 (special lottery result). In the case of "small hit", the main control board 4100 has an opening / closing pattern in which the opening / closing member 2106 of the attacker unit 2100 is closed for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 0.6 seconds). It is designed to be repeated multiple times (for example, twice).

On the other hand, when the extracted first hit determination random number or second hit determination random number is "big hit", the main control board 4100 opens the opening / closing member 2106 of the attacker unit 2100 for a predetermined time (for example,). , Approximately 30 seconds), or when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls satisfy any of the conditions for winning the large winning opening 2103, an opening / closing pattern (one opening / closing) that closes the opening / closing member 2106. The pattern is called 1 round) is repeated a predetermined number of times (predetermined number of rounds), 2 rounds for "2R jackpot", 15 rounds for "15R jackpot", and so on. It is designed to generate an advantageous advantageous gaming state. After the end of the predetermined number of rounds, the hit determination table is changed to a high-probability table according to the extracted hit determination random numbers for the “big hit”. Further, in order to set the time saving state or cancel the time saving state according to the random number for hit determination, the fluctuation time setting tables 4503, 4504, 4523, 4524 are appropriately changed.

[4-2. Functional configuration for games on peripheral control boards]
Subsequently, a functional configuration of the game including the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, and the common decorative symbol sequence on the peripheral control board 4010 will be described with reference to FIG. 212. FIG. 212 is a block diagram showing a functional configuration relating to the effect of the peripheral control board (mainly the peripheral control unit 4140 and the liquid crystal control unit 4150).

As shown in FIG. 212, the peripheral control board 4010 of this example controls the liquid crystal display device 1900 based on the control information command transmitted from the main control board 4100 when it is received by the command receiving means 4560. It has various functions for. That is, as the production table corresponding to the first big hit lottery, the first hit time production mode table 4661 and the first loss time production mode table 4562 are stored in advance, and based on these tables 4561, 4562, The mode of production in step production, development production, etc. is determined.

First, the effect mode tables 4661 and 4562 will be described in detail. The first hit time effect mode table 4651 is used in the case of a big hit (or a small hit), and the relationship between the random number for determining the effect (described later) and the effect mode (here, the effect pattern in the step effect or the development effect). It shows. Further, the first loss-time effect mode table 4562 is a table used in the case of loss, and shows the relationship between the effect determination random number and the effect pattern.

The peripheral control board 4010 is provided with a first effect random number extraction means 4563 that extracts a random number for effect determination from a random counter (not shown), and a first effect mode determination means 4564 that determines an effect pattern. .. When the first effect mode determining means 4564 receives a control command via the command receiving means 4560, the first effect random number extraction means 4563 extracts the effect random number, and the pass / fail command included in the control command is a big hit (or). In the case of indicating a small hit), the effect pattern is determined from the effect random number extracted by the first effect random number extraction means 4563 and the effect table 4651 at the time of the first hit, while the pass / fail command is issued. When it indicates a loss, the effect pattern is determined from the effect random number extracted by the first effect random number extraction means 4563 and the effect mode table 4562 at the time of the first loss.

The effect pattern determined by the first effect mode determining means 4564 is extracted from the effect pattern storage means (not shown) and sent to the first effect display control means 4565. The first effect display control means 4565 reads out the images of those effects from the image storage means (character ROM 4150d) and derives them to the liquid crystal display device 1900.

On the other hand, as a functional configuration relating to the production of the first decorative symbol, the first decorative symbol variation control means 4566 is provided. The first decorative symbol variation control means 4566 reads and changes the stop symbol from the first decorative symbol storage means (not shown) based on the control command received by the command receiving means 4560, and the variation included in the control command. The decorative design is stopped based on the time and the pass / fail command (that is, the lottery result).

Although the effect related to the first big hit lottery has been described above, the peripheral control board 4010 also has a functional configuration for performing the effect related to the second big hit lottery. Specifically, as the production table corresponding to the second big hit lottery, the second hit time production mode table 4567 and the second loss time production mode table 4568 are stored in advance, and these tables 4567 and 4568 are stored. Based on this, the production mode in the step production and the development production is determined. Since the effect mode tables 4567 and 4568 have the same configuration as the effect mode tables 4661 and 4562 corresponding to the first big hit lottery, detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

Further, on the peripheral control board 4010, in response to the second big hit lottery, the second effect random number extraction means 4569, the second effect mode determination means 4570, the second effect display control means 4571, and the second decorative symbol variation control Although the means 4572 is provided, detailed description thereof will be omitted because these configurations also have the same functions as the functional configurations corresponding to the first big hit lottery.

Further, the peripheral control board 4010 is provided with decorative symbol row variation display means 4573 and jackpot display means 4574. The decorative symbol sequence variation display means 4573 is a common decoration based on the output of the first decorative symbol variation control means 4566 and the second decorative symbol variation control means 4571, or based on the control command received by the command receiving means 4560. The symbol sequence is changed, and the common decorative symbol sequence is stopped in order based on the fluctuation time included in the control command and the pass / fail command (that is, the lottery result). In particular, a combination of decorative symbols (stop symbols) that have already stopped on the valid line before the final stop symbol row that is stopped last among the plurality of common decorative symbol rows is stopped is a specific decorative symbol. When the combination of is satisfied, the reach state is established by using the decorative symbol that has already stopped as the reach forming symbol.

Further, the jackpot display means 4574 relates to the lottery when the lottery result of the first jackpot lottery or the second jackpot lottery is the first jackpot or the second jackpot, that is, when it is a "probability variable jackpot" or a "normal jackpot". After stopping the fluctuation of the common decorative pattern row, it is displayed that it is a "big hit". If the lottery result of the 1st big hit lottery or the 2nd big hit lottery is the 3rd big hit, the 4th big hit, or the 5th big hit, the common decorative symbol row is displayed without displaying that it is a "hit". After the fluctuation is stopped, the production related to the lottery is finished.

[4-2A. Game production using an operation unit with a peripheral control board]
Next, a game effect using the operation unit 400 by the peripheral control board 4010 will be described with reference to FIGS. 213 to 230. FIG. 213 is an explanatory diagram showing the positional relationship between the rotation detection piece of the driven gear and the two rotation detection sensors due to the clockwise rotation of the dial operation unit in the rotation operation unit. FIG. 214 is an explanatory diagram showing the positional relationship between the rotation detection piece of the driven gear and the two rotation detection sensors due to the counterclockwise rotation of the dial operation unit in the rotation operation unit. FIG. 215 (A) is a list showing ON / OFF of two rotation detection sensors accompanying the clockwise rotation of the dial operation unit in the rotation operation unit, and FIG. 215 (B) is a counterclockwise direction of the dial operation unit. It is a list diagram which shows ON / OFF of two rotation detection sensors with rotation of.

Further, FIGS. 216 (A) to 216 (F) are explanatory views showing an example of a display screen of a liquid crystal display device (effect means, symbol display means) when the operation unit functions as an operation means, and FIGS. 217 (A). )-(E) are explanatory views showing an example of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device when the operation unit functions as an operation means, and FIGS. 218 (A) to 218 (F) show selection operations by the dial operation unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display screen of the liquid crystal display device at the time of deciding whether or not to make a substitute, FIG. 219 is a flowchart which shows selection operation detection processing by effect control processing, and FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the modification 1 of the operation detection process, FIG. 221 is a flowchart which shows the modification 2 of the selection operation detection process in an effect control process, and FIGS. 222 (A)-(D) are as movable effect means. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the functioning operation unit and the display screen of the liquid crystal display device corresponding thereto, and FIGS. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example with the display screen of the liquid crystal display device, and FIGS. 224 (A) to 224 (C) are It is explanatory drawing which shows an example.

Further, FIGS. 225 (A) to 225 (D) are explanatory views showing an example of an operation unit functioning as a movable effect means and a display screen of a liquid crystal display device corresponding to the operation unit, and FIG. 226 is a rotation in the effect control process. It is a flowchart which shows the advance notice control processing. 227 (A) to 227 (D) are explanatory views showing an example of an operation unit functioning as a movable effect means and a display screen of a liquid crystal display device corresponding thereto, and FIGS. 228 (A) to 228 (D) are diagrams. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the operation unit which functions as a movable effect means, and the display screen of the liquid crystal display device corresponding thereto. FIGS. 229 (A) to 229 (C) are explanatory views showing an example of an operation unit that functions as an operation explanation means and a display screen of a liquid crystal display device corresponding to the operation unit. FIGS. 230 (A) to 230 (C) are explanatory views showing an example of an operation unit that functions as an operation explanation means and a display screen of a liquid crystal display device corresponding to the operation unit.

First, the detection of the rotation direction and the rotation speed of the dial operation unit 401 in the operation unit 400 will be described. The rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b detect the rotation direction and rotation speed of the dial operation unit 401 by detecting the rotation detection piece 410c of the driven gear 410 that rotates integrally with the dial operation unit 401. ing. Further, in FIGS. 213 to 215, the rotation detection sensor 432a is described as "A" and the rotation detection sensor 432b is described as "B". Further, steps 1 to 4 shown below refer to four types of rotation positions of the dial operation unit 401 with reference to the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b, respectively, and when the dial operation unit 401 rotates, step 1 and step 1 The rotation position shifts sequentially to step 2, step 3, and step 4, and after shifting to step 4, the process returns to step 1 again.

First, when the dial operation unit 401 rotates clockwise, as shown in FIG. 213, as step 1, both rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b detect the rotation detection piece 410c of the driven gear 410, and then the dial. Due to the transition to step 2 accompanying the clockwise rotation of the operation unit 401, the rotation detection sensor 432a detects the rotation detection piece 410c, while the slit 410d of the driven gear 410 moves to the rotation detection sensor 432b and the rotation detection sensor. 432b shifts to the step of not detecting the rotation detection piece 410c. After that, due to the transition to step 3 accompanying the clockwise rotation of the dial operation unit 401, the slit 410d of the driven gear 410 moves to the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b, and the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b both rotate detection pieces. Move to the step where 410c is not detected. Then, due to the transition to step 4 accompanying the clockwise rotation of the dial operation unit 401, the slit 410d of the driven gear 410 moves to the rotation detection sensor 432a, and the rotation detection sensor 432a does not detect the rotation detection piece 410c. The rotation detection sensor 432b shifts to the step of detecting the rotation detection piece 410c.

On the other hand, when the dial operation unit 401 rotates in the counterclockwise direction, as shown in FIG. 214, as step 1, both rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b detect the rotation detection piece 410c of the driven gear 410, and then, as shown in FIG. Due to the transition to step 2 accompanying the rotation of the dial operation unit 401 in the counterclockwise direction, the slit 410d of the driven gear 410 moves to the rotation detection sensor 432a, and the rotation detection sensor 432a does not detect the rotation detection piece 410c, while rotating. The process proceeds to the step where the detection sensor 432b detects the rotation detection piece 410c. After that, due to the transition to step 3 accompanying the rotation of the dial operation unit 401 in the counterclockwise direction, the slit 410d of the driven gear 410 moves to the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b, and the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b both detect rotation. The process proceeds to the step where the piece 410c is not detected. Then, due to the transition to step 4 accompanying the rotation of the dial operation unit 401 in the counterclockwise direction, the rotation detection sensor 432a detects the rotation detection piece 410c, while the slit 410d of the driven gear 410 moves to the rotation detection sensor 432b. The rotation detection sensor 432b shifts to the step of not detecting the rotation detection piece 410c.

That is, the ON (with detection of rotation detection piece 410c) / OFF (without detection of rotation detection piece 410c) operation of the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b when the dial operation unit 401 rotates in the clockwise direction is shown in FIG. 215 (A). As shown in the above, the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b are both "ON" in step 1, and the rotation detection sensor 432a continues to be "ON" in step 2, while the rotation detection sensor 432b is "OFF". After that, after the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b are both turned “OFF” in step 3, the rotation detection sensor 432a continues to be “OFF” in step 4, while the rotation detection sensor 432b is turned “ON”. After that, the process returns to step 1 again, and the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b are both turned “ON”.

On the other hand, the ON / OFF operation of the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b when the dial operation unit 401 rotates in the counterclockwise direction is as shown in FIG. 215 (B). It is "ON", and the rotation detection sensor 432b continues to be "ON" in step 2, while the rotation detection sensor 432a is "OFF". After that, after the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b are both turned “OFF” in step 3, the rotation detection sensor 432b continues to be “OFF” in step 4, while the rotation detection sensor 432a is turned “ON”. After that, the process returns to step 1 again, and the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b are both turned “ON”.

As described above, the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b detect the rotation direction and the rotation speed of the dial operation unit 401 based on the ON / OFF in each of the steps 1 to 4 as described above. When the dial operation unit 401 constituting the unit 400 functions as an operation means, in other words, when the dial operation unit 401 is rotated by the operation of the player, the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b are in the ON / OFF state. By detecting the switching of, it is detected that the dial operation unit 401 has been rotated. At this time, the dial operation unit 401 rotates clockwise from the ON / OFF state of the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b before the rotation operation and the ON / OFF state of the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b during the rotation operation. It is designed to detect whether it is rotated or rotated counterclockwise. In this example, the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b are configured to detect the rotation direction and rotation speed of the dial operation unit 401. However, by counting the pulses of the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b, the dial operation unit 401 The rotation position can also be detected.

For example, in step 1, that is, when the state in which both the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b are "ON" is set to the state before the rotation operation, the rotation detection sensor 432a is set to the ON / OFF state of the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b during the rotation operation. When it is "ON" while the rotation detection sensor 432b is "OFF", it coincides with step 2 in the clockwise direction, so that it is detected that the dial operation unit 401 has been rotated in the clockwise direction. On the other hand, if the rotation detection sensor 432a and 432b are in the ON / OFF state during the rotation operation and the rotation detection sensor 432a is "OFF", the rotation detection sensor 432b is "ON", which coincides with step 2 in the counterclockwise direction. Therefore, it is detected that the dial operation unit 401 has been rotated counterclockwise. The clockwise or counterclockwise operation signal of the dial operation unit 401 detected by the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b is output to the peripheral control unit 4140. Then, the peripheral control unit 4140 (effect control means, operation effect control means, selection effect control means, display control means) receives the operation intention of the player based on the input operation signal, and displays this on the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the like. It is designed to be reflected in the production of.

Further, when the dial operation unit 401 functions as a movable effect means for rotating based on the drive of the dial drive motor 414, the drive of the dial drive motor 414 is transmitted as a rotational operation of the driven gear 410 via the drive gear 412. The dial operation unit 401 integrally provided by the rotational operation of the driven gear 410 rotates clockwise or counterclockwise. At this time, the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b detect the rotation direction and rotation speed of the dial operation unit 401 depending on whether or not the rotation detection piece 410c of the driven gear 410 rotating together with the dial operation unit 401 is detected (ON / OFF). Then, the detection signals by the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b are output to the peripheral control unit 4140, and the peripheral control unit 4140 that receives the detection signal of the dial operation unit 401 grasps the rotation direction and the rotation speed of the dial operation unit 401. It is designed to control the rotation operation.

Next, a function as an operation means and a function as a movable effect means by the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 will be described with reference to a plurality of examples. First, as a first example, as shown in FIG. 216, the liquid crystal display device 1900 (effect means, symbol display) is based on the jackpot determination accompanying the winning of the starting port (first starting port 2101, second starting port 2102). In the decorative symbol (design) that is variablely displayed in the means), as shown in FIG. 216 (A), the left and right decorative symbols 4601 and 4603 are aligned with the same symbol, and the reach mode is displayed (in the same figure, the left and right decorative symbols). (Example is the case where the decorative symbols are aligned with "7"), and then, as the middle decorative symbol 4602 continues to fluctuate, as shown in FIG. 216 (B), the left and right decorative symbols 4601 and 4603 are on the left and right upper end sides of the display screen. It moves to and is reduced and displayed, and it develops from normal reach fluctuation to super reach fluctuation.

Then, as shown in FIG. 216 (C), as a variation mode of the super reach, the middle decorative symbol 4602a (in the same figure, “6” in the figure) determines the loss with a symbol different from the left and right decorative symbols 4601 and 4603. Medium decorative design (exemplifies) and medium decorative design 4602b (in the same figure, "7" is shown as an example) that determines the jackpot with the same design as the left and right decorative symbols 4601 and 4603 are displayed side by side. An image 4605 in which the dial operation unit 401 rotates counterclockwise and a character 4611 "Please turn the dial operation unit" are displayed below the dial operation unit 400 (dial operation unit 401). A display prompting the player to rotate the counterclockwise direction is displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 216 (D), the effect display is performed in which the intermediate decorative symbol 4602a for determining the loss pushes out the intermediate decorative symbol 4602b for determining the big hit. Then, when the player rotates the dial operation unit 401 of the operation unit 400 in the counterclockwise direction, the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b of the operation unit 400 detect this (detection signal in the counterclockwise direction of the dial operation unit 401). To the peripheral control unit 4140), as shown in FIG. 216 (E), an effect display (operation effect) is performed in which the intermediate decorative symbol 4602b that determines the jackpot pushes back the intermediate decorative symbol 4602a that determines the loss. Finally, as shown in FIG. 216 (F), of the medium decorative symbol 4602b for determining the jackpot and the intermediate decorative symbol 4602a for determining the loss, the intermediate decorative symbol constituting the display result based on the jackpot determination. Completely extrudes the other inner decorative symbol, and the display result of the decorative symbol is derived to the liquid crystal display device 1900. In FIG. 216 (F), the medium decorative symbol 4602b of "7" completely extrudes the medium decorative symbol 4602a of "6" based on the judgment result of the jackpot, and the jackpot symbol of "7, 7, 7" ( The case where the specific display result) is derived is illustrated.

As a second example, in the decorative design that is variablely displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 based on the jackpot determination accompanying the winning of the starting port (first starting port 2101, second starting port 2102), FIG. 217 (A). As shown in FIG. 217 (B), the left and right decorative symbols 4601 and 4603 are aligned with the same symbol and the reach mode is displayed, and then, as the middle decorative symbol 4602 continues to change, the left and right decorative symbols 4601 , 4603 move to the left and right upper end sides of the display screen and are reduced and displayed, and when the normal reach variation develops into the super reach variation, an image for selecting the variation mode of the super reach is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900. As shown in FIG. 217 (C), the selection image of the variation mode is the option image 4621 of the variation mode A (the letter “A” is exemplified in the figure) and the option image 4622 of the variation mode B (the figure). (Example of the letter "B") is displayed side by side inside, and below that, the dial operation unit 401 rotates alternately clockwise and counterclockwise, and the operation unit 400 for selection determination is displayed. By displaying the image 4606 on which the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed and the character 4612 of "Please select with the dial operation unit", the variation mode can be selected by the rotation operation of the operation unit 400 (dial operation unit 401). Is displayed to the player.

Then, when the player rotates the dial operation unit 401 clockwise in order to select the variation mode A (at this time, the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is pressed by the player for selection determination). By detecting this by the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b of the operation unit 400 (outputting the detection signal in the clockwise direction of the dial operation unit 401 to the peripheral control unit 4140), as shown in FIG. 217 (D). While the option image 4621 of the variation mode A is blinking and displayed, the option image 4622 of the variation mode B is displayed off, and below that, the image 4605 in which the dial operation unit 401 rotates clockwise and "decision !!" By displaying the character 4613, a display is performed to notify the player that the variation mode A has been selected by the rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401. After that, as shown in FIG. 217 (E), the effect image 4625 of the super reach variation (indicated as “A” for convenience in the figure) is displayed in the variation mode A selected by the player. (Operation production).

That is, the function of the operation unit 400 as an operation means by the operation unit 400 is to have the player rotate the dial operation unit 401 in accordance with the effect display of the liquid crystal display device 1900, and reflect the rotation operation in the effect content to play the game. It is intended to suppress the decline in the interest of the.

By the way, when the operation unit 400 functions as an operation means for selection in which the operation unit 400 is an alternative as in the second example described above, the player performs the selection operation by the operation unit 400 on the pachinko machine 1 side (specifically,). , Control of the peripheral control unit 4140) can automatically determine in advance whether or not to substitute. The determination of whether or not to substitute the selection operation is performed by the display image for determining the operation substitute of the liquid crystal display device 1900 as shown in FIG. 218 (A). The display image for determining the operation agency is the operation unit 400 in a state where the winning detection to the starting port (first starting port 2101, second starting port 2102) is not performed for a predetermined time or more, such as during the demonstration display of the liquid crystal display device 1900. By pressing the pressing operation unit 405 of the above, the display is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900.

In the display image for determining the operation agency shown in FIG. 218 (A), the option image 4623 in which the characters "do not substitute for the selection operation" and the option image 4624 in which the characters "substitute the selection operation" are described are included. It is displayed side by side, and below it, an image 4606 in which the dial operation unit 401 rotates alternately clockwise and counterclockwise and the pressing operation unit 405 for selection determination is pressed, and "select by the dial operation unit". By displaying the character 4612 of "Please do", a display prompting the player to decide whether or not to substitute the selection operation by the rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401 is displayed.

Then, when the player rotates the dial operation unit 401 of the operation unit 400 in the counterclockwise direction in order to substitute the selection operation (at this time, the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is pressed by the player for selection determination. (Operated), this is detected by the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b of the operation unit 400 (the detection signal in the counterclockwise direction of the dial operation unit 401 is output to the peripheral control unit 4140), whereby FIG. 218 (B). As shown in the above, the option image 4624 of "substitute selection operation" is displayed blinking, while the option image 4623 of "do not substitute for selection operation" is displayed off, and the dial operation unit 401 is counterclockwise below the option image 4623. By displaying the image 4607 rotating in the clockwise direction and the character 4613 of "decision !!", a display notifying the player that the decision to substitute the selection operation has been made by the rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401 is displayed. It will be done.

After that, it is determined that the selection operation is performed on behalf of the display image for determining the operation agency, and as shown in FIG. 218 (C), when the image of the selection effect is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, the peripheral control unit 4140 The selection is automatically performed on behalf of the user based on the control. Specifically, in the image of the selection effect shown in FIG. 218 (C), the option image 4625 of the character A and the option image 4626 of the character B are displayed side by side, and the dial operation unit 401 is clockwise with the dial operation unit 401 below the option image 4626. The dial operation unit is displayed by displaying the image 4606 in which the pressing operation unit 405 for selection determination is pressed while rotating alternately in the counterclockwise direction, and the character 4612 of "Please select with the dial operation unit". The rotation operation of 401 prompts the player to select a character. At this time, the character B, which is the option image 4626, is displayed as a stronger character than the character A, which is the option image 4625, and it is more advantageous for the player to select the character B (option image 4626). It gives the impression that it can be (for example, it is easy to be a big hit).

Then, as shown in FIG. 218 (D), when the dial operation unit 401 of the operation unit 400 is rotated in the default direction under the control of the peripheral control unit 4140 (note that the counterclockwise direction is the default in the figure). (Example is the case where the dial operation unit 401 is set in the direction and rotated counterclockwise), the option image 4626 of the character B is blinking and displayed, while the option image 4625 of the character A is turned off and displayed below it. , The image 4607 in which the dial operation unit 401 rotates counterclockwise and the character 4613 of "decision !!" are displayed to notify the player that the character B has been selected by the rotation of the dial operation unit 401. Is displayed.

In the configuration shown in FIG. 218 (D), the default direction is set in the counterclockwise direction, but the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and the default direction may be set in the clockwise direction. In this case, when the operation unit 400 (dial operation unit 401) is rotated clockwise under the control of the peripheral control unit 4140, the character A option image 4625 blinks and is displayed as shown in FIG. 218 (E). On the other hand, the option image 4626 of the character B is turned off, and the image 4605 in which the dial operation unit 401 rotates clockwise and the character 4613 of "decision !!" are displayed below the dial operation unit 401. A display is displayed to notify the player that the character A has been selected by the rotation of the operation unit 401.

Further, the default direction is not limited to either the clockwise direction or the counterclockwise direction, and the default direction may be a direction according to the type of options displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900. Specifically, the default direction may be a direction that can be a game content that is advantageous to the player. For example, as an image of the selection effect, when the option image 4625 of the character A is displayed on the left side and the option image 4626 of the character B is displayed on the right side as in FIG. 218 (C), it is the same as in FIG. 218 (D). In addition, the dial operation unit 401 is rotated counterclockwise to select the option image 4626. On the other hand, when the option image 4626 of the character B is displayed on the left side and the option image 4625 of the character A is displayed on the right side as the image of the selection effect, the option image 4626 is selected as shown in FIG. 218 (F). The dial operation unit 401 is rotated clockwise. On the contrary, the default direction may be a direction as if the game content could be disadvantageous to the player.

Here, the selection operation detection process of the operation unit 400 by the peripheral control unit 4140 will be described with reference to FIG. 219. This selection operation detection process is a control performed at the time of selection effect of the liquid crystal display device 1900 as shown in FIG. 217 (C). In FIG. 219, first, it is determined whether or not the operation proxy flag is set (step S2001). The operation surrogate flag is a flag set when the option image 4624 of "substitute the selection operation" is selected and determined in the display image for the operation surrogate determination in FIG. 218 (A). When the operation agency flag is not set in step S2001, next, whether or not the dial operation unit 401 of the operation unit 400 has been rotated, in other words, whether or not there is a change in the operation detection signals by the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b. Whether or not it is determined (step S2002). When there is a change in the operation detection signal, the selection flag in the rotation direction based on the operation detection signal is set (step S2003), and the selection operation detection process is terminated.

That is, when the dial operation unit 401 of the operation unit 400 is rotated to change the operation detection signal, the dial operation unit 401 sets a selection flag in the direction (clockwise or counterclockwise) in which the rotation operation is performed. The selection flag can be used as a display indicating that the player has selected and decided one of the alternative options in the selection effect of the liquid crystal display device 1900 (for example, the display of FIG. 217 (D)) or the selected option. This is a flag for display control of the effect display based on the effect display (for example, the effect display of FIG. 217 (E)).

On the other hand, when there is no rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401 in the operation unit 400 and the operation detection signal does not change in step S2002, it is determined whether or not the detection effective time of the dial operation unit 401 that has been determined in advance has elapsed (step). S2004). Then, when the operation detection signal is not turned on even though the detection effective time has elapsed, the selection flag of the default rotation direction, which is a predetermined selection method, is set (step S2005), and the dial is dialed in the default direction. The operation unit 401 is rotated (step S2006: selection agency operation control means) to end the selection operation detection process. Here, the default rotation direction (default direction) is the rotation direction of the dial operation unit 401 preset by the peripheral control unit 4140 described above, which is advantageous for the clockwise direction, the counterclockwise direction, and the player. It is a direction that can be a game content, or a direction that can be a game content that is disadvantageous to the player.

Further, when the operation agency flag is set in step S2001, the dial operation unit 401 is rotated in the default direction (step S2007: selection agency operation control means). After that, by detecting the change of the operation detection signal by the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b, the selection flag of the rotation direction based on the operation detection signal is set (step S2008), and the selection operation detection process is terminated. At this time, as the process of step S2008, the player does not set the selection flag of the default direction rotated in step S2007 as it is, but the player rotates the dial operation unit 401 in the anti-default direction immediately after the rotation in the default direction. Then, the selection flag in the anti-default direction is set. That is, if the proxy for the selection operation at the time of the selection effect is determined, or if the dial operation unit 401 is not rotated even though the proxy for the selection operation at the time of the selection effect is not determined. , Rotate the dial operation unit 401 in the default direction. Then, when the dial operation unit 401 is rotated in the default direction, if there is no operation by the player, the selection flag in the default direction is set as it is. On the other hand, when the dial operation unit 401 is rotated in the default direction and there is an operation in the anti-default direction by the player, the player stops driving the dial drive motor 414 that rotates the dial operation unit 401. Priority is given to the rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401, and the selection flag in the anti-default direction is set.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the player leaves room for rotating the dial operation unit 401 in the operation unit 400 in the anti-default direction, specifically, the player operates the dial operation unit 401 in the operation direction (default). If you don't like the direction of rotation), the player can intervene and correct it during the rotation, or if the dial operation unit 401 moves unexpectedly (unexpectedly for the player), the rotation can be stopped. The dial operation unit 401 can be rotated while leaving room for it. That is, in the process of shifting from step S2007 to step S2008 described above, when the finger touch operation (manual operation) of the dial operation unit 401 by the player is detected by the operation detection means during the operation of the dial operation unit 401, In order to give priority to the finger touch operation of the dial operation unit 401 by the player, an operation priority control means for stopping the driving of the electric drive source is configured.

By the way, the selection operation detection process of the operation unit 400 is not limited to the configuration shown in FIG. 219, and may be the configurations of the modifications 1 and 2 shown below. As shown in FIG. 220, the selection operation detection process of the first modification first determines whether or not the operation proxy flag is set (step S2011). When the operation agency flag is not set in step S2011, whether or not the operation detection signal by the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b is changed by rotating the dial operation unit 401 in the same manner as in the selection operation detection process of FIG. 219. (Step S2012). When there is a change in the operation detection signal, a rotation direction selection flag based on the operation detection signal is set (step S2013), and "1" is added to the operation detection counter that counts the change in the operation detection signal. Then (step S2014), the selection operation detection process is terminated. That is, when the dial operation unit 401 of the operation unit 400 is rotated and the operation detection signal is changed, the dial operation unit 401 sets a selection flag in the rotation operated direction (clockwise or counterclockwise). Further, it is stored that the dial operation unit 401 has been rotated.

On the other hand, when there is no rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401 and there is no change in the operation detection signal in step S2012, it is determined whether or not the detection effective time of the dial operation unit 401 has elapsed (step S2015). Then, when there is no change in the operation detection signal even though the detection effective time has elapsed, the value of the operation detection counter counted in step S2014 in the past 10 selection effects is "5" or more. Whether or not it is determined (step S2016: operation ratio determination means). When the value of the operation detection counter is "5" or more in step S2016, in other words, when the player rotates the dial operation unit 401 five times or more in the past 10 selection effects, the dial operation unit is relatively frequently operated. It is determined that the player is a player who rotates the 401, and the process proceeds to step S2017 in order to extend the detection effective time of the dial operation unit 401.

The process of step S2016 is performed based on the storage in the operation storage area provided in the peripheral control RAM 4140e of the peripheral control unit 4140, and the operation unit 400 in the operation storage area up to the latest 10 times of selection effect. The determination process is performed by storing the presence / absence of the operation of the dial operation unit 401 in the above. That is, each time the selection effect is performed, the oldest data among the stored data of the past 10 times is deleted, and the presence or absence of the operation of the dial operation unit 401 by the player in the selection effect is stored as the newest data. It has become. Therefore, even if the players who play the game on the pachinko machine 1 are replaced, the player gradually adjusts to the player each time the selection effect is executed (whether the player frequently rotates the dial operation unit 401). The process of step S2016 can be performed based on the judgment criteria (depending on whether or not it is).

In step S2017, the dial operation unit 401 is rotated again, and it is determined whether or not there is a change in the operation detection signals by the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b. When there is a change in the operation detection signal in step S2017, the rotation direction selection flag based on the operation detection signal is set (step S2013) and the operation detection signal has changed, as in the transition from step S2012. "1" is added to the operation detection counter to be counted (step S2014), and the selection operation detection process is terminated. On the other hand, when there is no rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401 and there is no change in the operation detection signal in step S2017, it is determined whether or not the extended detection effective time (extended effective time) of the dial operation unit 401 has elapsed (extended effective time). Step S2018: means for extending the validity period). Then, when there is no change in the operation detection signal even though the extended effective time has elapsed, the selection flag of the default rotation direction, which is a predetermined selection method, is set (step S2019), and the dial operation is performed in the default direction. The unit 401 is rotated (step S2020: selection agency operation control means) to end the selection operation detection process.

Further, when the operation agency flag is set in step S2011, or when the value of the operation detection counter is less than "5" in step S2016, the dial operation unit 401 is rotated in the default direction (step S2021: selection agency). Operation control means). After that, by detecting the change of the operation detection signal by the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b, the selection flag of the rotation direction based on the operation detection signal is set (step S2022), and the selection operation detection process is terminated. At this time, as the process of step S2022, the player does not set the selection flag of the default direction rotated in step S2021 as it is, but the player rotates the dial operation unit 401 in the anti-default direction immediately after the rotation in the default direction. Then, the selection flag in the anti-default direction is set.

That is, the dial operation unit 401 is not rotated even though the substitution of the selection operation at the time of the selection effect is determined and the substitution of the selection operation at the time of the selection effect is not determined, and the past 10 times. If the number of times the player has rotated the dial operation unit 401 in the selection effect of is less than five times, the dial operation unit 401 is once rotated in the default direction. Then, when the dial operation unit 401 is rotated in the default direction, if there is no operation by the player, the selection flag in the default direction is set as it is. On the other hand, when the dial operation unit 401 is rotated in the default direction and there is an operation in the anti-default direction by the player, the player stops driving the dial drive motor 414 that rotates the dial operation unit 401. Priority is given to the rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401, and the selection flag in the anti-default direction is set.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the player leaves room for rotating the dial operation unit 401 in the operation unit 400 in the anti-default direction, specifically, the player operates the dial operation unit 401 in the operation direction (default). If you don't like the direction of rotation), the player can intervene and correct it during the rotation, or if the dial operation unit 401 moves unexpectedly (unexpectedly for the player), the rotation can be stopped. The dial operation unit 401 can be rotated while leaving room for it. That is, in the process of shifting from step S2021 to step S2022 described above, when the finger touch operation of the dial operation unit 401 by the player is detected by the operation detection means during the operation of the operation unit, the dial operation unit by the player In order to give priority to the finger touch operation of 401, an operation priority control means for stopping the driving of the electric drive source is configured.

As shown in FIG. 221, the selection operation detection process of the modification 2 first determines whether or not the operation proxy flag is set (step S2031). When the operation agency flag is not set in step S2031, the dial operation unit 401 in the operation unit 400 is rotated to change to the operation detection signal by the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b, as in the selection operation detection process of FIG. 219. It is determined whether or not there is (step S2032). When there is a change in the operation detection signal, the rotation direction selection flag based on the operation detection signal is set (step S2033), and "1" is added to the rotation direction counter based on the operation detection signal (step S2033). Step S2034), the selection operation detection process is terminated.

That is, when the dial operation unit 401 of the operation unit 400 is rotated and the operation detection signal is changed, the dial operation unit 401 sets a selection flag in the direction (clockwise or counterclockwise) of the rotation operation. Further, the rotation direction of the dial operation unit 401 that has been rotated is stored. There are two types of counters that count the rotation direction, clockwise and counterclockwise. By making the counter type different for each rotation direction based on the operation detection signal, the number of rotations in the clockwise direction and the counterclockwise direction are counterclockwise. The number of rotations in the clockwise direction is individually stored.

On the other hand, when there is no rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401 and there is no change in the operation detection signal in step S2032, it is determined whether or not the detection effective time of the dial operation unit 401 has elapsed (step S2035). Then, when there is no change in the operation detection signal even though the detection effective time has elapsed, the selection flag in the rotation direction having a large count value is set in the past 10 selection operations, which is a predetermined selection method (). Step S2036), the dial operation unit 401 is rotated in the direction of the larger count value (step S2037: selection agency operation control means), and the selection operation detection process is terminated.

Here, the rotation direction having a large count value in the past 10 selection operations is counted by the previous 10 selection operations from the present time in each counter of the clockwise direction and the counterclockwise direction counted in step S2034. It is the rotation direction of the counter that takes a large value after comparing each count value. Then, by performing such a comparison, it is determined in which direction the player has a high tendency to rotate the dial operation unit 401, and the dial operation unit 401 is rotated in that direction. That is, every time the selection effect is performed, the oldest data out of the past 10 count data is deleted, and the rotation direction of the dial operation unit 401 by the player in the selection effect is stored as the newest count data. It has become. Therefore, even if the players playing the game on the pachinko machine 1 are replaced, the player gradually adjusts to the player each time the selection effect is executed (the player rotates the dial operation unit 401 in any direction). The process of step S2036 can be performed based on the judgment criteria (according to whether the tendency is high).

Further, when the operation agency flag is set in step S2031, the dial operation unit 401 is rotated in the direction of the larger count value as in step S2037 (step S2038: selection agency operation control means). After that, by detecting the change of the operation detection signal by the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b, the selection flag of the rotation direction based on the operation detection signal is set (step S2039), and then the rotation based on the operation detection signal is set. "1" is added to the direction counter (step S2040), and the selection operation detection process is terminated. At this time, as the process of step S2039, the player does not set the selection flag in the direction of the large count value rotated in step S2038 as it is, but the player dials in the opposite direction immediately after the rotation in the direction of the large count value. When the unit 401 is rotated, a selection flag in the opposite direction is set.

That is, according to the configuration of the modification 2, the dial operation unit 401 is determined when the substitution of the selection operation at the time of the selection effect is determined, and even though the substitution of the selection operation at the time of the selection effect is not determined. If the rotation operation is not performed, the dial operation unit 401 is compared and determined in which direction the dial operation unit 401 was rotated by the previous 10 selection operations from the present time, and the dial is dialed in the rotation direction (default direction) where the number of rotation operations is large. Rotate the operation unit 401. Then, when the dial operation unit 401 is rotated in the default direction, if there is no operation by the player, the selection flag in the default direction is set as it is. On the other hand, when the dial operation unit 401 is rotated in the default direction and there is an operation in the anti-default direction by the player, the player stops driving the dial drive motor 414 that rotates the dial operation unit 401. Priority is given to the rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401, and the selection flag in the anti-default direction is set.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the player leaves room for rotating the dial operation unit 401 in the operation unit 400 in the anti-default direction, specifically, the player operates the dial operation unit 401 in the operation direction (default). If you don't like the direction of rotation), the player can intervene and correct it during the rotation, or if the dial operation unit 401 moves unexpectedly (unexpectedly for the player), the rotation can be stopped. The dial operation unit 401 can be rotated while leaving room for it. That is, in the process of shifting from step S2038 to step S2039 described above, when the finger touch operation of the dial operation unit 401 by the player is detected by the operation detection means during the operation of the operation unit, the dial operation unit by the player In order to give priority to the finger touch operation of 401, an operation priority control means for stopping the driving of the electric drive source is configured.

Next, three examples in which the operation unit 400 functions as a movable effect means will be described. As an example, in FIG. 222 (A), in the decorative design variablely displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 based on the jackpot determination accompanying the winning of the starting port (first starting port 2101, second starting port 2102). As shown, the left and right decorative symbols 4601 and 4603 are aligned with the same symbol, and the reach mode is displayed (in the same figure, the case where the left and right decorative symbols are aligned with "7" is exemplified), and the middle decorative symbol 4602. Is displayed in the variation mode of normal reach. At this time, each of the operation units 400 is in a stopped state. That is, the full-color LED 432d that emits light and decorates the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 and the full-color LED 430b that emits light and decorates the dial operation unit 401 of the operation unit 400 are in the off state, respectively, and the dial operation unit 401 of the operation unit 400 is turned off. The dial drive motor 414 that is rotationally driven is in a drive stop state.

After that, as shown in FIG. 222 (B), the intermediate decorative symbol 4602 that determines the loss (in the same figure, an example is the case where the intermediate decorative symbol 4602 of "6" is temporarily stopped and displayed) is temporarily stopped and displayed. NS. Further, even at this point, each of the operation units 400 is in the stopped state. Then, as shown in FIG. 222 (C), the operation unit 400 is driven to produce the display of the liquid crystal display device 1900 in a state where the lost symbol is stopped and displayed. Specifically, the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 and the dial operation unit 401 of the operation unit 400 emit light by the lighting / blinking drive of each of the full-color LEDs 432d and 430b, and at the same time, the operation is performed by the rotational drive of the dial drive motor 414. The dial operation unit 401 of the unit 400 rotates.

After that, with the effect driving of the operation unit 400 continued, the display of the liquid crystal display device 1900 shows that the left and right decorative symbols 4601 and 4603 are on the left and right upper end sides of the display screen as shown in FIG. 222 (D). Each of them is moved to and displayed in a reduced size, and the fluctuation of the intermediate decorative symbol 4602 is resumed, which develops into a super reach fluctuation. That is, the operation unit 400 is adapted to perform an effect that triggers the development from the normal reach variation of the decorative symbol on the liquid crystal display device 1900 to the super reach variation by the effect drive.

As a second example, in the decorative design variablely displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 based on the jackpot determination accompanying the winning of the starting port (first starting port 2101, second starting port 2102), FIG. 223 (A). As shown in the above, the left and right decorative symbols 4601 and 4603 are aligned with the same symbol and the reach mode is displayed, and after the middle decorative symbol 4602 changes the reach, the lost symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed (in the same figure, An example is the case where the lost symbol of "7, 6, 7" is temporarily stopped and displayed). At this time, each of the operation units 400 is in a stopped state. After that, as shown in FIG. 223 (B), the operation unit 400 is driven to produce the display of the liquid crystal display device 1900 in a state where the lost symbol is stopped and displayed. Specifically, the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 and the dial operation unit 401 of the operation unit 400 emit light by the lighting / blinking drive of each of the full-color LEDs 432d and 430b, and at the same time, the operation is performed by the rotational drive of the dial drive motor 414. The dial operation unit 401 of the unit 400 rotates.

Then, in a state where the effect driving of the operation unit 400 as described above is continued, the display of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is in the process of determining a big hit from the medium decorative symbol 4602 that determines the loss, as shown in FIG. 223 (C). The display is switched to the decorative symbol 4602, and the jackpot symbol is derived to the liquid crystal display device 1900 as the final display result (in the same diagram, the case where the jackpot symbol of "7, 7, 7" is derived is exemplified). That is, the operation unit 400 is adapted to perform an effect that triggers a switch from the lost symbol of the decorative symbol to the jackpot symbol in the liquid crystal display device 1900 by the effect drive.

As a third example, in the decorative design variablely displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 based on the jackpot determination accompanying the winning of the starting port (first starting port 2101, second starting port 2102), FIG. 224 (A). As shown in the above, the left and right decorative symbols 4601 and 4603 are aligned with the same symbol, and the reach mode is displayed. Is an example of the case where the non-probability change jackpot symbol of "6, 6, 6" is temporarily stopped and displayed). At this time, each of the operation units 400 is in a stopped state. After that, as shown in FIG. 224 (B), the operation unit 400 is driven to produce the display of the liquid crystal display device 1900 in a state where the non-probability variable jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed. Specifically, the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 and the dial operation unit 401 of the operation unit 400 emit light by the lighting / blinking drive of each of the full-color LEDs 432d and 430b, and at the same time, the operation is performed by the rotational drive of the dial drive motor 414. The dial operation unit 401 of the unit 400 rotates.

Then, in a state where the effect drive of the operation unit 400 as described above is continued, the display of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is switched from the non-probable variable jackpot symbol to the probabilistic jackpot symbol as shown in FIG. 224 (C), and finally. As a display result, the probability variation jackpot symbol (special display result) is derived to the liquid crystal display device 1900 (in the same case, the case where the probability variation jackpot symbol of "7, 7, 7" is derived is exemplified). That is, the operation unit 400 is adapted to perform an effect that triggers a switch from the non-probable variable jackpot symbol to the probabilistic jackpot symbol on the liquid crystal display device 1900 by the effect drive.

As described in the actual example, when the selection operation is performed on behalf of the player, it is sufficient to rotate the operation unit to the minimum necessary level so that it can be detected by the operation detection means, but the operation plays a part in the production. As a part, it is desirable to keep rotating so that the player can clearly recognize that it is rotating.

Further, the electric drive source for operating the dial operation unit 401 is not limited to the dial drive motor 414 including the stepping motor described in the embodiment, but is an electric drive source for rotationally driving the dial operation unit 401. If this is the case, it is desirable to use a stepping motor as an electrical drive source for the reasons shown below.

For example, it is expected that the dial operation unit 401 is often stopped by the finger touch of the player in the rotational drive state, but if the dial drive motor 414 is a stepping motor, it is slightly excited and rotated. If you do, you can easily step out, so you can ensure safety. Further, if the excitation for rotation is continued even after the dial operation unit 401 is stopped, the feeling is transmitted to the player's finger, so that a fresh surprise can be obtained for the player. Further, conversely, if the stepping motor is subjected to a weak excitation such that the dial operation unit 401 maintains a stopped state, a click feeling can be generated when the dial operation unit 401 is rotated, and the operability is improved. ..

Further, if a motor having a large detent torque (non-excitation holding torque) is selected, even excitation is not required. Further, for example, when a DC motor is used as an electric drive source, if the dial operation unit 401 is forcibly stopped in the rotational drive state, the armature voltage (counter electromotive force) disappears and a large current flows. It is not preferable in terms of heat generation and durability. In comparison, stepping motors do not have such concerns. For the above reasons, it is desirable that the electric drive source is a stepping motor.

By the way, in the function as the movable effect means of the operation unit 400 described above, the rotational operation of the dial operation unit 401 develops the reach fluctuation, switches from the lost symbol to the jackpot symbol, and changes from the non-probable variable jackpot symbol to the probabilistic jackpot symbol. By switching and performing as each effect trigger, as a result, it functions as a notice effect. Therefore, as a preliminary effect of such an operation unit 400, when the reach variation develops, the player may be made to recognize the jackpot reliability of the reach variation developed by the mode of the rotational operation of the dial operation unit 401. The configuration will be described with reference to FIGS. 225 and 226.

First, as shown in FIG. 225 (A), after the left and right decorative symbols 4601 and 4603 are aligned with the same symbol and the reach mode is displayed (in the same figure, when the left and right decorative symbols are aligned with "7"). (Example), the middle decorative symbol 4602 is displayed in a variable mode of normal reach to determine the loss (in the same figure, the case where the middle decorative symbol 4602 of "6" is temporarily stopped and displayed is exemplified). Is temporarily stopped and displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 225 (B), the operation unit 400 is driven to produce the display of the liquid crystal display device 1900 in a state where the lost symbol is stopped and displayed. Specifically, the pressing operation unit 405 and the dial operation unit 401 of the operation unit 400 emit light by driving the lighting / blinking of each of the full-color LEDs 432d and 430b, and at the same time, the dial operation unit 401 is driven by the rotation of the dial drive motor 414. Rotate. At the same time as the effect drive of the operation unit 400 is started, the characters 4614 of "Please stop the rotation of the dial operation unit" are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, and the player can perform the dial operation. It is designed to encourage the rotation operation of the unit 401 to be stopped.

Then, when the developing reach fluctuation has low jackpot reliability, in other words, when it develops from the normal reach fluctuation to the long reach fluctuation (first production mode), as shown in FIG. 225 (C), the dial during the rotation operation. When the player grabs the operation unit 401 with his / her hand H and forcibly stops the rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401, the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b of the operation unit 400 detect this, and the operation unit 400 is produced. The drive is stopped (first aspect motion control means). Specifically, by stopping the lighting / blinking drive of each of the full-color LEDs 432d and 430b, the light emission of the pressing operation unit 405 and the dial operation unit 401 is stopped, and at the same time, the rotational drive of the dial drive motor 414 is stopped. Stops the rotation of the dial operation unit 401 with. Along with this, in the display of the liquid crystal display device 1900, the fluctuation of the middle decorative symbol 4602 is resumed without the left and right decorative symbols 4601 and 4603 moving to the left and right upper end sides of the display screen, and the jackpot reliability is low. Develops into long reach fluctuations.

On the other hand, when the developing reach fluctuation has high jackpot reliability, in other words, when it develops from the normal reach fluctuation to the super reach fluctuation (second production mode), as shown in FIG. 225 (D), the dial during the rotation operation. When the player grabs the operation unit 401 with his / her hand H, the rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401 is forcibly stopped. However, in this case, even if the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b of the operation unit 400 detect this, the effect drive of the operation unit 400 is continued (second aspect operation control means). As a result, the pressing operation unit 405 and the dial operation unit 401 continue to emit light. Further, since the player continues to forcibly press and hold the dial operation unit 401 during the rotation operation by hand H, the player receives vibration from the dial drive motor 414 that drives the dial operation unit 401. It should be noted that such vibration of the dial drive motor 414 can be felt only by the player who touches the dial operation unit 401.

Along with this, the display of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is reduced and displayed by moving the left and right decorative symbols 4601 and 4603 to the left and right upper end sides of the display screen, respectively, and the fluctuation of the medium decorative symbol 4602 is resumed, resulting in a big hit. It develops into a highly reliable super reach fluctuation. That is, the operation unit 400 foretells the development from the normal reach fluctuation of the decorative symbol in the liquid crystal display device 1900 by its effect drive (rotational operation), and at the same time, the player performs the rotational operation while grasping the dial operation unit 401. It is designed to announce whether or not the jackpot reliability of the reach fluctuation that develops depending on whether or not it continues is high. Further, the advance notice from the normal reach fluctuation of this decorative pattern cannot be known unless the player touches the dial operation unit 401. Therefore, the player can select whether or not to receive the advance notice by touching or not touching the dial operation unit 401, and as a result, the range of ways to enjoy the game is widened.

Here, the rotation advance notice control process of the operation unit 400 by the peripheral control unit 4140 will be described with reference to FIG. 226. In FIG. 226, the peripheral control unit 4140 first determines whether or not a rotation notice command has been received from the main control board 4100 side (step S2051). The rotation notice command is issued from the main control board 4100 side to the peripheral control unit 4140 side when executing the notice effect of rotating the dial operation unit 401 in the operation unit 400 according to the reach fluctuation of the decorative symbol on the liquid crystal display device 1900. It is a command signal to be sent. If the rotation notice command is not received in step S2051, the rotation notice control process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the rotation notice command is received in step S2051, the peripheral control unit 4140 drives and controls the dial drive motor 414 to rotate the dial operation unit 401 (step S2052). At this time, as a notice of rotation of the dial operation unit 401, the full-color LED 430b is turned on and blinking to drive the dial operation unit 401 to emit light.

Next, it is determined whether or not the dial operation unit 401 continues the rotation operation, in other words, whether or not there is a change in the operation detection signals by the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b (step S2053). When the player continues to rotate the dial operation unit 401 without grasping the dial operation unit 401 in step S2053, that is, when there is a change in the operation detection signal, the dial operation is performed as a warning effect due to the reach fluctuation. It is determined whether or not the rotation control time (for example, 10 seconds) of the unit 401 has elapsed (step S2054). If the player does not stop the rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401 even after the rotation control time of the dial operation unit 401 has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S2057 as it is, and the rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401 and the light emission decoration are performed. It is stopped and the rotation notice control process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the player grabs the dial operation unit 401 in step S2053 and the rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401 is stopped, that is, when there is no change in the operation detection signal, the rotation of the dial operation unit 401 is next. It is determined whether or not the reach variation accompanied by the advance notice is a super reach variation with high jackpot reliability (step S2055). The determination in step S2055 is whether or not the fluctuation pattern command sent from the main control board 4100 side to the peripheral control unit 4140 side is a command for super reach fluctuation with high jackpot reliability accompanied by a rotation notice of the dial operation unit 401. (It is a command of long reach fluctuation with low jackpot reliability accompanied by a rotation notice of the dial operation unit 401). When the fluctuation pattern command is not a super reach fluctuation command but a long reach fluctuation command with low jackpot reliability in step S2055, the process proceeds directly to step S2057 to stop the rotation operation and light emission decoration of the dial operation unit 401. The rotation notice control process is terminated.

That is, when the rotation notice of the operation unit 400 is given as a notice effect due to the long reach fluctuation with low jackpot reliability, when the player grabs the dial operation unit 401 and stops the rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401, the dial is dialed. When the player stops the rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401 without waiting for the rotation control time (for example, 10 seconds) of the operation unit 401, the drive of the dial drive motor 414 and the full-color LED 430b is stopped to operate the dial. The rotation notice by the part 401 is finished.

Further, when the fluctuation pattern command is a command of super reach fluctuation with high jackpot reliability in step S2055, it is determined whether or not the rotation control time (for example, 10 seconds) of the dial operation unit 401 has elapsed (step S2056). .. Then, when the rotation control time of the dial operation unit 401 elapses, the process proceeds to step S157 to stop the rotation operation and the light emitting decoration of the dial operation unit 401, and end the rotation advance notice control process. That is, when the rotation notice of the dial operation unit 401 is given as a notice effect accompanying the super reach fluctuation with high jackpot reliability, even if the player grabs the dial operation unit 401 and stops the rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401. At that time, the rotation notice of the dial operation unit 401 is continued, and when the rotation control time (for example, 10 seconds) of the dial operation unit 401 elapses, the drive of the dial drive motor 414 and the full-color LED 430b is stopped, and the dial operation unit 401 is operated. It is supposed to end the rotation notice by 401.

In the above-mentioned rotation notice of the dial operation unit 401, the player is made to recognize the jackpot reliability of the developing reach fluctuation in the mode after the player stops the rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401. However, such a configuration may be used to make the player recognize whether or not there is a switch from the lost symbol to the jackpot symbol, or whether or not there is a switch from the non-probable variable jackpot symbol to the probabilistic jackpot symbol. This will be described with reference to FIGS. 227 and 228.

First, as a configuration for the player to recognize whether or not there is a switch from the lost symbol to the jackpot symbol, as shown in FIG. 227 (A), the left and right decorative symbols 4601 and 4603 are aligned with the same symbol and the reach mode is displayed. After that (in the figure, an example is the case where the left and right decorative symbols are aligned with "7"), the medium decorative symbol 4602 is displayed in the variation mode of the normal reach to determine the loss (in the same figure). (Example) in the case where the intermediate decorative symbol 4602 of "6" is temporarily stopped and displayed) is temporarily stopped and displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 227 (B), the operation unit 400 is driven to produce the display of the liquid crystal display device 1900 in a state where the lost symbol is stopped and displayed. Specifically, the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 and the dial operation unit 401 of the operation unit 400 emit light by the lighting / blinking drive of each of the full-color LEDs 432d and 430b, and at the same time, the operation is performed by the rotational drive of the dial drive motor 414. The dial operation unit 401 of the unit 400 rotates. At the same time as the effect drive of the operation unit 400 is started, the characters 4614 of "Please stop the rotation of the dial operation unit" are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, and the player can perform the dial operation. It is designed to encourage the rotation operation of the unit 401 to be stopped.

Then, when there is no switching from the lost symbol to the jackpot symbol (first effect mode), as shown in FIG. 227 (C), the player grasps the dial operation unit 401 during the rotation operation with his / her hand H. When the rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401 is forcibly stopped, the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b of the operation unit 400 detect this and stop the effect drive of the operation unit 400 (first aspect operation control means). .. Specifically, by stopping the lighting / blinking drive of each of the full-color LEDs 432d and 430b, the light emission of the pressing operation unit 405 and the dial operation unit 401 is stopped, and at the same time, the rotational drive of the dial drive motor 414 is stopped. Stops the rotation of the dial operation unit 401 with. Further, in this case, in the display of the liquid crystal display device 1900, the lost symbol is derived as the final display result as it is without changing the stop result of the left / middle / right decorative symbols 4601, 4602, 4603 (the same figure). In some cases, the case where the lost symbol of "7, 6, 7" is derived as the final display result is exemplified).

On the other hand, when there is a switch from the lost symbol to the jackpot symbol (second effect mode), as shown in FIG. 227 (D), when the player grabs the dial operation unit 401 during the rotation operation with his / her hand H. , The rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401 is forcibly stopped. However, in this case, even if the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b of the operation unit 400 detect this, the effect drive of the operation unit 400 is continued (second aspect operation control means). As a result, the pressing operation unit 405 and the dial operation unit 401 continue to emit light. Further, since the player continues to forcibly press and hold the dial operation unit 401 during the rotation operation by hand H, the player receives vibration from the dial drive motor 414 that drives the dial operation unit 401. It should be noted that such vibration of the dial drive motor 414 can be felt only by the player who touches the dial operation unit 401. Along with this, in the display of the liquid crystal display device 1900, the stop result of the middle decorative symbol 4602 is switched, and the jackpot symbol is derived as the final display result (in the figure, "7, 7, 7". An example of the case where the jackpot symbol of "" is derived as the final display result). Further, the notice of switching to the jackpot symbol cannot be known unless the player touches the dial operation unit 401. Therefore, the player can select whether or not to receive the advance notice by touching or not touching the dial operation unit 401, and as a result, the range of ways to enjoy the game is widened.

Next, as a configuration for the player to recognize whether or not there is a switch from the non-probability jackpot symbol to the probabilistic jackpot symbol, as shown in FIG. 228 (A), the left and right decorative symbols 4601 and 4603 are aligned with the same symbol and reach. The mode is displayed, and the non-probability change jackpot symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed after the medium decorative symbol 4602 changes its reach (in the same figure, the non-probability variation jackpot symbol of "6.6.6" is temporarily stopped and displayed. Example). At this time, each of the operation units 400 is in a stopped state. After that, as shown in FIG. 228 (B), the operation unit 400 is driven to produce the display of the liquid crystal display device 1900 in a state where the non-probability variable jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed. Specifically, the pressing operation unit 405 and the dial operation unit 401 of the operation unit 400 emit light by driving the lighting / blinking of each of the full-color LEDs 432d and 430b, and at the same time, the dial operation unit 401 is driven by the rotation of the dial drive motor 414. Rotate. At the same time as the effect drive of the operation unit 400 is started, the characters 4614 of "Please stop the rotation of the dial operation unit" are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, and the player can perform the dial operation. It is designed to urge the rotation operation of the unit 401 to be stopped.

Then, when there is no switching from the non-probability change jackpot symbol to the probability variation jackpot symbol (first effect mode), as shown in FIG. 228 (C), the player hands the dial operation unit 401 during the rotation operation. When the rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401 is forcibly stopped, the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b of the operation unit 400 detect this and stop the effect drive of the operation unit 400 (first aspect operation). Control means). Specifically, by stopping the lighting / blinking drive of each of the full-color LEDs 432d and 430b, the light emission of the pressing operation unit 405 and the dial operation unit 401 is stopped, and at the same time, the rotational drive of the dial drive motor 414 is stopped. Stops the rotation of the dial operation unit 401 with. Further, in this case, in the display of the liquid crystal display device 1900, the non-probability variable jackpot symbol is derived as the final display result without changing the stop result of the left / middle / right decorative symbols 4601, 4602, 4603 (). The figure exemplifies the case where the non-probability variable jackpot symbol of "6, 6, 6" is derived as the final display result).

On the other hand, when there is a switch from the non-probability jackpot symbol to the probabilistic jackpot symbol (second effect mode), as shown in FIG. 228 (D), the player hands the dial operation unit 401 during the rotation operation. When gripped with, the rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401 is forcibly stopped. However, in this case, even if the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b of the operation unit 400 detect this, the effect drive of the operation unit 400 is continued (second aspect operation control means). As a result, the pressing operation unit 405 and the dial operation unit 401 continue to emit light. Further, since the player continues to forcibly press and hold the dial operation unit 401 during the rotation operation by hand H, the player receives vibration from the dial drive motor 414 that drives the dial operation unit 401.

It should be noted that such vibration of the dial drive motor 414 can be felt only by the player who touches the dial operation unit 401. Along with this, the display of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is switched between the stop results of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols 4601, 4602, 4603, and the probabilistic jackpot symbol is derived as the final display result (the figure). In some cases, the probabilistic jackpot symbol of "7, 7, 7" is derived as the final display result). Further, the notice of switching to the probabilistic jackpot symbol cannot be known unless the player touches the dial operation unit 401. Therefore, the player can select whether or not to receive the advance notice by touching or not touching the dial operation unit 401, and as a result, the range of ways to enjoy the game is widened.

Further, when the operation unit 400 functions as an alternative operation means at the time of selection effect, the dial operation unit 401 is rotated according to the display of the liquid crystal display device 1900 to rotate the dial operation unit 401 at the time of selection effect. The operation method may be explained to the player in an easy-to-understand manner, and the configuration thereof will be described with reference to FIG. 229.

First, as shown in FIG. 229 (A), as the display of the liquid crystal display device 1900 at the time of the selection effect, an image for selecting the variation mode of the super reach is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900. Specifically, the option image 4621 of the variation mode A (the letter "A" is exemplified in the figure) and the option image 4622 of the variation mode B (the letter "B" is exemplified in the figure). Is displayed side by side, and below that, an image 4606 in which the dial operation unit 401 rotates alternately in the clockwise direction and the counterclockwise direction and the pressing operation unit 405 for selection determination is pressed, and "dial operation unit". By displaying the character 4612 of "Please select with", the player is prompted to select the variation mode by the rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401.

After that, as shown in FIG. 229 (B), the dial operation unit 401 rotates clockwise and the operation unit 400 for selection determination is pressed below the option images 4621 and 4622 of the variation modes A and B. By displaying the image 4608 on which the unit 405 is pressed and the character 4615 of "when selecting" A "", the dial operation unit 401 is rotated clockwise when the variation mode A is selected. It is explained to the player that the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed. Further, at this time, the dial operation unit 401 is actually rotated clockwise by the drive of the dial drive motor 414, similarly to the image 4608 of the dial operation unit 401 that rotates clockwise, and further, the dial drive motor 414. The dial operation unit 401 is lightly decorated by lighting / blinking the full-color LED 430b so that the player can recognize the rotational operation of the clock (operation demonstration control means).

After that, as shown in FIG. 229 (C), the dial operation unit 401 rotates counterclockwise and the operation unit 400 for selection determination is located below the option images 4621 and 4622 of the variation modes A and B. The image 4609 on which the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed and the character 4616 of "when" B "is selected" are displayed, so that the dial operation unit 401 is turned counterclockwise when the variation mode B is selected. It is explained to the player that the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed by the rotation operation. Further, at this time, the dial operation unit 401 is actually rotated in the counterclockwise direction by the drive of the dial drive motor 414, similarly to the image 4608 of the dial operation unit 401 that rotates in the counterclockwise direction, and further, this dial drive is further performed. The dial operation unit 401 is lightly decorated by lighting / blinking the full-color LED 430b so that the player can recognize the rotational operation of the motor 414 (operation demonstration control means).

That is, according to the above configuration, when the selection effect is executed by the liquid crystal display device 1900, the player is explained to the player how to select the option by the display of the liquid crystal display device 1900, and the dial operation unit is the selection method. The rotation operation of the 401 is explained to the player in a visually easy-to-understand manner by actually rotating the dial operation unit 401.

Further, the configuration of the operation unit 400 that functions as the operation explanation means as described above is not limited only at the time of the selection effect, and for example, the operation unit 400 may function as the operation explanation at the time of the reach effect of FIG. 216 described above. Well, the configuration will be described with reference to FIG. 230.

First, as shown in FIG. 230 (A) as in FIG. 216 (B), the left and right decorative symbols 4601 and 4603 are aligned with the same symbol, and the reach mode is displayed (in the same figure, the left and right decorative symbols are "". 7 ”), and then, as the middle decorative symbol 4602 continues to change, the left and right decorative symbols 4601 and 4603 are moved to the left and right upper ends of the display screen and displayed in a reduced size, and the normal reach variation is changed to super reach. It develops into fluctuation. At this time, the rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401 is stopped by the drive stop of the dial drive motor 414, and the dial operation unit 401 is turned off by the drive stop of the full-color LED 430b.

Then, as shown in FIG. 230 (B), as a variation mode of the super reach, the middle decorative symbol 4602a (in the same figure, “6”) that determines the loss with a symbol different from the left and right decorative symbols 4601 and 4603. Medium decorative design (exemplifies) and medium decorative design 4602b (in the same figure, "7" is shown as an example) that determines the jackpot with the same design as the left and right decorative symbols 4601 and 4603 are displayed side by side. An image 4605 in which the dial operation unit 401 rotates clockwise and a character 4611 "Please turn the dial operation unit" are displayed below the dial operation unit 400 (dial operation unit 401). A display prompting the player to rotate in the clockwise direction is displayed. At this time, the dial operation unit 401 is actually rotated clockwise by the drive of the dial drive motor 414, similarly to the image 4608 of the dial operation unit 401 that rotates clockwise, and further, the rotation of the dial drive motor 414. In order to make the player recognize the operation, the dial operation unit 401 is light-lit and decorated by lighting / blinking the full-color LED 430b (operation demonstration control means).

After that, as shown in FIG. 230 (C), when the effect display for pushing out the intermediate decorative symbol 4602b for determining the loss and the intermediate decorative symbol 4602b for determining the big hit is started, the dial operation unit 401 is rotated accordingly. Operation and luminescent decoration are stopped. As described above, in the configuration shown in FIG. 230, by rotating the dial operation unit 401 according to the display of the liquid crystal display device 1900, the operation method of the dial operation unit 401 at the time of reach production is explained to the player in an easy-to-understand manner. Can be done.

As described above, according to the operation unit 400 of the present embodiment, when the operation effect is executed by the effect control means (peripheral control unit 4140), the effect is produced by driving the dial drive motor 414 before the operation effect is executed and controlled. By demonstrating the movement of the dial operation unit 401 that can affect the effect of the means, the player is taught the manual operation of the dial operation unit 401, and the dial operation unit 401 is instructed when the operation effect is executed. Since the operation method can be directly understood, a player who is not yet accustomed to playing the pachinko machine 1 can operate the operation unit 400 as expected by the designer. Further, since the movement of the dial operation unit 401 that may affect the effect content of the effect means can be actually demonstrated and shown to the player, the dial operation unit 401 is simply displayed to the player on the explanation screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the like. It is possible to teach the player the manual operation of the dial operation unit 401 in an easy-to-understand manner and with an impact on the player, as compared with the configuration for encouraging the manual operation of.

Further, when the selection effect is executed, the dial operation unit 401 is rotated to teach the player to manually operate the dial operation unit 401 to select one of a plurality of options. Therefore, it is possible to actually demonstrate the movement of the dial operation unit 401 for manual operation according to the selection effect and show it to the player, and it is easy to understand and gives an impact to the player, and the dial operation unit 401 is manually operated. The operation can be taught to the player.

Further, when the player selects a substitute for the manual operation of the dial operation unit 401 at the time of executing the selection effect, the dial operation unit 401 is automatically rotated by the drive of the dial drive motor 414 to automatically perform the selection operation. When the player operates the dial operation unit 401 while the dial operation unit 401 is rotating, the drive of the dial drive motor 414 is stopped and the operation by the player is prioritized. It has become possible to provide comfortable game contents to a player who sometimes thinks that manually operating the dial operation unit 401 is a troublesome task without forcing such an operation. There is.

Further, since it is possible to determine whether or not to substitute the selection operation by pressing the pressing operation unit 405 at the time of the selection effect, the player is willing to operate the dial operation unit 401. A player who can proceed with the game in a state where it is clarified whether or not there is, and by extension, a player who is looking forward to the manual operation of the dial operation unit 401, and a player who is not looking forward to the manual operation of the dial operation unit 401. It is possible to provide comfortable game contents to all players.

Further, when the dial operation unit 401 is not operated by the player within a predetermined time when the selection effect is executed, the selection agent is performed by a predetermined selection method, so that the selection effect can be performed smoothly. Can be advanced. Further, when it is determined that the ratio of the rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401 by the player is high at the time of executing the selection effect, the reception time of the operation of the dial operation unit 401 by the player is extended. Therefore, as a result, by prolonging the detection effective time for the player who is looking forward to the operation of the dial operation unit 401, it is possible to make the game content according to the user's needs.

Further, when the player performs the selection agent at the time of the selection effect, the dial operation unit 401 rotates the selection agent by the predetermined selection method, so that any player can perform the selection agent. It is possible to execute the selection agency in an equal manner. Further, since the operation of the dial operation unit 401 operated by the player is memorized at the time of the selection effect, when the selection agent is executed, the selection tendency of the player is reflected and the selection agent is performed. It is designed to be able to be executed.

[6. Characteristic effects of this embodiment]
As described above, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the special lottery result is reserved in the vicinity (both left and right sides) of the chance entrance 2513 of the center accessory 2500 on the front side of the back lower movable decoration body 3510 of the back unit 3000. Since the holding display board 2603 for displaying the number of holdings and the back decoration member 2602 for covering the front surface of the holding display board 2603 are provided, the player can enter the chance when the game ball is supplied on the stage 2510. By paying attention to 2513, it becomes possible to notice the existence of the display of the number of holds by the hold display board 2603 through the back decoration member 2602, and the liquid crystal display device 1900 is moved to the front of the liquid crystal display device 1900 by the back lower movable decorative body 3510. Even if the reserved number displayed on the player cannot be seen from the player side, the reserved number displayed on the reserved display board 2603 can be recognized through the translucent back decoration member 2602, and the next special reserved number can be recognized. The lottery result can be expected, and the back decoration member 2602 arranged on the front side can make the hold display board 2603 inconspicuous, and the player can move the movable decorative body 3510 under the back (movable). You can concentrate on the production) and the production image. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 is capable of causing the player to recognize the number of reserved special lottery results and sufficiently entertaining the effect image and the movable effect to prevent the player's interest from deteriorating. Can be done.

Further, since the number of reserved special lottery results is displayed on both the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the reserved display board 2603, and the back decoration member 2602 is arranged on the front surface of the reserved display board 2603 to hide it, depending on the player. Noticed the relationship between the number of holdings displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the display by the holding display board 2603 displayed through the back decoration member 2602, and the number of holdings is displayed separately from the display by the liquid crystal display device 1900. It becomes possible to recognize that, and the display of the number of holds by the hold display board 2603 can make the player feel as if he / she has found something like a hidden trick, and entertain the player. It is possible to suppress the decline in the interest in the game.

Further, a part of the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is covered with the lower back movable decorative body 3510 according to the special lottery result, that is, the lower back movable decorative body 3510 is covered with the liquid crystal display device according to the special lottery result. Since it is moved to the front of the 1900, the movable under-back decorative body 3510 can be made to stand out by blocking the effect image and the number of holdings displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, which surprises the player and makes it interesting. It can be suppressed from decreasing. Further, by moving the movable under-back decorative body 3510 to the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 1900, the appearance atmosphere in the game area 1100 can be greatly changed, so that the player's interest can be strongly attracted. It is possible to differentiate from the pachinko machine of.

Further, even if the lower back movable decorative body 3510 is moved to the front of the liquid crystal display device 1900 according to the special lottery result and the reserved number displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 becomes invisible, the reserved display is displayed via the back decorative member 2602. Since the player can be made to recognize the number of holds displayed on the board 2603, the movable range of the under-back movable decoration body 3510 that moves to the front of the liquid crystal display device 1900 can be widened as much as possible, and the under-back movable decoration can be made. The body 3510 can be enlarged, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made to be able to further enjoy the movable effect by the movable under-back decorative body 3510, and at the same time, the player is entertained and the interest in the game is reduced. Can be suppressed.

Further, as described above, the movable under-back decorative body 3510 and the like are moved to the front of the liquid crystal display device 1900 according to the result of the special lottery, and the movable under-back decorative body 3510 is made to stand out to attract the player's interest. Since it can be strongly attracted to the under-back movable decorative body 3510, it is possible to reduce the player's interest in the number of holdings at least during the movable effect by the under-back movable decorative body 3510, and the liquid crystal display is displayed by the under-back movable decorative body 3510. Even if the number of holds displayed on the device 1900 becomes invisible, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from deteriorating.

Further, the holding display board 2603 and the back decoration member 2602 are provided in the vicinity of the chance entrance 2513 in the stage 2510 of the center accessory 2500 where the liquid crystal display device 1900 can be visually recognized through the frame, and the liquid crystal display device 1900 is probable. Since the holding display board 2603 can be brought as close as possible to the holding display board 2603, the holding display board 2603 (back decoration member 2602) can be positioned within the field of view of the player paying attention to the liquid crystal display device 1900, and the player can be placed. Is displayed on the hold display board 2603 even if attention is paid to the effect image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 according to the special lottery result and the movable under-back decorative body 3510 moving in front of the liquid crystal display device 1900. It is possible to recognize the number of holdings. Therefore, it is possible to reduce unnecessary movement of the line of sight as much as possible, it is possible to reduce the occurrence of eyeball fatigue at an early stage, and it is possible to surely enjoy the production image and the movable production. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

Further, since the holding number is displayed by the number of light emission of the LED 2603a that emits light in a dot shape on the holding display board 2603, the player can easily recognize the holding number by the number of the light emitting LEDs 2603a. At the same time, it is possible to make the display of the number of holdes on the hold display board 2603 inconspicuous, so that it is easy for the player to concentrate on the effect image by the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the movable effect by the movable under-back decorative body 3510 or the like. It is possible to entertain the player and suppress the deterioration of the interest. Further, since the number of holds is displayed by the number of light emitted by the LED 2603a, any color can be used for the back decoration member 2602 that covers the front surface of the hold display board 2603, and the decoration effect of the back decoration member 2602 is ensured. Can be demonstrated.

In addition, both the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the hold display board 2603 display the number of holds for the special lottery result, and the back decoration member 2602 is arranged in front of the hold display board 2603 to hide the hold display board. The display by 2603 becomes inconspicuous, and the player can be made to think that the back decoration member 2602 is simply luminescent decoration. The player can use the holding display board 2603 and the back decoration member 2602 as one luminescent decoration body. Can be entertained.

Further, even if a game ball is received by the start ports 2101 and 1022 and a new special lottery result is drawn while the liquid crystal display device 1900 is displaying the special lottery result or an advantageous game state such as a big hit game is generated, the special lottery result is drawn. If the suggestion of the special lottery result cannot be started, the start of the suggestion of the special lottery result is suspended until the suggestion of the special lottery result can be started. Nevertheless, it is possible to prevent the special lottery result from being discarded and the player's interest from being reduced. Further, since the number of reserved special lottery results (number of reserved numbers) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the like, the start ports 2101, 1022 are displayed even while the special lottery result is being suggested or an advantageous gaming state is generated. It is possible to confirm that the special lottery result based on the acceptance of the game ball is suspended, to have a feeling of expectation for the next reserved special lottery result, and to maintain the interest of the player.

[Second Example Regarding Displaying Number of Holds]
FIG. 231 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of the lower back movable decorative body in the game board.
As shown in FIG. 231, since the back lower movable decorative body 3510 of the back unit 3000 is provided with a hold display board 2603 that displays the number of holds of the hold special lottery result, it has been moved to the front of the liquid crystal display device 1900. Even if the hold number display 1900a displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 by the back lower movable decorative body 3510 cannot be seen from the player side, the hold number displayed on the hold display board 2603 by paying attention to the back lower movable decorative body 3510. Can be recognized, and it is possible to have a sense of expectation for the next special lottery result that has been put on hold. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize the number of reserved special lottery results, and to sufficiently enjoy the effect image and the movable effect to prevent the player's interest from deteriorating.

Further, even if the lower back movable decorative body 3510 is moved to the front of the liquid crystal display device 1900 according to the special lottery result and the reserved number displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 becomes invisible, the lower back movable decorative body 3510 is provided. Since the player can be made to recognize the number of holdings displayed on the holding display board 2603, the moving range of the lower back movable decorative body 3510 that moves to the front of the liquid crystal display device 1900 can be widened as much as possible, or the back. The lower movable decorative body 3510 can be enlarged, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made to be able to further enjoy the movable effect by the lower back movable decorative body 3510, and at the same time, it can entertain the player and entertain the game. Can be suppressed from decreasing.

Further, by paying attention to the lower back movable decorative body 3510 or the like that moves on the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 1900, the number of holdes displayed on the hold display board 2603 can be recognized. Therefore, it is possible to reduce unnecessary movement of the line of sight as much as possible, it is possible to reduce the occurrence of eyeball fatigue at an early stage, and it is possible to surely enjoy the production image and the movable production. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

Further, as shown in FIG. 231 (a), when the lower back movable decorative body 3510 is not moved to the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 1900, it is displayed on the hold display board 2603 provided in the lower back movable decorative body 3510. The reserved number is invisible to the player. In addition, since the lower back movable decorative body is inclined downward with respect to the reserved number display 1900a of the first special symbol (four on the left) and the second special symbol (four on the right), the lower back movable decorative body 3510. Is moved to the front of the liquid crystal display device 1900 so that it cannot be visually recognized from the central portion of the hold number display 1900a displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900. As shown in FIG. 231, the right two of the first special symbols are in the pending state, but the lower back movable decorative body 3510 has moved to the front of the liquid crystal display device 1900 to show the pending state in the liquid crystal display device 1900. Before the hold number display 1900a becomes invisible to the player by the back lower movable decorative body 3510, the hold number displayed on the hold display board 2603 is visible to the player. Further, as shown in FIG. 231 (b), when the lower back movable decorative body 3510 is moved to the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 1900, the position corresponding to the hold number display 1900a of the first special symbol which is in the hold state. Since the hold number display displayed on the hold display board 2603 is in the hold state, the hold number display displayed on the hold display board 2603 and the hold number display 1900a displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 are linked. You can easily recognize that you are there. As a result, the player can always recognize the number of holds by displaying the number of holds, so that the number of holds may be cheated while the display of the hold is invisible. You can get rid of anxiety and doubt.

Further, when the lower back movable decorative body 3510 is moved to the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 1900, the hold number display displayed on the hold display board 2603 is displayed in the front-back direction with the hold number display 1900a displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900. You may move it to the overlapping position. By doing so, it is possible to recognize the hold number by looking at the place where the hold number display 1900a is displayed when confirming the hold number, so that the hold number can be easily grasped.

[Third Example Regarding Displaying Number of Holds]
FIG. 232 is a diagram showing a notched back movable decorative body in a game board.
As shown in FIG. 232, when the lower back movable decorative body 3510 is moved to the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 1900, the hold number display 1900a displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the lower back movable decorative body 3510 are in the front-rear direction. Since the back bottom movable decoration body 3510 is notched as a hold display concealment prohibition area at the overlapping portion, the back bottom movable decoration body 3510 of the back unit 3000 is movable in front of the liquid crystal display device 1900, and the back side. While at least a part of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is covered by the lower movable decorative body 3510, the hold number display 1900a continues to be displayed at the same place on the liquid crystal display device 1900 and is always visible to the player. There is. As a result, the hold number display 1900a displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 by the lower back movable decorative body 3510 moved to the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 1900 does not become invisible from the player side. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize the number of reserved special lottery results, and to sufficiently enjoy the effect image and the movable effect to prevent the player's interest from deteriorating.

Further, even if the lower back movable decorative body 3510 is moved to the front of the liquid crystal display device 1900 according to the special lottery result, the player can be made to recognize the reserved number displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900. The movable range of the lower back movable decorative body 3510 that moves to the front of the display device 1900 can be widened as much as possible, and the lower back movable decorative body 3510 can be enlarged. It is possible to entertain the player more and to suppress the decrease in the interest in the game by entertaining the player.

In addition, since the hold number display 1900a is displayed in the field of view of the player paying attention to the movable under-back movable decorative body 3510 that is movable in front of the liquid crystal display device 1900, the liquid crystal display is displayed according to the special lottery result in which the player is drawn. Even if attention is paid to the effect image displayed on the display device 1900, the movable under-back decorative body 3510 moving in front of the liquid crystal display device 1900, and the like, the number of holds displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 can be recognized. Therefore, it is possible to reduce unnecessary movement of the line of sight as much as possible, it is possible to reduce the occurrence of eyeball fatigue at an early stage, and it is possible to surely enjoy the production image and the movable production. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

Further, while the lower back movable decorative body 3510 is movable in front of the liquid crystal display device 1900 and while at least a part of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is covered by the lower back movable decorative body 3510, the hold number display 1900a Is not required as long as it continues to be displayed at the same location on the liquid crystal display device 1900 and is always visible to the player. Not limited to the notch, for example, a method of using the lower back movable decorative body 3510 as a transparent member can be considered. By doing so, even if the lower back movable decorative body 3510 overlaps with the hold number display 1900a in the front-rear direction, it is possible to prevent the hold number display 1900a from becoming invisible.

[Fourth Example Regarding Displaying Number of Holds]
Next, a fourth embodiment regarding the display of the number of pending numbers will be described. FIG. 233 is a diagram showing the holding number display and the movement of the lower back movable decorative body 3510 on the display panel of the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the fourth embodiment. Further, FIG. 234 is a continuation of FIG. 233.

As shown in FIG. 233 (a), the first special symbol reserved number display area 1920 (corresponding to the first starting port 2101) is set on the lower left side of the display panel of the liquid crystal display device 1900 that is visible to the player. , The second special symbol reserved number display area 1921 (corresponding to the second starting port 2102) is set in the lower substantially center of the display panel.

In FIG. 233 (a), in the first special symbol reserved number display area 1920, two reserved images 1922 indicating that the first special symbol is reserved corresponding to the reserved number of the lottery result are displayed, and the first It shows that the number of holdings of the lottery result is 2 for the special symbol. Further, in the second special symbol reserved number display area 1921, the reserved image 1922 indicating that the second special symbol is reserved corresponding to the reserved number of the lottery result is not displayed, and the second special symbol is drawn by lottery. Indicates that there is no pending number of results.

The display of the number of holds in the first special symbol hold number display area 1920 is a hold image such as the first hold, the second hold, the third hold, and the fourth hold from the center side to the left. 1922 is displayed. In addition, the display of the number of holds in the second special symbol hold number display area 1921 is a hold image such as the first hold, the second hold, the third hold, and the fourth hold from the center side to the right. 1922 is displayed.

Further, in the fourth embodiment, the reserved image 1922 showing that it is reserved can take a plurality of types of display modes. For example, there are multiple types of display modes: the same shape of the image but different display colors, the same display color of the image but different shapes, and the different shape and display color of the image. obtain. In FIG. 233 (a), the hold images for the first hold and the second hold for the first special symbol are displayed in a circular shape, for example, in the display color “blue” (first hold image), and the player. It is visible from.

As shown in FIG. 233 (b), the back lower movable decorative body 3510 in the fourth embodiment has a hold number display area 1920 when it is movable in front of the hold number display areas 1920 and 1921 of the display panel in the front-rear direction. , 1921 is invisible to the player, and the hold display area 1920, 1921 is visible to the player when the movement is stopped in front of the hold number display areas 1920 and 1921. It has a concealment prohibited area 1931 and.

In this example, the hold display concealment area 1930 is composed of an upper portion toward the center of the front decorative member 3512 (see FIG. 172) of the lower back movable decorative body 3510. Further, in the hold display concealment prohibition area 1931, when the back lower movable decoration body 3510 stops in front of the hold number display areas 1920 and 1921, the hold number display areas 1920 and 1921 and the back lower movable decoration body 3510 move in the front-rear direction. It is composed of left and right horizontally elongated rectangular through holes formed in the lower back movable decorative body 3510 in the region overlapping the two.

In the fourth embodiment, the hold display is visually recognized in relation to the display position of the hold number display area of the display panel of the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the movement position of the back lower movable decorative body 3510. Prior to the start of movement of the lower back movable decorative body 3510, the display panel and the lower back movable decorative body 3510 are located at positions where they do not overlap in the front-rear direction, for example, in the upper left portion of the display panel in FIG. 233 (a). An auxiliary hold number display 1923 that supplementarily represents the number of holds for one special symbol and an auxiliary hold number display 1924 that auxiliary represents the number of holds for the second special symbol are displayed. In the illustrated example, the number "2" is displayed as the auxiliary hold number display 1923 corresponding to the hold number 2 for the first special symbol, and the auxiliary hold number display corresponding to no hold number for the second special symbol. No display is displayed as 1924.

Hereinafter, a specific description will be made with reference to FIGS. 233 (a), 233 (b) and 234. As shown in FIG. 233 (a), in the first special symbol hold number display area 1920, the two hold images 1922 corresponding to the hold number “2” are the first hold images (display color “blue” in a circular shape). It is displayed and is visible to the player. In this state, the lower back movable decorative body 3510 is moved upward from the move-out position [see FIG. 233 (a)] which is not located in front of the hold number display areas 1920 and 1921, and the hold number display area. It is movable and stopped at the advance position [see FIG. 233 (b)] located in front of 1920 and 1921.

The two reserved images 1922 (first reserved image) are temporarily invisible to the player by the reserved display concealed area 1930 of the underside movable decoration body 3510, and then the underside movable decoration at the advance position. Two reserved images 1922 (first reserved images) are made visible to the player through the reserved display concealment prohibited area 1931 of the body 3510.

While the lower back movable decorative body 3510 is moving, the reserved display concealed area 1930 of the lower back movable decorative body 3510 moves to a position where the two reserved images 1922 of the first special symbol reserved number display area 1920 are hidden. Since the auxiliary hold number displays 1923 and 1924 are still displayed, the player can continue to recognize the hold number.

Then, in a state where the two reserved images (first reserved image) are visible to the player through the reserved display concealment prohibited area 1931 of the lower back movable decorative body 3510, the lower back movable decorative body 3510 is When the image is moved downward from the advance position, the two reserved images (first reserved image) are temporarily made invisible to the player by the reserved display concealed area 1930. Further, when the lower back movable decorative body 3510 is moved to the retracted position, two reserved images (first reserved image) appear as shown in FIG. 234 and are visible to the player.

In the example shown in FIG. 234 (a), the first reserved image 1922a appears in the first reserved image that was visually recognized through the reserved display concealment prohibited area 1931 of the lower back movable decorative body 3510 and is visually recognized by the player. NS. That is, the display mode of the first reserved image 1922a does not change between before being hidden by the lower back movable decorative body 3510 and when it reappears from the lower back movable decorative body 3510.

On the other hand, the second reserved image 1922b is a second reserved image (for example, in a star shape) having a display mode different from that of the first reserved image that was visually recognized through the reserved display concealment prohibited area 1931 of the lower back movable decoration body 3510. Appears in the display color "red") and is visually recognized by the player. That is, the display mode of the second reserved image 1922b changes between before being hidden by the lower back movable decorative body 3510 and when it reappears from the lower back movable decorative body 3510.

As a result, when the reserved image is changed, such as the second reserved image 1922b, the changed reserved image is visually recognized so that the second reserved image is digested. It is possible to remind us of the idea that an advantageous gaming state may arrive, and to fully enjoy the movement of the movable body with respect to the reserved image, and to give the game a surprising interest.

In the example shown in FIG. 234 (b), both the first reserved image 1922a and the second reserved image 1922b were visually recognized through the reserved display concealment prohibited area 1931 of the back lower movable decoration body 3510. Appears in and is visible to the player. That is, the display mode of the first reserved image 1922a and the second reserved image 1922b changes between before being hidden by the lower back movable decorative body 3510 and when they reappear from the lower back movable decorative body 3510. Not.

As described above, the player who is accustomed to seeing the mode in which the reserved image that appears again from the movable body (backward movable decorative body 3510) changes, will assume that the reserved image will change, but the reserved image will not change. In that case, it reminds us of the surprise and unexpectedness of why it does not change, so we can fully enjoy the movement of the movable body with respect to the reserved image and give the game a surprising interest.

[Fifth Example Regarding Displaying Number of Holds]
Next, a fifth embodiment relating to the display of the number of pending numbers will be described. FIG. 235 is a diagram showing the holding number display and the movement of the lower back movable decorative body 3510 on the display panel of the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the fifth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 235 (b), the first special symbol book reserved number display area 1940 (corresponding to the first starting port 2101) is set on the lower left side of the display panel of the liquid crystal display device 1900 that is visible to the player. A second special symbol book reserved number display area 1941 (corresponding to the second starting port 2102) is set in the substantially center of the lower part of the display panel.

In FIG. 235 (b), in the first special symbol main reserved number display area 1940, two reserved images 1922 indicating that the first special symbol is reserved corresponding to the reserved number of the lottery result are displayed, and the first It shows that the number of pending lottery results is 2 for one special symbol. Further, in the second special symbol main reserved number display area 1941, the reserved image 1922 indicating that the second special symbol is reserved corresponding to the reserved number of the lottery result is not displayed, and the second special symbol It shows that there is no pending number of lottery results.

In addition, the display of the number of holds in the first special symbol book hold number display area 1940 is held like the first hold, the second hold, the third hold, and the fourth hold from the center side to the left. Image 1922 is displayed. In addition, the display of the number of holds in the second special symbol book hold number display area 1941 is held like the first hold, the second hold, the third hold, and the fourth hold from the center side to the right. Image 1922 is displayed.

Further, in the fifth embodiment, the reserved image 1922 indicating that it is reserved can take a plurality of types of display modes. For example, there are multiple types of display modes: the same shape of the image but different display colors, the same display color of the image but different shapes, and the different shape and display color of the image. obtain. In FIG. 235 (b), the hold image for the first hold for the first special symbol is displayed in a circular shape, for example, in the display color "blue" (first hold image), and the hold for the second hold. The image is displayed in a star shape, for example, in the display color "red" (second reserved image), and is visible to the player.

As shown in FIG. 235 (a), the lower back movable decorative body 3510 in the fifth embodiment is advanced in which the lower back movable decorative body 3510 is located in front of the reserved number display areas 1940 and 1941 of the display panel in the front-rear direction. The main hold display concealing unit 3720 that makes the main hold number display areas 1940 and 1941 invisible to the player when taking a position is provided in the upper part of the front surface.

Further, the lower back movable decorative body 3510 supplementarily displays the number of reserved lottery results held by the holding means when the lower back movable decorative body 3510 takes an advance position on the left side of the main holding display concealing portion 3720. The number of reserved lottery results held by the holding means when the lower back movable decorative body 3510 takes the advance position is provided on the right side of the main holding display concealing unit 3720 with the first special symbol holding number auxiliary display 3700. A second special symbol hold number auxiliary display 3710 for auxiliary display is provided.

In this example, the first special symbol hold number auxiliary display 3700 and the second special symbol hold number auxiliary display 3710 are each composed of four LEDs, and the number of holds is determined by lighting the number corresponding to the hold number. It is designed to be displayed. Since the lower back movable decorative body 3510 is inclined downward from the central portion toward both the left and right sides, the first special symbol hold number auxiliary display 3700 and the second special symbol hold number auxiliary display are along this inclination. Each of the four LEDs of the vessel 3710 is arranged.

In addition, the display of the number of holds on the first special symbol hold number auxiliary display 3700 is the number of holds such as the first hold, the second hold, the third hold, and the fourth hold from the center side to the left. It is lit. In addition, the display of the number of holds on the second special symbol hold number auxiliary display 3710 is the number such as the first hold, the second hold, the third hold, and the fourth hold from the center side to the right. It is lit.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 235 (b), the first special symbol book holding number display area 1940 and the second special symbol book holding number display area 1941 in the display panel of the liquid crystal display device 1900 are the back lower movable decoration body 3510. It is set to incline downward from approximately the center of the display panel toward both the left and right sides so as to follow the inclination.

Next, the operation of the fifth embodiment will be described. Also in the fifth embodiment, the hold display is visually recognized in relation to the display position of the main hold number display areas 1940 and 1941 on the display panel of the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the movement position of the back lower movable decorative body 3510.

First, in the initial state (default), as shown in FIG. 235 (a), the lower back movable decorative body 3510 is the lower back movable decorative body in front of the reserved number display areas 1940 and 1941 of the display panel in the front-rear direction. It is stopped at the advance position where 3510 is located. At the advance position, the hold display concealment unit 3720 is located in front of the hold number display areas 1940 and 1941, so that the hold number display areas 1940 and 1941 are invisible to the player. Therefore, the player cannot see the reserved images displayed in the reserved number display areas 1940 and 1941.

Further, instead of hiding the reserved number display areas 1940 and 1941 from the player by the reserved display concealing unit 3720, the first special symbol reserved number auxiliary display arranged in the reserved display concealing unit 3720. Each of the four LEDs of the 3700 and the second special symbol hold number auxiliary display 3710 auxiliaryly display the hold number by lighting the number.

In FIG. 235 (a), two LEDs of the first special symbol hold number auxiliary indicator 3700 are lit, indicating that the number of hold of the lottery result for the first special symbol is two. In addition, all the LEDs of the second special symbol hold number auxiliary display 3710 are turned off, indicating that there is no hold number of the lottery result for the second special symbol.

Therefore, the player can know the number of holds by the number of lights lit by the LED by visually recognizing the first special symbol hold number auxiliary display 3700 and the second special symbol hold number auxiliary display 3710. However, I do not know the contents (actual situation) of the hold.

From the above state, the hold effect is performed by the peripheral control MPU4140a deployed on the peripheral control board 4010. Specifically, the lower back movable decorative body 3510 is moved downward from the advance position, and moves to a move-out position that is not located in front of the reserved number display areas 1940 and 1941 shown in FIG. 235 (b). Then, in the reserved number display areas 1940 and 1941, the reserved image 1922 corresponding to the reserved number of the lottery result held by the holding means appears and is visible to the player.

In the example shown in FIG. 235 (b), in the first reserved image 1922a, the reserved image for the first reserved image for the first special symbol is, for example, circular and the display color "blue" (first reserved image). Appears in and is visible to the player.

On the other hand, the second reserved image 1922b appears in a second reserved image (for example, a star-shaped display color "red") having a display mode different from that of the first first reserved image 1922a and is visible to the player. Will be done. In this way, by moving the lower back movable decorative body 3510 to the evacuation position, the hidden reserved image 1922 is made visible to the player, and not only the number of reserved images but also the actual state of the reserved images becomes clear. This reminds us of the unexpectedness of displaying the number of holdings, saying that it is not just the display of the number of holdings.

The player will recognize the difference between the first reserved image 1922a and the second reserved image 1922b, that is, the first reserved image 1922a, which is circular and has the display color "blue", may be a normal hold. It is recalled that the second reserved image 1922b having a star shape and the display color "red" must have a higher expectation for a big hit than the first reserved image 1922a. In addition, it reminds us of the idea that an advantageous gaming state (big hit gaming state) may arrive when the second hold is exhausted, and the movement of the movable body with respect to the hold image is fully enjoyed to make the game fun. It can be surprising.

As shown in FIG. 235 (b), when the lower back movable decorative body 3510 is in the retracted position where it has not moved to the front of the liquid crystal display device 1900, the first special symbol provided on the lower back movable decorative body 3510. The number of holds displayed on the hold number auxiliary display 3700 and the second special symbol hold number auxiliary display 3710 is invisible to the player.

As a result, when the lower back movable decorative body 3510 is in the advanced position, the main reserved display concealing unit 3720 makes the reserved number display areas 1940 and 1941 invisible to the player. Therefore, the lower back movable decorative body 3510. Although the player can only know the number of holds by the hold number auxiliary indicators 3700 and 3710 provided in the above, the lower back movable decorative body 3510 is moved from the advance position and is located in front of the hold number display areas 1940 and 1941. When the player moves to a position where he / she has not moved out, the reserved image 1922 corresponding to the reserved number of the lottery result reserved by the reserved means appears in the reserved number display areas 1940 and 1941 and is visible to the player. By visually recognizing the book hold image 1922, the player can know not only the number of the hold but also the contents of the hold, so that the player can be interested in the appearance and hiding of the hold image, and by knowing the contents of the hold, the unexpectedness is recalled. Therefore, it is possible to fully enjoy the movement of the movable body with respect to the reserved image and give the game a surprising interest.

[Sixth Example Regarding Displaying Number of Holds]
Next, a sixth embodiment relating to the display of the number of pending numbers will be described. FIG. 236 is a diagram showing a hold display on the display panel of the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the sixth embodiment, and a hold display and movement in the movable liquid crystal display device 1910 of the back lower movable decorative body 3510.

As shown in FIG. 236 (a), the first special symbol book holding number display area 1940 (corresponding to the first start port 2101) is set on the lower left side of the display panel of the liquid crystal display device 1900, and the lower part of the display panel is omitted. The second special symbol book reserved number display area 1941 (corresponding to the second starting port 2102) is set in the center.

In FIG. 236 (a), in the first special symbol main reserved number display area 1940, two main liquid crystal side reserved images 1922c showing that the first special symbol is reserved corresponding to the reserved number of the lottery result are displayed. It is shown that the number of pending lottery results for the first special symbol is 2. Further, in the second special symbol main reserved number display area 1941, the main liquid crystal side reserved image 1922c indicating that the second special symbol is reserved corresponding to the reserved number of the lottery result is not displayed, and the second It shows that there is no pending number of lottery results for special symbols.

The display of the number of holds in the first special symbol book hold number display area 1940 is mainly such as the first hold, the second hold, the third hold, and the fourth hold from the center side to the left. The liquid crystal side reserved image 1922c is displayed. In addition, the display of the number of holds in the second special symbol book hold number display area 1941 is mainly such as the first hold, the second hold, the third hold, and the fourth hold from the center side to the right. The liquid crystal side reserved image 1922c is displayed.

Further, in the sixth embodiment, the main liquid crystal side reserved image 1922c indicating that the image is reserved is in a mode showing only that the image is reserved. For example, in FIG. 236 (a), the hold images for the first and second hold for the first special symbol are displayed in a circular shape, for example, in the display color "blue", and are visible to the player. ..

As shown in FIG. 236 (b), the lower back movable decorative body 3510 in the sixth embodiment is advanced in which the lower back movable decorative body 3510 is located in front of the reserved number display areas 1940 and 1941 of the display panel in the front-rear direction. The main hold display concealing unit 3720 that makes the main hold number display areas 1940 and 1941 invisible to the player when taking a position is provided in the upper part of the front surface.

Further, the lower back movable decorative body 3510 is a movable body that displays the number of reserved lottery results held by the holding means when the lower back movable decorative body 3510 takes an advance position on the front surface of the main holding display concealing unit 3720. A liquid crystal display device 1910 is provided.

In the movable liquid crystal display device 1910, the display of the number of holds is the first hold, the second hold, the third hold, and the fourth from the center side to the outside for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The hold image 1922d on the liquid crystal side of the movable body is displayed like the hold of.

Further, in the sixth embodiment, the movable liquid crystal display side reserved image 1922d showing that it is reserved can take a plurality of types of display modes. For example, there are multiple types of display modes: the same shape of the image but different display colors, the same display color of the image but different shapes, and the different shape and display color of the image. obtain. In FIG. 236 (b), the hold image for the first hold for the movable liquid crystal side hold image 1922d is displayed in a circular shape, for example, in the display color "blue", and the hold image for the second hold is, for example. , It is displayed in the shape of a star in the display color "yellow" and is visible to the player.

Next, the operation of the sixth embodiment will be described. Also in the sixth embodiment, the hold display is visually recognized in relation to the display position of the main hold number display areas 1940 and 1941 on the display panel of the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the moving position of the back lower movable decorative body 3510.

First, in the initial state (default), as shown in FIG. 236 (a), the lower back movable decorative body 3510 is the lower back movable decorative body in front of the reserved number display areas 1940 and 1941 of the display panel in the front-rear direction. It is stopped at the exit position where 3510 is not located. Since the hold display concealment unit 3720 is not located in front of the hold number display areas 1940 and 1941 at the move-out position, the hold number display areas 1940 and 1941 can be visually recognized by the player, and the number of holds can be recognized. can.

In FIG. 236 (b), two movable body liquid crystal side reserved images 1922d are displayed on the left movable body liquid crystal display device 1910, indicating that the number of reserved lottery results is 2 for the first special symbol. .. Further, the movable body liquid crystal display device 1910 on the right side does not display the movable body liquid crystal side reserved image 1922d, indicating that there is no reserved number of lottery results for the second special symbol.

Further, the second movable body liquid crystal side holding image 1922d appears as a holding image (for example, a star-shaped display color “yellow”) having a display mode different from that of the main liquid crystal side holding image 1922c and is visually recognized by the player. .. In this way, by moving the lower back movable decorative body 3510 to the advanced position, the movable body liquid crystal side holding image 1922d is made visible to the player, and not only the number of holdings but also the actual state of holding is clarified. This reminds us of the unexpectedness of displaying the number of holdings, saying that it is not just the display of the number of holdings.

The player will recognize the difference between the movable LCD side hold image 1922d and the main liquid crystal side hold image 1922c, that is, the main liquid crystal side hold image 1922c having a circular shape and the display color "blue" will be a normal hold. It is recalled that the movable body liquid crystal side holding image 1922d having a star shape and the display color "yellow" must have a higher expectation for a big hit than the main liquid crystal side holding image 1922c. In addition, it reminds us of the idea that an advantageous gaming state (big hit gaming state) may arrive when the second hold is exhausted, and the movement of the movable body with respect to the hold image is fully enjoyed to make the game fun. It can be surprising.

In the description of the sixth embodiment, it has been described that the display of the main liquid crystal side reserved image 1922c displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 recognizes only the number of reserved images, but this is merely an embodiment. Not limited. For example, in the first hold, the main liquid crystal side hold image 1922c is displayed in a star shape in the display color "yellow", and the movable body liquid crystal side hold image becomes visible when the lower back movable decorative body 3510 takes the advanced position. The display mode of 1922d may be displayed in the form of a star and blinking of the display color "red", whereby the player can be reminded that the first hold has a higher expectation, and the game can be played. It is possible to increase the interest in.

[7th Example Regarding Displaying Number of Holds]
Next, a seventh embodiment relating to the display of the number of pending numbers will be described. FIG. 237 shows a hold display on the display panel of the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the seventh embodiment, an expectation degree suggestion display of the lottery result, and a hold display and movement of the back lower movable decorative body 3510 in the movable liquid crystal display device 1910. It is a figure.

As shown in FIG. 237 (a), the first special symbol book holding number display area 1940 (corresponding to the first start port 2101) is set on the lower left side of the display panel of the liquid crystal display device 1900, and the lower part of the display panel is omitted. The second special symbol book reserved number display area 1941 (corresponding to the second starting port 2102) is set in the center.

In FIG. 237 (a), in the first special symbol main reserved number display area 1940, two main liquid crystal side reserved images 1922c indicating that the first special symbol is reserved corresponding to the reserved number of the lottery result are displayed. It is shown that the number of pending lottery results for the first special symbol is 2. Further, in the second special symbol main reserved number display area 1941, the main liquid crystal side reserved image 1922c indicating that the second special symbol is reserved corresponding to the reserved number of the lottery result is not displayed, and the second It shows that there is no pending number of lottery results for special symbols.

The display of the number of holds in the first special symbol book hold number display area 1940 is mainly such as the first hold, the second hold, the third hold, and the fourth hold from the center side to the left. The liquid crystal side reserved image 1922c is displayed. In addition, the display of the number of holds in the second special symbol book hold number display area 1941 is mainly such as the first hold, the second hold, the third hold, and the fourth hold from the center side to the right. The liquid crystal side reserved image 1922c is displayed.

Further, in the seventh embodiment, the main liquid crystal side reserved image 1922c indicating that the image is reserved is in an aspect showing only that the image is reserved. For example, in FIG. 237 (a), the first and second reserved images for the first special symbol are displayed in a circular shape, for example, in the display color "blue", and are visible to the player.

As shown in FIG. 237 (b), the lower back movable decorative body 3510 in the seventh embodiment has an advance in which the lower back movable decorative body 3510 is located in front of the reserved number display areas 1940 and 1941 of the display panel in the front-rear direction. The main hold display concealing unit 3720 that makes the main hold number display areas 1940 and 1941 invisible to the player when taking a position is provided in the upper part of the front surface.

Further, the lower back movable decorative body 3510 supplementarily displays the number of reserved lottery results held by the holding means when the lower back movable decorative body 3510 takes an advance position on the left side of the main holding display concealing portion 3720. The number of reserved lottery results held by the holding means when the lower back movable decorative body 3510 takes the advance position is provided on the right side of the main holding display concealing unit 3720 with the first special symbol holding number auxiliary display 3700. A second special symbol hold number auxiliary display 3710 for auxiliary display is provided.

In this example, the first special symbol hold number auxiliary display 3700 and the second special symbol hold number auxiliary display 3710 are each composed of four LEDs, and the number of holds is determined by lighting the number corresponding to the hold number. It is designed to be displayed. Since the lower back movable decorative body 3510 is inclined downward from the central portion toward both the left and right sides, the first special symbol hold number auxiliary display 3700 and the second special symbol hold number auxiliary display are along this inclination. Each of the four LEDs of the vessel 3710 is arranged.

In addition, the display of the number of holds on the first special symbol hold number auxiliary display 3700 is the number of holds such as the first hold, the second hold, the third hold, and the fourth hold from the center side to the left. It is lit. In addition, the display of the number of holds on the second special symbol hold number auxiliary display 3710 is the number such as the first hold, the second hold, the third hold, and the fourth hold from the center side to the right. It is lit.

Further, as shown in FIG. 237 (c), the hold display corresponding to the hold display of the special symbol hold number auxiliary display is performed at the place not concealed by the main hold display concealing unit 3720 of the back lower movable decorative body 3510 in the display panel. The hold expectation suggestion image 1925 that suggests the expectation for the lottery result is displayed in a form larger than the hold display that is lit and displayed on the special symbol hold number auxiliary display. Further, the hold expectation suggestion image 1925 displayed on the right side of the display panel corresponds to the first hold in the first special symbol hold number auxiliary display 3700, and the hold expectation suggestion image displayed in the center of the display panel. Corresponds to the second hold.

Further, in the seventh embodiment, the hold expectation degree suggestion image 1925 showing the hold expectation degree may have a plurality of types of display modes. For example, an embodiment having the same shape as the main liquid crystal side reserved image 1922c but having a different display color (such as a round red display), and an embodiment having the same display color as the main liquid crystal side reserved image 1922c but having a different shape (star-shaped blue). It is possible to take a plurality of types of display modes (display, etc.) and modes in which both the shape and display color of the image are different (star-shaped yellow display, etc.). In FIG. 237 (c), the hold image for the first hold (right side of the display panel) is displayed in a circular shape with the display color "blue", and the hold image for the second hold (center of the display panel) is displayed. For example, it is displayed in the shape of a star in the display color "yellow", and "Chance" is written in the center so that the player can see it.
Since the third and fourth holds in the first special symbol hold number auxiliary display 3700 are not lit, the hold expectation suggestion image 1925 that suggests the expectation related to the third and fourth holds is displayed. Not displayed.

The association between the hold displayed by lighting the first special symbol hold number auxiliary display 3700 and the second special symbol hold number auxiliary display 3710 in the seventh embodiment and the hold expectation degree suggestion image 1925 is shown in FIG. 237 (b). ), For example, when the first and second special symbol hold number auxiliary indicators 3700 are lit and displayed, the lights are lit in the area not concealed by the hold display concealing unit 3720 on the display panel. The hold expectation degree suggestion image 1925 appears in the vicinity of the displayed first special symbol hold number auxiliary display 3700, and the player moves and displays the image to the position shown in FIG. 237 (c) while gradually expanding the image. , It can be recognized that the hold display of the first special symbol hold number auxiliary display 3700 and the hold expectation degree suggestion image 1925 are associated with each other.

By visually recognizing the hold expectation degree suggestion image 1925 corresponding to the second hold of the first special symbol hold number auxiliary display 3700, the second hold display is not a mere display of the hold number. And the unexpectedness of the hold number display will be recalled.

The player will recognize the difference in the hold expectation degree suggestion image 1925 corresponding to the second hold with respect to the second hold of the first special symbol hold number auxiliary display, that is, the first special symbol hold number auxiliary. The hold of the display 3700 would be a normal hold with only a number of lights using LEDs, but the hold expectation suggestion image 1925 displayed in a star shape with the display color "yellow" and with "Chance" in the center is , It will be recalled that it must be a hold with high expectations for the big hit. In addition, it is possible to remind the player that an advantageous gaming state (big hit gaming state) may arrive when the second hold is exhausted, and to give the game a surprising interest.

In the description of the seventh embodiment, it has been described that the display of the main liquid crystal side reserved image 1922c displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 recognizes only the number of reserved images, but this is merely an embodiment. Not limited. For example, in the first hold, the main liquid crystal side hold image 1922c is displayed in a star shape in the display color "yellow", the back lower movable decorative body 3510 takes the advance position, and the main liquid crystal side hold image 1922c becomes invisible. At this time, the hold expectation degree suggestion image 1925 may be displayed in a star shape in a blinking mode of the display color “red”. As a result, the player can be made to think that the first hold has a higher degree of expectation, and the interest in the game can be enhanced.

Although the present invention has been described above with reference to suitable embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and as shown below, various improvements are made without departing from the gist of the present invention. And the design can be changed.

That is, in the above embodiment, the one applied to the pachinko machine 1 as a gaming machine is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and is applied to a pachislot machine or a gaming machine obtained by fusing a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine. However, even in this case, the same action and effect as described above can be obtained.

[Authentication between the main body frame and the game board]
Next, the authentication function related to the combination of the main body frame 3 and the game board 4 will be described.
Here, in order to make it easier to understand the explanation regarding the combination of the frame body including the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 and the game board 4, the main body frame and the door different from the main body frame and the door frame described so far. Present the frame. FIG. 238 is a second embodiment of the front view of the door frame. FIG. 239 is a second embodiment of the front view of the main body frame.
When delivering or replacing a game machine such as a pachinko or pachislot machine to a game hall (game hall), it is necessary to receive an application and obtain a license each time, but when receiving an application, the game board 4 and It is obligatory to apply for a set of a frame including the main body frame 3 and the door 5 frame as a set of gaming machines, and when installing in the hall, the combination must be as requested.
In addition, even if different types of gaming boards are fitted into the same type of main body frame, or even if the same type of gaming board is fitted into the same type of main body frame, only the door frame is different. In some cases, if you are not careful when installing in the game hall, there is a risk that it will be installed in a different combination from the set of game machines you applied for.

Also, if the combination of the game board and the frame body of different manufacturers is different, the structure of the game board and the frame body is different, so even if you try to fit the game board, it will not fit well, so it is not the combination you applied for. However, in the case of the same manufacturer, even if the combination is different from the one applied, the game board will fit into the main frame even if the combination is different from the one applied because the structure is the same. There is a problem that even if the wrong combination of game boards is fitted, it will be installed as it is without being noticed.
For example, even if an application is made for the game board 4, the main body frame 3, and the door frame 5 as a set of game machines, when the game board 4 is installed in the game hall by mistake, the main body frame different from that at the time of application is applied. For example, even if it is fitted into the main body frame 3a shown in FIG. 239, or even if the gaming board 4 is fitted into the correct main body frame 3 for which an application has been received, a door frame different from that at the time of application, for example, FIG. 238 is shown. There is a risk that the door frame 5a will be attached.
This embodiment presents a specific solution for solving the above problem.

Next, a specific implementation method for authenticating whether or not the combination of the game board and the frame including the main body frame and the door frame is the combination for which the application has been received will be described.
The main control MPU 4100a in the main control board 4100 stores in advance the game board maker identification information necessary for recognizing the maker information and model number of the game board, and the payout control MPU 4111a in the payout control board 4110 has a frame. Manufacturer identification information is stored in advance.
It should be noted that the game board 4 and the game board 4a each store different game board maker identification information, and can be recognized separately by the difference in the character string of the identification information. Further, the main body frame 3 and the main body frame 3a also store different frame maker identification information, and can be recognized separately by the difference in the character string of the identification information.

Next, the interrelationship between the words of the present invention and the present embodiment will be presented. The main control board 4100 corresponds to the first control board, the payout control board 4110 corresponds to the second control board, the main control MPU 4100a corresponds to the first MPU, and the payout control MPU 4111a corresponds to the second MPU.

Bidirectional data communication is possible between the main control board 4100 and the payout control board 4110 in this embodiment, and authentication processing is performed between both boards when the power is turned on after the game board is fitted into the main body frame. By performing the above, it is possible to judge whether or not the game board and the main body frame are a regular combination. The details will be described below.

The main control board 4100 includes at least the main control MPU 4100a, and the game board maker identification information storage unit 4101 in which the game board maker identification information stored in advance is stored in the main control MPU 4100a and the frame maker identification information are appropriate. It is provided with a main authentication unit 4162 that performs authentication processing, and a main cryptographic communication unit 4160 that encrypts the information transmitted to the payout control MPU4111a and decrypts the information transmitted from the payout control MPU4111a. The main authentication unit 4162 includes a third frame maker identification information storage unit 4112 that stores the frame maker identification information.
The payout control board 4110 includes at least the payout control MPU4111a, and the payout control MPU4111a has a frame maker identification information storage unit 4112 in which the frame maker identification information stored in advance is stored, and the game board maker identification information is appropriate. It is provided with a payout authentication unit 4167 that performs authentication processing, and a payout encrypted communication unit 4165 that encrypts the information transmitted to the main control MPU4100a and decodes the information transmitted from the main control MPU4100a, and further pays out. The authentication unit 4167 includes a game board maker identification information storage unit 4101 that stores the game board maker identification information.

When the game board is fitted into the main body frame and the power is turned on to the game machine, the game board maker identification information is transmitted from the game board maker identification information storage unit 4101 by bidirectional communication between the main control board 4100 and the payout control board 4110. It is encrypted by the main encrypted communication unit 4163 and then transmitted to the payout encrypted communication unit 4168, and the frame maker identification information is encrypted by the payout encrypted communication unit 4168 from the frame maker identification information storage unit 4112 and then the main encrypted communication unit 4163. Will be sent to.

Next, the main control MPU4100a decodes the frame maker identification information transmitted from the payout cryptographic communication unit 4168 from the payout control MPU4111a using the main cryptographic communication unit 4163, and then decodes the frame maker identification information in the main authentication unit 4162. Stored in the storage unit 4112, the payout control MPU4111a stores the game board maker identification information in the payout authentication unit 4167 after decrypting the game board maker identification information transmitted from the main control MPU 4100a using the payout cryptographic communication unit 4168. It is stored in the unit 4101.

After that, the main control MPU4100a performs an authentication process by the main authentication unit 4162 based on the frame maker identification information stored in the frame maker identification information storage unit 4112, and determines whether the frame maker identification information is appropriate. ..
Then, the payout control MPU4111a performs authentication processing by the payout authentication unit 4167 based on the game board maker identification information stored in the game board maker identification information storage unit 4101, and whether the game board maker identification information is appropriate. To judge.

Based on the results of authentication by the main authentication unit 4162 and the payout authentication unit 4167, if it is determined that the game board and the main body frame are the proper combination at the time of application, the game can be started. If it is determined that it is not appropriate, it will be impossible to start the game.

With these configurations, the authentication process is performed between the main control MPU 4100a and the payout control MPU 4111a, and if the authentication process is not performed properly, the game is not performed, so that the game hall can be used. When installing, it is possible to effectively prevent the game board from being accidentally fitted into a frame body different from that at the time of application, and the game being started with a combination different from the set of game machines applied for. ..

Further, since the result of the authentication process performed between the main control MPU4100a and the payout control MPU4111a is transmitted to the hall computer installed in the game hall via the external terminal version 784. When it is determined that the combination of the game board maker identification information and the frame maker identification information is abnormal, an error signal is output from the external terminal board 784 to the hall computer, so that the combination of the game board, the main body frame, and the door frame is abnormal. Can be accurately grasped.

Next, how information has been conventionally output and managed from the external terminal board 784 to the hall computer will be described with reference to FIG. 241.
As the game progresses, various signals are transmitted from the payout control board 4110 to the external terminal board 784, and the signals are transmitted to the hall computer installed in the game hall to all the signals installed in the game hall. It is a mechanism to manage game machines. Specifically, in addition to the door frame opening signal and the main body frame opening signal, a prize ball number information output signal indicating the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 744, and a payout control board 4110 from the main control board 4100. Through, in addition to the jackpot information output signal such as the 15-round jackpot information output signal and the 2-round jackpot information output signal, the information output signal during probability fluctuation, the special symbol display information output signal, the normal symbol display information output signal, and the time saving medium The configuration is such that an information output signal, a game information signal such as a start opening winning information output signal, and the like are output to the external terminal board 784.

As described above, as the information output from the payout control board 4110, for example, a signal such as 15 round jackpot information is transmitted to the external terminal board 784 and then output from the external terminal board 784 to the hall computer. However, the time when the signal is transmitted is output after the game processing is started.
In the authentication process of this embodiment, the time for outputting the result of the above-mentioned authentication process from the external terminal board 784 to the hall computer is configured to be performed when the power is turned on after the game board is fitted into the main body frame. .. Therefore, the output line output to the external terminal board 784 during the game can be diverted as the output line for outputting the result of the authentication process.

Conventionally, the payout control board and the external terminal board are directly connected, and the gaming machine is manufactured after a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed after the gaming board is fitted into the main body frame and the power is turned on. Various information such as a code for identifying the trader, a code for identifying the model name of the gaming machine, and MPU-specific information is output to the external terminal board, and then output from the external terminal board to the hall computer, and the payout control is performed. The configuration was such that the various information transmitted from the board was directly output to the external terminal board.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, in addition to the code for identifying the manufacturer of the gaming machine, the code for identifying the model name of the gaming machine, and the MPU-specific information, the authentication information related to the above-mentioned authentication is used as the authentication information output signal described later. It is configured to be output to the hall computer through the external terminal plate 784.

In this embodiment, a switching circuit switch is used between the payout control board 4110 and the external terminal board 784 to select either a 15-round jackpot information output signal or an authentication information output signal for transmitting MPU-specific information and authentication results. A built-in pulse width changing circuit C1 is provided. This pulse width conversion circuit C1 has a switching circuit switch of two circuits, a normally open contact and a normally closed contact, inside, and each time the pulse width changing circuit C1 receives a switching control signal S1 transmitted from the payout control board 4110. The normally open contact and the normally closed contact are switched and controlled, and the operation is performed so as to select either the 15-round jackpot information output signal or the authentication information output signal.

The 15-round jackpot information output signal transmitted from the payout control board 4110 is output through LINE1. During the game, switching control from the payout control board 4110 so that the pulse width changing circuit C1 is connected to a connection point which is a contact point with LINE2, which will be described later, and then output to the external terminal board 784 through LINE3. It is controlled by the signal S1.
Further, the authentication information output signal from the payout control board 4110 is output through LINE2. When the power is turned on to the gaming machine and the authentication processing in the above-mentioned main control side power on processing and payout control side power on time processing is started, each contact is switched by the switching control signal S1 from the payout control board 4110, and the normal operation is performed. The closed contact is in the open state, and the normally open contact is in the closed state. Then, the pulse width of the authentication information output signal including the MPU unique information and the authentication result is changed by the memory PMC provided in the pulse width deflection circuit C1 through LINE2 (described later). After that, after being connected to the connection point which is the contact point of LINE1 and LINE2, it is output from LINE3 to the external terminal board 784, and then output to the hall computer.

Before being output to the external terminal plate 784, the MPU specific information and the authentication signal are converted into a pulse having a width of, for example, 1 bit 125 ms (millisecond) by the memory PMC provided in the pulse width conversion circuit C1 (equivalent to 8 bps). ), The output is expanded to the pulse width that can be reliably received by the hall computer. When transmitting these information by serial transmission, for example, in a form in which one frame is composed of a total of 10 bits of 8 data bits and 1 stop bit following 1 start bit, MPU specific information and a game board are used. Assuming that the manufacturer identification information and the frame manufacturer identification information are 4 bytes and the authentication result is 1 byte, a signal for 50 bits is added to the data of 5 bytes and 1 bit each of the start bit and the stop bit. Is sent. Assuming that the pulse width of one bit is 125 ms, it takes 125 ms × 50 bits = 6.25 s for all the bits to be transmitted.

With the configuration described above, the signal for outputting the authentication information output signal and the signal for outputting the jackpot information can be output by switching between the normally open contact and the normally closed contact, so that the external terminal board can be output. Output can be performed without adding a dedicated terminal for 784.

In this embodiment, the terminal that transmits the 15-round jackpot information output signal during the game is diverted as the terminal that outputs the authentication information output signal only when the power is turned on, but this is only one embodiment. Is. During the power-on processing, the output terminals other than the 15-round jackpot information output signal do not output signals, so various terminals can be selected and diverted.

1 Pachinko machine 2 Outer frame 3 Main body frame 3a Main body frame 4 Game board 5 Door frame 5a Door frame 784 External terminal board 1100 Game area 1150 Game panel 1158 Opening 1900 Liquid crystal display device (effect display means)
1910 Movable body liquid crystal display device 1920 1st special symbol hold number display area 1921 2nd special symbol hold number display area 1922 Hold image 1922a 1st hold image 1922b 2nd hold image 1922c Main liquid crystal side hold image 1922d Movable body liquid crystal side Hold image 1923 Auxiliary hold number display 1924 Auxiliary hold number display 1925 Hold expectation suggestion image 1930 Hold display hidden area 1931 Hold display hidden prohibited area 1940 First special symbol book hold number display area 1941 Second special symbol book hold number display area 2000 Table unit 2101 1st starting port (starting port)
2102 Second starting port (starting port)
2500 Center accessory 2510 Stage 2513 Chance entrance (entrance)
2514 Chance exit (exhaust port)
2600 Stage back decoration member 2602 Back decoration member (decorative member)
2602a Aisle 2602b Translucent 2603 Hold display board (hold number indicator)
2603a LED (light emitting part)
3000 Back unit 3200 Back left movable production unit 3210 Back left movable decorative body (movable body)
3300 Back-up middle movable production unit 3330 Back-up middle movable decorative body (movable body)
3400 Back upper side movable production unit 3410 Back upper side movable decorative body (movable body)
3500 Under-back movable production unit 3510 Under-back movable decorative body (movable body)
3700 1st special symbol hold number auxiliary display 3710 2nd special symbol hold number auxiliary display 3720 This hold display concealment unit 4010 Peripheral control board 4100 Main control board 4100a Main control MPU4100a
4101 Game board manufacturer identification information storage unit 4110 Payout control board 4111 Payout control unit 4111a Payout control MPU4111a
4112 Frame maker identification information storage unit 4162 Main authentication unit 4163 Main cryptographic communication unit 4167 Payout authentication unit 4168 Payout cryptographic communication unit 4507 First hit determination random number extraction means (lottery means)
4508 First hit design random number extraction means (lottery means)
4509 Random number extraction means for the first variable time (lottery means)
4525 Random number extraction means for second hit determination (lottery means)
4526 Random number extraction means for second hit symbol (lottery means)
4527 Random number extraction means for the second variable time (lottery means)
4542 First advantageous game state control means (advantageous game state generation means)
4543 Second advantageous game state control means (advantageous game state generation means)
4544 Third advantageous game state control means (advantageous game state generation means)
4545 Fourth advantageous game state control means (advantageous game state generation means)
4546 Fifth advantageous game state control means (advantageous game state generation means)
4565 First effect display control means (lottery result suggestion means)
4571 Second effect display control means (lottery result suggestion means)

Claims (1)

The game area where the game medium is driven by the operation of the player,
A game panel in which the game area is provided on the front side, and
An effect display means having a display panel arranged behind the game panel and capable of displaying a predetermined display from a predetermined opening formed in the game panel.
A start port that is placed at a predetermined position in the game area and is capable of accepting a game medium, and a start port.
A lottery means for drawing a win according to the acceptance of the game medium to the starting port, and
A holding means for holding the lottery by the lottery means until a predetermined time, and
An out-of-game area hold display means that is provided outside the game area and displays a hold display that causes the player to recognize the lottery held by the hold means.
An effect control means for controlling the effect related to the lottery, and
In a gaming machine provided with a movable body arranged between the gaming panel and the effect display means and capable of operating so as to cover at least a part of the effect display means.
The effect control means is
A first hold display means that causes the player to recognize the lottery held by the hold means and displays a first hold display that can suggest the degree of expectation for the result of the lottery.
In addition to the first hold display, the second hold display means for displaying the second hold display for the player to recognize the lottery held by the hold means is provided.
Both the first hold display means and the second hold display means are provided in the game area.
The first hold display may be difficult to see due to the movement of the movable body, but the second hold display may not be difficult to see due to the movement of the movable body.
The second hold display is displayed in a size different from that of the first hold display in a place where the first hold display is not displayed, and the first hold display is displayed by the operation of the movable body. Even if it is difficult to see, the number of lottery held in the holding means can be notified to the player by the second holding display.
Further, the movable body can be moved from the standby position to the effect position.
The first hold display means is provided in the display area of a predetermined display device so as to overlap the movable body at the effect position in the game area, while the first hold display means is provided in the display area of the predetermined display device.
The second hold display means is provided at a predetermined position in front of the movable body, outside the display area of the display device in which the first hold display is displayed, in the game area.
The first hold display can be made difficult to see by the movable body when the movable body is in the standby position, and can be made difficult to be visually recognized by the movable body when the movable body is in the effect position. ,
The second hold display is not made difficult to see by the movable body when the movable body is in either the standby position or the effect position.
The standby position is a position below the first hold display means.
The movable body is made to be able to overlap with the first hold display by moving up from the standby position to the effect position, and a part of the movable body that hides the first hold display is in the standby position. From a certain time, a part of the movable body became visible,
When the movable body is moved to the effect position when the plurality of the first hold displays are displayed, the movable body is related to the specific first hold display among the plurality of the first hold displays. Can be displayed in different display modes before moving to the effect position and after the movable body moves from the effect position to the standby position, but a specific first hold among the plurality of first hold displays. The first hold display other than the display is characterized in that the movable body is displayed in the same display mode before moving to the effect position and after the movable body moves from the effect position to the standby position. A game machine to play.

Images